Manual de Mantenimiento de Beechcraft - Bonanza 609

ATP
INDEX
COPYRIGHT
2002
COPYRIGHT IS NOT CLAIMED AS TO ANY PART OF AN ORIGINAL WORK

PREPARED BY A UNITED STATES GOVERNMENT OFFICER OR EMPLOYEE AS
PART OF THAT PERSONS OFFICIAL DUTIES OR BY ANY OTHER THIRD PARTY
OFFICER OR EMPLOYEE AS PART OF THAT PERSONS DUTIES.
"ATP" is a registered trademark of Aircraft Technical Publishers. All original
authorship of ATP is protected under U.S. and foreign copyrights and is subject
to written license agreements between ATP and its Subscribers.
ALL RIGHTS RESERVED. NO PART OF THIS PUBLICATION MAY BE
REPRODUCED, STORED IN A RETRIEVAL SYSTEM, OR TRANSMITTED IN ANY
FORM BY ANY MEANS, ELECTRONIC, MECHANICAL, PHOTOCOPYING,
RECORDING OR OTHERWISE, WITHOUT PRIOR WRITTEN PERMISSION OF THE
PUBLISHER.
Aircraft Technical Publishers
Customer Service
101 South Hill Drive
6AM-5PM PST M-F
Brisbane, CA 94005
(800)227-4610
ATP Grid Index to Manufacturers Publications:
Raytheon Aircraft Co.

Bonanza V35B; F33A;
F33C; A36; A36TC; B36TC
Maintenance Manual
Section
Topic
General Information
Title Page
Manufacturers Introduction
Record of Revisions
Record of
Temporary Revisions
Letter of Transmittal (Highlights
of Changes)
Aircraft General
05.00.00
Time Limits/Maintenance Checks
05.00.00
List of Effective
05.10.00
05.10.00
05.20.00
Pages
Time Limits
Overhaul and
Replacement
Scheduled Maintenance Checks
06.00.00
Dimensions and Areas
06.00.00
List of Effective
06.00.00
07.00.00
07.00.00
07,00.00
Pages
General
Lifting and Shoring

List of Effective Pages
General
08.00.00
Leveling and Weighing
08.00.00
List of Effective
08.00.00
Pages
General
09.00.00
Towing and Taxiing
09.00.00
List of Effective
08/19/2002
Schedule
Pages
Copyright

BC
0220
MM
Page
1 of
Section
09.00.00
10.00.00
10.00.00
10.00.00
Topic
General
Parking, Mooring, Storage, and Return

General
11.00,00
Placards and Markings
11.00.00
11.00.00
General
11.20.00
Exterior Placards and
12.00.00
Servicing
12.00.00
12.00.00
General
12.10.00
Replenishing
12.20.00
Scheduled Service
Airframe
Markings
Systems
Airframe
20.00.00
Standard Practices
20.00.00
20.00.00
to Service
General
20.01.00
Torque Wrenches
20.02.00
Electrostatic Discharge Sensitivity
20.03.00
Electrical Bonding
20.04.00
Control Cables and Pulleys
20.05.00
Bearings
20.06.00
Tube and Hose Assemblies and Fittings
20.07.00
Locking
20.08.00
Airplane
20.09.00
Corrosion
Devices
Finish Care
Conditioning
21.00.00
Air
21.00.00
21.40.00
21.50.00
Heating and Ventilating System

Cooling
23.00.00
Communications
23.00.00
23.10.00
23.10.00
08/19/2002
Speech
Communication
Ground Communication System
Copyright

BC
0220
MM
Page
2 of
Section
23.60.00
Topic
Static Discharging
24.00.00
Electrical Power
24.00.00
24.30.00
DC Generation
Standby Generator
24.31.00
24.40.00
External Power
24.50.00
AC Electrical Load Distribution
25.00.00
Equipment/Furnishings
25.00.00
25.00.00
General
25.60.00
Emergency
27.00.00
Flight Controls
Record of Temporary Revisions
27.00.00
27.00.00
27.00.00
General
27.10.00
Aileron and Tab
CE-748,CE-772 and After;CJ149 and After;D-10097,D-10120
27.10.00
and After;E-I111,E-1241 Thru E-21111 Except E-1946 and
E-2104;EA-1 Thru EA-388 Except EA-320

After, EA-320, EA389
E-1946, E-2104, E-2111
27.11.00
27.20.00
Rudder and Tab
27.20.00
F33A, F33C, A36, A36TC AMD B36TC
27.21.00
V35B
27.30.00
Elevator and Tab
Stall Warning/Safe Flight System
27.31.00
27.50.00
Flaps
27.70.00
Gust Lock and
Dampener
28.00,00
Fuel
28.00.00
28.00.00
General
28.10.00
Storage
28.20.00
Distribution
28.40.00
Indicating
30.00.00
Ice and Rain Protection
30.00.00
30.00.00
08/19/2002
After
General
Copyright

BC
0220
MM
Page
3 of
Section
Topic
Propellers/Rotors
30.60.00
32.00.00
Landing Gear
32.00.00
List of Effective
Pages
32.00.00
General
32.10.00
Main Gear and Doors
32.20.00
Nose Gear and Doors
32.30.00
Extension and Retraction
32.40.00
Wheels and Brakes
32.50.00
Steering
32.60.00
Position and Warning
33.00.00
Lights
33.00.00
List of Effective
Pages
33.20.00
Interior
33.40.00
Exterior
34.00.00
Navigation
34.00.00
34.10.00
Flight Environmental
34.40.00
Independent
Position Determining
35.00.00
Oxygen
35.00.00
List of Effective
35.00.00
General
36.00.00
Pneumatic
36.00.00
List of Effective
36.00.00
Data
Pages
Pages
General
39.00.00
Electric Panels Parts and Instruments
39.00.00
List of Effective
Pages
39.00.00
General
39.10.00
Instrument and Control Panels
39.20.00
Electrical and Electronic Equipment Racks
Structures
51.00.00
Standard Practices
51.00.00
List of Effective
51.00.00
08/19/2002
Structures
Pages
General
Copyright

BC
0220
MM
Page
4 of
Section
Topic
52.00.00
Doors
52.00.00
52.00.00
General
52.10.00
Passenger/Crew
Cargo
52.30.00
53.00.00
Fuselage
53.00.00
Plates/Skin
53.30.00
55.00.00
Stabilizers
55.00.00
55.00.00
General
55.10.00
Horizontal Stabilizer
55.20.00
Elevator and Rudder
55.30.00
Vertical Stabilizer
55.40.00
Rudder
56.00.00
Windows
56.00.00
List of Effective
General
56.10.00
Flight Compartment
Passenger Compartment
57.00.00
Wings
57.00.00
57.00.00
General
57.30.00
Plates/Skins
57.40.00
Attach Fittings
57.50.00
Flight Surfaces
Canard
Pages
56.00.00
56.20.00
or
Propeller/Rotor
61.00.00
Propellers/Propulsors
61.00.00
61.10.00
Propeller Assembly
61.20.00
Controlling
Power Plant
08/19/2002
Copyright

BC
0220
MM
Page
5 of
Section
Topic
71.00.00
Power Plant
71.00.00
71.00.00
General
71.10.00
Cowling
to Continental Aircraft
72.00.00
Engine (Refer
73.00.00
73.30.00
Engine Fuel and Control

Fuel Flow Indicating
74.00.00
Ignition
74.00.00
73.00.00
74.00.00
General
74.20.00
Distribution
77.00.00
Engine Indicating
77.00.00
77.00.00
General
79.00.00
Oil
99.00.00
99.00.00
General
80.00.00
Starting
80.00.00
80.10.00
Cranking
81.00.00
Turbines
81.00.00
81.00.00
Engine Manuals)
General
91.00.00
Charts
91.00.00
91.00.00
Chart 1 Consumable Materials
91.00.00
Charts 2, 4 and 5
91.00.00
Installation of Flared Fittings
91.00.00
Chart 3 Thread Lubricants
End of Index
08/19/2002
Copyright
Aircraft Technical
BC
0220
MM
Publishers
Page
6 of
NIFGI
INTRO
Ral~heon Aircraft
BEECH BONANZA SERIES
V35B
F33A
F33C
A36
A36TC
B36TC
(D-10097, D-10120 and After)

(CE-748, CE-772 and After)
(CJ-149 and After)
(E-llll, E-1241 and After)
(EA-I thru EA-272 Except EA-242)
(EA-242, EA-273 and After)
Nlaintenance Manual
NOTE: This manual
was
formerly
called the Beechcraft Bonanza Series
Maintenance Manual.
Copyright
P/N: 36-590001-9
Issued:
May
9, 1980
Raytheon
Aircraft
Company 2002
P/N: 36-590001-9A23
Revised: june 28, 2002
Published
By
RAVTH EO N AIRCRAFT COM PANY
P.O. Box 85
Wichita, Kansas 67201

U.S.A
NOTE
Where Beech Aircraft
Corporation is referred to in this publication,

Raytheon Aircraft Company.
it will be taken to read
EXPORT STATEMENT
Exported under the authority of license exception: TSU.

7hese commodities, technology or software were exported from the United
States in accordance with Export Administration Regulations.
Diversion contrary to U.S. law
prohibited.
Raytheon
Ai
rcraatRaytheon
Company
Member of GAMA
General Aviation
CAIIA
Manufacturers Association
RECORD OF REVISIONS
MFG REV
DESCRIPTION
NO
ISSUEDATE
ATPREVDATE
INSERTEDBY
A22
See
Highlights
11/10/00
3/5/01
ATP/RCL
A23
See
Highlights
6/28/02
9/4/02
ATPNDR
Raytheon Aircraft
BEECH BONANZA SERIES MAINTENANCE MANUAL
LIST OF EFFECTIVE REVISIONS
Always destroy superseded pages when you
insert revised pages.
Title Page
June 28, 2002
"A"
Page
A23
"B"
Page
A23
PART NUMBER
DATE
CHAPTERS AFFECTED
36-590001-9A
May 9, 1980
Original
36-590001 -9A 1
October 10, 1980
Introduction, 5, 6, 11,24, 25,

30,34,36,73
36-590001-9A2
January 28,
36-590001 -9A3
March 12, 1981
36-590001-9A4
January 20,
1981
1982
Introduction, 12, 21, 25, 33,

35, 61,71,73, 77, 81
5, 11,32, 57
Introduction, 6, 12, 21, 23, 24,

25, 27, 28, 34, 39, 57, 61,81,
91
36-590001 -9A5
February 18,
36-590001-9A6
October 27, 1983
1983
Introduction, 5, 6, 27
Introduction, 5, 6, 12, 21, 24,
27,28,30,32,33,39,61,71,
72, 79, 91
36-590001-9A7
December 21, 1983
71
36-590001 -9A8
January 18, 1984
5, 12, 20, 28, 57, 91
36-590001-9A9
September 27, 1984
Introduction, 5, 12, 21,23, 25,

27, 33, 35, 36, 71, 74, 91
1985
36-590001-9A10
May 31,
36-590001-9A11
August 29,
36-590001-9A12
August 28, 1987
1985
Introduction, 27
12, 28
Introduction, 5, 11, 12, 25, 27,

28, 32, 36, 51, 55, 71,74
NOTE: A List of Effective pages will be in the front of each chapter.

a part number which appears on the title page with the date of the issue. Subsequent revisions are identified by the addition of a
part number Al after a part number denotes the first revision to the basic publication, A2 the second, etc Occasionally, it is necessary to
reissue and reprint a publication for the purpose of obsoleting a previous issue and outstanding revisions thereto As these replacement reisstles are
the code will also change to the next successive letter of the alphabet at each issues For example, B for the first reissue, C for the second, etc
publications
are
assigned
code after the
ordering a handbook, give the basic number, and the reissue code when applicable, if a complete up-to-date publication
be required, give the basic number and revision code for the particular set of revision pages you desire
Is
desired Should only revision
A23
Raytheon Aircraft
LIST OF EFFECTIVE PAGES
Always destroy superseded pages when
A23
(Continued)
you insert revised pages.
PART NUMBER
DATE
CHAPTERS AFFECTED
36-590001-9A13
March 30, 1990
Introduction, 7, 32
36-590001-9A14
June 20, 1991
Introduction, 5, 12, 20, 27, 55,

71, 91
36-590001-9A15
December 20, 1991
Introduction, 52
36-590001 -9A 16
October 16, 1992
5, 9, 11,12, 21,25, 27, 28,

51, 55, 56, 91
36-590001 -9A 17
November 16, 1994
Introduction, 32, 74
36-590001 -9A 18
August 18,
36-590001-9A19
March 29, 1996
5, 27
36-590001 -9A20
February 26,
27
36-590001 -9A21
December 23, 1999
5, 32, 52
36-590001 -9A22
November 10, 2000
20, 25, 57
36-590001-9A23
June 28, 2002
1995
1999
Introduction, 12, 21, 23, 27,

32, 91
RECORD OF TEMPORARY REVISIONS
ia~b
TEMP
REV NO
DESCRIPTION
ATP REV
INSERT
DATE
REI
REMOVE
DATE
BY
REMOVED
INCOR
BY
ISSUE DATE
27-1
27-50-00:4
12/1 1/92
27-2
27-50-00:4
1 1
/1 5/93
12/1 5/97
ATP/M B
2/1 5/97
27-2
2/1 5/97
ATP/M B
8/09/99
A20
ATP/M B
/JRS
Raytheon
Aircraft
RECORD OF TEIIlIFORARY REVISIONS

Affected
emporary
Revision
No.
Removed
Inserted
By
Chapter
Page(s)
Date
By
Revision
No.
Date
inserting or removing a temporary revision, the applicable revision number and the initials
of the person(s) inserting and/or removing these revisions should be recorded on these pages.
When
NOTE: Insert the Record of
Temporary
Revisions after the
Log
of
Temporary Revisions page(s).
Pagel
Rayeheon
Aircraft
SEECH BONANZA SERIES MAINTENANCE MANUAL
No.
Page
Removed
Inserted
Affected
emporary
Revision
By
Chapter
Page(s)
By
Date
Revision
No.
Date
Raytheon
Aircraft
LOG OF TEMPORARY REVISIONS

Revision
No.
Date
27-1
Dec 11/92
27-2
Nov 15/93
Subject
drive cable connection
Flap
Flap drive cable connection
Incorporated
TR 27-2
A20
Page 1
Feb 26/99
NOTE: Insert this
Log
of Temporary Revisions after the Record of Revisions page.
Ral~heMI Aircraft
P/N 36-590001-9, REVISION A23, JUNE 28, 2002

HIGHLIGHTS
The
chapters
which have been revised
are
listed below with the
Highlights
of each
change.
Remove the affected
pages and insert the A23 revision in accordance with the attached Instruction Page. Enter the revision number
and the date inserted on the Record of Revisions page of this manual. The Highlights Page may be retained with
the manual for future reference.
Description
Chapter/Section
5-10-00
Added data
5-20-00
data from 1000 hours to
Changed
references for Hartzell
Pressure
Pump
to
Magneto
Flap Motor
Added data
Changed
Change
Nose Gear Retract Rod Rod-ends from
on
Changed shimmy damper
Added
of
supplier
and
on
Chapter
5-20-00.
condition.
propellers, Woodward Propeller Governor
and Air
data.
Standby
Air Pressure
Brush check removed
System
replacing
motor
Check Valve data.

on
condition
covers
the brushes.
the FACTS program.
on
references from FAR to 14 CFR.
Added data for
Standby Alternator/Generator,
Instrument Air
System
and
Standby
Instrument Air.
Revised
Added
Landing Gear Gearbox inspection.
inspection
of Fuel Strainer and Control Column. Revised Fuel Cell,
Caps
and
Vents data.
Added
Inspection
Revised Nose
of
Landing
Revised Cable and
Added
Flapper
inspection
Valve data.
Gear Retract Rod data.
Pulleys
data.
of Rudder Forward
Soar and other chages.
Page
A23
Jun 28/02
Raytheon Aircraft
REVISION 36-590001-9A23
to the
P/N 36-590001-9
Title
MAV 9,
1980)
INSERT
REMOVE
PAGE
(ISSUED:
CHAPTER
PAGE
Title
Page
CHAPTER
DATED
Jun 28/02
Page
Logo Page
Logo Page
"A"
Page
"A"
Page
A23
"B"
Page
"B"
Page
A23
All
5EFF
5-EFF
Jun 28/02
All
5-TOC
1 and 2
5-TOC
Jun 28/02
All
5-10-00
1 thru 6
5-10-00
Jun 28/02
All
5-20-00
1 thru 20
5-20-00
Jun 28/02
NOTE
These instruction pages may be discarded after the above revision has
been properly incorporated into the Maintenance Manual.
Page
1 of 1
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
INTRODUCTION
LIST OF PAGE EFFECTIVIP/
CHA PTER-SECTION-SUBJECT
Introductian-Effectivity
Introduction
PAGE
DATE
Aug 18/95
Sep 27/84
Sep 27/84
Jan 20/82
Jan 20/82
May 9/80
Oct7/83
Sep 27/84
Sep 27/84
Aug 18/95
Aug 18/95
Aug 18/95
Aug 18/95
Aug 18/95
Aug 18/95
Aug 18/95
Aug 18/95
Aug 18/95
Aug 18/95
Aug 18/95
Aug 18/95
Aug 18/95
Aug 18/95
Aug 18/95
Aug 18/95
Aug 18/95
Aug 18/95
Aug 18/95
Aug 18/95
Aug 18/95
Aug 18/95
Aug 18/95
Aug 18/95
Aug 18/95
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
Introduction-Effectivity
A18
Page 1
Aug 18/95
BEECHCRAFT
BONAN;LA SERIES
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
WARNING
INTRODUCTION
only genuine BEECHCRAFT or

BEECHCRAFT approved parts obtained from
BEECHCRAFT approved sources, in
Use
NOTE
Service Publication reissues
automatically provided
manual. For information

reissues
or
revisions
or
revisions
connection with the maintenance and
are not
to the holders of this

on
how
applicable
to
to this
Beech
Genuine BEECHCPAFT parts

and inspected under rigorous
are produced
procedures to
insure airworthiness and suitability for use in
Beech airplane applications. Parts purchased
Service Bulletin No. 2001.
from
The BEECHCRAFT Bonanza Series Maintenance Manual is
in accordance with GAMA (General
Manufacturers Association) Specification No. 2
also meets the intent of the requirements of
Specification 100 (Air Transport Association of
prepared
Aviation
format. It
the ATA
America)
with respect to the arrangement and content of the

SystemlChapters within the designated chapternumbering
system.
The Maintenance Manual is
of
obtain
manual,
refer to the latest revision of BEECHCRAFT
repair
airplanes.
supplemented by
the
sources
Salvaged airplane parts,
even
reworked
parts
obtained from non-BEECHCRAFT approved

or parts, components, or structural
assemblies, the service history of which is
unknown or cannot be authenticated, may have
following publications: (1)
The BEECHCRAFT Bonanza 36

Series Parts Catalog, P/N 36-590001-1 (2) BEECHCRAFT
Bonanza 35 Series Parts Catalog, P/N 35-590102-5 (3)
BEECHCRAFT Bonanza 33 Series Parts Catalog, P/N 33-
sources,
(4) BEECHCRAFT Bonanza Wiring Diagram

Manual, P/N 35-590102-9 (5) BEECHCRAFT Bonanza 33,
35, 36 Series Continuing Care Inspection Guide PIN 9836711 and (6) BEECHCRAFT Approved Model 33, 35 and
36 Inspection Guide P/N 98-32227.
temperatures
590010-7
other than BEECHCAAFT,
though outwardly identical in appearance, may

not have had the required tests and inspections
perfor~ed, may be different in fabrication
techniques and materials, and may be
dangerous when installed in an airplane.
been
subjected
or
unacceptable
stresses
have other hidden
damage,
to
or
not
through routine visual or usual

nondestructive testing techniques. This may
render the part, component or structural
discernible
assembly, even though originally manufactured

by BEECHCAAFT, unsuitable and unsafe for
~airplane use.
NOTICE
BEEC)~1CRAFT expressly
Corporation expressly reserves

supersede, cancel and/or declare
Seech Aircraft
the
right
to
obsolete any part, part numbers, kits or

publication that may be referenced in this
manual without
prior
disclaims
any
respon!jibility for maifunctions, failures, damage

or injury caused by use of non-BEECHCRAFT
approved parts.
notice.
ASSIGNMENT OF SUBJECT MA TERIAL

It
shall
be
owner/operator
the
responsibility
of
the
to ensure that the latest revision
publications referenced in this manual

utilized during operation, servicing,
of
maintenance of the
are
and
publication is organized at four levels:

Group, System/Chapter, Sub-System/Section, and
Unit/Subject.
airplane.
CORRESPONDENCE
question should arise concerning the care of your

airplane, it is important to include the airplane serial number
in any correspondence. The serial number appears on the
model designation placard (see Chapter 11 for placard
If
The content of this
Identified by different colored divider tabs.

Group
are primary divisions of the manual that enable
separation of content. Typical of this division
separation between Airframe Systems and the Power
These
broad
is the
Plant.
location).
System/Chapter
The various groups
are
broken down into
major systems such as Environmental Systems, Electrical

Power, Landing Gear, etc. The systems are arranged more
or less alphabetically rather than by precedence or
INt~ODUCTION
A9
Page 1
Sep 27/84
BEECHCRAFT
BONANZA SEAIES
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
importance. They
the first element of
assigned
number, which becomes
standardized
numbering system. Thus,
are
the element "28" of the number 28-00-00 refers to the
chapter "Fuel". Everything concerning the fuel system

be covered in this
CHAPTER
SECTION
SUBJECT
SUBJECT
FUEL
28
chapter.
Indicating
28-40
broken down into sub-systems. These sub-systems are

identified by the second element of a standard numbering
Fuel
28-40-00
system. The number "40" of the number 28-40-00 is for the

indicating portion of the fuel system.
The material is
Sub-System/Section
The
major systems of
The individual units within
Unit/Subject
be identified
by
system, such
an
airplane
are
sub-system may
numbering
is assigned by the
the third element of the standard
as
28-40-01. This number
manufacturer and may,
or
PAGE
will
Uuantity Indicators
arranged
within the
chapter
in
ascending
numerical sequence. The Chapter-Section Subject number

and page number are found at the lower outside corner of
each page.
may not, be used and will vary in
usage.
EFFECTI1~N
LOG OF EFFECTIVE REVISIONS
APPLICATION
The
to the GAMA
or ATA format will
Any publication conforming

use the same basic numbering system. Thus, whether
manual be
the
Log of Effective
Revisions
the manual lists the revisions
following the title page of

currently effective for the
manual.
BEECHCRAFT Bonanza Series Maintenance

a BEECHCRAFT Bonanza Wiring Diagram
Manual, or
Manual, the person wishing information concerning the
indicating portion of
the fuel
system, would refer
to the
Tab "28, Fuel". The table of contents in the

front of this chapter will provide a list of sub-systems
covered in this chapter.
AEROFICNE
System/Chapter
(GAMA) has
specification for microfiche and registered the
Aerofiche for use by all GAMA Members. Consult the
The General Aircraft Manufactures Association
developed
For
example:
name
28-00
General
issue of the Publications Price List for an

enumeration of the maintenance information available in
28-10
Storage
Aerofiche form for order from Seech Aircraft Corporation.
current
(Tanks, cells, necks,

caps, instruments, etc.)
28-20
Distribution
(Fuel lines, pumps, valves,

controls, etc.)
28-30
28-40
Dump
(If in-flight dumping system is
installed, it would appear here.)
Indicating
(Quantity, temperature, pressure,
etc., does not include engine
fuel flow
or
pressure.)
ALPHABETICAL INDEX
An
alphabetical index,
page 9 of this
assistance in
alphabetical
which may be found beginning on

is also provided as an
Introduction,
locating the desired

provides the chapter
index
information.
and
The
sub-chapter
in
which any given information may be found. Reference to

the Table of Contents in the front of the indicated chapter
will
provide
the exact page
on
which the information
can
be found.
LIST Of EFFECTIVE PAGES

this example further, by turning to the Table of
Contents for Chapter 28, the following information might be
Carrying
found within the list:
Pages following each Chapter GividerTab, lists the issue date of each page that is effective for
that chapter.
The list of Effective
INTRODUCTION
Page2
Sep 27/84
ASi
BEECHCRAFT
BONANZA SERIES
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
SVSTEM/CHAPTER INDEX GUIDE
following System/Chapter, Sub-System/Section Index Guide is prepared in

Specification No. 100 and GAMA Specification No. 2 for use
with Maintenance Manuals, Parts Catalogs and Wiring Diagram Manuals. The following
chapters are not applicable to this Maintenance Manual: 4, 22, 26, 29, 31, 37, 38, 49, 60,
The
accordance with both ATA
70, 75, 76, 77, 78, 83, and 95.
SYSTEMI
SUB-SYSTEMI
CHAPTER
SECTION
TITLE
INTRODUCTION
5
TIME LIMITS/MAINTENANCE CHECKS

10
Time Limits
20
DIMENSIONS AND AREAS
LIFTING AND SHORING

General
00
8
LEVELING AND WEIGHING

00
j
9
TOWING AND TAXIING

00
10
12
00
General
20
Markings
SERVICING
General
10
Replenishing
20
Scheduled Servicing
STANDARD PRACTICES
20
21
General
REQUIRED PLACARDS
00
20
General
PARKING AND MOORING

00
11
General
AIRFRAME
General
ENVIRONMENTAL SYSTEMS
40
Heating
60
Cooling
INTRODUCTION
Page
A4
Jan 20182
BEECHCRAFT
BONANZA SERIES
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
23
COMMUNICATIONS
60
24
25
30
DC Generation
40
External Power
50
Electrical Load Distribution
EQUIPMENT/FURNISHINGS
00
General
10
Flight Compartment
Passenger Compartment
Emergency
60
FLIGHT CONTROLS
00
General
10
Aileron and Tab
20
Rudder and Tab
21
Ruddervator and Tab
30
Elevator and Tab
31
Warning/Safe Flight System

Flaps
Gust Lock and Damper
50
70
28
30
32
33
Discharging
ELECTRICAL POWER
20
27
Static
Stall
FUEL
00
General
10
Storage
20
Distribution
40
Indicating
ICE AND RAIN PROTECTION
00
General
60
Propellers
LANDING GEAR
00
General
10
Main Gear and Doors
20
Nose Gear and Doors
30
40
Wheels and Brakes
50
Steering
60
Position and
Warning
LIGHTS
20
Interior
40
Exterior
INTRODUCTION
Page4
Jan 20/82
A4
BEECHCRAFT
BONANZA SERIES
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
34
NAVIGATION AND PITOT STATIC

10
35
OXVGEN
00
36
General
10
instrument 3 Control Panels

Electrical 5 Electronic Equipment Racks
STRUCTURES
53
00
General
10
Passenger/Crew
Cargo Doors
56
10
Horizontal Stabilizers
20
30
Elevator and Ruddervator

Veriical Stabilizer
40
Rudder
WINDOWS
General
10
Flight Compartment
20
Cabin
WINGS
30
General
Plates/Skin
40
Attach
Fittings
50
Flight
Surfaces
00
61
Plates/Skin
STABILIZERS
00
57
Doors
FUSELAGE
30
55
General
DOORS
30
MULTIPURPOSE PARTS
00
00
52
General
ELECTRICIELECTRONIC PANELS
20
51
General
PNEUMATIC
00
39
Flight Environmental Data/Pitot Static
PROPELLERS
10
20
Propeller Assembly
Controlling
INTRODUCTION
Page 5
May 9180
BEECHCRAFI
BONANZA SERIES
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
71
POWER PLANT
00
General
10
Cowling
72
ENGINE
73
ENGINE FUEL AND CONTROL
Indicating
30
74
IGNITION
00
General
20
Distribution
77
ENGINE INDICATING
General
00
OIL
79
General
00
80
STARTING
Cranking
10
TURBINES
81
General
00
91
CHARTS
SUPPLEMENTARY PUBLICATIONS
Following
is
list
of
VENDOR PUBLICATIONS
publications providing servicing,
overhaul and parts information on various components of

the BEECHCRAFT Bonanza which you may obtain to
supplementthe Maintenance Manual. In most instances,
ENGINE
10-520
you should obtain the publications directly from the

manufacturer or his distributor. Only a few, vendor manuals
Service Parts
supplementary publications, are available from

Commercial Products Support, Beech Aircraft Corporation.
Mobile, Alabama 36601.
and Beech
Those
which
are
Publications Price
available
List.
Since
are
a
listed
wide
in the current
variety
of
radio
equipment is available and because radio manufacturers

normally supply parts and a servicing manual with each set,
radio publications have not been included in the list.
Motors
Catalog Form X-30040. Teledyne Continental
Aircraft
Maintenance
Teledyne
publications
on
additional
available, they will be added
components become
to this list of
and
Division, Post Office Box 90
Overhaul
Continental
Motors
Manual
Aircraft
Form
X-30039.
Products
Division,
Post Office Box 90 Mobile, Alabama 36601.
Operators Handbook
Motors Aircraft
As
Products
Form X-30041,
Products
Teledyne
Continental
Division, Post Office Box 90
publications.
INTRODUCTION
Page6
Oct7/83
A6
BEECHCRAFT
BONANZA SEAIES
NIAINTENANCE MANAUL
TSIO-520
Overhaul Manual with Parts List Bulletin No. 33080 for the
35-380088-1 Propeller Governor, Woodward Governor
Manual for TSIO-520 Series Aircraft Engines

Teledyne Continental Motors Aircraft
Products Division, Post Office Box 90, Mobile, Alabama
Company, Rockford,
36601.
MAGNETOS
Operators Manual for TSIO-520-U and -UB Engines Form

No. X-30044, Teledyne Continental Motors Aircraft Products
Overhaul Instructions for Bendix S-1200 Series
Overhaul
Illinois.
Form No. X-30042,
Division, Post Office Box 90, Mobile, Alabama 36601.
Magnetos
Corporation,
Form L-609, Scintilia Division, Bendix Aviation

Sidney, New York.
10-550
Service Parts List for Bendix 8-1200 Series Magnetos,

Form L-608, Scintilla Division, Bendix Aviation Corporation,
Illustrated Parts Catalog Form X-30569, Teledyne

Continental Motors Aircraft Products Division, Post Office
Box 90, Mobile, Alabama 36601.
Sidney,
New York.
Installation, Maintenance and Operation Instructions, SGRNand S6AN-205 Magnetos, Form L-526, Scintilla
201
Overhaul Manual Form X-30568, Teledyne Continental

Motors Aircraft Products Division, Post Office Box 90,
Division, Bendix Aviation Corporation, Sidney, New York.
Ovemaul Instructions, S-600 Series Magnetos, Form L-551,

Scintilla Division, Bendix Aviation Corporation, Sidney, New
Continued Airworthiness Maintenance and Operators

Manual Form X-30565, Teledyne Continental Motors
York.
Aircraft
Division,
Products
Post Office Box 90, Mobile,
Alabama 36601.
Service Parts List, S-600 Series

Scintilla Division, Bendix Aviation
Magnetos, Form L-552-1,

Corporation, Sidney, New
York.
TURBOCHARGER
Series Aircraft Magnetos Maintenance and
Overhaul Instructions, Form No. 1037-A, Slick Electro, Inc.,
Rockford, Illinois 61101.
4200/6200
Overhaul Manual and Parts Catalog Fonn No. X-30055,

Teledyne Continental Motors Aircraft Products Division,
Post Office Box 90, Mobile, Alabama 36601.
FUEL INJECTION
STARTING MOTOR
Overhaul Manual and Parts Catalog Form No. X-30052,

Teledyne Continental Motors Corporation, Aircraft Products
Parts and
Division, Post Office Box 90, Mobile, Alabama 36601.
Ohio 43694.
Equipment List, Service Parts and Technical Data OE-A1,

Equipment Section Service Department, Toledo,
PROPELLER
ALTERNATOR
Overhaul Manual and Parts
McCauley
Industrial
Catalog Manual No. 720415,

Corporation, Dayton, Ohio.
Equipment List,
Service Parts and Technical Data OE-A1,
Prestolite Service
Owners
Manual, 115H, or Overhaul

Manual No. 1138, Hartzell Propeller, Inc., Piqua, Ohio.
Hartzell
Propeller
Service
Manual
Service
with
overhaul
and
parts for McCauley
propellers, Manual No. 761001 or McCauley

propeller Operators Manual No. MPC-11, McCauley
Accessory Division, Cessna Aircraft Company, 1840 Howell
Ave., Dayton, Ohio 45417.
3A32C406-X
Department,
Parts
and
Equipment
Section, Toledo, Ohio 43601.
642056A1
Teledyne
and
Overhaul
Instructions for Continental
P/N
642051 Alternator, Publication No. X-30531,

Continental Motors, Aircraft Products Division,
or
Post Office Box 90, Mobile, Alabama 36601.
ELECTRIC PROPELLER DEICER
PROPELLER GOVERNOR
Report 70-04-700, Maintenance

Report 68-04-7128, B.F. Goodrich Engineered
Systems Company Division, B.F. Goodrich Company,
Installation of Deicer Boots,
McCauley Service Manual No. 78041 for the 35-380088-3

Propeller Governor, 3535 McCauley Drive, Vandalia, Ohio
Manual
45377.
Akron, Ohio 44318.

Introduction
A9
Pege7
Sep 27164
BEECHCRAFT
BONAEnA SEAIES
MAINTENANCE MANAUL
BATTERY
AUTOPILOT
King KFC-P00
Installation
Manual
No. 006-0203-00 for
Models F33C, M3A, A36, and A36TC or No. 006-0201-00

for Model V35B, King Radio Corporation, 400 N. Rogers
Service Manual, Publication Number: GSM-12n, Teledyne

Battery Products, P.O. Box 431, 840 W. BrocMon Ave.,
Redlands, CA 92373.
Road, Olathe, Kansas 66061.

Service Manual CB12-9,
Edo-Aire Mitchell Service and Overhaul Manual for Century
III PIN 68854 or Century IV P/N 68889, P.O. Box 610,
Concorde
Battery Corp.,
for Concorde
Aircraft
2009 San Bemadino
Battery,
Rd., West
Covina, CA 01790.
Mineral Wells, Texas 76067.
STROBE LIGHT
RADAR
Overhaul
Power
Manual with
Supply),
Illustrated
Parts List
(60-1750-3
Publication Number: 33-40-58; Grimes Div.

Corp., 515 North Russel Street, Urbana,
of Midland Ross
WeatherScout
description
Digital
Weather
Radar
and Installation Manual,
System, System
Publication Number:
188023100, R.C.A., Avionics Systems, 8500 Balboa Blvd.,
Ohio 43078.
Van
Nuys, CA
91409.
AIR CONDITIONER COMPRESSOR

Model 508
Compressor, Abacus International,
P. O. Box
327, Dallas, Texas 75221.
SUPPLEMENTARY BEECHCRAFT PUBLICAT)ONS

FLIGHT CONTROLS
98-35012
ELECTRIC ELEVATOR TRIM TA8
Brake
Edo-Aire Mitchell, Automatic Right Control Systems, AK563

Bulletin No. 686 or AK669 Bulletin No. 798, EDO-AIRE
MITCHELL, P.O. Box 610, Mineral ~lells, Texas 76067.
Servicing
Maintenance Instructions and Illustrated
Parts Breakdown for the Main Wheel, Nose Wheel and
Assembly.
32-31-24 Maintenance Information and

Breakdown for EM 27-8
Landing Gear
Illustrated
Parts
Motor.
Introduction
PageB
Sep 27/84
A9
BEECHCRAFT
BONANZA SERIES
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
ALPHABETICAL
INDEX
COMPONENT ITEM
OR SUB SYSTEM
CHAPTER AND
SUB CHAPTER
ACCESS OPENINGS, FUSELAGE

AND A36TC
F33A AND F33C
V35B)
ACRYLIC LACqUER (INTERIOR COLORS)
ACT ASSY, ELEV TRIM TAB (E-llll)
ACT BRUSH REPLACE SCHED, ELEC TRIM TAB
ACT DISASSEMBLY, ELEV TRIM TAB (E-llll)
ACT INST, ELEC TRIM TAB (F33A, F33C, V35B)
ACT REM, ELEC TRIM TAB (F33A, F33C, V35B)
ACTUATOR ASSEMBLY INSTL, LANDING GEAR
ACTUATOR ASSEMBLY REMOVAL, LANDING GEAR
ACTUATOR ASSEMBLY, ELEVATOR TRIM TAB
ACTUATOR ASSEMBLY, LANDING GEAR RETRACT
ACTUATOR CLEANING AND PARTS REP, LANDING GEAR RETRACT
ACTUATOR DISASSEMBLY, ELEV TRIM TAB
ACTUATOR DISASSEMBLY, LANDING GEAR RETRACT
ACTUATOR FUNCTIONAL TEST, LANDING GEAR RETRACT
ACTUATOR INSTALLATION, FLAP
ACTUATOR INSTALLATION
TRIM TAB
ACTUATOR INSTALLATION
33 and 36), ELEV TRIM TAB
ACTUATOR INSTALLATION, AILERON TRIM TAB
ACTUATOR REMOVAL, FLAP
ACTUATOR REMOVAL
V35B), TRIM TAB
ACTUATOR REMOVAL
33 and 36), ELEV TRIM TAB
ACTUATOR REMOVAL, AILERON TRIM TAB
ACTUATOR REMOVAL (33 and 36), ELEV TRIM TAB
ACTUATOR, FLAP DISASSEMBLY AND ASSEMBLY
ADJUSTING THE WING
AEROFICHE
AILERON AND TAB-MAINTENANCE PRACTICES
AILERON AND TAB-MAINTENANCE PRACTICES
AILERON CONTROL CABLE INSTALLATION
AILERON CONTROL CABLE REMOVAL
AILERON CONTROL SYSTEM RIGGING
AILERON CONTROL TRIMMER
AILERON INSTALLATION
AILERON REMOVAL
AILERON REMOVAL
AILERON RIGGING
AILERON TAB ACTUATOR INSTALLATION
AILERON TAB ACTUATOR REMOVAL
AILERON TAB
AILERON TAB
jA36
IV35B),
PAGE
53-30-00
53-30-00
53-30-00
20-00-00
27-30-00
27-30-00
27-30-00
27-30-00
27-30-00
32-30-00
32-30-00
27-30-00
32-30-00
32-30-00
27-30-00
32-30-00
32-30-00
27-50-00
27-21-00
27-30-00
27-11-00
27-50-00
27-21-00
27-30-00
27-11-00
27-30-00
27-50-00
57-00-00
IN-TR-OD
27-10-00
27-11-00
27-11-00
27-11-00
27-11-00
27-10-00
27-10-00
27-11-00
27-10-00
27-11-00
27-10-00
27-11-00
27-11-00
27-10-00
3
1
2
3
8
13
7
12A
12A
1
1
6
6
6
6
6
9
4
8
12
6
4
7
11
6
11
5
4
2
1
1
3
3
4
6
4
3
4
2
4
8
8
6
27-11-00
INTRODUCTION
Page 9
A18
Aug 18/95
BEECHCRAFT
BONANZA SERIES
MAINTENANCE MAN UAL
ALPHABETICAC INDEX
CHAPTER AND
SUB CHAPTER
COMPONENT ITEM
OR SUB SYSTEM
AILERON TRIM TAB CABLE INSTALLATION

AILERON TRIM TAB CABLE REMOVAL
AILERON TRIM TAB FREE PLAY INSPECTION
AILERON TRIM TAB RIGGING
AIR CONDITIONER BELT
AIR CONDITIONER CONDENSER
AIR CONDITIONER LEAK DETECTION
AIR CONDITIONER MAINTENANCE
AIR CONDITIONER TORQUES
AIR CONDITIONER PRECAUTIONS
AIR CONDITIONER TROUBLESHOOTING
AIR CONDITIONING FUNCTIONAL TEST
AIR CONDITIONING SYSTEM
AIR CONDITIONING SYSTEM CHARGING
AIR CONDITIONING SYSTEM DEPRESSURIZING
AIR CONDITIONING SYSTEM PURGING
AIR FILTER INSTALLATIONINLINE
INTAKE
AIR FILTER INSTALLATION
AIR FILTER REMOVAL
AIR FILTER REMOVAL
INTAKE
AIR PRESSURE PUMP INSTALLATION
AIR PRESSURE PUMP REMOVAL
AIR SYSTEM, INSTRUMENT
AIRPLANE DIMENSIONS MODEL A36TC
AIRPLANE DIMENSIONS MODEL A36
AIRPLANE DIMENSIONS MODEL B36TC
AIRPLANE DIMENSIONS MODEL 33
AIRPLANE DIMENSIONS MODEL 35
AIRPLANE FINISH CARE
AIRPLANE FINISH CLEANING
ALCAL CALIBRATION UNIT
ALPHABETICAL INDEX
ALTERNATOR DRIVE GEAR AND COUPLING INSTL
ALTERNATOR INSTALLATION
ALTERNATOR REMOVAL
ALUMINUM CORROSION REMOVAL
ALUMINUM CORROSION TREATMENT
IINLINE
ALUMINUM ELECTRICAL BONDING

ALUMINUM SURFACES
ASSIGNMENT OF SUBJECT MATERIAL
ATA APPLICATION
AUXILIARY FUEL PUMP INSTALLATION
AUXILIARY FUEL PUMP REMOVAL
AUXILIARY OR FUEL BOOST PUMP
AVIONICS/RADIO EQUIPMENT INSTALLATION
AVIONICS/RADIO EQUIPMENT REMOVAL
27-11-00
27-11-00
27-11-00
27-11-00
21-50-00
21-50-00
21-50-00
21-50-00
21-50-00
21-50-00
21-50-00
21-50-00
12-10-00
12-10-00
12-10-00
12-10-00
36-00-00
36-00-00
36-00-00
36-00-00
71-00-00
71-00-00
36-00-00
06-00-00
06-00-00
06-00-00
06-00-00
06-00-00
20-08-00
20-08-00
77-00-00
IN-TR-OD
24-30-00
24-30-00
24-30-00
20-09-00
20-09-00
20-03-00
20-03-00
IN-TR-OD
IN-TR-OD
28-20-00
28-20-00
28-00-00
39-10-00
39-10-00
PAGE
7
7
8
7
7
8
7
5
7
5
4
5
2
3
3
3
5
5
5
5
6
6
1
4
3
5
1
2
2
3
1
2
6
6
6
3
4
7
2
1
2
1
1
1
1
1
INTRODUCTION
Page 10
Aug 18/95
A18
BEECHCRAFT
BONANZA SERIES
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
ALPHABETICAL
COMPONENT
OR SUB
INDEX
ITEM
SYSTEM
BAGGAGE DOOR INSTALLATION

BAGGAGE DOOR REMOVAL
BAGGAGE DOORS (MODELS F33A, F33C, AND V35B)
BALANCING PROCEDURE
BALANCING THE AILERON
BALANCING THE ELEVATOR
BALANCING THE RUDDER
BALANCING THE RUDDERVATOR
BATTERY BOX AND LID PAINTING
BATTERY BOX CLEANING
BATTERY CLEANING
BATTERY INSTALLATION
BATTERY MAINTENANCE PROGRAM
BATTERY REMOVAL
BATTERY REPLACEMENT, ELT
BATTERY SERVICING
BATTERY
BEARING HOUSING INSPECTION
BEARING INSTALLATION USING RETAINING COMPOUND
BEARING INSTALLATION BY STAKING
BELT TENSION ADJUSTMENT, COMPRESSOR
BLEEDING THE BRAKE SYSTEM
BLEEDING THE BRAKE SYSTEM, GRAVITY
BLEEDING THE BRAKE SYSTEM, PRESSURE
INSTALLATION
BLOWER, FRESH AIR
REMOVAL
BLOWER, FRESH AIR
BOLTS, TOR9UING COARSE THREAD IN SMEAR
BOLTS, TORQUING FINE THREAD IN SMEAR
BONDING JUMPER ACROSS TUBING CLAMP ELECTRICAL BONDING
BOOST PUMP, AUXILIARY
BRAKE ADJUSTMENT, PARKING
BRAKE ASSEMBLY
BRAKE ASSY AND MAIN WHEEL INSTALLATION
BRAKE ASSY AND MAIN WHEEL REMOVAL
BRAKE ASSY INSPECTION AND CLEANING
BRAKE CLEANING AND PARTS REPLACE, PARKING
BRAKE MASTER CYLINDER ASSEMBLY
BRAKE MASTER CYLINDER CLEANING AND PARTS RPLACEMENT
BRAKE MASTER CYLINDER DISASSEMBLY
BRAKE MASTER CYLINDER INSTALLATION
BRAKE MASTER CYLINDER LINKAGE ADJUSTMENT
BRAKE MASTER CYLINDER REMOVAL
BRAKE RELAY CHECK, DYNAMIC
BRAKE RELINING
CHAPTER AND
SUB CHAPTER
52-30-00
52-30-00
52-00-00
57-50-00
57-50-00
55-20-00
55-40-00
55-20-00
20-08-00
24-30-00
24-30-00
24-30-00
24-30-00
24-30-00
25-60-00
24-30-00
12-20-00
20-05-00
20-05-00
20-05-00
12-10-00
32-40-00
32-40-00
32-40-00
21-50-00
21-50-00
91-00-00
91-00-00
20-03-00
28-00-00
32-40-00
32-40-00
32-40-00
32-40-00
32-40-00
32-40-00
32-40-00
32-40-00
32-40-00
32-40-00
32-40-00
32-40-00
32-30-00
32-40-00
PAGE
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
3
7
9
8
8
7
8
1
9
1
2
2
3
7
8
10
9
11
11
11
11
8
1
7
1
1
3
4
8
7
6
6
6
6
6
3
6
INTRODUCTION
A18
Page 11
Aug 18/95
BEECHCRAFT
BONANZA SERIES
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
ALPHABETICAL INDEX
COMPONENT ITEM
OR SUB SYSTEM
CHAPTER AND
BRAKE SHUTTLE VALVE

BRAKE SYSTEM
BRAKE SYSTEM BLEEDING
BRAKE SYSTEM BLEEDING, ELECTRIC
BRAKE SYSTEM BLEEDING, GRAVITY
BRAKE SYSTEM BLEEDING, PRESSURE POT
BRAKE SYSTEM, HYDRAULIC
BRAKE SYSTEM
BRAKE SYSTEM TROUBLESHOOTING
BRAKE VALVE ASSEMBLY, PARKING
BRAKE VALVE DISASSEMBLY, PARKING
BRAKE VALVE INSTALLATION, PARKING
BRAKE VALVE REMOVAL, PARKING
BRAKE WEAR AND WEAR LIMITS
BRAKES, RELINING
BREAK-IN ENGINE OIL
BRUSH BLOCK CLEANING
SLIP RING
BRUSH BLOCK INSTALLATION
BRUSH BLOCK REMOVAL
BRUSH MODULE REPLACEMENT
BRUSH MODULE RESISTANCE CHECK
BRUSH REPLACEMENT
BRUSH WEAR LIMITS
32-40-00
12-10-00
32-40-00
32-40-00
32-40-00
32-40-00
32-40-00
12-10-00
32-40-00
32-40-00
32-40-00
32-40-00
32-40-00
32-40-00
32-40-00
79-00-00
30-60-00
30-60-00
30-60-00
30-60-00
30-60-00
30-60-00
30-60-00
1
6
1
13
13
13
9
10
11
11
CABIN DOOR ADJUSTMENT

CABIN DOOR INSTALLATION (MODEL F33C)
CABIN DOOR INSTL (F33A, V35B, A36, A36TC)
CABIN DOOR LOCK, FITTING TUMBLER TO KEY
CABIN DOOR QUICK RELEASE MECHANISM
CABIN DOOR REMOVE (F33A, V35B, A36, A36TC)
CABIN DOOR REMOVAL (MODEL F33C)
CABIN DOOR TELEFLEX CABLE REMOVE AND INSTL
CABIN DOOR WINDOW INSTALLATION
CABIN DOOR WINDOW REMOVAL
CABIN DOOR
CABIN HEATING
52-10-00
52-10-00
52-10-00
52-10-00
52-10-00
52-10-00
52-10-00
52-10-00
56-10-00
56-10-00
52-00-00
21-40-00
33-20-00
33-20-00
27-21-00
21-40-00
27-00-00
28-40-00
28-10-00
28-10-00
2
2
1
3
1
1
2
7
2
2
1
1
2
2
5
1
1
1
1
1
CABIN OVERHEAD LIGHT BULB INSTALLATION

CABIN OVERHEAD LIGHT BULB REMOVAL
CABIN REPL, ELEVATOR TAB INDICATOR
CABIN VENTILATION
CABLE TENSION, EFFECTS OF TEMPERATURE
CALIBRATION OF FUEL QUANTITY INDICATOR
CELL INSTALLATION, FUEL
CELL REMOVAL, FUEL
SUB CHAPTER
PAGE
1
4
8
12
9
12
1
4
3
7
7
7
INTRODUCTION
Page 12
Aug 18/95
A18
BEECHCRAFT
BONANZA SERIES
MAINTENANCE MAN UAL
ALPHABETICAL INDEX
COMPONENT
CHAPTER AND
OR SUB
SUB CHAPTER
ITEM
SYSTEM
CHARGING THE AIR CONDITIONING SYSTEM

CHART 1, SERVICING
CHART 2, LUBRICATION SCHEDULE
CHECKING BALANCE
CHECKING BALANCE
CLEANING AND PARTS REPL, MAIN LANDING GEAR
CLEANING AND PARTS REPL, NOSE LANDING GEAR
CLEANING AND WAXING THE AIRPLANE
CLEANING AND WAXING THE AIRPLANE FINISH
CLEANING FUEL STRAINERS
CLEANING INTERIOR CABIN TRIM
CLEANING PLASTIC WINDOWS
CLEANING THE STATIC AIR SYSTEM
CLUTCH INSTALLATION, MAGNETIC
CLUTCH REMOVAL, MAGNETIC
CLUTCH TOROUE TEST, MAGNETIC
COLUMN, CONTROL RIGGING CHAIN
COLUMN, CONTROL RIGGING CHAIN
COLUMN, CONTROL, ARM INSTALLATION
COLUMN, CONTROL, ARM REMOVAL
COLUMN, SINGLE CONTROL
COMMUNICATION
COMPASS LIGHT BULB INSTALLATION
COMPASS LIGHT BULB REMOVAL
COMPONENTS LOCATION ZONES, ELECTRICAL
COMPRESSOR BELT INSTALLATION
COMPRESSOR BELT PULLEY ALIGNMENT
COMPRESSOR BELT REMOVAL
COMPRESSOR BELT TENSION ADJUSTMENT
COMPRESSOR INSTALLATION AND ALIGNMENT
COMPRESSOR MOUNTING TORQUES
COMPRESSOR OIL LEVEL CHECKING
COMPRESSOR REMOVAL
CONDENSER, AIR CONDITIONER
CONDENSER CONTROL RIGGING
CONSUMABLE MATERIALS
CONTROL CABLE PULLEY INSPECTION
CONTROL CABLE STORAGE
CONTROL CABLE SYSTEM INSPECTION
CONTROL COLUMN ARM INSTALLATION
CONTROL COLUMN ARM REMOVAL
CONTROL COLUMN CHAIN RIGGING
CONTROL COLUMN CHAIN INSTALLATION
CONTROL COLUMN CHAIN REMOVAL
12-10-00
12-20-00
12-20-00
55-20-00
57-50-00
32-10-00
32-20-00
20-00-00
12-20-00
28-00-00
12-20-00
56-00-00
12-20-00
34-10-00
27-30-00
27-30-00
27-30-00
27-10-00
27-11-00
27-10-00
27-10-00
27-10-00
23-10-00
33-20-00
33-20-00
39-20-00
21-50-00
21-50-00
21-50-00
21-50-00
21-50-00
21-50-00
12-10-00
21-50-00
21-50-00
21-50-00
91-00-00
20-04-00
20-04-00
20-04-00
27-10-00
27-10-00
27-10-00
27-11-00
27-11-00
27-11-00
PAGE
3
6
7
1
1
2
2
2
4
2
5
1
4
2
12A
12A
13
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
7
7
7
7
9
7
3
9
8
8
1
3
3
2
1
1
1
1
1
1
INTRODUCTION
A18
Page 13
Aug 18/95
BEECHCRAFT
BONANZA SERIES
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
ALPHABETICAL INDEX
COMPONENT ITEM
CHAPTER AND
OR SUB SYSTEM
SUB CHAPTER
CONTROL COLUMN ROLLER ADJUSTMENT

CONTROL COLUMN SUPPORT ROLLER ADJUSTMENT
CONTROL COLUMN, SINGLE
CONTROL LOCKS
CONTROL SYSTEM, AILERON, RIGGING
CONTROL TRIMMER, AILERON
CONTROLLING STATIC CHARGE BUILDUP
COOLING DESCRIPTION AND OPERATION
CORRESPONDENCE
CORROSION CONTROL
CORROSION PROTECTION
CORROSION-RESISTANT (CRES) STEEL SURFACES
COTTER PIN INSTALLATION
COURTESY LIGHT BULB INSTALLATION
COURTESY LIGHT BULB REMOVAL
COWL FLAP RIGGING
COWLING INSTALLATION
COWLING LATCH RIGGING
COWLING REMOVAL
CRES STEEL OR TITANIUM ELECTRICAL BONDING
CYLINDER ASSEMBLY, BRAKE MASTER
CYLINDER CLEANING AND PARTS RPL, BRAKE MASTER
CYLINDER DISASSEMBLY, BRAKE MASTER
CYLINDER INSTALLATION, BRAKE MASTER
CYLINDER LINKAGE ADJUSTMENT, BRAKE MASTER
CYLINDER REMOVAL, BRAKE MASTER
27-11-00
27-11-00
27-10-00
10-00-00
27-10-00
27-10-00
20-02-00
21-50-00
IN-TR-OD
20-09-00
20-09-00
20-03-00
20-07-00
33-20-00
33-20-00
71-10-00
71-10-00
71-10-00
71-10-00
20-03-00
32-40-00
32-40-00
32-40-00
32-40-00
32-40-00
32-40-00
2
2
1
1
1
4
6
1
1
1
3
6
4
2
2
1
1
1
1
6
7
7
7
7
7
6
DAMPENER ASSEMBLY, NOSE GEAR SHIMMY

DAMPENER CLEANING/PARTS REP, NOSE GEAR SHIMMY
DAMPENER DISASSEMBLY, NOSE GEAR SHIMMY
DAMPENER INSTALLATION, NOSE GEAR SHIMMY
DAMPENER OVERHAUL, NOSE GEAR SHIMMY
DAMPENER REMOVAL, NOSE GEAR SHIMMY
DEFUELING, AIRPLANE
DEICER BOOT
DEICER HEAT TEST
DEICER TIMER CHECK
DIRECT ELECTRICAL BONDING
DOOR, UTILITY REMOVAL
DRAINING THE FUEL SYSTEM
DRAINS, FUEL SYSTEM
DUAL CONTROL COLUMN
DYNAMIC BRAKE RELAY CHECK
32-20-00
32-20-00
7
2
9
9
9
7
4
5
10
9
1
1
1
1
2
1
2
32-20-00
32-20-00
32-20-00
32-20-00
28-00-00
30-60-00
30-60-00
30-60-00
06-00-00
20-03-00
52-30-00
12-10-00
28-00-00
27-11-00
32-30-00
PAGE
INTRODUCTION
Page 14
Aug 18/95
A18
BEECHCRAFT
BONANZA SERIES
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
ALPHABETICAL
INDEX
CHAPTER AND
COMPONENT ITEM
OR
SUB CHAPTER
SUB SYSTEM
DYNAMIC BRAKE RELAY

DYNAMIC BRAKE RELAY
INSTL, LANDING GEAR

REMOVAL, LANDING GEAR
EFFECT OF TEMPERATURE UPON CABLE TENSION

ELECTRIC BLEEDING
HR GUIDE
100 HR GUIDE
50 HR GUIDE)
ELECTRIC PROPELLER DEICING
ELECTRICAL BONDING METHODS
ELECTRICAL BONDING OF TUBES
ELECTRICAL BONDING EXAMPLES
ELECTRICAL BONDING OF GROUND TABS
ELECTRICAL COMPONENTS LOCATION ZONES
ELECTRICAL LOAD CONTINUOUS
STANDARD
ELECTRICAL LOAD CONTINUOUS
ELECTRICAL LOAD INTERMITTENT
OPTIONAL
ELECTRICAL LOAD INTERMITTENT
ELECTRICAL POWER RETURNS
j100
IOPTIONAL
ISTANDARD
ELECTRICAL SYSTEM
ELECTRICAL SYSTEM TROUBLESHOOTING
ELECTRICAL UTILIZATION CHART
ELECTROLUMINESCENT PANEL INSTALLATION, LIGHTS

ELECTROLUMINESCENT PANEL REMOVAL
ELECTROSTATIC DISCHARGE SENSITIVITY CLASSIFICATION
ELEV TAB FREE PLAY, CHECKING
ELEV TRIM TAB SERVO INST, ELECTRIC
ELEV TRIM TAB SERVO REMOVAL, ELECTRIC
ELEVATOR AND TAB MAINTENANCE PRACTICES
ELEVATOR AND TAB MODEL V35B
ELEVATOR BALANCING
ELEVATOR INSTALLATION
ELEVATOR REMOVAL
ELEVATOR RIGGING PROCEDURE
ELEVATOR STABILIZER INSTALLATION, V35
ELEVATOR STABILIZER REMOVAL, V35
ELEVATOR TAB INDICATOR CABLE REPL
ELEVATOR TAB INDICATOR CABLE REPL
ELEVATOR TAB RIGGING
ELEVATOR TAB RIGGING, V35
ELEVATOR TAB RIGGING TO CORRECT FOR YAW, V35
ELEVATOR TABS, INSPECTION (V35B)
ELEVATOR TRIM TAB ACTUATOR
PAGE
32-30-00
32-30-00
2
2
27-00-00
32-40-00
05-20-00
05-20-00
05-20-00
30-60-00
20-03-00
20-03-00
20-03-00
20-03-00
39-20-00
24-50-00
24-50-00
24-50-00
24-50-00
20-03-00
24-30-00
24-30-00
24-50-00
33-20-00
33-20-00
20-02-00
27-30-00
27-30-00
27-30-00
27-30-00
27-21-00
55-20-00
27-30-00
27-30-00
27-21-00
55-10-00
55-10-00
27-21-00
27-30-00
27-21-00
27-30-00
27-21-00
27-21-00
27-21-00
27-30-00
2
10
1
1
1
1
1
1
6
11
1
2
1
2
3
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
11
12
12
1
5
1
1
1
1,5
1
1
9
6
7
6B
7
9
7
6B
INTRODUCTION
Page 15
A18
Aug 18/95
BEECHCRAFT
BONANZA SERIES
MAINTENANCE MAN UAL
ALPHABETICAL INDEX
COMPONENT ITEM
OR SUB SYSTEM
CHAPTER AND
SUB CHAPTER
ELEVATOR TRIM TAB ACTUATOR ASSEMBLY

ELEVATOR TRIM TAB ACTUATOR INSTAL, V35
ELEVATOR TRIM TAB ACTUATOR REMOVAL, V35
ELEVATOR TRIM TAB ACTUATOR DISASSEMBLY
ELEVATOR TRIM TAB INDICATOR CABLE REPL
ELEVATOR TRIM TAB INDICATOR CABLE REPL
ELEVATOR TRIM TAB HINGE INSPECTION
ELECTRIC
ELEVATOR TRIM,OPTIONAL
OPTIONAL
ELECTRIC
ELEVATOR TRIM,
ELEVATOR TRIM, ELEC GROUND CHECKS
EMERGENCY LOCATOR TRANSMITTER BATTERY REPLACEMENT
EMERGENCY LOCATOR TRANSMITTER MAINTENANCE
EMERGENCY LOCATOR TRANSMITTER
EMERGENCY LOCATOR TRANSMITTER TESTING
EMPENNAGE SKIN THICK (F33A
A36, A36TC)
EMPENNAGE SKIN THICKNESS
ENCLOSED AREAS SUBJECT TO HIGH HUMIDITY
ENGINE AIR INDUCTION SYSTEM
ENGINE AND FLIGHT INSTRUMENT INSTL
ENGINE AND FLIGHT INSTRUMENT REMOVAL
ENGINE BUILD-UP
27-30-00
27-21-00
27-21-00
27-30-00
27-21-00
27-30-00
27-21-00
27-30-00
27-21-00
27-30-00
25-60-00
25-60-00
25-60-00
25-60-00
55-00-00
55-00-00
20-08-00
71-00-00
(~358)
ENGINE CLEANING
ENGINE DRIVEN FUEL PUMP INSTALLATION
ENGINE DRIVEN FUEL PUMP REMOVAL
ENGINE FUEL FILTERS AND SCREENS
ENGINE INSTALLATION (TURBOCHARGED)
ENGINE INSTL (NORMALLY ASPIRATED)
ENGINE INSTRUMENT CLUSTER INSTALLATION
ENGINE INSTRUMENT CLUSTER REMOVAL

ENGINE OIL, RECOMMENDED
ENGINE REMOVA~NORMALCY ASPIRATED)
ENGINE REMOVAL
TURBOCHARGED)
ENGINE TROUBLESHOOTING
ENGINE
ENVIRONMENTAL FALLOUT (ACID RAIN)
EPOXY POLYAMIDE PRIMER FOR URETHANE
EQUIP REQUIRED TO PERFORM CHECK BALANCE
EVAPORATOR FILTER REPLACEMENT
EVAPORATOR INSTALLATION
EVAPORATOR REMOVAL
EXTENDED STORAGE AND HIGH WIND
EXTENSION SYSTEM, MANUAL LANDING GEAR
EXTERIOR AND INTERIOR FINISHES
EXTERIOR AND INTERIOR PRIMERS
EXTERIOR LIGHTS, TROUBLESHOOTING
EXTERIOR
39-10-00
39-10-00
71-00-00
12-20-00
71-00-00
71-00-00
12-10-00
71-00-00
71-00-00
39-10-00
39-10-00
79-00-00
71-00-00
71-00-00
71-00-00
72-00-00
20-08-00
20-00-00
57-50-00
21-50-00
21-50-00
21-50-00
10-00-00
32-30-00
20-00-00
20-00-00
33-40-00
11-20-00
PAGE
6C,8,9
12
11
6B,7,8
9
6A
10
12
7
12A
1
1
1
3
2
5
7
1
1
1
6
5
6
6
1
5
5
1
1
2
5
5
2
1
3
4
1
12
12
12
1
1
2
2
2
1
INTRODUCTION
Page 16
Aug 18/95
A18
BEECHCRAFT
BONANZA SERIES
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
ALPHABETICAL INDEX
COMPONENT
OR SUB
ITEM
SYSTEM
CHAPTER AND
SUB CHAPTER
PAGE
EXTERNAL POWER
EXTERNAL POWER
12-20-00
24-40-00
1
1
FAA REQUIRED PLACARDS AND MARKINGS

FILLER CAPS AND VENT LINES INSP, FUEL CELL
FILLING THE FUEL CELLS
INLINE
AIR
FILTER INSTALLATION
FILTER INSTALLATION
INTAKE
AIR
FILTER REMOVAL
INLINE), AIR
AIR
FILTER REMOVAL
FITTING TORQUE, FLARE
FITTINGS, FLARED
FLAP ACTUATOR DISASSEMBLY
FLAP ACTUATOR ASSEMBLY
FLAP ACTUATOR INSTALLATION
FLAP ACTUATOR REMOVAL
FLAP INNER FLEX SHAFT INSTALLATION
FLAP INNER FLEX SHAFT REMOVAL
FLAP INSTALLATION
FLAP LIMIT SWITCH ADJUSTMENT
FLAP MOTOR INSTALLATION
FLAP MOTOR REMOVAL
FLAP POSITION INDICATOR AND ADJUSTMENT
FLAP REMOVAL
FLAP SHAFT INSTALLATION
FLAP SHAFT REMOVAL
FLAP TRACK WEAR LIMITS
FLAPPER VALVE INSPECTION, FUEL CELL
FLAPS DESCRIPTION AND OPERATION
FLAPS MAINTENANCE PRACTICES
FLAPS, THREE POSITION
FLAPS, TWO POSITION
FLARE FITTING TORQUE
FLARED FITTINGS
FLIGHT AND ENGINE INSTRUMENT INSTALLATION
FLIGHT AND ENGINE INSTRUMENT REMOVAL
FLIGHT ENVIRONMENT DATA
FLUID LINE FITTING INSTALLATION
FLYABLE STORAGE
FUEL CELL FLAPPER VALVE, INSPECTION
FUEL CELL INSTALLATION
FUEL CELL LEAKAGE TEST
FUEL CELL PRESERVATION (GOODYEAR)
FUEL CELL PRESERVATION (UNIROYAL)
FUEL CELL REMOVAL
11-00-00
28-20-00
12-10-00
36-00-00
36-00-00
36-00-00
36-00-00
91-00-00
28-20-00
27-50-00
27-50-00
27-50-00
27-50-00
27-50-00
27-50-00
27-50-00
1
3
1
5
5
5
4
11
4
7
7
6
5
6
6
1
1
4
4
3
1
4
4
1
6
1
1
3
3
11
4
1
1
1
2
2
6
1
6
9
9
1
j
tINTAKE)I
27-50-00
27-50-00
27-50-00
27-50-00
27-50-00
27-50-00
27-50-00
27-50-00
28-10-00
27-50-00
27-50-00
27-50-00
27-50-00
91-00-00
28-20-00
39-10-00
39-10-00
34-10-00
20-06-00
10-00-00
28-10-00
28-10-00
28-10-00
28-10-00
28-10-00
28-10-00
INTRODUCTION
Page 17
A18
Aug 18/95
BEECHCRAFT
BONANZA SERIES
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
ALPHABETICAL INDEX
CHAPTER AND
SUB CHAPTER
COMPONENT ITEM
OR SUB SYSTEM
FUEL
FUEL
FUEL
FUEL
FUEL
FUEL
FUEL
FUEL
FUEL
FUEL
FUEL
FUEL
FUEL
FUEL
FUEL
FUEL
FUEL
CELL
CELL
CELL
CELL
FLOW
FLOW
FLOW
REPAI
RGOODYEARUNIROYAL
REPAIR
RESERVOIR (CJ-149 AND AFTER)

VENT LINESAND FILLER CAPS, INSP
INDICATING
INDICATOR
SYSTEM CALIBRTION AND CORRECTION
FLOW TRANSMITTER INSTALLATION
FLOW TRANSMITTER REMOVAL
HANDLING PRACTICES
PUMP ADJUSTMENT, ENGINE DRIVEN
PUMP INSTALLATION, AUXILIARY
PUMP INSTALLATION, ENGINE DRIVEN
PUMP REMOVAL, AUXILIARY
PUMP REMOVAL, ENGINE DRIVEN
QUANTITY
QUANTITY
FUEL QUANTITY
FUEL QUANTITY
FUEL QUANTITY
INDICATORS
INDICATOR CALIBRATION
SENSORS
SENSOR INSTALLATION
SENSOR REMOVAL
28-10-00
28-10-00
12-10-00
28-20-00
73-30-00
73-30-00
71-00-00
73-30-00
73-30-00
28-00-00
28-20-00
28-20-00
28-20-00
28-20-00
28-20-00
28-40-00
28-40-00
28-40-00
28-40-00
28-40-00
REMOVAL
SELECTOR VALVE INSTALLATION
SELECTOR VALVE REMOVAL
STRAINER INSTL
VALVE)
FUEL STRAINER INSTL WING FUEL CELLS)
SELECTOR VALVE)
FUEL STRAINER REMOVAL
FUEL CELL)
FUEL STRAINER REMOVAL
FUEL STRAINERS, CLEANING
FUEL SYSTEM ADJUSTMENT (EA-l AND AFTER)
FUEL SYSTEM ADJUSTMENT (TURBOCHARGED)
FUEL SYSTEM DRAINS
FUEL SYSTEM
FULL THROTTLE ADJUSTMENT
FUSELAGE ACCESS OPENINGS (A36 AND A36TC)
FUSELAGE ACCESS OPENINGS (F33A AND F33C)
FUSELAGE ACCESS OPENINGS (V35B)
FUSELAGE SKIN THICKNESS (A36 AND A36TC)
FUSELAGE SKIN THICKNESS (F33A AND F33C)
FUSELAGE SKIN THICKNESS (V35B)
28-00-00
28-20-00
28-20-00
28-20-00
GALVANIC CORROSION
20-09-00
IN-TR-OD
32-10-00
FUEL
FUEL
FUEL
FUEL
tSELECTOR
IWING
GAMA APPLICATION
GEAR ASSEMBLY, MAIN LANDING
GEAR ASSEMBLY, NOSE LANDING
28-20-00
28-20-00
28-20-00
28-00-00
71-00-00
71-00-00
28-00-00
28-00-00
71-00-00
53-30-00
53-30-00
53-30-00
53-30-00
53-30-00
53-30-00
32-20-00
PAGE
9
9
1
3
1
1
11
1
1
2
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
4
2
2
2
3
2
3
2
12
12
2
1
7
3
1
1
8
4
6
1
2
5
7
INTRODUCTION
Page 18
Aug 18/95
A18
BEECHCRAFT
BONANZA SERIES
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
ALPHABETICAL
COMPONENT
OR
SUB
INDEX
CHAPTER AND
ITEM
SUB CHAPTER
SYSTEM
32-10-00
32-20-00
32-10-00
32-20-00
32-60-00
32-10-00
32-20-00
32-00-00
32-10-00
32-20-00
33-20-00
PAGE
2
1
1
GEAR DISASSEMBLY, MAIN LANDING GEAR

GEAR DISASSEMBLY, NOSE LANDING
GEAR INSTALLATION, MAIN LANDING
GEAR INSTALLATION, NOSE
GEAR POSITION LIGHT ADJ, LANDING
GEAR REMOVAL, MAIN LANDING
GEAR REMOVAL, NOSE
GEAR SYSTEM, LANDING
GEAR WEAR TOLERANCE, MAIN
GEAR WEAR TOLERANCE, NOSE
GLARESHIELD FLOODLIGHT BULB REMOVAL
GLARESHIELD FLOODLIGHT BULB INSTL
GLARESHIELD INSTALLATION
GLARESHIELD REMOVAL
GRAVITY BLEEDING
GROUND COMMUNICATION
GROUND RUNNING AND WARM-UP
GUST LOCK AND DAMPER
33-20-00
39-10-00
39-10-00
32-40-00
23-10-00
71-00-00
27-70-00
1
1
1
1
1
7
4
1
1
1
1
9
1
6
1
HANDLING OF ESDS COMPONENTS AND EQUIPMENT

HANDLING PRACTICES, FUEL
HEADLINER INSTALLATION
HEADLINER REMOVAL
HEAT AND VENT SYSTEM INSPECTION
HEATER AND DEFROSTER OPERATION
HEATER MUFF INSTALLATION
HEATER MUFF PRESSURE TEST
HEATER MUFF REMOVAL
HEATING AND VENTILATION, INSPECTION OF
HOISTING
HORIZONTAL STABILIZER INSTALLATION
HORIZONTAL STABILIZER REMOVAL
HORN SYSTEM, THROTTLE WARNING
HOSE ASSEMBLY INSTALLATION
HUMIDITY AND DUST EFFECTS ON ESDS COMPONENTS AND
HYDRAULIC BRAKE SYSTEM
HYDRAULIC PRESS BEARING REMOVAL
20-02-00
28-00-00
25-00-00
25-00-00
21-40-00
21-40-00
21-40-00
21-40-00
21-40-00
21-40-00
07-00-00
55-10-00
55-10-00
32-60-00
20-06-00
20-02-00
32-40-00
20-05-00
3
2
5
5
7
1
7
7
7
7
1
1
1
1
1
8
1
1
30-00-00
71-00-00
71-00-00
1
7
8
ICE AND RAIN PROTECTION

IDLE SPEED AND MIXTURE ADJUSTMENT
EQUIPMENT
(EXCEPT 10-550 ENG)

(10-550 ENG)
INTRODUCTION
A18
Page 19
Aug 18/95
BEECHCRAFT
BONANZA SERIES
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
ALPHABETICAL INDEX
COMPONENT ITEM
OR SUB SYSTEM
CHAPTER AND
SUB CHAPTER
IGNITION AND STARTER SWITCH

IGNITION SYSTEM
IGNITION TROUBLESHOOTING
INDEFINITE STORAGE
INDEX GUIDE
INDICATOR CALIBRATION, FUEL QUANTITY
INDICATORS, FUEL QUANTITY
INDIRECT ELECTRICAL BONDING
INDUCTION AIR FILTER
INSP OF FUEL CELL VENT LINE/FILLER CAPS
INSPECTING PITOT SYSTEM HOSES
INSPECTION GUIDE 100-HOUR
INSPECTION OF FUEL CELL FLAPPER VALVE
INSPECTION OF HEATING AND VENTILATION
INSPECTION OF THE HINGES
INSPECTION OF THE OUTSIDE AIR TEMP GAGE
INSPECTION, OUTBOARD WING MAIN SPAR CAP
INSTRUMENT AIR PRESSURE, LOW
INSTRUMENT AIR SYSTEM
INSTRUMENT AIR SYSTEM SERVICING
INSTRUMENT CLUSTER INSTt,
74-00-00
74-00-00
74-00-00
10-00-00
IN-TR-OD
28-40-00
28-40-00
20-03-00
INSTRUMENT CLUSTER
REMOVAL, ENGINE
ENGINE AND FLIGHT
POST LIGHT INSTALLATION
POST LIGHT REMOVAL
REMOVAL, ENGINE AND FLIGHT
WEDGE LIGHT TRAY INSTL
WEDGE LIGHT TRAY REMOVAL
INSTRUMENT INSTL,
INSTRUMENT
INSTRUMENT
INSTRUMENT
INSTRUMENT
INSTRUMENT
JACKING
KEYWASHERS
LANDING
LANDING
LANDING
LANDING
LANDING
LANDING
LANDING
(TAB
GEAR
GEAR
GEAR
GEAR
GEAR
GEAR
GEAR
AND CUP
TYPES)
INSTALLATION
ACTUATOR ASSEMBLY INSTL

ACTUATOR ASSEMBLY REMOVAL
ASSEMBLY, MAIN
ASSEMBLY, NOSE
CLEANING AND PARTS REPL, MAIN
CLEANING AND PARTS REPL, NOSE
DISASSEMBLY, MAIN
PAGE
1
1
1
1
3
1
1
1
3
12-20-00
28-20-00
34-10-00
05-20-00
28-10-00
21-40-00
27-21-00
34-10-00
57-00-00
36-00-00
36-00-00
36-00-00
39-10-00
39-10-00
39-10-00
33-20-00
33-20-00
39-10-00
33-20-00
33-20-00
3
2
5
6
7
7
3
11
3
1
3
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
07-00-00
20-07-00
32-30-00
1
1
5
7
4
2
2
32-30-00
32-10-00
32-20-00
32-10-00
32-20-00
32-10-00
INTRODUCTION
Page 20
Aug 18/95
A18
BEECHCRAFT
BONANZA SERIES
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
ALPHABETICAL INDEX
COMPONENT
OR
CHAPTER AND
ITEM
SUB
SUB SYSTEM
LANDING GEAR DISASSEMBLY, NOSE

LANDING GEAR DYNAMIC BRAKE RELAY CHECK
LANDING GEAR DYNAMIC BRAKE RELAY INSTL
LANDING GEAR DYNAMIC BRAKE RELAY REMVL
LANDING GEAR ENGINE COMPARTMENT-LOCATED RETRACTAND
PREVENT SWITCH ADJUSTMENT
AFTER,AND CJ-180 AND
LANDING GEAR ENGINE COMPARTMENT-LOCATED
WARNING SWITCH ADJUSTMENT
(CE-748,CE-772,iHRU CE-1300,CE-1302 THRU
CE-1306,CJ-149 THRU CJ-179,D10097,D-10120
AND AFTER,E-1111,E-1241 THRU 2110,EXCEPT
E-1946 AND E-2104,AND EA-1 THRU EA-388,
CHAPTER
PAGE
32-20-00
32-30-00
32-30-00
32-30-00
32-60-00
1
2
2
2
6
32-60-00
32-60-00
32-60-00
32-30-00
32-10-00
32-20-00
32-10-00
32-20-00
32-10-00
32-20-00
32-30-00
32-30-00
32-60-00
1
1
1
1
1
2
1
2
2
3
32-60-00
32-40-00
32-30-00
32-20-00
32-30-00
32-30-00
1
1
1
8
8
32-30-00
32-30-00
32-30-00
32-30-00
32-30-00
32-30-00
32-30-00
32-30-00
7
9
2
2
1
4
9
11
AFTERjCE1301.CE-1307
EXCEPT EA-320)
LANDING GEAR ENGINE COMPARTMENT-LOCATED
(CE-1301,CE-1307 AND AFTER,AND CJ-180 AND AFTER)
LANDING GEAR EXTENSION SYSTEM, MANUAL
LANDING GEAR INSTALLATION, MAIN
LANDING GEAR INSTALLATION, NOSE
LANDING GEAR LUBRICATION, MAIN
LANDING GEAR LUBRICATION, NOSE
LANDING GEAR OVERHAUL, MAIN
LANDING GEAR OVERHAUL, NOSE
LANDING GEAR MOTOR INSTALLATION
LANDING GEAR MOTOR REMOVAL
LANDING GEAR PEDESTAL-LOCATED WARNING
SWITCH ADJUSTMENT (E-1946,E-2104,E-2111
AND AFTER,AND EA-320,EA-389 AND AFTER)
LANDING GEAR PEDESTAL-LOCATED RETRACTPREVENT SWITCH ADJUSTMENT (E-2458,E-2468 AND
AFTER, AND EA-320, EA-389 AND AFTER)
LANDING GEAR POSITION LIGHT ADJUSTMENT
LANDING GEAR REMOVAL, MAIN
LANDING GEAR REMOVAL, NOSE
LANDING GEAR RETRACT ACTUATOR ASSEMBLY
LANDING GEAR RETRACT ACTUATOR CLEANING AND
PARTS REPLACEMENT
LANDING GEAR RETRACT ACTUATOR DISASSEMBLY
LANDING GEAR RETRACT ACTUATOR FUNCTIONAL TEST
LANDING GEAR RETRACT ROD INSTL, MAIN
LANDING GEAR RETRACT ROD REMOVAL, MAIN
LANDING GEAR RETRACT SYSTEM LUBRICATION
LANDING GEAR RIGGING
LANDING GEAR SAFETY SYS MAIN AND ADJUST
LANDING GEAR SAFETY SYS MICROSWITCH ADJUST
INTRODUCTION
Page 21
A18
Aug 18/95
BEECHCRAFT
BONANZA SERIES
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
ALPHABETICAL INDEX
COMPONENT ITEM
OR SUB SYSTEM
CHAPTER AND
SUB CHAPTER
32-30-00
LANDING GEAR SAFETY SYS PRESS SWITCH ADJ
32-30-00
LANDING GEAR SAFETY SYS SAFETY SWITCH CHECK
32-30-00
LANDING GEAR SAFETY SYS SAFETY SWITCH CHECK
32-20-00
LANDING GEAR SHIMMY DAMPER
32-20-00
LANDING GEAR SHIMMY DAMPER OVERHAUL
32-20-00
LANDING GEAR SHIMMY DAMPER WEAR TOLERANCE
12-20-00
LANDING GEAR SHOCK STRUTS
32-00-00
LANDING GEAR SYSTEM
32-00-00
LANDING GEAR WEAR TOLERANCE, MAIN
32-00-00
LANDING GEAR WEAR TOLERANCE, NOSE
33-40-00
LANDING LIGHT INSTALLATION
33-40-00
LANDING LIGHT REMOVAL
28-10-00
LEAKAGE TEST, FUEL CELL
08-00-00
LEVELING
33-20-00
AND/OR POSITION)
LIGHT BULB INSTL
33-20-00
LIGHT BULB REMVL
WARNING AND/OR POSITION)LIGHTS
33-40-00
LIGHT BULB REPLACEMENT CHART-1
33-40-00
LIGHT, STEP
32-60-00
LNDG GR RETRACT-PREVENT SW-ENG COMPT-LOCATED (CE-1301,
CE-1307 AND AFTER;CJ-180 AND AFTER)
32-60-00
LNDG GR WARN SW ADJUST-ENG COMPT-LOCATED (CE-748,
CE-772 THRU CE-1300, CE-1302 THRU CE-1306; CJ-149 THRU
C3-179, D-10097, D-10120, AND AFTER; E-llll, E-1241 THRU E-2110,
EXCEPT E-1946 AND E-2104; EA-1 THRU EA-388, EXCEPT EA-320
32-60-00
LNDG GR WARN SW ADJUST-ENG COMPT-LOCATED (CE-1301
CE-1307 AND AFTER; CJ-180 AND AFTER)
33-40-00
LIGHT, STEP
20-07-00
LOCKWIRE AND COTTER PIN REQUIREMENTS
20-07-00
LOCKWIRE HOLE ALIGNMENT
20-07-00
LOCKWIRE INSTALLATION PROCEDURES
20-07-00
LOCKWIRE TWISTING
IN-TR-OD
LOG OF EFFECTIVE REVISIONS
33-40-00
LOWER ROTATING BEACON INSTALLATION
33-40-00
LOWER ROTATING BEACON REMOVAL
91-00-00
LUBRICANTS, THREAD
32-30-00
LUBRICATION LANDING GEAR RETRACT SYSTEM
12-20-00
LUBRICATION OF LANDING GEAR UPLOCK ROLLERS
32-10-00
LUBRICATION, MAIN LANDING GEAR
32-20-00
LUBR~CATION, NOSE LANDING GEAR
12-20-00
LUBRICATION
IWARN
MAGNESIUM CORROSION REMOVAL

MAGNESIUM CORROSION TREATMENT
MAGNETO DROP-OFF CHECK
20-09-00
20-09-00
74-00-00
PAGE
11
9
9
9
9
12
2
1
7
4
5
5
6
1
1
1
6
1
6
1
1
1
4
1
4
2
5
4
11
1
5
1
1
5
4
4
INTRODUCTION
Page 22
Aug 18/95
A18
BEECHCRAFT
BONANZA SERIES
MAINTENANCE MAN UAL
ALPHABETICAL INDEX
COMPONENT
OR SUB
ITEM
SYSTEM
CHAPTER AND
SUB CHAPTER
PAGE
MAGNETO INSTALLATION AND TIMING

MAGNETO POINT GAP AND TIMING
MAGNETO PREPARATION FOR INSTL
MAGNETO PREPARATION
MAGNETO PRESSURIZATION AIR FILTER
MAGNETO REMOVAL
MAGNETO TIMING
MAIN LANDING GEAR ASSEMBLY
MAIN LANDING GEAR CLEANING AND PARTS REPL
MAIN LANDING GEAR DISASSEMBLY
MAIN LANDING GEAR INSTALLATION
MAIN LANDING GEAR LUBRICATION
MAIN LANDING GEAR REMOVAL
MAIN LANDING GEAR RETRACT ROD INSTALLATION
MAIN LANDING GEAR RETRACT ROD REMOVAL
MAIN LANDING GEAR SHOCK STRUTS SERVICING
MAIN WHEEL AND BRAKE ASSY INSTALLATION
MAIN WHEEL AND BRAKE ASSEMBLY REMOVAL
MAIN WHEEL ASSEMBLIES
MAIN WHEEL INSPECTION AND CLEANING
MAIN WHEEL JACKING
MANIFOLD PRESSURE ADJUSTMENT
MAP LIGHT BULB INSTALLATION
MAP LIGHT BULB REMOVAL
MARKING OF ESDS COMPONENTS AND EQUIPMENT
MASTER CYLINDER ASSEMBLY, BRAKE
MASTER CYLINDER CLEANING AND PARTS RPL, BRAKE
MASTER CYLINDER DISASSEMBLY, BRAKE
MASTER CYLINDER INSTALLATION, BRAKE
MASTER CYLINDER LINKAGE ADJUST, BRAKE
MASTER CYLINDER REMOVAL, BRAKE
MECHANICAL PRESS BEARING REMOVAL
METAL SURFACE PREPARATION AND ELECTRICAL BONDING
MODEL DESIGNATION PLACARD
MOORING
MOTOR INSTALLATION, FLAP
MOTOR INSTALLATION, LANDING GEAR
MOTOR REMOVAL, FLAP
MOTOR REMOVAL, LANDING GEAR
74-00-00
74-00-00
74-00-00
74-00-00
74-00-00
74-00-00
74-00-00
32-10-00
32-10-00
32-10-00
32-10-00
32-10-00
32-10-00
32-30-00
32-30-00
12-20-00
32-40-00
32-40-00
32-40-00
32-40-00
07-00-00
71-00-00
81-00-00
33-20-00
33-20-00
20-02-00
32-40-00
32-40-00
32-40-00
32-40-00
32-40-00
32-40-00
20-05-00
20-03-00
11-00-00
10-00-00
27-50-00
32-30-00
27-50-00
32-30-00
4
3
3
4
3
3
4
5
4
2
1
1
1
3
3
2
4
3
1
4
1
15
1
2
2
11
7
7
7
7
7
6
1
3
1
1
4
1
3
1
NONPOSITIONING TYPE FITTING INSTALLATION

NOSE GEAR INSTALLATION
NOSE GEAR LUBRICATION
NOSE GEAR REMOVAL
20-06-00
32-20-00
32-20-00
32-20-00
2
1
1
1
INTRODUCTION
A18
Page 23
Aug 18/95
BEECHCRAFT
BONANZA SERIES
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
ALPHABETICAL INDEX
COMPONENT ITEM
OR SUB SYSTEM
NOSE
NOSE
NOSE
NOSE
NOSE
NOSE
NOSE
NOSE
NOSE
NOSE
NOSE
NOSE
NOSE
NOSE
NOSE
NOSE
NOSE
GEAR SHIMMY DAMPENER ASSEMBLY

GEAR SHIMMY DAMPENER CLEANING/PARTS REPL
GEAR SHIMMY DAMPENER DISASSEMBLY
GEAR SHIMMY DAMPENER INSTALLATION
GEAR SHIMMY DAMPENER MFG WEAR TOLERANCE
GEAR SHIMMY DAMPENER REMOVAL
LANDING GEAR ASSEMBLY
LANDING GEAR CLEANING AND PARTS REPL
LANDING GEAR DISASSEMBLY
LANDING GEAR MFG WEAR TOLERANCE
LANDING GEAR SHOCK STRUT
WHEEL ASSEMBLY
WHEEL INSPECTION AND CLEANING
WHEEL INSTALLATION
WHEEL REMOVAL
WHEEL STEERING
WHEEL TRAVEL STOP ADJUSTMENT
OIL BREAK-IN
OIL COOLER INSTALLATION
OIL COOLER REMOVAL
OIL FILTER INSTALLATION
OIL FILTER REMOVAL
OIL GRADES
OIL HIGH TEMPERATURE
OIL PRESSURE ADJUSTMENT
OIL SYSTEM
OIL SYSTEM
OPENABLE WINDOW INSTALLATION
OPENABLE WINDOW REMOVAL
OUTSIDE AIR TEMPERATURE GAGE REMOVAL
OUTSIDE AIR TEMPERATURE GAGE
OUTSIDE AIR TEMPERATURE GAGE INSTL
OVERHAUL AND REPLACEMENT SCHEDULE
OXYGEN CYLINDER INSTALLATION
OXYGEN CONTROL CABLE ADJUSTMENT
OXYGEN CYLINDER REMOVAL
OXYGEN CYLINDER RETESTING
OXYGEN HIGH PRESSURE TEST PROCEDURE
OXYGEN LOW PRESSURE TEST PROCEDURE
OXYGEN SERVICING
OXYGEN SYSTEM PURGING
OXYGEN SYSTEM
CHAPTER AND
SUB CHAPTER
32-20-00
32-20-00
32-20-00
32-20-00
32-20-00
32-20-00
32-20-00
32-20-00
32-20-00
32-20-00
12-20-00
32-40-00
32-40-00
32-40-00
32-40-00
32-50-00
32-50-00
79-00-00
79-00-00
79-00-00
12-10-00
12-10-00
79-00-00
79-00-00
71-00-00
12-10-00
79-00-00
56-20-00
56-20-00
34-10-00
34-10-00
34-10-00
05-10-00
35-00-00
35-00-00
35-00-00
35-00-00
35-00-00
35-00-00
12-10-00
35-00-00
12-10-00
PAGE
10
9
1
9
12
7
7
2
1
4
2
1
5
5
5
1
1
1
1
1
2
2
1
1
17
2
1
1
1
3
2
3
1
6
7
6
8
2
2
5
3
4
INTRODUCTION
Page 24
Aug 18/95
A18
BEECHCRAFT
BONANZA SERIES
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
ALPHABETICAL INDEX
COMPONENT
ITEM
OR SUB SYSTEM
PACKAGING OF ESDS COMPONENTS AND EQUIPMENT

PAINT FREE AREAS
PAINT FREE AREAS
PAINT REMOVAL FROM MAGNESIUM
PAINT REMOVAL FROM MAGNESIUM SURFACES
PAINTING AREAS OF HIGH HUMIDITY
PAINTING BATTERY BOX AND LID
PAINTING MAGNESIUM S.URFACES
PAINTING MAGNESIUM
PAINTING MUD AND SPRAY AREAS
PAINTING PROCEDURES, SPECIAL
PAINTING RUBBER SEALS
PAINTING, PROPELLER BLADE
PARKING BRAKE ADJUSTMENT
PARKING BRAKE CLEANING AND PARTS REPLACEMENT
PARKING BRAKE VALVE ASSEMBLY
PARKING BRAKE VALVE DISASSEMBLY
PARKING BRAKE VALVE INSTALLATION
PARKING BRAKE VALVE REMOVAL
PARKING
PASSENGER READING LIGHT BULB INSTL
PASSENGER READING LIGHT BULB REMOVAL
PERMANENT STATIC CONTROL WORKSTATION
PINS, TAPER
PIPE THREAD FITTING INSTALLATION
PITOT AND STATIC PRESSURE SYSTEM
PITOT AND STATIC SYSTEM TROUBLESHOOTING
PITOT SYSTEM PRESSURE TEST
PITOT SYSTEM
PLACARD REPLACEMENT
PLATES/SKIN
PORTABLE STATIC CONTROL WORKSTATION
POSITION LIGHT ADJ, LANDING GEAR
POST LIGHTS
POWER PLANT
POWER SUPPLY UNIT INSTALLATION
POWER SUPPLY UNIT REMOVAL
PREPARATION FOR
PRESERVATION OF FUEL CELL (GOODYEAR)
PRESERVATION OF FUEL CELL (UNIROYAL)
PRESSURE POT BLEEDING
PRESSURE REGULATOR ADJUSTMENT
PRESSURE REGULATOR INSTALLATION
PRESSURE REGULATOR REMOVAL
PRESSURE, LOW INSTRUMENT AIR
CHAPTER AND
SUB CHAPTER
20-02-00
20-08-00
20-00-00
20-00-00
20-08-00
20-00-00
20-00-00
20-08-00
20-08-00
20-00-00
20-00-00
20-00-00
20-00-00
32-40-00
32-40-00
32-40-00
32-40-00
32-40-00
32-40-00
10-00-00
33-20-00
33-20-00
20-02-00
27-00-00
20-06-00
34-10-00
34-10-00
34-10-00
34-10-00
20-08-00
53-30-00
20-02-00
32-60-00
33-20-00
71-00-00
33-40-00
33-40-00
10-00-00
28-10-00
28-10-00
32-40-00
36-00-00
36-00-00
36-00-00
36-00-00
PAGE
10
7
6
3
5
5
6
6
5
5
5
5
5
7
7
7
7
7
7
1
1
1
4,6
2
2
1
1
1
1
3
1
5,8
1
1
1
2
2
4
9
9
10
7
6
6
2
INTRODUCTION
A18
Page 25
Aug 18/95
BEECHCRAFT
BONANZA SERIES
MAINTENANCE MAN UAL
ALPHABETICAL INDEX
COMPONENT ITEM
OR SUB SYSTEM
CHAPTER AND
SUB CHAPTER
PRETREATMENT (WASH) PRIMER FOR URETHANE PAINT

PRIMARY STRUCTURAL COMPONENTS
PROPELLER ADJUSTMENT
PROPELLER BLADE MAINTENANCE
PROPELLER BLADES PAINTING
PROPELLER DEICE BOOTS
PROPELLER DEICER BOOT INSTALLATION
PROPELLER DEICER BOOT REMOVAL
PROPELLER DEICER TROUBLESHOOTING
PROPELLER GOVERNOR ADJUSTMENT
PROPELLER GOVERNOR INSTALLATION
PROPELLER GOVERNOR REMOVAL
PROPELLER INSTALLATION
PROPELLER REMOVAL
PROPELLER REPAIR, MINOR
PROPELLERS
PUMP INSTALLATION, AUXILIARY FUEL
PUMP INSTALLATION, ENGINE DRIVEN FUEL
PUMP REMOVAL, AUXILIARY FUEL
20-08-00
51-00-00
61-10-00
12-20-00
RADAR ANTENNA INSTALLATION

RADAR ANTENNA REMOVAL
34-40-00
34-40-00
34-40-00
39-10-00
39-10-00
20-03-00
36-00-00
36-00-00
36-00-00
32-30-00
32-30-00
32-30-00
32-40-00
20-09-00
20-06-00
20-02-00
51-00-00
28-10-00
RADAR, WEATHER
RADIO/AVIONICS EQUIPMENT INSTALLATION
RADIO/AVIONICS EQUIPMENT REMOVAL
RECOMMENDED MATERIALS
REGULATOR ADJUSTMENT, PRESSURE
REGULATOR INSTALLATION, PRESSURE
REGULATOR REMOVAL, PRESSURE
RELAY CHECK, DYNAMIC BRAKE
RELAY INSTL, LANDING GEAR DYNAMIC BRAKE
RELAY REMOVAL, LANDING GEAR DYNAMIC BRAKE
RELINING THE BRAKES
REMOVAL OF CORROSION FROM ALUMINUM SURFACES
REMOVAL OF TUBE AND HOSE ASSEMBLIES
REMOVAL/INSTALLATION OF ESDS EQUIPMENT
REPAIR OF FIBERGLASS COMPONENTS
REPAIR OF FUEL CELL (GOOOYEAR
REPAIR OF FUEL CELL (UNIROYAL
REPLACING ELEVATOR TRIM TAB
RESERVOIR INSTL, FUEL (CJ-149 AND AFT)
RETAINING RINGS (SPIROLOX, ETC.) INSTALLATION
RETRACT ACTUATOR CLEANING AND PARTS REPL, LANDING GEAR
RETRACT ACTUATOR FUNCTIONAL TEST, LANDING GEAR
20-08-00
12-20-00
30-60-00
30-60-00
30-60-00
61-20-00
61-20-00
61-20-00
61-10-00
61-10-00
61-10-00
61-10-00
28-20-00
28-20-00
28-20-00
28-10-00
27-30-00
28-10-00
20-07-00
32-30-00
32-30-00
PACE
4
1
1
3
7
1
5
5
1
1
1
1
1
1
2
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
2
1
2
7
6
6
3
3
3
6
3
1
1
2
9
9
6
1
5
8
9
INTRODUCTION
Page 26
Aug 18/95
A18
BEECHCRAFT
BONANZA SERIES
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
ALPHABETICAL INDEX
COMPONENT
OR SUB
ITEM
SYSTEM
RETRACT
RETRACT
RETRACT
RETRACT
RETRACT
RIGGING
RIGGING
RIGGING
RIGGING
RIGGING
RIGGING
RIGGING
RIGGING
RIGGING
RIGGING
ACTUATOR ASSY, LANDING GEAR

ACTUATOR DISASSY, LANDING GEAR
ROD TNSTL, MAIN LANDING GEAR
ROD REMOVAL, MAIN LANDING GEAR
SYSTEM LUBRICATION, LANDING GEAR
AILERON CONTROL SYSTEM
ELEV TAB, COMPENSATE YAW TO LEFT
EtEV TAB, COMPENSATE YAW r0 RH
ELEVATOR CONTROL SYSTEM
ELEVATOR TAB
ELEVATOR TRIM TAB
RUDDER CONTROL SYSTEM
THE CONTROL COLUMN CHAIN
T~E LANDING GEAR
RIGGING, ELEVATOR TAB, CORRECT FOR YAW
ROTATING BEACON
CHAPTER AND
SUB CHAPTER
32-30-00
32-30-00
32-30-00
32-30-00
32-30-00
27-10-00
27-11-00
27-21-00
27-21-00
27-30-00
27-21-00
27-30-00
27-20-00
27-10-00
32-30-00
27-21-00
33-40-00
12-20-00
ROTCN LOCKS
RUBBER SEALS
RUDDER BALANCING
RUDDER CONTROL SYSTEM RIGGING
RUDDER INSTALLATION
RUDDER REMOVAL
RUDDER RIGGING PROCEDURE
RUDDER-MAINTENANCE PRACTICES
RUDDER, MODELS F33A, F33C, A36 AND A36TC
RUDDER, V35B
RUDDERVATOR BALANCING
RUDOERVATOR INSTALLATION
RUDDERVATOR REMOVAL
RUDOERVATOR Rigging
PRACTICES
RUDDERVATOR-MAINTENANCE
27-20-00
27-21-00
55-20-00
27-21-00
27-21-00
27-21-00
27-21-00
SAFETY SWITCH CHECKING IN TEST POSITION, LANDING GEAR

SAFETY SYS MAINT AND ADJ, LANDING GEAR
SAFETY SYSTEM OPTIONAL LANDING GEAR
SCHEDULED MAINTENANCE CHECKS
SEAT INSTALLATION, PASSENGER
SEAT INSTALLATION, PILOT AND COPILOT
SEAT INSTL, FIFTH AND SIXTH, (A36 ANO A36SC)
SEAT INSTL, FIFTH (MODEL F33A AND V35B)
SEAT REMOVAL, FIFTH AND SIXTH (A36 AND A36TC)
SEAT REMOVAL, FIFTH (MODELS F33A AND V35B)
SEAT REMOVAL, PASSENGER
32-30-00
32-30-00
32-00-00
05-20-00
25-00-00
25-00-00
25-00-00
25-00-00
25-00-00
25-00-00
25-00-00
20-08-00
55-40-00
27-20-00
27-20-00
27-20-00
27-21-00
27-20-00
PA
8
7
3
3
1
4
9
9
7
6
1
1
4
7
4
4
7
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
3
3
3
5
1
9
9
1
1
3
1
4
4
4
4
INTRODU
BEECHCRAFT
BONANZA SERIES
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
ALPHABETICAL INDEX
COMPONENT
ITEM
OR SUB SYSTEM
CHAPTER AND
SEAT REMOVAL, PILOT AND COPILOT

SEAT STOWAGE, FIFTH AND SIXTH (A36 AND A36TC)
SEAT STOWAGE, FIFTH (F33A, F33C AND V35B)
SEATING
SECONDARY STRUCTURAL COMPONENTS
SELECTOR VALVE INSTALLATION, FUEL
SELECTOR VALVE REMOVAL, FUEL
SELF-LOCKING NUTS
SENSOR INSTALLATION, FUEL QUANTITY
SENSOR REMOVAL, FUEL QUANTITY
SHAFT INSTALLATION, FLAP
SHAFT INSTALLATION, FLAP INNER FLEX
SHAFT REMOVAL, FLAP
SHAFT REMOVAL, FLAP INNER FLEX
SHIMMY DAMPER
SHIMMY DAMPER
SHIMMY DAMPENER ASSEMBLY, NOSE GEAR
SHIMMY DAMPENER CLEANING/PARTS REP NOSE GEAR
SHIMMY DAMPENER DISASSEMBLY, NOSE GEAR
SHIMMY DAMPENER INSTALLATION, NOSE GEAR
SHIMMY DAMPENER OVERHAUL, NOSE GEAR
SHIMMY DAMPENER REMOVAL, NOSE GEAR
SHIMMY DAMPENER WEAR TOLERANCE
SHOCK STRUT
SHOCK STRUT, NOSE LANDING GEAR
SHOCK STRUTS, MAIN LANDING GEAR
SHUTTLE VALVE, BRAKE
SKIN THICK, EMP (F33A, F33C, A36, A36TC)
SKIN THICKNESS, EMPENNAGE (V35B)
SKIN THICKNESS, FUSELAGE (A36 AND A36TC)
SKIN THICKNESS, FUSELAGE (F33A AND F33C)
SKIN THICKNESS, FUSELAGE (V35B)
SLIP RING ALIGNMENT
SLIP RING MACHINING
SLIP RING
SLOTTED, STEEL LOCKNUTS (PREVAILING TORQUE TYPE)
SPARK PLUGS
SPECIAL CONDITIONS CAUTIONARY NOTICE
SPECIAL PAINT PROCEDURES
SPECIAL TOOLS
STABILIZER INSIALLATION, HORIZONTAL
STABILIZER INSTALLATION, RUDDERVATOR
STABILIZER INSTALLATION, VERTICAL
STABILIZER REMOVAL, HORIZONTAL
STABILIZER REMOVAL, V35 ELEVATOR
STABILIZER REMOVAL, VERTICAL
25-00-00
25-00-00
25-00-00
25-00-00
51-00-00
28-20-00
28-20-00
20-07-00
28-40-00
28-40-00
27-50-00
27-50-00
27-50-00
27-50-00
12-20-00
32-20-00
32-20-00
32-20-00
32-20-00
32-20-00
32-20-00
32-20-00
32-20-00
12-20-00
32-20-00
SUB CHAPTER
32-10-00
32-40-00
55-00-00
55-00-00
53-30-00
53-30-00
53-30-00
30-60-00
30-60-00
30-60-00
20-07-00
12-20-00
05-10-00
20-08-00
12-20-00
55-10-00
55-10-00
55-30-00
55-10-00
55-10-00
55-30-00
PAGE
1
4
4
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
4
5
4
5
2
7
10
9
9
9
9
9
12
2
1
1
1
2
5
8
4
6
10
11
13
1
3
1
7
19
1
1
1
1
1
1
INTRODUCTION
Page 28
Aug 18/95
A18
BEECHCRAFT
BONANZA SERIES
MAINTENANCE MAN UAL

ALPHABETICAL INDEX
COMPONENT
ITEM
CHAPTER AND
OR SUB SYSTEM
SUB CHAPTER
STAINLESS STEEL AND TITANIUM SURFACES

STALL WARNING SYSTEM ADJUSTMENTS
STALL WARNING SYSTEM DESC AND OPER
STALL WARNING SYSTEM MAINT PRACTICES
STALL WARNING/SAFE FLIGHT SYS DESC/OPER
STALL WARNING
STALL WARNING/SAFE FLIGHT SYS MAINT PRAC
STANDBY AIR FILTER INSTL (INTAKE)
STANDBY AIR FILTER REMOVAL (INTAKE)
STANDBY AIR FILTER INSTL (INLINE)
STANDBY AIR FILTER REMOVAL (INLINE)
STANDBY GENERATOR-DESC AND OPER
STANDBY GENERATOR-MAINTENANCE
PRAC
STANDBY INSTRUMENT AIR SYSTEM
STARTER BRUSHES
STARTER INSTALLATION
STARTER LUBRICATION
STARTER OVERHAUL
STARTER REMOVAL
STARTER TROUBLESHOOTING
STARTING
STATIC AIR SYSTEM-EMERGENCY
STATIC AIR SYSTEM-NORMAL
STATIC SYSTEM CHECKS
STATIC WICK INSTALLATION
STATIC WICK REMOVAL
STATIC WICKS
STATION DIAGRAMS (MODEL A36 AND A36TC)
STATION DIAGRAMS (MODEL
STATION DIAGRAMS (MODEL 35
STEEL CORROSION REMOVAL
STEERING, NOSE WHEEL
STEP LIGHTL
STORAGE AND TRANSIT OF ESDS COMPONENTS AND
STORAGE, EXTENDED
STORAGE, TEMPORARY
STORAGE
STORM WINDOW INSTALLATION
STORM WINDOW REMOVAL
STRAINER INSTL (SELECTOR VALVE), FUEL
STRAINER INSTL (WING FUEL CELLS), FUEL
STRAINER REMOVAL (SELECTOR VALVE), FUEL
STRAINER REMOVAL (WING FUEL CELLS), FUEL
STRAINERS, CLEANING FUEL
STRIPPING AND CLEANING URETHANE PAINT
STROBE LIGHT POWER SUPPLY INSTL
20-03-00
27-31-00
27-31-00
27-31-00
27-31-00
27-31-00
27-31-00
36-00-00
36-00-00
36-00-00
36-00-00
24-31-00
24-31-00
36-00-00
80-10-00
80-10-00
80-10-00
80-10-00
80-10-00
80-10-00
80-10-00
34-10-00
34-10-00
34-10-00
23-60-00
23-60-00
23-60-00
06-00-00
06-00-00
06-00-00
20-09-00
32-50-00
33-40-00
33j
EQUIPMENT
20-02-00
10-00-00
10-00-00
10-00-00
56-10-00
56-10-00
28-20-00
28-20-00
28-20-00
28-20-00
28-00-00
20-08-00
33-40-00
PAGE
6
1
1
1
1
1
1
5
5
5
5
1
1
1
2
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
2
1
1
1
8
6
7
5
1
1
12
1
2
1
2
2
2
3
2
3
2
4
INTRODUCTION
A18
Page 29
Aug 18/95
BEECHCRAFT
BONANZA SERIES
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
ALPHABETICAL INDEX
COMPONENT ITEM
OR SUB SYSTEM
CHAPTER AND
SUB CHAPTER
STROBE LIGHT POWER SUPPLY REMOVAL

STROBE LIGHT
STRUCTURAL REPAIR
SUBPANEL, RIGHT AND LEFT
SUPPLEMENTARY PUBLICATIONS
SURFACES SUSCEPTIBLE TO MUO AND SPRAY
SURFACES, CONTROL
33-40-00
33-40-00
51-00-00
39-10-00
IN-TR-OD
20-08-00
27-00-00
2
1
1
2
6
7
1
TAB FREE PLAY, CHECKING ELEVATOR

TAB HINGES, INSPECTION
TAIL NAVIGATION LIGHT INSTALLATION
TAIL NAVIGATION LIGHT REMOVAL
TAIL STROBE/NAV LIGHT INSTALLATION
TAIL STROBE/NAV LIGHT REMOVAL
TAPER PINS, FLIGHT CONTROLS
TAXI LIGHTINSTALLATION
TAXI LIGHT REMOVAL
TAXIING
TEMPORARY STORAGE
TEST FOR FUEL CELL LEAKAGE
TESTING THE STATIC SYSTEM FOR LEAKS
THREAD LUBRICANTS
THROTTLE ADJUSTMENT
THROTTLE WARNING HORN SYSTEM
TIE-DOWN, NORMAL
TIME LIMITS
TIRE AND WHEEL MAINTENANCE
TIRES
TIRES
TIT INDICATOR CALIBRATION
TIT INDICATOR CALIBRATION
27-30-00
27-21-00
33-40-00
33-40-00
33-40-00
33-40-00
27-00-00
33-40-00
33-40-00
09-00-00
10-00-00
28-10-00
34-10-00
91-00-00
71-00-00
32-60-00
10-00-00
05-10-00
32-40-00
12-20-00
32-40-00
77-00-00
81-00-00
20-00-00
91-00-00
91-00-00
09-00-00
32-50-00
27-30-00
27-30-00
27-30-00
27-30-00
33-20-00
33-20-00
27-30-00
27-30-00
11
10
TORQUE WRENCHES
TORQUING COARSE THREAD BOLTS IN SMEAR
TORQUING FINE THREAD BOLTS IN SMEAR
TOWING
TRAVEL STOP ADJUSTMENT, NOSE WHEEL
TRIM TAB ACTUATOR BRUSH REPLACE SCHED, ELEC
TRIM TAB ACTUATOR INSTL, ELEC, (F33A, F33C, V35B)
TRIM TAB ACTUATOR REMOVAL, ELEC, (F33A, F33C, V35B)
TRIM TAB ACTUATOR, ELEVATOR
TRIM TAB LIGHT BULB INSTALLATION
TRIM TAB LIGHT BULB REMOVAL
TRIM TAB SERVO INSTL, ELECTRIC ELEVATOR
TRIM TAB SERVO REM, ELECTRIC ELEVATOR
PAGE
5
5
4
4
2
5
5
2
2
6
2
11
8
1
1
1
3
1
1
1
8
1
11
11
1
1
13
12
12
6
2
2
11
11
INTRODUCTION
Page 30
Aug 18/95
A18
BEECHCRAFT
BONANZA SERIES
MAINTENANCE MAN UAL
ALPHABETICAL INDEX
COMPONENT ITEM
CHAPTER AND
OR SUB
SUB
SYSTEM
TROUBLESHOOTING LANDING GEAR ELECTRICAL SYSTEM

IROUBLESHOOTING-PITOT AND STATIC SYSTEM
CHAPTER
PAGE
TROUBLESHOOTING
TUBE DAMAGE LIMITS
TUBE INSTALLATION
TUBING CLAMP TO BONDING JUMPER ELECTRICAL BONDING
TURBOCHARGER ADJUSTMENT AND TEST
TURBOCHARGER CONTROLLER INSTALLATION
TURBOCHARGER CONTROLLER REMOVAL
TURBOCHARGER INSPECTION
TURBOCHARGER INSTALLATION
TURBOCHARGER LEAK TEST
TURBOCHARGER REMOVAL
TURBOCHARGER SHAFT FREEING
TURBOCHARGER SYSTEM
TURBOCHARGER TROUBLESHOOTING
TURNBUCKLE LOCK CLIP INSTALLATION
TYPICAL BLIND GROUND STUD
TYPICAL GROUND STUD ELECTRICAL BONDING
32-00-00
34-10-00
36-00-00
21-50-00
32-40-00
20-06-00
20-06-00
20-03-00
81-00-00
81-00-00
81-00-00
05-20-00
81-00-00
81-00-00
81-00-00
81-00-00
81-00-00
81-00-00
20-07-00
20-03-00
20-03-00
2
1
1
4
3
4
2
8
5
8
8
2
7
5
7
7
1
1
5
6
6
UPPER ROTATING BEACON INSTALLATION

UPPER ROTATING BEACON REMOVAL
URETHANE (EXTERIOR COLORS)
URETHANE PAINT PROCEDURES (ALUMINUM)
URETHANE PAINT REPAIR PROCEDURES
URETHANE PAINTS
URETHANE PRIMER
URETHANE TOPCOATS
URETHANE TOUCH-UP REPAIR
UTILITY DOOR ADJUSTMENT
UTILITY DOOR INSTL (MODEL A36 AND A36TC)
UTILITY DOOR LATCH PIN ADJUSTMENT
UTILITY DOOR REMOVAL (MODEL A36 AND A36TC)
UTILITY DOOR WINDOW INSTALLATION
UTILITY DOOR WINDOW REMOVAL
UTILITY DOORS (MODEL A36 AND A36TC)
33-40-00
33-40-00
20-00-00
20-00-00
20-08-00
20-08-00
20-08-00
20-08-00
20-08-00
52-30-00
52-30-00
52-30-00
52-30-00
56-20-00
56-20-00
52-00-00
5
5
2
4
4
3
5
5
5
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
VALVE ASSEMBLY, PARKING BRAKE

VALVE DISASSEMBLY, PARKING BRAKE
VALVE INSTALLATION, PARKING
32-40-00
32-40-00
32-40-00
7
7
7
TROUBLESHOOTING, INSTRUMENT AIR SYSTEM

TROUBLESHOOTING, AIR-CONDITIONING
INTRODUCTION
A18
Page 31
Aug 18/95
BEECHCRAFT
BONANZA SERIES
MAINTENANCE MAN UAL
ALPHABETICAL INDEX
COMPONENT
ITEM
OR SUB SYSTEM
VALVE
VALVE
VALVE
VALVE
VALVE
REMOVAL, PARKING
INSTALLATION,
FUEL SELECTOR
INSTALLATION, PARKING BRAKE
REMOVAL, FUEL SELECTOR
REMOVAL, PARKING BRAKE
VALVE, BRAKE SHUTTLE
VENDOR PUBLICATIONS
FILLER CAPS INSP, FUEL CELL
VENT LINES
VENTILATION BLOWER INSTALLATION
VENTILATION BLOWER REMOVAL
VERTICAL STABILIZER INSTALLATION
VERTICAL STABILIZER REMOVAL
VOLTAGE REGULATOR ADJUSTMENTS
VOLTAGE REGULATOR INSTALLATION
VOLTAGE REGULATOR REMOVAL
WARNING AND POSITION LIGHT BULB INSTL

WARNING AND POSITION LIGHT BULB REMOVAL
WARNING HORN SYSTEM, THROTTLE
WAXING AIRPLANE FINISHES
WEAR AND WEAR LIMITS, BRAKE
WEATHER RADAR
WHEEL AND TIRE MAINTENANCE
WHEEL ASSEMBLIES, MAIN
WHEEL ASSEMBLY AND BRAKE INSTALLATION
WHEEL ASSEMBLY AND BRAKE REMOVAL
WHEEL ASSEMBLY, NOSE
WHEEL INSPECTION AND CLEANING MAIN
WHEEL INSPECTION AND CLEANING, NOSE
WHEEL INSTALLATION, NOSE
WHEEL REMOVAL, NOSE
WHEEL TRAVEL STOP ADJUSTMENT, NOSE
WICKS, STATIC
WINDOW CLEANING
WINDOW INSTALLATION (FORWARD LEFT)
WINDOW REMOVAL (FORWARD LEFT)
WINDOWS AFT OF OPENABLE WINDOW INSTL
WINDOWS AFT OF OPENABLE WINDOWS REMOVAL
WINDSHIELD INSTALLATION
WINDSHIELD REMOVAL
WING ACCESS OPENINGS
WING ADJUSTMENT
WING ATTACH FITTINGS
WING BOLT, NUT AND FITTING INSPECTION
CHAPTER AND
SUB CHAPTER
32-40-00
28-20-00
32-40-00
28-20-00
32-40-00
32-40-00
IN-TR-OD
28-20-00
21-50-00
21-50-00
55-30-00
55-30-00
24-30-00
24-30-00
24-30-00
33-20-00
33-20-00
32-60-00
20-08-00
32-40-00
34-40-00
32-40-00
32-40-00
32-40-00
32-40-00
32-40-00
32-40-00
32-40-00
32-40-00
32-40-00
32-50-00
23-60-00
56-00-00
56-10-00
56-10-00
56-20-00
56-20-00
56-10-00
56-10-00
57-30-00
57-00-00
57-40-00
57-00-00
PAGE
7
2
7
2
7
1
6
3
11
11
1
1
7
7
6
1
1
1
3
1
1
3
1
4
3
1
4
5
6
5
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
4
1
7
INTRODUCTION
Page 32
Aug 18/95
A18
BEECHCRAFT
BONANZA SERIES
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
ALPHABETICAL INDEX
COMPONENT
OR SUB
WING
WING
WING
WING
WING
WING
WING
WING
WING
WING
WING
WING
ITEM
CHAPTER AND
SYSTEM
SUB CHAPTER
INSTALLATION
LEADING EDGE AND MAIN SPAR REMOVAL
LEADING EDGE AND MAIN SPAR INSTL
MAIN SPAR CAP INSPECTION, OUTBOARD
NAVIGATION LIGHT INSTALLATION
NAVIGATION LIGHT REMOVAL
REMOVAL
SKIN THICKNESS
STROBE LIGHT INSTALLATION
STROBE LIGHT REMOVAL
TIP INSTALLATION
TIP REMOVAL
57-00-00
57-00-00
57-00-00
57-00-00
33-40-00
33-40-00
57-00-00
57-30-00
33-40-00
33-40-00
57-00-00
57-00-00
PAGE
2
1
2
11
4
4
1
2
4
3
1
1
"END"
INTRODUCTION
A18
Page 33
Aug 18/95
CHAPTER
TIME LIMITS/
MAINTENANCE
CH EC KS
Ral~heon Aircraft
CHAPTER 5
TABLE OF CONTENTS
PAGE
SOBJECT
5-1 0-00
Special
Landing
Replacement Schedule
Overhaul and
Conditions
Cautionary
Notice
Gear
Power Plant
Flaps
Fuel
Controls
Flight
and
System
Instruments
Electrical
System
Miscellaneous
5-20-00
Maintenance Practices
Electric
Propeller
Deicer
(EiO-Hour Guide)
Electric
Propeller
Deicer
(100-Hour Guide)
Turbocharger(EA-l
and After)
25 Hours
50 Hours
100 Hours
3
3
E33C, F33C Spin Inspection (Acrobatic Category)

100-Hour
or
Annual
Inspection
A36 and
Program (Models
Special
Conditions Cautionary Notice
A.
or
Annual
B36TC)
FACTS
1GO-Hour
Guide
7
9
Inspection
Operational Inspection
10
B. Power Plant
C. Cabin and
D.
A23
Wings
and
Baggage Compartment
13
Carry-Through Structure
15
E. Nose Gear
16
F. Main Gear and Brakes
17
G. Main Gear
Operation
18
H. Nose Gear
Operation
19
5-CONTENTS
Jun
28/02Page
Raytheon Aircraft
CHAPTER 5
TABLE OF CONTENTS (CONTINUED)
SUBJECT
I. Rear
PAGE
Fuselage
and
Empennage
J. General
Jun
28/0Page
5-CONTENTS
19
20
A23
Ray~eon Aircraft
CHAPTER 5
LIST OF PAGE EFFECTIVITY
CI-IAPTER-SECnON-SUBJECT
PAGE
DATE
5-Effectivity
Jun 28/02
5-Contents
Jun 28/02
Jun 28/02
Jun 28/02
Jun 28/02
5-10-00
5-20-00
A23
Jun 28/02
Jun 28/02
Jun 28/02
Jun 28/02
Jun 28/02
Jun 28/02
Jun 28/02
Jun 28/02
Jun 28/02
Jun 28/02
Jun 28/02
Jun 28/02
Jun 28/02
10
Jun 28/02
11
Jun 28/02
12
Jun 28/02
13
Jun 28/02
14
Jun 28/02
15
Jun 28/02
16
Jun 28/02
17
Jun 28/02
18
Jun 28/02
19
Jun 28/02
20
Jun 28/02
5-EFFECTIVITY
Jun
28/02Pagel
Ral~heon Aircraft

replacement must be performed not later than the recommended period. The condition
period can be used as a criterion for determining subsequent periods applicable
individual airplane or fleet operation, provided the operator has an approved monitoring system.
The first overhaul
or
item at the end of the first
The time
periods
for
inspections noted in
this manual
are
based
on
of the
to the
average usage and average environmental
con-
ditions.
NOTE
The recommended
function
as
periods
do not constitute
guarantee the item will reach the period without malby the manufacturer.
the aforementioned factors cannot be controlled
WARNING
I WARNIEIO)
performing maintenance on an engine or the Airframe, ALWAYS pull the starter conLanding Gear circuit breaker. This will remove power to the
control as well as the igniter power relay and Landing Gear Control relay.
Prior to
trol circuit breakers and the

starter
for Air Taxi, or other than normal operation, and airplanes operated in humid tropics, or cold and
damp climates, etc., may need more frequent inspections for wear, corrosion and/or lack of lubrication. In these
areas, periodic inspections should be performed until the operator can set his own inspection periods based on ex-
Airplanes operated
perience.
NOTE
The date noted
on
the "STANDARD AIRWORTHINESS CERTIFICATE", FAA Form No. 8100-2,
which is issued with each
ponents listed in the

An
engine cycle
new
following
is defined
as
airplane,
is to be used
as
the basis for all TBO
or
replacement
com-
schedule.
the
period
of time from the initial start to shutdown of the
engine. This
encompasses start-up, increase to full or partial power las required during a flight regime) and back
to complete engine shutdown. Normal operation results in the number of landings being equivalent
to
azs
engine cycles.
5-1 0-00
Jun
28/02Pagel
Ray~heon Aircraft
OVERHAUL OR REPLACE
ITEM
NOTE
All items not listed
are
to be overhauled or
replaced
"on condition". "On condition" items
are to
be overhauled
or
unserviceable condition, if they are worn, inoperative,

potentially
replaced inspection
normal
maintenance. Primarily items that are calender, cycle
not
intermittent
and
inaccurate,
repairable through
or hour limited are included in the following list.
reveals
if
unsafe
or
LANDING GEAR
Main Gear
On condition
(Leaking or collapsed struts that cannot be

by
replacement will constitute the "On
condition" requirement. Any pitting, corrosion, cracking,
Assembly
corrected
distortion
seal
or
visible
replacement will
overhaul.)
Nose Gear
wear
noted
during the seal

requirement for
also constitute the
an
On condition
(Leaking or collapsed struts that cannot be

by seal replacement will constitute the "On
condition" requirement. Any pitting, corrosion, cracking,
distortion or visible wear noted during the seal
replacement will also constitute the requirement for an
overhaul.)
Assembly
corrected
Nose Gear Retract Rod Rod-Ends
(All)
2000 hours
Actuator
4000 hours
Retract Motor
2000 hours
Retract Motor Brushes
500 hours
Shimmy Damper
On condition
Wheels and Tires
On condition
or on
Brake
Assembly
On condition
Brake
Lining
On condition
Cylinder
On condition
Shuttle Valve Assembly
On condition
Master
Parking
Brake Valve
All Hoses
Jun
28/025-10-00
condition
On condition
On condition
als
Raytheon Aircraft
ITEM
(CONTINUED)
OVERHAUL OR REPLACE
POWER PLANT
NOTE
A TBO
(time between overhaul) recommendation is in no way to be construed as a warranty or engine life

proration basis. The TBO recommendation is based on the projected time for most advantageous initial overhaul.
The individual operators experience may indicate a departure in either direction from the recommended TBO for
the particular operation.
Cabin Heater Muff
On condition
*Engine (Non-turbocharged)
1700 hours
*Engine (EA-I
1600 hours
*Reference
and
after)
Teledyne Continental Motors Corporation Service Bulletin M91-8,
Engine
Controls
On condition
Engine
Vibration Isolator Mounts
Engine
Exhaust
System
overhaul
dated
or on
July 10, 1991
or
subsequent.
condition
On condition
Starter
Inspect
at
engine overhaul,
overhaul
or
replace
on
condition
Standby Generator
Standby Generator
1500 hours
Brushes
500 hours
Alternator
On condition
Oil Cooler
On condition,
Propeller (McCauley)
Refer to
Propeller (Hartzell)
replace
if contaminated
McCauley Service
Bulletin 1378
or
subsequent
Refer to the latest revision of Hartzell Service Letter 61

for TBO
Propeller Controls
On condition
Propeller Governor (McCauley)
At
engine
overhaul
condition but not to exceed
or on
1800 hours
Propeller Governor (Woodward)
At
engine overhaul
or on
condition. Refer to Woodward
Service Bulletin 3350.

Air Pressure
Standby
Refer to
Pump
Air Pressure
All Hoses
Pump
Replacement Schedule
Every 600 hours

Hoses
of pump
in Airborne SI 300-16
operation
carrying flammable liquids
at
engine
overhaul
or
every 5 years, whichever occurs first since the last

replacement or delivery date of the airplane from the
factory; all other

Engine
Air Filter
hoses
on
condition
Clean every 50 hours of operation (10 times max.).

Replace every 500 hours or 1 year, whichever occurs
first.
A23
5-1 0-00
Jun
28/02Page
Raytheon Aircraft

ITEM
(CONTINUED)
OVERHAUL OR REPLACE
POWER PLANT
Engine
(Continued)
Baffle Seals
Replace
Teledyne Continental
Magneto (Bendix
(TCM))
Motors
as
necessary
or
every 10 years of service.
Engine overhaul or every four years, whichever

first. Refer to TCM Service Bulletin 643.
comes
FLAPS AND FLIGHT CONTROLS

Aileron Trim and
Flight
Linkage
On condition
On condition
Controls
Elevator Tab Actuator
On condition
Flap Motor and Gearbox
Replace
Flap Actuators
2000 hours
Flap Flexible Shaft
2000 hours
on
condition
FUEL SYSTEM
On condition
Fuel Cells
Wing
Fuel
Quantity
Transmitters
Fuel Cell Drain Valve
Fuel
System Check
Valves
On condition
On condition
On condition
every 10 years
Fuel Selector Valve
Replace
Fuel Boost
Overhaul every 10 years
Pump
Hoses
All Hoses
carrying
flammable
liquids
at
engine overhaul
or
every 5 years, whichever occurs first since the last

replacement or delivery of the airplane from the factory;
all other hoses
Fuel Cell Reservoir Kit (If installed)
Replace
on
condition
foam insert every 10 years
INSTRUMENTS
Turn Coordinator
On condition
Altimeter
Every 24 months
calibrate)
Directional
Gyro
Horizon
Gyro
Pressure
nuJ4
28/02
(inspect and
On condition
On condition
Gyro
Page
per FAA directive
Gage
5-1 0-00
On condition
A23
Raytheon Aircraft
ITEM
(CONTINUED)
OVERHAUL OR REPLACE
INSTRUMENTS (Continued)
Units
Engine Gage
On condition
Airspeed Indicator
On condition
Rate-Of-Climb
On condition
Fuel Flow/Manifold Pressure Indicator
On condition
Tachometer
On condition
Clock
On condition
Flap Position indicator
On condition
Free Air
On condition
Temperature Indicator
Pressure
System
Standby
Pressure
Air Pressure
Filter
(In-line
System
Regulator
and
Filters
Intake)
(In-line
and
300 hours of
Every
300 hours of pump operation
airplane operation
On condition
Valve
On condition
All Hoses
Standby
Intake)
Every
Air Pressure
System
Check Valve
Replace
every 10 years
ELECTRICAL SYSTEM
Battery Master Relay
On condition
All Other
On condition
Relays
Voltage Regulator
On condition
Starter
On condition
Relay
Battery (Emergency
Locator
Transmitter)
Replace
at 50% of useful life
las
any time transmitter is used

cumulative hour
or
stated
more
on
than
the
battery)
one
MISCELLANEOUS
Hand Fire
Cabin
Extinguisher
Heating
and
Ventilating
Ducts
Inspect
every 12 months,
Inspect
every 12 months
Oxygen Regulator
On condition
Air Conditioner Filter
On condition
Air Conditioner
On condition
Seat Belts
or
Compressor
Inspect every
Shoulder Harnesses
Oxygen Cylinder (Lightweight
3HT
Type)
12 months
Hydrostatically
years
or
recharge
as
necessary
or on
condition
or on
condition
test every 3 years.
Replace every
4,380 refills (ICC regulation), whichever
24
occurs
first.
A23
5-1 0-00
Jun
28/02Page
Ray~hean Aircraft
(CONTINUED)
OVERHAUL OR REPLACE
ITEM
MISCELLANEOUS (Continued)
Oxygen Cylinder (Standard Weight

Wing-Attach Bolts
3AA
Type)
Hydrostatically
Replace
Refer to
Jun
28/0Page
5-1 0-00
test every 5 years
10 years after initial

Chapter 57.
inspection
or on
condition.
n?s
Ray~heon Aircraft
SCHEDULED MAINTENANCE CHECKS
ELECTRIC PROPELLER DNCER
MAINTENANCE PRACTICES
(50 HOUR GUIDE)
of the propeller deicer system should be inspected every 50 hours for the appearance of
following inspections may provide means for detecting and correcting such defects before they render
system inoperative:
The various
components
defects. The
the deicer
a.
Lock the brakes and
operate the engine
at near takeoff power. Turn the deicer
systems switch ON and observe
the ammeter for at least 3 minutes. If the ammeter needle does not indicate amperage (reference ELECTRIC PROPELLER DEICING in Chapter 30-60-00 for proper amperagej for 90 seconds at 90 second intervals, refer to the
troubleshooting
chart for the
probable
sources
of trouble.
WARNING
IWdRNINO)
Before moving propeller, make certain that ignition switch is OFF and that engine has cooled
completely. There is always some danger of a cylinder firing when propeller is moved.
CAUTION I
IcnuTloN
While
following
the instructions of step b,
tween the brushes and
b.
With the
engine
move
the
forth to
propeller back and
prevent arcing be-
slip ring.
shut off, turn the deicer switch ON and feel the deicer boots
quence of heater operation. The presence of local hot spots indicates service
should be repaired before more serious damage develops.
on
the
damage
propeller for
to the deicer
the proper
se-
heaters, which
Remove the spinner and open all access doors pertaining to the wiring and components of the deicer system.
Turn the deicer switch ON and station an assistant in the cockpit to observe the system ammeter. Flex all accessible
wiring, particularly the lead straps, leads from the slip ring assembly, and the firewall electrical connectors and their
c.
wiring. Any
short
d.
or
movement of the ammeter, other than the
To extend the life of the lead
at least 1/2 inch from the

e.
flicker that
occurs
at 90 second
intervals, indicates
Check for
damaged
existing
strap between the hub clamp and clip, reposition the bend in the strap
brush rods
Check for radio noise
or
at
point
location of the bend.

or
springs
ELECTRIC PROPELLER DNCER

a.
cycling
open circuit that must be located and corrected.
and for
worn or
damaged
brushes.
(100 HOUR GUIDE)
radio compass interference
at near takeoff power with the radio
by operating the engine
If, under these conditions, noise or interference occurs when the deicer switch is ON and disappears
when the switch is OFF, refer to the troubleshooting chart for the probable source of trouble.
gear turned
on.
WARNING
IWARNINOI
Before
moving propeller,
completely.
nza
There is
make certain that
always
some
ignition switch
is OFF and that
danger of a cylinder firing when
engine has cooled
propeller is moved.
5-20-00
Raytheon Aircraft
b.
Check all
ness.
clamps, clips, mountings, electrical connections

or missing safety wire.
and connectors for
tightness
and electrical sound-
Check also for loose, broken
Closely check the
deicer boots for wrinkles, loose or torn areas, particularly around the outboard end and at the
the strap passes under the hub clamp. Look for abrasion or cuts along the leading edge of the flat or
thrust face. If the heater wires are exposed in damaged areas or if the rubber is found to be tacky, swollen or detec.
point where
riorated
d.
las
from contact with oil
or
solvent
fluids), replace
the
damaged
deicer boot.
Check that the hub
clamps are tight. Inspect for cracks or other damage. Check to see that the cushioning mamissing or damaged in the area under the hub clamp or on the edge of the spinner dome. Manually oppropeller from "high pitch" to "low pitch" while checking that the deicer lead straps do not come under
teria\ is not
erate the
tension.
e.
slip rings for gouges, roughened surfaces, cracks, burned or discolored areas, and for deposits of oil,
dirt. Clean greasy or contaminated slip rings with CRC-2-26 solvent (23, Chart i, 91-00-00). After such a
allow a run-in time of 5 hours of engine operation before turning on the deicer system.
Check the
grease
or
cleaning,
wobble is detected, check the alignment of the slip rings to the prop shaft with a dial indicator.
the
turning
prop to check the slip ring alignment, push in on the prop to eliminate play in the propeller thrust
If
the
out over 360" of rotation is over 0.005 inch or if over any 4-inch are it exceeds 0.002 inch, refer
run
bearing.
to the paragraph on SLIP RING ALIGNMENT in Chapter 30-60-00.
f.
If
uneven wear or
While
g.
Examine the brush
sure
that connections
mounting bracket and housing for cracks, deformation,

tight and that the leads are not chafed or binding.
or
other indications of
damage. Make
are
fully on its slip ring over 360" of rotation. If the brush is not properly aligned,
elongate the holes in the mounting bracket to raise or lower the brush block to
the proper position. If the brushes ride BOTH high and low with respect to the slip rings in 360" of rotation, the slip
ring assembly is eccentrically mounted and the spinner bulkhead must be replaced. For the correct angular location
of the brushes to the slip ring, refer to the illustrations in Chapter 30-60-00.
h.
Check to
that each brush rides
see
add shims under the brush block
or
Check for proper spacing between the brush block and slip rings as indicated in DEICER BRUSH REPLACEMENT, Chapter 30-60-00. If this distance is not within the specified limits, loosen the mounting screws and reposi-
i.
tion them in the
bearing plate
elongated holes until the block is properly positioned. If necessary,

mounting bracket until the brush block is properly located.
add shims between the thrust
and
angle of the brush block in relation to the slip rings. If this angle is not approximately 2", as
indicated in DEICER BRUSH REPLACEMENT, Chapter 30-60-00, loosen the mounting screws and reposition the
brush block until the proper angle exists between the brush block and slip rings. The spacing established in Figure
3, Chapter 30-60-00 must also be maintained after the proper contact angle is established.
j.
Estimate the contact
CAUTION 1
[CAVTION
While
following
the instructions of
tween the brushes and
k.
step k,
move
the
propeller back
and forth to
prevent arcing be-
slip ring.
With the deicer system operating and a man in the cockpit observing the ammeter, visually inspect and physifrom the brush blocks to each component of the deicer system and to the aircraft power supply.
cally flex the wiring
Movement of the ammeter needle

indicate loose
wiring
in the
or
area
harness until the
Jun
28/0Page
(other than
the
cycling that occurs
when the timer switches at 90-second
intervals)
under examination at the moment. In such instances, continue to flex the

that first indicated trouble while checking the continuity through the individual wires of the affected
in the
broken
wiring
source
of trouble is located. Use the
5-20-00
area
wiring diagram
to trace the
circuitry
of the deicer
system.
Ray)heon Aircraft
TURBOCHARGER
(EA-1
AND
AFTER)
25 HOURS
a.
Visually inspect
oil leaks, exhaust system leaks and
general
condition.
oil leaks, exhaust system leaks and
general
condition.
50 HOURS
a.
Visually inspect
100 HOURS
Inspect turbocharger system per

a.
following method:
assembly. Inspect the compressor wheel for nicks, cracks or broken blades. Turn
excess bearing drag or wheel rubbing against housing. Reinstall air inlet duct.
Remove compressor inlet duct
wheel
b.
the
by hand and feel
for
Check the oil inlet and outlet ports in center
housing
for leaks, and the turbine heat blanket for condition and
security.
Check for any interference with
tion and security.
c.
d.
Inspect
all exhaust system
linkage
between the
components for
worn or
bypass
valve
damaged
(wastegate)
areas, loose
clamps, cracks and
Inspect lubrication system components for worn or damaged areas, loose clamps and
should be given to the ducts downstream (pressure side) of the compressor.
e.
f.
Inspect
the fuel
injection
general
and actuator, its
leaks.
condi-
leaks.
Special
attention
nozzle pressure reference manifold, for deteriorated hose, loose connections, leaks
or
obstructions
g.
All fluid power lines should be checked for leaks and
security.
The compressor discharge reference line from the throttle air valve to the controller should be
spected for oil leakage from the controller. Any leakage is cause for replacement of the controller.
h.
opened
and in-
E33C, F33C SPIN INSPECTION (ACROBATIC CATEGORY)

inspection is required on all E33C and F33C (CJ-1 and after) airplanes which are being acrobatically spun
is
(even if the spin time is only a small part of total time). This inspection is NOT required if an airplane performing
acrobatic maneuvers other than spins (no spins at all). The regular 109-Hour Inspection (P/N 98-322276 or subseGuide (P/N
quent), Intermediate 1 GO-Hour inspection (P/N 98-38999 or subsequent) or Continuing Care Inspection
This
98-36711D
n?s
or
subsequent)
MUST also be
complied
with.
5-20-00
JunPa2~egi:Page
Raytheon Aircraft
E33C, F33C SPIN INSPECTION (ACROBATIC CATEGORY)

FREQUENCY
1. 50 Hours
PART
Rudder
INSPECTION
pedal
CORRECTIVE ACTION
Check for cracks.
If cracks
MECH
bellcrank
Technical
found, contact the

Support Department of
support
Raytheon
Aircraft
INSP
are
Company.
assembly
2. 50 Hours
Elevator to
Check
Elevator
(4
torque fitting
casting joint
proper hole diameter.
per
screw
holes
elevator)
If hole diameter is
for
inch,
ream
more
hole to 0.208
than 0.194
rt
0.002 inch
diameter and install NAS 2903-4
or
NAS 6203-4)( oversize bolt. If hole
diameter exceeds 0.210 inch for

oversize bolts, contact the Technical
Support Department of Raytheon

Company. Torque bolt or
Aircraft
screw
to 30 to 40 inch-tbs.
Check hole size in
If hole diameter is greater than 0.251
elevator inboard
inch, replace elevator torque fitting.
hinge
mount hole in center of
elevator torque
fitting.
Check elevator rod end
mounting
3. 50 Hours
hole in the
If hole diameter is
inch,
ream
greater than 0.379
to 0.436
~t
elevator torque fitting for
install
proper diameter.
bushing.
Horizontaland
Horizontal stabilizer
If bolt holes
are more
vertical
in diameter
or
stabilizer
forward spar: Check

diameter of 4 outboard
attachment
bolt holes
bolt holes
(2 upper and
on
each side
2
lower).
(stabilizer
spars and
bulkheads)
one
bushings
0.001 inch and
BS 105740-X-XC-0500
than 0.253 inch
elongated,
to 0.270
ream
the
0.002 inch
diameter and install NAS 2904-14

oversize bolts. If hole diameter
exceeds 0.272 inch for oversize
Horizontal stabilizer rear

spar: Check diameter of
2 outboard bolt holes on
each side
1
(1
upper and
I bolts, contact the Technical Support

Department of Raytheon Aircraft
Company. Torque the nuts to 85 to
100 inch-lbs.
lower).
If any of these holes
are
oversize, check all other

horizontal stabilizer
holes and vertical
stabilizer bolt holes for
correct diameter.
Page
nu28102
J4
5-20-00
A23
Raytheon Aircraft
E33C, F33C SPIN INSPECTION (ACROBATIC CATEGORY) (CONTINUED)

FREQUENCY
CORRECTIVE ACTION
INSPECTION
PART
Check torque
4. 50 Hours
on
all
nuts.
Inboard
Check for
elevatorhinge
and
straightness
Torque the
pounds.
MECH
INSP
nuts to 85 to 100 inch
Replace
if bent
or worn.
Replace
if bent
or worn
wear.
bolts
Elevator
push- I
rods to
Check for
and
straightness
smaller than
0.370 inch diameter.
wear.
elevator
torque fitting
bolt
5. 50 Hours
Upper
and
Inspect
tor
cracks,
middle rudder
corrosion andexcessive
hinges
wear.
cracks,
Lower rudder
Inspect
hinge
corrosion andexcessive
tor
Replace
if any of noted conditions
exist.
Replace
if any of noted conditions
exist.
wear.
6. 50 Hours
Elevatorhinge
joint
Checkbearing for
looseness and bearing
bracket for cracks,
Replace
if noted conditions exist.
corrosion and excessive

wear.
Check
If I.D. is
bushing
over
under 0.310
diameters.
Replace
Check elevator
hinge
brackets hole diameter.
Check elevator
hinge
0.191 inch
or
O.D. is
inch, replace bushings.
If greater than 0.200 inch, replace
bracket.
Replace
Replace
if
bracket for cracks,

corrosion and excessive
wear.
Check bolts for
wear.
plating
is
worn or
corroded.
Check reassembled
joint
7. 50 Hours
straightness,
Elevator
Check for
pushrods
and cracks.
Check rod end
new
parts
as
bearing
play.
Replace pushrod
Replace
required.
excessive free
Check rod end
If
hole diameter.
more
I replace
if bent
or
cracked.
bearing if
play is noted.
rod end
for excessive free
mounting
A23
Install
for looseness.
than 0.378 inch in diameter,
rod end.
5-20-00
Jun
28/02Page
Raytheon Aircraft
E33C, F33C SPIN INSPECTION (ACROBATIC CATEGORY) (CONTINUED)

FREQUENCY
PART
INSPECTION
CORRECTIVE ACTION
8. 50 Hours
Trim Tab
Check for cracks.
Replace if noted conditions
Check free
indicated in
play as
Chapter
Replace
tab
bushing
10. 50 Hours
Elevator
Trim tab
and/or trim tab
pushrod ends and/or trim

excessive free
Check for cracks,
If cracks
especially between
outboard hinge and
Technical
elevator balance horn.
repair.
Check
Replace
straightness.
are
play
INSP
exist.
tab
actuator shaft and/or trim tab
27-30-00.
9. 50 Hours
MECH
hinge
if
is noted.
found, contact the
Support Department of
Raytheon Aircraft Company for
if bent.
pushrod
assemblies
11. 50 Hours
Trim tab
Check output shaft for
actuator
straightness.
Replace
if bent.
Check attach bolts for proper torque.
Check actuator
installation for
looseness.
12. 50 Hours
Elevator
bellcrank
Check pushrod
mounting hole for
proper diameter.
If more than 0.379 inch, press out

and press in one
existing bushing
BS105740X-XC0968
drill 0.377
hole
13. 50 Hours
14. 50 Hours
(elevator
pushrod to
bellcrank)
Check for
Inboard
Checkforcracks. Check
elevatorhinge
casting
hinge bearingsfor
Bolt
and
straightness
rt
bushing
and
0.002-inch diameter
through bushing.
Replace
if bent
or worn
smaller than
0.370 inch.
wear.
Replace
if noted condition exists.
looseness.
100-HOUR ORANNUAL INSPECTION GUIDE

operator is responsible for maintaining the airplane in an airworthy condition, including compliance
applicable Airworthiness Directives as specified in Part 39 of Title 14 Code of Federal Regulations (14 CFR).
It is further the responsibiiity of the owner or operator to ensure that the airplane is inspected in conformity with the
I requirements covered in 14 CFR Parts 43 and S1.These 14 CFR Parts cover the requirements concerning the Inspection Guide. This Inspection Guide is not intended to be all inclusive, for no such guide can replace the good
judgement of a certified airframe and power plant mechanic in the performance of his duties. As the one primarily
responsible for the airworthiness of the airplane, the owner or operator should select only qualified personnel to
maintain the airplane.
The
owner or
with all
FACTS PROGRAIVI ~ODELS A36 AND
B36TC)
Airplanes delivered from the factory after August 1, 2001 will use the Factory Aircraft Comprehensive Tracking
System (FACTS) which becomes the factory computerized maintenance tracking and forecasting system for the
Model A36/B36TC series airplanes. The FACTS program for the Model A36/B36TC adheres to the guidelines es-
Jun 28/0 Page
:6
5-20-00
A23
Raytheon Aircraft
tablished in this
chapter of the
maintenance manual. The Raytheon Aircraft approved inspection program contained

Raytheon factory computerized maintenance inspection program (FACTS), is specifically for the Model A36/B36TC series airplanes. Any variation to the inspection program must be approved in writing
by the FAA Flight Standards District Office (FSDO), or Airworthiness Authority. The FACTS program meets the requirement of both 14 CFR 91 and 14 CFR 135.
in this
and within the
chapter,

The time
periods for the inspections noted in this schedule are based on normal usage under average environmental
Airplanes operated in humid tropics, or in cold, damp climates, etc., may need more frequent inspections
for wear, corrosion, lubrication, and/or lack of maintenance. Under these adverse conditions, perform periodic inspections in compliance with this guide at more frequent intervals until the owner or operator can set his own inspection periods based on the contingencies of field experience.
conditions.
NOTE
The
required periods do not constitute a guarantee that the item will reach the period
function, as the aforementioned factors cannot be controlled by the manufacturer.
without mal-
This inspection program, in accordance with 14 CFR Parts 43 and 91, consists of, but is not limited
to, inspection items listed in this Inspection Guide, any applicable Airworthiness Directives issued
against
Sheet
the airframe
as
or
any
equipment
installed therein and
conformity
to
Type Certificate Data
applicable.
Material contained in this
guide, including
the
inspection intervals, may
be
changed
at any time
by
the
owner/oper-
ator, with prior notification and approval of the local FAA General Aviation District Office, when warranted by service
experience or engineering recommendations. Information

planes covered in this maintenance manual except where
contained herein is
differences
are
applicable to all Bonanza

by serial effectivity.
series air-
indicated
Inspection Guide may be used as an outline, detailed information of the many systems and components
airplane will be found in the various sections of this maintenance manual and the pertinent supplier publications. It is also recommended that reference be made to the applicable maintenance handbooks, service instructions, Beech and Raytheon Aircraft service bulletins, applicable FAA regulations and publications, and supplier
bulletins and specifications for torque values, clearances, settings, tolerances, and other requirements. In the final
analysis, it is the responsibility of the owner/operator to ensure that the airframe and power plant mechanic inspecting the airplane has access to the previously noted documents as well as to this Inspection Guide.
While the
in the
NOTE
Any time
are
an
airplane
not covered with
that have been
repainted or touched up, inspect all placards and decals to assure that they
paint, are easily readable, and are securely attached. Replace any placards
is
inadvertently
defaced
or
removed.
In addition to the inspections prescribed by this schedule, the altimeter system and all ATC transponders MUST be tested and inspected at 24-month intervals in compliance with the requirements
specified in 14 CFR Parts 91.411, and 91.70.
airplane must be accomplished within each 12-month period for compliance with the
Regulations. The time periods for inspections stated in this inspection guide should NEVER
be exceeded by more than 10 hours, and then only if the additional time is required to reach a place where the inspection can be satisfactorily accomplished. However, the additional time used must be deducted from the next inspection time. If 10 hours were used to reach the inspection facility, the next inspection would be due in 90 hours
for the next 100-hour inspection with no extension allowed.
A
complete inspection
of the
Title 14 Code of Federal
nu
5-20-00
JunPa2ggl~):Page
Raytheon Aircraft
airplane must receive a complete (100-hour, annual, or complete continuing care inspection) inspection every
12 months regardless of the hours flown. The inspections completed during a 12-month period can be deleted from
the items to be inspected. Rubber goods such as fuel lines are recommended to be changed at five year periods
An
regardless
of
airplane time.
NOTE
Additional
publications
For information
on
listed in the current Publications Price List CD ROM
are
these
1-800-796-2665, fax
publications
(316) 676-4824,
(P/N 994-32808).
(TMDC) at
our web site at http:/l ray-
contact the Technical Manual Distribution Center
E-mail TMDC 8 rac.ray.con
or
visit
theonaircraft.com.
NOTE
All electrical systems operational inspections are to be made using
pable of delivering and maintaining 28.25 volts 0.25 volts DC.
Raytheon
Aircraft
Company issues
service information for the benefit of
classes of Service Bulletins. MANDATORY
(Red Border)
an
external power
source ca-
and operators in the form of two

changes, inspections or modifica-
owners
Service Bulletins
are
factory considers compliance with these Service Bulletins mandatory. OPTIONAL

Service
Bulletins
cover changes, modifications, improvements or inspections which may benefit the
(No Border)
of
information covered by the OPTIONAL Service Bulletin, each owner or operator is
the
wide range
owner. Due to
responsible for conducting a thorough review of each OPTIONAL Service Bulletin to determine if compliance is required based on the applicability of the OPTIONAL Service Bulletin to his particular set of operating conditions. It is
the responsibility of the owner or operator to ensure that all Beech and Raytheon Aircraft Service Bulletins which
are pertinent to his particular operation are complied with.
tions that could affect
safety.
The
NOTE
Model E33C and F33C airplanes
50 hours.
being
spun MUST also have the AEROBATIC INSPECTION at
WARNING I
I W~RNINO
During
the
Ensure the
Jun
28/0Page
performance
landing gear
of this
inspection
the
airplane will be placed on three-point jacks.

removing the airplane from the jacks.
is down and locked before
5-20-00
nns
Raytheon Aircraft
100-HOUR OR ANNUAL INSPECTION

A.
OPERATIONAL INSPECTION
1.
STARTER
energized
MECH
INSP
Check for proper operation, unusual noise and dragging. Check starter
light (if installed) and/or load meter to ensure starter disengagement when
starter switch is released.
2.
3.
Check for proper fuel pressure limits and fluctuations.
FUEL FLOW
CYLINDER HEAD TEMPERATURE
I I
Check for proper operation, temperature and
fluctuations.
Check for proper output and unusual noises.
4.
ALTERNATOR
5.
STANDBY ALTEWVATOR/ GENERATOR

Perform
functional test
as
outlined in
Check for proper operation in test mode.

24-31-00 of P/N 36-590001-9A (or
Chapter
the Bonanza Series Maintenance Manual. Check
subsequent),
wiring
security
for
and
condition
6.
INSTRUMENT AIR SYSTEM
Check for proper
7.
STANDBY INSTRUMENT AIR
(If installed)
and
plumbing
wiring
for
operation
and output pressure.
Check far proper
and condition. Refer to AFM
security
operation. Check
Supplement 36-590006-
23.
3.
PROPELLER OPERATION
smoothness of
9.
Cycle propeller and
check for proper rpm
drop and
operation.
PROPELLER DEICER
Check for proper
operation
and amperage drawn
on
ammeter.
Check for proper pressure, temperature limits
10. OIL PRESSURE AND TEMPERATURE

and unusual fluctuations.
11. MAGNETOS
Check the performance of the
NORMAL PROCEDURES in the

12. POWER CHECK
Operating
appropriate
Pilots
as
outlined under the
Operating
Refer to NORMAL PROCEDURES in the
heading
Handbook.
appropriate
Pilots
Handbook.
13. AMMETER
Check for proper indication and unusual fluctuations.
14. HEATING AND VENTILATING SYSTEM
15. FIREWALL SHUTOFF VALVE
Check for proper
16. IDLE RPM AND MIXTURE SETTINGS
Check controls for freedom of
17. IDLE CUT-OFF
Check for proper
18. IGNITION SWITCH
Rotate the
Check for proper operation, heat and airflow
of movement.
output. Check controls for freedom
settings.
magneto
operation
and freedom of movement.
Check for both proper rpm and mixture
operation.
operation
ignition switch through
the OFF
position
to the extreme
limit of switch travel; if the engine stops firing, the switch is normal. If the engine
continues to run with the switch held against the OFF stop, it is an indication that
magneto is still "hot" or ungrounded. When the switch is released, it should
automatically
return to OFF and the
engine should stop running. However,

replaced.
any
one
ignition
switch exhibiting this abnormal condition should be
ana
5-20-00
Ra~heon Aircraft

A. OPERATIONAL INSPECTION
(CONTINUED)
MECH
(Continued)
INSP
With the engine running, check for proper operational limits,

engine response and rigging. Check friction locks for proper operation.
19. ALL ENGINE CONTROLS
Check for proper operation and unusual fiuctuations.
20. FUEL QUANTITY GAGES

21. AUXILIARY FUEL PUMP
Check pump for proper
operation,
unusual noise and
fluctuations.
22. FUEL TANK SELECTOR
Check for proper placarding, proper
operation and
feel for
detent.
positive
Check for condition, attachment, cracked
23. ALL LIGHTS
switches, knobs and circuit breakers for looseness and

24. STALL WARNING SYSTEM
Check for proper
Check for proper
25. RADIO OPERATION
or
broken lenses. Check
operation.
operation
and
heating
of the unit.
operation, security of switches and
knobs.
Check for noisy operation, full travel and proper indication.
26. FLAPS
27. PITOT HEAT
Check for amperage drawn
on
ammeter and for proper
heating of
the
unit.
28. FLIGHT INSTRUMENTS
Check for condition and proper
operation.
Check for condition and wear, ease of operation and proper release of the
brake. Check for unusual brake chatter.
29. BRAKES
parking
30. EMERGENCY LOCATOR TRANSMITTER Check for proper operation. Tune radio to
121.5 MHz on VHF or 243 MHz on UHF, then turn ELT switch to ON and monitor for
one
signal.
Turn ELT switch OFF, then place in ARM

airplane is returned to service.
position.
Ensure that the ELT is
armed when the
31. AIR-CONDITIONER
condenser
retracted
moves to
position
Operate the air conditioner and verify that the retractable

ground extended position when turned on and returns to
the
when turned off. Check for proper
32. OXYGEN SYSTEM
operation
the
and unusual noise.
Functionally check the oxygen system for proper operation. Check

operation.
the oxygen bottle shutoff valve for proper

33. SWITCHES, CIRCUIT BREAKERS
Check for proper operation.
CONTROLS, TRIM CONTROLS AND TRIM INDICATOR Check freedom

movement and proper operation through full travel with and without flaps extended.
Check electric trim controls for operation.
34. FLIGHT
B.
of
POWERPLANT
1.
NACELLE SKiN
loose
2.
or
Page
cracks. Check for
COWL FLAPS
Open
the upper
for cracks.
Check for travel, deformation and
5-20-00
or
damage.
Check for condition, security and adjustment of latches.
cowling and clean. Inspect

4.
or
Check for cracks and deformation. Check for loose
rivets and concealed
COWLING
damage
rivets.
NACELLE STRUCTURE
missing
3.
missing
Check for deformation and obvious
security. Inspect for cracks.
Pi23
Ray~hean Aircraft
1OO-HOUR OR ANNUAL INSPECTION
B. POWER PLANT
5.
(CONTINUED)
(Continued)
MECH
INSP
Clean, inspect, regap, test and replace as necessary. Tighten spark

torque and check ignition harness condition and for proper attachment.
SPARK PLUGS
plugs
to proper
6.
COMPRESSION
7.
BATTERY
Perform differential
compression
test.
tight connections and add distilled water to maintain a

top of separators. Inspect the vents and overflow tube for
obstructions. Check for security and proper attachment. Check for corrosion. Make
certain the battery is clean. Water or dirt on battery surface can cause the battery to
discharge.
Inspect
for clean,
level of 3/8-inch above
8.
Inspect plumbing and associated accessories for condition (such as

fraying) and attachment. Check plumbing clearance and secure against
PLUMBING
cracks and
possible chafing.
9.
Check reservoir for
BRAKE FLUID RESERVOIR
security,
open vent, proper fluid level
and for leaks.

10. ENGINE OIL TANK OR SUMP
and
Check for cracks, leaks, proper fluid level, deformation
security.
11. CRANKCASE
security
Check security of crankcase-thru bolts. inspect the
and that the tabs
are
dipstick tabs
for
not bent.
12. OIL SUMP DRAINS AND SCREENS
and for obstructions. Check for metal
Clean screens, check for holes in the screens

particles or foreign matter on screens and filters.
Check for proper torque after installation.

13. OIL COOLER
Check oil cooler, lines and fittings for condition,
security, chafing
and
leaks.
Check for condition and security. Check the
lightning strikes. If there is evidence of lightning strikes,
consult the propeller manufacturer, the engine manufacturer and Raytheon Aircraft
Company. Inspect the blades for cracks, dents, nicks, scratches, erosion, corrosion,
security and movement in the hub.
14. PROPELLER AND MOUNTING BOLTS
tip
of the blades for evidence of
15. PROPELLER SPINNER

16. PROPELLER HUB
17. ALTERNATOR
attachment and
18. ALTERNATOR
Check for deformation, security and cracks.
Check for cracks,
excessively leaking seals
Check for condition and attachment. Check
possible
and condition.
wiring
for proper
chafing. Check for unusual noise.
(Prestolite
or
Delco
Remy only) Remove and disassemble
the
necessary to inspect the rotor shaft bearings for condition and replace if
necessary. Refer to Beech Service Instructions No. 0546-359 Rev II or subsequent.
alternator
as
19. STARTER
Check for condition, attachment and chafed
20. STANDBY GENERATOR/ALTERNATOR

wires and for
n23
or
loose wires.
Check for condition, attachment, security of
chafing.
5-20-00
11
Raylheon Aircraft
B. POWER PLANT
MECH
(Continued)
21. MAGNETOS
excessively
(CONTINUED)
INSP
Check contact points for proper clearance. Points with deep pits or
areas must be discarded. Inspect the cam follower felt pad for
burned
proper lubrication and clean the compartment with

harness for proper connection,
security
and
22. MAGNETO PRESSURIZATION FILTER
fraying.
clean, dry cloth. Check ignition

Check
timing.
Check for condition, cleanliness and
security.
Check cylinders and exhaust manifold for obvious leaks,

security and cracks, check baffles for cracks and security. Check cylinders for broken
cooling fins and loose or missing base nuts.
23. CYLINDERS AND BAFFLES
Check for deformation, security, cracks, leaks, loose or missing

occur due to normal internal
24. EXHAUST SYSTEM
clamps. Check for thin wall condition which may

erosion on stacks which have long service time.
nuts and
25. FIREWALL
access
Check for wrinkles, damage
holes for proper
or
cracks. Check all electrical and control
sealing.
Check all fuel, oil and air hose or duct for

damage. Check fittings for security.
26. HOSE AND DUCTS
deterioration and
Check for condition,
27. ENGINE ACCESSORIES
and tubes for
chafing, security
28. ENGINE MOUNTS
security and leaks. Check wiring,
Check for cracks, corrosion and security.

grounding straps for condition and
21-40-00.
Check for leaks and corrosion and control
30. PROPELLER GOVERNOR
31. ENGINE CONTROLS
attachment, alignment
Inspect rubber cushions,

security.
Check for cracks, distortion, corrosion, leaks and
29. CABIN HEATER SYSTEM
Chapter
hoses
and leaks.
mount bolts and nuts, and
obstructions per
leakage, cracks,
Check controls and associated

and
rigging.
equipment
arm
for
security.
for condition,
Remove cable connection bolts and check for wear
each 300 hours.

32. IGNITION HARNESS
Inspect
for
fraying and
attachment.
33. ELECTRICAL WIRING AND EQUIPMENT Inspect electrical

equipment and accessories for fraying and attachment.
34. ALL DRAINS AND PLUGS

leaks and correct
security
wiring
and associated
and obstructions. Check for
tightness.
35. PRESSURE PUMP INTAKE FILTER
Inspect
filter for
condition, cleanliness and
security. Check filter container for leaks. Replace filter every 300 hours
or more
often
as
necessary.
36. AIR-CONDITIONER COMPRESSOR
refrigerant level and for oil leaks.

and worn or frayed condition.
security and attachment. Check

Chapters 12 and 21. Check belt for tension
Check for
Refer to
Check for condition, cleanliness and security.
37. INDUCTION AIR FILTER
38. INDUCTION SYSTEM AND ALTERNATE AIR
delamination of the inner
cracks, operation and
dun
28/0Page
12
lining.
Check hot and cold flexible air ducts for
Check the alternate air valve for
blockage, security,
wear.
5-20-00
~23
Raytheon Aircraft

B. POWER PLANT
MECH
(Continued)
39. FUEL INJECTION CONTROL VALVE

screen
(CONTINUED)
Clean the
screen
and check for
damage.
Install
and check for leaks.
Inspect all fuel injection components, lines and fittings for

fuel leaks, fraying and cracking.
40. FUEL INJECTION SYSTEM
evidence of
41
FUEL RETURN LINE
(EA-I
drain line, particularly in the

fitting of the fuel return line.
thru
EA-439) Check for chafing against the wastegate seal

approximately six inches from the fire wall bulkhead
area
42. ELECTRIC PROPELLER DEICER

a.
Check for service
damage
Check for attachment and
to the deicer
heaters, brush rods, springs and brushes.
security.
b.
Check the lead strap and all other clamps, connectors and wiring for electrical
soundness, security and attachment.
c.
Check the
deposits
d.
slip rings
for
of oil, grease
roughness, cracks, burned or discolored areas and for

dirt. Check for security and attachment of all components.
or
Check deicer boots for wrinkles, loose
or
torn
areas.
43. TURBOCHARGER SYSTEM

a.
Inspect the system
b.
Inspect the
for oil leaks, exhaust system
compressor wheel for nicks, cracks
leaks, cracks and attachment.
or
broken blades and freedom of
movement.
c.
Inspect the bypass valve (wastegate) for proper operation and inspect all linkage for
interference, condition, security and attachment.
d.
Inspect all
exhaust system components for
worn or
damaged
areas, loose
clamps,
worn or
damaged
areas, loose
clamps,
cracks and leaks.

e.
Inspect
lubrication system components for
cracks and leaks.
injection
reference
f.
Inspect the upper deck pressure reference lines and the fuel
manifold for loose connections, leaks and possible chafing.
g.
Check and calibrate the turbine inlet temperature indicator in accordance with
Chapter 77-00-00.
h.
Check manifold pressure controller
44. ENGINE BAFFLE SEALS
annual
inspection. Replace
linkage
for
wear.
Inspect for security and condition

as
necessary
or
at each 100-hour
or
every 10 years of service.
Inspect pressure system in-line filter for condition, cleanliness and security.
Replace pressure system in-line filter in accordance with the Overhaul and
Replacement Schedule in Chapter 5-10-00.
45. FILTERS
C.
CABIN AND BAGGAGE COMPARTMENT

1.
ana
SKIN Inspect skins for deformation, cracks and loose

found, check adjacent structure.
or
missing
rivets. If
damage
is
5-20-00
INSP
Ral~heon Aircraft
IOO-HOUR OR ANNUAL INSPECTION
C. CABIN AND BAGGAGE COMPARTMENT
2.
STRUCTURE
concealed
3.
(CONTINUED)
(Continued)
Check for cracks and def ormation. Check for loose
or
missing
MECH
INSP
rivets and
damage.
CABLES, PULLEYS AND TURNBUCKLES Check the flight control components,

pulleys. Replace control system components (pushrods, turnbuckles, end
fittings, castings, etc.) that have bulges, splits, bends, or cracks. Check control cables,
pulleys, and associated equipment for condition, attachment, alignment, clearance and
cables and
proper
operation. Replace
length
of cable
important
pulleys
cables that have
than 3 broken strands in any 9-foot
more
evidence of corrosion. Check cables for proper tension. NOTE It is

to operate controls through their full range so that the cables move away from
and all
or
portions
of the cables
are
exposed
for
inspection.
LANDING GEAR GEARBOX AND ACTUATING LINKAGE
4.
Check for
condition and attachment. Check for unusual noise. Remove oil filler
leakage, wear,
plug and check oil
by engaging and turning the emergency hand crank 1/2 turn to determine that oil
being picked up on the worm gear. The oil level should be maintained no more than
necessary to cover 112 of the diameter of the worm gear. Install oil filler plug.
level
is
I
5.
6.
security
and check
signs
of
chafing
security and wear at

jam nuts for tightness.
all
security
points.
and leaks.
cracks.
or
BRAKE MASTER CYLINDER AND PARKING BRAKE VALVE
security
8.
housing
for
AUXILIARY FUEL PUMP AND FUEL LINES
Check lines for

7.
FLAP MOTOR AND SHAFTS
Check drive shaft
and leaks. Check lines for
signs
of
chafing
or
cracks.
Check for freedom of movement. Check cables, push/pull rods,

bellcranks, pulleys, turnbuckles and fair leads for proper routing, condition and security.
RUDDER PEDALS
Check rudder
positive
positions for wear. Check locks and pins to ensure

important to operate controls through their full range so that
away from pulleys and all portions of the cables are exposed for
pedal fore
lock. NOTE
the cables move
and aft
It is
inspection.
9.
CONTROL COLUMN, TRIM CONTROL AND INDICATOR (Electric and Manual)

Check for freedom of movement. Inspect pulleys, sprockets, bearings, actuators, chains
and turnbuckles for condition,
security
operation. Check trim indicator for proper
and
indication.
10. ENGINE CONTROLS
locks for proper
Check for
ease
of
operation through full
travel. Check friction
operation.
11. ELECTRICAL WIRING AND EQUIPMENT
security
and
signs
of
chafing.
12. PLUMBING
Check all plumbing and connections for security, leakage and
general
condition.
13. WINDOWS AND DOORS
Inspect windows for scratches, crazing and general

Inspect doors for security of attachment. Check latching mechanism for
proper engagement and ease of operation. Check that rotation of the interior door
handle without depressing the handle lock release button does not unlatch the door.
condition.
Jun
28/0Page
14
5-20-00
nns
Raytheon Aircraft
C. CABIN AND BAGGAGE COMPARTMENT
(CONTINUED)
MECH
(Continued)
INSP
14. INSTRUMENTS AND INSTRUMENT PANEL
Inspect instrument panel, sub panels,

placards and instruments for condition and attachment. Check all knobs for security.
Inspect shock mounts and ground straps for cracks and security.
15.
SEATS, SEAT BELTS AND SHOULDER HARNESSES Inspect cabin seats,
seat belts
and shoulder harnesses for proper operation, condition and security of attachment.
Inspect floorboards for condition and seat attachment. Check for operation of the seat
stops.
Check condition of the oxygen system and check the oxygen
16. OXYGEN SYSTEM
masks for cleanliness and stowage.

17. VENTILATING SYSTEM
and
Check all fresh air and heat outlet vents for proper movement
operation.
18. FUEL SELECTOR VALVE
Inspect for leakage, security, freedom of movement, proper
detent feel and condition. Clean strainer and check for condition. Check for proper
placarding.
Check emergency release handle and latch assembly for
Check that the hatch moves out freely. Check the complete latch
19. EMERGENCY EXIT HATCH
operation.
assembly for condition
proper
and all moving parts for proper operation. With the hatch
installed, check for proper latching and seal. Safety the emergency exit with 0.020
inch-diameter copper wire after

20. STATIC SYSTEM
opening.
Check and drain water from the static lines.

Check for condition, mounting
21. CABIN AIR BLOWER
security
and
wear
at all
points.
Drain and clean. On fuel cells with foam inserts, check for brown
foam material. Refer to Safety Communique No. 67 and Service Bulletin No. 2109.
22. FUEL STRAINER
23. CONTROL COLUMN
D.
(E-1946, E-2104, E-2111 and After; EA-320, EA-389 and After)

U-joint roll pins and ensure they are not backing out.
control column
Inspect the
MECH
WINGS AND CARRY-THROUGH STRUCTURE
LH
1.
SKIN
Check for deformation and obvious damage. Check for cracks, loose
or
INSP
RH
missing
rivets. If damage is found, check adjacent structure. Check for indications of hard
landing or excessive flight loading.
2.
STRUCTURE
or
missing
Check for cracks, deformation and concealed damage. Check for loose
rivets.
for cracks, proper fit and attachment.
3.
ACCESS DOORS AND PANELS
4.

cables and pulleys. Replace control system components (pushrods, turnbuckles, end
Inspect
than 3 broken strands in any 3-foot

length of cable or evidence of corrosion. Check cables for proper tension. NOTE It is
important to operate controls through their full range so that the Gables move away from
proper
operation. Replace
pulleys and
nns
all
portions
cables that have
of the cables
are
more
exposed
for
inspection.
5-20-00
15
Ral~heon Aircraft
IOO-HOUR OR ANNUAL INSPECTION
D. WINGS AND CARRY-THROUGH STRUCTURE
(CONTINUED)
MECH
(Continued)
LH
5.
AILERONS
Check for condition and security. Check for cracks, loose
and freedom of movement. Check
rods for
security
hinge bearings
RH
missing rivets
push/pull
and brackets for condition,
and rod ends for corrosion.
6.
FUEL CELLS, CAPS AND VENTS Inspect fuel cells, caps and
Chapter 28. Refer to Service Instruction Number 0632-280.
7.
PLUMBING
8.
ELECTRICAL WIRING AND EQUIPMENT
or
INSP
Check for
leakage, chafing,
condition and
Inspect
for
vent lines. Refer to
security.
chafing, damage, security
and
attachment.
9.
FLAP LIMIT SWITCHES
Check for condition, security and freedom of operation.

Check for condition, security, binding
10. FLAPS AN D ACTUATORS

drive shafts. Check
roller
bearings
flap skin and
structure for
and tracks for condition. Check
11. FLAP POSITION TRANSMITTER
cracks, loose
stop
area
or
or
chafing of actuator
missing
are
Check the drain holes in the upper wing attach fittings to

open and free of obstruction.
13. WING SPAR CAP
damage.
Check for security and operation.
12. DRAIN HOLES
they
rivets. Check
for condition and
Inspect the wing spar cap
for corrosion. Refer to
ensure
Chapter
that
57. See
Service Bulletin 2538.

14. WING BOLTS
wing bolts for proper torque at the first 1 GO-hour inspection and
inspection after each reinstallation of the wing attach bolts. Refer to
maintenance manual for wing bolt, nut and fitting inspection criterion
Check
at the first 1 GO-hour
Chapter 57 of this
and frequency.
15. RADAR ANTENNA COVER
Check the fiberglass for security, attachment and cracks.
16. FUEL VENTS AND AIR INLETS, PITOT TUBE AND STALL WARNING VANE
Check
for condition and obstruction.

17. Perform the INSPECTION OF FUEL CELL FLAPPER VALVE
Refer
procedure.
retpahC
ot
28-10-00.
E.
MECH
NOSEGEAR
WHEEL AND TIRE
1.
Check wheel for cracks and tire for wear, damage and proper
inflation. Check wheel
bearings
LANDING GEAR STRUT
2.
for condition and
Inspect
leakage.
Check for wear at attach
3.
ACTUATING LINKAGE
4.
GEAR DOORS AND LINKAGE
wear.
the shock strut and components for cracks,
attachment, proper inflation and evidence of
points. Check for cracks and security.
Check doors for damage and cracks to the structure

and skins. Check linkage for wear and cracks at the attach points. Check for condition
and
security.
NOSE GEAR STEERING LINKAGE
5.
security. Inspect linkage
Jun
INSP
28/02PagelG
Inspect linkage
for
tightness,
condition and
boots for condition.
5-20-00
A23
Raylheon Aircraft
(Continued)
E. NOSE GEAR
6.
(CONTINUED)
SHIMMY DAMPER
MECH
INSP
Check for condition and attachment. Check attach points for

Chapter 12-20-00.
cracks. Check fluid level per

7.
in
8.
Check and maintain the proper fluid level in the strut as outlined
STRUT FLUID LEVEL
Chapter
12-20-00.
STRUT AND A-FRAME HINGE BOLTS
Inspect
for corrosion and
security of
attachment.
9.
STATIC CABLE
(If installed)
Inspect for condition, proper
clearances and attachment.
Check for condition.
10. VISUAL INDICATOR
11. NOSE LANDING GEAR DRAG BRACE
(P/N 002-820016-31, P/N 002-820018-3, or

Installed) Check that the two drag brace bracket attachment bolts
(Item 22, Figure 4, Chapter 32-20-00) are secure. Check drag brace assembly for shear
stress, wear and corrosion. At 2,000 hours, remove and inspect the two bracket
with Kit 35-4012-1
attachment bolts.
Replace
all hardware with evidence of shear stress,
wear
and/or
corrosion.
12. NOSE LANDING GEAR RETRACT ROD ROD-ENDS
for
F.
signs
of
cracking,
sheer stress,
wear
Check the retract rod rod-ends
and corrosion.
I
MECH
MAIN GEAR AND BRAKES
LH
1.
BRAKES, LINES, LINING AND DISCS

lines for
chafing
and
signs
of
leakage
or
wear
and
cracks. Check discs for wear
or
I I
INSP
RH
security. Check
warping.
Check
brake discs for cracks.

2.
Check wheels for cracks and tires for wear, damage, condition
WHEELS AND TIRES
and proper inflation. Check wheel

3.
bearings
for condition and
ACTUATOR GEARBOX, MOTOR AND SWITCHES
wear.
Check for
leakage, condition
and
security.
4.
LANDING GEAR STRUTS Inspect the shock struts and components for cracks,
attachment, corrosion, proper inflation and evidence of leakage.
5.
ACTUATING LINKAGE
condition and
6.
Check for
GEAR DOORS AND LINKAGE
linkage
for
STRUT FLUID LEVEL
8.
outlined in
points.
Check for
Chapter
Check doors for damage and cracks to the structure

and cracks at the attach points. Check for condition
wear
security. Determine that all

pins.
and
as
and cracks at attach
security,
and skins. Check
7.
wear
clevis
retaining pins are
in
place and secured with
cotter
Check and maintain the proper hydraulic fluid level in the struts
12-20-00.
STRUT AND A-FRAME HINGE BOLTS
Inspect
for corrosion and
security of
attachment.
A23
5-20-00
17
Raytheon Aircraft
G.
(CONTINUED)
MAIN GEAR OPERATION
MECH
LH
INSP
RH
WARNING
circumstances should the landing gear be operated electrically while the hand
engaged. In the event of such an operation, a tear down and magnetic inspection
should be performed to determine damage to the engagement slot in the worm shaft.
Under
no
crank is
CAUTION
battery voltage is not sufficient to properly cycle the landing gear for this inspection,
only an external power source capable of delivering and maintaining 28.25 0.25 VDC to
the airplanes electrical system throughout the extension and retraction cycles when performing
the landing gear retraction inspection. Refer to Chapter 32 for more specific information on the
following items.
Since the
use
fit and fair. Check for unusual noise.
1.
DOORS
2.
POSITION LIGHTS Check for security, adjustment and wiring for breaks, condition of
insulation, loose connections and proper indication.
3.
WARNING HORN
4.
UPLOCK CABLE TENSION
Check
security. Check
5.
operation,
Check for proper operation.
uplock cable
Check
uplock
cable mechanism for condition and
for proper tension and for
EMERGENCY EXTENSION
possible fraying.
Check system for freedom of
operation. Check for

engagement of the
unusual noise. With the spar cover installed, check for proper
emergency extension handle and proper system operation.
6.
DOWNLOCI( TENSION
Check for proper deflection force
on
the main gear knee
joints.
7.
UPLOCK ROLLERS
indicated in
Chapter
Check condition and clearance of

12-20-00. Check for
uplock
rollers and lubricate
as
binding.
8.
LIMIT SWITCH RIGGING Check for security and proper adjustment of the limit
switches. Refer to RIGGING THE LANDING GEAR in Chapter 32-30-00 of this
maintenance manual for correct landing gear gearbox internal clearance.
9.
SAFETY SWITCH
Check for security, proper
rigging
and
operation.
airplane on jacks and cycle the landing gear while

position light switches operate in conjunction with the
condition and operation of the complete landing gear
the
Check
position.
10. GENERAL OPERATION
Place the
to ascertain that the
checking
landing gear
system.
11. DYNAMIC BRAKING ACTION

12.
of
dynamic
brake
relay.
(If Installed) Inspect the retractable step for cable and safety link
condition, proper adjustment and operation. Check fixed link condition, proper
adjustment and operation. Check fixed steps for security.
ASSIST STEP
Page
nuJ81
Verify proper operation
28/02
5-20-00
nzs
Raytheon Aircraft
H.
(CONTINUED)
MECH
NOSE GEAR OPERATION
INSP
WARNING
Under
circumstances should the landing gear be operated electrically while the hand
engaged. In the event of such an operation, a tear down and magnetic inspection
be performed to determine damage to the engagement slot in the worm shaft.
no
crank is
should
CAUTION
II
voltage is not sufficient to properly cycle the landing gear for this inspection,
0.25 VDC to
external power source capable of delivering and maintaining 28.25
the airplane s electrical system throughout the extension and retraction cycles when performing
Since the battery

use
only an
Refer to
the landing gear retraction inspection.

following items.
for
more
specific information
on
the
fit and fair. Check for unusual noise.
i.
DOORS
2.
NOSE GEAR UP TENSION
Check
Chapter 32
operation,
Check the up tension
on
the nose gear as indicated in
RIGGING THE LANDING GEAR in Chapter 32-30-00.

3.
DOWNLOCK TENSION Check the downlock tension

RIGGING THE LANDING GEAR in 32-30-00.
4.
GENERAL OPERATION
on
the nose gear
as
indicated in
Place the airplane on jacks and cycle the landing gear while
checking to ascertain that the position light switches operate in conjunction with the
landing gear position. Check the condition and operation of the complete landing gear
system.
I.
Inspect for
5.
VISUAL INDICATOR
6.
NOSE GEAR STEERING
proper
adjustment
and operation.
Check for condition and security.
REAR FUSELAGE AND EMPENNAGE

i.
Check for deformation, cracks and obvious damage. Check for loose
damage is found, check adjacent structure.
SKIN
or
missing
rivets. If
2.
INTERNAL FUSELAGE STRUCTURE

loose
or
missing
Check for cracks and deformation. Check for
rivets. Check bulkheads, door
posts, stringers and doublers for
corrosion, cracks and buckles.

3.
STRUCTURE
other obvious
4.
Inspect the two

damage.
most aft bulkheads for
cracks, distortion, loose rivets
or

pulleys. Replace control system components (pushrods, turnbuckles, end
cables and
have more than 3 broken strands in any 3foot

Check cables for proper tension. NOTE It is
of
corrosion.
evidence
length
their
full range so that the cables move away from
controls
to
through
important operate
for inspection.
of
the
cables
are
and
all
exposed
portions
pulleys
proper
operation. Replace cables that
of cable
~123
or
5-20-00
Jun
28/02PagelS
Ray~heon Aircraft
100-HOUR OR ANNUAL INSPECTION (CONTINUED)
I. REAR FUSELAGE AND EMPENNAGE
5.
CONTROL SURFACES
or
missing
(Continued)
6.
Check for deformation, cracks and security. Check for loose

security of hinges and
hinge casting ton
the aft
bulkhead)
for cracks
mounting bolt holes.
TRIM TABS AND ACTUATORS
Chapter
27-30-00. Check
hinges
Check for security and
Check free play per

security and wear. Check
wear.
and trim tab actuators for
trim tabs for cracks and control rods for attachment. Lubricate trim tab
Chapter
hinges per
12-20-00.
7.
STATIC PORTS
8.
PLUMBING
9.
INSP
rivets. Check for freedom of movement. Check for
bond cables. Check the inboard elevator

in
MECH
Check for obstruction and clean
Check for
leakage, cracks, chafing,
ELECTRICAL WIRING AND EQUIPMENT
as
necessary.
condition and
security.
Inspect for chafing, damage, security
and
attachment.
10. STATIC LINES
11. ANTENNAS
12.
Check condition of static lines and drain.
Check for condition and
ELEVATOR/RUDDER
security.
(Ruddervators)open and clean.
a.
Check that the drain holes
b.
Check that the ruddervator trim tab and

ELEVATOR TRIM IAB
are
hinge pin are correctly

INSTALLATION, Chapter 27-21-00.
the trim tab
c.
Check for cracks
d.
Check the stabilizer front and
on
hinge support
rear
mated. Refer to
channel.
spar attach points for cracks and looseness.
(CE-I thru CE-1425; CJ-I thru CJ-179; E-l

airp\anes that have not installed Kit No. 33-6001-1
2333 every 500 flight hours or annually.
13. RUDDER FORWARD SPAR

EA-1 thru EA-500 and
Service Bulletin No.
thru E-2518;
S Refer to
(CE-1426 and After; CJ-180 and After; E-2519 and After;

airplanes that have installed Kit No. 33-6001-1 S Open
inspection covers adjacent to the upper and center hinges. Inspect ribs, spar, hinges
and all rudder components in area of the hinges for attachment security, cracks and
general condition using a flashlight and mirror. Install covers.
14. RUDDER FORWARD SPAR
EA-501 and After and
J.
GENERAL
Airplane
2.
Airplane lubricated,
3.
Inspect
4.
5.
Jun
28/0Page
20
all
placards
after
cleaning,
to ensure that
Ensure that all Airworthiness

and
cleaned and serviced.
1.
previously
in accordance with
they
are
Chapter
easily readable
and
securely attached.
Directives, Beech and Raytheon Aircraft Service Bulletins

are reviewed and complied with as required.
issued Service Instructions
complete or annual inspection of the airplane, all

noted in this guide should be inspected.
For
12-20-00.
5-20-00
items
on
the
airplane
that
are
nns
CHAPTER
DIMENSIONS
AND AREAS
BEECHCRAFT
BONANZA SERIES
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
CHAPTER 6

CHAPTER
SECTION
PAGE
SUBJECT
6-EFFECTIVITY/CONTENTS
DATE
........,,,.Oct 7/83
6-00-00
CHAPTER 6
.........,._
Feb 18/83
Oct 10/80
2A
Feb 18/83
................Oct 7/83
...............Jan 20/82
.........,.,..Oct 7/83
..............Jan 20/82
............,Jan 20/82
..............Jan 20/82
TABLE OF CONTENTS
CHAPTER
SECTION
SUBJECT
SUBJECT
..6-00-00
(CE-748, CE-772 and after;

CJ-149 thru CJ-155 Without Kit 33-4002-1)
Airplane Dimensions (D-10097, D-10120 and after)
Airplane Dimensions (CJ-156 and after, and CJ-149
thru CJ-155 with Kit 33-4002-1)
Airplane
PAGE
Dimensions
........1
........2
......2A
Airplane Dimensions (E-llll, E-1241 and after)

Airplane Dimensions (EA-1 thru EA-272 except EA-242)
Airplane Dimensions (EA-242, EA-273 and after)
Stations Diagram (CE-748, CE-772 and after; CJ-149 and after)
Stations Diagram (D-10097, D-10120 and after)
Stations Diagram (E-llll, E-1241 and after; EA-1 and after)
i................
.......3
.......4
.......5
.......6
.......7
............8
"END"
&EFFECTIVrTYICONTENTS
P~gl
Oct 7/83
BEECHCRAFT
BONANZA SERIES
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
268
i3
83"
i
67"
7.5" MINIMUM CLEARANCE

336"
h\
OPTIONAL RADAR
122"
7 DIA
97"
113607.1(
Altplene Dimalmions (CE-748, CE772 and after;

CJ-149 thru CJ-155 Without Kit 33-4002-1)
Figure 1
600-00
Pegei
A5
Febi8/83
BEECHCRAFT
BONANZA SERIES
MAINtENANCE MANUAL
265"
T
67"
c:r
77"
68" MINIMUM CLEARANCE
336"
h\
OPTIONAL RADAR
106"
7 DIA
97"----------1
Airplane
6-0090
Page2
Oct 10/80
Dimensions
(D-10097, P10120
Figure 2
v,r.~or.is
and
after)
BEECHCRAFF
BONANtA SERIES
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
268
i3
83"
6!"
7.5" MINIMVM CLEARANCE

336"
WING AREA:
181.0 SO.FT.
h\
lL111
122"
7 ~DIA
97"
Airplane
Dimensions (CJ-150 and after, and CJ-149

thru CJ-155 With Kit 339002-1)
133-607.29
Figure 2A
6-00-00
Page 2 A
A5
Feb18183
BEECHCRAFT
BONANZA SERIES
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
85"
6.6"
CI~
CLEARANCE, 9.5" E-1946, E-2104, E-2111 AND
7.5" MINIMUM
4FTER
~k
336"-
IQ
~Ck
*OPTIONAL RADAR
tAT SERIALS E1946, 6-2104, 6-2111 AND

~k
AFTER, VORTEX GENERATORS WERE ADDED
TO tHE WING LEADING EDGE. AT THE SAME
SERIALS A CONTROLLABLE TAB REPLACED
THE FIXED fAB ON THE LEFT AILERON.
122"
L~-
80" DIA 3 BLADE PROPELLER USED 6-1946,
6-2104, 6-2111 AND AFTER.
7 DIA
j-97"
A38-M)7- 33
Airptane
(8-1111,
Figure 3
Dimensions
6-1241 and
atter)
6-00-00
Page3
A6
Oc17/83
YLL~)
ICI~ 1~,
BONANtA SERIES
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
29.5
8 FT. 5 IN.
sFT:elN.
--W,L. I0oon
f-
9.5 IN. (MIN. CLEARANCE WITH TIRE

AND SHOCK STRUT DEFLATED)
3"56 MIN.
2.5"
33 FT. 6 IN.
VERTICAL
STABILIZER
OPTIONAL RADAR
12 FT. 2 IN.
80 IN. DIA.
9 FT. 7 IN.
A36TC-607-20
Airplane Dlmanalona (EA-lthru

Figure 4
EA-212
Except EA-242)
6-00-00
Page
Jan 20/82
A4
BEECHCRAFT
BONANZA SERIES
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
2.5
L~pt
t
t THE FIXED TAB IS REPLACED BY A
CONTAOLLABLE TAB ON LEFT AILERON
AT SERIALS EA-320, EA-389 AND
AFTER
VERTICAL
STABILIZER
12 FT. 2 IN.
078
~----9 FT. 7 IN.
29.5
Z>
6 FT. 6 IN.
~D
~D
(MIN. CLEARANCE WITH TIRE

AND SHOCK STRUT DEFLATED)
10.5 IN.
8 FT. 5 IN.
-;-__1
--W.L. 100.00
r
3"56 MIN.
Airplane Dlmanaiona (EA-242,

Figun, 5
EA-273 and
836TC-607-23
after)
6-00-00
Page5
A6
Oct 7/83
BEECHCRA~
BONANZA SERIES
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
14.96
41.~72
..75
116.50
1I~qi
104.90
27200
292.00
257.649.00
19.812
174.50
151.00
33.345
ii om
w.L111
I
82.53;1.W.L.
88.1
248.30
149~W
18.25
39.50
4.50
12125 29.25
68.00
58.50
83.090100.00
233.50
207.00
17.8;1
112138
131.00
256.90
170.00
179.00
291.00
FUSELAGE
152.250
HORIZONTAL STABILIZER
VERTICAL STABILIZER
272.000
257.806
3.500
1.245
15.250
38.403
25.500
35.750 ~CC----I
Y~-- 36.15
36.900
46.000
58.250
56.550
72.500
148.815
175.837
191.00
182563
123.1 82
39.375
86.000
113.172
59.000
13530
09.305 83.547
23.881
95.483
73.000
136.188
i~i
n
WING
Ir
175.294
0.00
80.647
108.281
44.164
122.750
53.d00 I
45.000
131~
J3sow
36.030
Stations
Diagram (CE-748, CE-TIP

Figura
and
after; CJ-149 and after)
6-00-00
Paga6
Jan 20/82
A4
BEECHCRAFT
BONIVJZASERIES
MANmNANCE MANUAL,
82.960 94.75
116.25r
MIo4.so I ID1F~3.812
~I IX(1B
41.172
14.96
27200
11850
33.545
257.609
151.M)
292.00
277.00
174.50
11_1
w.L.
w.l
as.J-~--Clz(z
248.30
233.50
Mj.OO
18.25
\491W
39.50
12125 29,25
4.50
68.00
58.50
85.090100.00
LI
lir.87
131.00
112.138
256.90
297.00
FUSELAGE
170.00
119.00
152.250
CLOFAIRPLANE
:I
0.000
12500 56.250 35.75015.250

46.000
MLFRONT SPAR
STABIUZER
M REAR
38.15
3.900
39.315
66.000
13530
59.000
1 23.182
113.172
148.175136.1
175.837
191.00
162.563
rjg305 83.54173.0001.
n~ rl
23.881
95.463
88
0.00
WING
175.294
80.b47
108.281
94.864
122=750
Stations Diagram
(0-10097,
F~gure 7
53.d00
45.000
38.030
.i~7
I)-10120 and after)
6-0000
Page 7
Jan 20/82
A~
BEECHCRAFT
BONAE~A SERIES
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
58.00
1M).00
148.15
Ile.M
124.75
23.345
-10.00
174.00
48.50
I3~.!72
8.25
Iq.aol 155.00
20!.00
233.50
1257.606272.00
100.00
0.~00
925
170.00
39.00
29.50
83:00
58.00
112:138
131.00
12;.55
14j.00
FUSELAGE
495
.245
38.
39.375
83.547 66.00
122.75
103.641
146.875
73.M)S9
~.091
113.1n
(36.188
1gW83
175.281
181W
53:00
47.m
31.75
yu.se~
13.218~/
83.00
11~--23.06
VERTICAL STABIUZER
272.00
257.608
162563
7
136.168
i
108.261
MODELS F33A. F33C. V35B. A38. A36TC
3.M
BO.C17
25.50
45.00
23.at
35.75
WING
36.15
36.90
31.75
218.18
198.000
usloml iogsml~
122.7$
148.875
175.281
136.188
162.563
103.641
83.541 66,00
73.M)
113.172IglpB(
580039.875123;881
56.25
47.00
66.55
.525
83.00
HORUOHTAL STABIUZER
162363
136.188
108.281
80.047
qjDD
MODEL B36TC
23.81
366038
Stations Diagram (E-llll. E-1241 and

after; EA-1 and after)
FIE(un, g
6QO-00
PegeB
"END"
3en ~0/82
A4
C H A PT E R
LIFTING AND
SHORING
BEECHCRAFT
BONANZA SERIES
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
CHAPTER I
LITTINC AND SHORING
TABLE OF CONTENTS
SUBJECT
CHAPTER
CHAPTER
PACE
SECTION
7-00-00
Lifting and Shoring
Jacking
Main
SUBJECT
....7-00-00
1
I
2
Wheel ja;k:Ing
Hoisting
"END"
7-CONTENTS
Page 1
A13
Mar 30/90
BEECHCRAFT
BONANZA SERIES
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
CHAPTER 7
CHAPTER
SECTION
SUBJECT
PAGE
DATE
7-EFFECTIVITY
Mar 30/90
7-CONTENTS
Mar 30/90
7-00-00
1
2
Mar 30/90
Mar 30/90
"END"
7-EFFECT1V1TY
A13
Page 1
Mar 30/90
BEECHCRAFT
BONANZA SERIES
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
LIFTING AND SHORING

PRACTICES
MAINTENANCE
JACKING
WARN ING
The
landing
gear
struts
do
incorporate internal stops.

the
aiplane
attempt
to
is
jacks,
on
remove
the
knees, the torque knee pins

bolt connecting the torque
not
When
do
not
torque
or
the
knees
the shock
without first aeflating

absorber assembly and supporting
the gear. The torque knees provide
the extension stop for the lower
shock
absorber
When
assembly.
they are disconnected, the cylinder
is free to slide out of the
upper
assembly.
CAUTION
Jacking
only
the
be
landing gear should

accomplished within an
or
building
hangar.
enclosed
Should it become necessary to jack
the airplane in the open, no more
than
one
jack point should be
utilized at a time. For safety of
personnel and the airplane, wind
velocity in
considered
any direction must be
prior
to
jacking
airplane.
the
35-590006 Main Wheel Jack

Figure 2
Adapter
A three point jack (Figure 1) is used to

ii ft the airplane off the ground. Each
jack pad is identified and located on the
underside of the fuselage. One jack pad
is located on each of the lower wing-tofuselage attachment fittings along the
front spar. The rear jack fitting consists
of an eye bolt that is screwed completely
into the airplane.
WARNING
Be
sure
the
rear
jack point safety
place and safetied to prethe

vent
airplane from nosing
over. As an additional precaution
against nosing over, attach, but
not suspend, a weight of approximately 200 pounds to the aft tiedown lug.
is
in
When one wing is to be removed, a stand

should be placed under the opposite wing
and the tail to counteract the resulting
unbalanced condition of the airplane.
MAIN WHEEL JACKING
jack adapter (Figure 2) is

optional equipment. Before
raising the airplane, be sure the shock
strut is properly inflated to the correct
If the strut is not inflated to
height.
the recommended height, it will be impos-
The main wheel
supplied
Model 300 Service Jack
figure 1
as
sible to insert thejack adapter into the

wheel axle. A scissor type jack is
recommended for Individual wheel jacking.
main
7-00-00
A13
Page 1
Mar 30/90
BEECHCRAFT
BONANZA SERIES
MA1NTENANCE MANUAL
HOISTING
airplane
The
Install
a.
be
may
the
ting, P/N 35-590067,

wing attach bolt.
b.
the
c.
the
far
hoisting
on
sling fiteach upper forward
Attach the hoisting

35-590064-1 shown
~n
hoisting sling fittings.

Install the strap assembly aroung
blade shanks.
propeller
d.
Hoist the
airplane
ETON.ylhto ms
Adjust the strap assembly

ai rp lane
the
slightly
e.
may
mainte-
follows:
as
P/N
bly,
to
hoisted
parts replacement
or
nance
be
nose
to
keep
level
down attitude.
in
or
As
added precaution,
an
installed under the tail
stand
the
of
airplane.
35-590064-1
Hoisting Sling Assembly

Figure 3
If
the
airplane
must
be
hoisted
and
the
P/N 35-590064-1
When lowering the airplane, caution should
be exercised to prevent the shock strut
from becoming compressed and forcing the
landing
gear door
against the jack adapt-
er.
hoisting sling assembly

available, remove the cabin door,
is not
the left front window and the front seats.
Attach a sling to the front wing spar in
the fuselage and a line to the hoist fitting on the engine.
CAUTION
CAUTION
Do not walk on the wing walk with

the airplane on the main wheel
A spreader must be used above the

cabin to prevent damaging the door
molding and window frame.
jack.
"END"
1-00-00
Page 2
Mar 30/90
A13
CHAPTER
LEVELING AND
VV EIGHING
BEECHCRAFT
BONANZA SERIES
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
CHAPTER 8

CHAPTER
SECTION
SUBJECT
DATE
PAGE
.........,,,May 9/80
8-00-00
...............May 9/80
CHAPTER 8
LEVELING AND WEIGHING
TABLE OF CONTENTS
CHAPTER
SECTION
SUBJECT
SUBJECT
GENERAL
8-00-00
PAGE
........1
Leveling
.......1
"END"
&EFFECTIVltYICONTENTS
Plgl
Mly 9/80
BEECHCRAFT
BONANZA SERIES
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
GENERAL
the center of
second
Suspending the plumb

assist in stabilizing it.
LEVELING
a can
screw
below.
of
oil will
directly
light engine
leveling is accomplished by removing the front seat(s)

placing a bubble level on the spar carry thru structure.
Deflate the tire or strut on the high side of the airplane to
To level the
Lateral
bob to the
and
airplane longitudinally, attach a cord and plumb

phillips head screw, located beneath the rear
window on the left side of the airplane. Inflate or deflate the
nose gear shock strut as necessary to pass the cord through
phillips head
bob in
center the bubble.
"END"
8-00QO
Page
May
9/80
CHAPTER
TOVVING AND
TAXIING
BEECHCRAFT
BONANZA SERIES
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
CHAPTER 9-TOWING AND TAXIING

TABLF OF CONT~NTS
CHAPTER
SUBJECT
PACE
9-00-00
Towing and Taxiing
Towing
One Person
Towing With
Taxiing
Towing
a
TractororTug
"END"
0-CONTENTS
Page 1
A16
Oct 16/92
BEECHCRAFT
BONANZA SERIES
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
CHAPTER 9
LIS T OF FACE EFFECTIVITY
CHAPTER
SECTION
SUBJECT
PAGE
DATE
9-EFFECTIVITY
Oct 16/92
9-CONTENTS
Oct 16/92
9-00-00
Oct 16/92
"END"
0-EFFECTIVITY
Page
Ale
Oct 16192
BEECHCRAFT
BONANZA SERIES
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
TOWING AND
PRACTICES
CAUTION
MAINTENANCE
TAXIING
After
moving
the tow bar.
TO WING
the
airplane, always remove

propeller with
Never turn the
the tow bar attached to the

the
WARNING
nose
gear
as
hit the tow bar.
engine is warm, and it is necessary

the propeller to attach the tow bar,
If the
to
propeller will
move
stand
clear of the
move
the
Make
of rotation.
direction
of rotation
area
propeller against
the
and
normal
certain
the
magneto switch is off. While the engine is

warm, residual fuel in the intake ports and
injectors may ignite and cause the engine
to kick.
CAUTION
When
airplane is being towed,
an
quali-
fied person must be in the pilots seat to

operate the brakes in case of an emerWhen the
gency.
is
airplane
being
moved
backward, do not apply the brakes abrupt-
ly.
Hand Tow Bar
airplane slowly, avoiding sudor taxi the airplane

strut. Even brief towing or taxi-
Tow the
den
stops.
with
flat
ing with
damage
Figure
Never tow
deflated strut
can cause severe
used
as
handhold
tow bar
while
entering
closing
or
the door.
Always
to the
care
Never leave the cabin
door open on the ramp

damage the door.
as
wind
tractor
the tow
tug, attach the

pins on the nose
or
Always observe the turn

gear lower torque knee.
Turns
limits of the nose gear when making turns.
geater than these limits can cause extensive damage
not be
open the storm

window to relieve internal pressure when
the cabin.
airplane with a
~P/N 45-590075) to
To tow the
top of the cabin door should
leaving
TOWING WITH A TRACTOR OR TUG
to the strut.
NOTE
The
lower
gusts may
gear and shimmy damper. Also, exercise

removing the tow bar from the nose gear
torque knee to prevent damage to the lubrifittings on the torque knee.
nose
when
cation
NOTE
ONE PERSON TOWING
attempt to tow the airplane backby the fitting in the tail skid. The tail
skid was designed only to protect the tail
in the tail-low landing and to provide
Do not
ward
CAUTION
The Hand Tow Bar
used with
~Figure 1)
must not be
attachment for the tail tie-down.
tow vehicle.
TAXIING
One
person
smooth and
can
move
the
airplane easily
on
level surface with the tow bar (P/N

36-590015) furnished with the airplane. Attach the tow
bar to the tow pins on the nose gear lower torque
knee and push or pull gently to move the airplane.
airplane must be taxied with the wing flaps up,

engine cowl flaps open. Turning may be
accomplished by the use of the nose wheel steering
The
and the
mechanism.
"END"
9-00-00
Page
A16
Oct 16/92
CHAPTER
PA RKING,
MOORING,
STO RAG E,
RTN TO SVC.
BEECHCRAFT
BONANZA SiRjES
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
CHAPTER 10

CHAPTER
SECTION
DATE
PAGE
SUBJECT
10-00-00
May 9/80
May
...............May
...............May
....May
2
3
4
CHAPTER 10
9/80
9/80
9/80
9/80
PARKING AND MOORING
TABLE OF CONTENTS
CHAPTER
SECTION
SUBJECT
SUBJECT
GENERAL
10-00-00
.......1
Parking.
Mooring
........1
........1
Normal Tie-Down
Extended
PAGE
Storage
and
High
........1
Wind
........1
Control Lock
Storage
Flyable Storage 7
Temporary Storage
Indefinite Storage
to 30
.........2
Days
30 to 90
.........2
Days
.........3
.........4
Preparation for Service
LEND"
1 O-EFFECtlVITYICONTENTS
pa1
Mly 9/80
BEECHCRAFT
BONANZA SERIES
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
surfaces must then be secured to prevent banging against

the stops. The controls should be secured in position with
GENERAL
control locks that
PARKING
mooring,
parking by pulling out the parking
brake control, then pressing the pilots brake pedals until firm.
Do not attempt to lock the parking brake by applying force to
the parking brake handle; it controls a valve only and cannot
apply pressure to the brake master cylinders.
The brakes
for
are set
installed in the control column. When
properly.
Pitot-static tubes should be covered.

EXTENDED STORAGE AND HIGH WIND
mooring the Bonanza, the following method is

recommended: Place chocks fore and ah of each main
wheel. Position a tail stand under the tail skid, adjusting the
When
slightly compress the nose gear shock

through each wing mooring lug, fastening
each end to a ground point, one forward and one ah of the
wing. Run a line through the hole in the tail skid and anchor at
the sides of the airplane approximately 5 feet from the base
of the stand. If a storm is anticipated, two lines may be
secured to each main landing gear strut barrel near the
height of
CAUTION
are
be sure to fasten all doors and windows
the stand to
strut. Run a line
Do not set the

brakes
are
parking
hot from
temperature when
brake control when the
severe use or
an
during
low
accumulation of moisture
may cause the brakes to freeze. An increase in

outside air temperature can build up excessive
pressure in the system. In addition, the parking
brake should be left OFF and wheel chocks
installed if the
airplane is
to be left unattended.
V-brace and also
line may be attached around the nose
gear strut near the lower torque knee. It is recommended that

the airplane be tied down headed into the wind, with the
control lock installed.
MOORING
CONTROL LOCK
designed to provide guidelines which can be

mooring and securing Bonanza series
airplanes. Mooring procedures for normal tie-down
operations as well as mooring for extended storage and high
A control column lock pin is provided for the control column

and the aileron control wheel. The lock pin secures both the
aileron control wheel and the elevator control. A cover is
This section is
followed when
wind conditions follow:
on the control lock to cover the throttle control,

boost pump, and the propeller control. Install the control lock
assembly in the following sequence:
provided
NORMAL TIE-DOWN
Rotate the control wheel to the right and move the
so the hole in the bracket and the column
a.
On Bonanza series airplanes, a tie-down lug is installed.on

each wing, and on the ah fuselage. The tie-downs should be
nylon or dacron ropes or chains with sufficient strength to
column forward
gusty winds. Manila or

high
airplane
hemp ropes should never be used. The tie-downs should
allow very little or no movement when tightened, too much
provided
restrain the
in
or
slack will allow the airplane to jerk against the tie-downs.

When securing the tail section of the airplane, the tie-down
should have a slight slack so that the nose of the airplane will
align
to
accept the pin.
b.
pin through
and into the control
causes more pressure to be placed on the wing

tie-down ropes and anchors. Adequate antislip knots such as
bowlines or square knots should be used when securing the
guide
column.
Ensure positive retention of the lock pin by placing
assembly over the throttle control, boost pump, and
propeller control.
c.
the
the
cover
not be raised off the ground. In a strong headwind, a tail

tie-down that is too tight will increase the angle between the
wing and the oncoming air. This creates an additional lifting
force, which
the hole
Push the control column lock

in the control column
WARNING
Always completely remove the control lock

assembly before engine start, taxiing, and flight.
lines.
STORAGE
Securing operations should be planned so the airplane is tied

down facing the prevailing wind, if the ground attachment
permits.
Once the
airplane
has been
positioned
into the wind,
the wheels should be checked fore and ah. The
flight
control
The storage procedures listed are intended to protect the

airplane from deterioration while it is not in use. The primaly
objectives of these measures are to prevent corrosion and
10-OMW)
Pagel
May 9/80
BEECHCRAFT
BONA~UA SERIES
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
damage from exposure

storage
are
to the elements. Three
f.
types of
and
considered:
a.
FLYABLE STORAGE
b.
TEMPORARY STORAGE
c.
INDEFINITE STORAGE.
7 to 30
days.
up to 90
PITOT TUBE
h.
WINDSHIELD AND WINDOWS
days,
PREPARATION FOR SERVICE
line to the nose gear.

ENGINE PREPARATiON FOR STORAGE
a
Engines in airplanes that are flown only occasionally tend to

exhibit cylinder wall corrosion much more than engines that
flown
Iftheengine hasatotaltimeofmorethan25
consumption has stabilized, drain
break-in oil after a ground warm-up and install oil
Teledyne Continental Motors Specification MHS-24C.
2. Preflight the airplane.
1.
the
per
30 to 90 DAYS
TEMPORARY STORAGE
frequently.
1.
Check for correct oil level and add oil if
2.
Run
engine
1500 rpm with oil and

normal operating range.
at least five minutes at 1200 to
cylinder head temperatures
DURING FLYABLE STORAGE
Each
in the
seven
days
during fiyable storage, the propeller shall be rotated by hand.

After rotating the engine six revolutions, stop the propeller
45" to 90" from the position it was in.
WARNING
Before rotation of propeller blades, ascertain
magnetoswitch is OFF, throttle in CLOSED
position and mixture control is in the IDLE CUTOFF position. Always stand in the clear while
turning propeller.
1.
airplane flown
Arrangements
should be made to have the
at least 30 minutes each week in order to
keep
the internal parts of the engine lubricated. Ground running of

the engine will not provide proper heating of the oil without
possible damage
to other
cylinder/crankshaft
MOORING
b.
ENGINE PREPARATION FOR STORAGE
flyable storage.
in
flight)
until oil
temperature
reaches normal range. Drain oil supplyfrom sump while

engine is still warm and replace djain plug.
1. Fill the sump to the full mark on the dipstick
lubricating oil meeting the requirements of MIL-C6529, Type 11 (3, Chart 1, 91-00-00), which will mix with
normal oil and provide protection against conosion.
2. Removethetopsparkplug andatomizespray
preservative oil MlL-L-46002, Grade 1 (4, Chart 1,9190-00)
at room temperature, through the upper spark plug hole of
each cylinder with piston in the down position. Rotate
crankshaft as each pair of cylinders is sprayed. Stop
crankshaft with no piston at top position, and thoroughly
respray each cylinder. Reinstall spark plugs.
3. Apply preservative to engine interior by
spraying the above specified oil (approximately two ounces)
through the oil filler tube. Seal all engine openings exposed
to the atmosphere using suitable plugs, or moisture resistant
tape, and attach red streamen at each point. Affix a tag to
the propeller in a conspicious place with the following
gage with
notation; DO NOT TURN PROPELLER, ENGINE

PRESERVED. Seal the propeller blade spinner cutouts with
tape.
engine compartment components
due to lack of air flow, and will result in condensation of
moisture in the oil
See
a.
Operate engine (Preferably
necessary to bring level to full mark.
c.
Remove all
covers
hours and the oil
are
Close all
and tape, clean the airplane and give it a thorough

inspection, particularly wheel wells, flaps, and control
7 to 30 DAYS
manila rope. It is recommended a tail support be used to

compress the nose strut and reduce the angle of attack of the
b.
cover.
be installed over windshield and windows.
openings.
Attach
Install
windows and window vents. It is recommended that covers
MOORING If the airplane cannot be placed in a

a.
hanger, install the control lock and tie the airplane down
securely at the three points provided. Do not use hemp or
wings.
Static ground airplane securely
g.
i.
FLYABLE STORAGE
GROUNDING
effectively.
supply, increasing
the
possibility
of
rust.
c.
Fill to
FUEL CELLS
capacity
to minimize fuel
vapor and protect cell inner liners.

FLIGHT CONTROL SURFACES
d.
Lock with
internal and external locks.

d.
FUEL CELLS
Fill to
capacity
to minimize fuel
vapor and protect cell inner linen,

e.
internal and extemal locks.
104000
Page2
May 9/80
e.
and
Lock with
GROUNDING
Static
ground airplane securely
effectively.
f.
PITOT TUBE
g.
Install
cover.
Close all
BEECHCRAFT
BONANZA SERIES
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
windows and window vents. It is recommended
installed
over
h.
BATTERY
standard
cover
be
Remove and store
according
to
covers, tape, and
thorough inspection, particularly wheel wells, flaps, and

control openings. With bottom spark plugs removed, hand
turn propeller several revolutions to clear excess
preservative oil, then reinstall plugs. Preflight the airplane
and
flight
ENGINE PRESERVED.
NOT TURN PROPELLER
practices.
Remove all
and
Clean
the
airplane
give it a
tags.
i.
propeller has not been removed, affix a

conspicuous place with the following notation: DO
if the
10.
tag in
windshield and windows.
The cylinder
DURING INDEFINITE STORAGE
c.
protex plugs shall be inspected weekly. The plugs should be
changed
as soon as
their color indicates unsafe conditions of
storage. If the dehydrator plugs have changed color in

half
engine
cylinders,
replaced.
of the
or more
should be
all desiccant material
one-
on
the
test.
The cylinder bores should be resprayed with

preventive mixture every six months or more
frequently it bore inspection indicates corrosion has started.
Replace all desiccant and protex plugs. Before spraying, the
engine shall be inspected for corrosion as follows: Inspect
the interior of at least one cylinder on the engine through a
spark plug hole. If cylinder shows start of rust, spray cylinder
corrosion preventive oil MIL-C6529, Type 11 (3, Chart 1,
91-00-00) and turn prop over five or six times, then respray.
Remove the rocker box cover from the engine and inspect
1.
INDEFINITE STORAGE
corrosion
See FLYABLE STORAGE.
a.
MOORING
b.
ENGINE PREPARATION FOR INDEFINITE
Drain the engine oil and service with
STORAGE
lubricating
oil, MlL-C-6529, Type 11 (3, Chart 1, 91-00-00).

1. Immediately after servicing with the corrosion
preventive mixture, fly the airplane for a period of time not to
exceed
the valve mechanism.
maximum of 30 minutes,
propeller be removed
and the engine removed from the airplane. The propeller
shaft should be coated with preservative oil and wrapped
with moisture proof material and tape,
2.
It is recommended the
Coat blades with preservative oil
PROPELLER
d.
and wrap with moisture proof material and tape. If propeller

has been removed, coat all paris with protective material to
exclude dust, and then tape.

FUEL CELLS Drain fuel cells.
e.
NOTE
engine is removed from the airplane,

mooring stand must be used.
If
tail
engine
oil
Remove the top spark plug from each

and spray thoroughly with corrosion preventive
cylinder
mixture MlL-C-6529, Type 11 (3, Chart 1, 91-00-00), at a

temperature range of 221" to 250"F.
4. install protex plugs in each of the top spark
plug holes, making sure that each plug is blue in color when
installed. Protect and support the spark plug leads with AN4060-1 protectors.
5. Place a bag of desiccant in the exhaust pipes
and seel openings with moisture resistant tape.
6.
contained
gasoline.
according
to standard
by inserting a protex
plug in the breather hose and damping in place.
8. Wrap engine with moisture proof material and
tape after desiccant bags have been installed.
9. Attach a red streamer to each place on the
engine where bags of desiccant are placed. Either attach red
tape or to the
with safety wire to prevent wicking of
streamers outside of the sealed area with
inside of sealed
area
moisture into sealed
area,
or
After 24 hours,
practices.
remove
Do not
fuel cells until 24 hours after oil has been

f.
of
coating
light
cells and store

remove or
handle
applied.
Lubricate all
hinge pins, bearings, bell cranks,

chains, control rods and quadrants and coat lightly with
corrosion preventive compound MlL-C-16173 (5, Chart 1,
91-00-00).
flight
control surface
1.
Seal cold air inlet to the heater muff with
moisture resistant tape,

7. Seal engine breather
thin
Flush, spray,
the inner liners of all fuel cells which have
2.
3.
rub
1.
on
g.
and
Lock with internal and external control locks.
GROUNDING
Static
ground airplane securely
effectively.
PITOT TUBE
h.
Apply a thin coating of grease,
MlL-G-10924 (6, Chart 1, 91-000-00), and install cover.
Close all
i.
windows and window vents and install covers over
windshield and windows.

LANDING GEAR
i.
the shock struts with
k.
TIRES
periodically.
Inflate
Coat the extended portion of
light weight
Install
as
oil.
covers.
Check air pressure
necessary.
100090
Page3
May 9/80
BEECHCRAFT
BONANZA SERIES
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
WING FLAP TRACKS AND ROLLERS
I.
corrosion
preventive compound.
Place
flaps
Coat with
in retracted
position.
a.
standard
according
to
b.
INSTRUMENT PANEL
material and
secure
SEATS
p.
LANDING LIGHTS
c.
protective
according
with tape,
to standard
practices. Tape connections.
store in a
dry temperate
AIRFRAME
s.
Remove and
room,
Cover static ports and all openings

secure with tape to exclude rain,
foreign
matter.
propeller if it was removed. Rotate

preservative oil from the cylinders.
Install the spark plugs, battery, and rotate propeller
a.
by hand through all compressions of the engine to check for
liquid lock. Reinstall cowling and start engine in the normal
Page 4
May 9/80
clear excess
manner.
f.
inspection
"END"
109000
Reinstall the
propeller to
with barrier material and

sun, and
lubricating oil, Per Teledyne Continental
Motors MHS-24C.
d.
Remove and store
LOOSE TOOLS AND EQUIPMENT
r.
cylinder plugs and all paper, tape, and

used to presen/e engine.
Drain corrosion preventive mixture and reservice
with recommended
covers.
Cover with barrier material
STALL WARNING UNIT
q.
Remove all
dehydrating agent
with tape,
Install
o.
secure
Cover with barrier
Remove all covers, tape, and tags from the
airplane.
practices.
n.
and
Remove and store
BATTERY
m.
Give the airplane a thorough

and test fly the airplane.
cleaning,
visual
C H A PT E R
PLACARDS AND
MAR KI NGS
BEECHCRAFT
BONANZA SERIES
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
CHAPTER ~1-PLACARDS
TABLE OF CONTENTS
CHAPTER
SUBJECT
PAGE
11-00-00
Required
FAA
Placards
Description and Operation
Required Placards and Markings

Designation Placard
Model
1
11-20-00
Markings
"END"
11-CONTENTS
Page
A16
Oct 16/92
BEECHCRAFT
BONANZA SERIES
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
CHAPTER 11
CHAPTER
SECTION
SUBJECT
PAGE
DATE
11-EFFECTIVITY
Oct 16/92
11-CONTENTS
Oct 16/92
11-00-00
Oct 16/92
11-20-00
May
Oct 16/92
Oct 16/92
Oct 16/92
9/80
Oct 16/92
Oct 16/92
"END"
11-EFFECTIVIM
Page
A16
Oct 16/92
BEECHCRAFT
BONANZA SERIES
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
DESCRIPTION AND
REQUIRED PLACARDS
OPERATION
MOD~L D~SIGNA TION PLACARD
designation placard identifies the airplan

by its model number and serial number. Should a
question arise concerning the care of this airplane, i
is important to include the airplane serial number in
any correspondence to Beech Aircraft Corporation.
Refer to Chapter 11-20-00 for illustration of the plac
ard. On airplanes 0-10097, D-10120 and after; EA-1
The model
FAA
REQUIRED
MARKINGS
PLACARDS
AND
markings are listed

Operating Handbook
and FAA Approved Airplane Flight Manual. Refer to
Section II of the applicable Pilots Operating Handbook for these placards and markings. For the acrobatic Bonanza (CJ-149 and after), also refer to the
LOG OF SUPPLEMENTS in the Pilots Operating
All
required
interior
placards
and
in the Limitations of the Pilots
Handbook.
CAUTION
Any time an airplane is repainted, inspect
all placards to assure that they are not
covered with paint, are easily readable,
and are securely attached,
thru EA-272 except EA-242; CJ-149 and after; CE-748,

CE-772 thru CE-1200; E-llll, E-1241 thiu E-2399; and
EA-242, EA-273 thru EA-472, the model designation
placard is located on the right side of

adjacent to the inboard end of the flap.
On
airplanes
the
fuselage
CE-1201 and after, E-2400 and after, and
EA-473 and after, the model designation placard is

located on the right side of the fuselage under the
leading edge
of the horizontal stabilizer.
is mounted .50-inch below the skin
forward of the tail
lap
The
placard
and 12-inches
cone.
"END"
11-00-00
Page
A16
Oct 16/92
BEECHCRAFT
BONANZA SERIES
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
EXTERIOR PLACARDS AND

DESCRIPTION AND OPERATION
Shown in this
which
are
Chapter
are
essential for
markings,
practices,
are
information for that model.
DOORIACK
IINSTALL
WITH
and
maintenance
r~ RTANT
by location/description of each. The placards which

shown for location only and may or may not bear
identical information to the placards installed on the various
individual models. Note the specific information on the
placards installed on each model to determine current
followed
follow
placards
exterior
good
ILINK
MARKINGS
BOLT;
ROD
HEAD
ATTACH POIN
-----------~1-I
AFTI
L_______11
LOCATED IN THE CENTER OF THE UNDERSIDE
OF THE FUSELAGE AT APPROXIMATELY FS 131.00
LOCATED ON THE OUTBOARD SIDE OF THE
ROOT RIB IN THE WHEEL WELL, VISIBLE
ABOVE THE INBOARD DOOR
-CAVTIONTVRN LIMITS REACHED
WHEN RED LINES ALIGN
Do NOTEXCEED
TOW
r--
IJACK PADI
L---_____J
LOCATED DIRECTLY ABOVE THE NOSE

LANDING GEAR TORQUE KNEE
c-~
iL__T_I
LOCATED ON THE LH SIDE OF THE

FUSELAGE AT APPROXIMATELY
FS 151.00 (2 PLACES)
LOCATED AT WING ROOT ON CENTER

SECTION SPAR, FORWARD OF THE
INBOARD WHEEL WELL DOOR
IMPORTANT
INSTALL UPLOCK
CABLE A~TACH BOLT
WITH HEAD AFT
LOCATED AT APPROXIMATELY WS 60.00

IN EACH WHEEL WELL, DIRECTLY ABOVE
THE UPLOCK ASSEMBLY
1I-2MK)
Page 1
May 9/80
BEECHCRAFT
BONANZA SERIES
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
(ilrechcralt
(I)cechfraft
OIL AIR STRUT
OIL AIR STRUT
FART NO. 36825(85

sEECH L~IRCR*FI UWIWRITK~N
.tKH *IIClln EOllollllON
I
I
I
I
(31cchcrzli
OIL AIR STRUT
ru~ a
s*IINO
*c*n* ulaui. u~u
Ib~10010
*rrl~
INSTRUCTIONS
r*w~
I.C* YCUII m*TUra
ul~
IrrsrRucnow
INSTRUCTIONS
TO CHECK FLUID AND Flu

REMOVE VALVE C*P. DEPRESS VALVE
CORE AND ALLOW STRUT TO FULLY
COMPRESS. THEN RAISE AND BLOCK
STRUT n INCH FROM COMPRESSED

POSITIDN- REMOVE VALVE BODY
ASSEMBLY AND F11l WITH HYDRAULIC OIL
CONFORMING TO INSTRUCTION MANUAL
SPECIFICATIONS. SLOWLY EXTEND STRUT
FROM BLOCKED POSITION AND REPLACE
VALVE BODY ASSEMBLY. DEPRESS VALVE
CORE AND COMPLETELY COMPRESS
STRLIT TO RELEASE EXCESS AIR AND OIL.
WITH AIRPLANE EMPTY EXCEPT FOR FUu
FUEL AND OIL KEEP STRUT INFLATED TO3W
INCHES OF PISTON SHOWING.
rO CHIEI ilUIO 1NO nit

1111811 VILYI C*). DHnI V*LVI COll LINO
ALLOW IIIUT r0 IULL* CD*n~ll. ~nm I*lw ~No
UOC* (IIUI
INCH 11811 COMI(IIIYD ~OllnOH
llMOVI V*LVI 11)81 UBMIL* ANO lII1 WIIH
H*DI*ULIC 011 CONIOIUING 10 INIIIUCIION
n*Null IICIrIC*lIlNr
~II
oIIrl*ct
lrsrAl UNrlL IDDlrlON
IL 011 C*NNOI 11 10010 WIIH I1~Ur IXIINOID
II)LICIV*LVIIODI 1III
CML~
~Onu.
rlOY
*c*
.011110*
COYIII(lrO
~uru* uo rli
nm
..Y01(
I1IYr
*muuc a mas ~o
IY~IIUCltO* YI*Y~L
ua rm*o
IM Al LrmD *Ma
I...Y1LI
V1LY(
IVYT mi
CORT
mnla mvr ro
1*o
CWCLTlr~r
111
uo a.na
1IU tym TIC~n U* rUlrUlwOOl U.r.M
TURLI m i car or Ala wrr.
DI~I(IIVLLVl(Olt
WARNING
LIULYU
IND COM)LIIILI CDMIIII~ I11UI ~O 11111I1

IXCIII *N 1NO O(L
IlaOWNG
I
I
WPH *lm*llI wm txcHI lot ruu lull IND

011 110 IIIUI INIUnD 10 I INCHIlOr nllOH
)(~1
LOCATED ON THE RIGHT MAIN

LANDING GEAR STRUT
WARNING
RELEASE
AIR
IN
STRUT
BEFORE
DISASSEMBLINO
BUILT UNDER ONE OR MORE OF THE
FOLLOWING BEECH PATENTS: 2388137.
24708(61 OTHER P*TENTS
~lrll
CE-748 THRU CE-979;
CJ-143 THRU
WARNING
III(~II*IIINI1)UI IKH~DI1*II(MILING
D-10397 AND AFTER;
CJ-156 AND AFTER;
E-1970 AND AFTER;
CE-980 AND AFTER.
(i)eechcrall
OIL AIR STRUT
a
~wlu,*
*Ic*uclulcoaula
EA-273 AND AFTER;
INSTRUCTIONS
~o wo; ato uo ru
CJ-155;
E-llll, E-1241 THRU 0.1969;
D-10097, D-10120 THRU D-10396;
LOCATED ON THE NOSE
LANDING GEAR STRUT
EA-1 THRU EA-272.
rloY
laYlalAn
arru nr*nusr lo Im mn 1 r*
COYIl(llIO W)IIIIM
ITYOlr
11I1(
U)D
uurUI 410 ru
*n* nouuc a moruc ro

I*II(IUCII~* Y**UIL IIrSUIO*S X~I. rma
lIW rrY *arro *um ucruu
ao*
ISIIYI)LI
caarar
LOCATED ON THE NOSE

LANDING GEAR STRUT
lo
Df~lr6r
IIM
uu~rr
*4111
r0 aLf*Y
Call
flUII
111 CWILIIlL
U UO a
I~*
unu rvn
SEE CHAPTER 12 OR 32 FOR CORRECT EXTENSION
IU"DO
rllll
LOCATED ON THE LEFT MAIN

LANDING GEAR STRUT
C9101542
11-20-00
Page
Oct 16/92
Ale
BEECHCRAFT
BONANZA SERIES
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
NOTICE
WING BOLTS ARE LUBRICATED
SEE MAINTENANCE MANUAL

FOR CORRECT TORQUE VALUES
ON AIRPLANES CE-950 AND AFTER, CJ-156 AND AFTER,

D-10372 AND AFTER, E-1847 AND AFTER, EA-221 AND AFTER.
LOCATED ON THE LEFT WING NEAR THE FOUR WING ATTACH

BOLTS AND ON THE RIGHT WING NEAR THE TWO LOWER ATTACH
BOLTS. ALSO LOCATED ON THE RIGHT SIDE OF THE FUSELAGE NEAR
THE TWO UPPER WING ATTACH BOLTS.
r
EMERGENCY LOCATOR TRANSMITTER SWITCH
-I
EMERGENCY LOCATO~ TRANSMITTER
SWITCH
ON
OFF
ARM
REARM
XMIT
O
FOR AVIATION EMERGENCY USE ONLY.
UNLICENSED OPERATION UNLAWFUL.
OPERATION IN VIOLATION OF FCC
RULES SUBJECT TO FINE OR LICENSE
REVOCATION.
ARM
REVOCATION.
L_______________-_J
_
LOCATED ON THE RIGHT SIDE OF THE FUSELAGE
FORWARD AND BELOW THE STABILIZER
FORWARD AND BELOW THE STABILIZER ON
ON AIRPLANES: EA-1 AND EA-2; CE-748, CE-772

THRU CE-828; E-llll, E-1241 THRU
AIRPLANES: D-10197 THRU D-10346; EA-3 THRU
E-1406, D-10097, D-10120 THRU D-10196 AND
EA-80; E-1407 THRU E-1686: CE-829 THRU

CE-905 AND CJ-150 THRU CJ-155 EXCEPT
CJ-149 EXCEPT AIRPLANES WITH
AIRPLANES WITH KITS 101-3046 OR

101-3127 INSTALLED.
KITS 101-3046 OR 101-3127 INSTALLED.
--I
SWITCH
XMIT
SWITCH
ARM
TEST
AUTO
XMIT
O
REVOCATION.
I
J
REVOCATION.
_
LOCATED ON THE RIGHT SIDE OF THE
FORWARD AND BELOW THE STABILIZER
FUSELAGE FORWARD AND BELOW THE STABILIZER
ON AIRPLANES D;10347 AND AFTER;
ON AIRPLANES: E-2148 THRU E-2423; EA-412
EA-81 THRU EA-411: E-1687 THRU E-2147;
THRU EA-479; CE-1033 THRU CE-1240 AND
CE-906 THRU CE-1032 AND AIRPLANES WITH
CJ-156 THRU CJ-179 EXCEPT AIRPLANES
KIT NO. 101-3046 EXCEPT AIRPLANES WITH
WITH KITS 101-3046 OR 101-3127 INSTALLED.
KIT NO. 101-3127 INSTALLED.
C9200973
11-20-00
Page
A16
Oct 16192
BEECHCRAFT
BONANZA SERIES
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
r--------------------------~

SWITCH
r----------------------------~
i
I
SWITCH
ARMED/
TEST
ARM
XMIT
ON
RESET
i
REVOCATION.
REVOCATION.
L--______________~
AIRPLANES: CE-1241 THRU CE-)646; E-2424
AIRPLANES: CE-1647 AND AFTER; E-2694
THRU E-2693 AND EA-480 THRU EA-530
AND AFTER; EA-531 AND AFTER AND
EXCEPT AIRPLANES WITH KIT 101-3127
AIRPLANES WITH KIT 101-3127 INSTALLED.
INSTALLED.
AVGAS ONLY
AVGAS ONLY
s~B" ~I
GRADE
GRADE
100LL
lIIS
1~9" ~a"
GRADE
GRADE
(M)LL
100
FOR ALTERNATE FUELS SEE
PILOTS OPERATING HANDBOOK
PILOTS OPERATING HANDBOOK
CAPACITY 40 US GALLONS tar USABLE)

WITH WINGS LEVEL
DEPRESS FLAPPER
CHECK QUANTITY
CAP. TO TAB BOTTOM 30 GAL (27 USABLE)

CAP. TO TAB SLOT 35 GAL (32
USP~BLE)i
SECURE CAP
CAUTION
DO NOT INSERT FUEL NOZZLE
MORE THAN 1%" INTO TANK
PLACE INBOARD OF FILLER CAP
rcnuTnow
DO NOT INSERT
r------------------------1
FUEL NOZZLE
FUEL
MORE THAN 3"
INTO TANK
~1
54 US GAL CAPACITY
(51 US GAL USABLE)

L__--_,-----~
80 GALLON FUEL SYSTEM

ON AIRPLANES D-10303 AND AFTER;
EA-33 THRU EA-272 EXCEPT EA-242;
PLACE DECAL AFT OF FILLER CAP

CE-884 AND AFTER;
ON AIRPLANES EA-242,
CJ-156 AND AFTER; AND

E-1594 AND AFTER
EA-273 AND AFTER

C92M)97~
11-20-00
Page
Oct 16192
A16
BEECHCRAFT
BONANZA SERIES
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
FUEL
AVIATION GASOLINE
GRADE 100LL
or
100
PILOTS OPERATING MANUAL
CAPACITY 25 US GALLONS (22 USABLE)
CAUTION
DO NOT INSERT FUEL NOZZLE
MORE THAN 3" INTO TANK
ON AIRPLANES D-10097; 0-10120 THRU D-10302,
EA-1 THRU EA-32,
CE-748, CE-772 THRU CE-883;
CJ-149 THRU CJ-155; AND

E-llll, E-1241 THRU E-1593
11-20-00
A16
Page
Oct 16/92
BEECHCRAFT
BONANZA SERIES
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
EXTERNAL
POWER
24 VOLT
THE MODEL DESIGNATION

PLACARD IS LOCATED ON THE
RIGHT SIDE OF THE FUSELAGE
LOCATED ON THE RIGHT SIDE OF THE
ADJACENT TO THE INBOARD END

OF THE FLAP ON AIRPLANES
ENGINE COMPARTMENT, JUST BELOW THE
D-10097,
COWLING DOOR
D-10120 AND AFTER; EA-1 THRU EA-272;

CORPORATION
CJ-149 AND AFTER; CE-748, CE-772
MODEL
SERIAL
THRU CE-1200, E-llll, E-1241 THRU

PC
~VSE ONLY MS20392-X25 OR

ISHEAR PIN WITH THIS PLVNGER
E-2399; AND EA-273 THRU EA-472.
TC
B
LOCATED ON THE NOSE LANDING
THE MODEL DESIGNATION
PLACARD IS LOCATED ON THE
GEAR RETRACT LINK ROD
RIGHT SIDE OF THE FUSELAGE

UNDER THE LEADING EDGE
r_-
OF THE HORIZONTAL STABILIZER
i STATIC AIR.
ON AIRPLANES
I KEEP CLEAN I
CE-1201 AND AFTER,

E-2400 AND AFTER,
LOCATED ON THE LEFT SIDE OF THE FUSELAGE
AND EA-473 AND AFTER.
JUST AFT AND BELOW THE REAR WINDOW
USE SAE 50 ABOVE 40" F
I USE
SAE 30 BELOW 40" F
rl~l
LOCATED ON THE INSIDE OF THE LEFT COWLING
DOOR, ON THE FORWARD SIDE. THE PLACARD IS

r-
VISIBLE WHEN THE DOOR IS OPEN
PULL TO
I CHECK LATCH
L ------I
r--------------------~
FUEL CELL SUMPI

DRAIN DAILV
I_
I
LOCATED NEAR THE FORWARD HANDLE OF

EACH COWLING DOOR
rI
I
__
LOCATED ON THE UNDERSIDE OF EACH

WING NEAR THE FUSELAGE
CAUTION
MCAiNETO tS NOT INTERNALLY

GROUNOEII. COHSULT OWNEAS
BEFORE
.ONI-TCENNOCSID
LMANUAL
.J
DRAIN DAILY _I
LOCATED ON THE INSIDE OF EACH COWLING

DOOR, ON THE AFT SIDE, THIS PLACARD IS
LOCATED ON THE LEFT SIDE OF THE FUSELAGE
VISIBLE WHEN EITHER DOOR IS OPEN
JUST BELOW THE LEADING EDGE OF THE WING
r---~
NO HANDLE
L,-,~J
INBOARD END LEFT FLAP, JUST OUTBOARD
ON TOP SURFACE NEAR OUTBOARD
WALKWAY ON RIGHT FLAP, 4 INCHES
END OF EACH HORIZONTAL
OUTBOARD OF FUSELAGE NEAR WING LEADING EDGE.
STABILIZER.
C92009;2
"END"
11-20-00
Page
Oct 16/92
A16
CHAPTER
SERVICING
c5deechcraft
BONANZA SERIES
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
CHAPTER 12-SERVICING
TABLE OF CONTENTS
PAGE
SUSJECT
12100-00
General
Description
And
Operation
12-1 0-00
Replenishing Maintenance Practices (Effectlvity: All)

Filling The Fuel Cells (Effectivity: All)
Draining The Fuel System (Effectivity: All)
Fuel Cell Reservoir (Effectivity: CJ-149 And After)
Engine Fuel Filters And Screens (Effectivity: All)
Oil System (Effectivi~y: Ail)
Oil Filter Removal (Effectivity: All)
Oil Filter Installation (Effectivity: All)
Air-Conditioning System (Effectivity: All)
Depressurizing the Air-Conditioning System (Effectivity: All)
Purging The Air-Conditioning System (Effectivity: All)
Charging The Air-Conditioning System (Effectivi~: All)
Checking Compressor Oil Level (Effectivity: All)
Brake System (Effectivity: All)
Oxygen System (Effectivity: All)
Oxygen Servicing (Effectivity: All except E-1946, E-2104, E-2111 and after, EA-320,
after)
Oxygen Servicing (Effectivity: E-1946, E-2104, E-2111 and after, EA-389 thru EA-439)
Oxygen Servicing (Effectivity: EA-320, EA-440 And After)
1
1
1
1
2
2
2
2
3
3
3
3
4
4
..........................................................................................1....,....................
EA-389 and
5
5
12120100
Scheduled
Servicing
1
1
Tires
E><ternai Power
Battery
Propeller
1
1
Deice Boots
Shock Struts
Shimmy Damper
Propeller Blade Maintenance
Induction Air Filter
Spark Plugs
Roton Locks
Cleaning And Waxing The Airplane

Cleaning Plastic Windows
Cleaning Interior Cabin Trim
Engine Cleaning
Finish
5
5
5
Lubrication
Lubrication Of
Chart 1,
Landing
Servicing
Gear
Uplock
Rollers
5
6
12-00ntents
A18
Page 1
Aug 18/95
aeechcraft
BONANZA SERIES
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
TABLE OF CONTENTS
SUBJECT
(Confinued)
PAGE
Chart 2, Lubrication Schedule
Special
Tools
7
19
1 2-Contents
Page 2
Aug 18/95
A18
Beechcr~aft
BONANZA SERIES
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
CHAPTER-SECTION-SUBJECT
15-Effectivity
1 BContents
12-00-00
12-1 0-00
PAGE
1
Aug 18/95
Aug 18/95
Aug 18/95
May 9/80
1
2
3
4
5
6
1220-00
Aug
Aug
Aug
Aug
Aug
Aug
18/95
18/95
18/95
18/95
18/95
18/95
May 9/80
Jun 20/91
Aug
Aug
Aug
Sep
Sep
4
5
6
6A
7
8
9
10
10A
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
A18
DA~E
28/87
28/87
28/87
27/84
27/84
Oct7/83
May 9/80
Aug 29/85
Aug 29/85
Aug 29/85
oct 7/83
May 9/80
May 9/80
May 9/80
Oct 7/83
oct 7/83
Oct 7/83
Oct 7/83
Jan 18/84
Jan i 8/84
Jan 18/84
Aug 29/85
12-8ffectlvity
Page 1
Aug 18/95
BEECHCRAFT
BONANtA SERIES
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
GENERAL
Detailed maintenance information
The information contained within this chapter pertains to the

general servicing procedures and maintenance practices
used when
servicing
the various systems of the
airplane.
pertaining
to these
systems will be found in the applicable chapters. Overhaul

information for components of several systems will be
contained within this manual. For electrical wiring diagrams
refer to the BONANZA F33A, F33C, V35B 8 A36 Wiring
Diagram Manual,
P/N 35-590102-9.
"END"
1260-00
Page 1
May 9/80
BONANZA SERIES
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
Normally the fuel strainers should be inspected and

cleaned every 100 hours. However, the strainers
should be inspected and cleaned at more frequent
intervals in response to
unknown fuel handling
areas
conditions of service,
practices, and operation in
severe
should be used; below 40"F, SAE 30 is recommended. Any aviation grade engine oil which meets
Continental Motors Corporation Specification MHS248 is
acceptable
of excessive sand or dust.
OIL SYSTEM
for
use.
CAUTION
(Effectivity: All)
If metal contamination of the oil system
airplane is equipped with a wet sump oil system

with a capacity of 12 quarts of oil. The oil filler cap is
accessible through an access door in the left engine
cowling.
The
is detected and the cause is corrected

the oil cooler should be replaced. In
addition, flush out the system through

the interconnected oil system plumbing
and replace or clean any other accessories that will remain with the engine.
right hand
access plate and unscrew the sump drain plug in the
lower right hand side of the engine aankcase. An oil
drain trough, furnished with each airplane is used to
convey the oil through the bottom of the engine cowl
prior to CJ-156, CE-922, D-10364, E-1752 and
OIL FILTER REMOVAL
EA-129. At CJ-156 and after, CE-922 and after,

D-10364 and after, E-1752 and after and EA-129 and
b.
Remove the
a quick attach, snap-type fuel/oil drain adapter

(see sheet 4 of special tools, 12-20-00) and approximately 18 inches of hose will be used to drain the oil
c.
Loosen the
sump.
a.
Under normal
operating conditions, the recommended

operating hours between oil changes is 100
hours. The oil filter should be removed and replaced
at each oil change. When operating under adverse
weather conditions or continuous high power settings,
the oil should be changed more frequently. Before
draining the oil, run up the engine until the oil reaches
operating temperature to assure complete draining of
the oil. Oil grades, (2, Chart 1, 91-00-00) are general
recommendations only, and will vary with individual
circumstances. Check oil inlet temperature during
flight in determining use of the correct grade of oil.
inlet temperatures consistently near the maximum
ine oil.
number of
b.
To drain the
engine sump,
remove
the
after,
allowable indicates a heavier oil is needed. The new

airplane is delivered with Rustband oil (Mll-C-6529,
in the engine. This is a corrosion preventive
oil and should be removed at 20 hours of operation,
but no later than 25 hours of operation. If the Rust-
Type II)
band oil is not removed at the proper time, varnish

may form in the engine. Oil conforming to Mll-L-6082
may be added to the Rustband oil as necessary. After
removing
the Rustband oil, refill with MIL-L-6082 min-
eral oil, which should be used until oil consumption

has stabilized (until after engine break-in). After the
dispersant (AD) aviation grade

weight that will give satisfactory starting. Above 40"F, SAE 50 viscosity
break-in
period,
use an
ashless
oil in the heaviest
a.
LH
Gain
access
engine
to the
(Effectivity: All)
oil filter
engine
by opening
the
cowl access door.
engine
oil filter
spin-off filter
and
011 FILTER INSTALLATION
Clean and lubricate the
Position the
new
safety wire.
filter.
(Effectlvity: All)
filter
new
filter
remove
on
the
gasket
with eng-
engine mounting
torque of 18-20 footIf a torque wrench is not available, tighten the

filter with a suitable wrench for three-quarters to one
adapter
pounds.
and
tighten
full turn after
gasket
the filter to
contact.
wire the filter to the
c.
Safety
d.
Securetheleftengine
engine adapter.
cowl accessdoor.
AIR-CONDITIONING SYSTEM
(Effectivity:
All)
Servicing the air-conditioning system consists of periodically checking the refrigerant level, checking compresser oil level, checking the compressor belt tension, and changing the system air filter, Recharge the
as outlined under CHARGING THE AIRCONDITIONING SYSTEM whenever the refrigerant
level is low, air has entered the system, or compo-
system
nents
carrying refrigerant
are
replaced. Aefrlgerant
leaks may be detected by inspection with a flameless

leak detector. When working on a refrigerant air cool-
ing system, observe the following special servicing

precautions:
a.
Due to the air
quality control regulations enacted

refrigerant cannot be
in the United States, R-12
12-1 0-00
Page 2
Aug 18/95
A18
aeechcraft
BONANZA SERIES
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
vented into the atmosphere. When performing maintenance on the air-conditioning system where R-12 can
escape from the system, evacuate the system with

a recovery or recycle servicing unit that will salvage the refrigerant.
only
The
air-conditioning system is a high pressure

system. Before disconnecting a refrigerant line, the
system must be discharged with a recovery servicing
unit. Purge the entire system to a 125-micron level.
b.
c.
After the system is
depressurized, check
PURGING THE AIR-CONDITIONING SYSTEM
(Effectlvity: All)
To purge the system, connect
recycle servicing unit

air-conditioning system
(located under the copilots seat). See AirConditioning System Schematic in Chapter 21-50-00,
a
to the low pressure side of the
and purge the entire system with the

operating at the 125-micron level.
I -II
ARNING
the oil
level in the compressor per CHECKING COMPRESSOR OIL LEVEL.
vacuum
pump
CHARGING THE AIR-CONDITIONING SYSTEM
(Effectlvlty: All)
A face shield should be worn when

performing maintenance on the lines
because refrigerant coming In

with the eyes can cause loss af
tcat-noc
WARNING
WIIUIWO
sight.
A face shield should be
when
the lines
coming In con-
maintenance
performing
because rsfrlgerent
servicing the
with
system
refrigerant because It
converts to a highly toxic gas when
exposed to an open flame.
Do not smoke when
tact with the eyes
can cause
loss of
sight.
Do not smoke when
system
DEPRESSURIZING THE AIR-CONDITIONING

SYSTEM
worn
on
converts to
(Eftectlvity: All)
exposed
The
I --II
servicing the
a highly toxic gas when
with
to
an
open flame.
servicing points for charging

copilots seat.
the system
are
located under the
WARNING
airplane serials prior to CE-1792, E-2945 and

use refrigerant R-12 (7, Chart 1, 91-00-00).
For airplane serials CE-1792 and after, E-2945 and
after, and EA-579 and after, use refrigerant R-134a
(54, Chart 1, 91-00-00). Other refrigerants, particularly
those containing methyl chloride, will cause rapid
a.
A face shield should be worn when
performing maintenance on the

For
EA-579
lines
con-
tact with the eyes can cause loss ot
sight.
deterioration of the aluminum compressor components.
Do not smoke when
servicing
the
b. Connect the recycle/recovery service unit to the

connections located under the copilots seat. When
system with refrigerant because It

converts to a
exposed
highly toxic
gas when
servicing points for discharging

copilots seat,
The
charging a completely purged system, charge

pound of refrigerant.
to an open flame.
the system
are
Connect
service unit that
recycles
the
refriger-
ant to the service valves and open the low pressure
CHECKING COMPRESSOR OIL LEVEL
valve.
When the pressure is depleted, open the pressure
valve and operate the vacuum pump to completely
b.
remove
After charging, start the engine in accordance with

applicable Pilots Operating Handbook and run the
air-conditioning system. Slowly add only enough additional refrigerant so that the system cools effectively.
c
the
located under the

a.
with 1
the
refrigerant
from the
system,
(Etfectivity: All)
The air-conditioner compressor oil level should be
checked by a qualified air-conditioner service man if
12-1 0-00
A18
Page 3
Aug 18/95
aeechcraft
BONANZA SERIES
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
refrigerant charge is lost (evidenced by oil loss).
airplane serials prior to CE-1792, E-2945 and
EA-579, the air-conditioner system requires 4 to 5
ounces of 500-viscosity oil (8, Chart 1, 91-00-00). For
airplane serials CE-1792 and after, E-2945 and after,
the
BRAKE SYSTEM
(Effectivity: All)
For
and EA-579 and after, the air-conditioner system

requires 4 to 5 ounces of Ester Oil (65, Chart 1, 91-00-
00).
Check the compressor oil level
as
hydraulic brakes are self-compensating and

require no adjustment. Linings should be checked for
small nicks or sharp edges which could damage the
The
brake discs. Worn, dished or distorted brake discs

replaced. The brake fluid is supplied to the
should be
brake system from the reservoir tank located in the

engine accessory section and is accessible by raising
follows:
the
Fabricate
a.
angle
so
dipstick by bending
wire to
90"
that 1-112 inches of the wire will insert into
the compressor.
b.
only
dipstick with a flat

for the paint to dry.
Paint the
ficient time
Start the
black
paint. Allow suf-
of the
engine
cowl. The reservior should
hydraulic fluid (9, Chart 1, 91-00-00)

system. Ensure that no dirt or foreign
is allowed to enter the brake system.
MIL-H-5606
in the brake
matter
in accordance with the
applicable
engine
Operating Handbook and run the airconditioning system for 15 minutes with the engine
running at low rpm to allow oil to accumulate in the
compressor. Observe the engine operating limitations
as noted in the applicable Pilots Operating Handbook.
Shut down the engine in accordance with the applicable Pilots Operating Handbook.
c.
right side
be filled to within 1-112 inches of the top and a visible

fluid level maintained on the dip stick at all times. Use
Pilots
OXYGEN SYSTEM
(Effectivity: All)
In general, the oxygen system on the Bonanzas may

be serviced in accordance with FAA AC43.13-1A.
Relieve the air-conditioner system pressure by

evacuating the system with a recycle servicing unit.
d.
e.
After the system pressure is relieved,
oil filler
remove
the
plug.
dipstick through
the oil filler
port, slowly
rotate the clutch shaft until the
dipstick will
insert to the
f.
Insert the
ENGINE
bottom of the compressor.

g.
Withdraw the
dipstick
at
dipstick;
COMPRESSOR
LIA
FIREWALL
oil should
register
on
5/8 inch below the filler port. Add oil
the
as
c
necessary to maintain this measurement.

H
h.
Install the oil filler
plug
with
O-ring
and
secure
plug.
NOTE
Make sure that the O-ring is not twisted
and that dirt or particles ARE NOT ON
the O-ring seat. The plug should be
snug. Do not
overtighten
the
COMPRESSOR FUSE
(NOT APPLICABLE TO
E-2104, E-2111 AND
AFTER; EA-BX),
EA-440 AND AFTER)
FILLER
FLVG
;T
BAFFLE
I
plug.
35-425-1
i. Charge the air-conditioning system as noted in

CHARGING THE AIR CONDITIONING SYSTEM.
j.
Check the
area
around the filler
plug for leaks.lf
leaks exist, do not overtighten the filler plug. Remove

the plug as noted in step "e" and install a new O-ring
depressurizing the system with a recycle servicing unit. Secure the plug and recharge the system as
after
noted in steps "h" and "i".
Servicing Compressor (Effectlvlty: All)

Figure 1
12-1 000
Page 4
Aug 18/95
A18
aeechcraft
BONANZA SERIES
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
WARNING
w*awlm
This pressure may be increased an additional 3.5 psi

for each degree of increase in temperature; similarly,
Keep fire and sparks away and never

smoke In the proximity of oxygen.
Tools, equipment and hands must
also be kept clean when servicing the
oxygen system, since deposits of oil
or other hydrocarbons are highly
flammable when exposed to high
concentrations of oxygen. Furthermore, the presence of other foreign
particles In the oxygen lines may
result In leaks that will both exhaust
the o~gen supply and present a fire
harard. As an additional safety precaution, use only the antlselze compounds and leak-testing soaps recommended for breathing oxygen
systems,
pressure for the
Breathing Oxygen
(10, Chart 1,91-00-00) when recharging
only
Aviators
the oxygen bottle.
Close the shutoff valve, disconnect the supply cylinder, and replace the filler valve cap.
OXYGEN SERVICING
(Effectivlty:
and
Ensure that all
airplane electrical power
is off. Do
operate electrical switches, or connect or disconnect ground power generators during the oxygen
charging operation.
not
b.
Make
servicing
sure
that
no
fueling or other flammable fluid

servicing the oxygen sys-
is in process when
Observe the guidelines under the heading OXYGEN

SYSTEM in this Chapter and service the system as
follows:
Remove the access opening over the oxygen cylinder shutoff valve and check that the valve is off.
a.
copilots
Slide the
b.
seat to the rear until the filler
valve is clear, then remove the cap from the filler valve
and connect the supply cylinder to the filler valve.
Open
the valve
on
Always ground the servicing equipment and the

system to be serviced before connecting the filler
adapter.
Close the valve
e.
Close the valve
g. Disconnect the
filler valve cap.
Replace the
h.
i.
WARNING
Do not use oxygen Intended for medlcal purposes, or such Industrial uses
as welding. Such oxygen may contain
excessive moisture that could free~e
up the valves and lines of the oxygen
system,
Open
system to
d.
cylinder shutoff valve and slowly fill the

1850 ~50 psi at 70"F, ambient temperature.
the
oxygen
cylinder.
on
on
Slide the
airplane
the
the
oxygen
copilots
cylinder.
charging cylinder.
supply cylinder
access
and
and
replace
the
panel.
seat forward to its normal
posi-
tion.
OXYGEN SERVICING
(Effectlvlty: E-1946, E-2104,

EA-439)
E2111 and after, EA-389 thru
Observe the
guidelines under the heading OXYGEN

Chapter and service the system as
SYSTEM in this
follows:
a.
I--~I
airplane
the
d. Open the valve on the charging cylinder

slowly fill the airplane cylinder.
tem
c.
EA-320, EA-389
after)
The
a.
All except
E-1946, E-2104, E-2111 and after,
f.
following procedures should be followed prior to,

and during the oxygen servicing operation:
of drop in temperature, reduce the

cylinder by 3.5 psi.
e.
c.
NOTE
Use
degree
for each
Check that the oxygen system is turned off.
(Check
the
push-pull knob.)
b. Slide the copilots seat to the

valve is accessmedi.
c.
rear
until the filler
Remove the filler valve cap and connect the sup-
ply cylinder.
d.
Open
the valve
on
the
supply cylinder and slowly
the
supply cylinder and discon-
fill the system.

e.
Close the valve
nect the
f.
on
supply cylinder.
Install the filler valve cap.

12-1 0-00
Page
A18
Aug 18/95
aeechc~slft
BONANZA SERIES
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
g.
Slide the
copilots
seat to its normal
OXYGEN SERVICING
And
position.
(Etfectivity: EA-320,
EA-440
Locate and
the
Open the charging cylinder

airplane cylinder(s).
d.
After
e.
Reinstall the
c.
Observe the guidelines under the heading OXYGEN

SYSTEM in this Chapter and service the system as
follows:
a.
remove
wing, outboard
Remove the cap from the filler

supply cylinder to the filler
nect the
After)
the left
b.
the
of
access panel on the top of

wing station 66, and aft of
opening
opening.
valve and
and
con-
slowly
fill
filling the airplane cylinder(s), close the supply cylinder shutoff valve, disconnect the supply cylindel and replace the filler valve cap.
access cover.
the front spar.
12-1 0-00
Page 6
Aug 18/95
A18
BEECHCRAFT
BONANZA SERIES
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
SCHEDULED SERVICING
PRACTICES
MAINTENANCE
a.
Before
connecting an external power unit, turn

equipment switches, all radio equipment,
alternator switch. The battery switch in the airplane
OFF all electrical

and the
should be ON.
T/RES
nose
wheel tire is
5.00-5
4-ply
tire. The main wheel
are 7.00-6 6-ply tires. Inflate the nose wheel tires to 40

pounds and the main wheel tires to 33 to 40 pounds,
Maintaining proper tire inflation will minimize tread wear and
aid in preventing tire rupture caused from running over sharp
stones and ruts. When inflating tires, visually inspect for cuts,
tires
arcing, make certain no power is being

the external power unit when the connection is
To prevent
b.
The
applied by
made.
Leave the
c.
battery ON during
CAUTION
cracks, breaks, and tread wear. The pressure of a

serviceable tire that is fully inflated should not drop more than
4
percent
over a
24-hour
the entire external
power operation.
The
period.
may be damaged if
than 30 volts.
battery
exposed
to
voltages higher
NOTE
BATTERY
Oil and other
hydrocarbons spilled
on
tires not
only weaken the rubber but may cause it to swell.

Avoid spilling oil, fuel or solvents on tires and
clean off any accidental spillage as soon as
possible.
of
tendency
is located
battery
on
the
right
side of the
engine
Corporation cannot recommend

recapped tires. Recapped tires have a
The fluid level of the battery should be checked every 25

hours and maintained 3/8 inch above the top of the
to swell as a result of the increased
separators. Add only distilled
Beech Aircraft
use
The
compartment, just forward of the firewall. The battery is

accessible for servicing by raising the right engine cowl door
and removing the battery box cover.
CAUTION
the
A 24-volt, 1 10 ampere hour Teledyne Battery Products leadacid battery is provided for operation of the electrical system.
temperature generated during
takeoff. Increased
gravity
specific
water to maintain the
of between 1.275 and 1.295.
can jeopardize proper function of the

landing gear retract system, with the possibility
of damage to the landing gear doors and retract
tire size
NOTE
mechanism.
Do not overfill the
are
overfilled,
lower
EXTERNAL POWER
battery.
When the
water and acid will
of the
portions
fuselage.
engine
battery
spill
cells
on
the
accessory section
and lower
An external power unit with a negative ground may be used
to supply power for ground checks, starting and battery
charging. The power unit may be connected directly to the

battery or to an optional external power receptacle, located
on the lower engine cowling. The receptacle is designed for
use with a standard AN type plug.
For further servicing information, detailed instructions are

furnished with each battery from Teledyne Battery Products.
optional external power circuit is equipped with a relay

diode to protect the airplane electrical system against
damage from an external power source with reversed
polarity.
The surface of the deice boots should be checked for
The
and
Observe the following precautions when using

power
source.
an
external
PROPELLER DEICE BOOTS
oil after
Any
servicing
oil found
on
Removal of oil
the
airplane
engine
flight.
and at the end of each
the surface of the boots should be removed.
can
accomplished by the use of a neutral

Special care should be used on
cleaning, to avoid damaging the
surfacing.
be
soap and water solution.

electric deice boots, while
special conductive
12-2M)0
Page
May
9/80
BEECHCRAFT
BONANZA SERIES
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
CAUTION
NOTE
Because the deicer boots
flexible
stock,
are
a bottle containing compressed air

nitrogen under extremely high pressure
If
made of soft
be
must
care
exercised
used,
care
is
should be taken not to overin-
against dragging gasoline hoses over them

resting ladders or platforms against the
flate the strut.
surface of the boots.
be used with
or
or
A pressure regulator must

high pressure bottled air or
nitrogen.
SHOCK STRUTS
Remove all
the air-
To check the fluid level and fill the strut, jack

plane, remove the valve cap and depress the valve
core
to release the air pressure from the strut.
WARNING
The
strut
removal
be
should
of the valve
pressure may result in
before
deflated
body
or
excessive
personal injury
or
property damage.
Compress and block the strut 1/4-inch from the fully
Remove the valve
body
compressed position.
assembly and fill with MIL-H-5606 hydraulic fluid (9,
Chart 1, 91-00-00). After filling the strut, slowly extend
the strut from the blocked position and replace the
valve body assembly. Completely conipress the strut
to release excess air and oil, then reinstall the valve
core.
material from the
foreign
of the shock struts with
hydraulic
exposed piston
cloth moistened with
fluid.
SHIMMY DAMPER
To check the fluid level in the shimmy damper, insert
a wire of approximately 1/16-inch diameter through
the hole in the disc at the end of the
piston
rod until
it touches the bottom of the hole in the floating piston.

Mark the wire, remove and measure the depth of
insertion. Inserting the wire in the hole of the floating
piston, rather than letting it rest against the

piston, will give a more accurate check.
face of
the
NOTE
To determine if the wire is inserted in the
hole of the floating piston, insert the wire
several times, noting each insertion depth.
wire is correctly inserted, the
be
will
approximately 1/4-inch
length
When the
CAUTION
greater.
Do not inflate the struts with the

jacks since sudden extension
on
inflation
damage
of the
strut
may
on
the
shimmy damper is full, the insertion depth

The empty reading is 3-1/16 inches.
If the wire enters the piston rod over 2-3/8 inches,
hydraulic fluid should be added. When hydraulic fluid
is needed, remove the shimmy damper and add
MIL-H-5606 hydrau;.e fluid (9, Chart 1, 12-20-00) as
airplane
When the
or over-
is 2-3/16 inches.
cause
internal
to the strut.
With the airplane resting
ground
and the fuel
nitrogen
airplane
D-10,397
follows:
after, E-1,970 and after, and EA-273 and after,
position
cells full, inflate the nose strut with dry air or

until 3-1/2 inches of piston is exposed. On
serials CE-980 and after, CJ-156 and after,
and
area
gear strut until 5 inches of the strut

exposed. Rock the airplane gently to prepiston
vent possible binding of the piston in the barrel when
inflate the
is
inflating.
a.
Secure
the
shimmy damper
in
fixed
with the clevis end down.
nose
b.
Remove the cotter
piston rod.
is compressed.
from the
pin, washer,
Remove with
and
care as
the
spring,
spring
12-20-00
Page 2
Jun 20/91
A14
BEECHCRAFT
BONANZA SERIES
MAIN-TENANCE MANUAL
c.
scraper
of
end
internal
Remove the
ring,
snap
ring and the end seal from the aft
the barrel
(opposite the clevis
end),
PLUGS
the proper spark plug and spark plug

refer to Continental Service Bulletin
No. M77-10. The spark plugs
should be
installed with no lubrication and torqued
to 300 to 360 inch-pounds (25 to 30 footFor
gap,
d.
the
SPARK
Insert
6-32 threaded rod

into
and remove the piston.
floating piston
pounds).
Push the piston rod to the clevis
end and fill the barrel with MIL-H-5606
hydraulic fluid (9, Chart i, 91-00-00).
e.
f.
Slowly actuate the piston rod,
allowing the fluid to flow into the clevis
end chamber, then return the piston to the
clevis end of the barrel,

g.
Refill
replace the
internal
the
displaced
end
snap
seal,
ring.
h.
Fill
the
i.
Reinstall
fluid
and
ring
and
scraper
piston rod with fluid,
ROTON
Usually,
Roton locks will not need service. If there is a grinding and binding
in the lock as the seat reclines or if the
becomes
action
return
jerky, a small
amount of grease properly applied as follows should improve the operation.
Use only ENCO ANDOK-B grease (12,

a.
Chart 1, 91-00-00) on the threads as shown
in Figure i. Too much grease in the wrong
place
floating piston,
spring washer and cotter pin. Spread the
cotter pin
to
allow clearance for the
measuring wire.
it
Reinstall
can
cause
improper operation.
the
Release
the
i.
from the floating
k.
LOCKS
(Figure 1)
the
PROPELLER BLADE
6-32
rod
and
b.
co un
the
Compress
te rba 1 ance
guide
approximately
spring
spring
and
one
inch.
c.
remove
Remove the retaining ring.
piston.
Relax pressure on the spring guide
d.
and counterbalance spring slowly until the
spring is fully extended.
shimmy damper,
MALNTENANCE
Remove the lock from the fixture

the spring guide, count~rbalspring and spring guide tube.
e.
Due
to
the
high
stresses
to
which
blades
their
are
subjected,
maintenance is vitally important,
the leading edpe of each
on
lade from the tip inboard to Just beyond
33-inch
All
nicks
and
station.
the
scratches
be
must
repaired before the
airplane is flown. Nicks and scratches set
of
concentrations
which can
stress
up
exceed the strength of the blade material;
the result will be a crack and premature
failure of the blade. The method and limits for this type of repair, as outlined
the
in
applicable Propeller Handbo~ok,
propeller
and
remove
ance
careful
garticularly
Apply a small
completely
(see Figure 1).
f.
quantity
of
grease
Reassemble the lock. For service

g.
other than lubrication, return the Roton
lock to the manufacturer.
CLEANING
FINISH
AND
WAXING
THE
AIRPLANE
should be followed carefully.
Prior to
INDUCTION AIR FLLTER
wheels, making certain the brake discs are

covered; attach pitot cover securely;
install
The induction air filter should be cleaned

periodically and replaced every 500 hours
of service. Clean the filter as described
in the manufacturers instructions on the
filter.
cleaning
plugs
in
the exterior,
or
mask
off
cover
all
openings. Be particularly careful
the
other
to mask
off both static air buttons before washing

or
waxing.
72-20-00
Page 3
A12
Aug 28/87
BEECHCRAFT
BONANZA
SERIES
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
RETAINING RING
FULLY EXTENDED
SPRING GUIDE
(APPROX) APPLY
(LIGHTLY HERE ONLY)
3/4"
GREASE
SPRING GUIDE TUBE
ABSOLUTELY NO GREASE
MAIN ASSY
IN THIS AREA
COUNTERBALANCE
SPRING
Lock
Figure 1
Roton
The
urethane
the finish
with
wax
paint finish cleans easily

and
mild detergent solution,
sponge
white
clean
A
Rinse with clear water.
cloth, saturated with either MEK (31,
Chart 1, 91-00-00) or toluol
(19, Chart
1, 91-00-00) may be used to remove accuand dried
mulations of oil
or
grease,
insects. Flush the surface with plenty of
cool
water to remove all traces of soap
and dry with a chamois to prevent water
marks.
is
yellowed
appearance.
removed before
be
should
The old
coat
new
applied.
Airplanes with
be polished to
aluminum
skin
surfaces may
high gloss with any warranted aluminum polish. Soft clean cloths
a
chamois should be used to prevent

scratching the aluminum when cleaning and
or
polishing.
CLEANING
PLASTIC
WINDOWS
CAUTION
CAUTION
When
mild
care
from
airplane
use
special
avoid washing away grease
washing
soap
to
with
any
and
the
Do
water,
lubricated
washing with solvent
area.
not
an
use
ice
scraper
to
windows because
this practice may cause scratches
To avoid
to the window surface.
scratches, any cleaning of the
windows should be done with care.
remove
After
in the wheel
lubriareas, lubricate all

cation points. Premature wear of
lubricated surfaces may result if
above
the
precautions are not
taken.
well
ice
from
commercial cleaning compound made specifically for acrylic plastic windows may
be used. When using a commercial cleaner,
For better protection, a non-abrasive wax

may be used on airplanes exposed to cormoisture
with
rosive
atmospheres
condensation.
follow the instructions on the container.

If a commercial cleaner is not available,
the following instructions should be followed:
Wax application procedures are important

and will vary in accordance with the type
being used. For best results, follow the
A
manufacturers
wax
specifications.
of the acrylic plastic windows

The
should never be attempted when dry.
window should first be flushed with water
build-up
of
several
coats
of
wax
may
give
Cleaning
or
mild
lightty with
solution, then
grit-free cloth,
soap
a
rubbed
chamois
12-20-00
Page 4
Aug 28/87
A12
BEECHCRAFT
BONANZA SERIES
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
or
are
or
sponge. Stubborn grease or oil deposits

readily removed with aliphatic naphtha
hexane. Rinse with clear water.
thinner or aromatic
cleaners
clean
the
to
they will damage the
windows;
surface of the plastic. Aliphatic
naphtha and similar solvents are
and
extreme
highly
flammable,
be taken when
must
care
using
them.
CLEANING
use
INTERIOR
CABIN
TRIM
Proper care and cleaning of the interior

cabin trim (Noryl and Kydex plastics) is
of
to
maintain
a
primary
importance
desirable appearance. Clean the interior
trim with
cabin
a
detergent soap and
water, and brush scrub with a soft bristle
brush will dislodge most dirt.
Wet wipe
with clean water and wipe dry. Alcohol may
be used to remove foreign material that
is alcohol soluble,
CAUTION
The
interior cabin trim

if
contaminated
easily
methyl
engine
solvent, or
may
any
be cleaned with Stoddard

standard neutral solvent
engine. Compressed air

speed up drying time.
may
be
used
to
LUBRICATION
Lubrication charts
and diagrams
within
information
that
contain
this
section
ensure the proper operation and preservation of the airplane. Location, interval
Avoi;l
and lubricant required are given.
excessive application of lubricants.
LUBRICATION OF
ROLLERS
LANDING
GEAR
UPLOCK
uplock roller bearings should be

lubricated with MIL-G-2382f grease (11,
Chart i, 91-00-00) every 100 hours or any
the
time after cleaning the wheel
we 11
bearings are subjected to degreasing with
solvent under pressure. Using a pressure
the
uplock bearing is lubricated
gun,
through a grease fitting installed in the
uplock bearing bolt.
The
NOTE
ethyl
thinner
and
other types
of
thinners.
Sharp
edges or cuts on the edge of the
interior cabin trim material
may
cause it to crack.
gasoline,
The
be
can
cleaned
ketone,
naphtha, Mufti, standard solvent,
with
CLEANING
for
recommended
cleaning engines. The
cleaner may be sprayed or brushed on the
CAUTION
Do not
abrasive
ENGINE
lacquer
The
grease Fitting on the drag

the
di rectly
above
upl ock
roller bearing, does not supply
lubrication for the uplock roller
leg,
bearing.
12-20-00
Page 5
A12
Aug 28/87
BEECHCRAFT
BONAMIA SERIES
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
CHART 1
SERVICING
LOCATION
ITEM
SERVICE WITH
INTERVAL
See Consumable
Preflight
Check
Engine
Battery
Oil Level
Access door
Water
upper cowl (1)

RH rear side of
Air Conditioner
Compressor
Oil Level
Air Conditioner
Refrigerant
Magneto Pressure-
on
Materials Chart
See Chapter 21 for location

and special instructions
Between
25 hrs.
Distilled Water
engine compartment (1)

See Chapter 21 for location
and special instructions
Suniso No. 5GS
Tex_a~WF
or
As
required
As
required
100
500 Viscosity Oil

Rehigeranr No. 12
50 hrs.
Magnetos
ization Air Filter
Change
Engine Oil
Lower
rear
See Consumable
side of
Engine
Left
Oil Filter
rear
100 hrs.
Materials Chart
engine (1)
100 hrs.
side of
engine ~1)
Clean
Fuel
Injection Control
Fuselage nose section

grill (1)
Fuel injection control
valve
Valve Screen
of the
Fuel Selector Valve
Strainer
on
the lower side
engine (1)
Fuel selector valve

inboard left wing root (1)
Clean
on
as
described
50 hrs.
the filter
Clean with solvent and

blow dry with air
pressure
Clean with solvent and
blow
dry
100 hrs.
100 hrs.
with air
pressure
Pressure
Pump
Intake
Rear
engine
baffle
(1)
Replace
300 hours
on
Fliter
or
condition
Drain
Fuel
Sump Drain
Fuel Cell Drains

Static Drain
Preflight
Preflight
Inboard left wing root (1)
wings (2)
Behind the ah upholstery
panel (1)
Under both
50 hrs.
Replace
Pressure System
Inline Filter
Fuselage
grill (1)
nose
section
Between pressure
and instruments
500 hrs.
on
regulator
(1)
300 hn.
on
or
condition
or
condition
12-20-00
PageG
Sep 21/84
A9
BEECHCRAFT
BONANZA SERIES
MAIMENANCE MANUAL
CHART 1
SERVICING (CONTD)
SERVICE WITH
LOCA TION
ITEM
INTERVAL
Sen/ice
Brake Fluid Aeservoir
Upper
forward side of the
firewall
Under front seats
Oxygen Cylinder
MIL-H-5606
hydraulic
(1)
(1)
As
required
As
required
As
required
annually
fluid
Mil-0-27210 aviators
breathing oxygen
except EA-320
EA-440 and after.
EA-320, EA-440
and after in
left
Main and Nose
Landing
Top
wing (1)
of each strut
(3)
Shimmy Damper
Mll-H-5606
hydraulic fluid and

dry compressed air
Gear Struts
Nose
landing gear (1)
Denotes
As
MIL-H-5606
hydraulic
or
fiuid
or
required
annually
quantity of servicing points.
12-20-00
Ag
Page 6A
Sept 27/84
BEECHCRAFT
BONANZA SERIES
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
CHART 2
LUBRICATION SCHEDULE
;&I~,PO
~inl I
DH
~1)7 R
R
36804120
NOTES
i.
The
following details. (A
lubrication points
B36TC.
2.
3.
4.
are
the V-tail
T) constitute a lubrication san/icing schedule. Major differences between model types relative to
configuration, exdu8ively for the V358, and the cargo doors provided only on the model A36. A36TC.
thru
~k
operational application may dictate more frequent san/icing.

Landing gear components may require lubrication every 25 or 50 hours, depending on operation.
MILG81322 grease may be used in place of MIL-G-23827 grease in warm climates: however.
Environmental conditions and
in
extremely
cold climates
MIL-G-23827 grease should be used.

Care should be taken when using greases MIL-G-81322 and MIL-G-23827, since they contain synthetic lubricants which will
5.
discolor painted surfaces, and will soften rubber products.
3&604121
12-20-00
Page7
A6
Oct 7/83
BEECHCRAFT
BONANZA SERIES
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
CHART 2
(Contd)
LUBRICAT)ON SCHEDULE
INDEX
LOCATION
POINTS(
LUBRICANT
INTERVAL
(5)
MILGd1322
100 hfs
NOSE WHEEL WELL
Nose wheel
steering
o
DETAIL
35-604-12
L~3
DETAIL
B
INTERVAL
INDEX
LOCATION
NOSE LANDING GEAR
POINTS(
LUBRICANT
Nose shock strut
(1)
Mll-H-5608
AR
Shimmy damper
(1)
MIL-H-5806
AR
Nose gear
hinge points
(2)
MIL-G-81322
100 hrs
Nose gear
linkage
(2)
MIL-G-B1322
100 hrs
Nose gear torque knees
(6)
MILO-81322
100 hr3
MIL-G-B1322
100 hrs
(2)
Ae,oshell 5
Prefened or
MII-Gg1 322
100 hrs
(2)
M~LG-81322
100 hrS
MIL-0-81322
100 hrs
"A" Frame
pivot points
Nose wheel
bearings
Nose gear swivel

9
12-20-00
Page 8
May 9/80
Rod end fittino
3580e3
BEECHCRAFT
BONANZA SER\ES
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
CHART 2 (Contd)
LUBRICAflON SCHEDULE
~K r
IZI
DETAIL
INDEX
LOCATION
C
.POINTS(
LUBRICANT
INTERVAL
SAE 20 or
SAE 10W30
100 hrs
NOSE GEAR DOORS
Nose wheel door hinges
(4)
3580414
DETAIL
INDEX
LOCATION
POINTS(
LUBRICANT
INTERVAL
(10)
SAE 20 or
SAE 10W30
100 hrs
RUDDER PEDALS
Rudder
pedal linkage
35-804-15
12-20-00
All
Page 9
Aug 29185
BEECHCRA~I
BONANtA SERIES
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
CHART 2 (Contd)
INDEX
LOCATION
FORWARD CABIN DOOR
POINT(
LUBRICANT
INTERVAL
Forward cabin door handle
(1)
SAE 20 or
SAE 10W30
100 hrs
Forward cabin door latch
(3)
SAE 20 or
SAE 10W30
100 hrs
Forward cabin door
(2)
SAE 20 or
SAE 10W30
100 hrs
hinges
DETAIL
E
35601-18
Detail F applies only to serials E-lll1, E-1241 and after; EA-1 and after.
k
O
NOTE
Lubricate all internal moving parts of the
latching mechanism with Aeroshell 17,
~Et
as
required.
o
DETAIL
INDEX
LOCATION
AFT CABIN DOOR
O
O
POINTS(
LUBRICANT
INTERVAL
AH cabin door handle
SAE 20
100 hrs
Ah cabin door latch
SAE 10W30
SAE 20 or
(3)
or
100 hrs
SAE 10W30
AH cabin door
Mix MILM-7866 with
naphtha
hinges
and
apply
(2)
with
brush.
MlL-M-7866
AR
35-804-17
12-20-00
Page 10
Aug 29/85
All
BEECHCRAFT
BONANZA SERIES
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
CHART 2 (Contd)
POINTS(
LUBRICANT
INTERVAL
(18)
SAE 20 or
SAE 10W30
100 hrs
LOCATION
INDEX
CONTROL COLUMN
linkage
Control column
Control column head
(3)
SAE 20 or
SAE 10W30
100 hrs
Control column torque knees
(6)
SAE 20 or
SAE 10W30
100 hrs
O
O
~C C:
PRIOR TO D-10404, CE-1037, 8-2111 EXCEPT 8-1946 AND 8-2104,
EA-389 EXCEPT 84-320
DETAIL
G
36604((8
-o
55
DETAIL
GG
E-1946, D2104, E2111 AND AFTER, EA-320, EA-389 AND AFTER.

INDEX
LOCATION
CONTROL COLUMN
m
m""
1~3
Control column chains

Ball
bearings (without seals)
Torque Shafts
Wp"
tllli
length
POINTS()
LUBRICANT
INTERVAL
(4)
(10)
SAE20
100 hrs.
MIL-L-7870 Oil
100 hrs.
(2)
MEK Solvent
100 hrs.
of square shafts with MEK, these surfaces to remain
dry
or
10W30 Oil
and free of oil.
Remove one of the nonadjustable rollers (27-00-00). If it is a sealed roller with the seals intact, rainstall the roller
and make a maintenance record that the rollers are sealed and do not need lubrication. If the rollers are not sealed,
or the seals are not intact, they may be replaced with sealed rollers and a maintenance record made that the rollers
do not need lubrication. If the adjustable rollers are removed for lubrication or replacement, refer to Chapter 27-00-00
for adjustment.
36-604-(17
001
12-20-00
All
Page 10A
Aug 29/85
BEECHCRAF~
BONANZA SERIES
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
CHART 2 (Cantd)
NOTE
At series D-10380 and after. CJ-1Stj and
after. CE-960 and after, E-1886 and
after, EA-249 and after, sealed bearings

were
installed
and
no
lubrication
is
required.
8~
DETAIL
INDEX
LOCATION
POINTS(
LUBRICANT
INTERVAL
(2)
SAE 20
100 hrs
TRIM TAB CONTROL
Elevator trim control
or
SAE 10W30
3escw,cs
t2-2eoo
Psgsli
Oc17/83
A6
BEECHCRAFT
BONANZA SERIES
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
CHART 2 (Contd)
INDEX
POINTS(
LUBRICANT
INTEAVAL
(1)
MIL-G-B1322
600 hn
gear actuator gear box
(1)
MIL-L-2105
Mobil 636
300 hrs
gear system retract
(5)
SAE 20 or
SAE 10W30
LOCATION
LANDING GEAR ACTUATOR
Landing gear
Landing
"Landing
motor gear box
arms
or
100 hrs
properly filled, the oil level on apip stick inserted

through the filler hole will be approximately 1/4 inch.
When
jl
2]
"The
nose
gear retract
arm
is located beneath the gear box.
l~J
DETAIL
I
35604-47.
DETAIL
INDEX
LOCATION
FLAP MOTOR
POINTS(
LUBRICANT
INTERVAL
111
Flap flexible drive shaft

(inside of cable housing)
(1)
MIL-G-23827
900 hrs
12-20-00
Page 12
May 9/80
3CgOC48
BEECHCRAFF
BONANZA SERIES
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
CHART 2 (Contd)
INDEX
LOCATION
POINTS(
LUBRICANT
INTERVAL
(2)
Mll-L-10324A OR
MlL-L-2105C 75W OR
101-380016-1
900 hrs
FLAP ACTUATOR
Flap
actuator
~ETAIL K
3caocso
DETAIL
Detail L depicts the Bonanza 33 and 36 Series airplanes. The Bonanza 35 Series
does not incorporate Index 2.
INDEX
O
O
LOCATION
ELEVATOR TRIM
Elevator trim tab
hinge
"Elevator him tab actuator
tTab control horn pivot
POINTS(
LUBRICANT
INTERVAL
(2)
MlL-M-7866
100 hrs
(2)
MlL-G-23827
AR
(t)
SAE 20
AR
or
SAE 10W30
Mix MlL-M-7868 with naphtha and apply with a brush.
series
35
Bonanza
used
"The actuator is not
airplanes.
on the
tOn the Bonanza 35 series, lubricate both the upper and lower tab control horn
pivots (Index 3). On the Bonanza 33 and 36 series airplanes, only the upper tab
control horn
pivot lubrication
is
required.
3ssoc49
12-2000
Page 13
May 9/80
BEECHCRAFF
BONANZA SERIES
IAINTENANCE MANUAL
CHART 2 (Contd)
INDEX
LOCATION
POINTS(
LUBRICANT
INTERVAL
(6)
SAE 20 or
SAE 10W30
100 hrs
COWL FLAPS
Cowl
flap hinges
DETAIL
M
355555(
~3
~ETAIL
INDEX
LOCATION
MAIN LANDING GEAR
POINTS(
LUBRICANT
INTERVAL
Main shock struts
(2)
MILH-5606
AR
I~
Hinge paints
and retract
(1 4)
MlL-G-81322
100 hn
Main gear torque knees
(10)
MIL-G-8~ 322
100 hrs
Main wheel
(4)
Aeroshell 5
100 hrs
links
bearings
Preferredor
MlL-G-81 322
Landing gear uplock

rollen
12-2000
Rage 14
May 9/80
(2)
MIL-G-23827 See Lubrication

of Landing Gear Uplock
Rollers In this chapter.
3560452
BEECHCRAFT
BONANZA SERIES
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
CHART 2 (Contd)
m
LI
DETAIL
*Lubricata the aileron pushipull rod ends tin place) at

100 hr intervals using SAE 20 or 10W30 oil. or remove
the aileron push/pull rad assembly and clean 8
lubricate rod ends using MIL-G-23827 grease. Rotate
the rod end eye balls to assure adeguate lubrication
coverage. Check aileron rigging after reinstallation of
the rod end
INDEX
LOCATION
AILE RON
Aileron control
assembly.
linkage
*Aileron push/pull rods ends
POINTS(
LUBRICANT
INTERVAL
(6)
SAE 20 or
SAE 10W30
100 hn
(4)
MIL-G-23827 or
SAE 20 or SAE 10W30
100 hrs
(1)
MIL-G-23827
AR
Ot
Aileron trim tab actuator
~t
Aileron trim tab
hinge
(1)
VVLBOO Preferred.
LPS-1. CRC 3-36.
WD-40
100 hrs
Ot
Aileron trim tab
push-pull linkage
(5)
VV-L-BOO Preferred.
LPS-1, CRC 3-36.
WO-40
100 hrs
IZb
EA-389 and
t Enactive 6-1946, E2104. E-2111 and after: EA-320,
after.
366M-ln
12-2M)O
Page 1G
Oct 7/83
A6
BEECHCRAFT
BONANZA SERIES
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
CHART 2 (Contd)
INDEX
LOCATION
BAGGAGE DOOR
POINTS(
LUBRICANT
INTERVAL
Largedoor
latch mechanism
(3)
100 hrs
Small door latch mechanism
(1)
SAE 20 or
SAE 10W30
SAE 20 or
SAE 10W30
MIL-M-7866
Door
hinge
(1)
Mix MIL-M-7866 with naphtha and
apply
with
100 hrs
AR
brush.
DETAIL
Detail Q includes serials CE-748. CE-172 and after;

CJ-149 and after: and D-10097, 0-10120 and after.
35-604-55
~I
DETAIL
INDEX
LOCATION
ELEVATOR TAB
POINTS(
LUBRICANT
INTERVAL
Elevator tab actuator
(1)
MILG-81322
100 hrs
Elevator tab
(4)
SAE 20 or
SAE 10W30
~00 hrs
linkage
Detail R includes
only
serials 0-10097, 0-10120 and after.
35-eo4-5s
12-20-00
Page 17
A6
Oc17183
BEECHCRAFT
BONANZA SERIES
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
CHART 2 (Contd)
INDEX
LOCATION
DIFFERENTIAL CONTROL
POINTS(
LUBRICANT
INTERVAL
Elevator cable reduction
(2)
SAE 20 or
SAE 10W30
100 hrs
Differential control assy
(4)
MlL-G-81322
100 hrs
an
i?lg
45
DETAIL
Detail S includes
only
Bonanza 35 series
airplanes.
35-60457
;i
\s_n
DETAIL T
INDEX
LOCATION
ELEVATOR CONTROL
POINTS(
LUBRICANT
INTERVAL
Elevator bell crank
(2)
SAE 20 or
SAE 10W30
100 hrs
Elevator control push
SAE 20 or
SAE 10W30
Detail T includes only serials CE-748. CE-n2 and after;
CJ-149 and after: E-l 111. E1241 and after: and EA-1 and after.
pull
(2)
100 hrs
35-604-58
12-20-00
Rage
18
Oct7/83
A6
BEECHCRAFT
BONANZA SERIES
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
0.
50-590014
TS1222-5
50-590012
TS1222-3
TS1222-4
TS1222-8
50-590013
TS1171-1
TS1171-2
TSI 176-1
TS1176-10
TS1171-10
TS1176-2
UPPER FORWARD WING BOLT WRENCHES:
TS1222-3
TS1222-5
50-590012
TS1222-4
TS12228
(FOR NAS152-37
(FOR MS20012-20
(FOR MS20012-20
(FOR MS20012-20
(FOR MS20012-20
BOLTS)
AND 131790-1
AND 131790-1
AND 131790-1
AND 131790-1
BOLTS)
BOLTS)
BOLTS)
BOLTS)
UPPER FORWARD WING NUT TORQUE WRENCH ADAPTERS:

TS1171-2
TS1176-2
TS1176-10
TS1171-10
(PRIOR TO CE-928, CJ-156, D-10353, E-1758 AND EA-150)

(PRIOR TO CE-928, CJ-156, D-13053, E-1758, AND EA-150)
(CE-928 AND AFTER, CJ-156 AND AFTER, D-10353 AND AFTER,
E-1758 AND AFTER, EA-150 AND AFTER)
(CE-928 AND AFTER, CJ-156 AND AFTER, D-10353 AND AFTER,
LOWER FORWARD WING BOLT WRENCHES:

TS1222-5
(CE-748, CE-772 AND AFTER; CJ-149
AND AFTER;
E-llll,
E-1241 AND AFTER; D-10097, D-10120 AND AFTER; EA-1 THRU

EA-272 EXCEPT EA-242)
50-590012
(CE-748, CE-772
AND AFTER;
CJ-149 AND AFTER;
E-llll,

(CE-748, CE-772
TS1222-8
AND AFTER; CJ-149 AND AFTER; E-llll,

(CE-748, CE-772 AND AFTER; CJ-149 AND AFTER; E-llll,
TS1222-3

(EA-242, EA-273 AND AFTER)
TS1222-4
Special Tools (Sheet

Figure 2
1 of
36-17-15
4)
12-20-00
Page
A8
19
Jan 18/84
BEECHCRAFT
BONANZA SERIES
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
LOWER FORWARD WING NUT TORQUE WRENCH ADAPTERS:

TS1171-2
TS1176-2
TS1176-10
(PRIOR TO CE-928, CJ-156, E-1758, D-10353, AND EA-150)

(PRIOR TO CE-928, CJ-156, E-1758, D-10353, AND EA-150)
(CE-928 AND AFTER, CJ-156 AND AFTER, E-175B AND AFTER,
0-10353 AND AFTER, EA-150 THRU EA-272 EXCEPT EA-242)
50-590014
(EA-242,
EA-273 AND
AFTER)
UPPER AFT WING BOLT WRENCHES:

50-590012
TS1222-5
TS1222-4
TS1222-8
UPPER AFT WING NUT TORQUE WRENCH ADAPTERS:

50-590013
TS1171-1
TS1176-1
LOWER AFT WING BOLT WRENCHES:

50-590012
TS1222-5
TS1222-4
TS1222-8
LOWER AFT WING NUT TORQUE WRENCHES:
TS1171-1
TS1176-1
50-590013
35-590064-1
HOISTING SLING ASSEMBLY
35-590006
MAIN WHEEL JACK ADAPTER
MODEL 300
SERVICE JACK
MAX. CAPACITY 5000 LBS
35-590009
THROTTLE RETAINING NUT WRENCH
Special Tools (Sheet
Figure
2 of
36-17-22
4)
12-20-00
Page
20
Jan 18/84
A8
BEECHCRAFT
BONANZA SERIES
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
SPECIAL TOOLS
35-590087
DIFFERENTIAL MECHANISM
USED ON THE BONANZA 35 SERIES AIRPLANES
ONLY
810-5 35660040 LH
810-5 35660040-1
RH
ELEVATOR CHECK FIXTURE

USED ON MODEL SERIALS D-10097,
D-10120 AND AFTER
810-3 35660040 LH
810-3 35660040-1 RH
ELEVATOR CHECK FIXTURE
USED ON MODEL SERIALS CE-748, CE-772
AND
35-590087-9 STOP
AFTER; CJ-149 AND AFTER, E-llll,
USED WITH 35-590087 ASSEMBLY WHEN
E-1241 AND AFTER; AND EA-1 AND AFTER
RIGGING THE MODEL SERIALS D-10097,

D-10120 AND AFTER
810 35660043-2
TRIM TAB JIG
36-590015-1
TOW BAR
C~F
35-590021
TAIL TIE-DOWN SUPPORT ASSEMBLY
810 33524000
RUDDER CHECK FIXTURE
810-1 50590091
45-590074-7
AILERON TRAVEL GAGE
LANDING GEAR TENSION GAGE

36-17-16
Special
Tools (Sheet 3 of 4)
figure 2
12-20-00
A8
Page
21
Jan 18/84
BEECHCRAFT
BONANZA SERIES
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
PREFLIGHT FUEL DRAIN TOOL

ON 836TC AIRPLANES OR FUEL
SELECTOR VALVE DRAIN TOOL
ON A36TC AIRPLANES WITH KIT
NO. 36-9008-15 INSTALLED
B36TC
FUEL/OIL DRAIN ADAPTER
PIN107B
36-17-~7
001
Special
Tools
(Sheet
Figure 2
4 of
4)
"END"
12-20-00
Page 22
Aug 29/85
All
C H A PT E R
STANDARD
PRACTICES
(AIRFRAME)
Ci~echcraft
BONANZA SERIES
MAINTENANCE MANUAL.
CHAPTER 20
STANDARD PRACTICES
AIRFRAME
TABLE OF CONTENTS
Subject
Page
20-00-00
Standard Practices
Airframe
20-01-00
1
Torque Wrenches
20-02-00
Electrostatic
Discharge Sensitivity
Electrostatic
Electrostatic Discharge
Sensitivity
Classification
of ESDS
Removal/installation
Equipment
Handling of ESDS Components and Equipment
Controlling Static Charge Buildup
Permanent Static Control Workstation
Portable Static Control Workstation

and Dust Effects
ESDS
on
Humidity
Components
Equipment................................
Packaging of ESDS Components and Equipment
Marking of ESDS Components and Equipment
Storage and Transit of ESDS Components and Equipment
and
10
11
12
20-03-00
Electrical
Bonding
Electrical
Bonding
Direct Electrical
Description
and
Operation
Methods
Bonding
Bonding
of Tubes
Indirect Electrical
Electrical
Bonding
Electrical Power Returns
Recommended Materials
Electrical Bonding
Metal Surface
Preparation
and Electrical
Bonding
Aluminum Surfaces
Corrosion-Resistant
(CRES)
Steel Surfaces
Stainless Steel and Titanium Surfaces

Electrical
Typical
Bonding Examples
Blind Ground Stud
CRES Steel
or
Titanium Electrical
Bonding
Aluminum Electrical
Bonding
Tubing Clamp to Bonding Jumper Electrical Bonding
Bonding Jumper Across Tubing Clamp Electrical Bonding
Typical Ground Stud Electrical Bonding
Electrical Bonding of Ground Tabs
8
8
11
11
20-Contents
Page
A14
Jun 20/91
Ci3eechcraft
BONANZA SERIES
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
CHAPTER 20
STANDARD PRACtlCES
TABLE OF CONTENTS
AIRFRAME
(Continued)
Page
Subject
20-04-00
1
1
Control Cable
Control Cable
System Inspection
Storage
Cable Pulley Inspection
Control
20-05-00
1
Bearings
Bearings
Hydraulic
Press
Removal
Bearing
Bearing
................................................i.......................................
Removal
Mechanical Press
Bearing Housing Inspection
Be~ring
Instailation Using Retaining Compound

Bearing Installation By Staking
2
3
20-06-00
Tube and Hose Assemblies and
Tubing, Hose and Fittings
Fittings
Assembly
1
1
Removal of Tube and Hose Assemblies

Hose
Installation
Tube Installation
Fitting Installation
Nonpositioning Type Fitting Installation
Pipe Thread Fitting Installation
Tube Damage Limits
Fluid Line
2
2
4
20-07-00
Locking Devices
Self-Locking
Description
and
Operation
Slotted, Steel Locknuts (Prev~ailing Torque

Lockwire and Cotter Pin Requirements
Locking Devices
1
1
Nuts
Type)
Lockwire Installation Procedures
1
1
1
1
Lockwire Hole
Lockwire
Alignment
Twisting
Cotter Pin Installation
Keywashers (Tab and Cup Types) Installation

Retaining Rings (Spirolox, Etc.) Installation
Turnbuckle Lock Clip Installation
5
5
PO-Contents
Page 2
Jun 20/91
A14
C~eechcraft
BONANZA SERIES
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
CHAPTER 20
STANDARD PRACTICES
TABLE OF CONTENTS
AIRFRAME
(Continued)
Page
Subject
20-08-00
Airplane Finish Care
Description
Airplane Finish Care
Airplane Finish Cleaning

Environmental Fallout (Acid Rain)
Waxing Airplane Finishes
Placard Replacement
3
3
3
3
Urethane Paints
Urethane Paint
Stripping
And
Pretreatment
Repair Procedures
CleaningUrethane
(Wash)
Paint
Primer For Urethane Pairit
Urethane Primer
Topcoats
Urethane Touch-Up Repair
Painting Magnesium
Paint Removal From Magnesium Surfaces
Painting Magnesium Surfaces
Special Procedures
Propeller Blades
Surfaces Susceptible to Mud and Spray
Urethane
5
5
5
6
7
7
7
7
Rubber Seals
Enclosed Areas
Battery
Subject
To
High Humidity
Box and Lid
Paint Free Areas
20-09-00
Corrosion
Description
Galvanic Corrosion
Corrosion
Corrosion Control
Corrosion Protection
Aluminum Corrosion Removal
Removal of Corrosion from Aluminum Surfaces
Aluminum Corrosion Treatment
Corrosion Removal
Corrosion Treatment
Magnesium
Magnesium
Steel Corrosion Removal
20-Contents
Page 3
A14
Jun 20/91
Raytheon Aircraft
CHAPTER 20
STANDARD PRACTICES
AIRFRAME
P0-Effectivity
20-Contents
20-00-00
20-01-00
20-02-00
20-03-00
A22
PAGE
DATE
Nov 10/00
Nov 10/00
Nov 10/00
Jun 20/91
Jun 20/91
Jun 20/91
Nov 10/00
Nov 10/00
Jun 20/91
Jun 20/91
Jun 20/91
Jun 20/91
Jun 20/91
Jun 20(91
Jun 20/91
Jun 20/91
Jun 20/91
Jun 20/91
Jun 20/91
Jun 20191
Jun 20/91
Jun 20/91
10
Jun 20/91
11
Jun 20/91
12
Jun 20/91
Jun 20/91
Jun 20/91
Jun 20/91
Jun 20/91
Jun 20/91
201EFFECTIVITY
Nov
10/0 Page
RaylIheon Aircraft
CHAPTER 20
STANDARD PRACTICES
AIRFRAME
LIS T OF PA GE EFFECTIVITY(CONTINU ED)

CHA PTER-SECTION-SUBJEC T
20-04-00
20-05-00
20-06-00
20-07-00
Nov
10/Page
20-EFFECTIVITY
PAGE
DATE
Jun 20/91
Jun 20/91
Jun 20/91
Jun 20/91
10
Jun 20/91
11
Jun 20/91
12
Jun 20/91
Jun 20/91
Jun 20/91
Jun 20/91
Jun 20/91
Jun 20/91
Jun 20/91
Jun 20/91
Jun 20/91
Jun 20/91
Jun 20/91
Jun 20/91
Jun 20/91
Jun 20/91
Jun 20/91
Jun 20/91
Jun 20/91
Jun 20/91
Jun 20/91
Jun 20/91
Jun 20/91
A22
Raytheon Aircraft
CHAPTER 20
STANDARD PRACTICES
AIRFRAME
LIST OF PAGE EFFECTIVIN (CONTINUED)

20-08-00
20-09-00
A22
PAGE
DATE
Jun 20/91
Jun 20/91
Jun 20/91
Jun 20/91
Jun 20/91
Jun 20/91
Jun 20/91
Jun 20/91
Jun 20/91
Jun 20/91
Jun 20/91
Jun 20/91
20-EFFECTIVITY
Nov
10/0 Page
Raytheon Aircraft
AIRFRAME
STANDARD PRACTICES
WARNING
I W*RNING)
Any maintenance requiring the disconnection and reconnection of flight control cables,
plumbing, electrical connectors or wiring requires identification of each side of the component being disconnected to facilitate correct reassembly. At or prior to disassembly, components should be color coded, tagged or properly identified in a way that it will be obvious
how to correctly reconnect the components. After reconnection of any component, remove
all identification tags. Check all associated systems for correct function prior to returning
the airplane to service.
practices used in maintaining the airplane in an airworthy condition. The information in this chapter is applicable during maintenance in several chapters of this maintenance
manual. Maintenance procedures in a particular chapter supersede the general information in this chapter.
This
chapter describes
the standard maintenance
The information is broken down in several
unit/subjects. The following is
list of the information contained in each
chapter.
20-01-00
This
Nut and Bolt
Torque Information
unit/subject contains the general information for installation of torqued fasteners. It has information
adapters and torque charts showing the torque of different types of nuts and bolts.
on
the
use
of torque
20-02-00
Electrostatic
Information
unit/subject contains the general information for maintenance of components that are subject to electrostatic
damage. Information is included for electrostatic free workstations, symbols, packaging requirements, storage and
transit requirements, static charge buildup and humidity and dust effects.
This
20-03-00- Electrical
This
unit/subject
Bonding
contains the
Information
general
information for installation of electrical
wiring grounding,
tube
grounding
and
electrical power returns.

20-04-00
This
unit/subject
20-05-00This
by
pound
contains the
Bearing
unit/subject
the
Pulley Information
general
information for maintenance and
of control cables and
contains the
general
information for installation and removal of
of the
Tubing
pulleys.
Information
bearings. The
by use
removal is described
of the
retaining
com-
Information
unit/subject contains the general
information for maintenance of hoses,
identified, but the information is basic and applies
~p
inspection
use
hydraulic and mechanical press method. The installation is described
and the staking method.
20-06-00-
This
Control Cable and
to most
tubing
and
fittings. Components are
not
applications.
20-00-00
NovP:9~
Ralkheon Aircraft
20-07-00
Fastener
Locking
Information
This
unit/subject contains the general information for the installation of

washers, retaining rings and turnbuckle locking clips.
20-08-00-
This
Airplane
cotter
pins, lockwire,
tab and cup type
key-
Finish Information
unit/subject contains
application.
the
general information for maintenance of
the finishes used
on
the
airplane
and
paint
removal and
20-09-00- Corrosion Removal and Control Information
This
unit/subject
Page
contains the
general information for the control,
20-00-00
treatment and removal of corrosion.
na?
ci3~eechcraft
BONANZA SERIES
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
TORQUE WRENCHES
(FIGURES
1 AND
Formula for increased effective
2)
Y
Threads of nuts and bolts to be
135
specified. The
loss of normal friction
by
10
1350
1.5
11.5
117.39
must be
torqued
10
clean and free of all lubricants unless otherwise

tion may result in
length:
contamina-
overtorquing.
117 inch-lbs.
NOTE
A measurable
to initiate the
torque may
of
turning
Formula for decreased effective
be exercised
Torque wrenches should

before they are used.
be
some
10
Y
setting. For example; a

requires 20 inch-pounds
proper torque
of
force
torqued
to
at 20
should
freely
turn
must
If
the
100
inch-pounds
desired
to
This
torque.
method compensates for the friction of

or fastener.
an
1),
ure
increased
adapter
compensation
or lost leverage.
figure
must
ment must be
To
is used with
calculated
the
between the center of the bolt and the scale attach-
torque require-
ing point. For example, if the specified torque is 200

inch-pounds and the distance is 15 inches, a pull of
13.3 pounds must be applied.
made
for
before the final
torquing.
actually give
T
L
L
or
Y
E
When
Y
L
E
EXAMPLE:
(Desired) Torque
Apparent (Indicated) Torque
Effective Lever Length
Effective Length of Extension
Actual
135 inch-lbs.
Unknown
10.0 inches
1.5 inches
torque wrench adapter is used, the length
of the
adapter
flex
"T" handle wrench and
or
must be added to the

a
length
of the
value calculated for
particular combination. The following

example in finding a desired value.
that
cal
T=
pounds (scale reading)
torque wrench (Figbe
the desired torque which will

specified, use the following formula:
LEGEND:
torque wrench is
required to obtain the specified torque, divide the

torque in inch-pounds by the distance in inches
A new
Torque Formula:
159 inch-lbs.
To calculate the force in
the torque
Basic
8.5
1.5
method of
the locknut
When
158.82
1350
not available, an acceptable

checking the torque is to attach a spring
scale (Figure 2) to a conventional flex or "T" handle
inserted into an adapter. Force should be applied in
direction perpendicular to an imaginary line
a
extending from the center of the bolt through the
spring scale attaching point.
be
inch-pounds above the
indicate
10
8T01039
desired torque. If the desired torque is

80 inch-pounds, the torque wrench
achieve
locknuts.
This initial torque must then be added

to the desired torque to attain the
locknut that
135
required
length:
is
typi-
Effective length of flex or "T"

................12 inches
Handle wrench
Length of adapter ...............3 inches
..................1 5 inches
Total length
Desired torque on bolt ........2000 inch-lbs.
(2000 inch-lbs.)
(15 inches)
133.3 Ibs.
BT01038
20-01-00
Page
A14
Jun 20/91
C~3eechrraft
BONANZA SERIES
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
TORQUE WRENCH DRIVE

CENTERLINE
II I i
C-
ADAPTER DRIVE
CENTERLINE
HANDGRIP CENTERLINE
(PREDETERMINED)
200001 i
O I
Torque Wrench and Adapter
Figure
20-01-00
Page 2
Jun 20/91
A14
~eechcraft
BONANZA SERIES
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
(LB)
TORQUE
(IN-LBS.)
90
OTAL LENGTH
2000-017-02
Computing Torque with

Figure 2
A14
Spring Scale
20-01-00
Page 3
Jun 20/91
C~3eechcraft
BONANZA SERIES
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
CHART 1
FINE THREAD
SERIES, CLASS 3, CADMIUM PLATED

(EXCEPT AS NOTED)
AND NONLUBRICATED
Maximum Allowable
Torque Limits Recommended for

Installation
MS21042
Dry-Film
AN310
Lub Nut
Nuts
12-15
5/32-36
3/1 6-32
1/4-28
5/1 6-24
3/8-24
7/1 6-20
1/2-20
9/1 6-18
1*
15-19
37-47
20-25
50-70
100-140
160-190
450-500
480-690
800-1 000
56-78
72-1 08
1
1
1
5/8-18
3/4-16
2300-2500
1--1---
7/8-14
2500-3000
1---
*This is
1100-1300
MS20364
MS21245
AN320
1 7-9
12-15
30-40
60-85
95-110
1 270-300
1 290-410
1 480-600
660-780
13001500
Lub Nut
1 20
1 40
1
1
1
1100
1 225
1 390
Lub Nut
Nuts
1*
1 840
30
70
135
200
MS21245
MS20364
AN320
Dry-Film
AN310
Dry-Film
Nuts
Column 4
MS2 i 042
MS20365
Dry-Film
Lub Nut
Nuts
1 12
25
60
140
240
1 500
210-230
310-430
485-605
1090-
1100
1 660
415
1600
2400
5000
1
1
1
1 960
11400
1 3000
660
1060
2500
1800-
1250
1640-
7000
1 4200
3740
2400
2100
thread (.1640-32) with recommended torque

tightening torque of 14 inch-pounds.
a coarse
allowable
Column 3
Column 2
Column 1
MS20365
Size
Tightening
Torque (Inch-Pounds)
(Inch-Pounds)
limits of 9-11
inch-pounds
and
maximum
BT03021
20-01-00
4
Jun 20/91
Page
A14
13eechcraft
BONANZA SERIES
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
CHART 2
TORQUING COARSE THREADED BOLTS LOADED IN SMEAR
Size
9-32
10-24
1/4-20
5/1 6-18
3/8-16
7/16
1/2-13
9/1 6-12
5/8-11
3/4-10
7/8-9
1-8
1
1
1/8-8
1/4-8
The above values
Torque Limits REcommended
Maximum Allowable
(Inch-Pounds)
Torque (Inch-Pounds)
AN365
AN364
8 AN310
6 AN320
Nuts
Nuts
Nuts
12-15
20-25
40-50
80-90
160-185
235-255
400-480
500-700
700-900
1150-1600
2200-3000
3700-5000
5500-6500
6500-8000
7-9
12-15
25-30
48-55
95-110
140-155
240-290
20
35
75
160
275
475
300-420
420-540
700-950
1300-1800
2200-3000
3300-4000
4000-5000
1100
1500
2500
4600
7600
12000
46000
apply
to Class 3
AN365
AN310
880
AN364
6 AN320
Nuts
12
21
45
100
170
280
520
650
900
1500
2700
4500
7200
1000
threads, cadmium plated and nonlubricated.
8T03022
20-01-00
Page
A14
Jun 20/91
Cil)eechcraft
BONANZA SERIES
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
charge, while materials at the bottom of the

capable of producing a similar negative -electrostatic charge. Items of dissimilar polarity provide
the greatest potential for electrostatic discharge.
Numeric values have not been assigned to the
listed materials, as static charge levels are not
ELECTROSTATIC DISCHARGE SENSITIVITY
static
list
Some types of electronic components are easily

damaged by electrostatic discharge (ESD), and
require special handling

ESD is
release
and
of stored
storage procedures.
electrostatic charge
generated by actions such as contact, rubbing, or separating of materials. A charge

of this type can damage electrical and electronic
equipment installed in the airplane. In some
instances, the damage may not be immediate, but
progressive. Components and items of equipment
that can be damaged by electrostatic discharge are
considered to be electrostatic discharge sensitive
(ESDS). Electronic components that are considered
to be electrostatic discharge sensitive include integrated circuits, transistors and diodes, monolithic
and hybrid microelectronics, MOS capacitors, thin
film resistors, and piezoelectric crystals. Any circuit
or piece of equipment containing ESDS components is subject to ESD damage if certain handling
precautions are not observed.
which has been
are
constant, and will vary with ambient conditions. A
greater possibility of ESD exists when the positions

of listed items in Table 1 are farther apart. For
example,
individual
an
using his/her
hands to
pick
up a PVC pipe has more potential for producing

ESD than does an aluminum part contacting a steel
pat.
Table 2 identifies
some
typical electrostatic charge

can produce the electro-
levels and the actions that

static
charge.
ELECTROSTA TIC DISCHARGE SENSITIVITY

CLASSIFICA TION
Three levels of
sensitivity classification are estabdischarge sensitivity devices.
lished for electrostatic

Personnel
who
remove, inspect, test or install

equipment containing ESDS combe aware of the possibility of ESD
instruments and
must
ponents
damage,
and should handle ESDS components in

procedures covered in this chap-
accordance with
ter.
Proper procedures
and
policies for the handling

equipment should be
of ESDS components and

adhered to for the following
Control of ESD
reasons:
damage,
Class 1
from time of compo-
nent manufacture to time of actual
installation,
must be verifiable and must be maintained

use
of established
Classification is used to aid the manufacturer
or
supplier in providing packaging and handling

requirements that protect the ESD sensitive item,
device or component through all phases of handling
and packaging of the device during its service life.
The three classes of ESD sensitivity are as follows:
Class 2
Sensitivity
Sensitivity
range is from 0 to 1,999 volts.

range is from 2,000 to 3,999
volts.
by
industry standards.
Class 3
policy dictates that all personnel

procedures to prevent damage
ESDS components and equipment.
Established
Sensitivity range
is from 4,000 to 15,999
volts.
follow certain
to
Interacting
aware
areas
of their
of
responsibility
obligation
must
be
to maintain proper
ESD-controlled environments.
Table 1
REMOVAL/INSTALLA TION
lists several materials and the associated
electrostatic
charge polarity
and
OF ESDS
EQUIPMENT
magnitude for
each. Materials at the top of the list are capable of

producing the greatest amount of positive electro-
A14
ELECTROSTATIC DISCHARGE SENSITIVITY

Observe the
or
installing
following procedures when removing

equipment at the airplane:
ESDS
20-02-00
Page 1
Jun 20/91
L~3eechcraft
BONANZA SERIES
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
TABLE 1
MATERIAL POLARITY
CHARGE
MATERIALS
(Relative Magnitude
and
Polarity)
Air
Pos~ive
Human Hands
Positive
Asbestos
Rabbit Fur
Glass
Mica
Human Hair
Positive
Positive
Positive
Positive
Positive
Positive
Nylon
Wool
Positive
Positive
Fur
Lead
Silk
Aluminum
Positive
Positive
Positive
Paper
Positive
Cotton
Steel
Wood
Amber
--Neutral--
Negative
Negative
Negative
Negative
Negative
Negative
Negative
Negative
Negative
Negative
Negative
Negative
Negative
Negative
Negative
Negative
Negative
Negative
Negative
Negative
Negative
................._
Sealing
Wax
Hard Rubber
................._
Nickel, Copper
Brass, Silver
Gold, Platinum
................._
Sulfur
Acetate, Rayon
Polyester
Celluloid/
Orlon/
Saran/
Polyurethane
Polyethylene
Polypropylene
PVC (Vinyl)
KEL-F (CTFE)
i.....
SILICON
TEFLON/
BT01D30
during
CAUTION
tems
power-on
to
prevent
maintenance
Tools with
should
plastic
not
be
or
used
devices. These tools
charge which
charge during
Insulated
20-02-00
Page 2
Jun 20/91
insulated handles
does
ESDS
around
can
carry
static
readily disthe grounding process,

tools should be used only
not
of aircraft sysshock to
testing
electrical
personnel performing the
tests.
Some circuit board assemblies may be
protected
covers
by
charge. Use
tion
to
plastic
store
can
a
covers.
an
These
electrostatic
static control work sta-
neutralize
any
electrostatic
A14
BONANZA SERIES
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
TABLE 2
TYPICAL ELECTROSTATIC VOLTAGES
ACTIONS OF PERSONS
Walking
Walking
across
MOST COMMON
HIGHEST
READING (VOLTS)
READING (VOLTS)
12,000
4,000
1,800
1,500
39,000
13,000
18,000
20,000
7,000
carpet
vinyl tile floor

Seated in polyurethane foam chair
Picking up poly bag
Inserting paperwork into vinyl envelopes
across
Data based
on
ambient relative
800
humidity
15% to 36%
BT01031
charge on the covers before touching

a printed circuit board. Store the covers
safe
from
distance
the
work
When
a.
using test equipment, discharge all test

ground prior to connection to the ESDS cir-
cult under test,

b.
a portable static control work station

removing ESDS circuit boards from card
cages and enclosures at the airplane.
when
Place removed ESDS
equipment
on
the work
station static
dissipative work surface before openstatic shielding container holding the
ing the
replacement ESDS equipment,
d,
its
Just prior to engaging

mating receptacle, touch
the
receptacle
charge on the
e.
Maintain
d. Always
opening any
Avoid
e.
Use
c.
cable connector with
the connector shell to
shell to neutralize any electrostatic

connector or the installers body.
protective coverings
on
stored ESDS
equipment.
to
pins
HANDLING OF ESDS COMPONENTS AND
All
personnel handling ESDS components and

equipment should receive instruction in the proper
handling of such items. Observe the following handling rules to prevent damage to ESDS components
and equipment:
Keep
ESDS
components
protective packaging
and
until
equipment
opened at a
static control work station.

b.
place
Before
the
unsealing
packages on
control work station.
A14
ESD
protective packages,~
the work surface of
static
wear
ESD
grounding
wrist
strap when
protective package.
touching circuit components or connechandling ESDS components or equip-
when
f.
Never
place any ESDS component, before or

assembly, on a nonconductive surface or in a
container not specifically designed for storage of
after
ESDS devices.
g.
with
Protect
h.
ESDS
components
protective containers,
pin-shorting
and
equipment
and/or
conductive caps,
devices.
Store and transport ESDS components and

containers. Seal all
ESD warning label
equipment in ESD protective

protective containers with an
prior to shipment.
i.
EQUIP~WENT
a.
remove
me"t.
ment
inside ESD
pressure air nozzles to
use
printed circuit boards. Rapid movement of air, combined with airborne dust particles,
can create an electrostatic charge that will destroy
ESDS components.
area.
leads to
Do not
c.
dust from ESDS
Place all loose ESDS components and equipinto ESD protective containers BEFORE
removing
grounding
wrist strap.
j. Keep the work station free of any material

required to accomplish the assigned task.
k.
Follow established ESD
protection
not
rules and
pocedures.
I
Always use a static control work station, either
permanent or portable, when removing ESDS components and equipment from protective packaging.
Use only grounded, electrically isolated, and

m.
temperature controlled soldering irons that have
been rated for use with ESDS components and
equipment.
tive
or
Use
static
equipment,
only hand tools that have conducdissipative handles or grips. Test
such
as
scopes and meters, must be

20-02-00
Page 3
Jun 20/91
~eechcraft
BONANZA SERIES
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
11
10~
1~1
STATIC
WORK
CONTRDLLED
STATION
1. GROUND CORD ASSEMBLY
6. STATIC CONTROLLED CHAIR
2. STATIC DISSIPATIVE MAT OR
7. CONDUCTIVE CONTAINERS AND
CONDUCTIVE BAGS
WORK BENCH SURFACE
8. HEEL GROUNDING STRAP
3. STATIC DISSIPATIVE/CONDUCTIVE
FLOOR OR MAT
9. ANTISTATIC/CONDUCTIVE
CLOTHING OR OUTER GARMENT
4. GROUND CONNECTION
"10. SIGN
5. IONIZED AIR BLOWER
ESD CONTROLLED
WORK STATION
11. SNUG-TO-SKIN PERSONNEL
WRIST STRAP TO GROUND
NOTE
ITEMS MARKED WITH AN
ARE REQUIRED FOR A STATIC CONTROLLED WORK
STATION. ALL OTHER ITEMS ARE
OPTIONAL, BUT PROVIDE ADDED PROTECTION
OR ENHANCE WORKER MOBILITY.
NOTE
KEEP STATIC GENERATORS, SUCH AS PLASTIC
CUPS, CIGARETTE WRAPPERS,
SURPLUS CLOTHING, HANDBAGS, LUNCH CONTAINERS, PLASTIC BAGS, FOAM

PACKING, READING MATERIAL, ETC. AWAY FROM STATIC CONTROL WORK
STATIONS.
Apol*lae
Permanent Static Control Work Station
Figure 1
20-02-00
Page
Jun 20/91
A14
~eechcraft
BONANZA SERIES
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
,19
dl
V2
i. ALLIGATOR CLIP TO
RELIABLE GROUND CONNECTION

2. SNUG-TO-SKIN PERSONNEL
WRIST STRAP
3. STATIC DISSIPATIVE
WORK SURFACE
AP014~89
Portable Static Control Work Station
Figure
20-02-00
Page
A14
Jun 20/91
Cj~eechcraR
BONANZA SERIES
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
rated for
use
around ESDS
components and equip-
exposing ESDS components and equiplarge electromagnetic or electrostatic fields

transformers or transmitting antennas.
Avoid
n.
ment to
such
as
Four basic
These
following
CAUTION
techniques
are
Never
in ESD control.
employed
Minimize
charge.
sonnel
human
is
body
good
The
electrical conductor and for

the
body
grounding
device such as a wrist or ankle strap. Always wear
a grounding wrist strap when opening ESD containers or handling exposed ESDS components and
equipment.
reason
electrostatic
dissipated by skin
c.
charges
contact
on
with
NEUTRALIZE THE CHARGE
can
Nonconductors,
polystyrene coffee cups, plastic bags, and

some clothing develop electrostatic charges that
cannot be neutralized by grounding, lonized air flow
will neutralize an electrostatic charge on a nonconductor as long as the ionized air blower puts out
both positive and negative ions.
such
d.
as
MINIMIZE
THE
EFFECTS
rounding ESDS components

be free of electrostatic fields
static
shielding
OF
ELECTRO-
The immediate environment
STATIC FIELDS
to
mlnlmlze
and
or
equipment
sur-
must
must have suitable
induced effects from
electrostatic fields.
Under certain conditions, pera grounding wrist strap
using
may need to
use
moisture enhancer to
grounding ankle strap to dissipate body charge

buildup. Wear cotton clothing instead of wool or
synthetics. Use an ionized air blower to dissipate
charges from nonconductive items.
DRAIN OFF THE CHARGE TO GROUND
wrist strap
The strap must be in

contact with the wearers skin to adequately dissipate any electrostatic
charge buildup by using conductive or

dissipative flooring and static-dissipative work
surfaces. Wear leather shoes, cotton socks, and
grounding
wear
clothing.
over
static
be
con-
I C~UIION(
are:
MINIMIZE THE CHARGE BUILDUP
that
on
items:
electrostatic
b.
charges
permanent static control work station consists of
the
CONTROLLING STATIC CHARGE BUILDUP
a.
electrostatic
diverting, to ground,
objects.
ductive
ment.
resistance
skin
lotion-type
provide a
low-
between
the
connection
wrist and the wrist strap.
GROUNDING WRIST STRAP
Each person
and
ESDS
equipment
components
grounding wrist strap to dissipate bodily electrostatic charges. The wrist strap must fit
firm against the skin and release quickly in case of
an emergency. The wrist strap incorporates a 1
megohm current-limiting resistor, in series with the
ground cord, to protect the wearer from electrical
that
handles
must wear
shock hazards.
SURFACE
STATIC-DISSIPATIVE WORK
b.
Conductive mats on the work bench surface are
designed to remove electrostatic charges from conductive items
c.
placed
on
the mat.
Conductive floor-
CONDUCTIVE FLOORING
ing is used
required. To
when
additional
control
maintain total control
of
over
ESD
ESD,
is
use
conductive chairs, a grounding heel strap, and conductive shoes. Conductive flooring in ESD control
areas must
tive
be free of all
wax or
other nonconduc-
coatings.
HARD GROUND CONNECTION

Grounding
of the static control work station is accomplished
through one or more copper ground rods driven
d.
PERMANENT STA TIC CONTROL
into moist earth to
WORKSTATION
low
(FIGURE I)
ground. All work station connections to ground are

made through a one megohm resistor to protect
work station personnel from electrical shock hazards by limiting current flow to ground.
A static control work station
handling
provides for static-free

equipment by
of ESDS components and
20-02-00
Page 6
Jun 20/91
resistance
depth
path
from
sufficient to
the
work
provide
station
to
A14
BONANZA SERIES
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
f.
NOTE
Some
building grounds
checked to
ensure
from
rent
looping
grounds.
need
that there is
other
to
be
and if
no cur-
nearby
external and not static.
e.
IONIZED
AIR
provides
negative ions over
blower
tralize
The
BLOWER
constant flow of
CONDUCTIVE CONTAINERS
ESDS devices
transported in approved containers to prevent ESD damage. These special containers are
made of metal or special conductive plastic. Before
Static-sensitive components and equipment are
removed from a static control work station, they
must be packaged in containers that provide at
least as much protection as that provided by the
must be
of current is
source
Chairs used
protected work stations must be conductive,

padded, must be covered with static dissipa-
tive material.
g.
Ensure that the
STATIC DISSIPATIVE SEATING
at ESD
ionized
positive
air
and
the work station surface to neunonconductive

on
electrostatic charges
materials in the air flow path. The use of an ionized

air blower, in combination with a static control work
station, provides additional protection for ESDS
components and equipment. Since it is not always
work station. Conductive boxes, kit trays, and similar types of approved containers provide complete
charge accumulators
A grounding
h.
GROUNDING HEEL STRAP
heel strap can provide additional ESD protection.
The heel strap makes contact with the wearers
skin at the ankle, and extends to the bottom of foot-
possible to eliminate all

(styrofoa, plastic, etc.)
static
work area, the ionized air blower is used to provide additional protection by flooding the work area with balanced negativelpositive ionized air. Static charge accumulators
from
kept away from static-free areas,

but inadvertent static is hard to control, especially
when developed by such common items as clothing, footwear, combs, and pens. An ionized air
blower will help control some of this inadvertent
buildup.
should
always
be
ESD
protection
to
ESDS components and
equip-
ment while in transit.
wear to
make contact with
ductive
flooring.
used in combination
provide
conductive mat
or con-
grounding heel strap can be

with a grounding wrist strap to
The
maximum ESD
protection.
CLOTHING
ANTISTATIC/CONDUCTIVE
electrostatic
of
clothing
generate
Many types
i.
CAUTION
THIS EQUIPMENT CONTAINS DEVICES
SENSITIVE TO DAMAGE BY
ELECTROSTATIC DISCHARGE (ESD)
USE ESD PRECAUTIONARY PROCEDURES
WHEN TOUCHING, REMOVING, OR
INSERTING PARTS OR ASSEMBLIES
Equipment Enclosure Cautionary Placards

Figure 3
20-02-00
Page 7
A14
Jun 20/91
Cj~echcraR
BONANZA SERIES
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
charges. To remove some of this buildup, work stapersonnel should wear outer garments that
help dissipate electrostatic charges. Cotton ranks
among the best fabrics for antistatic protection. Do
not wear synthetic or wool fabrics around ESDS
tion
devices,
as
these
fabrics
retain
electrostatic
of emergency. The wrist strap incorporates a

megohm current-limiting resistor, in series with
case
the
ground cord,
to
designed
static
WORKSTATION
items contact the mat.

c.
provides for
handling of ESDS components and
equipment during maintenance operations at the
airplane. The typical portable work station is available as a field service kit that is used to dissipate
electrostatic charges before the charges can damage ESDS components and equipment.
portable
static control work station
static-free
static control work station
typical portable
following
sists of the
con-
Each person
GROUNDING WRIST STRAP
who handles ESDS components and equipment
grounding wrist strap to dissipate bodcharges. The wrist strap must fit
against the skin and should release quickly in
must wear a
electrostatic
firm
to remove electro-
HARD GROUND CONNECTION
Ground the
portable work station to the airframe or to a common ground as shown in Figure 2. All portable work
station connections to ground are made through 1
megohm current-limiting resistors to protect maintenance personnel from electrical shock hazards.
HUMIDITY AND DUST EFFECTS ON ESDS
COMPONENTS AND EQUIPMENT
items:
a.
ily
charges
from conductive items when those
PORTABLE STA TIC CONTROL
from electri-
integral part of the portable
an
work station, and is
(FIGURE 2)
wearer
STATIC-DISSIPATIVE WORK SURFACE
conductive mat is
charges.
protect the
,,I shock hazards.
Humidity is a
humidity,
the
factor in the control of ESD. The lower

the
greater the chance of damage
to
ESDS components and equipment. Humidity at the

work station should be maintained between 30 and
65 percent.
CAUTION
ELECTROSTATIC DISCHARGE
SENSITIVE ELECTRONIC DEVICES
SPECIAL HANDLING REQUIRED
AP014191
ESDS Drawing Note
Figure
20-02-00
Page 8
Jun 20/91
A14
~eechcraR
BONANZA SERIES
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
RS-471
MIL-STD-1285 ESD SYMBOL
ESD SYMBOL
MIL-STD-129H ESD SYMBOL

AP014193
ESDS Symbols
Figure
A14
20-02-00
Page 9
Jun 20/91
Cil)eechcraR
BONANZA SERIES
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
Repair
of ESDS circuit boards, including replacecomponents, should be performed in
ment of ESDS
a
ESD protective
erwise defined
packaging requirements, unless othby specification, shall conform to the
following:
dust-free environment,
Class 1
PACKAGING OF ESDS COMPONENTS AND
EQUIPMENT
All ESDS components and equipment require special ESD protective packaging. Seal all ESDS pack-
ages with
in
Figures
appropriate cautionary label
an
through
as
Package
in
multi-layer
conductive
type bags consisting of an inner and outer

layer of antistatic (surface resistivity of 109 to
104 ohms per square inch) or static dissipative (surface resistivity of 10" to 109 ohms per
square inch) material with a middle layer of
conductive material (surface resistivity of 10
ohms or less).
shown
8.
Class 2
Package in a static dissipative matepossessing a surface resistivity of 105 to

109 ohms per square inch. Materials specified
rial
i ,,,,,-t
Do not
for Class 1 may also be used.
clips or staples when sealing any ESDS package.

Do
not
use
use
Class 3
Package
possessing
carbon-filled, conductive
surface
in
an
antistatic
resistivity
material
of 109 to 1014
ohms per square inch.
bags.
Remove ESDS components and equipment from protective, static-shielded
containers
ONLY at
static control
work station after
attaching a grounding wrist strap and verifying that ESD

producing items are not on the static
dissipative work surface.
Place all ESDS devices in
approved static shielding

in shippers normal exterior containers. Use antistatic cushioning or fill
materials. Do not use static generating materials,
such as polyethylene, styrofoam, or paper.
containers before
Antistatic
packing
packaging
is
generally pink
color. The material differs from
CAUTION
or
common
blue in
plastic
in
ATTENTION
SENSITIVE ELECTRONIC DEVICES.

SPECIAL HANDLING REQUIRED,
DO NOT OPEN EXCEPT AT AN APPROVE
WORK STATION.
CONTENTS
STATIC SENSITIVE
HANDLING
PRECAUTIONS
(PREFERRED)
REQUIRED
CONTENTS
(ACCEPTABLE)
APOld192
ESD Unit Container Notice
Figure 6
20-02-00
Page 10
Jun 20/91
A14
Ci~echcraR
BONANZA SERIES
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
Cd
ATTENTION
CONTENTS
STATIC SENSITIVE
HANDLING
PRECAUTIONS
REQUIRED
AP01419d
Protective Container Notice
Figure 7
positions or a hand inside of a triangle

with an angling bar across the triangle)
are yellow on a black background or
black on a yellow background.
incorporated into the

manufacturing process. This
during
NOT provide static shieldDOES
of
type
packaging
ing, and is generally used to package instruction
that
an
antistatic compound is
the
material
sheets, data sheets, and other non-ESDS materials
prior
to introduction into
All non-ESDS items, that
static-free environment.
enter an ESD work
are to
station, require repackaging in antistatic materials.
Mark unit containers with the ESDS caution label

the outside of the
ers
shielding packaging differs from

packaging, in that it has the ability to
Conductive static
antistatic
shield
static
devices,
contained
within,
from
external
charges. Conductive static shielding packagbags and rigid con-
is available in the form of
ing
with
Apply
an
package.
ESD caution label
marks
directly
board, assembly
Figure 8.
printed circuit
shown in
equipment enclosure,
or
door that would expose ESDS devices, if

removed. Mark appropriately using decal transfer,
access
stencil, silk screen,
tainers.
as
to each ESDS
cover,
on
Mark exterior contain-
or
any other method meeting
permanent legibility requirements.

MARKING OF ESDS COMPONENTS AND
EQUIPMENT
All
ESDS components and

appropriately with
marked
shown in
Figure
equipment should
ESDS symbol
an
5.
be
as
Display
ESDS
that
attached to circuit boards should contrast
symbols in a prominent package

location to alert all personnel to the presence of
ESDS devices and equipment. The ESDS symbol
should be at least 1/4" in diameter. ESDS symbols
are
with the circuit board base color. Enclosures that

contain ESDS circuit boards should be identified
NOTE
ESDS
pointing
symbols
(circle
with
into the circle from
arrows
equidistant
bright orange paint
on
by
the outer face of the enclo-
sure.
20-02-00
Page
A14
11
Jun 20/91
~eechcraft
BONANZA SERIES
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
STORAGE AND TRANSIT OF ESDS
against
COMPONENTS AND EQUIPMENT
controlled work stations.
ESD
ESDS
CAUTION
NEVER
preparing
equipment
transfer
in
conductive
static-
Shipping information and other instructions, accompanying ESDprotected packages, shall be contained in anti-static
materials when
ESDS devices for
and
dissipative,
use
all assemblies and
packages, which have been properly

in protective packages, require proper
storage
ordinary plastic containers

packing
transporting
ESDS components or equipment.
When
at static
enclosed
1~--11 t
or
through appropriate handling
or
static-free containers.
materials. ESDS components, that
shipment, ensure
protected
have been
are
received in
damaged or opened packing containers, are not

acceptable, and should be returned for replacement.
CAUTION
SENSITIVE
DO
NOT
SHIP
ELECTRONIC
OR
STORE
DEVICES
NEAR
ELECTROSTITIC.ELECTROnAGNETIC,
NAGNETIC, OR RADIOACTIVE
STRONG
FIELDS.
AP014195
In-House
20-02-00
Page 12
Jun 20/91
Storage Container
Figure 8
Label
A14
Ci~eechcraft
BONANZA SERIES
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
ELECTRICAL BONDING
INDIRECT ELECTRICAL BONDING
DESCRIPTION AND
OPERATION
The
When direct electrical
following terms
description:
tem
defined
are
used in the sys-
as
ELECTRICAL BOND: A reliable electrical
con-
nection between conductive parts which provides electrical
conductivity.
ELECTRICAL BONDING: Conductive parts

electrically bonded when they
are
considered
interconnected
mechanically
common
are
maintain
potential.
electrical
conducting connection, whether

accidental, by which an electrical
GROUND: A
intentional
or
current or
equipment
a common
to
and
uses
is connected to maintain
I
or
Whether
direct
must reflect
or
high
are
commonly
indirect,
all
surface
This includes but is not limited to, all

films such as anodize, grease, oil, paint,
other finishes with
resistance
protective
lacquer, or
properties. Once
high
bonding surface is cleaned, and the
necessary protective coatings applied, the compo-
the electrical
nent
is
installed and
formed to
the wire should not be bent or

as this has a tendency to
the
jumper and reduce its

"Waggling" the bonding
jumper to see if the end terminals are

tight is unacceptable as this may also
induce fatigue on the crimped portion
of the bonding jumper.
bonding
electrical
the
performed on
bonding jump-
maintenance standards to main-
integrity. Many times, an illprepared

may initially provide sufficient
grounding properties, but experience a rapid deterioration in conductivity when corrosion from contaminants or moisture appears on the bonding surface.
All bonding surfaces should be free of primer or
coatings not compatible with electrical conductance.
tain
maintenance is
effectiveness.
used.
electrical
CAUTION
--II
around these flexible
weaken
Bolts, rivets, conductive laminates, flashing
bonding jumpers
damaged
of electrical
mechanical methods to attach the electrical conducand
Indirect
always as short as
single jumper. Two bonding
connected in a series is unacceptable, as
this can double the resistance between the ground
plane and bonded component. Bonding jumpers are
also used to electrically connect tubes between
joi"ts.
possible
jumpers
ers,
tors.
imprac-
and washers. The connection is
bonding;
types
Both are accomplished by using
direct and indirect.
are
used.
nection. These flexible metal straps are attached to

a prepared metal surface using screws, studs, nuts
electrical potential.
basic
two
are
bonding is most commonly accomplished

by using bonding jumpers to make the desired con-
Anytime
are
methods
electrical
ELECTRICAL BONDING METHODS

There
bonding
tical, indirect bonding methods
resistance check is
verify continuity
perof the electrical bond.
Indirect electrical
bonding
is also used to connect
shielding terminals to a
braiding attaches to the electrical connectors with clamps and shields the airplane
wie harness for its entire length.
the
airplane
ground. The
wire harness
tubular
ELECTRICAL BONDING OF TUBES

All metallic tubes that carry
other fluids,
cally
static
including gases,
petroleum products
must have
or
mechani-
connection to the ground plane for

dissipation. Plumbing sections must be elec-
secure
trically
bonded to each other to eliminate a potential

charge on the individual segments. Conti-
electrical
plumbing segments is achieved

bonding clamps or jumpers. Electrical
bonding clamps, used in some applications, have a
wire that contacts the plumbing on either side of the
clamp, ensuring continuity across the joint.
nuity
between the
with electrical
DIRECT ELECTRICAL BONDING
Direct
are
bonds
electrical
metal-to-metal
joints.
frequently
assembly,
used
the
for
joints
conductive film that prevents corbonding surface. Most direct electrical
treated with
rosion of the
are
Before
bonds involve the installation of components

minum.
on
alu-
ELECTRICAL POWER RETURNS

Electrical power returns should be direct with the
possible path from the operating equip-
shortest
20-03-00
Page 1
A14
Jun 20/91
Cil)eechcraR
BONANZA SERIES
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
CHART 1
SPECIFICATION
MATERIAL
1.
PRODUCT
TT-M-261
Cleaner
VENDOR
Obtain
Methyl
Ethyl
locally
Ketone
2.
Alodine 1200
Coating
Amchem Products Inc.,

Spring Garden St.,
Ambler, PA 19002
3.
Conformal
Conothane CE-1155
MIL-I-46058
Coating
Conap Inc.,
1405 Buffalo St.,
Olean, NY 14706
4.
5.
MIL-P-2337
Primer
MIL-S-8802
Sealant
Advanced
1-lv-12/1-1H-7
Type
PR1422
Coatings
8 Chemicals,
4343 Temple
City Blvd.,
Temple City,
CA 91780
Products Research and

Chemical
Corp.,
5426 San Fernando Rd.,

Glendale, CA 91203
6.
0-T-634
Cleaner
1,1,1, Trichlorothane
BF Goodrich,
500 S. Main Street,

Akron, OH 44318
BT03019
ground when practical. Current return leads

larger should not be connected directly to
the airplane structure, but should be connected to
a electrical bonding stud attached to the structure,
This method prevents damage should a faulty connection induce high current flow through the conment to
4 AWG
or
nection. A maximum of four wire terminals may be

on an individual grounding stud. If two or
installed
grounded to an individual stud, each

a mechanically sound connection
and meet applicable maximum resistance values.
Component case electrical bonding and current
more
wires are
wire must form
return
bonding
are
separate, with the connections
made to separate ground studs. As a general rule

and precaution, note the power return configuration
before removal of
right configuration
component, and
is used
ensure
the
during installation.
20-03-00
Page 2
Jun 20/91
vendor
PRODUCTS WHICH CONFORM TO THE REQUIREMENTS
OF
SPECIFICATION
MAY
BE
USED
EVEN THOUGH NOT INCLUDED IN THE CHART.
Only
the
basic
number
of
each
specification
is
listed. No attempt has been made to update the listing to the latest revision. It is the responsibility of
the technician
of
or
the
mechanic to determine the current
applicable specification prior
to
usage of the product listed. This can be done by

contacting the vendor of the product to be used.
The recommended materials listed in Chart 1

or
cations. GENERIC OR LOCALLY MANUFACTURED
revision
RECOMMENDED MA TERIALS
meeting federal, military
provided for reference only and are not specifiearly required by Beech Aircraft Corporation. Any
product conforming to the specification may be
used subject to availability. The products included
in these charts have been tested and approved for
aviation usage by Beech Aircraft Corporation, by
the vendor or compliance to the applicable specifiare
as
specifications
A14
ci~echcraft
BONANZA SERIES
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
2000-610-32
Use of Stainless Steel Wire Brush On Aluminum (With Pilot)
Figure
provide
MAINTENANCE
ELECTRICAL BONDING
tion
PRACTICES
to
means
prevent
of
adequate
concentration
ventila-
of
that
harmful vapors. The procedures

follow describe preparation of the vari-
METAL SURFACE PREPARATION AND
ous
ELECTRICAL BONDING
cal
preparation for electrical bonding requires

complete removal of anodic film, grease, oil,
paint, lacquer, metal finishes and other resistive
coatings from an area slightly larger than the bonding surface. A clean, smooth, properly contoured
electrical bonding surface should be obtained, while
removing the least amount of metal possible.
types of
bonding.
metal surfaces for electri-
Surface
the
ALUMINUM SURFACES
Remove any nonsoluble protective finishes or

a.
corrosion from an area slightly larger than the area
to be bonded
(minimum of
fine sandpaper.
.25
inch) by sanding with
NOTE
Do not
use
sandpaper.
or
emery cloth
Use
or
NOTE
iron oxide
aluminum oxide
silicon carbide
only
sandpaper.
A stainless steel wire brush with
may be used to clean small

ure
areas
pilot
(Fig-
1).
WARNING
b.
When
with
working
solvents,
in
an
enclosed
cleaners
or
area
finishes,
Clean
MEK
the
bonding
(1, Chart 1) to
surface
remove
thoroughly
any oils
or
with
contami-
nants.
20-03-00
A14
Page 3
Jun 20/91
Ci;)eechcraR
BONANZA SERIES
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
BLIND GROUNDING STUD
NUT
LOCK
WASHER
WASHER
TERMINAL
(LIMIT TO 4)
STRUCTURE
2000-610-41
Typical Blind Ground Stud

Figure 2
NOTE
Do not touch the
e.
bonding surface
with
dry.
acids may
prevent adhesion of the alodine film or
cause corrosion,
bare hands.
c.
Body
oils
area
or
Shake the alodine solution
ously just prior to application,

bonding surface with a clean
sponge, brush
or
After the alodine has
bonding surface. Care must be taken

not to damage the alodine coating as it is still soft
when bonding.
(2, Chart 1) vigorapply to the

Scotch Brite pad,
NOTE
The
cloth.
bonding
bled within
ment.
surfaces must be
one
Once
assem-
hour of alodine treat-
dried,
softened before it
NOTE
alodine
can
be
must
be
effectively
bonding. If more than an hour

passed, soften the alodine by
applying wet alodine to the dried surused in
an
has
amber color. If the solution is coffee

colored, it has been contaminated.
face.
cleaning procedure if conalodine

has been applied to
taminated
the bonding surface.
Repeat
rinse the
not cover the
then
The alodine solution should have
changed color,
with clean, deionized water and gently wipe

Touch up any areas where the alodine does
the
f.
Install
the
component
being
electrically
bonded.
d.
Keep
the treated
area
wet with
alodine for
color
approximately 3 to 5 minutes until a yellow

develops. Should the alodine not change color, it is
an indication that the surface was not properly
cleaned.
g. Seal around the edges of the electrical bond

with conformal coat per MIL-I-46058 (3, Chart 1). If
assembly was originally protected by primer,

prime the assembly with primer (4, Chart 1) and
reapply the original finish as required.
the
20-03-00
Page
Jun 20/91
A14
~eechcraft
BONANZA SERIES
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
CHART 1
HARDWARE USED WITH GROUND STUDS
Structure
Screw,
bolt
Lock-Nut
Plain
Washer
Washer
Washer
Lock Washer
Lock Washer
Nut
C&D
MS35338
MS35338
Tinned
Copper
Terminal and
Alum.
Aluminum
Cad.
Cad.
Alloys
Plated
Plated
Steel
Steel
Alloy
Jumper
Alum.
Cad.
Cad.
Cad.
Alloy
Plated
Plated
Plated
Steel
Steel
Steel
Cad.
Steel,
Cad.
Cad.
Cad.
Cad.
Cadmium
Plated
Plated
Plated
Plated
Plated
Plated
Steel
Steel
Steel
Steel
Steel
Steel,
CRES
CRES
Cad.
Cad.
CRES
CRES
Steel
Steel
Plated
Plated
Steel
Steel
Steel
None
None
None
None
(corrosionresistant)
8T03020
USE TITANIUM OR CRES STEEL

SCXEW OR BOLT ABOVE 330 F.
USE CAD. PLATED STEEL

SCREW OR BOLT BELOW 330 F.
WASHER STEEL LIGHT

SERIES PLATED
SEAL AFTER
INSTALLATION
1-1/2 DIAMETER
CLEANED AREA
CLEAN TO BASE
METAL AREA 1-1/2
DIAMETER OF
TERMINAL
LOCK-WASHER
BONDING
JUMPER
PLATED STEEL,
CRES STEEL
OR TITANIUM
STRUCTURE
SELF-LOCKING NUT
OR SELF-LOCKING
PLATE NUT
2000-610-33
CRES Steel
or
Titanium Electrical Bonding
Figure 3
20-03-00
A14
Page 5
Jun 20/91
Ci~eechcraft
BONANZA SERIES
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
NOTE
The
bond
must
area
refinished
be
within 24 hours of electrical
bonding
to
preserve the integrity of the bond. If

the bond involves a structural compoit must
nent,
be fillet sealed
the
at
edges or seams with sealant (5, Chart

1) to prevent moisture from entering
and deteriorating the electrical bonding
surfaces. Refer to Chapter 20-08-00
for information on airplane finishes.
CORROSION-RESISTANT (CRES) STEEL
SURFACES
Remove all grease and oil from the electrical
bonding surface with cleaner (6, Chart 1).
Remove all
bonding
paint
surface with
Lightly
e.
Use cleaner solvent
electrical
bonding
cadmium
lacquer from the electrical

MEK (1, Chart 1).
or
f.
Install
the
electrically
edges or seams with sealant (5, Chart 1) to

prevent moisture from entering and deteriorating
the electrical
surfaces.
bonding
TYPICAL BLIND GROUND STUD
(FIGURE 2)
Installation of
accomplished
as
blind
typical
stud may be
ground
follows:
MS35338
Use
sur-
being
component
washers
on
all
bonding/grounding
Their
function
is
to
tight connection with plain or

self-locking nuts under conditions
ensure a
surfaces time to
bonding
lock
electrical
where thermal
the
with
at the
thoroughly dry.
Install
being
component
connections.
d.
wipe dry
g. After a good bond has been verified with the

resistance check procedures, it must be fillet sealed
bolted
Allow the electrical
to clean the
bonded.
faces.
c.
1)
NOTE
from the steel
plating
and
surface.
clean rag.
not to remove any zinc or
care
Chart
(6,
surfaces
NOTE
Use
bonding
ELECTRICAL BONDING EXAMPLES
a.
b.
sand the electrical
d.
electrically
may
expansion of
the
screw
occur.
bonded.
The sidewalls of the
a.
NOTE
The
bond
area
within 24 hours of
the
integrity
involves
must
refinished
be
bonding
to preserve
of the bond. if the bond
structural
component,
must be fillet sealed at the
it
edges or
1) to pre-
(5, Chart
entering and detethe
electrical
bonding surriorating
faces. Refer to Chapter 20-08-00 for
information on airplane finishes.
seams
with sealer
vent moisture from
mounting
hole must be
clean and free of all chemical films, grease and

paint (cleaning of the upper and lower surfaces is
not
required).
b.
Ensure the blind
ground
stud is of sufficient
size to distribute the current it will be
subjected
to.
CRES STEEL OR TITANIUM ELECTRICAL
BONDING
(FIGURE 3)
a.
Prepare
the
electrical
surfaces
bonding
as
outlined under METAL SURFACE PREPARATION

STAINLESS STEEL AND TITANIUM SURFACES
AND ELECTRICAL BONDING in this chapter.
Remove all oil and grease from the electrical

bonding surface with cleaner solvent (6, Chart 1).
distance will
b.
a.
b.
Remove all
bonding
c.
paint
or
from the electrical
lacquer
(1, Chart 1).
surface with MEK
Allow the electrical
oughly dry.
20-03-00
Page 6
Jun 20/91
bonding
surface to thor-
Screw size: Use
permit.
substituted for the No.

meet
edge
CRES steel
c.
Use
distance
10
or
screw
No. 6
screw
requirements.
screw must
1/4-inch
No. 10
A No. 8
where
screw
edge
may be
if necessary to
A Titanium or
be used.
diameter fastener for
100-amp
current returns.
A14
~3eechcraft
BONANZA SERIES
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
SEAL AFTER
INSTALLATION
1-1/2 DIAMETER
OF CLEANED AREA
CAD. PLATED STEEL

SCREW OR BOLT
STEEL WASHER
PLATED
CLEAN TO BASIC
METAL AREA 1-1/2
DIAMETER OF
WASHER
LOCK-WASHER
ALUMINUM
WASHER
BONDING
JUMPER
ALUMINUM
STRUCTURE
WASHER (ALCLAD)
NOT USED WITH
PLATE NUT
SELF-LOCKING NUT
OR SELF-LOCKING
PLATE NUT
2000-610-35
Aluminum Electrical Bonding
Figure
d.
Use
5/16-inch diameter fastener for 200-
amp current returns.

e.
Use
an
Use
screw
for
an
h.
MS35206
plated
or
steel
screw
steel
or
titanium
lock
electrical
connections.
Their
where the maximum
(FIGURE 4)
washers
on
all
bonding/grounding
function
Prepare
the
electrical
surfaces
bonding
as
is
to

where thermal expansion of the screw
ensure a
may
required
F..
a.
MS35338
is
exceeds 6000 F..
ALUMINUM ELECTRICAL BONDING
CRES
NOTE
Use
sealing
for
F..
applications above 330"
bolted
No
temperature
MS35206 cad
applications below 3300

f.
occur.
AND ELECTRICAL BONDING in this

b.
Screw size: Use
distance will
permit.
c.
distance
edge
Use
l/binch
10
chapter.
screw
A No. 8 or No. 6
substituted for the No.

meet
No. 10
screw
where
screw
edge
may be
if necessary to
requirements.
100-amp
current returns.
g. Use an MS21042L self-locking nut, or a selflocking nutplate (MS21047L or MS21069L) to retain

the
screw.
d.
Use
5/16-inch
diameter fastener for 200-
20-03-00
Page
A14
Jun 20/91
~eechcraft
BONANZA SERIES
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
CLEAN TO BASE METAL

1-1/2 CLAMP WIDTH AND
INSIDE OF CLAMP
SEAL AFTER
INSTALLATION
1-1/2 DIAMETER
CLEANED AREA
STRUCTURE
CLEAN AREA OF
CLAMP TAB THAT
TOUCHES TERMINAL
TO BASIC METAL
WASHER
NUT AND WASHER

SEAL AFTER INSTALLATION
1-1/2 DIAMETER CLEANED AREA
2000-610-36
Tubing Clamp to Bonding Jumper Electrical Bonding

Figure 5
NOTE
c.
MS35336 lock washers on all

bolted
electrical
bondinglgrounding
Their
function
is
to
connections.
ensure a tight connection with plain or
where thermal expansion of the screw
Use
e.
Use
d.
MS35206 CRES steel
screw
above
Use
clamps of
the
same
tube material to avoid
BONDING JUMPER ACROSS TUBING CLAMP

ELECTRICAL BONDING
(FIGURE 6)
an
MS21042L
self-locking nut, or a selfor MS21069L) to retain
locking nutplate (MS21047L

the
an
dissimilar metal contact.
occur.
may
Use
3300 F..
Accomplish
with
screw,
a.
electrical
bonding jumpers
Prepare
the
bonding
across
electrical
of
tubing segments
clamps
as
follows:
surfaces
bonding
as
TUBING CLAMP TO BONDING JUMPER
ELECTRICAL BONDING
AND ELECTRICAL BONDING in this
(FIGURE 5)
b.
Accomplish electrical bonding
bonding jumpers
as
of
tubing clamps
with
follows:
b.
Use
an
below 3300 F..
MS35206
cad
plated
steel
screw
an
MS35206
cad
plated
steel
screw
screw
above
below 3300 F..

c.
a.
Prepare the electrical bonding surfaces as
Use
chapter.
Use
an
MS35206 CRES steel
330" F..
d
Install
screw
e.
an
AN960 cad
plated
washer under the
head and nut.
Use
an
MS21042L
self-locking
cad
plated
steel nuts.
20-03-00
Page 8
Jun 20/91
A14
~)eedlcraft
BONANZA SERIES
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
TAB WELDED OR
BRAZED TO TUBING
CLEAN TAB TO
BASIC METAL AND
SEAL AFTER
INSTALLATION.
II
CLEAN TAB TO
BASIC METAL AND
SEAL AFTER
INSTALLATION.
2000-610-37
Bonding Jumper Across Tubing Clamp Electrical Bonding

Figure 6
A14
20-03-00
Page 9
Jun 20/91
~)eechcraft
BONANZA SERIES
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
LOCK WASHER F
LOCK NUT
TERMINAL
(LIMIT TO 4)
WASHER D
WASHER C
PLAIN NUT
WASHER B
STRUCTURE
WASHER
LOCK
WASHER E
SCREW
OR BOLT
2000-610-39
Typical Ground Stud Electrical Bonding

Figure 7
CLEAN TO BASE METAL

BONDING/GROUNDING AREA
AND CHEMICALLY TREAT
THIS AREA OF STRUCTURE AND

BACK OF TAB MUST BE CLEANED
AND CHEMICALLY TREATED BEFORE
RIVETING TAB TO STRUCTURE.
SEAL AREA AFTER ASSEMBLY.
NAS
1919M04S RIVET
(MAINTAIN 60 RIVET SPACING;

RIVETS TO PENETRATE
SHEET ONLY.)
FACE
2000-610-42
Electrical Bonding of Ground Tabs

Figure 8
20-03-00
Page 10
Jun 20/91
A14
~)eechcraft
BONANZA SERIES
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
where thermal
TYPICAL GROUND STUD ELECTRICAL BONDING
(FIGURE 7)
may
electrical
Accomplish
current returns
as
Screw size: Use
a.
distance will
bonding
permit.
No. 10
A No. 8
substituted for the No. 10

meet
b.
edge
Use
of
ground
studs for
follows:
or
screw
No. 6
screw
where
screw
1/4-inch
if necessary to
100-amp
current returns.
c.
Use
5/16-inch diameter
fastener for 200-
ELECTRICAL BONDING OF GROUND TABS
a.
Prepare the electrical bonding surfaces as
b.
Use
washers
on
an
NAS1919M04S
rivet
to
attach
the
tab.
Use
ground
NOTE
lock
compatible
(FIGURE 8)
c.
MS35338
screw
Refer to Chart 2 for a listing of

d.
hardware used with grounding studs.
ground
Use
the
edge
may be
distance requirements.
expansion of
occur.
minimum of three rivets to attach the
tab.
ail
NOTE
electrical
bolted
bondinglgrounding
Their
function
is
to
connections.
If it is necessary to remove the tab for

any reason, the surface must be recleaned to remove all films.

ensure a
ITEM TO BE BONDED
THROUGH MOUNTING FEET
LOCK
WASHER
CLEAN MOUNTING STRUCTURE
1/4
TO BASE METAL
TIMES THE AREA OF THE
CLEAN
MOUNTING FEET.
THE PORTION OF THE
FEET IN CONTACT WITH
THE MOUNTING STRUCTURE.
REFINISH AFTER INSTALLATION
1/4 TIMES THE AREA CLEANED.
NOTE
ON
ITEMS THAT HAVE THE BOLTS SPACED MORE THAN 6 INCHES

IT IS ONLY NECESSARY TO CLEAN THE AREA 2 INCHES
ON EACH SIDE OF THE ATTACH BOLTS OR SCREWS.
APART,
2000-610-43
Electrical Bonding of
A14
Equipment Installed
Figure 9
With
Mounting Feet
20-03-00
Page 11
Jun 20/91
~eechcraft
BONANZA SERIES
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
REFINISHED
AREA
MOUNTING
LOCK
BA~E
WAS~ER
BONDING
STRAP
SHOCK
MOUNT
CLEANED
AREA
-,i I
LOCK
WASHER
MOUNTING
STRUCTURE
CLEAN THE MOUNTING

STRUCTURE TO THE
BASE METAL
1/2
TIMES THE WIDTH OF
THE BONDING STRAP
AND THE ATTACHING
BONDING STRAP SCREWS.
REFINISH AFTER
INSTALLATION
1/2
TIMES THE AREA CLEANED.
NOTE
INSTALL BONDING STRAP UNDER SHOCK MOUNT PAD
IN SUCH A MANNER THAT THE STRAP DOES NOT
ALTER SHOCK MOUNT FUNCTION.
Electrical
20-03-00
12
Jun 20/91
2000-610-44
Bonding of Equipment Installed With Shock Mounts

Figure 10
Page
A14
CST)eechcraft
BONANZA SERIES
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
used

This
airplane uses carbon steel control cables of

multiple wire construction with the number of
strands varying according to the diameter of the
cable. The carbon steel wire is helically twisted into
strands and the strands wound about other strands
forming
the flexible carbon steel cable.
The
PRODUCTS WHICH CONFORM TO THE REQUIREOF
MENTS
SPECIFICATION
MAY
BE
USED

the
basic
number
of
each
specification
is
as
specifications
provided for reference only and are not specifically required by Beech Aircraft Corporation. Any
or
to
to
Only
meeting federal, military
the
specification may be
availability.
products included
subject
the vendor or compliance to the applicable specifiproduct conforming
CONTROL CABLES AND PULLEYS
vendor
are
the technician
revision
of
or
the
to

CHART 1
MATERIAL
1.
Lubricant
SPECIFICATION
MIL-G-23827
PRODUCT
VENDOR
Grease
American Oil Co.,

165 N. Canal,
Supermil
A722823
Chicago,
Royco
27A
Royal
IL 60606
Lubricants Co.,
River Road,
Hanover, NJ 07936
Aeroshell Grease 7
Shell Oil Co.,

1 Shell Plaza,
P.O. Box 2463,
Houston, TX 77001
BP Aero Grease 318
BP
Trading Limited,
Moore Lane,
Britannic House,
London E.C. 2
2.
Corrosion
MIL-C-16173
Petrotect Grade 2
England
Pennsylvania Refining
Preventive
Co.,
Compound
1686 Lisbon Road,

Cleveland, OH 44104
Braycote
130
Bray Oil Co.,

Los Angeles,
CA
8T01241
Ai4
20-04-00
Page 1
Jun 20/91
Ci~echcraR
BONANZA SERIES
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
CONTROL CABLES AND PULLEYS

CONTROL CABLE SYSTEM INSPECTION
(FIGURE I)
Inspect the control cables for incorrect routing, fraying and twisting. Look for interference with
adjacent airplane structure, equipment, wiring,
plumbing and other control cables.
a.
b. Monitor control cable movement for freedom,

looseness and full travel.
Visually inspect
c.
tion, cracks
WARNING
When
control
cables,
inspecting
always wear gloves to avoid injury
from frayed or broken wires,
When
control cable is removed from
the
airplane, the cable should be

dipped in MIL-C-16173 corrosion preventive (2, Chart 1). Excess corrosion
preventive may be removed by wiping
with
e.
wires
fdllows:
swaged fittings for

fitting.
Locate any control cable broken

as follows:
1.
Inspect the
pulleys by passing a
distor-
control cables
or
corroded
near
fairlead
cloth
along the length of the

cable. If a snag is found, closely examine the cable
to determine the extent of the damage as shown in
Figure
and
as
all
broken wires at the
d. Turnbuckles should have the proper thread

exposure and be correctly safety wired.
clean cloth.
Inspect the control cable system
or
1.
2. Any suspect cable should be removed

placed in a loop position and checked for addi-
tional broken wires
as
shown in
Figure
1.
BROKEN WIRES ARE VISIBLE WHEN

CABLE IS REMOVED AND BENT
BROKEN WIRES ARE NORMALLY

DETECTABLE BY WIPING A
CLOTH ALONG THE CABLE
DO NOT BEND THE CABLE INTO

A LOOP SMALLER THAN 50
TIMES THE CABLE DIAMETER
2000-610-61
Typical Control Cable With Broken Wires

Figure 1
20-04-00
Page
Jun 20/91
A14
ci3~echcraft
BONANZA SERIES
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
cable is installed in its normal position in the airplane. If only a part of the control cable is installed
NOTE
Individual broken wires
in
and
primary
are
acceptable
secondary
in
control
cables at random locations when there

are no
on
for
remove
of
corrosion.
with
If
the control cable, form it into
(FIGURE 2)
broken
Inspect all control
loop,
and
The interior of all turnbuckles should

grease
tection.
(1, Chart 1) for corrosion pro-
When stored in coil
Control cable pulleys are installed

along the control cables where a
change of direction is needed.
b.
Inspect all control cable pulley bearings for
smooth rotation, freedom from flat spots and foreign material.
or
in
coil.
form, the coil inside diameter
should not be less than 150 times the control cable

diameter, or bent in a radius of not less than 75
times the control cable diameter. Coils should not
be flattened, twisted or folded during storage. Storage requirements should apply until the control
A14
follows:
embedded in the grooves.
CONTROL CABLE STORAGE
straight
as
a.
Inspect all control cable pulleys for roughness,
sharp edges and the presence of foreign material
filled with MIL-G-23827
Control cables should be stored
pulleys
NOTE
NOTE
or
cable
necessary,
check the center strand for corrosion. Replace any

control cable that shows evidence of corrosion.
be coated
control cable storage requirements

portion of the control cable.
to the uninstalled
CONTROL CABLE PULLEY INSPECTION
any three foot segment of cable.
evidence
assembly,
than three broken wires
Inspect the control cables
3.
wires
more
an
apply
c.
Inspect
alignment.
all
control
cable
pulleys
for proper
I"spect the control cable pulley brackets and

guards for damage, misalignment and looseness.
d
e.
Control cable
pulleys
which turn for
short
distance must be rotated periodically to provide

new bearing surface for the control cable.
20-04-00
Page 3
Jun 20/91
aeschcraft
BONANZA SERIES
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
WEAR
MARK
EXCESSIVE CABLE
TENSION
PULLEY MISALIGNMENT
WEAR
MARK
PULLEY TOO LARGE FOR CABLE
CABLE MISALIGNMENT
FROZEN BEARING
NORMAL CONDITION
2000-610-60
Control Cable Pulley Wear Patterns
Figure 2
20-04-00
4
Page
Jun 20/91
A14
Ci~eechcraft
BONANZA SERIES
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
BEARINGS
b.
Place
two
table under the

This
contains
chapter
bearing
installation
and
removal information.
1. The
on
the
bearing
at least
hydraulic press
Figure
1/2-inch thicker
shown in
removal and installation tool
bearing
as
width.
bearing
Center
the
on
bearing housing
supports should be
than the
c.
supports
bearing and installaapproximately 1/8-inch smaller

diameter of the bearing outer race.
outer race. The
tion tool should be
as
than the outside
vendor
specifications
are provided for reference only and are not specifically required by Beech Aircraft Corporation. Any
the vendor or compliance to the applicable specifimeeting federal, military
or
1~7
CAUTION
The
ing
OF
SPECIFICATION
MAY
BE
USED
in
remain
direct
bearing being

hydraulic press plunger and bearremoval and installation tool should
Align
the
bearing
the basic number of each specification is

the technician or mechanic to determine the current
apply pressure
ing housing.
of
the
applicable specification prior to

the
bearing removal and

hydraulic press plunger and
force the bearing from the bear-
installation tool with the
revision
with
and the
Only
alignment
removed at all times.
to
MECHANICAL PRESS BEARING REMOVAL
(FIGURE 1)
Remove the
bearing housing
from
the
air-
plane.
BEARINGS
b.
HYDRAULIC PRESS REARING REMOVAL
Remove
the
bearing housing
from the
the
bearing outer
bearing width.
air-
c.
Center
an
race
center
inner diameter
and
bearing
diameter than the the
plane.
a
bearing
larger than
1/2-inch deeper than the
bearing housing,
the
(FIGURE 1)
a.
On
removal socket with
removal socket smaller in
bearing
outer race.
CHART 1
MATERIAL
1.
Cleaner
SPECIFICATION
TT-M-261
VENDOR
PRODUCT
Methyl
Ethyl
Obtain
locally
Loctite
Corp.,
Ketone
2.
Primer
Locquic
Primer "T"
705 N. Mountain Rd.,

Newington, CT 06111
3.
Retaining
Compound
609
Loctite
Corp.,

Newington, CT 06111
BT01240
20-05-00
Page
A14
Jun 20/91
~eechcraft
BONANZA SERIES
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
LOAD MUST BE
APPLIED TO OUTER
REMOVAL AND
INSTALLATION
BEARING
TOOL
ONLY.
RACE
NUT
WASHER
HOUSING
--7
SOCKET
BEARING
SUPPORT
HOUSING
SOCKET
WASHER
BEARING
BOLT
APPLY THE INSTALLING OR REMOVAL
LOAD TO THE OUTER RACE OF THE BEARING.
HYDRAULIC
REMOVAL
OR
INSTALLATION
TOOL
MECHANICAL PRESS METHOD
PRESS METHOD
2000-6 i 0-49
Bearing Removal
Figure 1
d.
Install
washer and bolt
through
one
of the
sockets, through the center of the bearing, then
through
e.
f.
opposite socket
the
Install
washer and nut
Tighten
as
the nut
on
shown in
on
Figure
CIUI1ON
1.
When cleaning bearing surfaces, never

allow solvent to enter the bearing.
Never touch the bearing or bearing
housing surfaces with bare hands. Use
a clean cloth to cover the bearing to
prevent contamination after they have
been cleaned.
the bolt threads.
the bolt until the pressure

bearing from the bearing
is sufficient to release the
housing.
BEARING HOUSING INSPECTION
Coat the surfaces where a retaining comis to be applied with primer (2, Chart i). This
includes the bearing outer surface, bearing housing
mating surface and the bearing housing retention
b.
Inspect
the
bearing
cracks, warpage
or
housingto-bearing
housing for any grooves,

hole elongation. The bearing
contact surface must be smooth
pound
flange
and uniform,
if
applicable.
CAUTION
I U--I
REARING INSTALLATION USING RETAINING

COMPOUND
a.
Clean the outer surface of the
with MEK
(1, Chart 1) and wipe dry.
bearing
race
Ensure that
oil
bearing
no
primer is applied
grooves
or
to the
lubrication
ports.
20-05-00
Page 2
Jun 20/91
A14
Ci3~echcraft
BONANZA SERIES
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
BEARING INSTALLATION BY STAKING
NOTE
(FIGURE 2)
All cadmium, zinc, corrosion-resistant

and anodized steel, including plastic
items,
be
must
b.
proper adhesion
pound (3, Chart 1).
e.
Allow the
primer (2,
least 30 minutes at
room
Chart
1)
to air
dry
for at
temperature.
on
the
d.
g.
area
h.
bearing housing.
Apply retaining compound (3, Chart 1) to the

bearing and the bearing housing,
retaining compound
must cure before the
is put into service. Curing may be

one of the following:
accom-
with
Allow the
1.
remain at
to be
are
the
supports.
bearing housing
was
previously staked,
stakes should be centered between the
new
stakes. If
existing
a new
bearing housing
used, the stake pattern should be the

the old
one on
between the
bearing
plished
and bearing housing on two

Figure 2, if both sides of the
staked. The inner bearing race
bearing
shown in
is
being
same as
the
bearing housing.
the
Using
The
as
If the
hydraulic or mechanical pressure

method shown in Figure 1, apply pressure to the
bearing until it is firmly seated in the bearing housing. Pressure on the bearing must be applied in
direct alignment to the bearing housing for the bearing to seat properly.
f.
or
must not touch the
applied.
bearing housing.
mechanical pressure
1, apply pressure to the
hydraulic
Figure
is firmly seated
Place the
bearing
Apply a thin coat of the retaining compound

(3, Chart l)to the bearing and the bearing housing
mating surfaces where the primer (2, Chart 1) was
the
in the bearing housbearing until it

ing. Pressure must be applied in direct alignment to
the bearing housing for the bearing to seat properly.
supports,
d.
bearing
on
the
Using
c.
retaining compound (3, Chart 1)

may be applied before or after bearing
installation in the bearing housing.
The
Center the
bearing
method shown in
NOTE
e.
Center the
a.
primed to assure
of the retaining com-
room
bearing
and
bearing housing
to
temperature for 24 hours without

parts,
any movement of the
2.
Heat the bearing and bearing housing to
275" ~100 F. and maintain that temperature for 15
minutes only.
CHART 2
RECOMMENDED STAKES FOR BEARINGS
Bearing O.D.
NOTE
a ring stake is used, combined
length should be 25 percent of
bearing circumference.
When
total
the
pi,,takes should be located .030 .010-inch
from the outer diameter of the
bearing
on
the bear-
ing housing.
f.
deep
Pin stakes should

to retain
staked
g.
on
bearings
be .010 to .032-inch
bearing housing
is
both sides.
The number of
housing
only
when the
should be
pin
as
stakes around
bearing
indicated in Chart 2.
bearing has been secured in the housing

by staking or by the use of a retaining compound,
After the
relubricate with the proper lubrication and reinstall

in the airplane.
Number of Stakes
I ll~1
CAUTION
up to .734-inch
.735-inch to .984-inch
.985-inch to 1.234-inches
bearing should slip or move in

bearing housing, the bearing must
If the
BT01160
A14
the
be removed and recleaned. The bear-
ing housing must be recleaned. Examine the bearing for any damage and
reinstall in the bearing housing.
20-05-00
Page 3
Jun 20/91
i3eechcraft
BONANZA SERIES
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
OUTER
BEARING
RACE
HOUSING
TO
.025 R
.030
.010
~.OIO-INCH
-iiJ
.010 TO
.032 INCH
SUPPORT
INNER
BEARING
RACE
STAKE
NOTE
DO
NOT
SUPPORT AGAINST
INNER BEARING RACE
DURING
STAKING.
2000-610-50
Bearing Staking
Figure 2
20-05-00
Page 4
Jun 20/91
414
Cil)eechcraft
BONANZA SERIES
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
TUBE AND HOSE ASSEMBLIES AND
e.
FITTINGS
Never stretch
hose to make
connection.
The hose material must be compatible with

applicable system fluids. Substitution of a hose
material that is not compatible with the system fluid
f.
the
This chapter contains information to remove, maintain and install hose and tube assemblies and fit-
tings. Although all hoses and tubes may not be specifically identified herein, the basic maintenance
practices normally apply. Any handling and installation of individual system hoses, tubes and fittings is
identified in the appropriate system chapter.
The
of tube assemblies used in the airaluminum or steel machine formed tubing
majority
plane
are
assemblies.
used in areas of the airplane where a
flexible line is more suitable for installations and
Hoses
are
freedom of movement is necessary.
will contaminate the system.
REMOVAL OF TUBE AND HOSE
ASSEMBLIES
Tube and hose assemblies may be removed
lows:
a.
Relieve all
b.
Disconnect both
d.
ing maintenance, repair or servicing

pneumatic operated system.
on
any fluid
clamps securing
hose
or
tube
the tube
plug
the hose
or
or
tube
Remove the tube
or
hose
assembly
and tag
both ends to aid in reinstallation.
HOSE ASSEMBL Y INSTALLA TION

Hose assemblies may be installed
as
follows:
NOTE
CAUTION
systems
or
or
CAMON1
that
Remove all
identify
Observe all WARNINGS, CAUTIONS and NOTES

throughout this maintenance manual when perform-
Verify
pressure.
ends of the
assembly and immediately cap

hose ends and fittings.
c.
fol-
assembly.
TUBING, HOSE AND FITTINGS
If
which
hose
new
assembly
is
be
to
installed, the hose assembly must be

clean, the correct length, clear of
operate
pneumatics under pressure are fully depressurized before

opening or disconnecting a tubing or
from fluids
system
as
or
obstructions and material

with the
compatible
system fluid.
hose.
a.
The
and
list of maintenance
following
vided
as
aid for
an
practices is prohandling, removing, installing
repairing tubing and
hoses.
Cap
plug all disconnected tubing and hose

and fittings immediately to prevent con-
or
assemblies
tamination of the system.

b.
Visually
check
for
cleanliness, evidence of
contamination and obstructions

tion of tube
or
prior
this
have
Any hose
protective
and checked for obstruction

d.
When
prior
connecting tube assemblies, do not

assembly to the installed position. If
mismatch between the male and female fittings

should result, see Figure 1 for the allowable mismatch.
e.
f.
to installation,
force the tube

a
After
ensure
and tube assemblies that did not

covers installed must be cleaned
outlined
assembly
to
fittings.
Torque the "B" nuts to

torque specified in Chart 1.
no
c.
Connect the "8" nuts of the hose
e.
d.
practices
maintenance
TUBE AND HOSE ASSEMBLIES

MAINTENANCE PRACTICES in
chapter.
th, proper
to reconnec-
hose assemblies.
heading
AND FITTINGS
b.
a.
Observe the
under the
torquing
the
the "B" nuts,
fittings using
inspect
the
the hose to
that the hose is not under tension and that
indication of
twisting
is present.
Inspect
the hose for proper
Inspect
the hose for freedom to
length.
expand
and
Co"tact.
Inspectthe hose forclearance to all structure.

inadequate clearance exists between the hose
and structure, protection must be provided for the
hose to prevent damage from chafing.
g.
If
20-06-00
Page
A14
Jun 20/91
BONANZA SERIES
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
TUBE INSTALLA TION
d.
Install the
packing (O-ring)
is
assembly
tube
new
The
be
to
the
installed, the tube assembly must be

clean, the correct length, clear of
obstructions and manufactured of the
e.
correct material.
under the
AND
MAINTENANCE PRACTICES in
FlTTINGS
this
chapter.
b.
Inspect
tube
ends,
Make
fittings
Check
d.
alignment
1.
and fit of the tube
Place the tube
and
the tube
2.
tighten
assembly.
assembly
1.
The free tubing end must

1/32-inch of the fitting per every
length as shown in Figure 1.
4.
e.
to
aligned
antiseize
apply the proper
com-
fittings.
assembly
the
on
the "B" nuts to the torque values

Chart 1.
tighten
and
fittings
specified
in
fittings
Lubricate
may be installed
the
male
as
follows:
the
fitting,
system
of
backup ring
packing sparingly
or petrolatum (AN-P-51, Vaseline).
fluid
by
sud-
Holding
turning,
the nut with
in
turning
rotate the
wrench to prevent it
in an additional 1-1/2
fitting
fitting in the
than
no more
one
by
proper direction
additional turn.
h
Holding the fitting, turn the nut down tightly
against the boss. Slight extrusion of the ring around
the backup ring is acceptable.
NONPOSITIONING TYPE FITTING

INSTALLATION
may be installed
Nonpositioning type fittings
fol-
as
Install the nut
(AN6289)
on
the
Install the teflon backup
bore of the nut.
20-06-00
Page 2
Jun 20/91
packing with
petrolatum (AN-P-51, Vaseline).
a
Lubricate the
Install the
c.
Thread the
tightly
d.
on
in the
packing
fitting
the system fluid
fitting
or
thread relief.
into the boss until it bottoms
the boss.
Tighten
the
fitting
to
the
specified torque
fitting
Pipe
thread
a.
Apply
1.
be installed
fittings may
as
teflon tape to the threads
Start tape at
or
close to
follows:
as
follows:
narrow
end of
threads.
until the
nut is clear of the thread relief,

c.
be detected
PIPE THREAD FITTING INSTALLATION
with the
threads
and
b.
can
value.
FLUID LINE FITTING INSTALLATION
a.
point
lows:
lengthwise within 1/32-inch per every 10

tube length as shown in Figure 1.
Install the tube
Fluid line
the
The free end of the tube must match the
If necessary,
pound
f.
be
10 inches of
cone
inches of
nut
den increase in torque.
g.
assembly in the proper

coupling nut at one end of
3.
fitting
fitting into the boss with the

fitting until the packing contacts
turns. Position the
within
tube
with the
This
from
opposite end of the tube must be

degrees of parallel with the fitting as
Figure
pushed
NOTE
properly
assembly.
The
within two
shown in
one
is
are
follows before installation:
position
packing
boss.
bends.
that the
certain
with
compatible
the lower threaded section of the fit-
Install the
turning
damage, particularly at
Damaged tube
replaced or repaired.
and
installed before connection of the tube
as
f.
be
Turn the nut down until the
the tube for
fittings,
assemblies should be
c.
packing must
system fluid.
firmly against
ting.
Observe the maintenance practices outlined

heading TUBE AND HOSE ASSEMBLIES
a.
the thread relief.
NOTE
NOTE
If
on
Wrap the tape around the fitting in the

Wrap clockwise for right
hand threaded fittings. Wrap counterclockwise for
left hand threaded fittings.
2.
direction of the threads.
ring
in the counter-
A14
~-)eecEacraft
BONANZA SERIES
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
ra
MAXIMUM
ALLOWABLE
1/32 INCH PER
10 INCHES OF
TUBE LENGTH
MEASURE
MISMATCH WITH
FREE END CLEAR
OF FITTING
MAXIMUM
ALLOWABLE
1/32 INCH PER
lo INCHES OF
TUBE LENGTH
MAXIMUM
ALLOWABLE
1/32 INCH PER
10 INCHES OF
TUBE LENGTH
I t
2 DEG
MAX
ANGULAR MISMATCH
RADIAL MISMATCH
LENGTH MISMATCH
2000-610-63
Tubing Installation Mismatch

Figure 1
CHART 1
FLARED FITTING TORQUE CHART (INCH-POUNDS)
Hose
Tubing
Aluminum
Steel
Size
O.D.
Tubing
Tubing
Tubing
Tubing
Fitting
(Inches)
Flare
Flare
Flareless
Flareless
(Aluminum)
-8
-10
-12
Min
Max
80
125
250
350
500
700
90
135
180
270
450
700
1100
1200
900
900
1300
1350
100
150
200
300
500
800
1150
1400
1450
1500
75
80
100
100
200
360
390
600
600
90
100
130
130
240
400
430
900
900
900
90
135
180
270
450
700
1100
1200
1300
100
150
120
300
500
800
1150
1400
1450
1350
1500
1/4
11/2
600
3/4
-16
-20
-24
Max
65
1/4
5/16
3/8
1/2
5/8
-5
-6
Min
40
60
75
150
200
300
500
600
3/16
Oxygen
Max
Max
-4
Steel
Min
Min
-3
Aluminum
600
Min
Line
Max
Hose End
Fitting
Min
70
100
125
Max
70
85
100
210
300
500
700
100
120
180
250
420
480
850
1150
and
tighten
BT01080
3.
tape
Apply tension to the tape

shape of the threads.
to conform the
to the
4.
The
b.
Thread the
until it bottoms
fitting into the boss

tightly on the boss.
tape should overlap the previous

pipe thread
wrap of tape up to one-half inch to seal

fittings up to two inches in diameter.
A14
20-06-00
Page 3
Jun 20/91
~3eechcraft.
BONANZA SERIES
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
TUBE OUTSIDE
DIAMETER (D)
ADII IS MEASURED
BEND
TO TUBE CENTERLINE
TUBE CENTER
LINE
2000-610-64
Tube
Bending
Figure 2
TUBE DAMAGE LIMITS
a.
Replace steel tubes which have nicks or

deeper than 10 percent of tubing wall
scratches
thickness.
NOTE
Nicks and scratches not
exceeding
the
following limitations may be repaired

by polishing out the damaged area,
using
Finish
fine
grade
polishing
of emery cloth and oil.

with crocus cloth and
oil. Flush and clean all
grit from line
b.
or
Replace any aluminum tube which has nicks

scratches deeper than 20 percent of the tube
wall thickness.
c.
Replace any tubes which have dents deeper
than 5 percent of the tube outside diameter.
assembly.
20-06-00
Page 4
Jun 20/91
A14
Cj~eechcraR
BONANZA SERIES
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
CHART 2
TUBING BENDING LIMITS
DIAMETER
RADII
RADII
(D)
1/8
3/16
1/4
5/16
3/8
7/16
1/2
5/8
3/4
7/8
1
1-1/8
1-1/4
1-3/8
1-1/2
1-5/8
1-3/4
1-7/8
2
2-1/4
2-1/2
3
MILLIMETER
3.175
4.762
6.350
7.937
9.525
11.112
12.700
15.875
19.050
22.225
25.400
28.575
31.750
34.925
38.100
41.275
44.450
47.625
50.800
57.150
63.500
76.200
INCH
.375
.563
.750
.938
1.125
1.312
1.500
1.875
2.250
2.625
3.000
3.375
3.750
4.125
4.500
4.875
5.250
5.625
6.000
6.750
7.500
9.000
6D
4D
3D
INCH
ADDITIONAL BEND
RECOMMENDED BEND
TUBE OUTSIDE
MILLIMETER
9.525
14.286
19.050
23.811
28.575
33.336
38.100
47.625
57.150
66.675
76.200
85.725
95.250
104.775
114.300
123.825
133.350
142.875
152.400
171.450
190.500
228.600
INCH
MILLIMETER
.500
.750
1.000
1.250
1.500
1.750
2.000
2.500
3.000
3.500
4.000
4.500
5.000
5.500
6.000
6.500
7.000
7.500
8.000
9.000
10.000
12.000
12.700
19.048
25.400
31.748
38.100
44.448
50.800
63.500
76.200
88.900
101.600
114.300
127.000
139.700
152.400
165.100
177.800
189.500
203.200
228.600
254.000
304.800
INCH
.750
1 .1 25
1.500
1.875
2.250
2.625
3.000
3.750
4.500
5.250
6.000
6.750
7.500
8.250
9.000
9.750
10.500
11.250
12.000
13.500
15.000
18.000
MILLIMETER
19.050
28.572
38.100
47.622
57.150
66.672
76.200
95.250
114.300
133.350
152.400
171.450
190.500
209.550
228.600
147.650
266.700
285.750
304.800
342.900
381.000
457.200
079
A14
20-06-00
Page 5
Jun 20/91
ci~eechcraft
BONANZA SERIES
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
LOCKING DEVICES
DESCRIPTION AND
cent
plug.
OPERATION
boss
casing. Never lockwire bushing to

pins should be installed so that the
or
Cotter
head fits into the slot of the castellated nut and,
Except for specific instructions required to satisfy a

certain application, the following procedures are
standard methods used to install various locking
devices used in conjunction with bolts, screws and
unless
otherwise
should be bent
end flat
specified,
the stud
over
or
of
end
one
the
pin
bolt and the other
the flat of the nut.
against
nuts.
MAINTENANCE
LOCKING DEVICES
PRACTICES
SELF-LOCKING NUTS
Where
cedure
self-locking
applies:
nuts
are
used, the following pro-
LOCKWIRE INSTALLA TION PROCEDURES
2)
self-locking nuts, note the torque necesturn the self-locking nut before the self-
For
a.
sary to
locking
NOTE
nut is seated.
Figure 1 illustrates a typical lockwire

procedure. Although there are numerous lockwire operations performed on
the airplane, practically all are derived
from the basic examples shown in Fig-
Add the above torque to the value detailed in

the assembly instruction for the application. Use
b.
this
I AND
(FIGURES
new
value
the total
as
applied torque,
SLOTTED, STEEL LOCKNUTS (PREVAILING
ure
2.
TORQUE TYPE)
Effective
requires
locking
the full
of slotted, steel locknuts on bolts

engagement of all locknut threads.
Observe the
when
following guidelines
installing
lockwire:
The chamfered section of the locknut ID does not

exert force on the bolt. It is not necessary that the
bolt be flush with or protrude from the outer face of
the locknut,
a.
Newlockwire mustbe used.
b.
Use the
same
type and diameter
of lockwire
LOCKWIRE AND COTTER PIN
assembly. Except
employed during
the
wire
used on the airspecified,
and
corrosion
resistant
is
heat
plane power plant
REQUIREMENTS
steel wire of 0.025-inch diameter.
as
the initial
that
where otherwise
c.
tightening a castellated nut for cotter pin

installation, alignment of the slot must be obtained
without exceeding the maximum torque. If this is
not possible, replace the nut. After tightening the
When
nut to the recommended
be loosened to
slot in the nut
is not
torque, the
permit insertion
or
of
nut must not
cotter
lockwire hole in the bolt
correctly aligned
at the minimum
pin.
If the
torque value
the nut, screw or bolt should be further tightened to the next alignment position, but the maxi-
torque value given must not be exceeded.
Should
alignment still be impossible

exceeding the maximum torque, back off
one-half turn and retorque.
pins must never be reused. Ail

pins must fit snugly into drilled
holes in the bolts and studs for locking purposes.
Bushings and plugs must be lockwired to the adjaLockwire and cotter
manner
that
tighten and keep a part locked in place,

thus counteracting the natural tendency of the part
to loosen.
e.
Lockwire must
never
be overstressed. It will
break under vibrations if twisted too

lockwire shall be
pulled
tightly. The
being twisted, but
taut when
shall have minimum tension, if any, when secured.

f.
without
the nut
Lockwire must be installed in
to pre-
tends to
or screw
given,
mum
tight after installation

rubbing or vibration.
Lockwire must be
vent failure due to
Lockwire
engine,
or
ends which
ends
must
be
bent
structure, to avoid sharp
might present
safety
toward
the
projecting
or
hazard
or
vibrate
in the air stream.
lockwire and cotter
9 Internal wiring must not cross overorobstruct

flow passage when an alternate method can be
used.
20-07-00
Page
A14
Jun 20/91
~eechcraR
BONANZA SERIES
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
INSERT
THE UPPERMOST
WHICH POINTS
TOWARD THE SECOND
BOLT, THROUGH THE HOLE
WHICH LIES BETWEEN
THE NINE AND TWELVE
OCLOCK POSITIONS,
GRASP THE END OF THE
WIRE WITH A PAIR OF
WIRE,
POSITION THE HOLES.
PLIERS AND PULL THE

WIRE TIGHT.
INSERT PROPER
GAGE WIRE.
BRING THE FREE END OF

THE WIRE AROUND THE
BOLT HEAD IN A
COUNTER-CLOCKWISE
DIRECTION AND UNDER
THE END PROTRUDING
FROM THE BOLT HOLE.
TWIST THE WIRE IN A
COUNTER-CLOCKWISE
DIRECTION.
WRAP UPPER END

OF WIRE AND BEND
IT AROUND THE HEAD
THEN
OF THE BOLT.
UNDER THE OTHER END
OF THE WIRE.
BE
SURE WIRE IS TIGHT
AROUND HEAD.
GRASP THE WIRE BEYOND

THE TWISTED PORTION
AND TWIST THE WIRE
ENDS COUNTER-CLOCKWISE
UNTIL TIGHT.
DURING THE FINAL

TWISTING MOTION OF THE
PLIERS, BEND THE WIRE
DOWN AND UNDER THE
HEAD OF THE BOLT.
TWIST WIRE UNTIL

WIRE IS JUST SHORT
OF HOLE IN THE
SECOND BOLT.
KEEPING WIRE UNDER

TENSION, TWIST IN A
CLOCKWISE DIRECTION
UNTIL THE WIRE
TIGHT.
TIGHTENED
THE WIRE SHALL HAVE
APPROXIMATELY 7 TO 10
TWISTS PER INCH.
NEHWSI
CUT OFF EXCESS WIRE

WITH DIAGONAL CUTTERS
g
2000-6011- 18
RH Thread
20-07-00
Page 2
Jun 20/91
Lockwiring Procedure
Figure 1
A~4
~)eechcraft
BONANZA SERIES
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
EXAMPLE
EXAMPLE
EXAMPLE 3
EXAMPLE
FILLISTER HEAD SCREWS, SQUARE HEAD PLUGS, AND OTHER SIMILAR

PARTS ARE WIRED SO THAT THE LOOSENING TENDENCY OF EITHER PART IS
COUNTERACTED BY THE TIGHTENING OF THE OTHER PART.
THE DIRECTION
OF TWIST FROM THE SECOND TO THE THIRD UNIT IS COUNTER-CLOCKWISE TO
KEEP THE LOOP IN POSITION AGAINST THE HEAD OF THE BOLT.
THE WIRE
ENTERING THE HOLE IN THE THIRD UNIT WILL BE THE LOWER WIRE AND BY
MAKING A COUNTER-CLOCKWISE TWIST AFTER IT LEAVES THE HOLE, THE
LOOP WILL BE SECURED IN PLACE AROUND THE HEAD OF THAT BOLT.
BOLTS,
EXAMPLE
EXAMPLE
EXAMPLE
EXAMPLE
METHODS FOR WIRING VARIOUS STANDARD ITEMS.

WIRE MAY BE WRAPPED
OVER THE UNIT RATHER THAN AROUND IT WHEN WIRING CASTELLATED NUTS
OR ON OTHER ITEMS WHEN THERE IS A CLEARANCE PROBLEM.
6X~
EXAMPLE 9
THE METHOD FOR WIRING
BOLTS IN DIFFERENT PLANES.
NOTE THAT WIRE SHOULD
ALWAYS BE APPLIED SO
THAT TENSION IS IN THE
TIGHTENING DIRECTION.
EXAMPLE
RH Thread
A14
10
HOLLOW HEAD PLUGS

WIRED WITH THE TAB
BENT INSIDE THE HOLE
TO AVOID SNAGS AND
POSSIBLE INJURY TO
PERSONNEL.
EXAMPLE
II
CORRECT APPLICATION
OF SINGLE WIRE TO
CLOSELY SPACED MULTIPLE
GROUP.
2000-604-19
Lockwiring Examples
Figure 2
20-07-00
Page 3
Jun 20/91
Ci3~echcraft
BONANZA SERIES
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
LOCKWIRE HOLE ALIGNMENT
When nuts
c.
to be secured to a fastener
are
pins, tighten the fastener to the low side

(minimum) of the applicable specified or selected
torque range, unless otherwise specified, and if
necessary, continue tightening until the nut slot
aligns with the fastener hole. Maximum torque must
with cotter
Check the units to be lockwired to make sure that

they have been correctly torqued and that the wiring holes are properly positioned in relation to each
other. When there are two or more units, it is desirable that the holes in the units be in the same rela-
tionship
to each other. Never
units to obtain
proper
loosen
of the holes. It
overtorque
alignment
possible to align the wiring holes when

torqued within the specified limits.
if
it
is
However,
impossible to obtain a proper alignment of the holes without either over or undertorquing, select another unit which will permit proper
alignment within the specified torque limits,
should be
the
units
be exceeded.
never
or
are
Castellated
nuts
safetied with cotter
installed
fasteners
on
are
preferred method is
with the cotter pin bent parallel to the axis of the
fastener. The alternate method, where the cotter pin
is mounted perpendicular to the axis of the fastener, may be used when the cotter pin in the prepins.
The
ferred method is apt to become
snag.
If 50 percent or more of the cotter pin diameter is above the nut castellation, a washer should be
e.
LOCKWIRE TWISTING
used under the nut
prevent mutilation of the twisted section of the

wire when using pliers, grasp the wire at the ends
or at a point that will not be twisted. Lockwire must
not be nicked, kinked or mutilated. Never twist the
wire ends off with the pliers and, when cutting off
ends; leave at least three complete twists after the
loop, exercising extreme care to prevent the wire
To
falling into
damage.
marginal.
ends from
hazard
is
or
areas
The
where
strength
they might
create
of lockwire holes
or a
shorter fastener should be
installed. A maximum of two washers may be permitted under a nut.

f
Use the
listed
in
largest
MS24665
nominal diameter cotter
that
the
hole
and
slots
application of a cotter pin to any

permitted if the fastener hole size
required hole and slot size for the
accommodate. No
nut or fastener is
is less than the

cotter
pin.
Install the cotter pin head firmly in the slot of

g.
the nut with the axis of the cotter pin eye at right
COTTER PIN INSTALLA TION
angles
to the fastener shank. Bend the cotter
(FIGURE 3)
prongs
so
are
Use the
the
following to select
desired application:
a.
Install
b.
Select cotter
new
cotter
pin
and install cotter
pins
for
firmly
that the cotter

seated
against
pin
head and upper prong

the fastener and the lower
pin
prong against the nut.
pin or rod end applications, install the

pin with the axis of the eye parallel to the
shank of the clevis pin or rod end. Bend the prongs
around the shank of the clevis pin or rod end as
shown in Figure 3.
h.
pins.
In clevis
cotter
material in accordance with
temperature, atmosphere and service limitations
specified
pin
will
as
in Chart 1.
CHART 1
COTTER PIN INFORMATION

MATERIAL
TEMPERATURE
SERVICE
MS24665 Cotter Pins

Carbon Steel
Ambient
Normal atmosphere cotter pins

contacting cadimum plated bolts
Temperature
up to 4600F
or nuts.
MS24665 Cotter Pins
Ambient
Corrosion-Resistant Steel
up to 6000F
Temperature
Nonmagnetic requirements cotter

pins contacting corrosion-resistant
steel bolts
or
nuts in
corrosive
atmosphere.
BT01083
20-07-00
Page
Jun 20/91
A14
(i~eechcraft
BONANZA SERIES
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
plated cotter pins should not be

applications bringing them in contact with
fuel, hydraulic fluid or synthetic lubricants.
i.
Cadmium
used in
KEYWASHERS (TAB AND CUP

INS TA L LA TION
TYPES)
c.
External type rings must be

to allow installation without
enough
expanded only
becoming bent.
After installation, ensure each retaining ring is

completely seated in its groove, without looseness
d.
or
distortion.
TURNBUCKLE LOCK CLIP INSTALLA TION
keywasher,
interchangeable.
The terms
are
tabwasher and
Observe the following when installing

washers, tabwashers and cupwashers:
a.
Always
use new
washers for each
cupwasher
new
assembly.
(SPIROLOX, ETC.)
Internal
point
rings
Safety
turnbuckles with lock
clips
as
a.
New lock
b.
Screw both threaded terminals
clips
be
installed
compressed beyond
ring meet.
must not be
where ends of the
using
follows:
must be used.
so
than three threads of either terminal is

side the body.
a.
Retaining rings must
approved retaining ring pliers.
into
threaded terminals are screwed

the turnbuckle barrel.
tance into the turnbuckle barrel
INSTALLA TION
b.
The turnbuckle barrel must be filled

MIL-G-23827 grease before the
with
When
RETAINING RINGS
the
NOTE
key-
bending or setting the washer tabs, do

not use sharp pointed tools. Use of such tools can
lead to subsequent failure of the locking tabs which,
upon becoming detached, can cause extensive
damage.
b.
(FIGURE 4)
equal dis-
an
that
no
more
exposed
out-
if necessary, adjust the terminals until the

c.
cable is to the proper tension, adjust the turnbuckle
to the locking position (groove on terminals and slot
indicator notch
on
barrel
should be
aligned)
and
TO PROVIDE CLEARANCE
PRONG MAY BE CUT HERE
PRONG MUST BE OF
SUFFICIENT LENGTH
AS SHOWN.
PRONGS MUST BE OF
SUFFICIENT LENGTH
TO EXTEND 90
BEYOND HOLE AS
SHOWN.
CASTELLATED NUT ON BOLT

PREFERRED METHOD
PIN APPLICATION
2000-610-46
Cotter Pin Installation
Figure 3
20-07-00
Page 5
A14
Jun 20/91
Ci3eechcraR
BONANZA SERIES
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
HOOK LOOP
HOOK LIP
LOCKING CLIP
---------~6-
SWAGED
TERMINAL
SWAGED
TERMINAL
TURNBUCKLE
BARREL
2000-610-47
Turnbuckle Safetying Using Lock Clips
Figure
20-07-00
Page 6
Jun 20/91
A14
aeechcraft
BONANZA SERIES
NIAINTENANCE MANUAL
insert the end of the
locking clip
into the terminal
and turnbuckle barrel end until the "U" curved end

of the locking clip is over the hole in the center of
turnbuckle barrel
using fingers only.

clip installation
tool to check the lock
clip
Do not
as
the
use a
locking
could be distorted.
the turnbuckle barrel.
d.
Press the
locking clip
in the hole in the center
of the turnbuckle barrel to its full extent.

e.
The curved end of the
locking clip
f.
To check proper
to remove the
Repeat the previous steps

locking clip on the opposite
for installation of
end of the turn-
buckle barrel.
will latch in
the hole in in the center of the turnbuckle barrel.
attempt
g.
the
seating of the locking clip,

pressed "U" end from the
h
Both locking clips may be inserted in the same
side of the turnbuckle barrel center hole or in oppo-
site sides of the turnbuckle barrel center hole.
20-07-00
Page 7
A14
Jun 20/91
BONANZA SERIES
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
DESCRIPTION
and
following cleaning, waxing, placarding

painting information provides finish care information
needed to maintain the airplane in an approved
The
condition.
NOTE
When
interior
or
refer to the
paint is
airplane log book
exterior
required,
paint part number. This number
will identify the type of paint used on
the airplane as it was delivered new.
On older airplanes which do not have
the paint part number listed on the airplane log book, contact the Commercial Service Department of BEECH Aircraft Corporation to determine the
paint used on the airplane as it was
for the
delivered,
as
meeting federal, military or vendor specifications

the vendor or compliance to the applicable specifications. GENERIC OR LOCALLY MANUFACTURED
PRODUCTS WHICH CONFORM TO THE REQUIREMENTS OF A SPECIFICATION MAY BE USED

Only
the
basic
number
of
each
specification
is
the technician
revision
or
of the
to

CHART 1
SPECIFICATION
MATERIAL
VENDOR
PRODUCT
1.
Cleaner
0-A-51
Acetone
Obtain
locally
2.
Cleaner
TT-M-261
Methyl
Ethyl
Obtain
locally
Obtain
locally
Obtain
locally
Ketone
3.
Cleaner
4.
Acid
5.
Base Primer
Etching
TT-N-95
Primer
Naphtha
MIL-C-8514
EX2016G
Pratt 8 Lambert
Coatings Div.,
P.O. Box 2153,
Wichita, KS 67201
6.
Catalyst
T607
Pratt 8 Lambert
Coatings Div.,
P.O. Box 2153,
Wichita, KS 67201
7.
Urethane Primer
38-Y-3
U.S. Paint,
Lacquer
and Chemicals Co.,
St. Louis, MO.

8.
Cleaner
Lacquer Thinner
Obtain
locally
20-08-00
Page
A14
Jun 20/91
BONANZA SERIES
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
CHART 1
RECOMMENDED MATERIALS (Continued)
9.
Anti-static
528-104
Coating
VENDOR
PRODUCT
SPECIFICATION
MATERIAL
or
528-306
DeSoto Inc.,
Southwestern Plant,
Forrest Ln. and Shiloh
Rd.,
P.O. Box 401268
Garland, TX 75042
10.
M-213
Elastomeric
Lord Chemical Products
Group,
Polyurethane
(white base)
2000 W. Grandview
Blvd.,
Erie, PA 16514
11.
M-200
Curing Solution
(elastomeric
polyurethane)
Lord Chemical Products
Group,
2000 W. Grandview
Blvd.,
Erie, PA 16154
12.
EC750
Sealer
Minnesota
Mining
and
Mfg. Co.,
St. Paul, MN
13.
Oakite No. 6
14.
Sanding Surfacer
Oakite Products Inc.,

Berkeley Hts., N.J. 07922
F900 Primer Surfacer
Andrew Brown Co.,

801 E. Lee,
Irving,
15.
Toluol
16.
Isopropyl
17.
(toluene)
Alcohol
Alodine 1200S
TX
TT-T-548
Obtain
locally
TT-I-735
Obtain
locally
MIL-C-5541
Amchem Products Inc.
Ambler, PA 19002
18.
Primer, Epoxy-
U.S. Paint,
MIL-P-23377
Lacquer
and
Chemical Co.
Polyamide
St. Louis, MO
19.
Urethane Paint
6160 Matterhorn White
U.S. Paint, Lacquer and

Chemical Co.
St. Louis, MO
BT01239
20-08-00
Page
Jun 20/91
A14
Cj~echcraff
BONANZA SERIES
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
ENVIRONMENTAL
MAINTENANCE
PRACTICES
After the specified curing period of new paint, avoid

outside storage when conditions exist where moisture may collect on painted surfaces. Acids which
remain in standing water can stain the paint topcoat
and cause permanent damage to the finish. Flush
off residual moisture with clean tap water and dry
the surface. At this time, waxing the surface can
provide protection from acid rain damage.
AIRPLANE FINISH CLEANING
111
CAUTION
Since
paint
films do not obtain
hard
considerable time after
drying, airplanes that have been recently

painted should not be polished or
finish for
WAXING AIRPLANE FINISHES
good coat of wax will protect the airplane finish

from the suns rays and protect the surface against
oxidation. Any good automotive polish or wax may
be used.
A
waxed until the finish has cured for at

least 60
b.
with
days.
painted surfaces
Remove dust and dirt from
a.
with
cellulose sponge and cool tap water.
Remove oil and grease with
cloth
PLACARD REPLACEMENT
dampened
placards must be in place and legible. Whenever
airplane has been repainted or touched up after
repairs, replace any placard that has been defaced
or is missing.
All
naphtha.
the
CAUTION
i CIUnOK~I
URE~HANE PAINTS
airplane with mild

soap and water, use special care to
avoid washing away grease from any
lubricated area. After washing the
When
wheel well
areas
points.
of
surfaces
lubricated
Ivory
or
NOTE
Any time the paint on the airplane is

stripped for repainting, whether the
repaint is to be on a localized area of
the airplane or on the entire airplane,
a thorough inspection for possible hidden corrosion should be conducted.
with solvent, lubricate
all lubrication
precautions
Remove insects with
c.
mild
the
washing
these
Premature
are
may
not
wear
result
if
observed,
cellulose sponge and
a
an extremely hard finish for protection
against sandblast during takeoff and landings led to
the development of urethane coatings for airplanes.
Urethane paint dries to a high gloss and retains
The need for
Lux soap and water solution.
I"rU~1
CAUTION
color much better than standard finishes. It is unaffected by the chemicals in hydraulic fluids, deicer
fluids and fuels and requires less care and maintenance than standard finishes.
Harsh soaps and detergents will damage the airplane finish.

d.
Carefully
rinse
the
surface to
remove
ALL
soap.
e.
NOTE
After
Dry
the
FALLOUT(ACID RAIN)
cleaned
surface
thoroughly
chamois to prevent water marks.
with
any
placards
painting
repairs,
inspect
to ascertain that none have
been covered with
paint.
20-08-00
A14
Page 3
Jun 20/91
Ci~eechcraft.
BONANZA SERIES
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
URETHANE PAIN~ REPAIR PROCEDURES
The
normally required for urepaint to cure must be extended

temperatures below 700F. The paint
time
thane
at
will
not cure
temperatures below
at
applications
working
brush
NOTE
60"F.
substitute will
finish with such

or
while
require several
stripper in with a stiff
the
wooden scraper.
Mask around the edge of the skin or skins

a.
containing the damaged area. Use a double thickness of heavy paper to prevent accidental splashes
of paint stripper from penetrating the masking.
b.
stripper as instructed by the

Stay approximately 1/8-inch away
from the masking tape. This will necessitate a little
more cleanup upon finishing, but will prevent damage to the finish on the adjacent skin. The stripper
will not attack aluminum during the stripping process and can be neutralized afterwards by rinsing
Apply
urethane
manufacture.
This
airplane is finished with pretreatment (wash)

primer, urethane primer and a top coat of urethane
enamel. The following procedures include cleaning,
paint stripping, repaint preparation, priming, applying a urethane topcoat and an alternate method for
small repairs not requiring paint stripping. Careful
observance of these procedures should result in a
smooth, hard, glossy finish with firm adhesion for
the affected area with water.
maximum life.
CAUTION
Urethane
NOTE
stripe, numeral and letter pat-
Precut
terns are available
Rinse the
c.
NOT
USE
OF
ANY
good
pletely
clean.
Paint
be
must
removed from these surfaces with fine

care not
to sand into
the material. Never use aluminum foil

to
electrothermal
mask
during painting,
eners
form
hydrogen
coating
on
shields. If metal
cover
bright-
gas that eats away
the
as
an
anti-
electrothermal windare used,
brighteners
windshield
pasteboard masking
with
paper
material.
or
Because of their resistance to chemicals and sol-
vents, urethane paints and
paint stripper.
a
good
stripped
area
aluminum wool
surface with
as
f.
Thoroughly rinse
fully dry the affected
includes several joints
with clean water and

of
care-
If the
stripped area
skin laps, let the airplane
area.
sit until all moisture has dried. This may be accelerated by blowing the skin laps and seams with com-
pressed
air. Wet
masking
should be
replaced.
will combine with aluminum to
the stannous oxide used
static
windshields
for most metal
dry.
Bon Ami, Ajar, Comet cleaner,

scouring will leave the surface com-
cleanser such
etc. A
sandpaper, using
with water and
acetone, methyl
as
FIBERGLASS, NYLON OR COMPOSSURFACES.
area
Using a nylon scratch pad or

dipped in clean water, clean the
STRIPPER
skin.
carefully with a solethyl ketone or lacquer thinner. This will prevent tiny particles of loose
paint from adhering to the stripped area.
Wash the
d.
vent such
TYPE FOR REMOVING PAINT FROM

ITE
the
burn
e.
CAUTION
DO
contain
usually
or
gloves and eye protection

when using stripper.
through Modagra-
PAINT
irritate
Wear rubber
fics of Kansas, 1720 S. 151 St. West,

Rt. 1 Goddard Ks. 67052.
STRIPPING AND CLEANING URETHANE
strippers
acids that
primers require a special

stripper is not available,
stripper may be used. Removing the
If
enamel
urethane
PRETREATMENT
(WASH)
PRIMER FOR
URETHANE PAINT
etching primer (4, Chart 1) should be

improve the adhesion of the finishing
applied
coats. A base primer (5, Chart 1) and catalyst (6,
Chart 1) are used in equal parts as a pretreatment
wash primer at the factory.
An
acid
to
a.
Mix the
primer
as
instructed
by
the manufac-
turer.
20-08-00
Page
Jun 20/91
A14
BONANZA SERIES
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
Apply a thin wet coat of primer.

permitted to dry for at least an hour,
b.
It should be
but not over

six hours, before the next coat of urethane primer
is applied.
eliminate the scratches left
Take
is
Mix
instructed
the
urethane
Chart
primer 17,
1)
as
the manufacturer.
by
removing
Wash the sanded
e.
coarse
paper.
metal than
more
any
with
area
Change often to
sanding dirt will
cleaner
clean wash cloths

be
picked
(2
or
so
8,
that
up.
up has been
cleaned until all traces of discoloration are gone,
apply a thin coat of pretreatment primer (4, Chart I)
f.
a.
the
by
absolutely necessary.
Chart 1).
all of the
URETHANE PRIMER
avoid
care to
After the
damaged
to the
to
area
be touched
area.
NOTE
For the best results these directions
NOTE
carefully, for some

manufacturers require that the primer
be allowed to set for 1/2 hour after the
catalyst and base have been mixed
must be followed
while
others
after
use
recommend
If
metal conversion
iridite
or
alodine
primer coating
is
can
coating
be
immediate
mixing,
conversion
metal
wash
dispensed
is
primer
coating
available,
clean the surface to
Apply a coat of urethane primer with a spray

gun using 35 to 40 psi of air pressure. A spotted
appearance only indicates that the coat is thin.
c.
If the initial
primer
primer slightly to roughen the surface and

Wipe off the sanding dust with a
cloth dampened with a cleaner (8, Chart 1), then
apply the topcoat.
adhesion.
paint
and
catalyst
Apply
the
topcoat with
as
instructed
by
the
spray gun at 35 to 45
psi of air pressure. Two coats are normally required

to fully conceal the primer and build up the topcoat
film necessary for adequate service life and beauty.
The urethane finish will normally cure to approxi-
mately 85% of its full hardness

peratures of 800F or higher.
Mask around the skin
h.
Spray
high tack
damaged
d.
Do not
on
damaged
joint,
use
an
paint strippers that may
immediate corrosive effect
magnesium and/or
faces.
Acid
base
strippers
are
and
aluminum
some
not recommended.
if the
stripper
is not listed in the
sumable materials chart of this
edge
use
of the
a
fine
the
edge
of the
paint begins to fair into

grade of sandpaper to
sur-
phenol
Consult the manufacturer for cautions
area.
When the
smooth
urethane topcoats.
WARNING
of
e.
Using a coarse sandpaper, fair
damaged area with the metal.
on two
I --~I
base
edges
meet
PAINT REMOVAL FROM MAGNESIUM SURFACES
paint by using a
adhesive tape around the edge of the
Remove all loose
paint
If
cause
the
has cured for 24
PAINTING IMAGNESIUM
area.
b.
up
necessary, apply additional urethane

until the juncture of old paint with metal is no
visible.
gone.
in 24 hours at tem-
containing
primer
the indentation where the metal and old
URETHANE TOUCH-UP REPAIR

a.
apply
After the urethane
g.
man uf actu re r.
b.
be touched
urethane
hours, sand the area under repair with medium fine

sandpaper. Sand the edge of the repair area until
primer
longer
URETHANE TOPCOATS
Mix the
no
area.
is
a.
but
carefully
topcoat is applied,
sand the
assure
with.
primer (7, Chart 1)

to the bare metal. This should produce
a satisfactory undercoat for the repair
and
coat is allowed to cure for
than 24 hours before the
as
wash
If the metal has not been treated with
b.
more
such
the
used,
conman-
ual.
a.
more
Mask
areas
not
thicknesses of
being stripped with two or

masking tape and aluminum
20-08-00
Page
A14
Jun 20/91
~i3eechcraft
BONANZA SERIES
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
foil to prevent accidental
the
b.
spillage
from
exposure to high concentrates of

vapor may irritate the eyes and lungs.
penetrating
masking.
Apply paint stripper (27, Chart 1, 91-00-00) to
being stripped with a brush or non-
the surface
atomizing gun.
plane
paint loose
remain
strippers
on
are
with
the
allowed to
neutralized with
surface being
stripped must be thoroughly dry before
any application of the stripper. Magneslum surfaces are treated at the factory with a brown to amber Dow #19
primer coat. Any magnesium surfaces
not displaying this color should be resprayed with a primer coat before application of paint.
Most
to remain
on
the air-
for 20 to 30 minutes, then work the
NOTE
water;
paint stripper
Allow the
c.
bristle brush. The
airplane
dry
remaining
stripper may
for 2 hours but must not be
the surface.
on
the
therefore,
1
Never
use a
wire brush when remov-
from
ing paint
it may
CAUTION
cause
magnesium
damage to
surfaces for
the surface.
masking paper and wash the

area thoroughly with water under high
pressure. Remove all remnants of paint with lacRemove
d.
the
affected
NOTE
Dow #19 is used in the field to restore
the
original anti-corrosion surface
treatment that may have been penetrated in service. The chemicals for
Dow #19 formula may be purchased
from a BEECHCRAFT Authorized Outlet in powder form or may be procured
locally
1.
water in
gallon
and
produced
as
quer thinner.
PAINTING MAGNESIUM SURFACES
NOTE
Any time an airplane is repainted,

inspect all placards to assure that they
are not covered with paint, are easily
readable, and are securely attached.
follows:
approximately 3/4 gallon of distilled

plastic container which will measure one
Place
a
of fluid. The water should be at
tempera-
2.
Add
3.
Add 1
1-1/3
oz.
oz,
(H2CT04)
sulphate (CaS04)to
of chromic acid
of calcium
Prepare
a.
ture of between 70"F and 90"F.
the surface to be
SURFACES.
with
the water.
lacquer
Clean
thinner
the
water and
Apply
liberal
corrosion resistant
coating
of
after
assembly. Any
ings which will

bearings shall
epoxy-based
primer.
unreduced
corrosion
thoroughly
or grease
holes in the cast-
receive
be
zinc
bushings
coated
chromate
with
or
wet,
primer
or
preventative compound
at
the time of installation.
w,,,,
WARNING
Stripping should be accomplished in a

well ventilated area, since prolonged
area
equivalent solvent.
will come in contact with oil
dry by
exposure to hot air blast,

7.
indi-
Unprimed areas of magnesium castings are to be coated with MIL-M-3171

corrosion preventative compound (28,
Chart 1, 91-00-00) unless these areas
Brush the solution in and around the bare

surfaces of the magnesium, keeping the area wet
with the solution for one to three minutes to produce a brown film. Do not exceed three minutes.
running
as
NOTE
5.
Rinse with cold
affected
or an
4.
Add distilled water to make one gallon of
solution and stir vigorously for at least 15 minutes.
6.
repainted
cated under PAINT REMOVAL FROM MAGNESIUM
b.
tative
Prime the affected
compound
and
area
apply
with corrosion preventhe urethane topcoat.
20-08-00
Page 6
Jun 20/91
A14
Ci3~echcraft
BONANZA SERIES
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
NOTE
a.
application of the primer base,

the magnesium surface should be
thoroughly dried. Drying may be
accomplished by subjecting the magPrior to
nesium to
b.
hour. Allow
minimum of four hours
time between
application
of the
and topcoat.
propeller
blades
instructed
as
by
the pro-
SURFACES SUSCEPTIBLE TO MUD AND SPRAY

coat of white epoxy
paint
to the
following
areas:
a.
b.
c.
nose
landing
Interior surface of
Main and
nose
gear wheel wells.
landing
gear doors.
following
areas
landing gear
assemblies.
kept free from paint:
Fright
c.
Exhaust manifolds and exhaust stacks.
controls.
control cables and chains.
1.
Aluminum parts attached
firewall shall be primed in detail.
directly
to
the
Aluminum flexible conduit.

All
tubing except unplated steel, which

primer on the exterior, on
receive two coats of
shall
inte-
riors where the color scheme must be maintained,

and except as note, on the interior of the engine
one coat
of
thoroughly
dissolved solution of
part Oakite No. 6 (13, Chart 1, 91-00-00) and

two parts water to all rubber surfaces that are to
into contact with metal
or
g.
Stall
h.
Chromium
i.
one
other rubber
sur-
faces.
warning
vane.
plated portions
magnesium parts and assembliss which are enclosed and subject to high humidity should be protected against corrosion by coating
with either epoxy primer, MIL-C-16173 corrosion
preventative compound, light grease or heavy oil (5,
Chart 1, 91-00-00).
Steel, aluminum
or
BATTERY BOX AND LID
Finish the interior of the
battery
box and lid
as
fol-
landing gear
Rubber and "rubberlike" surfaces.
j. Electrical wiring, unless otherwise noted

specific requirement.
k
i.
m.
n.
ENCLOSED AREAS SUBJECT TO HIGH HUMIDITY
of the
tubes.
Glide path antenna
as a
(if installed).
Pitot mast and static buttons.
Cabin door sill and upper latch.
Utility
door
opening threshold (E-llll,
and after; EA-1 and
lows:
shall be
b.
piston
RUBBER SEALS
come
(57, Chart 1, 91-00-00).
compartment.
Main and
Apply
91-00-00).
Engine
f.
one
(2)
Epoxy-Polyamide
coats of Matterhorn White ure-
No. 6160
paint
of
Chart 1,
a.
e.
manufactures owners manual,
Apply
two
(56,
Firewalls and wrought aluminum surfaces forward of the firewall, with the following exception:
PROPELLER BLADES
peller
coats
d.
SPECIAL PROCEDURES
Paint the
(2)
two
PAINT FREE AREAS
The
1300 to 140"F for
drying
primer
Apply
thane
elevated temperature of
a minimum of one
an
Apply
Primer per MIL-P-23377
E-1241
after).
overhead console escutchharness

escutcheon, lower utility
,,,1
door escutcheon, window latch escutcheon, OAT
escutcheon, ignition panel escutcheon, circuit
o.
Window
moldings,
shoulder
breaker panel escutcheon, upper utility door latch

escutcheon, wing bolt cover escutcheons, and sidewall air valve escutcheons.
surfaces subject to rotation or slidelevator trim tab linkage joints.
bearing
p.
All
ing,
such
as
q. All exterior placards. See

manual for placard locations.
Chapter
II
in this
20-08-00
Page
A14
Jun 20/91
BONANZA SERIES
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
CORROSION
DESCRIPTION
Corrosion is the
gradual eating away
of material
by
chemical action,
Corrosion may develop at areas where the proteccoating has been damaged. When this hap-
tive
pens, it is important to restore the protective coating. Corrosion also occurs when dissimilar metals
in
moisture
present. High
any
humidity, high levels of environmental
impurities (such as salt spray, acid rain, exhaust
deposits, or chemical fumes), or high ambient temare
levels
contact
with
of
peratures
will increase the rate of corrosion. Some
of the more common
types
of corrosion
are
surface
corrosion, intergranular corrosion, pitting, exfoliation, and electrolytic or galvanic corrosion.
in these charts have been tested and
The
als
galvanic
series shown below shows which met-
attacked when in contact with
are
metal. The wider the
separation
BE
USED
Only
the
basic
number of each
specification
is
listed. No attempt has been made to update the listing to the latest revision. It is the resposibility of the
or
of
the
to

CORROSION
damage requires inspection to determine

depth of penetration and the cross-sectional
area change. The damaged area must be thoroughly cleaned. If deterioration has significantly
reduced the structural strength of a part (e.g., a
reduction of thickness more than 5%), the component must be repaired or replaced. Upon completion of the clean-up or repair, all elements must be
and
refinished
treated
as
applicable. In all
instances, good preventive maintenance and reguCorrosion
the
alloys 5052, 5056, 5356, 6061, 6063
All other aluminum
MAY
CORROSION CONTROL
Magnesium alloys
Aluminum
SPECIFICATION
corro-
corroded end of series
or
OF
dissimilar
in the series, from
the top to the bottom, the faster the rate of

sion. A partial galvanic series list follows:
Anodic,
for
revision
(FIGURE I)
approved

the vendor or compliance to the applicable specifi-
technician
GALVANIC CORROSION
as
meeting federal, military or vendor specifications

alloys
Zinc
Cadmium
lar
Lead
cleaning
will be the most effective corrosion
con-
trol.
Tin
following solvents may be used to remove

grease, oil, stains and other surface contaminants
on most materials.
The
Steel
Copper alloys
Specification
Product
Nickel
alloys
Titanium
Cathodic,
or
protected end
num
alloys
corrode when
in
example:
alumi-
with
steel;
contact
steels corrode when in contactwith copper.
A14
0-T-634
Perchloroethylene
O-T-236
TT-T-548
Toluene
of series
Note that corrosion is relative. For
Trichloroethylene
TT-X-916
Xylene
Methyl ethyl
ketone........... TT-M-261
Dry cleaning
solvent
...........P-D-680
20-09-00
Page 1
Jun 20/91
~eechcraft
BONANZA SERIES
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
TABLE I
GALVANIC COUPLES
EMP
METALLURGICAL CATEGORY
SOLID
GOLD,
AND
T
+0.05
GRAPHITE
RHODIUM:
SILVER
SOLID
OR
PLATED:
HIGH
NICKEL,
SOLID
OR
PLATED;
MONEL;
ALLOYS:
SILVER
HIGH
ALLOYS
NICKEL-
COPPER, SOLID OR PLATED; LOW BRASSES OR

BRONZES; SILVER SOLDER; GERMAN SILVER; HIGH
COPPER-NICKEL ALLOYS; NICKEL-CHROME ALLOYS;
AUSTENITIC STAINLESS STEELS (301, 302, 304,
316
321
347)
309
COMMERCIAL
HIGH
18% CHROMIUM
0- 3
CHROMIUM,
YELLOW
AND
BRASSES
BRONZES;
TIN-PLATE
II
LEAD
PLATED;
12
ALUMINUM,
13
IRON,
14
TYPE
CAST
15
OR
PLATED;
T
12%
OR
OF
-0.20
-0.25
MUNTZ
CHROMIUM
-0.30
-0.35
-0.45
410
TIN-LEAD
HIGH
ALLOYS
GRAY,
BRASS,
RESISTANT STEELS
ST
PLATED
WROUGHT
WROUGHT,
1 ALUMINUM,
NAVAL
TIN,
TERNEPLATE:
SOLID
AND BRONZES
TYPE CORROSION
6
-RES
10
-0.15
TITANIUM
BRASSES
PERMISSIBLE COUPLES*
+0.15
GOLD-PLATINUM
PLATED;
(VOLT
LEAD
THE
SOLDERS
-0.50
ALLOYS
-0.55
DURALUMIN
MALLEABLE;
-0.60
PLAIN
-0.70
ALLOYS OTHER THAN DURALUMIN;

7075, 5052, 5056, 1100, 3003.
ALLOYS OF THE SILICON TYPE 355
356.
WROUGHT
-0.75
6061,
1 ALUMINUM,
THAN SILICON
TYPE;
PLATE: GALVANIZED STEEL

ZINC-BASE DIE CAST ALLOYS;
ZINC-
-1.10
OR
-1.60
CAST
16
HOT-DIP-ZINC
17
ZINC
18
MAGNESIUM
WROUGHT;
AND
ALLOYS
OTHER
MAGNESIUM-BASE
ALLOYS CAST
-0.80
-1.05
OF GROUPS CONNECTED BY LINES ARE CONSIDERED AS PERMISSIBLE COUPLES;

THIS SHOULD NOT BE CONSTRUED AS BEING DEVOID OF GALVANIC ACTION.
PERMISSIBLE COUPLES REPRESENT A LOW GALVANIC EFFECT.
INDICATES THE MOST CATHODIC MEMBER OF THE SERIES.
AN ANODIC MEMBER, AND THE ARROWS INDICATE THE ANODIC DIRECTION.
REFER TO TABLE II, MIL-STD-I86, FOR GROUP AMPLIFICATION OF GALVANIC COUPLES.
MEMBERS
HOWEVER,
**TAKEN
FROM
MIL-STD-1250(MI),
31
MARCH
1967
2000-slo-*a
Galvanic Coupies List
Figure 1
20-09-00
2
Page
Jun 20/91
A14
~S3eechcraft
BONANZA SERIES
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
CHART 1
MATERIAL
SPECIFICATION
Coating
1.
PRODUCT
MIL-C-5541
VENDOR
Alodine 1200
Garden St.,
Ambler, PA 19002
Spring

St. Joseph, MO
2.
MIL-P-23377
Primer
Epoxy
Primer
Ameron Industrial,
Coatings Div.,
P.O. Box 2153,
Wichita, KS 67201
3.
MIL-M-10578
Rust Remover
8T01237
VV-K-211
Kerosene
ute
of parts may be used when the
Vapor degreasing
proper equipment
chlorides
titanium. Do
on
any solvents in
aluminum
areas
close
system,
similar metals
as
well
cleaner with
to corrosion in
are
corrosion
num
alloy
by
as
all cracks and sheet
laps.
thoroughly
compressed air.
soft brush. Rinse
dry
with
WARNING
are
several methods. Most aircraft alumi-
sheet have
thin
Always wear rubber gloves and protective clothing when working with
acids. A face mask may be necessary,
of pure
at the mill. Other alumi-
cladding layer
(ALCLAD) applied
alloy parts may be protected with an anodic
coating system or a chromate treatment. Many steel
parts are protected by cadmium plating. Most parts
have protective primer.
aluminum
num
ALUMINUM CORROSION REMOVAL

Corrosion may be removed
mechanically
or
chemi-
cally.
cles that could
depending upon ventilation in the area.

if acid accidentally contacts skin or
eyes, immediately flush with fresh
water and seek medical advice.
REMOVAL OF CORROSION FROM

ALUMINUM SURFACES
a.
In mechanical removal, it is essential that the abrasive materials
on
the tool leave
on
no
residue
or
parti-.
future corrosion. An abrasive

ferrous metals will contain min-
cause
previously used
A14
with clean water and
subject
g
ni-parts
y
ra
v
protected
degrees.
against
Aircraft
corrosion is best removed

or aluminum
On clad aluminum alloys, use a chemical alkaline

cleaner. Mix and store alkaline solutions in plastic,
stainless steel, or glass containers. Mask off all dis-
composites,
CORROSION PROTECTION
metals
alloy parts,
with aluminum oxide abrasive paper
Apply
common
alloys
of corrosion. A steel wire
wo l.On
to the oxygen
All
cycle
I w-~I
use
use
new
brush used on aluminum alloys will leave tiny particles sufficient to initiate corrosion of the aluminum.
not use exotic solvents on
Do not
is available,
WARNING
Do not
which will imbed in aluminum
particles
and start
Strip all paint from the surface
u"de
STRIPPING
PAINT in
Chapter
AND
CLEANING
as
directed
URETHANE
20-08-00.
b.
Mechanically remove
rubbing as necessary.
corrosion
by sanding
or
20-09-00
Page 3
Jun 20/91
CJT)eechcraR
BONANZA SERIES
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
the surface
Inspect
c.
sufficient
material
carefully to ensure that

to satisfy structural
any such
remains
dry without
that
materials
washed.
being
requirements.
Clean the corrosion
d.
chemical alkaline cleaner.
removed
with
area
Treat all aluminum surfaces with MIL-C-5541
e.
in the Alodine solution.
Rinse the treated
water and
dry
in an oven
area
in COLD
by exposure
or
running
They should be
immediately after use. If such
are left to dry in the open air,
washed
to hot air
items
blast,
they could
NOTE
If cold
available,
and the
a.
area
Strip
all
paint from
the
surface
directed
as
under PArNT REMOVAL FROM IWAGNESIUM SUR-
stated above.
as
create a fire hazard.
MAGNESIUM CORROSION REMOVAL
water is not
running
rinsing may be eliminated
dried
Brushes and cloths should not be left
(1, Chart 1).

1.
WARNING
w-.,.,
FACES.
2.
minimum of 30 minutes
Brush 2 coats
(a
apart) of epoxy primer (2, Chart 1) on and around
the reworked area. Assure adequate penetration of
primer into the treated area.
Mechanically remove corrosion by sanding or

rubbing as necessary. If sanding, use aluminum
sandpaper. Start with 240 grit and finish with 400
grit.
ALUMINUM CORROSION TREA TMENT
sufficient
b.
c.
the surface
Inspect
material
carefully to ensure that

to satisfy structural
remains
requirements.
After corrosion removal and surface
als
should
be
given
protective
cleaning,
met-
treatment
and
painted. Alodine treatment of aluminum alloys forms

protective coating which resists corrosion and
provides a good surface for adhesion of the paint
primer.
a
Alodine 1200, 1200S, 1201 (1, Chart 1), or equivalent, when mixed 2 ounces per gallon of water, will
be an acceptable treatment material. Mix only in
rubber, plastic
or
stainless steel containers. Alodine
1200 series
products contain fluorides that should

not be mixed in glass containers. Coat the area with
the Alodine solution and allow the coating to dwell
for approximately five minutes. After the dwell time
has elapsed, wash the area with water and blow dry
(do not wipe dry). Paint the coated area with epoxy
polyamide primer (2, Chart l)and allow to dry.
d.
ethyl
Clean the corrosion removed

ketone or naphtha.
e
Apply corrosion
magensium.
area
treatment to the
with
methyl
unprotected
MAGNESIUM CORROSION TREATMENT
Any
bare
magnesium component which will be

should be lightly sanded to
any oxide coatings and coated with Dow
returned to service
remove
#19 formula.
The chemicals for Dow #19 formula may be purchased from a BEECHCRAFT Authorized Outlet in
powder
duced
a.
form
as
or may be
follows:
Place
water in
procured locally
approximately 3/4 gallon

plastic
container which will
nofofluid.
llag.F009
distilled
of
measure one
The water should be at
CAUTION
and pro-
tempera-
ture of between 70"F and
Keep the Alodine solution confined

the
affected
cracks
and
area.
Mask
or
seal
to
all
crevices, all steel parts,

mechanical
components.
and
any
Wash all brushes and cloths immediafter
use to prevent inadvertent

ately
contact with the acid solution and to
eliminate
possible
fire hazard from
b.
Add
c.
Add 1
1-1/3
oz.
oz.
of chromic acid
of calcium
(H2CT04)
sulphate (CaS04)
to the
water.
d.
Add distilled water to make
tion and stir

e.
vigorously
one
gallon
of solu-
for at least 15 minutes.
Brush the solution in and around the bare
faces of the
magnesium, keeping
the
area
sur-
wet with
20-09-00
Page
Jun 20/91
A14
Cil)eechcraR
BONANZA SERIES
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
the solution for one to three minutes to produce

brown film. Do not exceed three minutes,
f.
Rinse
with
cold
running
water
and
dry by
Apply solution
to the corroded area
resistant brush. Allow to stand
thoroughly
using
one
rinse with hot water and
an
acid-
minute, then
wipe dry.
exposure to hot air blast.

g.
Apply
sion resistant
liberal
coating
of epoxy based
corro-
primer.
Always
STEEL CORROSION REMOVAL
tective
rust
Remove corrosion from steel parts by mechanical

means. Use a steel wire brush, a steel scraper,
steel wool, or 400-grit abrasive paper.
cleaning must be used, it is essential that all

plated areas, operating mechanisms, braided lines,
or material laps which could trap the acid be adequately masked. Mix one part of metal conditioner
and rust remover (3, Chart I)with one part of clean
water in a stainless steel, plastic or glass container.
wear
WARNING
rubber
clothing
removal.
when
A
gloves
working
face
mask
and prowith with
may be
depending upon ventilation

in the area. If acid accidentally contacts the skin or eyes, immediately
necessary,
flush with fresh water and seek medi-
If acid
cal advice.
In most cases, steel that has been cleaned shall be
treated with a minimum of one coat of epoxy primer
(2,
Chart
1)
to
protect against future corrosion.
20-09-00
Page
A14
Jun 20/91
CHAPTER
AIR
CONDITIONING
BONANZA SERIES
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
CHAPTER 21
TABLE OF CONTENTS
SUBJECT
PAGE
21140-00
Heating and Ventilating System Description

Cabin Heating
Heater and Defroster Operation
and
Operation
1
1
Cabin Ventilation
Pilots Fresh Air Ventilation

Overhead Fresh Air Ventilation
Cabin Air Exhaust
Fresh Air Blower
1
1
1
1
Heating and Ventilating Maintenance Practices

Inspection of Heating and Ventilating System
100-Hour Inspection of Heating and Ventilating System
100-Hour Inspection of The Exhaust System
Heater Removal (F33A, F33C, V35B and A36)
Heater Installation (F33A, F33C, V35B and A36)
Heater Removal (A36TC and B36TC)
Heater Installation (A36TC and B36TC)
Heater Pressure Testing
7
7
7
7
7
7
7
7
8
Fresh Air Blower Removal
10
Fresh Air Blower Installation
10
21150100
Cooling Description and Operation (Effectlvlty: Optional)

(Effectivity: All serials except E-2104, E-2111 and after and except EA-320,
(Effectivity: Serials E-2104, E-2111 and after, EA-320, EA-389 and after)
Troubleshooting
Air-Conditioning System (Effectlvlty: Optional)
Maintenance Practices (Effectivlty:

Maintenance Of Air-Conditioner
Precautionary Service Measures
Air-Conditioning FunctionalTest
Cooling
Optional)
EA-389 and
after)
1
2
4
5
5
5
5
System Leak Detection

Compressor Belt Removal
Compressor Belt Installation
Compressor Belt Tension Adjustment
Compressor Mounting Torques
Compressor Belt Pulley Alignment
Condenser Removal
Condenser Installation
Condenser Control Rigging
Condenser
Condenser
7
7
7
7
Uplimit and Downlimit Rigging

Flight-Extension Limit Rigging
Compressor Removal
Installation and Alignment
8
8
9
of
Compressor
21-Contents
A18
Page 1
Aug 18/95
aeechcraft
BONANZA SERIES
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
CHAPTER 21
TABLE OF CONTENTS
SUBJECT
(Continued)
PAGE
Ventilation Blower Removal
11
Ventilation Blower Installation
11
Evaporator
Evaporator
Evaporator
Removal
12
Installation
12
Filter
12
Replacement
21 -Contents
Page
Aug 18/95
A18
aeechcraft
BONANZA SERIES
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
CHAPTER 21

21-Etfectlvity
PAGE
DATE
Aug 18/95
Aug 18/95
Aug 18/95
21-Contents
2
21-40-00
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
Oct 16192
oct 16/92
oct 16/92
Oct 16/92
Oct 16/92
Oct16/92
oct 16/92
Oct 16/92
oct 16/92
Oct 16/92
21-50-00
1
2
3
4
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
A18
Aug
Aug
Aug
Aug
Aug
Aug
Aug
Aug
Aug
Aug
Aug
Aug
18/95
18/95
18/95
18/95
18/95
18/95
18/95
18/95
18/95
18/95
18/95
18/95
21-Effectivity
Page 1
Aug 18/95
BEECHCRAFT
BONANZA SERIES
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
HEATING AND VENTILATING SYSTEM

(Figures 1,2,3,4 and 5)
CABIN VENTILATION
In
moderate
temperatures, ventilation air
obtained from the

in
ever,
heat exchanger connected to the right exhaust

stack provides for heated air to five outlets in the
forward and ah areas of the cabin. The two forward
A
outlets are located above and forward of each set of

The two aft outlets are installed
rudder pedals.
behind the right front seat and the right rear seat.
The fifth outlet provides heated air for windshield
defrosting,
In
flight,
can
desirable
extremely high temperatures,

to pull the red FIREWALL AIR
be
heating by
it
How-
may
be
control and
only the fresh air ventilation described in the following paragraphs.

use
PILOTS FRESH AIR VENTILATION

A duct in each
wing root is connected directly to an

adjustable outlet in the upholstery panel forward of
each front seat. Airflow from each outlet is controlled
ram
air enters
through the heater air intake
and passes through the heater, then into a mixer

valve on the forward side of the firewall. The heater
air intake on Models F33A, F33C, V35B and A36 is
from the right side of the nose. Models A36TC and
B36TC have an airscoop on the left side of the engine
compartment that furnishes air to the heater. In the
mixer valve, the heated air is combined with a controlled quantity of unheated ram air picked up at the
fresh air intake. The fresh air intake on Models F33A,
F33C, V35B and A36 is in the engine rear baffle. The
fresh air intake on Models A36TC and B36TC is from
the right side of the nose. Air of the desired temperature is then ducted from the mixer valve to the outlets in the cabin. When the forward cabin control is
in the cold
outlets used for
the CABIN HEAT control full forward.
pushing
CABIN HEA TING
same
position, unheated air circulates through
by
center knob.
The~direction of airflow is
trolled by rotating the louvered

knob on the rim.
cover
con-
with the small
OVERHEAD FRESH AIR VENTILATION

Fresh
ram
of the
air from the air intake
on
the upper side
aft
fuselage is ducted to individual outlets

above each seat, including the optional 5th seat on
Models F33A and V35B and the optional 5th and 6th
seats on Models A36, A36TC and B36TC. Each outlet
can be positioned to direct the Row of air as desired.
The volume of incoming air can be regulated by
rotating the outlet. A shutoff valve is installed in the I
fresh air duct ah of the cabin compartment panel. I
The valve is operated by turning a knob on the overhead panel.
the cabin.
CABIN AIR EXHAUST
HEATER AND DEFROSTER OPERATION

The
heater controls
are
located
on
the
lower leff
pilots subpanel. To obtain heated air to the cabin

outlets, pull the CABIN HEAT control. The control
regulates the amount of cold air that is mixed with the
air from the heater. When the control is pulled fully
out, the cold air is directed overboard and only
heated
air enters
located
on
the
cabin.
The
forward
the firewall forward of the rudder
deliver heated air to the forward cabin

CABIN HEAT control is
pulled
out.
To
vents,
pedals,
when
the
provide heated
air to the aft seat outlets, pull out the AFT CABIN
For maximum heat, the control is
HEAT control.
pulled fully
out.
To obtain heated air for
defrosting
the windshield, pull the DEFROST control out. It may

be necessary to vary or close the AFT CABIN HEAT
control to obtain maximum air flow for
close off all air from the heater
defrosting.
system, pull the
To
red
FIREWALL AIR control located to the extreme leff of

the
pilots lower subpanel.
Since the cabin is sealed, an air exhaust is required

provide for circulation of cabin ventilation air. A
to
Cabin air outlet is installed in the cabin aft
panel
and is connected to
in the left side of the
an
upholstery
exhaust vent installed
fuselage.
FRESH AIR BLOWER
An optional fresh air blower may be installed on airplanes CE-941 and after, CJ-156 and after, D-10348,
D-10364 and after, E-1809 and after and EA-192 and
The fresh air blower utilizes the same ducts
after.
and air outlets as the overhead fresh air system. The

blower is located aft of the baggage compartment
wall at the aft end of the overhead fresh air plenum.
The blowers circuit breaker/switch is located on the
console
near
planes.
On
the fuel
mixture
lever
on
early
air-
and after, CJ-156 and

E-1954, E-1988 and after and
airplanes CE-990
affer, D-10390 and after,

EA-243, EA-273 and after, the circuit breaker/switch is
located in the center of the
subpanel.
21-40-00
Page 1
A16
Oct 16~92
BEECHCRAFT
BONANZA SERIES
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
HEATER AIR INTAKE (NOSE)
MIXER VALVE (COLD POSITION
HEATER
FRESH AIR INTAKE
(ENGINE BAFFLE)
LEFT FORWARD
-HEATED AIR
"h
~R\ ~J
-OVERBOARD VENT
OUTLET
FRESH AIR
Lln
~U
,RIGHT FORWARD OUTLET
(LEFTWING
FRESH AIR
FIREWALL AIR
(RIGHT WING ROOT)
CONTROL
OVERHEAD FRESH AIR
SHUTOFF CONTROL
DEFROSTER
I~H
CABIN
II
nii
AFT OUTLET
(RIGHT FRONT SEAT)
/YJ
AFT CABIN HEAT CONTROL
INDIVIDUAL OVERHEAD
FRESH AIR OUTLETS
AFT OUTLET
(RIGHT REAR SEAT)
r;l
OUTrPTSj
-~-------CONTROL
CABLE
OPTIONAL 5TH AND 6TH SEAT
INDIVIDUAL OVERHEAD FRESH AIR
CABIN AIR OUTLET
CABIN AIR EXHAUST

WATER DRAIN THROUGH
BOTTOM OF FUSELAGE
OVERHEAD FRESH AIR

SHUT OFF VALVE
OVERHEAD FRESH AIR SCOOP
(V35B)
(F33A. F33C,
and
A36)
CE-831 AND AFTER. D-10200
AND AFTER AND E-1408 AND

AFTER.
Heating
(CE-748,
and
Ventilating System
CE-772 thru CE-918, CE-920 thru CE-922, CE-924,
C9200100
CE-926 and CE-928; CJ-149 thru CJ-155; 0-10097, 0-10120

thru 0-10347; and E-llll, E-1241 thru E-1421, E-1423 thru
E-1550, E-1552 thru E-1568, E-1570 thru E-1580 and E-1582
E-1593)
Figure 1
thru
21-40-00
Page 2
Oct 16/92
A16
BEECHCRAFT
BONANZA SERIES
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
n/
HEATER AIR INTAKE
(NOSE)
FRESH AIR INT
(ENGINE BAFFLE)
HEATER
MIXER VALVE
(COLD
POSITI
OVERBOARD VENT
HEATED AIR
FRESH AIR (LEFT WING
ROOT)
-I II
AIR
_t~
(RIGHT WING ROOT)
LEFT FORWARD OUTLET
RIGHT FORWARD OUTLET
FIREWALL AIR CONTROL

DEFROSTER CONTROL
CABIN HEAT CONTROL
~SP
OVERHEAD FRESH AIR CONTROL
AFT OUTLET (RIGHT FRONT SEAT)
AFT OUTLET (RIGHT REAR
SEAT)
INDIVIDUAL OVERHEAD
FRESH AIR OUTLETS
CONTROL CABLE
........i
OPTIONAL 5TH AND 6TH

SEAT INDIVIDUAL OVERHEAD
FRESH AIR OUTLETS
AIR SCOOP
(V35B)
CABIN AIR OUTLET

CABIN AIR EXHAUST
rWATER DRAIN THROUGH BOTTOM

OF FUSELAGE
F~--- ------I
r------~
OVERHEAD FRESH AIR
OPTIONAL CABIN FRESH

AIRBLOWER
SHUT OFF VALVE
(F33A.
F33C and
A-36)
CE-941 AND AFTER. CJ-156 AND

AFTER, D-10348, D-10364 AND
AFTER AND E-1809 AND AFTER.
C9200101
Heating and Ventilating System

(CE-919, CE-923, CE-925, CE-927, E-929 and after;
CJ-156 and after; D-10348, D-10353 and after; and
E-1422, E-1551, E-1569, E-1581, E-1594 thru E-1945,
E-1947 thru E-2103, and E-2105 thru E-2110)
Figure
21-40-00
Page
A16
Oct 16/92
BEECHCRAFT
BONANZA SERIES
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
OVERBOARD
VENT~
(NOSE)
HEATER AIR INTAKE
MIXER VALVE
(COLD POSITION)
FRESH AIR INTAKE
HEATER
(ENGINE BAFFLE)
HEATED AIR
LEFT FORWARD OUTLET
FRESH AIR INLET
(RIGHT WING ROOT)
FRESH AIR INLET
(LEFT WING ROOT)
OVERHEAD FRESH AIR

DEFROST DUCT OUTLET
CONTROL

AFT OUTLET
ln\ H/ I"
CABIN HEAT CONTROL
(3RD
a 4TH
SEATS)
DEFROSTER CONTROL
AFT OUTLET
(5TH
6TH
SEATS)
INDIVIDUAL OVERHEAD
FRESH AIR OUTLETS
CONTROL CABLE
CABIN AIR OUTLET
OVERHEAD FRESH AIR
SHUT OFF VALVE

CABIN AIR EXHAIIST-
I I
OPTIONAL CABIN
FRESH AIR BLOWER

WATER DRAIN THROUGH
BOTTOM OF FUSELAGE
(gZ
~Rf
OVERHEAD FRESH AIR INLET
C9200102
Heating and Ventilating

(E-1946, E-2104 and E-2111 and after)
Figure 3
21-40-00
Page 4
Oct 16/92
n16
BEECHCRAFT
BONANZA SERIES
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
EXHAUST GASES
FROM ENGINE
(RIGHT SIDE ONLY)
(NOSE)
FRESH AIR INTAKE
HEAT EXCHANGER
HEATER
HEATER AIR INLET
AIR EXHAUST
AIREXHAUST
AIR-SCOOP
,111
(OUTLET BELOW)
MIXER VALVE
MIXER VALVE
FRESH AIR
-e
I~Llt
EXHAUST GASES TO
(LEFT WING ROOT)

t
LEFT FORWARD OUTLET
FRESH AIR
(RIGHT
DEFROST OUTLET
WING ROOT)
TURBOCHARGER AND
OVERBOARD
RIGHT FORWARDOUTLET
FIREWALL AIR CONTROL ~b63F
DEFROSTER CONTROL
CABIN HEAT CONTROL
//II
I I IIL~---E- AFT OUTLET
(RIGHT FRONT SEAT)
INDIVIDUAL
FRESH AIR OUTLET
YU 2C~----t
111
I
INDIVIDUAL OVERHEAD
FRESH AIR OUTLETS
AFT OUTLET
(RIGHT
REAR
SEAT)
24
CABIN AIR OUTLET
II
CABIN AIR EXHAUST
WATER DRAIN THROUGH

BOTTOM OF FUSELAGE
~EPI-BANDAFIER
CP2W1(13

(EA-1 thru EA-20, EA-22 thru
EA-21 and EA-29 through EA-32)
Figure 4
21-40-00
Page
Ale
Oct 16/92
BEECHCRAFT
BONANZA SERIES
MAINTENANCE WIANUAL
FRESH AIR INTAKE
(NOSE)
EXHAUST GASES FROM

ENGINE
(RIGHT SIDE ONLY)
HEATER MUFF
EXHAUST GASES
TO TURBOCHARGER--\
(/-AIREXHAUST
AND OVERBOARD
MIXER VALVE
HEATER AIR INLET
c
LEFT FORWARD OUTLET~II
FRESH AIR INLET
FRESH AIR INLET
(LEFT WING ROOT)
(RIGHT
WING
ROOT)
OVERHEAD FRESH AIR
DEFROST DUCT OUTLET
CONTROL
AS

AFT OUTLET
CONTROLI//
DEFROSTER
/n\
r--T- (3RD
4TH
SEATS)
CABIN HEAT CONTROL
AFT OUTLET
(5TH
INDIVIDUAL OVERHEAD
g 6TH
SEATS)
FRESH AIR OUTLETS
t~
CONTROL CABLE
CABIN AIR OUTLET
OVERHEAD FRESH AIR

SHUT OFF VALVE
CABIN AIR EXHAUST--/
WATER DRAIN
THROUGH~
j(
(Ba
OPTIONAL CABIN FRESH

AIR BLOWER
BOTTOM OF FUSELAGE
OVERHEAD FRESH AIR INLET
~EA-21.
EA-28. EA-33 THRU
EA-319. EA-321 THRU EA-388.
CABIN HEAT CONTROI.
EA-320, EA-389
ANO AFTER
AFT CABIN HE*~ CONTROL

EA-192 AND AFTER
OEFROSTERCONTROL~
~DETAIL
C92o010~

(EA-21, EA-28, EA-33 and after)
Figure 5
21-40-00
Page
Oct 16/92
A16
BEECHCRAFT
BONANZA SERIES
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
MAINTE-
HEATING AND VENTILATING

NANCE PRACTICES
INSPECTION OF HEATING AND VENTILATING SYSTEM
Inspect the air intake ducts leading to the heater;

check all clamps and connections for tightness and
Check the duct for
the duct for holes and cracks.
Check the
internal restrictions and/or collapsing.
screen at the intake duct; remove and clean as nec-
H~ArrR INSTALLATION
AND A36)
a.
cabin
and
heat
outlets.
Seal
cables
or
or
tape
heater
shroud
and
retaining
b.
install the heater in the
c.
Connect the
engine
airplane.
exhaust
to the
system
heater.
Inspect the heater control box for full stop-to-stop

travel and proper sealing of the valve.
Inspect the
condition of the air ducts leading to the windshield
openings around wires, tubes,

through the firewall.
the
screws.
essary.
defroster
Install
V35BJ
(F33A. F33C,
d.
Connect the heater ducts to the heater.
e.
Install the heater
HEATER REMOVAL
access
panel.
836TCJ
AND
(A36TC
passing
Remove the heater
access
b.
Remove the heater
ducting.
c.
Remove four bolts
a.
panel from the
right side.
Inspect around
the removable web
the lower half
on
leaks.
Openings,
stringer cutouts, or cracks must be kept sealed with
sealing compound (17, Chart 1, 91-00-00) between the
bulkhead and the skin by removing the upper upholstery panel of the bulkhead. Also plug the leveling
lug holes in the baggage doorframe to prevent entry
of the
cabin
rear
bulkhead
for
the
on
heater which attach it to the exhaust
d.
of cold air.
Loosen the
clamp
right side
system.
of the
the left side of the
on
heate r.
100-HOUR INSPECTION OF HEATING AND

VENTILA TING SYSTEM
the
heater
through
the
e.
Remove
f.
Remove the heater shroud from the heater.
access
hole.
Check for corrosion, cracks
clamps,
loose
obstructions.
sealing
loose
Check for
or worn
areas
in
ducts,
missing fasteners or
proper operation, travel and
or
Pressure test the heater

g.
HEATER PRESSURE TESTING in this
of valves,
100-HOUR INSPECTION OF THE EXHAUST

SYSTEM
INS TALLA TION
HEA TER
as
indicated
(A36TC
B36TC)
Check per POWER
Chapter 5-20-00.
PLANT
REMOVPIL
nLIVIVVnL
F33C,
jF33A,
(I
Remove the heater
a.
EXHAUST SYSTEM
access
V35B
vu~u
nlru
panel from the
Remove both heat ducts from the heater.
a.
Install the heater shroud
b~
Installthe
c.
Tighten
on
system
Disconnect the
and
remove
heater from the
it from the
exhaust
the heater.
heaterthroughthe accesshole
the
clamp
on
heater.
d.
Install the four bolts
on
the
heater which attach it to the exhaust

c.
AND(
in
right side.
b.
in
Chapter.
to 100 to 110
right side of the

system. Tighten
inch-pounds.
airplane.
Remove the screws from the heater shroud

d.
and slide the shroud off the heater,
e.
Install the ducts to the heater.
f.
Install the heater
access
panel.
21-40-00
Page
A16
Oct 16/92
BEECHCRAFT
BONANZA SERIES
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
HEA TER PRESSUR~ T~STING

The heater should be
which
could
inspected for cracks and leaks
introduce
carbon
monoxide
into
the
heating system.
On
all
(EA-1
hours
any leaks are apparent, replace the heater. This test

is also recommended for the heater at every engine
Bonanzas
and
except
after), perform a
and
planes, pressurize the heater to 25 psig. On A36TC

and B36TC, pressurize the heater to 5 psig.
Pressurize the heater with air or nitrogen and either
immerse in water or "paint" with a soap solution. If
pressure test
the
turbocharged models
inspection each 100
change.
visual
each 500 hours.
NOTE
On the
turbocharged models (EA-1 and after), visually

inspect and pressure test each 100 hours. The pressure test can be accomplished as follows:
The
heat transfer
internal
place for
a.
Remove the heater
as
indicated in HEATER
baffle
a
warpage is
studs
and/or
correct
cause
along
cone
with
must
supply of heat.
for replacement.
the
be
in
Any
REMOVAL.
b.
Itest
Inspect
for leaks.
the heater
On
F33A,
visually and
pressure
F33C, V35B and A36 air-
If the inspection indicates a good heater,

c.
reinstall the heater as indicated in HEATER INSTALLATION.
21-40-00
Page
Oct 16/92
Ale
BEECHCRAFT
BONANZA SERIES
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
DUCT TO
AIR INTAKE
ADAPTER
MOUNTING
BRACKET
NUT
SCREW
(4)
Be SCREW (4)
WASH\ER (3)
DUCT TO
OVERHEADOUTLETS
NUT
SPACER
WASHER (3)
CLAMP
d
SAFETY
CLAMP(2)/ A~ ~I(
SPACER
(2)
OWER
SCREW
BOLT
OETIIL
A~
~ETAIL
CE-941 THRU CE-1555;

CJ-156 THRU CJ-179;
D-10348, D-10364 THRU
D-10403; E-1809 THRU
E-2592; EA-192 THRU
EA-514.
A~
I~
CE-1457 THRU CE-1555,

E-2532 THRU E-2592,
EA-505 THRU EA-514.
[4)
SAFETY CLAMPS AND

SAFETY WIRE INSTALLED
PER SERVICE BULLETIN
NO. 2380.
CE-1556 AND AFTER,

E-2593 AND AFTER,
EA-515 AND AFTER.
C9200124
Fresh Air Blower Installation
Figure
21-40-00
Page
A16
Oct 16/92
BEECHCRAFT
BONANZA SERIES
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
FRESH AIR BLOWER REMOVAL
FRESH AIR BLO WER INS TALLA TION
(Figure 6)
(Figure 6)
a.
Remove
the
fifth
and
sixth
seats
when
a.
installed.
screws
Place the blower in
attaching
the
position
adapter and
and install four

blower
to
the
mounting bracket.
b.
Remove the cabin
c.
Disconnect the electrical connector.
d.
Remove the
rear
upholstery panel.
b.
c.
clamps securing the ducts
to
through
Connect the air ducts with
clamps.
Install the screw, or boit(s), and

nange and brackets.
spacer(s)
the blower
the fan inlet and outlet.

e.
Remove the
comply with Service

f.
safety wire from airplanes that
Bulletin No. 2380.
Remove the
screw (or bolt/bolts) through

flange and mounting bracket. Observe
spacer and washer installation so they can be
installed in the original locations.
the blower
d.
Blowers that have the safety clamps must
safety wired. Use a minimum of three strands of
.041-inch safety wire looped through the safety
clamps. The safety wire should be installed with a
slight tension and each strand should have equal
be
tension.
Remove four screws through the adapter,

g.
mounting bracket and the blower housing. Remove
the blower from the airplane.
e.
Connect the electrical connector.
f.
Install the
g.
Install the fifth and sixth seats if used.
rear
upholstery panel.
"END"
CONTINUEB
21-40-00
Page 10
Oct16/92
A16
aeeca~craft
BONANZA SERIES
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
COOLING DESCRIPTION AND
OPERATION (EffectSvity: Optional)
optional air-conditioning system is a recirculating
12,000-BTU cooling system. The air-conditioner is
The
wired
through
the
right landing gear upiock position
switch, the left landing gear safety switch, and the
nor-
mally closed full throttle switch. With the airconditioner operating on the ground, the control circuit
is wired through the left landing gear safety switch,
which fully opens the condenser air scoop door
located under the airplane. With the gear extended
and the throttle fully opened, action of the full throttle
switch will
remove
power from the compressor clutch
coil, and drive the condenser air scoop door closed.
landing gear is
retracted, power is transmitted from the normally open
contacts of the full throttle switch (actuated closed
when the throttle is fully open), through the right landing gear uplock-position switch (actuated closed when
When the
airplane
is airborne and the
the gear is up and locked) to the condenser air scoop

door actuator. Power is then conducted through the
flight-position-limit
switch located at the end of the door (actuated closed
when the door is closed), causing the actuator to open
the door to the Right position. When the door flightposition-limit switch is actuated, the power is then
normally open
contacts of the door
directed to the compressor clutch coil,
light, independent of the air-conditioner circuit, is

by the condenser air scoop door, through the
left landing gear uplock-position switchs normally
closed contacts (closed with the landing gear
extended), which will indicate a door-open condition
actuated
while the gear is extended.
high-pressure-sensing switch monitors the presof the refrigerant from the compressor to the
expansion valve. The normally closed high pressure
switch will actuate, causing an open circuit to the com-
The
sure
presser clutch coil when the pressure in the line

10 psi, (340 ~t 10 psi on serials E-2121
reaches 390
and after; EA-320, EA-440 and after; CE-1030 and
after) which disables the compressor. The high pressure switch automatically resets to the normally
closed
position
when the
pressure. There is also
valve, located
on
refrigerant falls to a safe

high-pressurreppoppe relief
the forward side of the firewall,
which will relieve the system if the pressure reaches

450 psi, and will reseal again at 360 psi.
The low pressure switch,
closed when the system is
senses
refrigerant line drops to a pressure low enough to indirefrigerant and/or oil loss (below 7 psi), the switch
will open and prevent further operation of the compresser. When the refrigerant system is properly
charged (approximately 7 psi or more), the switch will
b,,,tivated closed allowing the compressor clutch
cate
normally open (actuated

charged with refrigerant)
system pressure. When the pressure in the
coil to be activated so the air-conditioner may operate.

Th, purpose of the switch is to prevent damage to the
compressor should oil and/or refrigerant loss occur.
The condenser air scoop door under the airplane
automatically opens when the air-conditioner is turned
on
On the
ground, the door opens
to
approximately
flight, the door opens to approximately 3/4

inch. The air scoop door-actuator-limit switches
inches. In
1/2
are
preset; however if adjustment becomes
neces-
sary, refer to CONDENSER CONTROL RIGGING in
this
chapter.
The belt-driven compressor, which is coupled with a

magnetic clutch, compresses the refrigerant to a high
pressure, high temperature gas. This gas passes

the condenser where cooling air removes
heat from the gas, condensing it to a liquid state. The
through
liquid
then passes
through the expansion valve
where
it is metered into the evaporator at a rate of 55 psi, (30

psi on serials E-2104, E-2111 and after; EA-320,
EA-440 and after;and CE-1037 and
liquid
evaporation
allows most of the
after)
which
to return to a gas. The heat

is absorbed from cabin air
required for
passing over the evaporator coils. After passing
through the evaporator, the refrigerant returns to the
compressor at
reduced pressure.
A time
delay relay has been added to the compressor

circuit at serials E-2104, E-2111 and after; U~-320,
EA-440 and after; CE-1037 and after. The time delay
relay prevents the compressor from being energized

a high head pressure exists, which would cause
while
unnecessary stress on the belt and other components.

The time delay relay is located on the forward side of
the front spar
carry-through
on
the
right side
of the
airplane.
(Effectivity:
All Serials
except E-2104,
EA-320,
E-2111 and after and except

Cq-389 and after)
The optional air-conditioning system is controlled by a

switch on the powerplant control panel and by both
high- and low-pressure-sensing switches. The switch
which controls the system is located on the powerplant control panel (console) and is placarded ArR
21-50-00
Al8
Page 1
Aug 18195
BONANZA SERIES
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
and are
placarded AIC OFF and BLOWER HI LO

protect the
COND OFF HI LO. The system circuit breaker,

located on the right hand subpanel, is placarded AJC
umn
CIR BKR.
system
The entire system is protected by a 15-amp circuit

breaker. The compressor and condenser air scoop
door are protected by two separate ti-amp fuses. The
panel. One circuit breaker (5 amps) protects the compresser wiring, while the other (15 amps) protects the
blower wiring.
fuses are located

front of the
on
the forward side of the firewall in
This allows the evaporator fan to

after the compressor has been removed
copilot.
operated
from the system by
be
blown fuse.
Serials E-2104, 8-2111 and

after, EA-320, t4-389 and after)
(Effectivity:
optional air-conditioning system is a recirculating

cooling system. The two switches which control the
system are located to the left of the pilots control colThe
and OFF. The two circuit breakers which

are
located in the left sidewall circuit breaker
If the air-conditioner switch is in the A/C

air-conditioner will
come on
position,
the
with the blower at low
speed, even if the blower switch is off; however, moving the blower switch from OFF or LO to HI will result
in blower speed increasing to its maximum. With the
air-conditioner switch off, the blower will operate at
either high or low speed according to the switch position.
21-5000
Page 2
Aug 18/95
A18
~Rchcraft
BONANZA SERIES
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
15
8
16
6
10
17
=1
Compressor
2. Htah Pressure Line
3. High Pressure Relter Valve
4. Htgh Pressure Sense Switch
i.
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
10.
I.
12.
13.
14.
15.
16.
17.
Is.
Condenser
Recetver-Drrer and Sight Class
High Pressure Service Valve
Expanston Valve
Evaporator
Pressure Service Valve
Pressure Limit Switch
Low Pressure Line
Louvers-Atr Duct
Air Duct
Low
Low
Fan
Fan
Meter
Condenser Actuator
Compressor Clutch and Puller
c~leoon c
Air-Conditioner System
Figure
21-50-00
A~t8
Page 3
Aug 1.8185
BONANZA SERIES
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
CHART 1
TROUBLESHOOTING
AIR-CONDITIONING SYSTEM (Effectivity:
PROBABLE CAUSE
PROBLEM
1. Insufficient
cooling.
a.
Blower not
functioning.
b. Obstructed
or
disconnected air
Optional)
I
CORRECTIVE ACTION
a.
Repair.
b. Remove obstruction
or
repair.
duct.
Compressor
slipping.
clutch
c.
d.
Evaporator
filter
e.
Refrigerant
level low.
f.
2. No
cooling.
or
a.
Expansion
belt
clogged.
valve malfunction.
Blown fuse, loose connection.
adjust.
c.
Repair
d.
Replace.
e.
Leak-test and recharge.
f.
a.
or
Replace.
Check connections, fuse,
continuity.
b. Blower not
3. Excessive vibration of unit.
d.
Compressor valves inoperative.
d.
Repair
a.
Correct
a.
Overcharged.
a.
)b. Purge
system.
Mount
or
compressor bolts loose.
pulley
c.
d. Fan
Hissing
6. Chatter
module.
7. Belt
recharge.
replace.
refrigerant charge.
and
recharge system.
Ic. Tighten.
d.
Tighten.
oil level low.
a.
Add oil.
b.
Replace.
refrigerant level.
c.
Add
hitting shroud.
d.
Align
Compressor
Low
or
loose.
b. Defective belt,
5.
Leak-test and
c.
d. Drive
unit.
Repair.
Leak in system.
c.
Noisy
b.
c.
b. Air in
4.
functioning.
refrigerant.
and
e.
Defective compressor.
e.
Replace.
a.
Add
a.
Replace.
Adjust.
tighten
shroud.
in
evaporator module.
a.
Low
or
knock in
a.
Defective
a.
Loose.
a.
b.
Overcharged.
b. Correct
c.
Air in system.
c.
Evacuate and recharge.
a.
Pulleys
not in line,
a.
Align pulleys.
tight,
b.
Adjust
c.
Replace.
d.
Replace.
slipping.
8.Excessive belt
wear,
evaporator
charge,
b. Belt too
c.
expansion
valve,
Pulley groove wrong size.
d. Belt width wrong.

9. Broken belt.
a.
Check all
causes
listed.
refrigerant.
refrigerant level.
or
la. Replace
replace.
or correct.
21-50-00
Page 4
Aug 18/95
A18
aeechcraft
BONANZA SERIES
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
COOLING
(Effectivity: Optional)
freeze into ice at the expansion valve, but can also

cause the formation of hydrochloric or hydrofiuoric
acids in the
MAINTENANCE OF AIR-CONDITIONER
be
system. The air-conditioning system must

foreign material or
if contaminated with
purged
moisture.
Servicing the air-conditioning system consists of periodically checking the refrigerant level, checking compresser oil level and changing the system air filter.
Recharge the system whenever the refrigerant level is
low, air has entered the system or components carrying refrigerant are replaced. Refrigerant leaks may be
detected by inspection with a flameless leak detector.
PRECAUTIONARY SERVICE MEASURES
Due to the air
a.
in the United
quality
control
regulations
States, R-12 refrigerant
enacted
cannot be
vented into the

nance on
the
atmosphere. When performing mainteair-conditioning system where R-12 can
escape from the system, evacuate the system with

only a recovery or recycle servicing unit that will salvage the
b.
refrigerant.
The
air-conditioning system is a high pressure

disconnecting a refrigerant line, the
discharged with a recovery servicing
the
entire
Purge
system to a 125-micron level.
system. Before
system must be
unit.
precautions should be taken to prevent damfittings or connections. Even minute damage to

connection
could cause it to leak. Any fittings getting
a
dirt
on them should be wiped clean with a
grease or
cloth dampened with alcohol. Do not use chlorinated
solvents such as trichloroethylene for a cleaning
agent, for they are contaminants. If dirt, grease or
e.
All
age to
mosfue gets inside lines and cannot be removed, the

line will have to be replaced.
f.
For
serials
airplane
EA-579,
use a
prior
to
CE-1792, E-2945 and
small amount of clean 500
refrigeration
(8, Chart 1, 91-00-00)
and dip the o-ring in this oil before
oil
on
viscosity
all tube joints
assembling
the
joint.
g. For airplane serials CE-1792 and after, E-2945
and after, and EA-579 and after, use a small amount
of Ester Oil (65, Chart 1, 91-00-00) on all tube joints
and
dip
joint.
the
o-ring in this oil before assembling

help in making a leak-proof joint.
the
This will
CAUTION
owrloN1
I ---I
WARNING
worn

Insufficiently torqued tubing connections

result in loose joints while excessively torqued connections can cause
deformed joint parts. Either condition
can result in refrigerant leakage.
can
when
lines
con-
tact with the eyes can cause loss of
sight.
h.
When
connecting aluminum fittings
in the
reftiger-
system, torque all 5/8-inch fittings to 18 21 footpounds and all 1/2-inch fittings to 11 13 foot-pounds.
ant
servicing the
system with refrigerant because It
converts to a highly toxic gas when
exposed to an open flame
Do not smoke when
NOTE
The
doing
the work should be

on
tioning order.
major reasons for these measures are for

and
to prevent dirt and moisture from entering
safety
the system. Dirt contaminants may cause leaky valves
or wear in the compressor, Moisture may not only
d.
The
is the last
assembly
moisture into the lines.
throughly familiar with
servicing the system. They should follow very carefully these instructions when performing
the task that will maintain this system in a proper funcinstructions
receiver-dryer
to be connected. This is necessary to

reduce and/or eliminate the entry of
Before any service is attempted which requires

opening of refrigeration plumbing or units, the person
c.
For
charging the air-conditioner

Chapter 12-10-00.
or
checking
the oil,
refer to
AIR-CONDITIONING FUNCTIONAL TEST

With the
engine running
on, observe the
milky
or
bubbles
at 1,000 rpm and the
system
sight glass. If refrigerant appears

appear, charge the system as noted
21-50-00
A18
Page 5
Aug 18/95
~Beechcraft
BONANZA SERIES
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
ELECTRIC
CLUTCH
SUCTION
ENGINE-DRIVEN
DISCHARGE
COMPRESSOR
HIGH PRESSURE
SWITCH
LOW PRESSURE
SWITCH
PRESSURE RELIEF
II
VALVE
SERVICE VALVE
(SUCTION) UNDER
COPILOTS SEAT
II
RECYCLE/
RECOVERY
UNIT
SERVICE VALVE
(HIGH PRESSURE)
UNDER COPILOTS
SEAT
O
EXPANSION
VALVE
IN
RECEIVER DRYER 5
SIGHT GLASS UNDER
COPILOTS SEAT
OUT
CONDENSER
IN
OUT
EVAPORATOR
C9*E1~183118
Air-Conditioning System Schematic

Figure 2
21-50-00
Page 6
Aug18/95
A~8
~eechcraft
BONANZA SERIES
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
under the heading CHARGING THE AIRCONDITIONING SYSTEM in Chapter 12-10-00.
Check the system for leaks
using
flameless leak
detector.
SYSTEM LEAK DETECTION

A reduction of
system cooling ability
of bubbles in the
refrigerant, may
or
the presence
indicate
partial
loss of refrigerant. Check for bubbles in the sight glass
on the receiver-dryer located under the copilots seat.
The sight glass should be checked during operation at
maximum available ambient and cabin temperatures,
Streams of bubbles past the glass and/or milky
appearance in the glass indicate an inadequate quantity of refrigerant. If a loss of refrigerant is suspected,
an inspection of the system plumbing should be carried out to locate the source of the leak. Large leaks
may be located by the appearance of oily spots where
oil has been carried out by escaping refrigerant.
a
Smaller leaks, which are much more difficult to locate,

may be detected by detergent bubbles, or an elec-
belt should be retensioned to 50 to 65 pounds and

maintained at this tension. To check the compressor
belt tension, use a Burroughs Model BT-33-73F-50
belt tension gage or equivalent. Position the belt tension gage as shown in Figure 3. If a belt tension gage
is not available, a properly tensioned new belt will
require 4.1 to 5.0 pounds force for a midspan deflection of 0.14 inch. After 5 hours operating time, the belt
should be retensioned. After 5 hours, a properly tenrequire a force of 3.3 to 4.1 pounds for
a midspan deflection of 0.14 inch. The belt should be
sioned belt will
maintained at this tension. See

by midspan deflection.
Mounting
Nut................................................275
Compressor
COMPRESSOR BELT REMOVAL
(Figure 4)
Drive
engine cowling
to
gain
to the
access
compressor belt.
b.
Loosen the
c.
Loosentheself-locking
jamnut
on
the
e.
remove
on
to 325 in.lbs.
to Bracket
Bolt
Pulley
Bolt
Pulley
Nut
tension from the
Adjusting
Bolt Jamnut .................275 to 325 in. Ibs.
Idler Arm
Self-Locking Nut..........300
If it is determined that the compressor belt pulleys are

alignment, they may be adjusted as follows:
NOTE
An
Install the compressor belt over the compressor

pulley, idler pulley, and drive pulley.
roughs No.
to increase belt tension as
the idler
bracket
indicated in COMPRES-
on
alignment.
pulley
SOR BELT TENSION ADJUSTMENT in this
chapter.
Torque the self-locking nut on the idler arm

to 350 inch pounds.
d. Torque the jam nut on the adjusting bolt to
325 inch pounds.
e.
Closetheengine cowling,
c.
to 300
a.
Opentheengine cowling.
b.
Remove the belt
,f
Determine if the idler
d.
shims
as
e.
Reinstall the
ure
5.
65 to 80
pounds.
After 5 hours of
static tension of
operating
time, the
pulley
or
drive
Remove the
remove
COMPRESSOR BELT TENSION
indicated in COMPRESSOR
pulley is
out
and add
or
alignment.
ADJUSTMENT
New belts should be installed with
as
BELT REMOVAL.
c.
275 to
alignment gage is available (Bur-
8082 for 0.38 pulleys and

No. 8082A for 0.50 pulleys) to check belt
a.
bolt
to 350 in. Ibs.
COMPRESSOR BELT PULLEY

ALIGNMENT
(Figure 4)
adjusting
to 800 in Ibs.
...........................700
out of
Remove the compressor belt.
Use the
to 850 in. Ibs.
...........................800
COMPRESSOR BELT INSTALLA TION
b.
to 325 in. Ibs.
..................................275
bolt.
adjusting
nutontheidlerarm.
d. Use the adjusting bolt to

compressor belt.
Engine
220 to 260 in. Ibs.
Idler
the
Bracket to
Bolts
tronic detector.
Open
4 for belt ten-
COMPRESSOR MOUNTING TORQUES
Nut
a.
Figure
sion
f.
If the drive
appropriate pulley
required per Figure 5.
pulley
pulley
and
was
torque
as
indicated in
Fig-
removed, install the cotter
pin.
21-50-00
A18
Page 7
Aug 18/95
aeechcraft
BONANZA SERIES
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
NOTE
d.
Connect the hoses to the condenser.
If the cotter pin holes do not align within

the prescribed torque range, a new nut
may be installed or one AN960-C916L
washer may be used under the nut.
e.
Install the
f.
Install the beacon
light.
CONDENSER CONTROL RIGGING

The condenser is located
CONDENSER REMOVAL
The condenser is located beneath the
the main spar
fairing.
airplane
aft of
carry-through.
light.
on
a.
Removethe beacon
b.
Removethefairing
c.
Disconnectthe hosesatthecondenser.
conditioner turned
d.
Remove actuator bolts.
e.
Removetheattach bolts.
flight position any time

flight.
f.
aft of thecondenser.
the bottom side of the
airplane fuselage approximately even with the 3rd and

4th seats. With the airplane on the ground and the airconditioner turned on, the condenser will be fully
open. Any tine the air-conditioner is turned off or the
engine is at full throttle with the air-conditioner turned
on, the condenser will be fully closed. With the airon
the
the condenser will be open to

the airplane is in normal
The condenser is controlled
Remove the condenser.
by the electrical circuitry

air-scoop actuator. Check the conproper operation. If the condenser fails to
that controls the

denser for
CONDENSER INSTALLAT/ON
an open circuit between the

PRESS AIR COOL switch and control actuator.
operate, check for
position.
a.
Place the condenser in
b.
Secure condenser with attaching bolts.
CONDENSER UPLIMIT AND DOWNLIMIT RIGGING
c.
Installthe actuator bolt.
For
complete condenser rigging, full up travel of the

condenser should first be checked.
a.
COMPRESSOR PULLEY
With the condenser actuator motor attached to the
condenser, and the condenser in the upper limit of

travel, the forward edge of the condenser fairing
should be
b.
If the
approximately flush
fairing
is not Rush,
with the lower skin.
operate the condenser
motor to lower the condenser.
V BELT
With the condenser lowered, disconnect the bolt

c.
that attaches the actuator to the condenser and screw
the actuator eye bolt in to raise, or out to lower, the
condenser.
~__J_
d.
Reconnect the condenser attach bolt, operate the

and recheck for flush uptravel of the con-
denser.motor,
IDLER PULLEY
When the proper uptravel of the condenser is

attained, the fully down travel (full extension), is autoe.
BELT TENSION GAGE
DRIVE PULLEY
36-425-3
matically set through the action of the internal limit

switch of the actuator and need not be adjusted. In the
fully extended position, the forward edge of the condenser fairing is approximately 3 inches beneath the
fuselage skin.
CONDENSER FLIGHT-UCTENSION LIMIT
RIGGING
Belt Tension Measurement
Figure
Both the
extended
flight-extension limit and the condenserwarning-light switches are located on a
21-50-00
Page 8
Aug 18/95
A18
aeechcraft
BONANZA SERIES
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
bracket
denser
as
a.
ing
the aft end
near
assembly.
To
rig
the
on
right side
of the
both of the switches,
con-
proceed
wUN,,,
WARNING
follows:
The air-conditioning system Is a high

pressure system. Before dlsconnectIng a refrigerant line, the system must
be discharged with a recovery senrlcIng unit. Purge the entire system to a
125-micron level.
Remove the 12 screws and washers from the fair-
which
the switches and pressure hoses aft
covers
of the condenser.
b.
Remove the
fairing.
Disconnect each of the two pressure hoses

c.
located on each side of the condenser assembly.
Con nect
screw.
Do not make connection with the center
f.
at the
as
indicated in step
to the
switch
condenser-extended warning-light
(inboard
the switch actuating bolt on the condenser to actuate the switch when the forward edge of
switch). Adjust
the condenser is lowered 1.5 inches

the
skin at the
fuselage
perpendicular
to
airplane centerline.
con-
servicing the
a highly toxic gas when
Do not smoke when
system with
converts to
exposed
airplane centerline.
Connect the voltmeter
lines
sight
screw.
Adjust the
fuselage skin
when
tact with the eyes can cause loss of
bolt on the end of the condenser to

actuate the switch when the forward edge of the condenser is lowered 1.25 inches perpendicular to the
e.
worn

voltm eter to the R ig ht-extensio n-li m it

switch (outboard switch), by attaching one lead to the
top screw on the switch and one lead to the bottom
d.
to an open flame.
a.
Open
b.
Remove electrical leads from compressor clutch
the
right engine cowling.
terminals.
Disconnect refrigerant lines at the compressor.
Cap refrigerant lines and compressor fittings.
c.
d.
Remove the compressor belt as noted in COMPRESSOR BELT REMOVAL in this chapter.
NOTE
Using a voltmeter to adjust the above

switches is not necessary if the click of
switches upon actuation is audible.
g. Connect and
the aft condenser
washers and
tighten the pressure hoses, place

fairing in position and install the 12
screws.
Purge and charge the air-conditioning system as

indicated in CHARGING THE A\R-CONDIT\ONING
h.
SYSTEM in
Chapter
12.
e.
Remove the compressor mounting bolts and nuts
and
remove
compressor.
INSTALU\TION AND ALIGNMENT OF

COMPRESSOR
The starter drive pulley nut is torqued to 700 800
inch-pounds. If the cotter pin holes will not align,
change the nut and/or use a washer under the nut. Do
not overtorque the drive pulley nut. Install the cotter
pin.
a.
NOTE
COMPRESSOR REMOVAL
The use of AN960-C916L washer, or

equivalent, as required for cotter pin
NOTE
Due to the air
quality
control
When performing maintethe air-conditioning system

where R-12 can escape from the system, evacuate the system only with a
recovery or recycle servicing unit that
will salvage the refrigerant.
atmosphere.
nance on
alignment,
regulations
enacted in the United States, R-12

refrigerant cannot be vented into the
b.
is
permissible.
Remove the spacer from the bolt through the

Inspect the o-ring for damage and replace if
case.
necessary.
c.
Install the compressor bracket assembly and align

pulley with the drive pulley. The idler should
the idler
be
tightened snug within track. Install the existing nut

on the through bolt, then install the two
and washer
21-50-00
A18
Page 9
Aug 18!95
~eechcraft
BONANZA SERIES
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
COMPRESSOR
ACCESSORY
DRIVE PADS
BRACKET
MIDSPAN
DEFLECTION
CHECK
~YY/
COMPRESSOR
O
ADJUSTING BOLT
II~
STARTER
JAM NUT
IDLER PULLEY
DRIVE PULLEY
IDLER ARM SELF
LOCKING NUT
UP
ENGINE
CENTER
LINE
LEFT~
I)
RIGHT
LOOKING FORWARD AT THE

REAR OF THE ENGINE
36-425-5
Belt Tension
By Midspan Deflection
Figure 4
21-50-00
Page 10
Aug 18/95
A18
~echcraft
BONANZA SERIES
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
.375-inch-diameter, 2-inch-long bolts with their wash-
j.
tighten all 3 bolts finger-tight. Beginning

through bolt, tighten the bolts to 220-260 inchpounds in sequence counterclockwise.
ers, and
Chapter
the
d.
and
e.
k.
Install the compressor utilizing the bolts, washers,

self-locking nuts that are supplied with the bracket
equipment kit. Torque the

Loosen the
locking
nut
on
jam
nut
the idler
the idler outward
nuts 275
on
the
arm.
325
a.
Adjust
by rotating the adjusting bolt inward

Adjust the V-be\t to
to obtain the proper belt tension.
Torque
self-locking
the
jam
inch-pounds,
inch-pounds.
nut 275 to 325
nut 300 to 350
12-10-00.
Closethe
engine cowling.
Remove the
pilots
and
copilots
seats per
Remove the spar
c.
Disconnect the electrical leads from the motor.
cover.
VENTILATION BLOWER INSTALLATION
and
a.
Position the blower
g. Remove caps from lines and compressor and

install lines to the fittings on the compressor.
b.
Install the bolts
magnetic clutch.
Connect the electrical leads to the motor.
d.
Install the spar
e.
Installtheseats
I:
Install the electrical leads to the
Chap-
Remove the bolts which attach the blower to the

evaporator and remove the blower.
SION ADJUSTMENT in this chapter.

t.
in
d.
the tension outlined in COMPRESSOR BELT TEN-
specified
ter 25.
and self-
Install the V-belt.
as
VENT/LATION BLOWER REMOVAL
inch-pounds.
adjusting bolt
Charge the system with refrigerant
CHARGING THE AIR-CONDITIONING SYSTEM in
with
on
the evaporator.
attaching
the blower to the evapo-
rater.
Service the system with oil as specified in CHECKING COMPRESSOR OIL LEVEL in Chapter 12-10-00.
cover.
perChapter25.
IDLER PULLEY ASSEMBLY

BOLT
(800 TO
850 IN. LBS.
TORQUE)
ADD OR REMOVE CONTINENTAL PIN

643956-20 SHIMS BETWEEN
BEARING AND SPACER FOR

P*OPERWONMEN7
SPACER
DETAIL
~iy
SPACER
STARTEWACCESSORY
DRIVER
DRIVE PULLEY
NUT
(700
TO 800 IN. LBS.
TORQUE)
PIN
ADD OR REMOVE CONTINENTAL PIN
646064-20 SH~MS BE~WEEN PULLEY

AND SPACER AS REQUIRED FOR
DETAIL
PROPER ALIGNMENT
36-425-4
Belt
Pulley Alignment
Figure 5
21-50-00
A18
Page 11
Aug 18/95
Q3eechcraft
BONANZA SERIES
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
EVAPORATOR REMOVAL
b.
Connectthe refrigerant lines.
Depressurize the air-conditioning system with a

recycle servicing unit as specified in DEPRESSURIZING THE AIR-CONDITIONING SYSTEM in Chapter
c.
Connect the electrical leads to the motor.
a.
12.
b.
Remove the
pilots and copilots
seats per
Chap-
ter 25.
Remove the filter
d.
Remove the
cover
cover
from
over
Chapter
the ducts.
Disconnect the drain tubes and

between the evaporator and duct.
remove the
tape
Removethe sparcover.
g.
Removethe ducts.
h.
Disconnect the electrical leads from the motor.

Disconnect the
refrigerant
Charge
the
system with refrigerant
as
specified
in
CHARGING THE AIR-CONDITIONER SYSTEM in
and filter.
e.
i.
tubes.
e.
c.
f.
Install the ducts and tape with duct tape (29, Chart
1, 91-00-00) to the evaporator and connect the drain
d.
lines and cap the open
12-10-00.
I"stall the spar
cover.
g.
Install the filter and filter
h.
installthecover overtheducts.
i.
Install the seats per
cover.
Chapter
25.
EVAPORATOR FILTER REPLACEMENT
ports.
Remove the bolts attaching the evaporator to the
floorboard. Remove the evaporator from the airplane,
j.
The evaporator filter should be

dirty or defective. Remove the
cover
EVAPORATOR INSTALLAT/ON
a.
located
copilots
on
side to
replaced
if
clogged,
screws in the spar

the underside of the airplane on the
gain
access to
the filter.
Position the evaporator in the airplane and install

attaching it to the floorboard.
the bolts
21 -50-00
Page 12
Aug 18/95
A18
CHAPTER
COMMUNICATIONS
BONANZA SERIES
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
CHAPTER 23
COMMUNICATIONS
TABLE OF CONTENTS
SUBJEC~
PAGE
2311 0-00
Ground Communication System Description and Operation
Ground Communication (E-2104, E-2111 and after, EA-320, EA-389 and
after)
23~-60-00
Operation
Static
Discharging
Description
Static
Discharging
and
1
1
Static Wick Removal (Plior to D-10383, CJ-156, CE-978, E-1932, EA-273

Static Wick Installation (Plior to D-10383, CJ-156, CE-978, E-1992, EA-273
Static Wick Removal (D-10383, CJ-156, CE-978, E-1932, EA-273 and after)
Static Wick Installation
(D-10383, CJ-156, CE-978, E-1932,
EA-273 and
after)
1
1
P3Contents
A18
Page 1
Aug 18/95
BONANZA SERIES
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
CHAPTER 23
COMMUNICATIONS

PSEffectlvlty
P~-Contents
23-1 0-00
23-60-00
A18
PAGE
DATE
Aug 18/95
Aug 18/95
Sep 27/84
Jan 20/82
23-83eetlvlty
Page 1
Aug 18/95
BEECHCRAFT
BONANPA SERIES
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
SYSTEM
communication while all other electrical
(E-2104, E-2111 and after; EA-320, EA-389 and after)
center. The
below the
after, this
may be equipped with an optional ground
communication system. This system allows radio
The
equipment
is turned
off. The switch for this system is a push-on, push-off switch

located near the top of the instrument panel to the right of
systems two 5-amp circuit breakers are located

battery box. On airplane serials CE-1037 and
optional equipment is available on the model
F33A; however, there
airplane
are
no
standard locations for the
equipment.
"END"
23-1 090
99
Pegs 1
Sep 27184
BEECHCRAFT
BONANZA SERIES
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
STATIC DISCHARGING
OPERATION
DESCRIPTION AND
aluminum
or
and the
magnesium
Dow treatment of
preventive to use
airplane surface.
corrosion
is
suitable
between the static wick base
A static electrical
airplane while
charge may build up in the surface of the

is in flight. This electrical charge, if retained,
it
NOTE
interference in radio and avionics
equipment
operation. Therefore, static wicks are installed on the trailing
edges of the flight surfaces to aid in the dissipation of the
electrical charge.
can
cause
STATIC DISCHARGING
PRACTICES
elevator,
five
one on
(four
on
model
35)
one on
static wicks
the rudder. These
are
contact
two
(none
on
b.
Install the wick,
using the
two screws and lock
removed and
the
B36TC)
on
on
each aileron, three
on
NOTE
Check the
each
continuity
between the static wick
base and the surface to which it is attached.

There should be a resistance of 2.5 miliiohms or
the rudder. These fifteen (twelve on

are removed and installed in the
V35B) static wicks
flight
Whenever it is
washers.
less.
The base of the later static wicks is riveted to

surface and need not be removed in normal
same manner.
the
in
same manner.
elevator, and three

the
be used
suitably protected
necessary that any combination of such metals

be assembled, an interposing material
compatible to each should be used.
On seriils 0-10383, CJ-156,

CE-976, E-1932, and EA-273 and after, the static wicks are
installed with one (three on the 836TC) on each wing tip,
installed in the
not to
are
unless
against electrolylic corrosion.
MAINTENANCE
On serials prior to 0-10363, CJ-156, CE-978, E-1932 and

EA-2j3, the static wicks are installed with one on each
each aileron, and
Dissimilar materials
intimate
service.
c.
Refinish
attachment
(Prior to
EA-2M)
STATIC WICK REMOI/AL

156, CE-978, E-1932 and
a.
securing
b.
Remove the
two
screws
and
lock
washers
No.
the wick
point.
STATIC WICK REMCVAL (0-10383,

9781 E-1932, EA-273 and after)
a.
Remove the wick from the surface.
Clean around the static wick
3M
around
CJ-156, CE-
the wick to the surface.
STATIC WICKINSTALL9TION (Prior to

CJ-156, CE-978, E-193Y and EA-213)
finishes
area
0-10383, CJ-
b.
a.
the surface
area
Unscrew the static wick from the base.

Remove the static wick and lock washer.
0-10383,
STATIC WICK INSTALLATION (0-10383, CJ-156,
CE-978, E-1932, EA-273 and after)
by:
Removing all grease, oil, paints, lacquer, metal

or other high resistance properties with Minnesota
600 grit sandpaper, or equivalent. The mating
surfaces must be smooth and contoured so that maximum

surface area is in actual contact. Alodine treatment for
The threads must be clean and free of grease, oil, and
paint.
a.
Install the static wick and lock washer.
b.
Torque the static wick
to 4.7
inch-pounds.
"END"
2360-00
page
A4
Jan 20/82
CHAPTER
ELECTRICAL
POVVER
BEECHCRAFT
BONANZA SERIES
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
CHAPTER 24
ELECTRICAL POWER
TABLE OF CONTENTS
CHAPTER
SECTION
SUBJECT
SUBJECT
DC GENERATION
Description
Electrical
PAGE
..........24-30-00
......1
Operation
System
and
......1
Troubleshooting Electrical System
......1
......6
Alternator Removal
......6
Alternator Installation
......6
Drive Gear and

on
Coupling Installation
......6
New Alternators
......6
Voltage Regulator Removal

Voltage Regulator Installation
Voltage Regulator Adjustments
Battery Maintenance Program
Battery Removal
Battery Installation
Battery Cleaning
Battery Box Cleaning
Battery Servicing
......7
......7
......7
......8
......8
......8
......9
......9
.....24-31-00
STANDBY GENERATOR
.....1
.....1
........24-40-00
EXTERNAL POWER
.....1
ELECTRICAL LOAD DISTRIBUTION
24-50-00
.....1
Electrical Utilization Chart
.....1
Continuous Load (Standard Equipment)

Continuous Load (Optional Equipment)
.....1
(Standard Equipment)
Intermittent Loads (Optional Equipment).
.....2
.....2
Intermittent Loads
.....3
"END"
2eCONfENTS
FaO1
Oct 7/83
BEECHCRAFT
BONANZA SERIES
MAINIENANCE MANUAL
CHAPTER 24
CHAPTER
SECTlON
SUBJECT
PAGE
DATE
PCEFFECTIVITY
Oct 7/83
24-CONTENTS
Oct 7/83
24-30-00
Oct 7/83
9/80
May
Oct 10/80
Oct 10/80
Oct 10/80
Oct 10/80
7
8
Oct 10/80
Oct 10/80
Oct 10i80
24-31-00
Oct 7/83
24-40-00
May
1
2
May 9i80
May 9180
Jan 20/82
24-50-00
9/80
"END"
P4-EFFECTIVITY
Page
A6
Oct 7183
BEECHCRAFT
BONANZA SERIES
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
DC GENERATION
OPERATION
DESCRIPTION
AND
alternator is
designed
magnetism.
In the event the
to have
small amount of residual
battery is discharged
extent that it will not excite the alternator
ELECTRICAL SYSTEM
magnetism
is strong
enough
to the
field, the residual
to excite the alternator field if
all load is removed from the
airplane electrical system includes a 28-volt, 50-amp

(prior to CJ-156, CE-929, D-10354, EA-159, E-1766) or 60amp (CJ-156 and after, CE-929 and after, D-10354 and
after, EA-159 and after, E-1766 and after) alternator. A 100amp alternator is optional. The alternator and one 11.0ampere-hour lead acid battery supply all the de power to the
airplane. The battery supplies power for the airplane starter
system and electrical system when the engine is not
operating. The alternator provides the do voltage to the
electrical system during engine operation.
The
airplane electrical system until

the bus is brought up to the proper voltage. When
attempting to excite the alternator and develop output
without battery power, turn off all electrical load and operate
the engine at near cruise speed. In the event the alternator
is not producing electrical power, the alternator sensor will
illuminate an annunciator light.
Electrical system
repair methods
alternator output is controlled
by
"Aircraft Alterations" manual AC 43.13-2.
combined
airplane
bus
through
Any components
and any wire, cable, or terminals used in the

maintenance of the electrical system must be of aircraft
transistorized voltage regulator/overvoitage relay. Current to

excite the alternator field is normally derived from the
the
Agencys "Aircraft
manual AC 43.13-1A and/or the
Inspection and Repair"

The
used must be made in
accordance with the Federal Aviation
replaced
10 amp switch/circuit breaker and

relay. The self excited
voltage regulator/overvoltage
quality. Any solderless terminals or splices used

applied with tooling specified by the vendor.
must be
TROUBLESHOOTING
ELECTRICAL SYSTEM
TROUBLE
PROBABLE CAUSE
REMARKS
ALTERNATOR SYSTEM
1.
No ammeter indication.
a.
Loose connection.
a.
Check connections
b.
No alternator output.
b.
Check alternator output.
c.
Defective voltage regulator,
c.
Replace regulator.
d.
Overvoltage relay tripped,
d.
Check
throughout system.
reguratorlovervoltage
relay for
proper output.
2.
a.
Defective ammeter.
e.
Replace
a.
Circuit breaker
a.
Reset.
b.
Open
b.
Check
c.
Defective control switch.
c.
Replace
d.
Brushes
d.
Replace brushes.
e.
Dirty slid rings.
a.
With alternator
tripped.
circuit,
worn out,
ammeter.
continuity
switch.
with No. 400
jet
f.
Brushes not
rings.
contacting slip
f.
of circuit.
to remove
running, clean slip rings

finer sandpaper. Use air
grit.
or
Clean brushes and holders with
clean,
lint-free, dry cloth. Replace weak springs.
24-30-00
Pagel
A6
Oct 7/83
BEECHCRAFT
BONANZA SERIES
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
TROUBLESHOOTING
ELECTRICAL SYSTEM
TROUBLE
2.
PROBABLE CAUSE
g.
(Continued)
Open
REMARKS
shorted circuit in
or
g.
h.
Open
shorted circuit in
or
h.
Alternator output low.
Replace
if
Test
resistance
of stater.
Replace
if
Replace
if
defective.
stater.
3.
Test resistance of rotor.
defective.
rotor.
i.
Defective
a.
Defective rectifier diode.
i.
Replace regulator.
a.
Replace diode.
or
a.
Test.
battery
b.
Check
c.
Check switch for operation.
voltage regulator.
BATTERY SYSTEM
i.
No
power
battery
indicated
with
a.
master switch "ON".
Battery discharged
defective.
b.
Open
circuit between
continuity.
and master switch.
c.
Master switch defective.
necessary.
d.
Defective
d.
relay.
Check relay for operation.
Replace if
necessary.
2.
Power
3.
with master switch
on
in "OFF"
a.
Master switch defective.
Complete failure
to
operate.
b.
Relay
contacts stuck.
a.
Loose
or
Loose
broken lead.
or
terminals in
Excessive
Check switch for operation.
spewage
(crystalline deposits
outside of battery).
c.
Battery
a.
Excessive
not
disengaged
battery.
charged.
charge
rate.
b.
Replace relay.
a.
Secure lead.
b.
Secure terminals.
c.
Charge battery.
a.
Clean
on
b.
Excessive
ambient
b.
temperature during charge.
No
Output.
a.
Output voltage adjustment

too low.
24-30-00
Page 2
May 9/80
if
the battery
electrolyte level.
and
adjust the
Clean
and
adjust
the
electrolyte
battery
level.
VOLTAGE REGULATOR SYSTEM
i.
Replace
necessary.
b.
4.
a.
position.
set
a.
Readjust output voltage.
the
BEECHCRAFT
BONANtA SERIES
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
TROUBLESHOOTING
ELECTRICAL SYSTEM
1.
REMARKS
PROBABLE CAUSE
TROUBLE
No output.
b.
Field circuit fuse open.
b.
Replace fuse.
c.
Transistor 07 open.
*c.
Replace 07.
d.
Overvoltage protection circuit

tripped.
d.
Reset
e.
Relay
e.
Clean relay contacts.
a.
Overvoltage circuit
set too
a.
Readjust overvoltage circuit.
high,
b.
Readjust output voltages.
(Continued)
2.
Output is normal when

engine is started but ceases
after
3.
dirty.
circuit.
low.
short time.
Overvoltage
inoperative
4.
contacts
overvoltage protection
circuit
at any
b.
Output voltage
a.
Transistor Q1 and 02 open.
a.
Replace Q1
b.
Diode CR3 shotted.
b.
Replace CR3.
c.
External pin connections not

properly made.
c.
Check external pin connections.
d.
Zener diode CR2 open.
d.
Replace CR2.
e.
Relay
*e.
Repair
a.
Readjust output voltage.
b.
Replace 06
set too
or
02.
voltage.
Continuous high output.
K1 stuck.
Output voltage adjustment

high.
a.
or
replace relay.
set too
5.
Indicator
lamp fails
to
light.
07 shorted.
07.
*b.
Transistor 06
*c.
Transistor 05 shotted.
c.
Replace 05.
d.
Transistor 04 open.
d.
Replace Q4.
e.
Transistor 03 open.
e.
Replace 03.
a.
Lamp
burned out.
a.
Replace lamp.
b.
Relay
contacts
b.
Clean
relay
c.
Check
ground connection.
c.
Bad
or
dirty,
ground connection
at
or
contacts.
indicator lamp.
OECO Voltage
regulator/Overvoltage
relay only
24-30-00
Page 3
Oct 10/80
BEECHCRAFT
BONANtA SERIES
MAINtENANCE MANUAL
TO BUSS
DASHED LINES INDICATE t
TYPICAL CONNECTIONS
r--
WARNING
LIGHT
tT~
I 1 1
r
GRD
201334
CR6 IN4004
G
To
FIELD
.47-2W~
C6
20
-_- -_
R14
C41
)2.4K
lr
TQ7
2N3055
04
2N2905A
C2
R1
R13
R8
640
1.6K-1W
3K
140
R10
CR2
IN751A
Q1
953
MPS-
06
2N3055
R15
T1
6517
2.4K
L-l-
57
5 R7
R2
03
2N3053
2K
100
-I
R4
330
R11
100
CR1
R9
Ti57
3.9K
R5
05
2N2905A
CR5
MR1032A
1.5K
C1
C3
~Q2
20
1.0
2N3053 1
C5
0.01
CR4
IN753A
Re
R12
1K
249
R16
47K
R17
2.4K
R3
820
2W
GR41
L,,
TERMINAL IDENTIFICATION
UNLESS OTHERWISE SPECIFIED ALL

RESISTORS ARE 112 WATT CARBON, 5%
EXCEPT "BJ" RESISTORS WHICH ARE
3 WATT WIREWOUND. ALL RESISTORS
ARE EXPRESSED IN OHMS.
A
B
C
D
E
cBATTERY
FIELD
GROUND
TRIPOUT INDICATOR LIGHT
NORMALLY CLOSED TO TERM "H"
G
H
I.
TRIPOUT INDICATOR LIGHT

LATCH CONTACTS NORM, OPEN
REGULATOR INPUT
+RELAY COIL
36-351-1
Voltage Regulator System

Prior to CE-898, CJ-156, D-10332,
E-1644, EA-58
Figure
24-30-00
Page
Oct 10/80
BEECHCRAFT
BONANZA SERIES
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
K1
500
R18
R19
7.1
4.7~
1N936
8.2K
C121e
VOLTS
47
02
07 a 08
\jf~ j
~(7K
MPS8599
2NS063
R20
3.OK
I
R16
22K
R21 470
R22 470-~
)R13
<4.7K
\NOTES
i. DESIGNATORS USED:
R23 (NOTE 2)
3301(
1.0
TC3
C3-C5, Cf-C13, R5R23,

02-08, D1, 21-22
(S/N 97 a ON)
2. MAY BE CtlPPED OUT IN
(SIN 97 a ON)
IIJ-BLKS,
GND
YELS, G
A
04
03
R5
2.4K
2N4036
R15
J(SIN 97
2N3055
05
C5
.01
22
1P1936
C11
10
O.V. INDICATOR
ORNS, B
FIELD
R9
IN4003
J1
MS3102A-18-1P
150K
18K
Q6~1
IBUS
WHTS, D
R,,
MPS8099
LATCH
D1
R8
15K
R6
470
&ON)
TEST.
I 1
C7 a
C8
1.0
R14
330K
(NOTE 2)
(S/N 97
ON)
IREG VOLTS I
R11IADJUST
C9 a
C10
1K
4.7
12
A7
8.2K
4.7K
36-31-7
Voltage Regulator System

CE-898 and after, CJ-156 and after
D-10332 and after, E-1644 and after
EA-58 and after
Figure
24-30-00
Page5
Oct 10/80
BEECHCRAFT
BONANLA SERIES
MAINTENANCE MANVAL
DC GENERATION
proper operation.
AL TERNA TOR REMOVAL

a.
right
NOTE
Access to the alternator is
cowl door and
through
the forward
If
gained through the

opening of the cowl.
alternator is to be installed, refer to
new
GEAR
DRIVE
AND
COUPLING
INSTALLATION ON NEW ALTERNATORS to
change
CAUTION
The
the drive gear and
coupling
output terminal of the alternator is
directly to the battery. Make sure the

battery switch is "OFF" before removing the
wires at the alternator or serious damage to the
wiring harness and alternator may result from
accidental grounding of the output stud.
connected
DRIVE GEAR AND COUPLING INSTALLATION ON

NEW AL TERNA TORS
alternator will be received without the drive gear
The drive gear and coupling from the old
The
new
and
coupling.
alternator will need to be installed

b.
to the new
alternator.
Disconnect the electrical
wiring
harness from the
the
on
alternator.
new
changed by following
the
Remove the shipping spacer and washer
(if
The drive and
coupling
procedures
follows.
as
may be
alternator.
c.
Remove the four
attaching bolts. Remove the
alternator.
a.
installed~ from the replacement alternator.

Install the woodruff key (if not already installed),
and thrust washer. Ensure the bearing
assembly
coupling
surface (copper color) of the thrust washer is installed
b.
AL TERNA TOR INSTALLA TION

a.
Install
a new
gasket
on
the alternator
flange.
toward the alternator.

Install the nut and
c.
pounds.
CAUTION
pin
the cotter
further, but
Do
not
force
the
alternator into
position
or
to the alternator or drive gears could
d.
ensure
alternator
pilot enters
squarely, and
engine pad.
the
the alternator is
crankcase bore
resting flat
on
to a
torque of 400 inch-
hole in the shaft, the nut should be
not to exceed 500
align
the nut to
result. Care must be taken to assure that the
damage
tighten
If the slots of the castellated nut do not
Install
inch-pounds.
align with
tightened
Do not back off
holes.
an
MS24665-302 cotter pin
carefully
to
clearance when the alternator is installed in the
engine.
the
NOTE
on the mounting pad.
attaching nuts and washers bringing to
a snug condition. Torque the nuts to 150 to 180 inch-pounds
in diagonally opposite pairs.
d.
Connect the electrical wiring to the alternator.
b.
Position the alternator
Do not
c.
Install the
flange
clamp the alternator body or mounting

a vise. The cotter pin must be installed
and then trimmed. The portion bent toward the
in
alternator
housing
must NOT touch the thrust
washer when bent
over
the nut. The
away from the alternator

NOT reach beyond the threads
bent
CAUTION
Never turn the battery switch "ON" until all
wiring harness connections have been made
and properly tightened or serious damage to the
wiring harness and alternator may result from
accidental grounding.
portion
housing
on
must
the end of
the shaft.
VOL TAGE REGULA TOR REMOVAL
is
Ensure that the battery switch is OFF, the battery

a.
disconnected, and the external power source is
disconnected.
b.
e.
24-30-00
Page6
Oct 1 0160
Start the
engine
and check for oil seepage and
Locate the voltage regulator installed
aft side of the firewall in the
on
flight compartment.
the
right
BEECHCRAFT
BONANZA SERIES
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
Tag
c.
and
remove
wires from
all
the
voltage
adjustments.
screws
be
f.
regulator.
and
voltage regulator attaching

voltage regulator.
Remove the
d.
remove
the
For final check and adjustment, the engine should

operated at cruise rpm (2500 rpm) with the alternator
"ON" and carrying approximately 50% load.
VOL TAGE REGULA TOR INSTALLA TION

BATTERY MAINTENANCE PROGRAM
Ensure that the
a.
is
battery
switch is OFF, the
disconnected, and the external power
battery
source
is
Place the
b.
with
attaching
remove
voltage regulator
in
and
position
secure
screws.
Install electrical wires
c.
battery is accessible for servicing by raising the right

engine cowl and removing the battery box cover. A
systematic battery maintenance program should be
The
disconnected.
on
the
voltage regulator
and
established
follows:
as
tags.
d.
Reconnect the
e.
Operate
regulator setting
the
battery,
engine and confirm
a.
the
voltage
b.
under various loads,
The
battery
on
the
should be removed from the
and serviced after 100

occurs
VOLTAGE REGULATOR ADJUSTMENTS
performed
in the services
log
battery
should be maintained.
flight
hours
or
30
days,
airplane
whichever
first. If the ambient temperatures are above 90"F or

between engine starts averages less than 30
the time
minutes, the time between san/icing may be reduced.

c.
be
should be checked
sure the electrolyte level is sufficient to maintain a

specific gravity of 1.285. If the specific gravity drops below
this point add electrolyte (3 parts water to 1 part electrolyte)
instead of distilled water and charge the battery. Recheck
limitations voids the warranty. Should it become

necessary to adjust the voltage regulator,
may
battery
fill. Be
voltage regulator is set and sealed at the

factory. Breaking the seal prior to the warranty
The
adjustments
The fluid level of the
every 25 hours and maintained at 318 inch above the top of

the separators. If the fluid level is low, add distilled water to
NOTE
made in
the
following
the
battery
after
charging for
proper
specific gravity.
manner.
NOTE
CA UTION
battery. When the battery

spill on
the lower portions of the engine accessory
section and lower fuselage. Neutralize the acid
spillage immediately with a water solution of
sodium bicarbonate (baking soda).
Do not overfill the
Observe
engine operating
cells
limitations.
a.
Bring the voltage regulator and the alternator up
operating temperature (preferably by flying), by operating
the engine at 1800 rpm with approximately 50% load for a
to
are
overfilled,
water and acid will
minimum of 15 minutes.
Connect
b.
precision
voltmeter to the circuit
breaker bus.
Operate
c.
the
engine
at cruise rpm
(2500 rpm)
with
the alternator "ON", and the electrical load reduced to
minimum.
d.
Check the bus voltage. If it is not 28.50 -C .25 vdc,

should be made as indicated in the following
During periods when the ambient temperature is below

32"F, the battery should be maintained in a fully charged
state to prevent freezing. When distilled water is added, the
battery should be charged sufficiently to thoroughly mix the
water with the electrolyte as a precaution against freezing.
adjustment
peak performance, the battery must be kept

dry. If foreign materials are present in sufficient
quantities, the resultant deposits may form conductive paths
that permit a rapid self discharge of the battery. To prevent
the collection of such deposits, the battery should be
d.
step.
Remove the
labeled "REG" from the
plastic plug
regulator and adjust the regulator by turning
the potentiometer clockwise to increase the voltage and
counterclockwise to decrease the voltage. Make any
adjustments in small increments and allow 2 or 3 minutes
operation time for the system to stabilize between
e.
corner
of the
For
clean and
cleaned after each 100 hours of service

whichever
occurs
or
every 30
days,
first.
24-30-00
Page 7
Oct 10/80
BEECHCRAFT
BONANtA SERIES
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
CAUTION
e.
Position the positive cable
on
the
battery and
Position the negative cable
on
the
battery and
secure.
f.
Excessive spewage may result if the cell vents

are not
kept
clean and open.
secure.
Remove
g.
terminals.
The
e.
log
of
battery service performed should
justified. Accurate
consumption data is a valid

barometer to use for adjustment of the servicing intervals.
For further servicing, information instructions are furnished
with each battery.
Place the
Position the
petroleum jelly from the
excess
box lid
battery
on
the
battery
box and
secure.
Secure the aft fuselage
i.
panel.
access
water
BA fTERY REMOVAL
a.
h.
be
evaluated to determine the need to service the battery at the

above recommended inten/als or to extend the intervals if
any
battery switch
in the OFF
BA~ERY CLEANING
Remove the battery as described under the
a.
heading BATTERY REMOVAL in this chapter.
Ensure that the battery cell filler caps are in place
b.
and tight. Brush dirt off with a stiff bristle brush.
position and
that the external power unit is disconnected.

b.
Locate the battery in the engine compartment
ensure
right
the upper
Remove
c.
CA UTION
on
hand side of the firewall.

the
negative battery
cable from
the
Never
wire brush
use a
or
brush with
construction for this purpose

or other damage may result.
battery.
as
short
metal
circuiting
CA UTION
Always
remove
the
ground
cable terminal first
c.
Disconnect the
d.
position
battery.
it
so
positive
cable from the
battery
f.
solution of ammonia
or
gallon of water).
any electrolyte sprayed or spilled out.
This will neutralize
tone part of soda
to a
CA UTION
and
it will not interfere with the removal of the
Entrance of ammonia
Remove the battery box from the firewall.

Remove the battery from the airplane.
e.
Scrub the battery with
bicarbonate of soda
and install it last to prevent accidental short

circuits.
battery
Never
or
soda solution into
cell will neutralize the cell
solvents to clean the
use
these may
damage
the
battery
electrolyte.
battery, for
case.
BA ~TERY INSTALLA TION
b.
battery switch in the OFF position and

ground power unit is disconnected.
Position the battery in the battery box.
c.
Install the
d.
Coat the
with
d.
Place the
a.
ensure
that the external
light
coat of
box at the firewall.
battery
battery terminals
petroleum jelly.
the
e.
with clear water, then sponge off
Wash the
battery to air-dry.
battery filler caps with clean
no
f.
Inspect the battery for cracks, holes,
spots. Replace if necessary.
g.
CAUTION
If the
battery
Allow the
in
positive battery terminal is
hot water
soap, then examine the vent holes in the

filler caps to make sure they are clear.
and
and cable terminals
Rinse the
excess water.
good
Make
sure
that all
battery hardware
battery
or
is clean and
mechanical condition.
not marked
POS, or painted red and the negative

NEG, or
battery terminal is not marked
NOTE
painted black, use a voltmeter to determine the

battery polarity before connecting the battery in
battery terminals
required, use a battery
terminal cleaning tool and brighten up the
terminals to ensure a good electrical
the
airplane.
Reverse
polarity
will
destroy
the
diodes and other electronic components in the

electrical system.
24-30-00
Pages
Oct 10/80
If additional
cleaning
and cable terminal is
connections.
of the
burn
BEECHCRAFT
BONANZA SERIES
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
BA ITERY BOX CLEANING

The
battery box is vented overboard to dispose of

electrolyte and hydrogen gas fumes discharged during
normal charging operation. To ensure the disposal of these
fumes, the vent hose connections at the battery box should
be checked frequently far obstructions. The battery box
should be washed out thoroughly and dried each time the
battery is removed and cleaned.
performance. Never add anything but distilled water when

adjusting the electrolyte level of the battery. If electrolyte is
added each time the level in the battery is low, a high
concentration of electrolyte may cause dissolution of the
plates. Under high temperature conditions, this may be
indicated by the presence of black particles in the electrolyte
of the affected cells.
NOTE
BA TTERY SERVICING
Do not fill the
battery
over
one-half inch above
separators. Only lead-acid equipment

should be used when servicing lead-acid type
The battery should be maintained in a fully charged state at

all times and the electrolyte level checked at regular
the
intervals. A clean fully charged battery will provide peak
batteries.
"END"
24-30-00
Page9
Oct 10180
BEECHCRAFT
BONANZA SERIES
IAINTENANCE ~ANUAL
STANDBY GENERATOR
OPERATION
DESCRIPTION AND
standby generator system is provided to power essential

equipment in the event of loss of electrical power on the
The switch is
placarded OFF-ON-GENIRESET. The voltage

regulator/overvoltage relay is mounted aft of the firewall and
controls the generator output.
The
standby generator
is self
exciting
and
requires
no
main system,
external electrical power for it to function, although it does

require 2925 to 4050 rpm (engine rpm is 1950 to 2700) to
standby generator system is an independent electrical

system incorporated into the main system in such a manner as
function
The
only to essential engine instruments fuel

lights, turn coordinator, fuel quantity,
quantity,
certain lights, and navigation and communication system. A
diode in the circuit from the battery to the standby generator
system prevents the generator from furnishing any power to
the battery, but allows the battery (if serviceable) to supply
power to the essential equipment in the event of inadequate
output or failure of the standby generator,
to furnish power
certain
properly. At a minimum engine speed of 1950 rpm,

the generator will produce a continuous 6.5 amps at 28 volts
or for intermittent (1 minute on 2 minutes off) operation 11
amps at 24 volts.
The
standby generator system is controlled and protected

voltage regulator/oven/oltage relay. The regulator will
control the voltage at 28.50 -e .50 volts. The overvoltage
relay will remove the standby generator from the ~circuit
should the voltage reach 32.0
0.5 volts. Although the
overvoltage relay is set to trip and remove the generator
by
from the circuit at 32.0
voltage spikes (at
NOTE
Should
The circuits from the
battery
to the
standby
to
the
The
battery
switch may be in the OFF
standby generator system should only
flight by moving
the switch
momentarily
to the
position.
be used when
to
the
if
main system
picked
save
up from the
STANDBY GENERATOR
PRACTICES
STANDBY GENERATOR ~UNCTIONAL TEST
b.
Turn the generator switch OFF.

Turn the battery switch OFF.
c.
Turn the
a.
are
located
on
the
right side
of the
panel prior to E-2111 (except E-1946 and E(except EA-320). At the noted serials the
the left subpanel and the standard
to
is
moved
switch
voltmeter near the pedestal is used.
volts.
a.
instrument
and EA-389
standby generator switch ON (do not

position).
The volt meter should register approximately 24
contact the GEN/RESET
engine baffle.
d.
The switch and voltmeter
MAINTENANCE
short exists
battery power for lowering the flaps and

if
the
problem is determined to be only a faulty
gear
alternator). After turning the switches OFF, turn the standby
generator on. This optional generator is mounted aft of the
right magneto aft of the engine baffle and is cooled by air
therein, and to
2104),
seconds).
possible damage
that is
50 mill
GEN/RESET position.
loss of electrical power on the main electrical

system. As soon as a loss of electrical power is evident, turn
the alternator and battery switches OFF (this is to prevent
there is
trip
trip for
transient voltage spike cause the overvoltage relay

removing the generator from the system, it may be
a
reset in
generator system and the battery to the stall

warning system are always alive, even though
0.5 volts it is not sensitive to small
33 volts it will not
Place the switch
momentarily
in the GENIRESET
position.
f.
The volt meter should register approximately 28

at 1950 rpm.
volts, with the engine operating
"END"
24-3190
Pagel
A6
Oct 7/83
BEECHCRAFT
BONANZA SERIES
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
EXTERNAL POWER
b.
airplane electrical system is protected against damage

reverse polarity by a relay and diodes in the external
power circuit. The external power receptacle is located just
outboard of the left engine nacelle. The receptacle is
designed for a standard AN type plug. To supply power for
ground checks and for ground power unit assisted engine
starts, a ground power unit capable of supplying a
The
from
battery master switch on to protect transistorized

equipment against transient voltage spikes.
the
CAUTION
battery switch is turned off for

ground power operation, place an
external battery in parallel with the output of the
external power unit before operating any
transistorized avionics equipment.
When
continuous load of 300 amperes at 24 to 30 volts is

required. Use of an inadequate ground power unit can
cause a voltage drop below the drop-out voltage of the
starter
By
the
relay, resulting
same
token,
of 350 amperes will

power cables of the
in
relay
damage the
airplane,
external power
excess
relay and
c.
AN
Observe the
power
following precautions when using
an
external
plug,
from the
ground power unit does not have a standard

polarity of the plug. The positive lead
ground power unit must connect to the center post,
If the
check the
negative lead must connect to the front post and a

positive voltage of 24 to 28 vdc must be applied to the small
polarizing pin of the airplanes external power receptacle.
The power output of the external power receptacle must be
the
source:
auxiliary power source that is

polarity of the power source is
unknown, determine the polarity with a voltmeter before
connecting the unit to the airplane.
Use only
a.
negatively grounded.
the
extended
chatter and welded contacts.
maximum continuous load in
connecting the external power unit, turn

equipment and alternator Switches, but leave
Before
OFF all radio
an
If the
capable
checked
of
.25
maintaining 28.5
periodically with a voltmeter
vdc and should be

of known accuracy.
"END"
24-40-00
Page 1
May 9/80
BEECHCRAFT
BONANZA SERIES
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
ELECTRICAL LOAD DISTRIBUTION

ELECTRICAL UTILIZATION CHART
following specifies
the electrical load for each
piece of
equipment, either standard or optional, available on the

airplane. Based on this information, the electrical load for
the airplane may be determined. Intermittent items should
not be figured into the total figure when computing
continuous load since the short duration of their usage will
not significantly alter the standard load.
The electrical load has been divided into 4
Intermittent load
d.
Intermittent load
Under
be
The
c.
categories
follows:
as
no
more
(standard equipment)
Continuous load (optional equipment)
b.
CONTINUOUS LOAD
condition shall the total continuous electrical load

than 80% of the total alternator
continuous load consists of loads listed

the avionics
receiving
as
loads. Transient loads
capacity. Total
continuous and
are
intermittent
loads.
NOTE
The loads listed
as
continuous loads
are
for
equipment which will be operated for periods of

15 minutes or longer; however, the intermittent
loads and the avionics transmitting loads should
considered for
determining possible
overloading during shorter periods of time, i.e.,
takeoff and landing.
be
Continuous load
a.
(standard equipment)
(optional equipment)
(STANDARD EQUIPMENT)
NUMBER PER
AIRPLANE
EQUIPMENT
AMPS
EACH
TOTAL
.06
.06
.02
.04
Inverter, Electroluminescent
Instruments, Engine
Clock, Panel
.50
.50
.32
.32
.01
.01
Potentiometer, Light Dim
.03
.12
Relay, Annunciator Dim

Relay, Battery Master
.04
.04
.50
.50
Sensor, Alternator Out
.04
.04
Turn Coordinator
.40
.40
Voltage Regulator
3.00
3.00
Passenger Reading
Light
Compass
.30
.60
.17
.34
.04
.04
Elevator Tab
.04
.04
Flap Position
.04
.04
Fuel Select
.04
.08
12
.17
2.04
Flap Indicator System

Fuel Indicator System
LIGHTING
3rd
4th
Cabin
Glareshield Flood
.04
OAT
.04
Tail Position
1.02
1.02
.93
1.86
Wing Tip
Nav
Light
24-50-00
Page 1
May 9/80
BEECHCRAFT
BONANZA SERIES
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
CONTINUOUS LOAD
(Optional Equipment)
AMPS
NUMBER PER
AIRPLANE
EQUIPMENT
Air
EACH
TOTAL
Conditioning
Actuator, Condenser Door
.86
.86
Compressor Clutch
Evaporator Blower
Clock, Digital
Electrothermal Prop Anti-ice
(2 Blade)
(3 Blade)
1.70
1.70
13.50
13.50
.20
.20
10.00
10.00
15.00
15.00
.01
Ammeter
.01
Timer
.10
.10
5.00
5.00
4.60
4.60
.30
.60
.04
.04
26
.04
1.04
37
.04
1.48
14
.024
.67
16
.024
.77
Power
Supply,
Strobe
Heater, Pitot
(1)
LIGHTING
5th 8 6th Seat
Reading
Clock, Control Wheel 8-Day

Instrument, Post Light (Single)
Instrument, Post Light (Dual)
Instrument, Wedge Light (Single)
Instrument, Wedge Light (Dual)
Map
Rotating Beacon, Lower
Rotating Beacon, Upper
.30
.30
3.22
3.22
3.22
3.22
Tail Nav/Strobe
1.02
1.02
INTERMITTENT LOADS
(Standard Equipment)
EQUIPMENT
Cigarette Lighter
Flap Motor
Flasher, Gear Warning
Horn, Gear Warning
Horn, Stall Warning
Landing Gear Motor
Pump, Auxiliary Fuel
Relay, Dynamic Brake
Relay, Starter
Starter, Engine
6.00
12.00
11.00
11.00
.04
.04
.20
.20
.20
40.00
3.00
3.00
3.00
3.00
4.00
Starter Vibrator
.20
40.00 (3)
~2)
(4)
4.00 (5j
1.25
1.25
3.30
3.30
100.00
100.00
2.00
Alternator Out
.04
.04
Condenser Door
.04
.04
.17
.34
.04
.04
2.00 (5)
LIGHTING
Courtesy Light
Door Ajar
24-5000
Page 2
May 9/80
Open
BEECHCRAFT
BONANZA SERIES
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
INTERMITTENT LOADS
(Srandard Equipment Continued)

NUMBER PER
LIGHTING (Continued)
Landing Gear
Landing Light
AIRPLANE
Indicator
AMPS
EACH
TOTAL
.04
.16
8.93
8.93
Actuator
.85
.85
Resistor, Shunt
.37
.31
.08
.08
8.93
8.93
INTERMITTENT LOADS
(Optional Equipment)
EQUIPMENT
Elevator Trim
Relay, Ldg
Gear Latch
LIGHTING
Taxi
Light
NOTES:
(1)
(2)
(3)
(4)
(5)
Intermittent Operation.
only on Models A38, V35B, F33A and F33C.
Peak current after initial start-up load.
Used
Used only
Used only
on
Model F33C.
on
Models A36TC and B38TC.
"END"
24-50-00
Page
A4
Jan 20/82
C H A PT E R
EQUIPMENTI
FU RN ISH I NGS
Ral~heon Aircraft
CHAPTER 25
TABLE OF CONTENTS
PAGE
SUBJECT
25-00-00
Description
and
Operation
Flight Compartment
and
Passenger Compartment Seating
General
Pilot and
Copilot Seat Removal
Pilot and
Copilot
General
Seat Installation
Passenger
Seat Removal
Passenger
Seat Installation
Fith Seat Removal
(CE-748,
Pith Seat Installation

Fith Seat
CE-772 and After; D-10097, D-10120 and
(CE-748,
Stowage (CE-748,
(E-llll,
Fith and Sixth Seat Installation
Fith and Sixth Seat
CE-772 and After; D-10097, D-10120 and
CE-772 and After; 0-10097, D-10120 and
Pith and Sixth Seat Removal
After)
E-1241 and After; EA-1 and
(E-llll,
Stowage (E-llll,
After)
After)
After)
After)
After)
Vertical Position
Horizontal Position
Headliner Removal
CE-929 and After; CJ-156 and After; D-10348,
E-1551, E-1569, E-1594 and After; EA-21, EA-28, EA-33 and After)
(CE-919, CE-923, CE-925, CE-927,

D-10353 and After; E-1422,
Header Installation
(CE-919, CE-923, CE-925, CE-927,
CE-929 and After; CJ-156 and After; D-10348,
D-10353 and After; E-1422, E-1551, E-1569, E-1594 and After; EA-21, EA-28, EA-33 and
Forward
Forward
A22
After)
Carry-Through Spar
Cover Removal
Carry-Through Soar
Cover Installation
25-CONTENTS
Nov
10/00Pagel
Raytheon Aircraft
CHAPTER 25

PAGE
SUBJEC7
25-60-00
Emergency Description
and
Operation
Locator Transmitter
Emergency
Communications
Components Corporation ELT TR70-17
and TR70-13
Narco ELT 10
Dorne and
Margolin
ELT
Artex ELT 110-4
Emergency-
Components Corporation Battery Replacement
Battery
Pack
Testing
the
Testing
the Communications
Emergency
Testing the Narco
Replacement
11
Locator Transmitter
Components Corporation
the Dorne and
Testing
the Artex ELT 110-4
Margolin
ELT TR70-13 and TR70-17
11
11
ELT 10
Testing
2Nov10/00
Margolin Battery Replacement
Atrex ELT 110-4
3
5
Battery Replacement
Dome and
Page
Locator Transmitter Maintenance
Communications
Narco
Emergency
ELT
25-CONTENTS
12
12
A22
Ral~heon Aircraft
CHAPTER 25
LIST OF PA GE EFFECTIVITY
PAGE
DATE
P&Effectivity
Nov 10/00
25-Contents
Nov 10/00
Nov10/00
Nov 10/00
Nov 10/00
Nov 10/00
Nov 10/00
Nov 10/00
Nov 10/00
Nov 10/00
Oct 16/92
Oct16/92
Oct 16/92
Oct 16/92
Oct 16/92
Oct16/92
Oct 16/92
Oct 16/92
Oct 16/92
10
Oct 16/92
11
Oct 16/92
12
Oct 16/92
13
Oct 16/92
25-00-00
25-60-00
A22
25-EFFECT~VITY
Nov
10/0 Page
Raytheon Aircraft
GENERAL
FLIGHT COMPARTMENTAND PASSENGER COMPARTMENT SEA TING

On all serials except CJ-149 and after, the pilot and copilot seat backs fold forward to facilitate passengers entering
and leaving the airplane. Airplane serials CJ-149 and after have locking seat backs on the pilot and copilot seats
which
can
be folded forward
by rotating the seat back release lever, located on the lower inboard side of each seat.
copilots seat on the upper right corner is also used to fold the copilots seat for-
An additional lever located behind

ward for
access
to the passenger seats.
The passenger seat backs can be folded forward by rotating the seat back release lever located
side of each seat. All passenger seats have locking backs.
To
adjust the pilot, copilot,
on
the lower inboard
and passenger seats forward or aft, an adjustment lever, located beneath the front of the
can then be slid to the desired position.
seats, must be pulled up. The seat

A seat back
adjustment lever, located on the lower inboard side of the pilot, copilot, passenger, and on the fifth and
(A36 Series), enables the seat back to be adjusted to several positions. It is controlled by a mechanical,
three position cam lock. An optional seat installation is available whereby the adjustment of the copilot and passenger seat backs are controlled by a loton lock lever located on the forward inboard side of the seat bottom.
sixth seats
Airplane serials E-2104, E-2111 and after, and EA-389 and after are equipped with vertically adjusting seats in the
flight compartment (copilots seat is optional). The seat is raised and lowered by gas springs mounted underneath
the seat. The seat is adjustable through a arrange of 1.3 inches for improved visibility and crew comfort. The raising
and lowering action is initiated by pulling up on a release lever located on the front RH side of the seat. When the
release lever is raised, two ratchet type camlocks are disengaged from sector gears attached to the gas springs
mounted on each side undeneath the seat, allowing the gas spring piston rods to extend or retract to raise or lower
the seat. To raise the seat the pilots weight must be shifted forward. To lower the seat the weight must be shifted
to the rear to overcome the gas spring tension.
P~2
25-00-00
Raytheon Aircraft
GENERAL
PILOT AND COPILOT SEA T REMOVAL

a.
Remove the seat stops at the aft end of the
b.
Pull up on the fore and aft

mounting tracks.
adjustment
mounting
tracks..
lever located beneath the front of each seat, and slide the seat off the
PILOTAND COPILOT SEA T INSTALLA TION
NOTE
If shims
which
a.
were
installed in the seat support, they should be reinstalled in the same location from
removed to achieve proper seat locking engagement with the seat track.
they were
Align the seat guide
in the
same
location
b.
Pull up
and
ensure
c.
If the lock
on
as
with the seat track. If shims
that from which
they
were
the fore and aft
that the seat is
pin
does not
with shims. Use shims
as
adjustment lever and

securely in place.
align
were
installed in the front seat
guide, they
should be reinstalled
removed.
slide the seat onto the seat track. Release the
with the holes in the center seat track, it will be necessary to

locking pin with the holes in the seat track.
adjustment lever
reposition the guides
needed to center the
NOTE
Shims
(three
The shims
d.
Pull up
that the
e.
on
inches
are
long X 0.3 inch wide) may be fabricated form 0.016 6061-T6 Sheet aluminum.
placed inside the seat guide and formed around the guide. Refer to Figure 2.
the fore and aft
locking pin
has
adjustment lever and slide the seat through the full

positive engagement in all holes of the seat track.
travel of seat
adjustment.
Ensure
Install the seat stops at the aft end of the seat track.
NOTE
When
airplane serials CJ-149 and after are used for aerobatics and parachutes are worn, the headpilot and copilot seats must be removed and the seat back cushions rotated over the
rests for the
seat backs and reattached to the bottom of the seat backs. The headrest
can
then be reinstalled.
PASSENGER SEA T REMOVAL

a.
When
airplane serials CJ-149 and afterare being operated in the aerobatics category, the passenger seats
gravity requirements.
may
need to be removed in order to meet the center of

b.
Remove the seat stops at the aft end of the seat tracks.
c.
Pull up
mounting
Page
on
the fore and aft
adjustment lever, located beneath the front
track.
2Nov10/00
25-00-00
of each seat, and slide the seat off the
Aircraft
~I
SECTOR
GEAR
GAS SPRING
iB
RELEASE
ACTUATOR
LEVER
ROD
,o
TORQUE
TUBE
ADJUSTIING
LEVER
EA258
om~man.nl
Vertically Adjusting
Figure 1
A22
Seat
25I00-00
Nov
10/0 Page
Raytheon Aircraft
SHIMS
MAKE FROM .016 6061-T6 ALUMINUM

.3 INCHES
SUIOUIOE
T~----
NMES
CENTER
SEAT TRACK
EA258
CENTER FRONT SEAT LEG
SHIM
VIEW FROM FRONT
Seat Track Shims
Figure
PA SSENGER SEA T INSTALLA TION
Align
b.
Pull up on the fore and aft adjustment lever and slide the seat onto the
that the seat is securely in place.
the seat
guides
with the slots in the
a.
mounting
tracks.
mounting
tracks. Release the lever and
ensure
c.
Reinstall the seat stops at the aft end of the
FIFTH SEA T REMOVAL
(CE-748,
a.
Remove the two bolts at the lower aft
b.
Remove the seat
by removing
mounting
tracks.
CE-772 AND AFTER; D-10097, 0-10120 AND
portion
AFTER)
of the seat bottom.
the extrusion at the forward top side of the hatshelf. Reinstall the extrusion
on
the hatshelf.
FIFTH SEA T INSTALLA TION
(CE-748
CE-772 AND AFTER; D- 1 0097 0-10120 AND
a.
Remove the extrusion from the hatshelf.
b.
Instail the extrusion along with the seat back
c.
Install the seat bottom, seat belts, and the two
Nov
25-00-00
retaining strap
securing
on
AFTER)
the hatshelf.
bolts.
A22
Ray~heon Aircraft
FIFTH SEA T STOWAGE

a.
Pull forward
forward side
on
on
the lower
(CE-748, CE-772 AND AFTER;
D- 10097 0-10120 AND
of the seat back until the seat back is in
portion
the seat bottom, rotate the seat bottom to
horizontal
position,
and
position
retaining strap
into
position.
vertical
AFTER)
position. Lift up
the seat bottom
on
the
legs par-
allel with the seat bottom.

b.
Lower the seat back into
vertical
position and snap
FIFTH AND SIXTH SEA T REMOVAL

a.
Fold the bottom of the seat up to
b.
Remove the seat attach
(E- 1 I 1 1,
vertical
position
the
E- 1241 AND
AFTER; EA-1 AND AFTER)
and fold the seat support in the retract
position.
pins.
FIFTH AND SIXTH SEA T INSTALLA TION
(E- 1 I 1 I,
E- 124 1 AND AFTER; EA- I AND
a.
Positionthe seats.
b.
Install the seat attach
c.
Fold the seat bottom and seat support down and snap the support into the floor base.
AFTER)
pins.
FIFTH AND SIXTH SEA T STOWAGE
(E- I 1 I I,
The fifth and sixth seats may be folded either in

This may be accomplished as follows:
E-124 I AND AFTER; EA-1 AND
horizontal
or
vertical
position
to
provide
AFTER)
additional cargo space.
VERTICAL POSITION
vertical position.
a.
Fold the seat bottom up to
b.
Fold the seat support into the retract
c.
Position the seat
against the
rear
position.
bulkhead in
vertical
position.
HORIZONTAL POSITION
support into
a.
Fold the seat
b.
Fold the seat back forward and
retract
position
position
and
on
position
the seat bottom
on
the floorboard.
top of the seat bottom.
NOTE
seating arrangement is available (A36 and A36TC series only) that enables the third and
fourth passenger seats to be turned facing aft. When this arrangement is used, the fifth and sixth
seats must be moved four (4) inches forward to maintain proper weight and balance. If the seats
are returned to a standard seating arrangement (facing forward), the fifth and sixth seats MUST be
A club
moved back to their
original position. Holes are located in the floorboard under the carpeting to famounting brackets and the seat support base. Is is recommended that
cilitate installation of the side
both the third and fourth passenger seats face the
~n
same
direction at all times.
25-00-00
Raytheon Aircraft
CE-929 AND AFTER; CJ- 156

E-1569, E-1594 AND AFTER;
E-1422,
E-1551,
AFTER;
(CE-919, CE-923, CE-925, CE-927,
HEADLINER REMOVAL
AND AFTER; D-10348, D-10353 AND

EA-21, EA-28, EA-33 AND AFTER)
described in this
a.
Remove the seat backs
b.
Removethe aftbulkheadclosure.
c.
Working through
as
the aft bulkhead,
remove
Chapter.
the tape from around the air ducts that connects the air duct to the
headliner duct.
which hold the overhead console in
d.
Remove the
e.
Disconnect the wires to the
f.
Remove the window
g.
Removethe doortrim.
h.
Remove the
screws
light
and
remove
place.
the console.
moldings.
glareshield.
Refer to
Chapter
39-10-00.
Remove the windshield trim.
j.
Remove the garment
loop fasteners. These hook and loop fasteners

together.
the headliner to disconnect the fabric hook and
k.
Gently pull
are
located wherever the
I.
Separate
on
hanger.
airplane
frame and headliner
come
the forward air ducts from the air duct in the headliner. A
spatula
or
similar tool may be used to work
between the ducts to work the sealer loose.

m.
toward the front,

n.
or
aft of the
Remove the headliner
wiring to the headliner lights. (This connector is located

pilots side window.)
through
near
the center of the headliner
the door.
HEADLINER INSTALLA TION
(CE-919, CE-923, CE-925, CE-927, CE-929 AND AFTER; CJ- 156
AND AFTER; D- 1034$ D-1 0353 AND
AFTER; E- 1422, E- 1551, E-1569, E- 1594 AND AFTER;
EA-21, EA-28, EA-33 AND AFTER)

airplane
a.
Place the headliner in the
b.
Connect the electrical
c.
Connect the forward ventilation ducts. Seal ducts with adhesive
d.
Engage
e.
Install the garment
f.
Install the windshield trim.
g.
Install the
h.
Install
Nov
10100~t,
the hook and
wiring
loop
to the headliner
lights.
fasteners to hold headliner in
(54,
Chart 1,
91-00-00).
place.
hanger.
glareshield.
Refer to
Chapter
39-10-00.
thedoormoldings.
25-00-00
A22
Raytheon Aircraft
i.
Install the window
j.
Connect the wires to the console
k.
Connect the duct aft of the
I.
Install the bulkhead closure.
m.
Install the seats
molding.
rear
light
bulkhead closure.
described in this
as
and install the console.
Tape the joint with two-inch wide tape (55,
Chart 1,
91-00-00).
Chapter.
FORWARD CARRY-THROUGH SPAR COVER REMOVAL

a.
Remove the
b.
Remove emergency
c.
On aft side of spar cover,
d.
On forward side of spar cover,
e.
Remove RHaccesscover.
f.
From inside of RH
g.
Lift spar
pilot
cover
and
copilot
landing
gear crank
pull
access
and
seats.
from spar
back carpet and
pull
cover.
remove screws
back carpet and
cover, loosen
remove
cover
clamp
from spar
remove screws
and
from spar
air duct from
remove
cover.
cover.
plenum
and
grill
assembly.
from forward spar.
FORWARD CARRY-THROUGH SPAR COVER INSTALLATION
I CAUTION 1
Improper installation of the forward carry-through
emergency hand crank operation. Ensure the
without interference with the spar cover.
Centersparcoveron
b.
From inside of RH
c.
Install RH
d.
On forward side of spar cover, install
e.
On aft side of spar cover, Install
f.
Check the emergency
access cover
g.
Install emergency
h.
Install the
a2ln
pilot
cover, install air duct on
access
carry-through
plenum
and
grill assembly
and
tighten clamp.
assembly.
landing
spar
landing
and
may interfere with the landing gear

gear hand crank will engage and rotate
cover
theforward spar.
a.
the forward
spar
landing
copilot
screws to secure
screws to secure
gear hand crank to
forward end of spar
aft end of spar
ensure
cover
cover
and install carpet.
and install carpet.
handle will engage and rotate without interference with
cover.
gear crank
cover
to spar
cover.
seats.
25-00-00
NoVP:~Page
BEECHCRAFT
BONANZA SERIES
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
DESCRIPTION AND OPERA-
EMERGENCY
TION
EMERGENCY LOCATOR TRANSMITT~R

The
airplane
is
with
equipped
an
automatically
actu-
ated emergency locator transmitter (ELT) to assist in

the tracking and recovery of the airplane and crew in
the event of a crash or emergency landing. The ELT
a
battery-powered emergency
(ELT), an antenna and a switch
accessible through a spring-loaded door in the right
side of the fuselage adjacent to the ELT. The output
frequencies of the ELT are 121.5 and 243.0 MHz,
simultaneously. Range is approximately line of sight.
The ELT is mounted near the right side of the fuselage, at approximate, F. S. 230.00.
of
consists
system
impact switch which will actuate the ELT automatically upon impact of the airplane. The TR70-13 also
has a remote switch which is accessible through a
small door in the right side of the fuselage.
The
placarded switch positions are REARM-ARM-XMIT.
The XMIT position is momentary and is used to test
the operation of the ELT. The ARM position is used
to arm the impact switch for automatic actuation upon
impact of the airplane. The REARM position is used
to reset the impact switch after testing the ELT.
locator transmitter
NARCO ELT 10
(Figure 2)
The
Narco ELT
remote switch
EA-81
after,
10
is
EA-411,
thru
CE-906 thru CE-1032.
The antenna for the ELT is mounted
top of the
fuselage at F.S. 195 on airplanes D-10097, D-10120
and after; E-llll, E-1241 thru E-2147; CE-748, CE-772
thru CE-1032; EA-1 thru EA-411 and CJ-149 thru
the XMIT
on
installed
(XMIT-ARM)
on
with a two-position
airplanes D-10347 and
to test the ELT
position
tion for automatic
or
The Narco ELT 10 is installed with

remote switch
CJ-156 and after, CE-1033 and after and EA-412 and

after.
thru
CORPORATION
placed in
posi-
in the ARM
operation upon impact of the air-
CJ-155. The antenna is mounted under the dorsal fin

forward of the vertical stabilizer on airplanes
COMPONENTS
and
plane.
just
COMMUNICATIONS
E-2147
thru
E-1687
The remote switch is
~TEST-ARM-XMIT)
on
a three-position
airplanes E-2424
E-2693, EA-480 thru EA-530 and CE-1241 thru
CE-1646.
The TEST and XMIT position are used for

testing the ELT. The ARM position is used for automatic operation upon impact of the airplane.
ELT TR70-17 AND TR70-13

The
(Figure 1)
Narco
ELT
ON-OFF-ARM.
There
ration
on
are
two
Communication
ELT~ being
used.
Component Corpo-
The TR70-17 ELT is installed
D-10120 thru D-10196; E-llll,

E-1406; EA-1 and EA-2; CE-748, CE-772
airplanes D-10097,
E-1241
thru
thru CE-828 and CJ-149.
The TR70-13 ELT is installed
thru D-10346, E-1407 thru E-~686,

EA-3 thru EA-80, CE-829 thru CE-905 and CJ-150 thru
CJ-155.
can be
Both, the TR70-17 and TR70-13,
on
airplanes 0-10197
replaced
or
with the Narco ELT 10
the Artex ELT 110-4
by Kit
by
Kit No. 101-3046-1
10
has
The ELT
airplane and used
control
can
switch
decaled
be removed from the
portable unit. In this event,

placed in the ON
position to transmit continuously. The OFF position
on the ELT prevents operation of the unit and the
ARM position is used to arm the impact switch for
automatic actuation upon impact of the airplane.
as a
the ELT control switch would be
The Narco ELT 10

110-4
can be replaced with the Artex ELT

by Kit No. 101-3127-1.
No. 101-3127-1.
DORNE AND MARGOLIN ELT

The TR70-17 ELT is mounted in the
the
airplane
through a small door in
the right side of the fuselage. The placarded switch
positions are ARM-OFF-ON. The OFF position preThe ON position is
vents operation of the ELT.
momentary and is used to test the operation of the
ELT. The ARM position arms an impact switch which
will actuate the ELT automatically upon impact of the
airplane.
so
(Figure 3)
control switch is accessible
The TR70-13 has
control switch which is not
acces-
It is placarded
airplane.
OFF-ON-ARM. The OFF position prevents operation
of the ELT. The ON position can be used for manual
operation of the ELT. The ARM position arms an
sible
from
outside
the
The Dorne and
Margolin
ELT is installed
on
airplanes
CE-1033 thru CE-1240, CJ-156 and after, E-2148 thru

E-2423 and EA-412 thru EA-479.
An AUTO-OFF-ON control switch located
controls the
of the unit.
on
the ELT
When the switch is
operation
position, the ELT will transmit for testing
The AUTO position arms an
or manual operation.
impact switch which will actuate the ELT automatically upon impact of the airplane. The OFF position
A
remote
prevents operation of the ELT.
TEST-AUTO-XMIT switch is used for testing and
manual actuation of the ELT. The TEST position is a
on
the ON
25-60-00
Page
A16
Oct 16/92
BEECHCRAFT
BONANZA SERIES
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
momentary switch which will

mit.
The XMIT
position
the AUTO
operation and
cause
the ELT to trans-
turns the unit
position
on
arms
for manual
the
unit to
operate when the impact switch is actuated upon
impact of the airplane.

The Dorne and
Margolin ELT can be replaced with the

by Kit No. 101-3127-1.
Artex ELT 110-4
ARTEX ELT 110-4
(Figure 4)
The Artex ELT 110-4 is installed
on
airplanes
CE-1647
and after, E-2694 and after and EA-531 and after.
An ON-OFF control switch
on
the ELT controls the
operation of the unit. When the switch is in the ON

position, the ELT will transmit for testing or manual
operation. Place the switch in the OFF position to
An internal impact
discontinue the transmission.
switch will actuate the ELT automatically upon impact
The remote ARMED/RESET-ON
of the airplane.
switch is used to arm the ELT or to manually actuate
the ELT. When placed in the ON position, the ELT will
transmit. The ARMED/RESET position arms the ELT
to operate automatically upon impact of the airplane.
To reset the ELT, cycle the control svi~itch on the ELT
to the ON position, then to the OFF position, and cycle
the remote switch to the ON position, then to the
ARMED/RESET position.
25-60-00
Page
Oct 16/92
A16
BEECHCRAFT
BONANZA SERIES
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
EMERGENCY
or
TR A NS MI TT~R
LOCA TOR
EMERGENC Y
MAINTENANCE
counter
replacing
life
useful
and
batteries, such
of
over-the-
those sold for
as
flashlights, portable radios, etc.,

ally unknown.
the ELT is normally limited to

battery. The following is a list of the
various conditions which warrant battery replaceMaintenance
the
acceptable suppliers, since
other
condition
are
usu-
on
CAUTION
the
The ELT switch should not be turned ON
ment:
unless the ELT is connected to its associ-
Visual
a.
corrosion
shows
case
life of the
signs
of
leakage,
ated antenna
or a
50-ohm
dummy
load.
unsecured leads.
noted
date
Elapsed replacement
b.
battery
or
inspection
on
the
CORCOMPONENTS
COMMUNICA TIONS
PORA TION BA TTER Y REPLACEMENT
(this date represents 50% of the useful
battery).
NOTE
NOTE
(Artex ELT 110-4) or Kit

(Narco ELT 10) may be
installed on these airplanes. Referto the
appropriate procedure when one of these
kits is installed on your airplane.
Kit No. 101-3127-1
battery is the length

battery may be stored
without losing its ability to continuously
The useful life of the

of time which the
No.
101-3046-1
a.
Remove the cabin aft
operate the ELT for 48 hours.

c.
After any emergency
d.
After
one
use,
gain
cumulative hour of
operation of
use.
After
f.
If the transmitter is stored in
an area
where
temperature is normally above 100"F (380C), the

battery life will be shortened.
the
Avoid
in
storing
excess
the batteries at
of 1300F
d.
on
temperatures
(550C).
battery
life
and
replacement
to
on
the ELT
position.
On the TR70-17 ELT,

the ELT to the
remove
mounting
four
bracket.
screws
On the
TR70-13 ELT, rotate the release knob on the base to

release the ELT. Remove the ELT from the airplane.
e.
Information
upholstery panel
fuselage.
Disconnect the antenna cable. On the

c.
TR70-13 ELT, disconnect the remote switch wiring.
attaching
CAUTION
to the aft
Place the ARM-OFF-ON switch
b.
in the OFF
unknown duration.
e.
access
is
included in the data furnished with each ELT, and is

usually placarded on the battery,
i"g
base
f.
Remove the
on
screws
which hold the mount-
the transmitter and
Remove the old
electrical connector.
remove
the base.
battery and disconnect

battery.
the
Discard the old
NOTE
WARNING
Replacement batteries should be obtained
only from ELT and aircraft manufacturers
DO NOT discard the
battery in
fire.
25-60-00
Page 3
A16
Oct 16/92
BEECHCRAFT
BONANZA SERIES
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
TR70-13 ELT
CONTROL
SWITCH
A
RELEASE
KNOB
DETAIL
SWITCH
ACCESS
CONTROL
SWITCH
SWITCH
TR70-17 ELT
(REMOTE)
DOOR
POSITION
PLACARD
SWITCH
POSITION
PLACARD
REMOTE
SWITCH
cbi~
REMOTE SWITCH
FOR TR70-13 ELT
DETAIL
SWITCH
ACCESS
DOOR
DETAIL
A
C9101610
Communications
Components Corporation Installation

Figure 1
25-60-00
Page 4
Oct 16/92
A16
BEECHCRAFT
BONANZA SERIES
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
Inspect for, and properly treat, any corrog.

that may be indicated in the area where the
battery was installed.
Ision
h.
Connect
fresh
battery
and install it in the
compartment.
the base and
j.
Install the transmitter in the airplane and

On the TR70-13 ELT, con-
screws.
na
attach the antenna cable.
wiring.
nect the remote switch
The
future
on
To avoid
to the
damage
antenna
replacement
new
the ELT in
visible
of the ELT.
inspections
useful life of the
battery
as
should
date
area.
tab
the
and
on
handling
the control head.
the four screws attaching

battery casing and slide the
trol head and battery case apart. The battery
nection leads are approximately 3-inches long.
f.
Remove
control head to the
This date is 50% of the

defined by the battery
Do not
remove
the sealant
battery pack
or a
on
the inside
watertight seal
not be made when the ELT unit

as
con-
NOTE
of the
Test the ELT
the
con-
be
This will aid in
manufacturer.
I.
or
the upper end, care must be

exercised in extending the portable anten-
Replace
k.
antenna.
portable
CAUTION
plastic
i.
marked
Extend the
e.
instructed in TESTING THE
is
lip
will
reas-
sembled.
EMERGENCY LOCATOR TRANSMITTER.

m.
Install the cabin aft
g.
upholstery panel.
Disconnect the
battery terminals
PC board. Discard the old
NARCO B A TTER Y REPLA CEMENT
(Figure 2)
DO NOT discard the
(Artex ELT 110-4) may

airplanes. Refer to
the Artar ELT 110-4 procedure when this
kit is installed on your airplane.
be installed
b.
on
to the ah
c.
upholstery panel
to
the
antenna
cable
from
i.
fire.
Unlatch the mounting strap and
ELT from the
airplane.
remove
for and
properly
treat any
area
Connect the terminals of the
on
corro-
where the
new
battery
the
Using a spatula, apply a bead of sealant

j.
(supplied with each battery pack) around the area of
the control head which is joined with the battery case
when reassembied.
ELT. Disconnect the remote switch wiring from the

terminals on the ELT.
d.
to the bottom of the transmitter PC board.
position.
Disconnect
Inspect
sion that may be indicated in the

fuselage.
Place the ARM-OFF-ON control switch
the ELT in the OFF
h.
these
Remove the cabin ah
access
battery in
101-3127-1
Kit No.
gain
battery.
WARNING
NOTE
a.
battery by unsnapping the
from the bottom of the transmitter
the
NOTE
This
sealant
provides
watertight
seal
when the unit is assembled.
25-60-00
Page
A16
Oct 16/92
BEECHCRAFT
BONANZA SERIES
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
SWITCH ACCESS DOOR

REMOTE SWITCH
SWITCH
POSITION
PLACARD
CONTACT
SEPARATOR
CONTROL HEAD
MOUNTING
ATTACHING SCREW
(4)
STRAP
PORTABLE
LATCH
PORTABLE
ANTENNA
ANTENNA
CONTACT
CONTACT
FINGER
DETAIL
FINGER
PORTABLE ANTENNA BLADE

NOT
MAKING CONTACT
FIXED ANTENNA
CABLE CONNECTOR
CONTACT
SEPARATOR
CONTROL
SWITCH
COAX CABLE TO
AIRPLANE
TO
ANTENNAPORTABLE
STOP PIN
RESET
REMOTElrg
FIXED ANTENNA
HANDLE
SWITCH
C9101611
DETAIL
Narco ELT 10 Installation
Figure 2
25-60-00
Page
Oct 16/92
A16
BEECHCRAFT
BONANZA SERIES
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
k.
head
control
Insert the
battery
section
into the
being careful not to pinch the wires and

four attaching screws. Wipe any excess
s.
upholstery panel.
case,
install the
DORNE
AND
MARGOLIN
BA TTER Y
sealant from the outside of the unit.
(Figure 3)
NOTE
NOTE
If the four
the
screw
battery
case
Stow the
I.
holes do not line up, rotate

1800 and reinsert.
portable
Kit No. 101-3127-1
(Artex ELT 110-4) or Kit

(Narco ELT 10) may be
installed on these airplanes. Refer to the
appropriate procedure when one of these
kits is installed on your airplane.
antenna.
CAUTION
Exercise extreme
in order to avoid
the
or
plastic tab
gain
101-3046-1
a.
Remove the cabin ah
access
to the aft
upholstery panel
to
fuselage.
the upper end.
on
Install the transmitter in the
m.
secure
care
to the antenna
damage
No.
the
b.
Make certain the ELT is turned off.
c.
Disconnect the antenna cable.
d.
Disconnect the remote switch.
e.
Remove
airplane and
mounting strap.
Connect the fixed antenna cable to the ELT.

(plastic) separator is inserted
between the portable antenna contact and the portn.
Ensure that the contact
able antenna
as
shown in
Figure
NOTE
With the contact
f.
not in
be
place, a
transmitted,
for
separator
very weak signal may

which is strong enough
on
h.
wiring
Remove the
remove
screws
Disconnect the
from the bottom of the
battery
and discard it.
WARNING
DO NOT discard the
battery
The
in
fire.
the
Inspect for
i.
and
properly
sion that may be indicated

new
replacement
the ELT in
visible
date
area.
should
be
battery
treat any corroarea
where the
replaced.
Connect the
j.
k.
manufacturer.
marked
as instructed in TESTING THE
LOCATOR TRANSMITTER in this chap-
Test the ELT
was
in the
This will aid in
inspections of the ELT. This date is 50% of the

useful life of the battery as defined by the battery
future
r.
in
the bottom.
to the
RESET button and place the

p.
ARM-OFF-ON switch on the ELT in the ARM position.
on
ELT
the ELT.
Press
q.
marked
the
Remove the ELT from the airplane.
g.
ELT and
use.
Connect the remote switch
o.
holding
screws
functional
test, but too weak for emergency
terminals
the
place.
2.
future
The
on
new
the ELT in
inspections
useful life of the
new
battery.
replacement
a
visible
date
area.
should
be
This will aid in
of the ELT.
This date is 50% of the
battery
defined
the
.rerutcafunamyrebyttab
as
25-60-00
Page
Ale
Oct 16/92
BEECHCRAFT
BONANZA SERIES
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
SWITCH ACCESS DOOR

REMOTE
CABLE TO ANTENNA
SWITCH
DORNE AND MARGOLIN ELT
SWITCH
POSITION
PLACARD
CONTROL SWITCH
(AUTO
OFF
ON)
REMOTE
SWITCH
WIRING
DETAIL
A
C9101612
Dorne And
Margolin
Figure
ELT Installation
3
25-60-00
Page
Oct 16/92
Ale
BEECHCRAFT
BONANZA SERIES
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
i.
Install
bottom
the
of the
ELT
and
WARNING
the
screws.
Do not discard
Install the ELT in the
m.
the
screws
which hold it in
Test the ELT
n.
as
airplane
battery pack in
fire.
and install
NOTE
place.
Replacement battery packs should be

only from ELT and airplane manufacturers or from other acceptable sup-
EMERGENCY LOCATOR TRANSMITTER in this
obtained
chap-
ter.
since the condition and useful life

over-the-counter batteries,
such
as
those sold for flashlights, portable radios,
pliers,
o.
ARTEX
~LT
REPLAC~MENT
of
upholstery panel.
1 10-4
BA TTER Y
NOTE
procedure
must be used for
that have Kit No.
101-3127-1
installed
on
defined
Remove the cabin aft
a.
to the ah
access
b.
the OFF
usually unknown.
A new battery pack replacement date must

i.
be marked on the outside of the transmitter.
The
date is 50% of the useful life of the battery pack as
airplanes
them.
gain
are
i.
Inspect for and properly treat any corrosion that may be indicated in the area where the
(Figure 4)
This
etc.,
PACK
upholstery panel
to
fuselage.
k.
nector
Place the control switch
(12)
on
Connect the
battery pack
electrical
con-
(10).
i.
the ELT in
position,
by the battery pack manufacturer.
screws
Secure the
(8).
battery pack to the

gaskets
Make certain that all
ELT with the

are
properly
aligned and in good condition.

c.
the
Loosen the two thumb screws (1) securing

frame cap (2) to the mounting frame
mounting
base ~5).
d.
Disconnect the antenna cable
(4) from the
ELT.
e.
Disconnect the remote switch harness
from the ELT
(3)
(11).
o.
base
Remove the ELT
frame base
(11) from the mounting
h.
Remove the
to the ELT
screws
(11).
connector
(10)
(8) securing the bat-
remote
switch
harness
(3)
connect to
Install the ELT
(11) in the mounting frame

Position the ELT in the mounting frame
that the arrow on the top of the ELT is pointed
so
in the direction of
p.
battery pack
the
(4) through the

(11).
(5).
(5).
Disconnect the
g.
from the ELT.
tery pack
Insert
n.
cable
connect to the ELT
through the mounting frame cap (2) and

the ELT (11).
base
f.
Insert the antenna
m.
mounting frame cap (2) and
flight.
Install the
mounting
screws (1).
mounting
(5) and
frame base
q.
the OFF
frame cap (2) onto the

with the thumb
secure
Place the control switch
~12)
on
the ELT in
position.
2,60-00
Page
Ale
Oct 16/92
BEECHCRAFT
BONANZA SERIES
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
14
15
DETAIL
11
12
(4
/Ilrl~
"O
~I
j
10
i.
THUMBSCREW
2.
MOUNTING FRAMECAP
3.
REMOTE SWITCH HARNESS
4.
ANTENNA CABLE
5.
MOUNTING FRAME BASE
6.
SCREW
7.
WASHER
3.
SCREW
9.
BATTERY PACK
10.
BATTERY PACK CONNECTOR
11.
ELT
12.
CONTROL SWITCH
13.
SWITCH POSITION PLACARD
14.
ACCESSDOOR
15.
REMOTE SWITCH
~tl
s-
r
5
DETAIL
C9101613
Artex Elt 110-4 Installation

Figure 4
25-60-00
Page 10
Oct 16/92
A16
BEECHCRAFT
BONANZA SERIES
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
Test the ELT
r.
as
EMERGENCY TRANSMITTER in this

s.
THE
TES TING
TR A NS MI TTER
chapter.
upholstery panel.
LOCA TOR
EMERGENCY
TESTING THE COMMUNICATIONS COMPONENTS CORPORATION ELT TR70-13 AND

TR 70-1 7
(Figure 1)
Turn
a.
the
on
airplanes COMM-1
and tune
it to 121.5 MHz.
Any time maintenance is performed on the ELT, the

following operational test must be performed. The
FAA/DOT allows free space transmission tests from
airplane anytime within five minutes after each
b.
Turn
SPEAKER
the
COMM-1
position and place
audio
switch
to
the
the volume control in
the center of its range.
the
hour.
The test time is
warble
tone,
or
generally
approximately
The control tower should be notified that

about to be
NOTE
three sweeps of the

a one-second test.
a
test is
Monitor
frequency on COMM
operating.
to
be
certain the radio is
performed.
Improper testing of the ELT could trigger false alerts

create frequency jamming of real emergency
Be certain that all procedures are
transmissions.
closely followed and that monitoring of frequencies
occurs to ensure the ELT switches are placed in the
proper positions after testing is complete. if the test
is performed with the ELT removed from the airplane,
Federal
Communications Commission regulations
require the testing be done in a screened or shielded
and
test room, or in a test enclosure that will

self-contained ELT and an antenna.
hold the
placed
ON
connected to
or a
50-ohm
or
approximately
the ELT signal.
the
one
NOTE
A
distinctive
downward
sweeping
tone
should have been heard from the monitor-
ing receiver during
the test.
if the tone
was
heard, the ELT is functioning properly.
If
~assuming that
the VHF transceiver is operating properly),
the battery is probably disconnected, outdated or discharged.
The ELT switch must not be

its associated antenna
second and monitor
there
CAUTION
position unless the ELT is
Place the TR70-17 ELT switch to ON
c.
TR70-13 remote switch to XMIT for
was no
audible tone
in the
dummy
d.
to the OFF
After the test, place the TR70-17 ELT switch

position or the TR70-13 ELT remote switch
to the REARM
load,
appear
position.
completely.
The audio
signal
should dis-
NOTE
e.
Tests
should
not
be
longer than
three
audio sweeps. One audio sweep may be

defined as amplitude modulating the carrier
with
an
downward
audio
frequency
sweeping
range of not less than

700 Hz, within the range 1600 to 300 Hz,
and a sweep repetition rate between two
over
should
be conducted
in the first five minutes of any hour. If

the operational tests must be made at a
only
time not included within the first five minafter the
audible
position.
signal present.
If the ELT continues to
the remote switch is in the ARM
operate,
position.
check that
On the
g.
switch to ON, then
TR70-17 ELT, place the control

place it firmly in the ARM position.
On the TR70-13 ELT, gain access to the ELT control
switch and place it in the OFF position.
The audio
signal should stop. Reset the.TR70-13 ELT to the
ARM position.
hour, the tests should be
coordinated with the nearest FAA tower
flight
f.
no
and four Hz. Tests
utes
Place the ELT switch in the ARM
There should be
or
service station.
Operational testing of installed ELTs must be accomplished by the following appropriate procedure:
TESTING TI-IE NARCO ELT 10
(Figure 2)
a.
Turn
on
the
airplanes
COMM-1 and tune
it to 121.5 MHz.
2160-00
Page 11
A16
Oct 16/92
BEECHCRAFT
BONANZA SERIES
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
b.
audio
COMM-1
the
Turn
SPEAKER position and

e center of its range,
switch
tothe
place
Place the remote TEST-AUTO-XMIT switch
c.
in the TEST
mately
position and hold the switch for approxi

second.
one
NOTE
NOTE
Monitor
frequency on COMM
radio is operating,
certain the
to
be
econd and monitor the ELT
distinctive
(TEST-AUTO-XMIT,
approximately one
signal.
the
tone

audible tone
the
place
test,
the
or
the
the
place
test,
remote
position.
If the ELT continues to operate, be certain

Gain
switch is in the AUTO position.
to the ELT and check that the control switch
remote
position or the
position. The audio
disappear completely,
ensure
remote
access
XMIT-ARM switch to the ARM

should
out-
discharged.
After
f.
the
TEST-AUTO-XMIT switch to the AUTO
signal
If
was no
is in the AUTO
After
was
Monitor the emergency channel to

e.
the ELT has discontinued operation.
If
the VHF transceiver is
d.
if the tone
TEST-AUTO-XMIT switch in the AUTO
(assuming that
operating properly),
the battery is probably disconnected, outdated or discharged.
was no
the test,
battery is probably disconnected,
d.
sweeping
should have been heard from the monitoring receiver during the test, if the tone was
there
tone
audible tone (assuming that

the VHF transceiver is operating properly),
there
dated
downward
sweeping
NOTE
A
downward
ing receiver during
Place the remote ELT

MIT-ARM) switch to XMIT for
c.
distinctive
cycle
position
also.
If the ELT still continues to send a signal,

g.
the control switch on the ELT to the ON position
and then to the AUTO
to reset the ELT
position
impact
switch.
e.
or
operate, check that
remote XMIT- ARM switch is in the ARM
position
posi-
the TEST-AUTO-XMIT switch is in the AUTO
TESTING THE ARTEX ELT 110-4
(Figure 4)
tion.
Turn
a.
If the ELT continues to send
f.
signal, gain
on
the
airplanes
COMM 1 and tune
it to 121.5 MHz.
to the ELT and firmly press the reset switch

the front of the ELT and listen to ensure that the
access
on
audio
signal disappears
control switch
must
be in the ARM
position when
b.
the
audio
COMM-1
switch
to
the
position and place
NOTE
TESTING THE DORNE AND MARGOLIN ELT
Monitor
(Figure 3)
a.
Turn
SPEAKER
procedure.
the test
completing
from the COMM 1. The ELTs
frequency on COMM
operating.
to be
certain the radio is
Turn
on
the
airplanes COMM 1 and
tune
the
Place
c.
it to 121.5 MHz.
switch in the ON
remote
position
for
ARMED/RESET-ON
approximately
one sec-
end.
b.
SPEAKER
Turn
the
position
COMM-1
and
place
audio
switch
to
the
NOTE
distinctive downward sweeping tone

NOTE
ing
Monitor
certain the
frequency on COMM
radio is operating.
to
be
receiver
during the
test.
If the tone
was

there
was no
audible tone
(assuming
If
that
25-60-00
Page 12
Oct 16/92
A16
BEECHCRAFT
BONANZA SERIES
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
f.
the VHF transceiver is
operating properly),
battery is probably disconnected, outdated or discharged.
Gain
access
to the ELT and check that the control
switch is in the OFF

d.
After
the
ARMED/RESET-ON
place
test,
switch
in
the
the
ARMED/RESET
Monitor the emergency channel to

that the ELT has discontinued operation,
position also.
remote
position.
e.
operate, be certain
position.
the remote switch is in the ARMED/RESET
the
ensure
If the ELT still continues to send a signal,

g.
the
control
switch on the ELT to the ON and
cycle
then OFF
position
and then
ARMED/RESET
and the remote switch to the ON
position
to
reset the
ELT
impact switch.
"END"
25-60-00
Page
A16
13
Oct 16/92
C H A PT E
FLIGHT
CONTROLS
Raytheon Aircraft
FLIGHT CONTROLS
CHAPTER 27
TABLE OF CONTENTS
PAGE
SUBJECT
27-00-00
Flight
Controls
Description
and
Operation
Control Surfaces
Effect of
Temperature Upon Cable Tension
Taper Pins
27-1 0-00
Aileron and Tab
CE-772 and After; CJ-149 and After; D-10097, D-10120 and After; E-llll, E-1241 thru
2111 except E-1946 and E-2104; EA-1 thru EA-388 except EA-320)
(CE-748,
Single
Throw-Over Control Column
Control Column Arm Removal
Control Column Arm Installation
Rigging
the Control Column Arm Chain
Dual Control Arm

Dual Control Arm Removal
Dual Control Arm Installation
Rigging
The Dual Control Arm Chain
Aileron Removal
Aileron Installation
Rigging the Aileron
Control
Aileron Control Trimmer
System
(Single
Control Column
Airplanes)
Trimmer Removal
Trimmer Installation
6
6
Aileron Tabs
27-11-00
Aileron and Tabs
(E-1946, E-2104,
E-2111 and After; EA-320, EA-389 and
After)
1
Dual Control Column
A20
Control Column Chain Removal
Control Column Chain Installation
27-CONTENTS
Feb
26/9 Page
Raytheon Aircraft
CHAPTER 27
FLIGHT CONTROLS

PAGE
SUBJECT
Rigging
Adjustment
Control Column Chain

Control Column Roller
FoMlard Outer Tube Rollers
(Roil
on
the Inner
Control Column Support Roller Adjustment
Square Shaft)
(Attached
to the Instrument
Subpanel)
Aileron Removal
Aileron Installation
Aileron Control Cable Removal
Aileron Control Cable Installation
Rigging
the Aileron Control
System
11
Aileron Tab
Aileron Trim Tab Cable Removal
11
Aileron Trim Tab Cable Installation
11
Aileron Trim Tab
12
Rigging
Aileron Trim Tab Actuator Removal
12
Aileron Trim Tab Actuator Installation
12
Aileron Trim Tab Actuator
Disassembly
13
Assembly
14
Checking
Aileron Trim Tab Free
Aileron Trim Tab Free
14
Play
15
Play Inspection
27-20-00
(F33A, F33C, A36, A36TC and B36TC)
Rudder and Tab

Rudder
Rudder Removal
Rudder Installation
Rigging
the Rudder Control
System
27-21 -00
Ruddervator and Tab Maintenance Practices
Rudder(V35B)
Rudder
Rigging
Procedure
Ruddervator Removal
Ruddervator Installation
Page
beF2
26/99
27-CONTENTS
A20
Ray~heon Aircraft
CHAPTER 27
FLIGHT CONTROLS
SUBJECT
PAGE
Elevator Trim Tab Removal
Elevator Trim Tab Installation
Elevator and Tab
Elevator
(V35B)
Rigging
Inspection
Procedure
Electric Elevator Trim

Elevator Tab
Rigging
For
of Elevator Tabs
10
(Optional)
10
10
Rigging
12
Elevator Trim Tabs to Correct for Yaw
Right
Yaw
For Left Yaw
(Nose
(Nose
of
of
airplane
airplane
Elevator Tab Indicator Cable
Inspection
of Tab
tends to
tends to
move to the
move
right
with
to the left with
12
wings level)
wings level)
12
Replacement
12
Hinges
14
Trim Tab Actuator Removal
(V35B)
Trim Tab Actuator Installation
14
(V35B)
14
27-30-00
Elevator and Tab
(F33A, F33C, A36, A36TC, B36TC)
Elevator Removal
Elevator Installation
Rigging
the Elevator Control
System (CE-748,
CE-772 and After; CJ-149 and After; Prior to E-211 1
except E-1946 and E-2104; Prior to EA-389 except EA-320)
Rigging
the Elevator Control
Elevator Tab Indicator Cable
System (E-1946, E-2104,
Replacement (CE-748, CE-772 and After;

EA-320)
After)
CJ-149 and After; Prior to
E-2111 except E-1946 and E-2104; Prior to EA-389 except

Elevator Trim Tab Fonnrard Cable
(E-1946, E-2104,
Rigging
Replacement
6A
After)
the Elevator Trim Tab
6B
Elevator Trim Tab Actuator
6B

to CJ-156
except those
Disassembly (F33A, B36TC, A36TC

airplanes with Kit 33-4002-1 installed)

CJ-156 except those
A20
Assembly (F33A, B36TC, A36TC

airplanes with Kit 33-4002-1 installed)
and A36 except E-llll; F33C
and A36 except E-llll; F33C
prior
6B
prior to
6C
Disassembly (E-l 11 1 only)
Assembly (E-llll only). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
27-CONTENTS
Feb
26/99Page
Ral~heon Aircraft
CHAPTER 27
FLIGHT CONTROLS

PAGE
SUBJECT
Model F33C
incorporating
Kit
Disassembly
33-4002-1)
rating
Kit
Checking
After)
and After, and earlier
airplanes
8
Model F33C
Assembly
(CJ-156
(CJ-156
and After, and earlier
airplanes incorpo9
33-4002-1)
Elevator Tab Free
Play (CE-748,
CE-772 and After; E-l 111, E-1241 and After; CJ-149 and
11
Elevator Trim Tab Actuator Removal
(F33A, F33C, A36, A36TC
Elevator Trim Tab Actuator Installation
Elevator Trim Tab Actuator Color

Electric Elevator Trim
and
(F33A, F33C, A36, A36TC
Coding (F33A, F33C, A36,
B36TC)
and
B36TC)
A36TC and
B36TC)
11
12
12
12
(Optional)
12A
Model A36, A36TC and B36TC

Electric Elevator Trim Tab Servo Removal
12A
Electric Elevator Trim Tab Servo Installation
12A
Electric Elevator Trim Ground Checks
without
(Airplanes
Autopilot)
12A
128
Model F33A, F33C and V35B

Electric Trim Tab Actuator Removal
128
Electric Trim Tab Actuator Installation
128
New Tab Cable Installation
12B
Magnetic Clutch Removal
128
Magnetic
12B
Clutch Installation
Electric Trim Tab Actuator Brush
Replacement
Schedule
13
13
Magnetic Clutch Torque Test

27-31 -00
Stall
Warning/Safe Flight System Description
Stall
Stall
Operation
Warning System
Warning
Stall
and
1
1
Warning System
1
1
Adjustments
27-50-00
Description
Flaps
Removal
Flap
Page
beF4
26/99
and
Operation
Flaps
27-CO NTE NTS
A20
Ral~heon Aircraft
CHAPTER 27
FLIGHT CONTROLS

PAGE
SUBJECT
Flap Installation
Flap
Track Wear Limits
Flap
Limit Switch
Two-Position
Adjustment
Flaps (CE-748,
CE-722 thru CE-815; CJ-149; D-10097, D-10120 thru D-10178;

2
E-llll, E-1241 thru E-1370)
Flaps (CE-816
After)
Three-Position
EA-1 and
Flap
Position Indicator and
and After, CJ-150 and After; D-10179 and After; E-1371 and After;
2
5
Adjustment
Flap Motor Removal
Connecting
Flexible
Flap
Drive Shaft to
Flap
Motor Shaft
Flap Motor Installation
Flap
Shaft Removal
Flap Shaft Installation

Flap
Actuator Removal
Flap
Actuator Installation
Flap
Inner Flex Shaft Removal
Flap
Inner Flex Shaft Installation
Flap Actuator Disassembly
10
Flap Actuator Assembly
11
27-70-00
Gust Lock And
Damper
Control Lock
A20
27-CONTENTS
Feb
26/99Page
Qeec~craft
BONANZA SERIES
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
CHAPTER 27
REVISION
NUMBER
DATE
INSERTED
DATE
REMOVED
REASON
REMOVED
PAGE
NUMBER
27-1
Dec 11/92
Nov 15/93
Temporary
27-50-00
Page 4
Revision
27-2
27-2
27-50-00
Nov 15/93
NOTE: Insert this Record of
Temporary
Revisions after the
Chapter
27 divider tab.
Page 1
Nov 15/93
Ray~heon Aircraft
CHAPTER 27
FLIGHT CONTROLS
27-Effectivity
Pir-Contents
27-00-00
27-10-00
27-11-00
A20
DATE
PAGE
Feb 26/99
Feb 26/99
Feb 26/99
Feb 26/99
Feb 26/99
Feb 26/99
Feb 26/99
Feb 26/99
Aug
28/87
Aug
28/87
Mar 29/96
Aug 18/95
Aug
Mar 29/96
Mar 29/96
Mar 29/96
Aug18/95
Feb 26/99
Feb 26/99
Feb 26/99
Feb 26/99
Feb 26/99
Feb 26/99
Feb 26/99
Feb 26/99
Feb 26/99
10
Feb 26/99
11
Feb 26/99
12
Feb 26/99
13
Feb 26/99
27-EFFECTIVITY
18/95
Feb
26/99Page
Raytheon Aircraft
CHAPTER 27
FLIGHT CONTROLS
LIST OF PAGE EFFECTIVITY (CONTINUED)

PAGE
27-20-00
27-21-00
27-30-00
Page
beF2
26/99
27-EFFECTIVITY
DATE
14
Feb 26/99
15
Feb 26/99
16
Feb 26/99
17
Feb 26/99
Feb 26/99
Feb 26/99
Feb 26/99
Feb 26/99
Feb 26/99
Feb 26/99
Mar 29/96
Aug 18/95
Mar 29/96
Mar 29/96
Mar 29/96
Mar 29/96
Mar 29/96
Mar 29/96
Mar 29/96
10
Mar29/96
11
Mar 29/96
12
Mar 29/96
13
Mar 29/96
14
Mar 29/96
15
Mar 29/96
Aug 18/95
Aug 18/95
Aug 18/95
Aug 18/95
Aug
Aug 18/95
18/95
A20
Raylheon Aircraft
CHAPTER 27
FLIGHT CONTROLS
LIST OF PAGE EFFECTIVIN (CONTINUED)
PAGE
DATE
6A
Aug 18/95
6B
Aug 18/95
6C
Aug 18/95
Jun 20/91
May 31/85
May 31/85
10
Oct 7/83
11
May 31/85
12
Jun 20/91
12A
Jun 20/91
12B
Jun 20/91
13
Oct 7/83
27-31-00
May 9/80
27-50-00
Feb 26/99
Feb 26/99
Feb 26/99
Feb 26/99
Feb 26/99
Feb 26/99
Feb 26/99
Feb 26/99
Feb 26/99
10
Feb 26/99
11
Feb 26/99
12
Feb 26/99
13
Feb 26/99
27-70-00
A20
27-EFFECTIVITY
May
9/80
Feb
26/99Page
BEECHCRAFT
BONANZA SERIES
MA\NTENANCE MANUAL
DESCRIPTION AND
FLIGHT CONTROLS
OPERATION
position. The switch is placarded UP, OFF,

DOWN. The markings on this position
and
indicator will
CONTROL
be UP
100, 200 and DN,
SURFACES
NOTE
V35B and A36TC air-
Model
F33A, F33C,
planes and earler Model A36 and B3GPC
airplanes are e~uipped with either a single "throw-over or dual "T" control colE-2111 and
umn. At serials E-1946, E-2104,
after; EA-320, EA-389 and after, dual
All
control columns
equipment. The
operated
require
installed as standard
flight controls are cable
were
surfaces
conventional
for
no
power assistance
control by the pilot or copilot.

and optional electric elevator
electrically driven.
which
normal
The flaps
trim
are
primary flight control surfaces are

manually controlled through cable bell
Each system incorporates
crank systems.
survace travel
stops and linkage adjustments. The ailerons, elevators, and rudder
All
secured with control locks (qust

~hen
the flight compartment.
these
locks are installed, the elevator
is at approximately 110 down and the control wheel is approximately 120 to
the
The rudder pedals are interconright.
nected by a linkage below the flight compartment floor. -~he rudder pedals are
may
be
locks)
in
adjustable
to
two
positions by pressing
the spring-loaded lever
pedal.
If brakes
are
the side of the

installed on the
lever may be
same
on
not
On serials E-1946, E-2104, E-2111

and after, the approach position
is 120
serials
CJ-150
On Airplane
CE-8~6
and
after, D-10179
E-1371 through E-2110 except
and
and
after,
after,
E-1946
and
E-2104, and EA-1 and after, the flaps have

three positions; UP (O"), APPROACH (150),
and DOWN (300). The switch is placarded
UP, APPROACH and DOWN. There is no way to
stop the flaps in other positions without
using the circuit breaker. The flap position transmitter (if installed) is located
near the left flap actuator.
On airplane serials E-1946, E-2104, E-2111

and after, EA-320, and EA-389 and after,
the position of the flaps is indicated by
three lights, located near the flap control handle, in the subpanel. The lights
indicate down,
wi 11
approach, and intransit positions. All lights are out wheri
the flaps are up.
Trim tabs
The tabs
pilot
are
are
installed
each elevator.
by the
systems using
drum-cable
Tab position indicaprovided on the tab controls.
through
jackscrew
on
manually controlled
actuators.
copilots pedals, this

used to place the copilots pedals against
tors
the floor.
optional electric elevator trim tab

operated by a control switch on the
outboard handle of the pilots control
A down spring and bob weight are
wheel.
incorporated into the elevator control
system for improved stability.
One flap installed on each wing is operated byan electric motor-driven gearbox
the forward side of the rear spar at
on
of
The
the
centerl i ne
the
ai rplane.
gearbox drives two flexible drive shafts,
connected to an acme thread type
each
jackscrew at each flap. The flaps are
controlled by a lever in the subpanel, and
their position indicated by an instrument
The
the left of the control column.
to
lever (switch) must be pulled out of a
detent to change positions.
On airplane
serials CJ-149, CE-748, CE-772,
through
CE-815, 0-10097, D-10120 through D-10178,

E-llll, and E-1241 through E-1370, the
flaps may be stopped at any desired position by moving the flap switch to the OFF
position when the flaps are at the desired
are
The
is
On
earlier serials, aileron trimming was

by bendable tabs on each aileron and a
spring tension trimmer in the control
column. The bendable tabs were adjustable
only while on the ground. The spring tension trimmer was ad~justable in flight. The
spring tension trimmer and left bendable
tab were replaced by an inflight adjusta-l

ble trim tab at serials E-2111 and after,l
except E-1946 and E-2104, and on serialsl
This system is a
EA-321 through EA-388.
cable
control
a
jacksrew
system with
actuator and a trim wheel in the pedesal.
27-00-00
Page 1
A12
Aug 28/87
BEECHCRAFT
BONANZA SERIES
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
the primary flight conand

limit their travel.
traveling stops secured to the cables
the
tab
limit
Because
trim
movement.
cables are connected at turnbuckles, each
cable has one left hand and one right hand
threaded cable end.
Proper routing of the
cables
shown in the applicable subas
chapter will aid against crossing the
cables
and
improper movement
causing
after Ehe cables have been removed
and
reinstalled.
TAPER
applicable riyyiny procedures
of tile
Positive stops
trol
surfaces
on
PINS
Refer to the applicable rigging procedures

cable
for
and
details regarding chain
tension, control wheel movement and force,
and system friction. Any time the control
column has been removed and disassembled,
be
should
the
following
precautions
observed:
a.
When
installed,
nylon mallet
Refer to the
for details
regarding
chain
and
cable
tension, control wheel movement and force,

and down spring force and system friction.
to
tapered
extend
surface.
or
be
to
are
pins
light weight rawhide or
taper
use
no
set the pin. The small end

shank should be flush with,
more
than 0.06 inch
over
the
CAUTION
EFFECT
OF
TEMPERATURE
UPON
CABLE
The taper pin may crack the torque

tube if driven excessively.
TENSION
Graphs specifying the
correct maximum and

minimum cable tension permissible for the
various controls appear on the individual
rigging control system illustrations. The
graphs provide rigging limits at temperatures
varying from OOF to 1100F. The
horizontal scale on the graphs disignates
the temperature in degrees Fahrenheit at
which the control cables may be rigged,
and the vertical
scale designates the
correct tension in pounds for each tem-
perature reading,
WARNING
On
airplane
serials
E-1946,
E-2104, E-2111 and after; EA-320,

the
EA-389
and
observe
after,
color coding on all
parts when
replacing
or
reinstalling control
cranks and/or other

system components. DO NOT
cables, bell
control
connect coded parts of one color

to coded parts of different color.
"END"
27-00-00
Page 2
Aug 28/87
A12
rZ~eechcraft
BONANZA SERIES
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
AILERON AND TAB MAINTENANCE

PRACTICES (EffectiVity: CE1748, CE1772
link. The turnbuckles must be near the access opening. The slot in the lower sprocket should be approxi-
and after; CJ-149 and after; 0-10097,

0-10120 and after; Elllll, E11241 thru
E-2111 except E1946 and 0-2104; EA-1
mately parallel
thru EA1388 except
b.
theturnbucklesand
Removethesafetywirefrom
or tighten the chain as necessary.
loose"
EA1320)
NOTE
the chain until friction or binding
is felt on the control wheel, then loosen
the chain just enough to remove the
binding or friction from the control wheel.
Tighten
SINGLE 7HROW-OVER CONTROL

COLUMN
(Figure
I
c.
CONTROL COLUMN ARM REMOVAL
Check the control wheel and control surfaces for
proper
a.
Remove the four
collar
assembly
to the sides of the arm.
that
screws
secure
to the control column
the retainer
housing.
Disconnect any electrical
c.
Remove the aileron trimmer
indicated in AILE-
as
After the
adiustments
are
complete, check
that
the location of the control wheel, sprockets, and turnbuckles are as shown. Refer to Figure 1.
wiring.
b.
d~
operation
e.
Safety
wirethe turnbuckles.
RON CONTROL TRIMMER.
Pull the "T" handle located
d.
the control
the forward side of
arm.
Rotate the control column
e.
on
cal
position
housing.
arm
to the
nearly verti-
and slide the control column
arm
DUAL CONTROL ARM
(f~igure 2)
DUAL CONTROL ARM REMOVAL
off the
a.
Remove the four
collar
assembly
screws
Position the control
ure
1. Make
sure
approximately parallel
as
each other
near
the
shown in
b.
The ailerons MUST be in the neutral
e.
Pull the "T" handle located
the control
d.
on
position.
the forward side of
arm on
the control ool-
housing.
Connect all electrical
omit the following step.

b.
assembly
Install the retainer collar and attach it with the four
as
indicated in AILE-
Check the control column forfull movement and
the control surfaces for proper direction of movement.
RIGGING THE CONTROL ARM CHAIN
screw
right
and washer
retaining
the
forward side of hub of the
c.
Disconnect all electrical
d.
Slidethecontrolarm off ofthehousing.
pin
con-
wiring.
Position the control arm, control wheel, and

as shown in Figure i. The long and short
on
the
sprockets
Position the control
arm as
shown. Refer to
Figure
2.
Make sure the slot in the center sprocket is

b.
approximately vertical and the turnbuckles between
the long chains and the short chains are are opposite
each other near the access openings.
Th,,ilerons MUST be in neutral.
NOTE
sprockets
chains must be centered
the
DUAL CONTROL ARM INSTALLATION
g. Install the aileron trimmer

RON CONTROL TRIMMER.
a.
on
arm.
wiring.
screws.
h.
Remove the
trol
a.
f.
housing.
Some installations may have a "T"

handle on the right forward side of the
the control arm. Pull the "T" handle and
are
arm.
Slide the control column
umn
e.
Figsprocket is
long and short chains

access opening,
the retainer
NOTE
to the sides of the arm and that
the turnbuchles between the
opposite
vertical
arm
that the slot in the lower
secure
to the control column
CONTROL COLUMN ARM INSTALLATION

a.
that
within one
Some installations may have a "T"

handle on the right forward side of the
the control arm. Pull the "T" handle.
27-1 0-00
Page
A19
Mar 29/96
aeechcraft
BONANZA SERIES
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
i i/
\r
z-li
111
LONG CHAIN
ACCESS OPENING
TURNBUCKLE
SHORT CHAIN
SLOT
IN SPROCKET
C9201 73~
Single
Throw-over Control Column
Figure
27-1 0-00
Page 2
Aug 18/95
A18
aeechcrraft
BONANZA SERIES
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
TURNBUCKLES MUST
BE OPPOSITE
SLOT
LONG CHAIN
ii
IN SPROCKET
LONG CHAIN
Arl
TURNBUCKLES MUST
BE OPPOSITE
SHORT CHAIN
RIGHT
LEFT
VIEW LOOKING AFT
RIGHT
DETAIL
LEFT
FWD
C9201739 9
Dual Control with
Single Control
Figure 2
Column
27-1 0-00
A18
Page 3
Aug 18/95
aeechc~ft
BONANZA SERIES
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
d.
Slide the control column
umn
the control col-
arm on
NOTE
On installations with
the
"T" handle, omit
following step.
Install the pin

e.
control arm hub.
f.
Place the aileron in
hinge brackplace
between the aileron skin and the reinforcing structure.
b.
ets. The
housing,
assembly
on
the
right
side of the
Install the retainer collar and attach it with the four
screws.
g. Check for full control movement and for proper

direction of movement.
hinge brackets
position
on
the
must be in the correct
c.
Install the upper and lower hinge bracket
d.
Pull
screws.
the aileron in a direction straight away

wing to make sure that the hinge brackets
are positioned correctly. If there is any movement of
the aileron, recheck the position of all hinge brackets.
on
from the
RIGGING THE AILERON CONTROL

SYSTEM
(Figure 3)
RIGGING THE DUAL CONTROL ARM CHAIN
NOTE
Position the control arm, control wheel, and

sprocket as shown. Refer to Figure 2.
a.
b.
Center the
ets within
c.
e.
and short chains
on
their sprock-
link.
one
The slot in the center
mately vertical
d.
long
BEECHCRAFT recommends the use of

the aileron travel gage shown in the
SPECIAL TOOLS in Chapter 12-20-00.
as
Remove the
Adjust the
shown.
be
2.
wing
as
necessary.
a.
Aileron and
flap
outboard of the inboard
surfaces must
upper and lower surfaces of the
properly adjusted by
chains until binding is
wing
align
with the
within 1/16 inch.
are
Adjust the aileron downstops in the wing until the

just clears the gusset on the wing rib. Set
the aileron upstep in the wing so that the aileron bellcrank just misses the aileron pushrod.
b.
the
the control wheel; then
loosen the chains just enough to remove
the binding or friction from the control
tightening
noticed
(just
hinge).
rib
aileron
NOTE
The chains
The front of the travel gage should be

located over the leading edge skin splice
with the aft portion over the number 8
approxi-
wire from the turnbuckles.
safety
chains
sprocket must
Refer to Figure
bellcrank
on
wheel
c.
complete, check that the

location of the control arm, control wheels, sprockets
and turnbuckles are as shown. Refer to Figure 2.
f.
g.
After the
Safety
adjustments
are
the
screws
b.
remove
damage
to
attaching
hinge bracket.
the two
from the top and bottom of each
straight away from

the attaching areas.
Pull the aileron
avoid
c.
and
Remove the screws
attaching
the
the
Attach the
bonding
wing
bonding
to the aileron.
a.
connecting the
aileron to the bell-
upstep and the downstop.
The aileron is in neutral when the aileron
trailing edge aligns with the trailing edge

of the wing, and its inboard end is parallel with the outboard end of the flap.
AILERON REMOVAL
Support the aileron
the link
NOTE
wire the turnbuckles.
h.
Check the controls for freedom of movement and
the control surfaces for proper direction of movement,
a.
Adjust
crank to allow full travel of the aileron surface between
cable to the aileron.
to
cable
d.
Adjust the cables from
the
cables. The turnbuckles
wing
are
to the control col-
in the wheel wells.
Secure the control column wheel in neutral by

e.
securing a bar across the top of the control wheel and
leveling the control wheel with a bubble level. Onlith
the control locks installed, the control wheel is rotated
12" to the right.) Adjust the tension as shown on the
aileron temperature cable tension
ure 3.
graph. Refer
to
Fig-
27-1 0-00
Page
Mar 29/96
A~9
BONANZA SERIES
IVIAINTENANCE MANUAL

TEMPERATURE CABLE TENSION GRAPH
ALL SINGLE CONTROL COLUWIN
BONANZAS
so
s40
CABLES
CABLE TENSION
SURFACE TRAVEL
~30
20"
40LBS
AILERON
+2
-2
UP
~5LBSAT
59"F
BUNGEE SPRINGS
CONNECTED
20"
+2DOWN
-2
10
10
20
40
30
50
60
70
80
90
100
110
120
TEMPERATURE -~F
RIGHT AILERON
UP CABLE
IN WHEEL
WEUTURNBUCKLES
DOWNSTOP
UPSTOP
oo
:i:iSas-::-::-:::::
LEFT UP
SPAR
TURNBUCKLES
RIGHT UP
CARRY THROUGH
1N WHEEL WELL
-Y
LEFT AILERON
BALANCE CABLE
UP CABLE
36-151-17
!1
~i
001
_Y,
RUDDER INTERCONNECT
BUNGEE
Rigging The Aileron Control System

(Effectlvity: CE-748, CE-T72 and after;
CJ-149 and after; D-10097, D-10120 and after;
E-lll1, E-1241 thru E-2111 except E-1946 and
E-2104; EA-1 thru EA-388 except EA-320)
Figure 3
27-10-00
Page
A19
Mar 29/96
CJ;)eechcraft
BONANZA SERIES
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
NOTE
The control wheel must be level in relation to the airplane. If the airplane is not
level, make a corresponding change to
the position of the control wheel using a
spirit
Check the allerons for correct directlon of movement. When the control
wheel Is moved to the left, the left
alleron must move up and the right
level protractor.
Take the cable reading in the wheel well

where the control column cables attach
to the
alleron must move down. When the

control wheel Is moved to the right,
the right alleron must move up and
left alleron must move down.
wing cables.
f.
Rotate the control wheel to ascertain
the
wing bellcranks
by
feel that
reach their stops before the

trol column reaches its stops.
con-
g. If there is less travel of the control wheel in one

direction than in the other direction, loosen one turn-
AILERON CONTROL TRIMMER (SINGLE

CONTROL COLUMN AIRPLANES)
tighten the opposite
The aileron control system is equipped with an aileron

control trimmer which functions by applying tension on
lower cable turnbuckle, depending on which way the

travel is off. Maintain the correct cable tension.
the aileron control cables to level the wings as

needed. The holding pressure exerted by the aileron
buckle
h.
on
the lower cable and
Secure the control wheel in neutral after the
control trimmer
cor-
rect travel of the wheel is obtained.
connecting
the aileron in
determined
Adjust the link

wing bellcrank to obtain
neutral. Neutral position of the aileron is
the aileron to the
by aligning
the inboard end of the aileron
with the outboard end of the
flap with the flap
in the up
position
tem
the cable tension.
TRIMMER REMOVAL
(Figure
give
Figure
deflection of
3.
NOTE
The aileron bellcrank stops should make
contact 1/16 inch before the control column stops are reached.
body halves by holding the

body housing touter half) and turning the clutch
nut
body
(inner half) counterclockwise.
b.
Separate the two body halves by pulling out on
the clutch body housing.
clutch
TRIMMER INSTALLATION
(FIgure 4)
a
Carefully insert the shaft through the felt seal into

bearing, being careful not to sheer the felt
each aileron bellcrank contacts its upstep

at the same time the bellcrank in the opposite wing
the hub
contacts its
seal.
j.
sure
downstop.
Check the control stop (secondary stop) in the

control column for 1/16-inch clearance in each direction. If the clearance is not correct, recheck the entire
k.
aileron control system for correct chain and cable
rig-
ging.
NOTE
The control stop clearance provides a
slight movement of the control wheel (a
"cushion") after the travel stops on the
aileron bellcranks make contact.
i.
Recheck cable tension and
buckles.
m.
Tighten alljamnuts.
safety
Unscrew the two
a.
Set the bellcrank stop bolts to

20" ~2" up and/or down. Refer to
i.
Be
can be easily overriden at the discrepilot. The trimmer does not change the sysrigging but should be removed before checking
tion of the
wire the turn-
b. Screw the two halves of the unit together by holding the clutch body and turning the clutch body nut.
Hand-tightening the two halves should be sufficient.
Check that the tangs of the drive shaft engage

properly with the sprocket as the unit is being tightened by hand. Also note that the position indicator on
the face of the unit is right side up as the shaft
c
engages with the
sprocket.
AILERON TABS
The ailerons
equipped with sheet metal tabs which

airplane is on the ground.
bending them in opposite
directions to each other. Bend the tabs only a small
amount each time and check the setting by flight test.
are
may be adjusted while the

The tabs are adjusted by
27-1 0-00
Page
Mat 29/96
A19
aeechcraft
BONANZA SERIES
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
i.
THROW-OVER CONTROL ARM

"T"
CONTROL
2.
DUAL
3.
AILERON TRIMMER
ARM
;f~C
Alleron Trimmer
(Slngle Control Column)

Figure 4
27-1 0-00
A18
Page 7
Aug 18/95
Raytheon Aircraft
AILERON AND TAB
(E-1946, E12104,
AFTER, EA-320, EA-389 AND
E12111 AND
AFTER)
WARNING
I WARNING)
Make certain that insulation, tie wraps, etc. do not interfere with control components such
as
cables, chains,
etc.
DUAL CONTROL COLUMN
WARNING
I WARNING)
On
airplane serials
CE-1566 and after; E-1946, E-2104, E-2111 and after; EA-320, EA-389 and
on all parts when replacing or installing control cables,
after, observe the color coding
bellcranks an~or other control system components. DO NOT connect parts of one color to
coded parts of a different color.
CONTROL COLUMN CHAIN REMOVAL
FIGURE 1
a.
Paint
one
tooth of each control columns sprocket and its
corresponding
chain link to
ensure
proper alignment
of the control wheels at installation.

b.
Loosen the turnbuckles of the control column chain and the aileron turnbuckles in the wheel well.
TURNBUCKLE
STOP
TORQUE
SHAFT
GUARD PIN
LINK
ASSEMBLY
CHAIN
ASSEMBLY
CONNECTOR
LINK
SPROCKET
ASSEMBLY
AILERON CABLE
ASSEMBLY
Q
AIRCRAFT
36-155-6
Dual Control Column Chain
Figure
A20
Adjustment
27-11-00
Feb
26/9 Page
Ral~heon Aircraft
c.
Remove the
safety
wire from the 4 bolts
(2
on
each
end),
and
remove
the 6 bolts from the channel between the
control columns.
d.
Remove the channel from the
e.
Disconnect the turnbuckles from the chain of the control column.
f.
Remove the 4 connector links from the stop link
airplane.
assembly,
then
remove
the stop link
assembly.
NOTE
It may be necessary to
g.
Slide the
remove
the stop block before
sprocket support assembly aft
over
the
joint
removing
then
remove
the stop link
assembly.
the chains from the control columns.
CONTROL COLUMN CHAIN INSTALLATION
FIGURE 1
a.
Install the chains
b.
Install the stop link
c.
Install the aileron cable chains. The inboard holes of the stop link
over
the control column
assembly.
sprockets.
The outboard holes
are
used with the control column chain.
assembly
are
used with the aileron cable
chains.
NOTE
Make certain the connector links
d.
Install the stop block if removed.
e.
Connect the turnbuckles
f.
Slide the
(do
not
are
properly
installed.
tighten).
sprocket support assemblies forward and install the channel between the control columns. Safety wire
the bolts.
g.
Tighten
the control column chains
as
indicated in CONTROL COLUMN CHAIN RIGGING.
WARNING
IWARNINO)
Check the ailerons for proper motion, When the control column is turned to the
aileron should move down and the
right aileron
move
right,
the left
up.

FIGURE 1
Rigging
a.
Rig
of the control column chain may be

neutral
on
the control wheels
may be ~0.06 inch off the

b.
accomplished by
by placing
straightedge.
straightedge
the
across
Assure that the ends of the control column chain around the
from the centerline of the
Page
following:
the top of the control wheels. One of the
right sprocket
are
within
one
link of
grips
equidistance
sprocket.
27-11-00
A20
Raytheon Aircraft
If the stop link assembly is not centered within ~0.02 inch with respect to its stop,
the link.
c.
d.
Place
vertical load of two
+0.06 inches.
e.
the
pounds
the turnbuckles
Adjust
adjust the turnbuckles to center
the top chain near the airplane centerline. The chain should deflect 0.25
necessary to obtain this deflection.
on
as
rigging the control column chain, refer to

ailerons are properly rigged.
After
RIGGING THE AILERON CONTROL SYSTEM and make certain
CONTROL COLUMN ROLLER ADJUSTMENT
FIGURES 2 AND 3
FORWARD OUTER TUBE ROLLERS
(ROLL
ON THE INNER SQUARE
SHAFT)
FIGURE 2
There
are
four rollers
on
the forward end of each control column which transmit torque to the square inner shaft.
are installed with eccentric bolts which allow for adjustment of roller clear-
Two of the rollers of each control column

ance.
These two bolts may be identified

the shafts clean and
by their
Wipe
b.
Hold
c.
The roller
d.
If the conditions of step
e.
Turn the bolt until the conditions of step
f.
Tighten
g.
Check the other
h.
If the
of the
on
firmly against the
shaft.
side of the shaft should turn
freely
nonadjustable
the
opposite
Adjust
the rollers
as
follows:
dry.
a.
one
10-32 threads.
c are
rollers
while
having
no more
not met, loosen the nut on the roller which has the bolt with 10-32 threads.
c are
complied
with.
the nut, then recheck the roller clearance in accordance with steps b and
pair
than 0.002 inch clearance.
of rollers
as
indicated in steps b and
adjustment is needed, follow steps d,
c.
c.
and f for the second set of rollers.
Repeat this procedure for the other control column.
nzo
27-11-00
Raytheon Aircraft
1?
FORCE
f~lS ROLLER
SHOUCD ROLL
FREE
.002 0~7 LESS
34t50-*
Forward Control Column Rollers
Figure
CONTROL COLUMN SUPPORT ROLLER ADJUSTMENT
(ATTACHED TO
THE INSTRUMENT
SUBPANEL)
FIGURE 3
The
top
two rollers of each control column
support
are
installed with eccentric bolts which may be used for adjust-
ment as follows:
Pull the control column fore and aft until the

ers
position of
least clearance between the control column and
Keep the control column in this position while checking

probably have its own position of least clearance.
is located.
column will
firmly against the
and/or
adjusting
top rollers.
a.
Hold the control column
b.
The clearance between the control column tube and the lower roller should be 0.005 ~0.002 inch.
c.
If the correct clearance is not indicated, loosen the nuts
d.
Rotate the bolts to obtain the proper clearance.
e.
Tightenthe
f.
Recheck for proper clearance
g.
Repeatforthe
Page
beF4
26/99
nuts.
(step b).
othercontrol column.
27-11-00
two
on
the two top rollers.
support
roil-
the clearance. Each control
Raytheon Aircraft
AILERON REMOVAL
a.
Lower the
b.
Support
c.
Pull the aileron
d.
Remove the
flaps
and disconnect the
the aileron and
straight
screws
remove
push-pull
the two
away from the
rod to the aileron tab.
attaching
to avoid
wing
attaching the bonding
screws
from the top and bottom of each
damage
to the
attaching
hinge
bracket.
areas.
cables to the aileron.
a.
Attach the
b.
Place the aileron in
bonding
aileron skin and the

c.
cables to the aileron.
position on the hinge

reinforcing structure.
Install the upper and lower
hinge
brackets. Be
bracket
sure
the
hinge
bracket is in the proper
place
screws.
Pull on the aileron in a direction straight away from the wing to assure that the hinge brackets
sitioned. If any movement of the aileron is noted, recheck the position of all hinge brackets.
d.
e.
Lower the
flap
between the
and connect the aileron tab
push-pull
rod and install the cotter
are
properly
po-
pin.
AILERON CONTROL CABLE REMOVAL

FIGURE 4
and the floorboards in the
pilots compartment.
Remove the
b.
Remove the forward passenger seats and the floorboards between the main and
c.
Remove the
trailing edge
pilots
and
copilots seat,
a.
plates
wings.
access
of the
as
gain
necessary to
access
to the aileron cables and
from the cable
pulley
d.
Remove all necessary cable
e.
Disconnect the forward aileron cables from the chain and cable
retaining pins
rear
spars.
pulley brackets
on
the lower
brackets.
assembly at the connector link below the control
column. Install lead lines to both aileron cables.

f.
Disconnect the forward aileron cables and the forward outboard
Connect
g.
lead line to
one
end of the cable and
remove
Disconnect the balance cable at the turnbuckle in each
remove
h.
wing
cable at the turnbuckles in each
wing.
the cable.
wing.
Connect
lead line to
one
end of the cable and
the cable.
Disconnect the forward outboard and the aft outboard cables at the bellcrank in each
wing. Identify and
remove
the cables.
~20
27-11-00
Feb
26/9 Page
Raytheon Aircraft
i. WHEEL
2. COLLAR ASSEMBLY
3. COLUMN TORQUE TUBE
4. ELEVATOR TORQUE ARM
5. ELEVATOR TORQUE TUBE
6. ELEVATOR BELLCRANK
7. ELEVATOR TORQUE TUBE SUPPORT
8. 808 WEIGHT ASSEMBLY
S.CQUAR
10. COLLAR ASSEMBLY
11. ELEVATOR PUSHROD
12. CONNECTOR
13. INNER COLUMN GUIDE
14. INNER COLUMN TORQUE TUBE
.SU-JOIM
iTROPPUS
16. SPROCKET
17. TAPER PIN
18. SPROCKFT
q 21
19
18
.91TUNFORWARD SUPPORT
16
20.
21. COTTER PIN
22. SUPPORT. ROLLERS
Ip
11
;I
15
17
110
7--,
~1
17
~B
5
22
17
17
c
111\\
t
36155-\4
Control Column
Figure
Page 6
Feb 26/99
27-11-00
A20
Raytheon Aircraft
F.S. 96.00
F.S. 84.358
DETAIL
DETAIL
RIGHT AILERON UP
RIGHT AILERON
BALANCE CABLE
LEFT AILERON UP
F.S 117.187
BALANCE CABLE~
I
DETAILD
F.S. 112000
LEFT A1LERON VP
AILERON TAB
ACTUATOR
B
BALANCE CABLE
i
a
TEMPERATURE CABLE rr#SIOIJ GRAPH
TTRAVEL
STOPS
AILERON
CABLE
SURFACETFIA~EL
DETAILE
DETAIL
AILERON
35~5LBS
AT 59~F BUNGEE
SPREKiS CONNECTED
20"
20"
~I
a
BEUCRANK
2" UP
2 DOWrl
10
20
.30
-40
50
60
TEMPERAfURE
AIIlRON
TAB
F.S.
APPROXIMATE FUSiLAGE
STATION
10 LBS +-5 LBS

-0 LBS
AT
9"~ 0
9"t 0
70
80
90
100
110
120
"F
1" UP
1 WWN
59"F
36151-18
Aileron
(E-1946,
A20
System
E-2104 and After, EA-320 and

Figure 4
27-11-00
EA-389)
Feb
26/99Page
Raytheon Aircraft
THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK
Page
Feb 26/99
27-11-00
Raytheon Aircraft
AILERON CONTROL CABLE INSTALLATION

FIGURE 4
a.
Connect the forward outboard and the aft outboard cables to the bellcrank in each
wing.
Route the cables in-
board and disconnect the lead lines.

b.
Route the balance cable
through
wing,
one
the
fuselage,
then
through
the
opposite wing. Disconnect the

wing.
lead
line and connect the balance cable and the aft outboard cables to the turnbuckles in each
c.
Route
one
end of the aileron cables outboard in each
wing,
and the other end forward to the control column.
Connect the cables to the turnbuckles at the forward outboard cable in each
both aileron cables at the connector link below the control column.
d.
Connect the chain and cable
assembly to
e.
Install all
pulley
f.
Rig
g.
Install the
h.
Install the floorboards and the forward passenger seats.
i.
Install the floorboards and the
retaining pins
the aileron control

access
in the
wing.
brackets.
system.
plates
on
the lower
pilots
trailing edge
and
copilots
of the
wings.
seats.
WAANINO I
I WARNING
Make certain that
as
cables, chains,
insulation, tie wraps,
etc. do not interfere with control
components such
etc.
Check for correct direction of movement
by moving
the control wheel. When the control
wheel is moved to the left, the left aileron should move up and the right aileron move down.
When the control wheel is turned to the right, the right aileron should move up and the left
aileron down.
RIGGING THE AILERON CONTROL SYSTEM

NOTE
Company recommends the use of the aileron travel gage shown in the SPECIAL
Chapter 12-20-00. The front of the travel gage should be located over the leading edge
skin splice with the aft portion over the number 8 wing rib (just outboard of the inboard aileron
hinge).
Raytheon
Aircraft
TOOLS in
a.
Aileron and tab surfaces must
b.
Place the aft
the locknuts
on
c.
Tightenthe
d.
Rig
neutral
arm
with the upper and lower surfaces of the
of both aileron bellcranks
both ends of the
push-pull
wing
within 1/16 inch.
parallel to the adjacent wing rib. If the aileron is

adjust the push-pull tube until the aileron
tube and
not in
neutral, loosen
is in neutral.
locknuts.
on
the control wheels
may be ~0.06 inch off of the
nm
align
by placing
straightedge.
straightedge
across
the top of the two control wheels. One
27-11-00
grip
Ray~heon Aircraft
e.
Assure that the ends of the chain around the
centerline of the
are
within
one
link of
equidistance
from the
sprocket.
if the link stop
f.
control column
right
assembly
is not centered with respect to its stop,
adjust the
turnbuckles to center the link.
Place a vertical load of two pounds on the top chain near the airplane centerline. The chain should deflect 0.25
g.
~0.06 inch. Adjust the turnbuckles as necessary to obtain this deflection.
h.
Connectthe
bungeesprings.
With a straight rig pin installed between the pilots rudder pedals and with a simulated (10 Ibs.) cable tension,
i.
adjust the turnbuckle above the forward aileron bungee spring until both bungee springs are extended equally ~0.06
inch.
j.
Adjust the turnbuckles
k.
Remove the
i.
Adjust
m.
Tighten
n.
Rig
o.
Be
in the wheel wells to
straightedge
on
(primary stops)
(00).
for
deflection of 20 ~2" up, and 20 lt2" down from neutral.
the bellcrank stop bolts.
the aileron cables to the tension indicated in

sure
the ailerons to neutral
from the control wheels.
the aileron bellcrank stops

the locknuts
bring
each bellcrank contacts its upstep at the
Figure
same
4. Use the turnbuckles in the wheel wells.
time the bellcrank in the
opposite wing contacts
its down-
stop.
p. Set the secondary stop bolts (the stop link at the forward end of the control
clearance from the stop with the ailerons at full travel (both right and left).
column) to
maintain 0.06 to 0.12 inch
q. With a straight rig pin installed between the pilots rudder pedals, the control wheels should center within 5" of
neutral. If necessary, readjust the vertical turnbuckle above the forward bungee spring and the aft turnbuckle in the
wheel well
as
required
to center the control wheels.
r.
Recheck cable tension and
s.
With the ailerons
10"
right
t.
Connect the
or
left of
safety the turnbuckles.
Make certain all locknuts
fully rigged (bungee springs disconnected),

neutral shall not exceed 15 inch-pounds.
the torque
are
required
tight.
to move either control wheel
bungee springs.
WARNING
IWI\RNINO
by moving the control wheel. When the control

wheel is moved to the left, the left aileron should move up and the right aileron move down.
When the control wheel is turned to the right, the right aileron should move up and the left
Check for correct direction of movement
aileron down.
u.
Removeall
Page
rigging pins.
27-11-00
Raytheon Aircraft
AILERON TAB
A trim tab has been installed in the left aileron which is controllable from inside the
tab is controlled
through
normal cable and chain
linkage to
airplane while in flight. The aileron

pedestal with the indicator.
control wheel located in the
AILERON TRIM TAB CABLE REMOVAL

seat and the left floorboard.
a.
Remove the
b.
Remove the lower forward
c.
Remove the forward left passenger seat and the floorboard.
d.
Remove necessary
e.
Remove the cable
f.
Disconnect the tab cables at the turnbuckles in the left
g.
Remove the cable
h.
Remove the outboard cable from the actuator sprocket. Remove the cable
through the
actuator
i.
Remove chain master link at the
Remove cable
through the
actuator
pilots
upholstery panel
access
plates
retaining pins
stops
at
wing
to
gain
at the
on
access
pulley
to the trim tab
pedestal.
cables, actuator, and cable pulley brackets.
brackets.
wing. Identify
and connect lead lines
on
the cable ends.
station 43.375.
sprocket
on
the
pedestal.
access
opening.
access
opening.
AILERON TRIM TAB CABLE INSTALLATION
pedestal sprocket
a.
Position the chain of the forward tab cable around the
b.
Route the cable ends aft in the
c.
Position the chain of the outboard cable around the actuator
d.
Install the cable stops at
e.
Install the cable
f.
Rig
g.
Install all
h.
Install the floorboard and the left forward passenger seat.
i.
Install the floorboard and the
j.
Install the
and outboard into the left
wing
sprocket
and disconnect the lead lines.
and route the cable ends inboard.
station 43.375 and connect the cables at the turnbuckles in the
wing
retaining pins
the aileron trim tab control

access
fuselage
and install the chain master link.
in the
pulley
wing.
brackets.
system per AILERON TRIM TAB RIGGING in this chapter.
plates in the left wing.
upholstery panel
pilots
on
seat.
pedestal.
WARNING
IWARNINOI
Make certain that insulation, tie wraps, etc. do not interfere with control components such
as cables, chains, etc.
plane with respect to the aileron when the aileron is

moved. When the tab control wheel is turned to indicate left wing up, the aileron tab should
move up. If the aileron and aileron tab do not move in the proper direction, recheck rigging.
The aileron tab should stay in the
same
27-11-00Page
11
Raytheon Aircraft
AILERON TRIM TAB RIGGING
NOTE
Place the aileron in neutral.
a.
Place the aileron trim tab control in neutral
b.
Place the aileron in neutral
position
position.
and connect the trim tab to the tab actuator.
By turning the sprocket on the actuator, adjust the trim tab to both extremes of travel; measure both settings
return the tab to the midpoint of the two extremes of travel. This will place the actuator in the neutral position.
c.
d.
If the trim tab is not in the neutral
tral
position.
e.
Center the chain
f.
Set the aileron tab stop
stops
to 40 to 60
on
the
sprocket
W.S.
(at
inch-pounds.
g.
Rig
h.
Check trim tab travel,
cable tension and
position
and
safety all
tighten the
43.375)
adjust travel
completion
upon
as
adjust the pushrod
to
place
the tab in
neu-
cable.
to obtain
noted in
of step c,
and
surface deflection of 9" +0" -1" up and down.
Figure
Torque
the
4.
turnbuckles and stops.
WARNING I
I wnrc#l~a
After rigging the aileron and aileron tab control system, check for correct movement of the
control surfaces with respect to the movement of the controls. The aileron tab should stay
in the same plane with respect to the aileron when the aileron is moved. When the tab control
wheel is turned to indicate left wing up, the aileron tab should move up. If the aileron and
aileron tab do not move in the proper direction, recheck the
rigging.
AILERON TRIM TAB ACTUATOR REMOVAL

a.
Remove the
b.
Disconnect the outboard cable at the turnbuckles in the
c.
Remove the outboard cable from the actuator
d.
Disconnect the actuator from the trim tab
e.
Remove the bolts
access
plates
at the actuator.
attaching
wing.
sprocket.
linkage.
the actuator to the
wing
structure. Remove the actuator.
AILERON TRIM TAB ACTUATOR INSTALLATION

a.
Position the actuator
b.
Connect the actuator to the tab
c.
Install the outboard cable
d.
Connect the cables at the turnbuckles in the wing.
Page
beF21
26/99
against the wing
on
structure and install the
attaching
bolts.
linkage.
the actuator
27-11-00
sprocket.
nzo
Ral(theon Aircraft
the ai\eron trim tab control system.
e.
Rig
f.
Install the
access
plates
at the actuator.
AILERON TRIM TAB ACTUATOR DISASSEMBLY

FIGURE 5
a.
Remove the pins from the nut
assembly (5) and sprocket (1)
and
the
remove
sprocket (1)
from the actuator
as-
sembly.
b.
Remove the snap
c.
Remove the actuator
d.
Remove the
(Il)from
the
ring (10)
from the actuator
(8) from
screw
the nut
housing (6), and pull
the nut
assembly (5)
out of the
housing.
assembly.
pins from the actuator screw (8) and the actuator rod end (11) and remove the actuator rod end
screw (8). The bearing (4) and the bushing (9) can now be removed from the screw.
1.
Sprocket
8.
9.
10.
11.
12.
13.
2. Check Nut
3. AdSustinO Bushing
4. Bearing
5. Nut Asselhbly
6. Actuator Housing
7. Bracket
Actuator Screw
Bushing
Snap Ring
Actuator Rod End

Tube End
Actuator Tube
I
13
"e
12
~fi
io
3
ii
THns
as4es9AA
Figure 5
A20
27-11 -00
Feb
26/9 Page
13
Ral~heon Aircraft
e.
Remove the check nut
f.
Remove the
and
(2),
screw out
from the nut
bearing (4)
the
with
adjusting bushing (3)
spanner wrench.
assembly.
AILERON TRIM TAB ACTUATOR ASSEMBLY
NOTE
lubricate all
During assembly
bearing (4)
a.
Install the
b.
Install the other
c.
Install the actuator
d.
Push the nut
e.
Use
housing
the nut
on
bearing (4)
and
bushing (9)
(11,
Chart 1,
91-00-00).
on
the actuator
screw
ring (10)
in the
(8).
assembly.
into the actuator
assembly
with grease
assembly (5).
in the nut
screw
moving parts
housing (6),
and install the snap
housing.
spanner wrench to install the adjusting bushing (3) into the housing until the end play between the screw
and nut assembly is less than 0.025 inch. If the end play cannot be reduced to within limits, replace the
a
actuator.
f.
Install the check nut
g.
Install the actuator rod end
h.
Align the
i.
Install the
j.
Align the
(2)
holes in the
the
on
adjusting bushing.
(11)
screw
sprocket (1)
holes in the
on
(8)
the
on
screw.
with those of the actuator rod end
the actuator
sprocket (1)
(11)
and install the two
pins.
assembly.
assembly (5)
with those in the nut
and install the two
pins.
CHECKING AILERON TRIM TAB FREE PLAY

FIGURE 6
Visually inspect
the aileron trim tab for
damage, security of hinge attach points, and

checking the free play of the tab.
for
tightness
of the
actuating
system. Inconsistencies must be corrected before
(P/N 45-135030-9/810) or equivalent, a dial indicator, and a push-pull scale

loading to the tab are required for making the inspection for tab free play. Refer to Figure 6.
A check fixture
applying
for
accurate
a.
Securely lock the
control surfaces to prevent movement of the ailerons. Set the aileron trim tab in neutral.
b.
Use shot
hold the dial indicator check fixture
bags to
tab
hinge
line and
c.
Apply
small
on
the outboard
edge
so
that the
point of the dial
indicator is 2.0 inches aft of the
of the aileron tab.
piece of masking tape (for paint protection) 4.0 inches aft of the tab hinge line
point of pressure against the tab by the push-pull scale.
and
along the
cen-
terline of the tab actuator. This is the
Apply
e.
Set the dial indicator at
f.
With the
g.
Release half of the load to obtain
Page
another
piece of masking tape
d.
zero.
push-pull scale
on
in the
corresponding
location
on
during
the
Do not reset the dial indicator
the
masking tape, apply

a
27-11-00
1.5
3.0
pound downward
pound
the bottom surface of the tab.
checking procedure.
downward load. Record the dial
load. Record the dial
reading
as
reading
as
A.
B.
nzo
Raytheon Aircraft
h.
On the
masking tape
on
the bottom surface,
Release half of the load to obtain
Enter the recorded
j.
readings
on a
1.5
3.0
copy of Chart 1 and
SubtractAfromBand recordasX.
2.
Multiply Bby2and
3.
Multiply
4.
SubtractCfrom2Dand recordasY.
pound upward
load. Record the
proceed
as
load. Record the dial
reading
as
reading
as
C.
D.
follows:
recordas2B.
2 and record
by
pound upward
1.
apply
as
2D.
NOTE
X and Y
5.
Add X and Y and record
(E
I.
If the free
play
determine the
be
negative
numbers.
E.
as
MAXIMUM)
0.094 INCH
k.
can
is
over
cause.
All
the maximum
worn
parts
specified in Chart 1, inspect

replaced.
all components of the tab actuator system to
must be
AILERON TRIM TAB FREE PLAY INSPECTION
FIGURE 6
This check should be
performed
at least once
year to
ensure
that the trim tab free
play falls
within the
prescribed
limits.
(P/N 45-135030-9/810) or equivalent as shown in Figure 6, a dial indicator, and a push-pull scale for I
applying accurate loading to the tab are required for making the inspection for free play of the tab.
A check fixture
a.
Securely
lock the control surfaces to
prevent
movement of the ailerons. Set the aileron tab in the neutral
posi-
tion.
Using shot bags, affix the dial indicator check fixture

hinge line and on the outboard edge of the aileron tab.
b.
c.
Apply
small
d.
that the dial indicator
point
is 2.00 inches aft of the tab
masking tape (for paint protection) 4.00 inches aft of the tab hinge line and along
actuator. This will be the point of pressure against the tab by the push-pull scale.
piece
centerline of the tab
so
of
Apply another piece of masking tape in the corresponding position on the
bottom surface of the tab for the
the
same
purpose.
e.
Zero the dial indicator at
f.
With the
ing
as
push-pull
no
scale at the
initially.
Do not reset
during
the
checking procedure.
point of masking tape, apply a full &pound
downward load. Record the dial read-
A.
g.
Release half the load until
h.
Apply
i.
Release half the load until
~2(1
load
full
3-pound upward
a
1.5-pound downward
load at the
load is obtained. Record the dial
masking tape
l.&pound upward
on
reading
as
the bottom surface. Record the dial
load is obtained. Record the dial
reading
as
B.
reading
D.
27-11-00
as
C.
Rayeheen Aircraft
Enter the recorded values
j.
on a
copy of Chart 1 and
proceed
as
follows:
recordas2B.
1.
MultiplyBby2and
2.
SubtractAfrom 28 and record
3.
MultiplyDby2and recordas2D.
4.
Subtract C from 2D and record
as
as
X.
Y.
NOTE
The results of X and Y
5.
k.
All
Add X and Y and record
If the free
worn
play
as
be
negative
numbers.
E.
inspect
exceeds 0.094 inch,
parts should be
can
all components of the tab actuator system to determine the
cause.
replaced.
CHART1
AILERON TAB FREE PLAY LIMITS
3-POUND
I.5-POUND READING
READING
2B
-A
=X
2D
-C
=Y
+Y
=E
(E=O.Og4-inch maximum)
Page
bef61
26/99
27-11-00
A20
RRyliheon Aircraft
to\i
12
678
13
.8 IN
.5 IN
--rr
--1-!5
I
~I
25 IN
I
I
1
I
II
Inpsls-11
1.25
I__
IN,
_TYPI
2.9 1N
TAB
tAA_L
ICis
14
1.30 IN
mM
QUANf.
DESCRIPTIOPI
Il;
NO.
.68 IN
8 aluminum or
3/4 x 1
1 x 1 3/8 x 1 3/4 aluminum or
1/2
7 1/2
10 aluminum
C81Q Indicator"
3/4
1/4 Cia
2 carroslon
res.
114 Cia xl Eonosion
res.
1/4-28 nut
318
I(
10
3/8
1/4
2 x 10 rubber
11
12
13
14
^PIN of Federal Produots
2 1/2 x 14 aluminum
x
equiv.
or
equlv.
stl.
56.
II
II
1.6~
IN
.31 IN
10 rubber
x 2 5
13
equhr.
or
cM709ion
2/1
.l70tque
is
VLlFN
x
equlv.
10
KN813 Keenswt or lap 1/2

1/8 x 1 x 3/4 rubber
Corp., ProvMence,
res.
sore~
13
SECTION A
THIS GROOVE TO BE A SNUG FIT

To THC 5CR5W 8840881 ON
THE DIAL INDICATOR
R. I.
loo-lss.a
Fabricating Clamp for Tab
Deflection
Figure 6
A20
27-1100
Feb
26/99Pagel7
Ral~heon Aircraft
RUDDER AND TAB
RUDDER
(F33A, F33C, A36, A36TC,
AND
B36TC)
WARNING
I WARNING)
On
CE-1566 and after; E-1946, E-2104, E-2111 and after; EA-320, EA-389 and
coding on all parts when replacing or installing control cables,
airplane serials
after,
observe the color
bellcranks and /or other control system components. DO NOT connect parts of
parts of a different color.
one
color to
coded
RUDDER REMOVAL
a.
Detach the tail cone, disconnect the tail
b.
Remove the tail section
c.
Remove the four attach bolts from the rudder bellcrank.
d.
Disconnect the rudder
e.
Removethe rudder.
access
hinges
doors
navigation light
wire and
remove
the left hand side of the aft
on
and rudder
bonding
the tail
cone.
fuselage.
cable.
RUDDER INSTALLATION
a.
Placethe
b.
Connect the rudder
c.
Install the rudder bellcrank attach bolts
d.
Installtheaccess doors.
e.
Connect the
f.
Install the tail
A20
rudderinposition.
hinges
and
navigation light
bonding
cable.
(torque
to 50 to 70
inch-pounds).
wires.
cone.
27-20-00
Feb
26/99Page
Ray~heon Aircraft
Rig
Pin
CL
CL
0.38 to 0.45"
8-8
s,
A-A
Rig Pinr: 3/8" dio. x 2-1/8" Long

8loc1(: 1/2" w 1" x 2" Long
Rudder Pedal
Figure
Page
be26/99
F2
27I20-00
Rig
Tool
A20
Raylheon Aircraft
OETAILA
LEFT
RU]DER
CABLE
F~3A lCE-lAE,
AH) AFTER)
FEED
A)c~) AFTER)
RUDDER
PEDAL
STOPS
RUDDER
BELLCRAM<
STOPS
RIGHT
RUDDER
CABLE
LEFT
RUDDER
CABLE
RIGHT
RUDDER
CABLE
RMOER
PEDAL
STOPS
i~B
A36 (E-IIIl. E-12~1 AHI AFTERI

A5~6n: TEA-I TCIRII u-nr. pceEm 99-262)
B;HTC (EA-UZ
AH9 AFTER)
ATTACH
BOLTS
OETAIL E
DETADL D
mA4B
mAILc
/I
Rudder
System
Figure
A20
27-20-00
Feb
26/99Page
Raytheon Aircraft
THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK
Page
beF4
26/99
27-20-00
A20
Raytheon Aircraft
CABLES
CABLE
RUDDER
25
TENSION
5 LBS
LBS
AT 59 F
SURFACE
25
AND
LEFT
RIGHT
TRAVEL
ALL F33A AND A36TC.

F33C PRIOR TO CJ-156
WITHOUT KIT 33-4002-1,
A36 PRIOR TO E-2111

EXCEPT E-1946 AND
E-2104
20
+0
AND
-1
LEFT
RIGHT
B36TC
25 +1
20 +O
LEFT
-I RIGHT
F33C,
23 +O -1
LEFT AND
RIGHT OF
NEUTRAL
TEMPERATURE
CABLE
CJ-156 AND
AFTER. AND EARLIER
F33CS WITH KIT
33-4002-1
E-1946. E-2104
AND E-2111 AND
AFTER
TENSION GRAPH
50
40
g
5
g
H
30
20
10
10
20
30
40
50
60
70
TEMPERATURE- F
80
90
100
110
120
EA278
984801AA
Rudder Cable Tension and Surface Travel Data
Figure
A20
27-20-00
Feb
26/99Page
Ray~heon Aircraft
RIGGING THE RUDDER CONTROL SYSTEM
FIGURES 2 AND 3
NOTE
rigging of the rudder pedals a rigging tool may be fabricated from a steel block 1/2 inch
X 1 inch X 2 inches; and two 3/8-inch- x 2-1/8-inch-long pins. The rig pins are located parallel and
forward of the block, one on each side, and welded. The rig pins should be spaced as noted in
To facilitate
Figure
1.
a.
Place the rudder
b.
Install
c.
With the bellcrank in the neutral
graph
in
rig
pedals
in the aft
tool in the holes
Figure
3, then
remove
position.
provided
the
in the
pilots rudder pedals.
position, rig the

rig pin.
cables to the tension shown
on
the temperature cable tension
NOTE
Installation of the
justment
The
d.
right
Adjust the
as
the
rig pin in the pilots

pilots pedals.
hand rudder
pedals
are
rudder
rigged
pedals
0.38
as
Adjust the rudder pedal travel at the rudder pedal stops

immediately prior to contact with the rudder pedal stops.
f.
Make
Page
sure
that the rudder movement
27120100
corresponds
bring
the
copilots pedals
0.45 inch forward of the neutral
rudder travel at the rudder bellcrank stops
e.
will
indicated in
so
Figure
to the same ad-
position.
2.
that contact with the rudder bellcrank stops
to the movement of the rudder
occurs
pedals.
A20
~eechcraft
BONANZA SERIES
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
RUDDERVATOR AND TAB
jig assembly
Figure 1, Detail E) to position the differential
mechanism in the neutral position. The jig assembly
will position the differential mechanism of the right tail
e.
RUDDER
Install the differential mechanism
(refer
(V35B)
to
RUDDER RIGGING PROCEDURE
control arm aft of the differential mechanism for the

left tail control arm with the elevator and rudder sys-
(Flgure
tems in neutral.
NOTE
NOTE
All rudder
rigging should be accomwith

a travel board installed. A
plished
bubble protractor should not be used for
any rudder rigging procedure.
jig assembly is
The rudder system and elevator system

are separate systems forward of the
tems
The 35-590087 differential mechanism

to be used with the
35-590087-9 stop installed.
With the rudder, elevator and tab syscorrectly adjusted and in neutral,
the differential mechanism tail control
empennage. The control surfaces for

both the rudder and elevator are the
same
(rudder)
parts. The rudder and elevator
control surfaces will be referred to
Adjust the stops on the aft fuselage bulkhead to

permit a maximum combined ruddervator travel as
shown on the overall travel tables. Refer to Figure 1.
With the
adjusting
on
the
nose
link at the rudder
wheel and
jig assembly,
are
per
Figure
d.
Position the control column in the neutral position

with 4-112 inches (4-3/4 inches on D-10359 and after)
between the collar on the instrument panel and split
collar on the control column. This can be accom-
plished by cutting a block 4-1/2 (or 4-3/4 for D-10359

after) inches long and taping it to the control col-
umn.
rig tool and the
are
installed with
position with
tempera-
ture cable tension
graph.
The trim tab
system is in neutral when the cockpit

indicator is at 0", the cable tensions are
1, 27-20-00.
and
the rudder
the cable tensions set to the
tool in
each side, and
spaced
positioned
jig assembly.
the ruddervators in the 0"
the rudder
pins. See Figure 1, 27-20-00. The rig

pins are located parallel and forward on
oneon
is to be
control column block
set to the
The left rudder pedal is rigged .38 to .45

inch aft of the neutral position. To facilitate rigging of the rudder pedals to these
dimensions, a rigging tool may be fabricated from a steel block 1/2 x 1 x 2
inches, and two 3/8 x 2-1/8-inch-long rig
pins
arm
The elevator and rudder system are in

neutral when the differential mechanism
NOTE
the block,
welded. Rig
(center)
inside the hole in the
aft of the rudder
Straighten
position
pedals in neutral position with an aligning (rig)
the pedals. Refer to Figure 1, 27-20-00.
c.
the differential mechanism elevator
control
quadrant,
pedals, lengthen or
shorten as necessary to align the copilots pedals with
the pilots pedals. When aligning the pedals, be sure
both sets of pedals are in the same position.
just
the
jig assembly and the out(legs) of the jig assembly are

lightly contacting the forward side of the
fuselage station 256.9 bulkhead. The nut
a.
b.
lightly contacting
mechanism
board ends
as
ruddervator.
located
arms are
aft side of the 35-590087 differential
temperature cable tension
are at O" or symgraph

metrically split. The tabs are at 00 when
their trailing edges align with the trailing
edges of the ruddervators.
and the tabs
Adjust the short, lower elevator cable to a total

length of 23.62 ~.06 inches as measured from the
center of its attachment points at the reduction bellcrank and the differential mechanism. Refer to Figure
f.
5. No threads on the turnbuckle should be visible out-
adjustment. Safety the turnadjustment of this cable is required.
side of the barrel after

buckle. No further
g. Adjust the main rudder cable tensions to the tension shown on the temperature cable tension graph.
Refer to Figure 1. (The cables can be adjusted simul-
taneously with the rudder balance cable.) The balance

cable is adjusted by adding or removing washers
27-21-00
Page
A19
Mar 29/96
BONANZA SERIES
MAINTENANCE MANUAL

60
RUDDER TRAVEL
OVER-ALL TRAVEL
(COMBINE RUDDER AND ELEVATOR)
50
40
LEFT
23"
10 UP
260
~1" DOWN
LEFT
RIGHT
26" i
23"
10 UP
10 DOWN
RIGHT
440
20 UP
35"
20 UP
370
+2" DOWN
40"
+20 DOWN
i;
-~if"i
30
cci
BALANCE CABLE
LH. PEDAL
R.H. PEDAL
w
RUDDER
RUDDER PEDAL SETTINGS
NEUTRI\L POSITION
20
.38 TO .45
r:
INCHES AFT OF
c~Lj
NEUTRAL POSITION
L:
-tct
10
20
30
40
50
60
70
80
90
100
110
TEMPERATURE-F"
35-590087 AND 35-590087-9

DIFFERENTIAL MECHANISM
JIG ASSEMBLY
FUSELAGE STATION
151.0
FUSELAGE
STOP BOLTS
DETAIL
STATION 170.0
A
RIGHT RUDDER
PEDAL
CABLE
POSITION
LEFT RUDDER
ADJUSTING
CABLE
LINK
B
DETAIL
LA
D
DIFFERENTIAL
MECHANISM
DETAIL
/I
~71
DETAIL
DETAIL
B:
35-153-17
003
Rudder
System (V35B)
Figure 1
27-21-00
Page 2
Aug 18/95
A18
BONANZA SERIES
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
pulley bracket.
and rudcolumn
control
The differential mechanism,
neutral
in
their
der pedals are still to be
positions after
behind swivel bolt
cable tensions
on
are
the balance cable
RUDDERVATOR REMOVAL
(Figure 2)
NOTE
adjusted.

same parts. The rudder and elevator
Set the ruddervators in the neutral position (O") by

adjusting the length of the control push-pull rods.
Make sure the rod ends remain screwed the required
length into the push-pull tubes. They should extend
h.
past the inspection hole, i.e.
though
the
inspection
wire should not pass
control surfaces will be referred to

ruddervator.
hole.
Remove the differential mechanism jig assembly

remove the rudder pedal rig tool. Leave the control column 4-1/2- (or 4-3/4- for D-10359 and after)
inch-long block in place to prevent elevator system
i.
Before
and
influence
on
rudder
When ruddervator travels are correct, tighten the

jamnuts, the rudder stop jamnuts, safety the
turnbuckles, safety the nut on the swivel bolt on the
pulley bracket of the balance cable and recheck travel.
rod end
Remove the elevator column 4-1/2-
after) inch-long
Changing rudder rigging

ging. Check elevator rigging
ging.
i.
hinge
the
line. If any movement exists, find

of the looseness. If any hinge
cause
bolt, bearing
k.
D-10359 and
disassembly check the ruddervaperpendicular to the
tor for movement
rigging.
j. Set the rudder travel by adjusting the stop bolts

(refer to Figure 1, Detail A) just aft of the pilots rudder
pedals. Refer to Figure 1 for the applicable table of
travels and the appropriate rudden/ator travel values.
Steps b through h should result in the ruddervator
travel being correct or nearly correct. Make any final
minor adjustments by lengthening or shortening the
control push-pull tubes. Make sure the rod ends
remain screwed the required length into the push-pull
tubes. They should extend past the inspection hole,
i.e. a wire should not pass through the inspection hole.
(or 4-3/4-
wear,
I -II
WARNING
Remove the
a.
or
bushing shows signs

replaced.
of
must be
screws
holding the tail
cone
Remove the tail
b.
in
posi-
cone
and disconnect the
naviga-
side and bottom
panels.
wire.
tion
light
c.
Remove the aft
d.
Remove the 5/16-inch bolt from the
fuselage
push-pull
tube.
e.
inspection hole,
the open left side
Working inside
release the tab cable tension, then fasten the ruddervator tab cables so that no slack in the cables will be
transmitted
beyond
the affected tab.
NOTE
for
change elevator rigchanging rudder rig-
they
tion.
Identify the cables so that they may be

reinstalled in the proper location.
block.
may
after
as
f.
g.
Disconnect the elevator tab cables at the tab.

Remove the
guide
block located
on
the tab cable
at the front of the ruddervator.
h.
i.
Remove the cotter
pins
from the
Remove the nuts from the three
hinge
bolts.
hinge bolts.
NOTE
Check the ruddervator for the correct
direction of movement by working the
rudder pedals. When the left rudder
pedal is depressed, the left ruddervator should move down and the right
Support the
twist when the
fall or
removed.
down.
so
that it will not
hinge bolts
are
position of the washers in each

hinge assembly. Tag each hinge assembly as to the location of the washers.
Refer to Figure 2.
Note the
ruddervator should move up. When

the right rudder pedal is depressed,
the left ruddervator should move up,
and the right ruddervator should
move
ruddervator
j.
Remove the bolts from the
hinges.
27-21 -00
Page
A19
Mar 29/96
aeechcrrdt
BONANZA SERIES
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
k.
Remove the two bonding
attached near the hinges.
i.
jumpers which
are
Install the nuts

bolts.
d.
hinge
NOTE
The center and outboard
require
(Figore 2)
hinge bolt each
two AN960-10 washers under
the nut.
If the bolt
1U1~1WARNING
grip length,
Torque the nuts to

tightened up to
cotter pin holes.
one
inch-pounds; they
inch-pounds to align the
e.
20 to 25
may be
40
f.
h.
The elevator/rudder control surfaces will

be refered to as ruddervator.
Install the cotter
pins
in the
hinge bolts.
Connect the tab cables to their
NOTE
the ruddervator in its proper position.

Make sure the hinge bushings are installed in the
hinge halves on the stabilizer.
The bolt connecting the cable to the tab

horn should be tight enough to prevent
rattle, but loose enough to swivel. If the
bolt is too tight, the tab control system
will bind.
NOTE
or
must be
bushing
replaced.
The maximum wear for the inboard

bearing is.001-inch radial and .025-inch
axial.
Install the
bonding jumpers at the center and outboard hinges (two 105090D032-1D washers go
between the screw head and skin).
respective tab
horn.
Support
showing signs of wear
long
g. Install the guide block for the tab cable at the front
of the ruddervator.
NOTE
Any hinge bolt, bearing
is too
additional washer may be added under

the nut.
Airframe vibration may be caused by

worn elevator hinges, mlsthreaded
trim tab hinges, loose stabilizer
attachment or any Improper Installation which will allow free play.
b.
the center and outboard
Remove the ruddervator.
RUDDERVATOR INSTALLATION
a.
on
i.
Remove the fasteners which were installed to prebeing transmitted to the rest of
vent cable slack from
the tab system.
j.
k
i.
Using the notes made during removal (refer to

Figure 2), install the proper washers and bolts in the
hinges as follows:
Install the 5/16-inch
install the aft
push-pull tube
bolt.
fuselage inspection panels.
Connect the tail
light
wire and install the tail
cone.
c.
NOTE
Check for proper ruddervator and trim
tab travel after installation is complete.
When the control column is pulled back,
the correct ruddervator movement is up.
When the elevator trim tab control is
moved toward the nose-up position, the
trim tab should move DOWN. When the
elevator trim tab control is moved toward
the nose-down position, the trim tab
should move UP.
NOTE
Install the bolts with the nuts toward the
fuselage.
The inboard hinge requires two AN960-416L
AN960-416 washers. Install one AN960-416L
washer under the bolt head and one between the torque fitting and the ruddervator inboard hinge support.
One AN960-416 washer should be installed under the
1,
and
one
nut.
ELEVATOR TRIM TAB REMOVAL
Torque the
be tightened up to
pin holes.
2.
inch-pounds, It may
inch-pounds to align the cotter
nut to 30 to 40
70
(Figure 3)
a.
Remove the
screws
from the tail
cone.
27-21-00
Page
Mat 29/96
A19
BONANZA SERIES
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
STABILIZER
BOLT
WASHER
ELEVATOR (RUDDERVATOR)
NUT
WASHER
WASHER
TORQUE FITTTNG
INBOARD
HINGE SUPPORT
ao
I
:o:
J
a
a
4
C95012783131
Ruddervator Installation
Figure
27-21-00
Page
A19
Mar 29/96
iS)eechcraft
BONANZA SERIES
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
Disconnectthe electricalwiresand removethetail
b.
ELEVATOR RIGGING PROCEDURE
cone.
NOTE
pin from
Remove the cotter
c.
the control cables
rigging must be accomplished with a travel board installed. A

bubble protractor should not be used for
any elevator rigging procedure.
All elevator
devises and trim tab.

Remove the nuts, washers and bolts from the
d.
control cable devises.
Support the trim tab so that

hinge pin is removed.
e.
it will not fall
or
twist
when the
f.
Remove the
Adjust the stops on the aft fuselage bulkhead to

permit maximum combined elevator/rudder (rudden/a-
a.
wire from the trim tab
safety
hinge
pin.
as shown in the table of travels under

OVERALL TRAVEL in Figure 4.
torj travel
the
g.
Unclip
h.
Pull the
hinge pin.
hinge pin
out and remove the elevator
Position the control column in the neutral
position
trim tab.
with 4-1/2 inches (4-3/4 inches on D-10359 and after)

between the collar on the instrument panel and the
ELEVATOR TRIM TAB INSTALLATION
split collar on the control column. This can be accomplished by cutting a block 4-1/2- (or 4-3/4- for D-10359
and after) inches long as applicable and taping it to
(Figure 3)
a.
Support
the elevator trim tabin
position
on
the
ruddervator.
Install the trim tab
hinge pin. Refer
c.
Clip
in
d.
Connect the control cable devises to the trim tab
hinge pin
position
and
to
Figure
safety
3.
wire.
with the bolts, washers and nuts.
NOTE
The devises should be tight enoi~gh that
they will not rattle but loose enough so
that they will swivel. If the devises are
too
e.
f.
Straighten the nose wheel and adjust the pilots

rudder pedals (fore and aft) to the same position.
Install the rudder pedal rig tool in the pilots rudder
c.
b.
the
the control column.
tight, binding may
Install the cotter
pins
occur.
in the clevis bolts.
Connect the electrical wires and install the tail
cone.
NOTE
Check that the trim tab moves in the correct direction as indicated by movement
of the controls.
ELEVATOR AND TAB
(V35B)
NOTE
same parts. The rudder and elevator
control surfaces will be referred to as
ruddervator.
pedals
to
place
them in the neutral
position
and to
prevent rudder system influence onelevator rigging.

The left rudder
pedal
is aft of the
right
rudder
with the system in neutral. Use an offset

shown in Figure 1, Chapter 21-20-00.
d.
Install the differential mechanism
position
rig
pedal
tool
as
jig assembly to
posi-
the differential mechanism in the neutral
accomplished with the 35-590087 differjig assembly with the 35-590087-9

stop (refer to Figure 1, Detail E) installed. This will
position the right tail control arm of the differential
tion. This is
ential mechanism
mechanism aft of the left tail control arm with the

elevator system and rudder system in neutral.
Adjust the short, lower elevator cable to a total

length of 23.62 ~.06 inches as measured from the
center of its attachment points at the reduction bellcrank and the differential mechanism. Refer to Figure
e.
5. No threads
on
turnbuckle ends should be visible
adjustment. Safety the turnadjustment of this cable is required.
outside of the barrel after

buckle. No further
Adjust the upper and lower (forward of the reducbellcrank) elevator cable turnbuckles simultaneously until cable tensions are as shown on the temperature cable tension graph in Figure 4. The
f.
tion
differential mechanism, the control column and rudder

pedals are still to be in their neutral positions after
cable tensions
are
adiusted.
27-21-00
Page
Mar 29/96
A19
BONANZA SERIES
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
i.
2.
/I
DETAIL A
TAB HINGE
PIN
TAB HORN
CABLE BOLT
DETAIL B
O
RIGHT\
./Q\IJ
f--
OII
IO
o
RIGHT
DETAIL D
DETAilLC
~Yc----fAB
HINGE PIN
RUDDERVATOR
#TAIL H
DETAIL G
O
WRONG
WRONG
DETAIL E
DETAIL
F
C9CID127831JS C
Elevator Trim Tab Installation
Figure
27-21-00
Page
A19
Mar 29/96
BONANZA SERIES
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
50
I
",~K
io I
ELEVATOR TRAVEL
UP TR*VEL
cr,
WWH
o
2
tnYs~
oR
19"
Pv?+O,
OVERALL TRAVEL
T~UVELCOMBINED ELEVATOR
AND RUDDER)
tP,
1"
(L.H.) 44~
(R.H.) 3P
20 UP
2~ UP
37.
40~
2. DOWN
2~ DOWN
tE
D
iLL(~
~;I
20
30
50
40
60
70
TEMPERATURE
80
90
100
110
-"F
ELEVATOR TAB TRAVEL

ELEVATOR DOWN CABLE
UP TRAVEL
ELEVATOR TAB NEUTRAL

POSmON FROII O" ELEVATOR
DOWN TRAVEL
LEFT TAB
51/2"
+1/20
--10
23~
-t
20
ELEVATOR
FAIRLEAD
ELEVATOR UP CABLE
HINGE LINE
RIG~T TAB
DETAIL
OC
0"
Il"
0"
1"
TAB CABLE STOPS
STOP PLATE
-C9o~SPRING
TAB "UP~ CABLES
AB "DOWN" CABLES
FWD
STA.
272
ELEVATOR DOWN~
ADJUST ACTUATOR SCREW TO 23~
g RIG WITH TAB DOWN
.44
.06
SPRING
DETAIL
ELEVATOR DOWN SPRING
UP ELEVATOR
r~ UP CI\BLE
TAB DOWN CABLE
U
r
ELEVATOR DOWN
~a
--~III
DOWN ELEVATOR
CABLE
ELEVATOR UP~
NOSE DOWN
DETAIL
TAB NOSE UP~
DETAIL
DETAIL
MECHANISM
C
i DETAIL
DETAIL
F
35-152-38
001
Elevator
System (V35B)
Figure 4
27-21-00
Page
Illar 29/96
A19
Qeechc~ft
BONANZA SERIES
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
NOTE
the
With the rudder, elevator and tab cable

systems correctly adjusted and in neutral, the differential mechanism is in its
neutral position when its tail control (rudder arms) are lightly contacting the aft
side of the 35-390087 differential
mechanism jig assembly (with -9 stop
installed) and the outboard ends (legs)
of the jig assembly are lightly contacting
the forward side of the fuselage station
256.9 bulkhead. The nut on the differential mechanism elevator (center) control
arm is to be positioned inside the hole in
the jig assembly.
The elevator and rudder system is in
neutral when the differential mechanism
jig assembly, the rudder rig tool

control column block
are
and the
installed with
the ruddervators in the 0"
position and
temperature cable tension graph. Refer to Figure
4. The trim tab system is in neutral when
the cable tensions set to the
cockpit indicator is
tensions
at
0", the cable
set to the
temperature
graph and the tabs are at
symmetrically split to correct for
are
cable tension
0"
or
yaw. The tabs
ing edges align
are
at O" when their trail-
with the
trailing edges
of
the ruddervators.
Set the ruddervators in the neutral
position (O") by
lengths. Make
sure the rod ends remain screwed the required length
into the push-pull tubes. They should extend past the
inspection hole, i.e. a wire should not pass through the
inspection hole.
g.
adjusting
the control
push-pull
tube
h.
Remove the differential mechanism
and
remove
jig assemblies
4-1/2-inch-long block (4-3/4-inch-long
on D-10359 and after) on the control column. Recheck
(reset if necessary) the elevator cable tensions. The
elevator trim system may be repositioned to minimize
the downspring/bob weight effect on the elevator arm
and elevator cable tensions. After the downspring
effect is minimized, the up-and-down cable tension
the
average must fall within the maximum and minimum
llrB
DIFFERENTIAL
MECHANISM
ELEVATOR
REDUCTION
BELL CRANK
23.62 f- .08
INCHES
FS 256.9
FS 233.5
SHORT. LOWER
ELEVATOR CABLE
35-152-41
Elevator Short Lower Cable
Adjustment
I
27-21 -00
Page
A19
Mar 29/96
~eechcraft
BONANZA SERIES
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
values
designated by the temperature cable tension

graph.
Figure 4.
Refer to
Check the elevators for correct up-and-down travel

limits: 22-1/2 degrees ~O -1 degree up and 19 +2 -1
degrees down. The stops are nonadjustable stops forward of the instrument panel and underneath the control column. Steps b through h should result in the
i.
ruddervator travel
being correct or close to correct.

Make any final minor adjustments by lengthening or
shortening the ruddervator push-pull tubes, but make
sure
the rod ends remain screwed the
required length
into the
push-pull tubes. They should extend past the

inspection hole, i.e. a wire should not pass through the
inspection
j.
hole.
Adjust the elevator downspring cable turnbuckle
Check the up and down travel of the elevator tabs.

a.
The travel should be 5-1/2" +1/2" -1" up and 23" +2"
00 down.
b.
Check the main and the aft tab cables for proper
as shown on the temperature cable tension
tension
graph.
Refer to Figure 4. The same number of terminal threads should be visible on each end of the turnbuckle barrels (a maximum of three threads may be
visible).
ELECTRIC ELEVATOR TRIM
For the Model F33A, E33C and V35B electric trim syst,,t see Chapter 27-30-00.
with the ruddervators 9" up and the tabs 20" down

(nose up) to remove all slack from this cable system;
then check the force
on
pounds applied
on
NOTE
The
the elevator control column.
With the trim tabs set at neutral
k.
tab travel.
are
correct,
Elevator tabs should be
the rod-end jam nuts, safety the turnbuckles

and recheck the travels. Remove the rudder rig tool.
rigged with the

bubble protractor perpendicular to the chord plane of the stabiiizer or tab respectively.
travel board
i.
Changing elevator rigging maychange rudder rigging. Check rudder rigging after changing elevator rigging,
a.
on
ARNING
WULIING
bubble protractor is not
However, with the ruddervator set at

neutral, a tab travel board or a bubble
protractor may be used to set elevator
tighten
to set the ruddervator travels.
A travel board must be used for this.
the ruddervators
When the elevator travels and forces
of
use
adequate
(O"), force of 19 ~3
the control column is required to
a
through neutral. If necessary,

the
elevator
adjust
downspring cable turnbuckle to
obtain the value.
move
(OPTIONAL)
Install
or
4-1/2-inch-long block (or 4-3/4-inch-long

after) on the control column and
rudder pedal rig tool (Figure 1, 27-20-00) to
a
D-10359 and
install the
maintain the ruddervators in neutral. Rotate the elevator tab wheel in the cabin so the indicator dial is set on
Check for correct direction of ruddervator travel by moving the control

column. When the control column Is
pushed forward,
zero.
NOTE
the correct rudder-
Both elevator trim tabs should be at neutral (tab trailing edge aligned with ruddervator trailing edge; see the procedure
for RIGGING ELEVATOR TRIM TABS
TO CORRECT FOR YAW). Trim tab actuator stops on the cables should be
moved away from the stops in the fuse-
vator movement is down. When the
control column Is
pulled back,
the
correct ruddervator movement Is up.
When the elevator trim tab control Is

moved toward the nose-up position,
the trim tab should move DOWN.
When the elevator trim tab control is

moved toward the nose-down posltlon, the trim tab should move UP.
INSPECTION OF ELEVATOR TABS
NOTE
The trim tabs have
surface,
an
upper contoured
lage.
b.
Rotate the elevator trim tab control wheel to full

up on the indicator (tabs down). Check the tab
actuator at F.S. 233.5. for a distance of.38 to .50 inch
between the face of the actuator and the centerline of
nose
the bolt in the clevis end of the actuator

shown in
Figure
screw as
6.
27-21-00
Page
10
Mar 29/96
A19
aeechcraft
BONANZA SERIES
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
Move the tab system to neutral (00) position.
readjust cable tension per the temperature
Adjust the length of the actuator screw by disconnecting the bellcrank at the actuator bolt and turning
the screw to the dimension shown in Figure 6. Recon-
f.
nect the bellcrank to the tab actuator,
g. Move the tab control wheel toward nose-down

a"d establish trim tab up-travel per the chart on Figure
c.
Check and
cable tension
Adjust the four trim tab cables aft of the bellcrank
d.
to obtain 23" +2" -0" tab down
position,
the fixed
h.
maximum of 3
preceding procedure has established
of the elevator tab actuator to
Check the clevis bolts which attach the tab cables
stop against the fixed stop in the fuselage. Move the
(O") on the indicator. The

trailing edge of the trim tabs should align with the traili"g edge of the ruddervators.
tab control wheel to neutral
capabilthrough its
correctly oriented
the
j.
move
maximum available range and has

the tab indicator, the tab actuator and trim tabs to
Reinspect
and
safety
and cable stops affected

tab cable stops are to be
one
another.
pounds
CLEVIS
enough to allow free

binding the tab cables.
i.
Move the trim tab wheel toward nose-up and
establish the trim tab down-travel per the chart on Figure 4, and move the trim tab cable adjustable down
to obtain these dimensions.
ity
adjustable upstep against
stop in the fuselage.
movement of the horn without
fully nose down on

the indicator (tabs up). The trim tab up-position should
be 5-1/2" +1/2" -1" without altering the tab cable
adjustment. Loosen the tab cable stop, if necessary,
The
4 if necessary.
rosion and dirt and be loose
threads),
Move the tab control wheel to
e.
Figure
to the tab horn. The clevis bolts should be free of cor-
stop if necessary. The same number of terminal

threads should be visible on each end of the turn-
(a
in
4. Move the trim tab cable
and establish
the initial trim tab cable tension per the temperature

cable tension graph on figure 4. Loosen the tab cable
buckle barrel
graph
of
all turnbuckles, nuts, bolts

during this procedure. The
tightened
to 20 +5 -0 inch-
torque and safetied.
END
BELLCRANK
ACTUATOR
BELLCRANK LINKAGE
SCREW
ACTUATOR
FACE OF
~BOLT
ACTUATOR
CABLE OPENING
ACTUATOR
.50.38
BOLT
ACTUATOR
CENTERLINE
\O
TO
ACTUATOR BOLT CENTERLINE

TO ACTUATOR FACE DISTANCE
35-152-040
Trim Tab Actuator and Bellcrank
Figure
01358)
6
27-21-00
Page
A19
11
Mar 29/96
C~3eechcraft
BONANZA SERIES
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
i
After
b. Adjust the left elevator tab down approximately 1

by lengthening the upper left cable and shortening the
rewol"
WARNING
left cable.
rigging
the ruddervator and
c.
Figure
elevator trim tab control system,

check for correct movement of the
control surfaces with respect to the
movement of the controls. When the
control column Is moved forward, the
ruddervators should move DOWN.
When the control column Is moved
ah, the ruddervators should move
UP. When the elevator trim tab control Is moved toward the nose up
position, the trim tab should move
DOWN. When the elevator trim tab
control Is moved toward the nose
down position, the trim tab should
move UP.
k.
inspection panels
Close all
and test
d.
if
yawing
occurs
in level
flight,
graph specifications
on
4.
Safety
the two turnbuckles, close

fly the airplane.
inspection
pan-
els and test
NOTE
In the event the above procedure results
in overcorrecting, partial readjustment to
reduce the rudder effect can be accomplished on one tab only. The maximum
allowable amount of split between trim
tabs is 6". The average degree of tab
travel at fully up or down cannot exceed
the limit of travel.
fly the air-
plane.
i.
Set cable tension to the
with the ailerons in
ELEVATOR TAB INDICATOR CABLE

REPLACEMENT
(Flgure 7)
neutral, adjust the tabs per the instructions under RIG-
a.
GING ELEVATOR TRIM TABS TO CORRECT FOR
neutral
YAW.
tion 185 should be
RIGGING ELEVATOR TRIM TABS TO CORRECT
To install the dial indicator cable, thread the cable

through the hole in the head of the cotter pin and out
FOR YAW
The elevator tabs
be
rigged to function as a rudder tab by making minor adjustments up and down

from neutral position.
can
FOR RIGHT YAW
(NOSE OF
LEVEL)
Adjust the right elevator tab down approximately

by lengthening the upper right trim tab cable and
shortening the lower right trim tab cable.
a.
1"
left elevator tab up approximately 1" by

shortening the upper left trim tab cable and lengthening the lower left cable.
b.
c.
Adjust the
Set cable tensions to the
Figure
d.
graph specifications
on
4.
Safety
the two turnbuckles, close

fly the airplane.
inspection
pan-
els and test
FOR LEFT YAW
(NOSE
OF AIRPLANE TENDS TO
MOVE LEFT WITH WINGS
LEVEL)
Adjust the right elevator tab up approximately 1"

by lengthening the lower right tab cable and shortening the upper right tab cable.
a.
approximately
even.
b.
through the holes

c.
in the indicator drum.
With the dial at 0
both ends of the cable
degrees, slip
are
of
the cable
so
that
equal length.
Wrap the cable around the drum one full turn in

each direction. The end that wraps to the right will be
wrapped clockwise around the drum, and the end that
d.
AIRPLANE TENDS
TO MOVE TO RIGHT WITH WINGS
Place the proper tension on the trim cables in

position. Both turnbuckles aft of Fuselage Sta-
wraps to the left will be wrapped counterclockwise,

viewed from the left side.
e.
Route the cable
over
the
appropriate
idler
as
pulley
down to the shaft of the tab control wheel.

With the dial still in 0 degrees position, take the
cable coming off the top of the elevator tab dial
sheave and bring it down to the forward side of the tab
wheel shaft to the left of the small hole.
f.
g. Wrap the cable (counterclockwise) around the

shaft toward the hole three turns. Insert the cable
through the hole. Wrap the surplus cable around the
shaft.
h.
With the dial set at 0
take the cable
com-
ing
off the bottom of the trim tab dial sheave and
bring
degrees,
it down to the aft side of the tab wheel shaft, to the
27-21-00
Page
12
Mar 29196
A19
aeechc~rt
BONANZA SERIES
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
COTTER PIN
WRAP ONE FULL
TURN IN BOTH
DIRECTIONS
I
I
lili~
INDICATOR
(SHEAVE)
R~ATEDV
90"
DETAIL
ANDIDLER
PULLEY
TIE
SOLDERI
INDICATOR
DRUM (SHEAVE)
r-
IIN/
na
r-
WRAP 3 FULL TURNS-/
DETAIL
TRIM TAB CONTROL

WHEEL SHAFT
ROTATED 90
TRIM
CONTROL
WHEEL
.36-152-39
Elevator Trim Tab Indicator Cable
Figure
Replacement
27-21-00
Page
A19
13
Mar 29/96
BONANZA SERIES
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
right of the hole in the shaft, and wrap the cable

(clockwise as viewed from the left end of the shaft)
b. Remove the access panel on the left side

fuselage, just forward of the ruddervator.
three turns toward the hole in the shaft.
Install identification tags to the cables and disconare routed aft to the elevator
trim tabs.
i.
Insert the cable
through
c.
the hole in the shaft and
wrap it around the shaft.
j. Twist the cables together and

only rosin core solder.
Check the tab dial to
stop to the other.
k.
see
solder them. Use
nect the cables which
d.
Install identification tags to the cables
one
Set the tab dial at 0 degrees. Place tension on the

tab cables in the tail section to hold the tabs in line
with rudden/ators.
i.
ward
pulleys. Secure the cables to the
actuator screw
position
Safety the turnbuckles and set the stops

fuselage cables to maintain proper travel in
dance with the travel table in Figure 4.
m.
Do not
cables.
e.
so
on
the
accor-
Identify the
cables
the bracket and
move
remove
the actuator to
airplane.
(V35B)
above
Position the actuator assembly in the bracket and

attaching bolts.
install the three

or
below the
the cable to the elevator tab horn
should swivel in the horn at all times, if the bolt binds,

it will cause cracks to develop in the tab horn. The bolt
just tight enough to prevent rattle, but

tight enough to cause binding in the horn.
should be
TRIM TAB ACTUATOR REMOVAL
b.
Rotate the actuator drum upward until the pin

c.
securing the cable to the drum is no longer visible
through the actuator cable opening.
NOTE
not
flight compartfully nose-up posi-
of the actuator
drum travel.
If the bellcrank-to-actuator
screw
linkage
is disconnected, install the actuator bolt,

washers, nut and cotter pin to attach the
(V35B)
the trim control to the

on the elevator trim tab indicator,
Using the cable at the forward side
drum, be certain the cable is at the end of its actuator
bellcrank to the actuator.
the trim tab control in the
noted
securing
the actuator and attached
UP.
recommended limits, will cause excessive wear on the

tab hinges. if excessive wear is noted on the ruddervator half of the hinge, it should be replaced,
move
being removed
replacement actuator are
the actuator
TRIM TAB ACTUATOR INSTALLATION
a.
as
put bends in the
It may be necessary to remove the two

tab cable pulleys located directly below
the actuator, in order to provide cleatance for the cable ends on the actuator
cables through the pulley bracket.
INSPECTION OF TAB HINGES
ment,
or
NOTE
After rigging the elevator and elevator

trim tab control system, check for
correct movement of the control surfaces with respect to the movement
of the controls. When the elevator
trim tab control wheel Is moved
toward the NOSE DOWN position, the
tion
actuator so the
be maintained.
correctly.
WARNING
Using
on
Remove the three bolts
I w~I
a.
kink
that the cables on the
eco""ected
f.
damage,
bellcrank from the
securing
can
CAUTION
With the ruddervators set in the neutral

position, the left elevator tab should be
set at 2" ~1" above neutral ruddervator
position. The right elevator tab should be
set at O" ~1" ruddervator position.
The bolt
each
cables routed forward to the flight compartment.

Secure the cables so they do not come off of the for-
NOTE
improper cable tensions, either
on
side of the first turnbuckle and disconnect the actuator
that it will roll from
elevator trim tab should
of the
d.
With the actuator bolt
actuator screw
connecting
the bellcrank to
linkage installed, position the trim tab
27-21-00
Page
14
Mar 29/96
A~9
aeechcraft
BONANZA SERIES
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
actuator screw by rotating the actuator drum to obtain
the actuator bolt-centerline-to-actuator-face
distance
h.
of.38 to .50
in
e.
as
shown in
Figure
6.
degrees
as
Connect the actuator cables to the cables routed
aft from the
Do not
kink
or
are
hooked up
correctly. Operate
system
through the full travel to ensure complete and proper degrees of travel of the
the elevator
trim tabs. Check for proper direction of

travel. For a nose-up condition on the
airplane, the trim tab should move down.
For a full nose-down condition, the trim
tab should move up.
put bends in the
cables.
9 Connect the bellcrank cables routed aft to the
elevator trim tabs,
4.
Be certain that all cables
CAUTION
damage,
Figure
CAUTION
at this time.
noted in
r~7
flight compartment.
f. If the two tab cable pulleys, located directly below

the actuators, were removed to provide clearance for
the ends of the actuator cable, install the two pulleys
The elevator trim tab indicator on the pilots instrupanel should indicate the fully nose-up position
ment
i.
Install the
lage, just
access
panel
on
the left side of the fuse-
forward of the ruddervator.
27-21-00
Page
A19
15
Mar 29/96
BONANZA SERIES
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
ELEVATOR AND TAB MAINTENANCE
PRACTICES (F33A, F33C, A36, A36TC
AND B36TC)
WARNING
airplane
d.
Connect the
for the elevator.
e.
Connect the tail
access
doors.
downstop bolt so the aft side of the belltouches

a straightedge held vertically
just
the
back
of
the
bulkhead (or is .62 1 .05 inch
against
forward of the straightedge on F33A).
~t
the elevator
c.
actuator will be coded with
d.
on
push-pull rod
Adjust
the elevator upstep bolt for

(25" ~tl" on F33A).
Disconnect the elevator

light and remove the tail cone,
b.
Remove the tail section access doors

hand side of the aft fuselage,
push-pull
navigation
on
200
the left-
tension
as
tubes from the
With the elevators
B36TC
bolts.
i.
cable and
remove
Connect the elevator bonding cable and position

on the stabilizer, install the hinge bolts
b.
and
adjust
a
the
cable
1.
downsprings.
fully rigged
on
A36, A36TC,
Employing
hand-held force gage
on
the control
as
follows:
A36, A36TC and B36TC:

23 maximum
pounds
of breakout force at
20" DOWN elevator.
b)
25to26
poundsofforcethrough NEUTRAL
23 to 24
pounds
elevator.
safety,
Connect the rod to the trim tab actuator

elevator.
only,
a)
the elevator
tighten
Figure
wheel, adjust the elevator downsprings

1.
ELEVATOR INSTALLATION
and nuts then
by
the control column should have a 1/16- to

1/8-inch cushion when in the full forward position.
elevator trim tab.
a.
the control column

so
indicated in Sheet 2 of
Disconnect the actuator rod at the actuator for the
bonding
25"
deflection of
With the column fastened at neutral
d.

the elevator.
turnbuckles to obtain neutral elevators with
Connect the elevator
f.
or
support.
g.
hinge
A36,
the gust lock hole is

0.03 inches aft of the hole in the control column
torque tube fittings of the elevator.
Remove the
downward
on
downspring.
Rig neutral elevators on

positioning the control column
e.
a.
for
F33A, 20" ~tl"
i" on B36TC.
23"~ 1" up
red.
Adjust
deflection of 15" ~1"
ELEVATOR REMOVAL
e.
EA-320)
crank
uator will be coded with a blue color,
c.
wires and install the tail
Set the
a.
actuators may have colored stripes or

may be of a solid color. The left act-
or
Install the
TO EA-389 U(CEPT
preceding airplane serials and

airplanes In compliance with
right
torque tube fit-
CJ-149 AND ATTER, PRIOR TO E-21 I I

EXCEPT E-1946 AND E-2104, AND PRIOR
b.
The
at the
RIGGING THE ELEVATOR CONTROL

SYSTEM (CE-748, CE-772 AND AFTER,
Service Bulletin No. 2399, the elevator

tab actuators are color-coded. The
black
push-pull tubes
light
point for the
inch-pounds.
serials 08-1566 and after;
different color.
On the
nut at the inboard
to 50-70
cone.
8-1948, 8-2104, E-2111 and after;

EA-320, EA-389 and after, observe the
color coding on allpark when replacing or installing control cables,
bellcranks, and/or other control system components. DO NOT connect
parts of one color to coded parts of a
earlier
attaching
torque
ting
f.
On
Install the
c.
elevator and
on
the
c)
of force
as
23" UP elevator
is reached.
27-30-00
A18
Page 1
Aug 18/95
e~edtcraft
BONANZA SERIES
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
CABLE
CABLES
ELEVATOR
22
SURFACE
TENSION
LBS.
TOP
CABLE
(DOWN ELEVATOR)
AT
23
25"~
UP
F33A
15~
DOWN
F33C
59"F
5 LBS.
MODEL
TRAVEL
1"
NOTE
ON SERIALS CE-881 AND AFTER. CJ-156 AND AFTER. E-1588 THRU

E-2111 EXCEPT E-1946 AND E-2104. EA-I THRU EA-388 EXCEPT EA320. THE IN-LINE FORCE REOUIRED TO MOVE THE TRIM TAB SYSTEM
CABLES SHALL NOT EXCEED 20 POUNDS. WITH OR WITHOUT ELECTRIC
TRIM.
ELEVATOR DOWN STOP
LOWER CABLE
(UP ELEVATORI
24
TOP
LBS.
CABLE
(DOWN ELEVATOR)
AT
26
(UP
25
15
1"
UP
A36
20"~
DOWN
A36TC
(I II
nayi
ON MODELS F33A. F33C. A36. A36TC AND B36TC WHERE THE TAB
CABLES DIVIDE INTO TWO CABLES EACH. THE TWO CABLES SHALL
BE ADJUSTED FOR EOUAL TENSION WITHIN TWO POUNDS OF TOTAL
VARIATION.
59"F
5 LBS.
LOWER CABLE
ELEVATOR)
5
TOP
LBS.
CABLE
(DOWN ELEVATOR)
AT
23"~
23~
1"
UP
25"+
DOWN
C,
B36TC
o\ O
O
59F
LOWER CABLE
5 LBS.
(UP ELEVATOR)
ELEVATOR
TABS
15
AT
LBS.
LBS.
10"+
1"
UP
LBS.
27~
1"
DOWN
I
1
F33A
A36
II II
1111
A36TC
59"F
ELEVATOR
ELEVATOR DOWN
II IY
/II II
ELEVATOR
UPSTOP
DOWN
D(!
B36TC
AT
59"F
10+
UP
21"+
DOWN
ELEVATOR
UY
DETAIL
ELEVATOR UP
UP
000
C
C
DETAI~LA
I,
~s
ELEVATOR
UP
ELEVATOR DOWN
TAB
ElevatorSy~tem (CE-748, CE-M and an.r; W-149and 8Rer;

prior to E-2111, except E-1946 and E-2104;
prior to EA-389, except EA-320)
(Sheet 1 of 2)
Figure 1
NOSE DOWN
TAB
NOSE
UP
DETAIL
DETAIL
DETAIL
C9~E*2783DIO
27-30-00
Page 2
Aug 18l95
A18
aeechcraft
BONANZA SERIES
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
ALL ELEVATOR TAB CABLES
8~
41
10
20
40
30
50
70
60
TEMPERATUAE-
80
90
100
110
120
110
120
OF
50
40
AND~
"i
ToPELEV_AToR
10
20
30
40
50
MuFn
60
70
TEMPERATURE-
80
90
100
"F
Ti-a3b AND,
M~UM
16
i
i1
0
10
20
30
40
50
60
70
BO
90
100
110
120
TEMPERATURE- "F
Elevator
System (CE-748, CE-n2 and after; CJ-149 and after;

prior to E-2111, except E-1948 and E-2104;
prior to EA-389, except EA-320)
(Sheet 2 of 2)
Figure 1
27-30-00
A18
Page 3
Aug 18/95
Beeehcr~t
BONANZA SERIES
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
ELEVATOR
ELEV.
UP
ELEV.
DOWN
ELEV.
UP
ELEV.
NOSE
NEUTRAL RIG PLN
TOOL
FABRICATE FROM
5/16-INCH-DIAMETER
STEEL ROD
DOWN
DOWN
1.35"
NOSE UP
\NOSE
NOSE
DETAIL
DOWN
UP
C
aJa
a.sa;03 rNLH68
B36TC 3.45 r.03 INCHES
ELEVATOR DOWN
TAB
DETAIL
CABLE STOPS
~c.95..
OETAILB
A
F.S.
ELEVATOR
179
UP
CABLE
TOP
5 LBS.
24
(OOWN ELEVATOR)
AT
(UP
LBS.
LOWER
AT
59F
26
[UP
LBS.
AT
DOWN
UP
DOWN
TDP
CABLE
23
LBS.
25"
5
O
LBS.
LBS.
25
DOWN RH
27"
I"
DOWN LH
A36
B36TC
59"F
c
8"
UP
836TC
LOWER CABLE
10"
ELEV.
UP
ELEVATOR)
LBS
15
ELEVATOR
TABS
CABLE
(DOWNELEVATOR)
ELEVATOR BELLCRANK STOPS
I"-0
20"
ELEVATOR)
24
25
MODEL
A36
59"F
26
TRAVEL
SURFACE
TENSION
CABLE
CABLES
ELEVATOR
I"
UP RH
I"
UP
LH
E-2104. E-2111 AND AFTER: EA-320. EA-389 AND AFTER. THE

REOUIRED TO MOVE THE TRIM TAB SYSTEM CABLES SHALL NOT
ON SERIALS E-1946.
ELEV.
NOSE
DOWN
DOWN\\
NOSE
L=i
ELEV.
IN-LINE
DOWN
EXCEED
ON
UP
FORCE
16
MODELS
THE
POUNDS.
EACH.
C~3
ELEV.
E
D
AND
OR
B36TC
TWO CABLES SHALL
TENSIONMETER
BLES WITH
DETAIL
A36.
WITH
WITHOUT ELECTRIC
WHERE
BE
TAB CABLES
DIVIDE
ADJUSTED FOR EOUAL
THE
READINGS SHALL BE
ELEVATOR
IN
THE
TAKEN
ON
TWO CABLES
INTO
TENSION WITHIN 2
THE
NEUTRAL POSITION.
THE DOWN-SPRINGS DISCONNECTED.

F.S.
THE
TRIM.
.5
UP
*THE
DETAIL
POUNDS.
TOP
AND
AGAINST
BOTTOM
THE
STOPS
CAAND
C9aEn2783nM9
233.50
Elevator System (8-1948, E-2104, E-2111 and after;

EA-320, EA-389 and after)
(Sheet 1 of 2)
Figure 1A
27-3090
Page
Aug 18/95
A18
aeechct~ft
BONANZA SERIES
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
TEUPERATURE CABLE TENSION GRAPH

ALL ELEVATOR TAB CABLES
tffRRtFmfft-KHitF;tffttmtt+ttr-::
TAe
3~
210
l0
20
30
40
50
60
TEMPERATURE
70
80
90
100
liO
120
"F
40
530
a
420
to.
20
30
40
50
60
70
8b
9~
100
liO
liO
110
120
TEMPERAfURE- "F
f
.A3~
0
0
l0
20
30
40
50
60
70
80
50
100
TEMPERATURE- OF
Elevator
System (E-1946, E-2104,
E-2111 and after;
EA-320, EA-389 and after)
(Sheet 2 of 2)
Figure 1
27-30-00
A18
Page 5
Aug 18/95
aeechc~ft
BONANZA SERIES
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
F33A and F33C:
2.
a)
17 to 13
pounds of force
through
15 to 16
of force as 25"
pounds
fully
UP
elevator is reached.
reading at NEUTRAL elevator and 23"

(A36, A36TC, and B36TC) or 25" (F33A, F33C) UP
elevator (.06 inch off fully upstep) must be taken while
The gage
Removethe
h.
Connect the elevator
NEUTRAL
elevator.
b)
g.
the control wheel is in motion.
Adjust each spring by transferring the upper end

spring-attaching hole providing increased or
decreased tension, as applicable. The elevator sysk.
to a
rigtool.
downsprings.
i. With the elevators fully rigged (including autopilot

and electric trim if installed), the force required to pull
the control wheelaft through neutral must be 25 to 29
POU"dS. The force required to return the wheel

through neutral shall be 20 to 24 pounds. The difference (friction of the system) between the two readings
shall never exceed 9 pounds (7 pounds is desired) nor
be less than 4 pounds.
j
Maintain
minimum clearance of.06 inch between
tem should have sufficient freedom to allow free return
adapter and the inner control column

guide assembly (both the pilots and copilots) at fully
of the elevator from
down elevator
fully UP
to
fully
DOWN.
the control wheel
on
the A36 and B36TC.
NOTE
NOTE
After

trim tab control system, check for correct
movement of the control surfaces with
respect to the movement of the controls.
NOSE DOWN position, the trim tab

should move UP.
AFTER, EA-320, E1-389 AND AFTER)

Set the
downstop
bolt
so
hole in the bellcrank is .38 inch
straightedge
held
against
that the center of the

.05 inch forward of
the back of the bulkhead at
F.S. 257.606.
b. Adjust the elevator push-pull rod for an elevator
deflection of 20" ~1" down ton B36TC 25" ~1"),
Adjust
c.
the elevator upstep bolt for
25" +1" -O" on A36 and 23" ~1" up
Disconnectthe
d.
on
deflection of
B36TC.
elevatordownsprings.
Rig neutral elevators on the control column by

positioning the pilots control column so the gust lock
hole is 2.50 ~.03 ton B36TO 3.45 ~.03) inches aft of
the hole in the control column support and install rig
tool (Sheet 1 of Figure 1A).
e.
NOTE
The short end of the tool is inserted into
the control column support and the long
end is inserted into the control column.
The weight of the control column will
hold the tool in place.
f.
the turnbuckles to obtain neutral elevators

cable tension as indicated in Sheet 2 of Figure
Adjust
with
1A.
the elevator and trim tab
correct movement of
the control surfaces with respect to the
movement of the controls. When the trim
tab control wheel is moved toward the
RIGGING THE ELEVATOR CONTROL

SYSTEM (8-1946 E-2104, E-2fll AND
a.
rigging
system, check for
ELEVATOR TAB INDICATOR CABLE

REPLACEMENT (CE-748, CE-772 AND
CJ-149 AND AFTER, PRIOR TO
E-2111 EXCEPT E-1946, AND E-2104,
PRIOR TO EA-389 EXCEPT EA-320)
a.
Place the proper tension
"eutal
b.
on
the trim cables in
position.
To install the dial indicator cable, thread the cable
through the hole in the head of the cotter pin and

through the holes in the indicator drum.
c.
With the dial at 0
both ends of the cable
degrees, slip the cable

are equal length.
so
out
that
d. Wrap the cable around the drum one full turn in

each direction. The end that wraps to the right will be
wrapped clockwise around the drum, and the end that
wraps to the left will be wrapped counterclockwise,

viewed from the left side.
e.
Route the cable
over
the
appropriate
idler
as
pulley
down to the shaft of the tab control wheel.
With the dial still in O degrees position, take the

cable coming off the top of the elevator tab dial
sheave and bring it down to the forward side of the tab
f.
wheel shaft to the left of the small hole.
27-30-00
Page 6
Aug 18/95
A18
cjaeechcraft
BONANZA SERIES
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
g. Wrap the cable (counterclockwise) around the
shaft toward the hole three turns. insert the cable
through the hole. Wrap the surplus cable around
the
shaft.
h.
Remove the
c.
upholstery panel
baggage
area.
d.
identifying
After
and
tagging
from the back of the
the cables for rein-
stallation, disconnect the forward trim tab cables at the

takethecablecom-
WiththedialsetatOdegrees,
ing off the bottom
of the trim tab dial sheave and
bring
turnbuckles in the aft
it down to the aft side of the tab wheel shaft to the
Tie nylon
e.
small knot.
right of the hole in the shaft, and wrap the cable

(clockwise as viewed from the left end of the shaft)
f.
strings
fuselage.
to each of the cable ends. Use a
three turns toward the hole in the shaft.
Remove the access panel (actuator door) which is

located under the pulleys below the pedestal.
i.
g.
Remov~ the
h.
Remove the
Insert the cable
through
the hole in the shaft and
wrap it around the shaft.
j.
Twist the cables
only
k.
rosin
core
together and
solder them. Use
engine
pedestal.
autopilot panel (if installed)

propeller controls.
below the
solder.
on
NOTE
Check the tab dial to

to the other.
see
that it will roll from
Station a man in the aft fuselage to keep

small amount of tension on the strings
as they are pulled through the fuselage.
one
stop
i.
and
panel
Set the tab dial at O
degrees.
Place tension
on
the
tab cables in the tail section to hold the tabs in line
i.
with the elevators.
the neutral
j.
NOTE
Place the elevator tab control in neutral and mark
position
on
the
sprocket
and chain.
Count the number of chain links
on
each side of
the mark and note the number for later reference.

With the elevators set in the neutral
position, the left elevator tab should be
set at 2" rt~lo above neutral elevator position. The
right elevator tab should

position.
k.
Pull the cables and
strings
from the
fuselage
out
through the pedestal.
be set
NOTE
at O" ~1" elevator
Safety the turnbuckles and set the stops

fuselage cables to maintain proper travel in
m.
on
Note which color (blue and black) goes

the top, forward side of the
the
over
accor-
dance with the travel table.
sprocket.
i.
Tie the
new
cable to the
NOTE
strings.
NOTE

trim tab control system, check for correct
When the elevator trim tab control wheel
is moved toward the NOSE DOWN posi-
tion, the elevator trim tab should
(color coded blue) cable

the tap forward side of the
The shorter
goes
over
sprocket.
Pull the
m.
strings and cables back through
move
NOTE
UP.
Make sure that the trim tab cables do not

interfere with the engine and propeller
controls located adjacent to them.
ELEVATOR TRIM TAB FORWARD CABLE
REPLACEMENT(E-1946, E-210L~,
the fuse-
lage.
E-2111
AND A~TtR, EA-320, EA-339 AND
AFTER)
n.
Check the
pulleys below the pedestal

are properly installed.
to deter-
mine that the cables

Remove the fifth and sixth seats (if installed) as
a.
shown in FIFTH AND SIXTH SEAT REMOVAL in
Chapter
b.
screws
and remove the floor,
Make certain that the correct number of chain
links
25-00-00.
Remove the
from the
baggage
area
floor
are on
each side of the mark
on
p.
Co""ect the turnbuckles in the aft
q.
Tensionthecables
the
sprocket.
fuselage.
perSheeteof Figure
1A.
27-30-00
A18
Page 6A
Aug 18/95
aeechcraft
BONANZA SERIES
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
Check for proper elevator tab travel.
r.
Set the tab travel
s.
indicated in Sheet 1 of
as
Figure
Installtheaft
upholsterypanel.
floor
u.
Install the
v.
Install the back seats. See FIFTH AND SIXTH
baggage
Install the
w.
access
panel.
Chapter
SEAT INSTALLATION in
Sheet 1 of
25-00-00.
panel (actuator door)
panel(s)
on
the
The
4.
below the
d.
1A.
cockpit
indicator is to read 9" f2Q Up and
2rb,
pedestal.
as
with the serials listed in the
planes
e.
the stops on the cables to allow surface

shown in Sheet 1 of Figure 1 except on air-
Adjust
travel
Install the access
Figure
26" ~t20 down.
pedestal.
x.
Torque
as

When the elevator tab control is moved
toward the "NOSE DOWN" position, the
tab should move up.
cables,
ELEVATOR TRIM TAB ACTUATOR
tab control system, check for correct

movement of the control surfaces
ELEVATOR TRIFI TAB ACTUATOR
with respect to the movement of the

controls. When the elevator tab con-
DISASSEMBLY
the tab should
move
RIGGING THE ELEVATOR TRIM TAB
a.
Place the elevator tab indicator in the neutral
posi-
tion.
b.
the cables to the tension shown
temperature cable tension

ure 1 or 1A, as applicable.
tor
c.
ing
b.
Rig
graph
pushrod
to
bring
on
the eleva-
in Sheet 2 of
Remove the snap ring (6) from the actuator houspull the nut assembly (1 0) out of the housing.
and
Remove the actuator
screw
(9)
from the nut
assembly.
FigCAUTION
i ,,,,-r
Place the elevator in neutral
the trim tab
A36TC AND A36,
INSTALLED)
(Flgure 2)
up.
a.
(F33A, B36TC,
EXCEPT E-llll, F33C PRIOR TO CJ-156 EXCEPT

THOSE AIRPLANES WITH KIT 33-4002-1
trol Is moved toward the "NOSE
position,
inch-pounds.

tab control system, check for correct
DOWIV"
note.
NOTE
Make certain that insulation, tie

wraps, etc. do not Interfere with con-
components such
chains, etc.
preceding
the stop bolts to 40 to 60
WARNING
trol
positions.
3. Set the cable stops to provide 8" ~1" up on LH

tab and 10" ~1" up on RH tab, and 27" ~1" down on
LH tab and 25" ~1" down on RH tab as indicated in
1A.
t.
The normal total difference between the tab
2.
surfaces is to be 2"+ .5" for all
position
and
adjust
the tab into the neutral
Do not damage the rod end when
position.
drilling
out rivets.
NOTE
c.
To improve elevator centering, the LH

and RH trim tabs ate rigged to a different
setting in the neutral position on serials
E-1946, E-2104, E-2111 and after,
EA-320 and EA-389 and after. Rig these
airplanes per steps

1.
Rig
through
and RH up 1"
.5" with indicator at O",
(2), washer (3) and shoulder pin (5)

(1). Remove actuator rod end (4)
The bearing (7) and the bushing (8)
from the
screw.
can now
be removed from the
d.
4.
neutral tab surfaces with LH down 1"
Remove nut
then drill out rivet
Remove check nut

~t
.5"
(15)
screw.
and
with
screw out
the end
appropriate spanner
wrench.
e.
RemovetheO-ring (13).
27-30-00
Page 66
Aug 18/95
A18
aeechcraft
BONANZA SERIES
MAINTENANCE IVIANUAL
f.
Remove the
bearing (12)
from the
housing (11).
(F33A, B367C, A367C
deterioration. Lubricate all parts with MIL-G-23827

grease (11, Chart 1, 91-00-00) prior to assembly.
AND A36, U<CEPT E-llll,
F33C PRIOR TO CJ-156, U<CEPT THOSE

AIRPLANES WITH KIT 33-4002-1 INSTALLED
(Flgure 2)
(16, Chart 1, 91-0000) and inspect for cracks, corrosion, and distortion.
Replace bushings and any parts showing evidence of
Clean all parts in PD680 solvent
27-30-00
A18
Page 6C
Aug 18/95
BEECHCRAFT
BONANZA SERIES
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
14
15
12
13
11
s
9.
ActuatorScrew
i.
Rivet
2.
Nut
10.
3.
Washer
11.
4.
Actuator Rod End
12.
5.
ShoulderPin
13
a.
14.
7.
Snap Ring
Bearing
NutAssembly
Housing
Bearing
O-Ring
Adjusting Bushing
15.
CheckNut
8.
Bushing
33-164-3

Figure 2
Install
a.
bearing (12)
into
clockwise
housing (11).
when
screwed
into
the
nut
assembly (10).
b.
Install
O-ring (13)
into
adjusting bushing
(14).
Install nut
g.
secure
Install
c.
~15). (Do
not
d.
ring (6)
e.
adjusting bushing (14) and check

tighten.)
bushing (8), bearing (7)
Install
on
actuator screw
Install
(9) and
~5), washer (3)
screw
end
rod
with rivet
and nut
(1)
(4)
on
actuator
(2).
NOTE
all
parts
into
housing (11);
pin
h.
Screw adjusting bushing (14) into housing
(11) until the end play has been removed from the nut
assembly, and tighten the check nut(l5). An end play
of 0.003 inch is permissible.
ELEVATOR
TRIM
TAB
ACTUATOR
DISASSEMBLY
(E-llll ONLY)
(Figure 3)
Remove
a.
except O-ring with

(11, Chart 1, 91-00-00)
prior to assembly. Lubricate the O-ring
with MIL-S-8660 (50, Chart 1, 91-00-00).
Lubricate
snap
and shoulder
assembly (10)
ring (6).
nut
(9).
actuator
secure
and
with snap
the
housing (5) and pull

housing.
ring (2) from the

assembly (6) out of the
retainer
the nut
MIL-G-23827 grease
f.
Install
screw
(9) into
nut
(10).
WARNING
b.
Remove the actuator
screw
(4) from
the nut
assembly (6).
c.
Drill out rivet (12).
d.
Remove nut
pin (9). The collar ~3)
(10), washer~ll) and shoulder

can now
be removed.
The trim tab actuator that will be installed

on
the left hand horizonal stabilizer shall
its actuator screw ~9) that

will rotate clockwise when screwed into
the nut assembly (10). The trim tab actuahave threads
on
tor that will be installed on the
right hand
horizontal stabilizer shall have threads
the actuator
screw
(9)
on
that rotate counter-
Remove check nut (8) and
e.
ing (7)
with the
appropriate
screw
out bush-
spanner wrench.
Clean all parts with solvent (16, Chart 1, 91-00-00) and

replace parts that are cracked, corroded and distorted.
Chart 1,
Lubricate all
parts with lubricating grease(ll,
91-00-00) prior
to
assembly.
27-30-00
Page
A14
Jun 20/91
BEECHCRAFT
BONANZA SERIES
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
1.
Actuator Rod End
7.
Bushing
2.
Retainer
8.
Check Nut
9.
Ring
3.
Collar
4.
Actuator Screw
10.
Shoulder Pin
Nut
5.
Housing
Nut Assembly
11.
Washer
12.
Rivet
6.
;st~
38133-8

Figure 3
(E-llll Only)
Install
g.
bushing (7)
(E-llll only)
(Figure 3)
(3)
and retainer
ring (2)
on
b.
(1)
Install actuator rod end
align
on
actuator
screw
(4)
1
the holes.
pin (9) washer (11) and

(12), P/N MS20613-3C10.
c.
Install shoulder
d.
Install rivet
nut
(10).
assembling the actuator, screw the

bushing (7) into the assembly (5) until
end play of the nut assembly (6) has been
removed, then lock in place by tightening the
check nut (8). The nut assembly (6) must be free
to rotate and provide smooth operation through
its full travel with a maximum end play of 0.0015
inch.
NOTE
lubricating grease (11,

91-00-00) prior
assembly.
Lubricate all parts with

Chart 1,
to
Install actuator
e.
screw
(4)
into nut
assembly (6).
ELEVATOR TRIM TAB ACTUATOR DISASSEMBLV

Model F33C (CJ-158 and after, and earlier airplanes
incorporating Kit 33-4002-1)
(Figure3A)
WARNING
a.
housing
The trim tab actuator that will be installed
on
its actuator
screw
(4)
b.
the
left hand horizontal stabilizer shall have threads

on
Remove the snap ring

pull the nut assembly
and
Remove the actuator
assembly.
assembly (6). The trim

on the right hand
CAUTION
tab actuator that will be installed

tuator
screw
(4)
assembly (6)
ring (2).
Install nut
on
the
ac-
Do not
that rotate counterclockwise
when screwed into the nut
with retainer
(4) from the actuator

(7) out of the housing.
screw (6) from the nut
that will rotate clockwise
f.
(8).
threaded
careful to
being
withi check nut
When
actuator
(4).
screw
secure
NOTE
Place collar
a.
and
damage
rod end when
drilling
out rivet.
assembly (6).
into
housing (5) and
c.
secure
The
Remove nut
bushing (5)
(1), washer (2)
can now
and shoulder
be removed from the
pin (3).
screw.
27-30-00
Page8
May 31/85
A10
BEECHCRAFT
BONANtA SERIES
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
112
It
bl
10
I. Nut
Assembly
Housing
Bearing
10. O-Ring
it. Adjusting Bushing
7. Nut
2. Washer
8.
9.
3. Shoulder Pin
4.
5.
Snap Ring
Bushing
12. Check Nut
6. Actuator Screw
F33C-164-6
Figure
3A
(12) and screw out the end

appropriate spanner wrench.
Remove O-ring (10).
e.
f.
Remove the bearing (9) from housing (8).
Install adjusting bushing (11) and check nut (12).

tighten.)
d.
Install bearing (5) and snap ring (4) on actuator
screw (6).
Install shoulder pin (3), washer (2) and nut (1) on
e.
Clean all parts in PD680 solvent (16, Chart i, 91-00-00) and

inspect for cracks, corrosion, and distortion. Replace
bushings and any parts showing evidence of deterioration.
Lubricate all parts with MlL-G-23827 grease (11, Chart 1,
91-00-00) prior to assembly.
actuator screw (6).
d.
Remove check nut
with

Model F33C (CJISB and after, and earlier
Kit
airplanes
33-4002-1)
Install
Install
Install
f.
screw
(6)
into nut
bearing (9)
O-ring (10)
into
into
housing (8).
adjusting bushing (11).
(7).
WARNING
The trim tab actuator that will be installed on the
left hand horizontal stabilizer shall have threads
its actuator
screw
(6)
that will rotate clockwise
Clean all parts in PD680 solvent (16, Chart 1, 91-00-00) and

inspect for cracks, corrosion, and distortion. Replace
bushings and any parts showing evidence of deterioration,
Lubricate all parts with MIL-G-23827 grease (11, Chart 1,
a.
not
on
(Rgure 3A).
b.
c.
(Do
assembly (7). The trim

right hand
tab actuator that will be installed on the

tuator screw
(6)
Install nut
g.
with snap ring (4).
on
the
ac-
that rotate counterclockwise
assembly (7).
assembly (7) into housing (8),
secure
27-30-00
A10
PageS
May 31/85
BEECHCRAFT
BONANZA SERIES
MAlNTENANCE MANUAL
12
io
678
13
1I
.8 IN
+C.5
IN
~-c---------.25
Tnp 5/8-11
1.25 IN!
0_
_
IN
__
-TYP~C
2.9 IN
i~H
TAB
/Ciso
14
t~
1.30 IN
ITEM
QUANT.
DESCRIPTION
NO.
1
6 aluminum
equiv.
3/4
1/2
C81Q Indicator*
3/4
1/4 Dia.
1/4 Dia. xl corrosion res, stl,
1/4-28 nut
3/8
10
3/8
11
1/4
12
1/2
13
13
KN813 Keensert
14
1/8
1 3/8
x
7 1/2
2 1/2
10 aluminum
.6811N
res.
equiv.
stl.
II
II
1.6
IN
.31 IN
10 rubber
10 rubber
equiv.
equiv.
rnt
or
14 aluminum or
2 corrosion
or
1 3/4 aluminum or
10 corrosion
x
3 VLIER
or
res.
Torque
stl.
screw
tap 1/2
3/4 rubber
13
SECTION A A
THIS GROOVE TO BE A SNUG FIT
TO THE SCREW BRACKET ON
*P/N of Federal Products
Corp., Providence, R. I.
THE DIAL INDICATOR
100-135-8
Fabricating Clamp tor Tab Detlection

Figure 4
27-3090
PegelO
Oct 7183
A6
BEECHCRAFT
BONANZA SERIES
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
NOTE
Lubricate
all
parts
O-ring
except
with
MI L-G-23827 g rease prior to assemb ly. Lubri cate
the
O-ring
with
MIL-S-8660
(50, Chart 1,
"B"
"28".
Multiply
Subtract "A" from "28" and record
3.
Multiply
"D"
by
2 and record
1.
2.
by
as
2 and record
as
"X".
"2D".
as
4.
Subtract "C" from "2D" and record
5.
Add "X" and "Y" and record
as
"Y".
"E".
as
91-00-00).
CHART 1
ELEVATOR TAB FREE PLAV LIMITS
h.
the end
Screw
play
into
housing (8) until

assembly, and
has been removed from the nut
tighten the check

permissible.
nut
(12).
An end
play
of 0.003 inch is
CHECKING ELEVATOR TAB FREE PLAY

(CE-748, CE-772 and after; E-llll, E-1241 and after;
CJ-149 and after)
1.5-FOUND
SPOUND
READING
READING
28
-A
=X
+Y
=E
2D
X
security of
actuating
corrected prior to
Visually inspect the elevator tabs for any damage,

hinge attach points, and for tightness of the
systems. Inconsistencies should be
checking the free play of the tabs.
(E
0.050 inch
NOTE
(P/N 810 4~135030-9) or equivalent, a dial

indicator, and a push-pull scale for applying accurate
loading to the tabs are required for making the inspection for
A check fixture
t
free
play
The results of "X" and "Y"
can
be
negative
numbers.
of the tabs.
Lock the control surface to prevent movement of

the elevators. Set the elevator tabs in the neutral position.
b.
Using shot bags and tape, affix the dial indicator
maximum)
a.
so that the dial indicator point is positioned on

edge of the elevator tab at a point 3.30 inches
aft of the hinge line as measured along the top of the tab.
c.
Apply a sman piece of masking tape to the upper
surface (for paint protection) 4.50 inches aft of the tab hinge
line and along the centerline of the tab actuator. This will be
the point of pressure against the tab by the push-pull settle.
d.
Apply another piece of masking tape in the
corresponding position on the bottom surface of the tab for
check fixture
the outboard
the
same
e.
purpose,
Zero the dial indicator at
during
the
no
load
initially. Do
not
Repeat steps
"b"
through "j"
the
on
opposite
ELEVATOR TRIM TAB ACTUATOR REMOVAL

F33C, A36, A36TC AND B36TC)
a.
Remove the
access
the horizontal stabilizer to
panel
gain
near
access to
the
(F33A,
trailing edge
of
the elevator trim tab
actuator
b.
light

remove the tail cone.
navigation
wire and
c.
the
checking procedure,
With the push-pull scale at the point of the
f.
masking tape, apply 9-pound downward load. Record the
dial reading as "A".
Release half the load until a l.&pound downward
g.
load is obtained. Record the dial reading as "B".
h.
Apply a full 9pound upward load at the masking
tape on the bottom surface. Record the dial reading as "C".
i.
Release half the load until a 1.Bpound upward
load is obtained. Record the dial reading as "D".
Enter the recorded values on a copy of CHART 1
j.
and proceed as follows:
reset
k.
elevator tab.
Remove the
fuselage just
d.
access
Remove the
access
the horizontal stabilizer to

actuator
e.
on
the left hand side of
panel
gain
near
access to
the
leading edge of
the elevator trim tab
sprocket.
Remove the elevator
00 under the
f.
panel
forward of the horizontal stabilizer.
heading
as
outlined in
Chapter
27-30-
ELEVATOR REMOVAL.
Disconnect the elevator trim tab cables at the turn-
buckles in the aft
fuselage.
Secure the forward elevator trim
t,b cables to prevent them from
unwinding
at the universal.
CAUTION
Do not damage the cables. Use a material such
phenolic to protect the cables.
as
27-30-00
Page
A10
11
;May31/851
BEECHCRAFT
BONANZA SERIES
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
Remove the chain and cable assembly

g.
from the elevator trim tab actuator sprocket.
Install the access panel located

g.
leading edge of the horizontal stabilizer.
near
the
the eleva-
Install the access panel located

h.
trailing edge of the horizontal stabilizer.
near
the
Remove the hardware
h.
tor
trim
tab
to
actuator
Remove the actuator from the
attaching
horizontal
the
stabilizer.
airplane.
access panel on the left hand
fuselage just forward of the horizontal
Install the
i.
ELEVATOR TRIM TAB ACTUATOR INSTALLATION (F33A, F33C, A36, A36TC AND
side of the
stabilizer.
B36TC)
install the tail
The elevator trim tab actuators must not

be interchanged between the right and left
B36TC)
airplanes serials CE-1566 and after, CJ-180 and
after, E-2111 and after, and EA-389 and after, elevator
On
trim tab actuators have been color coded LH blue and
uncontrollable airplane
attitude.
Refer to ELEVATOR TRIM TAB
ACTUATOR COLOR CODING to reduce the
probability of unintentionally switching the
actuators upon installation.
an
installation
cover
On earlier
airplanes,
not color coded.

actuators
Position the chain and cable
sprocket
equidistant within
the actuator
assembly
(LH
appropriate
blue
and
RH
black).
horizontal
b.
that the
visually inspecting
and
color coded actuator is installed
hardware,
are
Actuators may be inspected for proper

by removing the actuator inspection hole
RH black.
Position the elevator trim tab actuator in

stabilizer and install the attaching
a.
the
navigation light wire and
cone.
ELEVATOR TRIM TAB ACTUATOR COLOR

CODING (F33A, F33C, A36, A36TC AND.
horizontal stabilizers when they are reinstalled after removal. Reversing the actuators reverses the direction, and plane
nose-up trim would actually resiilt in an
inadvertent nose-down trim condition that
could result in
Connect the tail
j.
WARNING
on
that the ends of the chain

+.20 inch at the sprocket cen-
so
terline.
installed
can
or
elevator trim tab actuators
were
coding of the elevator trim tab

accomplished with the actuators
Color
be
This will reduce the
before installation.
unintentionally switching the actuators.

probability
Use BEECHCRAFT Mandatory Service Bulletin No.
of
2399 for
painting
instructions
how to color code
on
elevator trim tab actuators.

c.
Install the elevator as outlined under the

OF THE ELEVATOR.
WARNING
heading INSTALLATION
d.
Connect the elevator trim tab cables to the
turnbuckles in the ah
e.
Remove
Do not install
fuselage.
material
used
to
protect
the
cables.
blue-coded actuator
black-coded
stabilizer
actuator
blue-coded stabilizer.
on a
or
ELECTRIC ELEVATOR TRIM
Rig the elevator trim tab control system as

outlined under the heading RIGGING THE ELEVATOR
f.
on
black-coded
(OPTIONAL)
When the elevator trim tab control wheel
optional electric trim system offered on the

airplanes allows the pilot to correct the
elevator trim without removing his hands from the
controlwheel. The switch requires 2 actions before
it will actuate the system: first depressed ~enable
switch), then moved forward (down-trim) or rearward
(up-trim). On the control wheel left hand grip is a
quick-interrupt switch (placarded TRIM INTER) which
opens the circuit to the servo and stops the action of
The PITCH TRIM OFF-ON
the electric trim system.
is moved toward the NOSE DOWN
position,
switch is located in the lower left
the elevator trim tab should
UP.
ing instrument panel and the circuit breaker ~plac-
TRIM TAB.
NOTE
After
tab
rigging the elevator and elevator trim

system, check for correct
control
movement
respect
of the
to the
control
surfaces
with
movement of the controls.
move
The
Bonanza
corner
of the float-
27-30-00
Page 12
Jun 20/91
A14
BEECHCRAFT
BONANZA SERIES
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
is
TRIM)
arded
circuit breaker
located
electroluminescent
the
in
below the instrument
panel
panel.
TRIM
ELEVA TOR
GROUND
ELECTRIC
CHECKS (AIRPLANES WITHOUT
AUTOPI-I
LOT)
A36TC, AND
MODEL A36,
B36TC
access
to the
SIXTH
AND
by removing the
(refer to Chapter 25
REMOVAL
SEAT
INSTALLATION) and the partition

gage compartment and ah section
ON
bagairplane.
the
left trim
(make a note
reinstallation)
and dia-
the turnbuckle
Unsafety
on
the
trim
switch
master
and
system circuit breaker.
AND
between the
of the
Turn
b.
engage the "TRIM"

c.
and
move
Simultaneously press the

pilots control wheel switch
that the trim wheel

b.
of the electric trim instal-
wires, obstructions safetied cables,
lation for loose
servo
sixth seat
(if installed)
FIFTH
under
SERVO
etc., turn "ON" airplane master switch.
Gain
a.
fifth and
TAB
TRIM
inspection
After
a.
ELEVATOR
ELECTRIC
REMOVAL
moves
enable
switch
forward.
toward "DOWN" trim
Note
posi-
cable and loosen the cable.

d.
c.
Remove the cable
gram of the cable routing for

pulleys and capstan.
from the
Remove the 4 bolts, nuts, and 8 washers

which secure the servo to the brackets in the aird.
plane.
With
manual override
e.
and
e.
Remove the
servo
(note on which side of

mounted) from the airplane.
servo
is
TAB
TRIM
ELECTRIC ELEVATOR
INS TALLA TION
SERVO
a.
Place the
servo
in
position
and install the
4 bolts, 8 washers, and 4 nuts (make certain the servo

is installed in the same position from which it was
removed).
Install the cables on the
~outboard) trim cable should be
b.
servo.
routed
The left
forward
around the outside groove of the capstan and back to

the aft pulley, then forward to the other pulley; wrap
around the forward pulley and aft around the inside
groove of the
capstan
Install
c.
cable to the
d.
the
pulley
as
and forward to the turnbuckle.
right
(inboard)
elevator
switch
still
capability;
the clutch will
slip.
Simultaneously press the enable switchl

pilots control wheel switch rearward. Note
trim wheel moves toward the "UP" trim posi-
that the
With
f.
Adjust the capstan cable guard to within

capstan and secure with the attaching
Tighten the attaching bolts of the 2 idler
screws.
pulleys.
e.
Adjust the cable tension per RIGGING THE
ELEVATOR CONTROL SYSTEM and Figure 1.
restrictions.
control
wheel
Press the enable switch
must not
switch
still
only;
trim
system
run.
Move the trim switch fore and aft
h.
system
must not
only;
trim
run.
The control wheel mounting includes an I

trim-interrupt switch. This switch has the
primary purpose of stopping all trim action by interand ground. The interrupt
rupting both the trim A
switch is a momentary type pushbutton, which may
i.
electric
be checked
as
1.
follows:
With the trim system still turned on,
actuate the trim switch to drive the trim
system. While
system is being driven, push the interrupt switch and
note that the trim system stops running while the
switch is
depressed.
If the trim system operates while the

2.
interrupt switch is depressed, the trouble should be
located and corrected before flying the airplane.
j.
Operate the elevator trim system through
complete range of of travel to check for any bindf.
pilots
grasp the trim wheel and check for manual

Ove"ide capability; the clutch will slip.
engaged,
trim
indicated in step "b".
1/32 inch of the
or
wheel
move
g.
ing
control
tion.
the brackets the
its
pilots
the manual trim wheel and check for
engaged, grasp
without
If the circuit breaker
both
the
switch actuated,
enable
pull
trips
switch
or
and
the trim
the
runs
direction
the trim circuit breaker, turn the
trim master switch OFF and leave disconnected until

27-30-00
Page 12A
A14
Jun 20/91
BEECHCRAFT
BONANZA SERIES
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
the trouble is located.
breaker out, do not

k.
the
If the trim
runs
with the circuit
N~W TAB CABLE INSTALLATION
fly the airplane.
After the
electric trim
airplane manual trim system
system check-out,
should be free of
excessive friction and should function
Note the position of the old cable in relation to the

cable drum and forward end cable fittings. Install the
new cable in the same positions
normally.
MAGNETIC CLUTCH REMOVAL
MODEL
F33C AND V35B
F33A,
(Figure 5)
ELECTRIC TRIM TAB ACTUATOR REMOVAL

Remove the
a.
just
below the
b.
access
leading edge of
on
actuator wire
Disconnect the
the disconnect
door
the
fuselage
the L.H. stablizer.
harness
at
splices.
buckle.
Tape the cable

unwinding of the cable.
to the actuator to
Remove the lid from the clutch
b.
Loosen the set
ator
to
Remove the three bolts
prevent
the
bracket.
removed from the
ELECTRIC
LATION
The
securing the
actuator
may
actu-
now
be
airplane.
TRIM
TAB ACTUATOR INSTAL-
a.
Place the actuator in its
b.
Install the bolts
mounting location.
securing
the
actuator
place.
Remove the motor from the clutch
d.
Slide the cable drum and shaft
from the clutch
Connect the cables at the turnbuckles
d.
Connect the wire harness.
rotor
in
housing.
assembly
housing.
Remove the clutch from the clutch
housing.
MAGNETIC CLUTCH INS TA LLA nON
(Figure 5)
a.
Install the clutch in the clutch
b.
Slide the cable drum and shaft
into the clutch
c.
housing.
assembly
housing.
Tighten
until there is
c.
in the clutch
c.
e.
d.
screw
housing.
and armature hubs.
Disconnect the actuator cable at the turn-
c.
a.
no
the
clutch
visible end
armature
play
set
screws
in the cable drum
shaft.
Slide the clutch rotor on the motor shaft to
obtain .010 to .015 inch clearance between the friction
surfaces
screws.
of the
clutch
Stake both set
before
tightening
the
set
screws.
27-30-00
Page
128
Jun 20/91
A14
BEECHCRAFT
BONANZA SERIES
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
CLUTCH
ROTOR
CLUTCH HOUSING
.010 to .015
I II
CLUTCH
CLUTCH
ASSEMBLYrlL~
SETSCREW
CABLE DRUM SHAFT
CABLE RETAINING PIN
CABLE DRUM
Bo-3ael
Electric Trim Tab Actuator

Figure 5
CAUTION
tool
that will
shaft
fit the
the
which
on
cable drum is
mounted.
With
no
visible end
play
in the cable drum shaft,
the clutch is
de-energized
or
damage
fabricate
to the
450
similar tool
/2
rpm)
TAB
ELECTRIC TRIM
REPLACEMENT SCHEDULE
ACTUATOR
the brushes at intervals of 2000
flight
BFIUSH
hours,
performed
check should be
following
magnetic clutch
is
drill
any time the
28 vdc power source, connect the red

Using
lead of the magnetic clutch to ground and the white lead to
the power source. Using a torque wrench, check that the
inch-pounds
of torque
applied
at the
be
attached
to
the
5.
Remove the
access
plate
from the clutch
and clutch clean with clean
and blow the
16 vdc,
connect the red electrical lead of the clutch to
ground
clips.
Using
housing
regulated
power
and the white lead to the power
drill off and
source set at 14 to
source
with
alligator
With the screwdriver in the slot in the drum
unclip
on
and
run
for 15 seconds. Turn the
the leads to the clutch.
8. Let the clutch cool for approximately one

minute before reattaching the lead for another 15 second
interval. Repeat the foregoing sequence until the clutch will
inch-pounds of torque as indicated in step "a",

housing clean with clean dry
compressed air. Install the access plate on the clutch
housing.
hold with 30
actuator shaft.
If the static torque of the clutch is less than 30

inch-pounds, burn the clutch as follows:
b.
Find
metal
plate
then
blow the clutch and
of sufficient thickness for
to fit in a vise with the actuator
and
large enough
rigidity
assembly attached. Anchor
the
plate
holes in the plate to match the actuator

the actuator to the plate.
2.
may
or
speed (approximately
Secure the screwdriver in the 1/2 inch drill
7.
1.
motor
low
housing
dry air.
replaced.
clutch holds with 30
4.
shaft turn the drill motor

a.
that
motor.
6.
MAGNETIC CLUTCH TORQUE TEST

The
inch
so
screwdriver or similar tool.
clutch will result.
Replace
Remove the handle from the screwdriver
3.
the clutch faces must not make contact while
Locate
CAUTION
in a vise and drill 3
mounting holes. Bolt
blade type screwdriver
or
similar
Exceeding the 15 second burn-in periods may

damage the magnetic clutch.
overheat and
"END"
27-30-00
Page
A6
13
Oct7/83
EEECHCRAFT
BONA~UA SERIES
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
STALL WARNING/SAFE FLIGHT SYSTEM

As
rule of thumb,
moving the vane 1/4 inch will change the

warning actuates by about 5 mph of indicated
airspeed. The only way to test the accuracy of the setting is
to fly the airplane into a stall, noting the speed at which the
warning horn comes on and the speed at which the full stall
a
time the stall
STALL WARNING SYSTEM
occurs.
The stall
warning system is designed to give the pilot

advance warning of an impending stall. The stall warning
switch is located on the bottom leading edge of the left wing.
Air moving over the vane of the switch will cause the switch
to open or close depending an the air velocity. The opening
or closing of the stall warning switch indicates the lift
capabilities of the wing and subsequently indicates to the
pilot the approaching of a stall condition.
STALL WARNING
ADJUST UP TO
ACTUATE SOONER
STALL WARNING SYSTEM
ADJUSTMENTO
SCREWS?
ADJUSTMENTS
\O
The stall warning switch is carefully adjusted when the

airplane is test flown at the factory. Should it require
readjusting, proceed
installation
the two
as
follows:
Locate
the under surface of the left
on
Phillips-head
vane.
If the stall
move
the
vane
(Flgure 1)
one
screws,
warning has
been
on
the
switch
ADJUST DOWN TO
ACTUATE LATER
wing and loosen
60-251-1~
either side of the
coming
back and down. If the stall
on
too
early,
warning
Stall Vane Adjustment
has
Figure
coming on too late, move the vane up and forward.

Moving the vane, with the Phillips-head screws loosened,
moves the entire unit up or down inside the wing causing
the switch to be closed earlier or later. Retighten the
screws after making each adjustment. NEVER TRY TO
been
ADJUST THE SWITCH BY BENDING THE VANE.

The stall should be made with the
flaps and gear up and

power off. Prior to stalling decelerate no faster than one
mph per second. It may be necessary to make several
NOTE
alternate
If
a new
(lift detector) is being installed it

positioned (with vane full down) so
switch
should be
that the
upper surface of the vane is in

with the index line on the cover
alignment
plate. The airplane should then be flown
the switch adjusted as indicated in
following procedure,
setting
ideally,
adjustments
can
at 7 to 9
switch
and test
mph
setting should
necessary whenever
and
replaced
the
installed.
flights before the desired

warning should actuate,
be reached. The stall
ahead of the
a wing or
extensively repaired,
The switch should require
or
complete stall. The

adjusted as
wing leading edge is
be checked and
or
no
if
switch
new
adjustment
is
in normal
service.
"END"
27-31 -00
Page 1
May 9/80
Ray~heon Aircraft
FLAPS
This
flaps are hinged in specially designed tracks. When extended, the flap moves
gives a large, effective wing area, which produces additional lift and drag.
One
flap
The
is installed
on
each
wing.
The
flaps
are
operated by
an
rearward
electric-motor-driven
as
it
pivots
gearbox on the
downward.
aft side of the
front spar at the centerline of the airplane. The gearbox drives two flexible drive shafts, each connected to an acmethread-type jackscrew at each flap. The flaps are controlled by a lever in the subpanel, and the flap position is indi-
by an instrument to the left of the control column. The lever (switch) must be pulled out of a detent to change
positions. On airplane serials E-llll, E-1241,though E-1370; CJ-149; CE-748, CE-772 though CE-815; D-10097,
and D-10120 through 0-10178, the flaps may be stopped at any position by moving the flap switch to OFF when the
flaps reach the desired position. The switch is placarded UP, OFF, and DOWN. The markings on the position indicator will be UP, 10", 20", and DN. On airplane serials CJ-150 and after; CE-816 and after; D-10179 and after; E1371 though E-2110 except E-1946 and E-2104; EA-1 though EA-388 except EA-320, the indicator is marked UP,
15", and DN. Serials E-1946, E-2104 and E-2111 and after; EA-320 and EA-389 and after, have lights to indicate
flap position. These lights are marked to indicate the down, in-transit, and approach positions of the flaps. All lights
are out when the flaps are up. The flaps can be stopped only on the up, approach, or down position as indicated by
the flap switch.
cated
The
flap position transmitter (if installed) is located near the left flap
by the flap relay and limit switches.
actuator. Power to
operate the indicator lights
of later serials is controlled
NOTE
After
an
damage
FLAPS
emergency extension at speeds above the normal extension speeds,

or distortion before the next flight.
inspect the flaps for
FLAP REMOVAL
a.
Remove the bolt from the
b.
Remove the
c.
Remove the bolts from the
flap actuating
bonding cable
from the
flap
flap
arm.
tracks.
track brackets and
remove
the
flaps.
FLAP INSTALLATION
a.
Hold the
flap
in
position
and install the rollers and the bolts in the
flap track
bracket.
NOTE
flap track rollers (four rollers per flap and two rollers per track) in the flap track brackets
flanges of the rollers in one track facing the flanges of the rollers in other track.
Install the
with the
b.
Connect the
bonding
cable and install the bolt in the
flap actuating
arm.
FLAP TRACK WEAR LIMITS

The allowable track
wear on
the track slot. The allowable
the
bearing
wear
surface is 0.032-inch
resulting
in
maximum dimension of 0.785-inch in
into the track side surface is 0.050-inch. Track
wear
within the
preceding limita(49 and
tions may be dressed smooth with light emery cloth to prevent roller binding. Lubricant mixed with solvent
26, Chart 1, 91-00-00) may be brushed on the flap tracks during servicing of the airplane.
n20
27-50-00
Feb
26/99Page~
Rayeheon Aircraft
FLAP LIMIT SWITCH ADJUSTMENT
NOTE
Battery voltage is not sufficient to properly cycle the flaps during rigging. An auxiliaty power supply
capable of maintaining 28.25 ~t0.25 volts should be used. If an external power receptacle is not
available on the airplane, jumper cables may be used between the battery and the power supply.
Be sure of the polarity before making the connection.
I CAUTION I
Excessive
a
The
flap
short
operation of the flap motor without proper cooling may cause damage to the motor. Allow
cooling time after each extension and retraction cycle.
limit switches
left wing
panel.
limits of travel.
are
mounted
on a
bracket and installed
on
the outboard side of the inboard
The limit switches control the travel of the
They
are
accessible
by lowering
the
flaps by breaking the circuit to the flap

flaps.
flap
track in the
motor at the extreme
TWO-POSITION FLAPS
(CE-748,
There
CE-772 THRU
CE-815; CJ-149; D-10097, D-10120 THRU D-10178; E-llll, E-1241 THRU E-1370)
two limit switches for this
for the
uplimit position, and one for the downlimit position. To adjust

position,
assembly so that the assembly can pivot on the foMlard
hole.
the
switch
to
the
as
elongated
Adjust
flaps in neutral position. Actuate the flap switch to the
stop
necessary
down position and measure the degrees of travel (proper degree of travel is 30" +0" -2"). Adjustment of the down
position of the flaps is made on the downlimit switch.
the
are
flaps to
neutral
system,
loosen the
one
screws
of the switch
THREE-POSITION FLAPS
(CE-816
AND
AFTER; CJ-150 AND AFTER; D-10179
AND
AFTER; E-1371 AND AFTER; EA-1 AND AFTER)
The limit switches, one for up, two for the approach position and one for the down travel, control the travel of the
flaps by breaking the circuit to the flap motor at the extreme limits of selected travel. The switches are accessible by
lowering
The
the
flaps.
flap travel is adjusted by moving the

Rig as follows:
limit switches. The left
flap
is
rigged first, then
the
right flap is synchronized
with it.
NOTE
Rig the flaps
under
simulated
flight load to
reduce overtravel to
minimum after the limit switches
have been actuated.

When the
tween the
a.
Adjust
Page
the
flaps are in the 00 position, a clearance of 1/16-inch +1/1Fj-inch

flap roller and the forward edge of the flap track slot.
uplimit
switch
so
the
flaps
2750-00
will
stop
at the 0"
-1/32-inch must exist be-
position.
A2D
Raytheon Aircraft
NOTE
At serials E-1946, E-2104, E-2111 and
limit
after, the flap switch approach position
is 12".
Adjust the
11"
flaps
(outboard)
flaps are positioned
fully up position to the approach position. Adjust the 13" limit switch (inboard) switch until
the flaps are at the 13" to 12.50 position after the flaps have been actuated from fully down to the
approach position.
switch until the
at 11" to 11.5" after the
have been actu-
ated from
b.
Adjust
(inboard) in its mounting slot until the flap is positioned at 14" to 14.5" after the flap
fully up to the takeoff position (15" range). Adjust the 16" limit switch (outboard) in its mountpositioned at 16" to 15.50 after the flap has been actuated from fully down to the takeoff po-
the 14" limit switch
has been actuated from
ing
slot until the
sition
flap
(15" range).
is
c.
Adjust the downlimit switch
d.
Remove the bolt
e.
Turn the
f.
Install the bolt
in its
mounting slot until
attaching the right
jackscrew
on
the
connecting
right
actuator to the
actuator in
or
the actuator to the
it actuates at 28" to 30" of
flap
travel.
right flap.
out to
align
the
right flap
with the left
flap.
flap.
CAUTION I
I CAUTION
If the
flaps
are
removed for any
reason
the main power switch should be in the OFF position.
NOTE
After the
flap is completely rigged, adjust the rubber bumper (flap down) installed on the flap and
dividing rib. Turn the adjusting screw in or out, as required, to take out play or stop vibration
when the flap is in the up position. A distinct change in the sound of the flap motor near the completion of the flap-up travel may indicate an excessive outward adjustment of the bumper.
aileron
g. Operate the
rubber bumper.
~20
flaps through
full travel to
ensure
that the
flaps
contact the limit switches before
they contact
27-50-00
Feb
the
26/9 Page
Raytheon Aircraft
FLAP SVSTEM
FLAP SETTING
FLAP ACTUATOR
CE-748, CE-772 THROUGH CE-815; 01-149

D-10097, D-10120 THROUGH P101Z8;
FLAP SHAFT
E-llll, 6-1241 THROUGH E-1370
d
FULL UP
FULL DOWN
0"
30"
AND HOUSING
2"
FLAP ACTUATOR MOTOR
CE-816 AND AFTER, CJ-150 AND AFTER

0-10179 AND AFTER, E-1371 THRU E-2110 EXCEPT
6-1946 AND 5-2104 EA-1 AND AFTER
FULL UP
LIMIT
SWITCHES
FLAP SHAFT AND HOUSING
O"
APPROACH
FULL DOWN
15"
30"
ACTUATOR
2"
6-1946 5-2104, E-2111 AND AFTER

FLAP POSITION INDICATOR
FULL LR
O"
12"
APPROACH
FULL DOWN
30"+ 0"- 2"
FLAP POSITION fftANSMTT~R
INDICATOR
INDICATOR
FLAP ACTUATOR
TRANSMITTER
CE-748, CE-772 THROUGH
:o
CE-BIBANDAFTER
CJ-1SOANDAFTER
D-10179 AND AFTER
D-10~20 THROUGH D-10178
E-llll, 6-1241 THROUGH 6-1370 G1371 THRU E-2110 EXCEPT
E-1946 AND E-2104
EA-1 THRU EA-388 EXCEPT
EA-320
CE-815; CJ-149, 0-10097,
TO ADJUST, LOOSEN MOUNTING

BOLTS ANO MOVE FORE AND AFT,
OR ROTATE SLIGHTLY.
WHICH HAVE LIGHTS TO

INDICATE POSITION
POSTTION
SWITCHES
SWITCHES
DOWNLIMIT SWITCH
o~/or
UPLIMTT SWITCHES
UPLIMIT
SWITCH
CE;748, CE-n2 THROUGH CE-815, 01-149;

D-10097, 0-10120 THROUGH D-10178;
E-llll, E1241 THROUGH E-1370
FLAP LIMTr SWITCHES
CE-816 AND AFTER

CJ-150 AND AFTER
D-10179 AND AFTER
5-1371 AND AFTER
EA-1 AND AFTER
33-161-15
Flap System
Figure 1
Page
Feb 26/99
27-5000
A20
Raytheon Aircraft
FLAP POSITION INDICA TOR AND ADJUSTMENT

The
flap position
is installed
a.
on
indicator gage is installed in the instrument panel. An adjustable flap position indicator transmitter
the flap actuator in the left wing just forward of the rear spar to coordinate gage reading with flap travel.
Adjust the flap travel limit

ADJUSTMENT.)
switches to
provide
the correct up and down travel of the
flaps. (See
FLAP LIMIT
SWITCH
b.
not
Run the flaps down and check the pilots compartment flap position indicator for 100% flaps. If down flaps are
indicated, loosen the transmitter attachment bolts and adjust transmitter fore and aft or rotate slightly until the
reading
c.
is correct, then
Run the
flaps
tighten
the transmitter
attaching
up and check the indicator for up
bolts.
flaps reading.
FLAP MOTOR REMOVAL
CAVTION I
I CAUTION
If the
be
flap motor fails orif major overhaul is required for it to operate properly, the flap motor should
replaced. No attempt should be made to overhaul the motor in the field.
a.
Remove the front seat assemblies.
b.
Removethe sparcover.
c.
Detach the
d.
Disconnect the motor electrical
e.
Loosen the two set
f.
Rotate the cable retainers 90".
g.
Loosen the nuts
h.
Pull the flexible drive shafts from the
i.
Remove the
clamp supporting
screws on
wiring
wiring
at the
motor
from the
quick
right-hand flap-shaft housing.
disconnect.
each cable retainer.
the inboard side of the
on
flap
the electrical
attaching
flap
mounting supports.
motor shafts and retainers.
bolts and
remove
the
flap
motor.
CONNECTING FLEXIBLE FLAP DRIVE SHAFT TO FLAP MOTOR SHAFT

FIGURE 2
Connect the LH and RH flexible
flap drive shafts
to the
flap
drive motor shaft
as
follows, using the illustration for
component locations:
a.
Install the outboard nut and washer
b.
Start setscrews
shaft
as
far
c.
Align
d.
While
~uo
as
as
far
as
they
will go onto the threaded
(2) into retainer. Insert the retainer through
the
flap
shaft
portion
of the
flap
mounting support
shaft
housing.
and onto the motor
it will go.
retainer
keyway with key slot
inserting
the
flap
shaft
in
through
flap
the
motor drive shaft and
mounting support,
tighten
one
setscrew
temporarily.
install the inboard washer and nut.
27-50-00
Ray~heon Aircraft
e.
Install the
flap
shaft
through
the retainer and into the motor drive shaft until the
keyway
is
just past the key slot
in the retainer.
f.
Loosen the set
g.
Ensure that the retainer is still installed
h.
Keep inboard
i.
Secure the
screw
that
pressure
flap
on
was
tightened
in step
c.
the motor shaft
on
the retainer and
tighten
as
far is it will go and rotate retainer 9(P.
both retainer set
screws.
drive shaft to the
mounting support by tightening the nuts (2). Tighten inboard nut to ensure that
edge of the retainer and the cable housing to allow the retainer
to rotate without coming into contact with the cable housing. In threaded part of cable housing is not long enough to
install the two nuts and washer, use a die to add 5/8-24 UNEF threads until 0.88 inch thread length is attained.
there is sufficient clearance between the outboard
j.
Tighten
outboard nut
against the mounting support.
FORWARD
TAINER
(50-361131)
MOUNTING
SUPPORT
OUIBOARD
FLAP
MOTOR
SET
OUTBOARD
NUT
SET
SCREW
KEY SLOT IN
MOTOR SHAFT
SET
SCREW
SCREW
RETAINER
KEYWAY
OUTBOARD
WASHER
INBOARD INBOARD
WASHER
NUT
ENSURE THAT THERE IS SUFFICIENT CLEARANCE BETWEEN THE OUTBOARD EDGE OF

RETAINER AND THE CABLE HOUSING TO
THE RETAINER TO ROTATE WITHOUT COMING
INTO CONTACT WITH THE HOUSING.
INBOARD END VIEW

RETAINER (50-361
OF
OUTBOARD
31]
RETAINER
END
VIEW
OF
[50-361131)
C93D*0480116 C
Flap
Cable Retainer
Figure
Page
be26/99
F6
27-50-00
A20
Raytheon Aircraft
FLAP MOTOR INSTALLATION
CAMON 1
I CAUTION
Should the
erly,
flap
motor fail or should
it should be
a.
Place the
b.
Connect the
c.
Install flexible
flap
motor in
flap
and
position
motor electrical
secure
wiring
drive shafts into the
flap
major overhaul be required
for the
flap
motor to
operate prop-
No attempt should be made to overhaul the motor in the field.
replaced.
with the
at the
flap
quick
flap
motor attach bolts.
disconnect.
motor shafts in accordance with CONNECTING FLEXIBLE FLAP
DRIVE SHAFT TO FLAP MOTOR SHAFT.
supports the electrical wiring from the right flap shaft housing.
d.
Attach the
e.
Run the
f.
Install the spar
g.
Install the front seat assemblies.
clamp
that
flaps through
full travel, up and down, to check
flap rigging.
cover.
FLAP SHAFT REMOVAL

a.
Place the
airplane
on
jacks
and
use
the circuit breaker to retract the
landing
gear until the inboard doors
are
open.
b.
c.
Remove the spar
d.
Loosen the two set
e.
Rotatethecable retainer90".
f.
Remove the nut
g.
Pull the flexible drive shaft from the
h.
Disconnect all
i.
Remove the dust
j.
Disconnect the
k.
Pull the actuator and flexible shaft
A20
cover.
on
screws on
each cable retainer.
clamps securing
cover
flap
in the
flap
motor shaft and retainer.
the shaft
rear
mounting support.
housing
to the
wing
structure.
section of the wheel well.
actuator from the
wing flap
housing
and the
out of the
wing
spar section.
wing.
27-50-00
Feb
26/9 Page
Ral~heon Aircraft
FLAP SHAFT INSTALLA TION

a.
Pull the flexible shaft and
the
housing through
and attach the actuator to the
wing
wing flap and wing
spar
sec-
tion.
b.
Set the
c.
Push the flexible shaft into the
d.
Rotatethe retainer90".
e.
While
f.
Tighten
g.
Install the
h.
Install the dust
i.
Run the
j.
Lower the
k.
Install the spar
i.
Install the front seat assemblies.
flaps
in the up
holding
position.
flap
the retainer onto the motor shaft
the nut
on
in the
flaps through
to the
wing
the two set
screws
in each retainer.
structure.
full travel, up and down, to check
gear and
landing
rear
possible, tighten
as
mounting support.
clamps securing the shaft housing

cover
far
as
remove
the
flap rigging.
airplane from the jacks.
cover.
FLAP ACTUA TOR REMO VAL

a.
Place the
b.
Remove the dust
c.
Lower the
airplane
flaps
on
jacks
cover
and retract the
in the
rear
landing
section of the wheel well to
and disconnect the actuator from the
gain
access
the circuit
(use
gear until the inboard door is open
breaker).
to the actuator.
flap.
NOTE
To retain the
so
original rigging
of the
that it may be installed in the
flaps, mark the extension of the flap actuator before

position.
flap position transmitter from
d.
Remove the
e.
Remove the snap
ring
f.
Remove the
bolts from the
pivot
the
flap
actuator.
and disconnect the flexible drive
flap
it is removed
same
mounting
actuator
housing.
bracket and
remove
the
flap
actuator.
FLAP ACTUA TOR INSTALLA TION
flap
position
a.
Place the
actuator in
b.
Connect the flexible drive
c.
Install the
flap position
housing
and
secure
it to the
flap
and install the snap
transmitter to the
flap
actuator
mounting bracket
with the
pivot
bolts.
ring.
actuator.
NOTE
The
Page
flap position transmitter
27-5000
is
on
the left-hand
flap
actuator
only.
A20
Raytheon Aircraft
flap
actuator to the
d.
Connect the
e.
Install the dust
f.
Check the
flap rigging.
g.
Lower the
landing
cover
in the
flaps
position
marked
during
removal.
rear
gear and
in the extended
remove
airplane from
the
the
jacks.
FLAP INNER FLEX SHAFT REMOVAL
FIGURE 2
jacks and
retract the
a.
Place the
b.
c.
Remove the spar
d.
Loosen the two set
e.
Rotatethecable retainer90".
f.
Remove the dust
g.
Remove the two bolts
airplane
on
landing
gear
(using the
circuit
breaker)
until the inboard door is open.
cover.
the cable retainer.
screws on
cover
in the
rear
holding
of the wheel well to
gain
access
the forward end of the actuator in
to the actuator.
place.
NOTE
The first
clamp which
ibility to
the flex drive.
The
h.
position
secures
transmitter
Remove the snap
on
ring holding
the flex drive to the
the left
flap
wing
may have to be removed to allow
more
flex-
may need to be removed.
the flex drive to the actuator
NOTE
Do not lose the spacers located under the
i.
To facilitate installation, note how far the shaft
j.
Pull the flex inner shaft from the
flange
of the flex drive.
protrudes past the flange of
the
housing.
housing.
FLAP INNER FLEX SHAFT INSTALLA TION
NG URE 2
a.
Lubricate the inner flex shaft with grease
b.
Install the inner flex shaft into its
c.
Rotate the inner flex shaft until the
plished,
Chart 1,
91-00-00).
housing.
key
on
the inner end of the shaft slides into
the measurement noted in FLAP INNER SHAFT REMOVAL step i should
flap
shaft into the
d.
Push the
e.
Rotatethe retainer900.
nu,
(11,
flap
place. (When this is accomagain be noted at this time.)
27-50-00
Ral~heon Aircraft
f.
While
holding
the retainer onto the motor shafts
as
far
possible, tighten
as
the two set
screws
in the retainer.
NOTE
Be certain the spacers
g.
Install the
flap
are
in
shaft into the actuator and install the snap
place
in the actuator.
ring.
NOTE
A screwdriver may be used to make small adjustments to the
actuator does not align with the key of the flex shaft.
h.
Secure the actuator in
screw
of the actuator if the slot in the
with the two bolts, washers, and nuts.
place
NOTE
The
on
position transmitter will have
the shaft if it
i.
Install the dust
j.
Lower the
k.
Cycle
the
flap if it
was
removed. Install the clamp
removed.
cover.
landing
flaps
was
to be installed on the left
gear and
remove
to determine that
the
they
airplane
are
from the
jacks.
properly rigged.
NOTE
For correct
adjustment
and
rigging
of the
DICATOR AND ADJUSTMENT in this
flap position
transmitter refer to the FLAP POSITION IN-
chapter.
FLAP ACTUA TOR DISASSEMBL Y
ring (2)
a.
Remove the snap
b.
Tap
c.
Slide the
d.
Check that the end
pounds
e.
on
the
to disconnect the flexible shaft
piston plug (Il)to
piston (6)
of force in both
out of the
drive out the seal
(3)
and
bearings (4).
Withtheactuatorscrew 1/2extended.
3.
With the actuator
screw
screw
fully extended
If the 0.012-inch tolerance is exceeded,

screw.
0.012 inch under 25-50
full in and backed out 1 turn.
2.
Page
spacers
play between the piston (6) and the screw (5) does not exceed
compression and tension at any of the following positions:
With the actuator
the
from the actuator.
housing (8).
1.
acceptable replace
(17)
(1)
replace the piston and plug with a new one. If the tolerance
play of the new piston and screw per the preceding step.
Check the end
1027-50-00
and backed in 1 turn.

is still
un-
Raytheon Aircraft
NOTE
Mark the
are
piston and
that the
screw so
same
threads will be in contact when the piston and
screw
assembled.
f.
Remove the
O-ring (12)
g.
Remove the
flap
housing.
from the
(5)
actuator screw
from the
piston (6).
NOTE
following step should

damage or wear.
The
accomplished only if the piston (6)
be
or
piston plug (11)
is to be
replaced
due to
h.
Drill out the
out of the
plug (11)
and take the
pin (14)
piston (6).
FLAP ACTUA TOR ASSEMBL Y

Clean all parts with solvent (16, Chart 1, 91-00-00) and
wear. Refer to Chart 1 for tolerances and wear limits.
a.
the
O-ring (12)
and seal
b.
Replace
c.
Coat the plug
d.
Peen the
pin (14) and file it flush
e.
Pack the
bearings (4)
(11)
pin (14)
and
and excessive
(17).
primer (20,
with
Chart 1,
91-00-00) before assembly.
piston (6).
with the
lubricating
with
inspect for cracks, corrosion, distortion,
grease
(50,
Chart 1,
91-00-00)
before
inserting
the
piston (6)
in the hous-
ing (8).
f.
Pour
lubricating
g.
Slide
oil
bearing (4)
(51,
on
Chart 1,
the
screw
91-00-00)
into the
piston
until it is about two inches from
being
full.
(5).
NOTE
When the
screw
and
piston
are
disassembled. Check the
were
assembled, be
and
piston
sure
screw
the
same
assembly
threads
end
are
in contact
play per step
as
when
they
d of FLAP ACTUA-
TOR DISASSEMBLY.
h.
Start the
i.
Install the
pressure,
screw
in the
(5)
remaining bearing (4)
or use a
and slide the
and seal
suitable drift and mallet if
(3),
j.
Install the spacers
k.
Tap
i.
Check that the end
the
piston (6)
shaft
piston plug (11)
play
with
(1)
a
into the
housing (8)
with
approximately
100 Ibs.
ring (2).
rawhide mallet to seat the parts
between the
housing (8).
Seat these parts in the

press is not available.
(17).
and snap
piston
piston (6) and housing (8)
against the
snap
ring (2).
is between 0.002-inch and 0.010-inch.
27-50-00Pagell
Ral~heon Aircraft
NOTE
piston (6)-to-screw (5) plus the end play between the housing (8)piston-to-screw end play (determined in step
to-piston (6)
the
total
to get the piston-to-housing end play.
from
d of FLAP ACTUATOR DISASSEMBLY)
The total end
play
between the
shall not exceed 0.022-inch. Subtract the
piston-to-housing end play is

correct the end play.
If the
to
not within
tolerance, the spacers (3) may be removed
or
installed
made up of 3 different spacers (35-251230-2, 35-251230-4 and 35-251230). A

maximum of one 35-251230-2, five 35-251230-4 and seven 35-251230 spacers may be used to
make up spacers (3).
Spacers (3)
m.
are
Run the actuator in and out several times to
assure
forced out of the vent hole the first time the actuator is
n.
proper operation in its full travel. Excess lubricant will be

all the way up.
run
Install the actuator with the vent hole up.
CHART1
FLAP ACTUATOR MANUFACTURING TOLERANCES AND WEAR LIMITS
MANUFACTURED AND/OR
ITEM
(Refer to Figure
Piston
3 for Item
No.)
ALLOWABLE WEAR LIMITS
ACCEPTABLE DIMENSIONS
(6)
Pivot Bolt Holes
Inside Diameter 0.3432 to 0.3442
(7)
0.3452
Housing (8)
Inside Barrel Dimension
Piston
Plug Hole (10)
Piston
Plug (11)
Housing
End Hole
Piston Shaft
Piston Collar
Page
(9)
(13)
(15)
(16)
27150100
0.879
0.3140
0.694
Outside Diameter 0.685 to 0.687
0.684
Outside Diameter
0.861 to 0.864
0.859
P120
Ray~heon Aircraft
SEECH BONANUI\ SERIES MAINTENANCE MANUAL
I.
FLEXIBLE
2.
SNAP
3.
SPACERS
SHAFT
RING
4.
BEARINGS
5.
ACTUATOR
6.
PISTON
7.
HOUSING
8.
HOUSING
9.
HOUSING
SCREW
PIVOT
BARREL
PLUG
PISTON
ii.
PISTON PLUG
12.
O-RING
13.
HOUSING
14.
PIN
15.
PISTON
SHAFT
16.
PISTON
COLLAR
17.
SEAL
HOLES
INSIDE
HOLE
10.
END
BOLT
DIMENSION
(CONNECTS FLAP TO ACTUATOR)
HOLE
17
16
10
I I
15
12
14
13
C94EA2782829
Flap Actuator
Figure
A20
27-50-00
Feb
26/9 Page
13
BEECHCRAFT
BONANZA SERIES
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
b.
GCIST LOCK AND DAMPER

hole
provided
c.
pin
is
provided
for the control column
and the aileron control wheel. The lock
pin
secures
the aileron control wheel and the elevator control. A
is
provided
on
a.
column
the control lock to
cover
placing
pump, and the
both
to
so
positive retention of the lock pin by

assembly over the throttle control, boost
propeller control.
cover
cover
the throttle control,
Rotate the control wheel to the
align
the
the
Ensure
the
boost pump, and the propeller control. Install the control

lock assembly in the following sequence:
the column forward
pin through
guide and into
column lock
in the control column
control column.
CONTROL LOCK
A control column lock
Push the control
right
and
move
the hole in the bracket and the
WARNING
Always completely remove the control lock

assembly before engine start, taxiing, and
flight.
accept the pin.
"END"
27-70-00
Page 1
May 9180
CHAPTER
FUEL
BEECHCRAFT
BONANZA SERIES
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
CHAPTER 28
FUEL
TABLE OF CONTENTS
PAGE
CHAPTER
SUBJECT
28-00-00
General
Description And Operation
System
Auxiliary Or Fuel
Fuel
Boost Pump
E-2104)
except E-1946
Auxiliary OrFuel Boost Pump
Auxiliary Or Fuel Boost Pump
Auxiliary OF Fuel Boost Pump
Fuel System Drains
General
(CE-748, CE-772
after, D-10097, D-10120
after, E-llll, E-1241 thru E-2110

1
(CJ-149 and after)

(EA-~ thru EA-272 except EA-242)
(E-1946, E-2104, E-2111 and after, EA-242,
1
1
EA-273 and after)
2
2
Handling Practices
Cleaning Fuel Strainers
Airplane Defueling (Priorto EA-273 exceptEA-242)
Airplane Defueling (EA-242, EA-273 and after)
Fuel
2
4
28-1C-00
Storage
(Prior To EA-273 Except EA-242)

~Prior To EA-273 Except EA-242)
Reservoir Installation (CJ-149 and after)
Fuel Cell Removal (40 Gallon) (EA-242, EA-273 and after)
Fuel Cell Installation ~40 Gallon) (EA-242, EA-273 and after)
Fuel Cell Removal (14 Gallon)
Fuel Cell Installation (14 Gallon)
Inspection Of Fuel Cell Flapper Valve
Fuel Cell Leakage Test
Fuel Cell Removal
Fuel Cell Installation
2
3
3
4
6
6
9
Fuel Cell Preservation
Goodyear
Uniroyal
Repair
Goodyear Fuel Cells

Uniroyal Fuel Cells
Fuel Cell
28-20-00
1
Distribution- Maintenance Practices
Auxiliary
Auxiliary
Auxiliary
Auxiliary
Fuel Pump Removal (CE-748, CE-772 and after, CJ-149 and after, D-10097, D-10120 and after)
Fuel Pump Installation (CE-748, CE-772 and after, CJ-149 and after, D-10097, D-10120 and after)
Fuel Pump Removal (E-llll, E-1241 and after, EA-l and after)
Fuel Pump Installation (E-llll, E-1241 and after, EA-1 and after)
I
1
1
1
Fuel Selector Valve Removal
Fuel Selector Valve Installation
Fuel Strainer Removal
~Selector Valve)
ZI-CONTENTS
Page 1
A16
Oct 16192
BEECHCRAFT
BONANZA SERIES
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
TABLE OF CONTENTS
(Contd)
PACE
CHAPTER
SUBJECT
(Selector Valve)
(Wing Fuel Cells)
Installation ~Wing Fuel Cells)
Fuel strainer Installation
Fuel Strainer Removal
Fuel Strainer
Of Fuel Cell Vent Lines And Fuel
Inspection
Flared Fittings
FillerCaps
5
28-40-00
indicating
Fuel
Fuel
Quantity Sensors -(80 Gallon System)

Quantity Sensors -(108 Gallon System)
Fuel Quantity Indicators (80 Gallon System)
Fuel Quantity Sensor Removal
Fuel quantity Sensor Installation
Fuel Quantity Indicator Calibration
1
1
2
"END"
28-CONTENTS
Page 2
Oct 16/92
A16
BEECHCRAFT
BONANZA SERIES
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
CHAPTER 28
LIST OF PAGE EFFECnVITY
CHAPTER
SECTION
SUBJECT
28-EFFECTIVITY
28-CONTENTS
28-00-00
DATE
PAGE
Oct 16/92
:1
Oct 16/92
Oct 16/92
Aug 29/85
Aug 29/85
Aug 29/85
Aug 28/87
Aug 28/87
2
3
4
5
28-10-00
2A
Aug 28/87
Aug 28/87
Aug 28/87
28-20-00
28-40-00
Jan 20/82
Jan 20/82
Jan 20/82
Jan 20/82
Jan 20/82
Jan 20/82
Jan 20/82
Oct 16/92
Oct 16/92
Oct 16/92
Oct 16/92
Oct 16/92
Aug 28/87
Aug 28/87
2
"END"
28-EFFECTIVITY
Page
Ale
Oct 16/92
BEECHCRAFT
BONANZA SERIES
~AINTENANCE MANUAL
GENERAL
(CJ-149
and
after)
The fuel boost pump system utilizes 2 separate boost pumps

(a high pressure and a low pressure pump) mounted in front of
FUEL SYSTEM
(Figure 1)
the forward spar carry-through. The switch which controls

these pumps is located on the fuel control panel and is plaThe standard fuel system
CE-748, CE-772 thru CE-883;
on
CJ-149 thru CJ-155; 0-10097, D-10120 thru D-10302; E-ll11,

E-1241 thru E-1593; and EA-1 thru EA-32 consists of a 25
carded HIGH BOOST, OFF, and ACROBATIC BOOST. The

high boost pump may be used if the engine driven pump fails,
starting the engine during high ambient temperatures or if

engine is hot. The switch must be in the acrobatic boost
position during acrobatic maneuvers. Both pumps are for
intermittent use only. The boost pump pressures should be as
if
gallon (22 gallons usable)

edge, which provides the airplane with
50 gallons (44 gallons usable) of fuel. The
the
tem
indicated in Chart 1.
leading
a total fuel capacity of
fuel cell located in each wing
standard fuel sysCE-884 and after; CJ-166 and after; D-10303 and after;
E-1594 and after, and EA-33 thru EA-272 except EA-242 conon
sists of a 40 gallon (37 gallons usable) fuel cell in each wing

leading edge which provides the airplane with an 80 gallon (74
gallons usable) fuel capacity. On EA-242 and EA-273 and after,
the fuel system consists of a 40 gallon and a 14 gallon cell in
each wing. This provides the airplane with 108 gallons (102
gallons usable) of fuel.
Chart 1
Fuel Boost Pump Pressures
High
23.0
Boost
psi.
16.0
at
Acrobatic Boost
psi.
11.5
psi.
at
gph.
42
No Flow
1 7.0 psi. at 55 gph.
at
No Flow
The cells
located
are
on
filled through
each
an
after, each wing contains
uninterrupted
independent flush type filler cap

airplanes except CJ-149 and
On all
wing.
an
The
by-pass cracking pressure of each
The fuel selector
with
baffled fuel cell to deliver
flow of fuel to the
engine.
maximum
pump is 3.0 in, of water
by-pass pressure drop of 0.35 psi.
at 40
gph.
handle, located forward and to the left of the pilots seat, is
placarded OFF-LH TANK-RH TANK for fuel management.

Float operated sensors located in each wing tank system
measure
fuel
A visual
quantity.
attached to the filler neck of the
of the tab indicates 27
gallons
measuring tab in
80 gallon system.
(EA-1
thru EA-272
Except EA-242)
each cell is
The bottom
NOTE
of usable fuel in each tank and
the detent on the tab indicates 32 gallons of usable fuel in each
On
tank.
airplanes equipped with
kit
no.
36-9008-16 the
EMERGENCY FUEL PUMP switch is removed
after, a sight gage is installed

113.172) to aid in taking on a partial
wing
(inboard
load of fuel. This gage will indicate a partial load of 25, 30, or 35
gallons in its respective wing. When the gage is indicating in
At EA-242 and EA-273 and
of
station
the black zone, do not
use
and after; D-10097, 0-10120 and after;

E-llll, E-1241 thru E-2110 except E-1946 and E-2104)
The
single speed auxiliary fuel pump is mounted in front of the

forward spar carrythrough on the left side of the airplane. The
auxiliary fuel pump provides pressure for starting and emergency operation in case the engine-driven pump fails. Immediately after starting, the auxiliary fuel pump can be used to
purge the system of vapor caused by an extremely high ambient temperature or a start with the engine hot. The auxiliary
OFF:
board is removed and the manifold pressure

switch in the manifold pressure gage line has the
unplugged
and the
exposed
terminals covered with electrical tape. The vent

plumbing outboard of the fuel cell has not been
(CE-748, CE-772
fuel pump is controlled by a switch located

panel and placarded AUX FUEL PUMP
placard covered with black paint. The

relay under the pilots floor-
boost fuel boost
electrical connector
the gage,
and the
high
on
the fuel control
OPERATION, ON
changed but the fuel supply system is essentially

that of a B36TC (EA-242, EA-273 and after). The
fuel selector valve drain requires the use of the
same type tool (see special toolsj as the B36TC.
Refer to the B36TC (EA-242, EA-273 and af ter) for
the description and operation.
NOTE
The
auxiliary
Fuel
Pump
Switch is
placarded
OFF-LOW-AUTO on Serials EA-1 thru EA-53. The
auxiliary Fuel Pump Switch on Serials
EA-54 and
after, and airplanes prior to EA-54 complying with
28-00-00
All
Page 1
Aug 29/85
8EECHCRAFT
BONANZA SERIES
MAIMENAMCE MANUAL
BEECHCRAFT Service Instructions No. 1093 is
placarded
OFF-LOW-HIILOW.
check for contaminants in the fuel; the other drain with its
Adapter, P/N 1078, is for draining the fuel system.
Each fuel cell drain is located
on
the lower surface of the
forward spar carry-through on the left side of the airplane. The

pump is controlled by three switches located in the cabin. One
the main spar, just outboard of the root.

The system low spot drain at the bottom of the fuel selector
valve is accessible through a door inboard of the left wing
of the switches is located
root.
The two
speed auxiliary fuel pump is located
on
the fuel control
in front of the
panel and pla-
wing, forward of
carded AUX FUEL PUMP OFF, LOW, AUTO or HIILOW. In the

AUTO or HIILOW position the pump is operating at all times. At
low power
power
settings it operates at low boost, and at higher

settings (27 to 30 in. Hg manifold pressure) it operates
GENERAL
boost. The mode at which the boost pump operates in

the AUTO or HIILOW position is determined by a switch actu-
FUEL HANDLING PRACTICES
ated by manifold pressure. Another switch is located in the

subpanel just to the left of the fuel control panel and placarded
When
at
high
EMERGENCY FUEL PUMP OFF ON. This switch will override

high pressure side of the
the other switches and actuate the
pump for emergency operation, such as with a failed engine

driven fuel pump. The third switch is located forward of the
instrument panel and plumbed into the manifold pressure
gage line. This switch is actuated by manifold pressure, and
closes between 29 to 30 in. Hg on increasing pressure (to
high pressure side of the pump), and opens beHg on decreasing pressure (to return the
pump to low pressure operation). This switch actuates the high
pressure side of the pump, but only functions if the switch on
the fuel control panel is in the AUTO or HI/LOW position.
actuate the
filling
following:
airplane
the
and after;
Do not fill fuel cells
c.
within 100
Care should be exercised while
case
or a
or
NOTE
cell to prevent scratching,

damaging the surface or
wings. Do
filling the fuel

denting, or otherwise
leading edge of the
not allow the fuel nozzle to come in
contact with the rubber fuel cell.
the engine-driven pump fails. Immedi-
ately after starting, the auxiliary fuel pump can be used to

purge the system of vapor caused by an extremely high ambitemperature
open flame
EA-242, EA-273
speed auxiliary fuel pump is mounted in front of the

forward spar carry-through on the left side of the airplane. The
auxiliary fuel pump provides pressure for starting and emer-
ant
near
producing sparks.
The two
gency operation in
observe the
feet of any open energized electrical equipment capable of

8-2111
always
Service the airplane fuel tanks with Grade 100LL

a.
(Blue) aviation gasoline, or Grade 100/130 (Green) aviation
gasoline (1, Chart 1, 91-00-00). If these fuels are not
available, Grade 116/145 (Purple) aviation gasoline (1,
Chart 1, 91-00-00) may be used.
b.
Be certain the airplane is statically grounded to
the servicing unit.
tween 27 to 30 in.
(E-1946, 8-2104,
and after)
fuel tanks,
CLEANING FUEL STRAINERS
start with the
engine hot. The auxiliary

switch located on the subpanel
fuel pump is controlled by a

and placarded AUX FUEL PUMP HI LO OFFI
Most fuel injection system malfunctions can be attributed to

contaminated fuel. Inspecting and cleaning the fuel strainers
should be considered to be of the utmost
regular part
of
preventive
importance
as a
maintenance.
FUEL SYSTEM DRAINS
Normally the fuel strainers should

The fuel system prior to EA-273, except EA-242, is
equipped with one snap-type drain in each wing. At serial
EA-242 and EA-273 and after, there are two drains in each
wing. One drain with its tool is
to be used in a
prefllght
every
100
inspected
hours.
be
Inspected and cleaned
However, the strainers should be
and cleaned at more
frequent
intervals
depending
service conditions, fuel handling equipment and when

operating in localities where there is an excessive amount of
on
28-00-00
Page 2
Aug 29/85
Atl
BEECHCRAFT
BONANZA SERIES
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
THIS LINE IS REPLACED BY A FUEL TRANSDUCER ON SERIALS

AFTER CE928. CJ-(55. 0-(0353 ANO E-(765
FUEL
MANIFOLD
,~FUEL
V
I
FUEL
I-
FILTER DRAIN
E-13~3
AND AFTER EOUIPPED Wllil
I\IITOMATIC POWER CONTROL
TAANSDUCER
METERING
CONTROL
UNIT
SUPPLY
RETURN
FUEL
VENT
)FLOW
GAGE
DRAIN
IINJECTION
PUMP
FUELTRANSMITTER
FWD
FILLER
~t)
SEAL
DRAIN
TRANSMITTER USED WHEN

OPTIONAL FUEL CELLS
,B CHECKVALVE
ARE INSTALLED
AT SERIALS E1946. E2104. ANO E2111

AND AFTER A DUAL PRESSURE AUXILIARY
PUMP IS INSTALLED
S+CJ SERIALS ARE EQUIPPED WITH AN
ADDISIONAL BOOST PUMP PLUMBED IN

SERIES WITH THIS PUMP
b--i~
c,
AUx.
i
c
PUMP
---------I
KB
ii
LH
[L
FUEL T*NK
VALVE
137 GPIL. USABLEI OPT
ISTRAINER
01111
DA*IN
VLNI
A n, rUEI
~sEIEcron
2SGAL.(220PIL.VSABLEI
40 GAL
1;
T~NK
25GAL.IZZGP~L.VSAALEI
40 GAL. (37 GAL
USAB L E I OPT
I IODR*IN
7DR~INI
STRAINER
IC I.....".(XI
STRAINER
VALVE
SEAL
i
FLUSH VENT
YENI
CHECK
DRAIN
VENT
VENT
FLUSH VENT
I6,al
not
end after; CJ-149 and after; 0-10097,

D-10120 and after; E-llll, E-1241 and after)
(00-748, 00-772
RETURN
FUEL
MANIFOLD
VENT
CONTROL
DRAIN
UNIT
FUEL TRANSMITTER
FILLER
II
TRANSMITTER USED WHEN

OPTIONAL FUEL CELLS
ARE INSTALLED
SEAL
SClllll
AUX.
RELIEF VALVE
c
L.H. FUEL TANK

25 GAL. (22 GAL. USABLE)
40 GAL. (37 GAL. USABLE) OPT
FUEL
FLOW
GAGE
PRESSURE
RELIEF VALVE
5111;ii
FND
iCHECK
PVMP
INJECTION
PUMP
CHECK
VALVE
I
DRAIN O
Ae
VENT1
IVALVE
DRAIN
PRESSURE
I--e
SELECTORVALVE
(STRAINER
&DRAIN)
P,D_R,A!~,_,
:lr
VENT
(I
CHECK
VALVE
R.H. FUEL TANK
i ILSEAL
i "DRAIN
(22 GAL. USABLE)

(37 GAL. USABLE) OPT
25 GAL.
40 GAL.
VENT
VENT
A36TC281-32
(EA-1
thru 0A-272
Except EA442)
System
Figure 1
Fuel
28-00-00
All
Page 3
Aug 29/85
BEECHCRAFT
BONANZA SERIES
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
FUEL FLOW TRANSDUCER

ENGINE FUEL DISTRIBUTOR VALVE
FNC~INF THROTTIE RODY
ENGINE DRIVEN
FUFI. SUPPLY LINE 7
FUEL OUANTITY
PUMP
SIGHT GAGE
I
BOTTOM MOUNTED FUEL

QUANTITY TRANSMITTER
/-FUEL RETURNLINE
FIREWALL
STA
FUELCAPX
ANTISIPHON
ASSY
SYSTEM OUICK
DRAIN IFOR
M~INTENANCE
STA
1?1
STA
23
DUAL PRESSURE ELECTRIC
I/
ROOST PUMP
ONLYI
FUEL SELECTOR VALVE.
STRAINER R DRAIN VALVE
ng GALLON
14 GALLON CELL
CELL
VENT LINE
SHUTOFF VALVE
.r
FROM RH
WING
\-t~ FUEL RETURN TO AH WING
VENT
PRESSURE
FUEL RETURN TO LH WING
RELIEF VALVE
INTERCONNECT R
ANTI-SUAGEVALVE
FLUSHALTERNATE
FLAME
n
ARRESTOR
EXTEkNAL
VENT
VACUUM
RELIEF VALVE
TOP MOUNTED FUEL

QUANTITY TRANSMITTERS
MAIN VENT
Fuel System
tor
or
dust.
It
is
recommended
that
the
strainer, located in the fuel selecvalve, be inspected and cleaned at
intervals of 50 hours of operation and

under no condition should the period be
extended
100
The
hours.
over
finger
strainers in the fuel cell outlets should
be
removed and cleaned whenever solid
materials are found in the cells, or
if
the
airplane has been in storage for an
extended period of time.
CAUT I ON
The strainer of the non-baffled

cell
and
reservoir
with
the
baffled cell are not interchangeable: Ensure that the correct fuel
the
stra~ners are reinstalled in
proper cells after cleaning and
inspection.
SUMP STRAINER R FUEL CELL OUTLET

CHECK VALVE
FUEL CELL ANTI-SLOSH BAFFLE

B36TC-603-40
(EA-242, EA-273 and after)
Figure
sand
fuel
FLUSH FUEL DRAIN VALVE
2
AIRPLANE DEFUELING
(PRIOR
TO EA-273 EXCEPT
EA-242)
WARNING
Do not defuel near an open
within 100 feet of any
or
gized electrical equipment
ble of producing sparks.
flame
ener-
capa-
To ensure that all fuel is removed from

the system and to expedite the defueling
the
should be draineEI
fuel
operation
through ~he boost pump. The following
steps must be accomplished before energizing the pump:
a.
plane
Apply external power

electrical system.
to
b.
Place the fuel selector
the ON position and the mixture
IDLE CUT-OFF.
the
air-
valve
lever
in
in
28-00-00
Page 4
Aug 28/87
A12
BEECHCRAFT
BONANZA SERIES
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
Remove the filler caps to vent the
c.
gized
ble of
system.
d.
Disconnect the fuel line at the
firewall and attach a drain hose.
Provide
suitable container for the fuel.
a
Energize the
e.
electrical
equipment
producing sparks.
Provide
a.
the fuel.
suitable
capa-
container
for
b.
Remove the access cover under the
drain
valve located under the wing near
the fuselage.
boost pump,
f.
When the fuel is no longer pumped
from the airplane, open the sump drains
to complete the defueling operation.
Remove the filler caps to vent the
c.
system.
d.
CAUTION
plied
as
Insert
loose
the
tool)
drain
adapter (supinto the drain valve.
After
defueling or
replacement, operate
fuel
cell
the
engine
each fuel tank with the airon
plane on the ground to ensure that
all air has been purged from the
fuel cells and the fuel lines to
the engine upon refueling.
After draining the fuel,

e.
the drain adapter and install the
remove
access
cover.
CAUTION
After
AIRPLANE
DEFUELING
(EA-242,
EA-273
AND
AFTER)
WA.RNING
Do
or
not defuel
within 100
near
an
feet
of
open
any
flame
fuel
cell
the
engine
each fuel tank with the airon
plane on the ground to ensure that
all air has been purged from the
fuel cells and the fuel lines to
the engine upon refueling.
or
defueling
replacement, operate
ener-
"END"
28-00-00
A12
Page 5
Aug 28/87
BEECHCRAFT
BONANZA SERIES
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
STORAGE
incorporate a fuel cell with

collapsible fuel cell reservoir
in place of a baffled fuel cell.
To avoid damage to the fuel cells,
after
CAUTION
proper
assured.
installing
Return the
a.
outboard fuel cell
it into place.
Pilot s
the
to
Manual before starting
and operating the engine,
(PRIOR
b.
the
closing
zipper,
inspect the fuel cell for any
foreign material. If the cell is
not thoroughly
clean, it should
Remove
Remove
c.
fuel
d.
the
a lint-free cloth
alcohol
or
water,
kerosene. No other solvent should
be used to clean the fuel cell.
cells.
the
outboard
fuel
cell
and fuel
quantity sensor,
(The outboard fuel quantity sensor is
installed only in the optional 80 gallon
fuel system).
and
be cleaned with
moi stened
plate
access
inboard
quantity
sensor.
Disconnect
all
access
fuel
cover
and
vent
i.
e.
Unsnap the fuel cell and
through the outboard fuel cell
remove
the
edge of the access

damage to the
prevent
hole
fuel
cell.
FUEL
I NS TALLATI ON
CELL
EXCEPT EA-242)
into the
the tube
Locate the hose clamp on the

2.
fabric-reinforced area of the nipple; it
should clear the end of the fitting by 1/4
inch.
CAUTION
to
Insert the flow tube
fitting until 3/8 inch or more of

extends through the fitting.
access
hole.
Tape
in
the
The molded nipple fittings used on
fuel cell are lightweight fittings developed for ease of installation in certain
locations in the airplane. To get the best
it
is
service from this type fitting,
exercise
to
certain
procedures
necessary
at the time of installation. The specific
precautions other than the general care
in handling are as follows:
plumbing.
it
cell through the

hole and snap
access
Before
EA-273
TO
Drain and purge the fuel
a.
fuel
CAUTION
Operating
FUEL CELL REMOVAL

EXCEPT EA-242)
is
operation
eng~ne
Refer
MUST be
before
replacement cell.
the fuel
cell cavities
of
clean
debris
any
the
fuel
is
ti me
system
drained or a fuel cell replaced,
air may enter the system. If the
possibility that air has entered
the system does exist, start and
operate the engine on the ground
until all air is removed from the
for
system. Operate the engine
several minutes on each tank until
Any
(PRIOR
EA-273
TO
3.
Torque hose clamps as indicated in Chart 1 in this chapter.
They
should be drawn up in one operation; if
the
is
ret i ghten i ng
n ece s sa ry
re 1 ea s e
15
and
least
wait
at
clamp completely
minutes before retightening.
CAUTION
4.
Care
should be taken when replacing fuel cells to ensure that the

correct type fuel cell is used as
a
replacement. All Bonanza Series
Airplanes except CJ-149 and after
use baffled fuel cells. CJ-149 and
Use
no
sealing paste
or
gasket
compounds.
5.
Apply a thin film of Simonize
metal flow tubes as a
lubricant.
No other lubricant should be used.
wax
to
28-10-00
Page 1
A12
Aug 28/87
BEECHCRAF-T
BONANZA SERIES
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
the
connector
Insert
d.
assembly
into the reservoir while tilting both the
reservoir and connector assembly upward.
Chart 1
Fuel Cell
Nipple Cramp Torques

of
Inside diameter
Inch-pounds
tin inches)
nipple.
torque for fuel
of
CAUTION
nipple clamps.
should be exercised to avoid
the
connector
threading
Also avoid
the
reservoir,
into
bending or di storti ng the fuel
strainer which is attached to the
end of the connector, for it may
foam
the
in
become
e nta ngl ed
inside the reservoir.
Care
Outside diameter
tin inches)
cross
of tube.
.25 thru .62

.75 and 1.00
1.00
1.50
3.00
12
15
25
30
35
16
20
to 30
to 35
to
to
to
40
Tighten the nipple clamp.
e.
nector
If
fuel
Goodyear
replacement
cells have clear/yellow nipples,
torque the fuel cell nipple clamps
to 25 +5 inch-pounds.
RESERVOIR INSTALLATION
(CJ-149
Install the reservoir after the fuel cell

is in the wing and before the access plate
is installed. Installation may be accompi i shed as fol lows:
Tape the reservoir flapper valve

installing the reservoir.
shut before
b.
Compress
into
pass it
the fuel
through
c.
to
the reservoir (squeeze

small
circumference and
the fuel access ring into
cell,
Release the reservoir
its original shape,
assume
h.
AND
is
the
by hand)
con-
assembly.
Remove the tape from the flapeer

g.
valve and check the valve for free
play
and good sealing.
AFTER)
(Fieure 1)
a.
line to the
Connect the fuel
f.
CAUTION
allowing
it
Check to make
positioned properly
fuel
i.
sure
on
the
the
reservoir
bottom of
cell.
Close all access openings used for

reservoir.
installing the
CAUTION
The parts of the non-baffled fuel

cells and the baffled fuel cells
not to be interchanged. When
are
installing a new fuel cell, use
only those items pertaining to
cell
that
being
particular
installed. The strainer for the
non-baffled cell with reservoir,
is
for
considerably
example,
longer that the one for baffled
if
cell and may damage the cell
installed in the baffled cell.
28-10-00
Page 2
Aug 28/87
A12
BEECHCRAFT
BONANZA SERIES
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
FUEL RETAINING
MODULE WITH SPECIAL
SPONGE CORE
FLAPPER
::::::i::::
.::.:::i-:i-::_VALVE
TOIJ
FUEL
EXISTING
FUEL CELL
LINE
FUEL CELL
NIPPLE
CLAM P
36-281-33
Non-Collapsible Fuel Cell Reservoir (CJ-149

Figure 1
and
after)
28-10-00
Page 2A
A12
Aug 28/87
BEECHCRAFT
BONAN;LA SERIES
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
FUEL CELL REMOVAL

213 and after)
a.
b.
quantity
Remove
the inboard
access
cover
and fuel
Remove the
e.
Remove the
Before
any
closing the zipper inspect the fuel cell for

foreign material. If the cell is not thoroughly
clean, it should be cleaned with a lint-free cloth

moistened in water, alcohol or kerosene. No
other solvent should be used to clean the fuel
sensor.
d.
sump in
f.
CAUTION
Drain and purge the fuel cells.

Remove the outboard fuel cell access cover, fuel
sensor, and fuel sight gage and mounting plate,
c.
quantity
(40 GALLON) (EA-24~ E4-
under the fuel sump,

wire and bolts holding the
access cover
safety
cell.
place.
Lower the sump assembly and disconnect the

hose from the fuel outlet. Remove the sump and hose
Close zipper in fuel cell dam.
b.
assembly.
g.
h.
Remove the
clamp from
the drain valve
nipple.
CAUTION
Remove the drain valve.

Remove the
pilots and copilots
seats as outlined
in PILOT AND COPILOT SEAT REMOVAL
(Chapter 25-10-
k.
Remove the royalite cover over the main spar.

Disconnect the fuel line from the fuel cell fitting.
I.
Remove the two bolts
i.
wing
The
access cover
and fuel quantity
have to be removed from the 14
00).
holding
the fuel cell to the
root db.
Remove the cotter pin from the flapper valve and

m;
interconnect tube at the outboard end of the fuel cell.
n.
remove
o.
Loosen the bolt to the napper valve clamp, and

flapper valve,
Remove the clamps from the two interconnect
the
sensor
gallon fuel
may
cell
the small interconnect nipple may be held

inplace during installation of the 40 gallon cell. A
light film of petrolatum tech (VV-P-236) 142,
Chart 1, 91-00-00) may be used as a lubricant
on the nipples and under the clamps.
so
Install the fuel cell
c.
tubes.
Torque
the
nipples on the interconnect

nipple clamps per Chart 1 in this chapter.
tubes.
Unsnap the fuel cell and

p.
outboard fuel cell access hole.
remove
it
through the
CAUTION
CAUTION
nipple fittings used on the fuel ceil

lightweight fittings developed for ease of
installation in certain locations in the airplane.
To gel the best service from this type fitting, it is
necessary to exercise certain procedures at the
time of installation. The specific precautions
other than the general care in handling are as
The molded
are
Tape the edge of the access hole

damage to the fuel cell.
to
pevent
FUEL CELL INSTALLATION (40 GALLON) (EA-242,

EA-2M and afterl
follows:
1. Insert the flow tube into the
CAUTION
inch
or
more
fitting until
through
of the tube extends
318
the
fitting.
Care should be taken when replacing fuel cells
to ensure that the correct type fuel cell is used
as a
replacement, to avoid damage
to the fuel
cells, the fuel cell cavities MUST be clean of

any debris before
a.
access
installing

hole and snap it into
replacement cell.
through
place.
the outboard fuel cell
2. Locate the
hose
clamp
on
the fabric-
of the nipple; it should clear the

end of the fitting by 1/4 inch.
3. Torque hose clamps as indicated in Chart 1
reinforced
area
in this chapter. The hose clamps should be

tightened in one operation; if retightening is
necessary, release the clamp completely and
wait at least 15 minutes before retightening.
4. Use no sealing paste or gasket compounds.
28-1090
Page
A4
Jan 20182
BEECHCRAFT
BONANtA SERIES
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
Install the flapper valve.
d.
1.
Install the cotter
pin through the interconnect
flapper valve clamp,

2. Tighten the flapper
tube and
the interconnect
nipples from the tubes.

Unsnap the fuel cell and remove it through the
h.
remove the
outboard fuel cell

valve
nipple clamps from
Remove the
g.
tubes, and
access
hole.
clamp.
CAUTION
CAU~ION
Use
new
Tape the edge of the access hole

damage to the fuel cell.
gaskets.
to
prevent
NOTE
FUEL CELL INSTALLA~ION

On
Uniroyal cells
remove two screws to
installation of the bolts which

to the
wing
secure
(14 Gallon)
allow
the fuel cell
CAUTION
root rib.
Care should be taken to avoid damage to the

Install the two bolts which
e.
the
root rib.
wing
f.
Torque
secure
fuel cells, the fuel cell cavities MUST be clean

of any debris before installing a replacement
the fuel cell to
to 20 to 30 in.-lbs. and lockwire.
Instail the drain valve in the fuel cell
cell.
nipple (make
certain the hat section support is in place).

Install the nipple clamp. Torque per Chart 1 in this
g.
Section.
Connectthe sump assembly hose to the fuel

outlet. Torque per Chart 2 (91-00-00).
h.
i.
Ibs. and
Return the fuel cell through the outboard fuel cell
a.
access
hole and snap it into
Install the sump. Torque the bolts to 45 to 55 in.safety wire the bolts and drain valve assembly.
Install the fuel quantity transmitters (2 in the 40

j.
gallon fuel cell and 1 in the 14 gallon cell if removed),
Torque the transmitters to 20 to 30 inch-pounds and the
transmitter mounting plate to 45 to 55 in.-lbs.
k.
Connect the electrical wire to the transmitter,
i.
cover
plates
and fuel
CAUTIOIV
i
If the cell is not
cleaned with
alcohol
or
thoroughly clean,
it should be
lint-free cloth moistened in water,

kerosene. No other solvent should be
a
used to clean the fuel cell.
sight
gage mounting plate. Torque to 45 to 55 in.-lbs.

Install the access covers.
m.
and
nipples on the interconnect tubes,

nipple clamps per Chart 1 in this chapter.
Install the cell
b.
Connect the fuel line to the fuel outlet. Torque per
n.
place.
tighten
the
Chart 2 (91-00-00).
Install the
o.
royalite cover over the main spar.

Install the pilots and copilots seats as outlined in
p.
PILOT AND COPILOT SEAT INSTALLAT\ONl;in Chapter
25-10-00.
CAUTION
i
nipple fittings used on the fuel cell

lightweight fittings developed for ease of
installation in certain locations in the airplane.
To get the best service from this type fitting, it is
necessary to exercise certain procedures at the
time of installation. The specific precautions
other than the general care in handling are as
The molded
are
FUEL CELL REMOVAL (14 Gal/on)

a..
b.
c.
d.
Drain and purge the fuel cells.

Remove the access cover under the
wing tip,
Disconnect the vent plumbing from the fuel cell.

Remove the filler cap, adapter assembly, and
1. Insert the interconnect tube into the
anti-siphon assembly.
e.
Remove the two
access
covers
under the 14
Remove the two
until 3/8
through
gallon fuel cell,

f.
follows:
cover
assemblies from the fuel
the
2. Locate
reinforced
cell.
inch
or
more
fitting
of the tube extends
fitting.
the
hose
area
of the
clamp on the fabricnipple; it should clear the
28-10-00
Page
Jan 20/82
44
BEECHCRAFT
BONANZA SERIES
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
fitting by 1/4 inch.

Torque hose clamps as indicated in Chart 1
in this chapter. This should be drawn up in one
operation; if retightening is necessary, release
the clamp completely and wait at least 15
minutes before retightening.
4. Use no sealing paste or gasket compounds,
5. A light film of petrolatum tech (VV-P-235)
end of the
NOTE
3.
(42, Chart 1, 91-00-00) may be used

lubricant under the clamps and nipples.
as
Use all
d.
Install the
to 45 to 55
e.
in.:lbs.
Install the
new
gaskets.
anti-siphon assembly. Torque the
bolts
and lodtwire.
adapter assembly.
adapter.
Use Permatex No. 2
between the skin and
f.
Install the fuel cap.

Install the two cover assemblies, the one with the
g.
fuel quantity transmitter is the inboard one. Torque to 45 to
55 in.-lbs. and lockwire.

c.
the
Connect the vent
clamps per Chart 1
plumbing in the wing tip. Torque

in this chapter.
h.
Connect the electrical wire to the transmitter.
i.
Install the three
access covers.
28-10-a0
Page
A4
Jan 20/82
BEECHCRAFT
BONANLA SERIES
MAIHTENANCE MANUAL
/NSPECT/ON OF FUEL CELL FLAPPER VALVE
full travel. There should be no binding and the element

should seat securely against the valve plate.
2. If the flapper element binds and/or does not
On airplanes that are equipped with baffled fuel cells, the

flapper valves (metal or phenolic) should be inspected
properly, the upper rear side of the flapper element

binding against the valve plate.
3. The flapper valve element may be relieved
from binding by filing a small radius on the upper rear side
seat
may be
periodically (Beech Aircraft recommends that the inspection

be accomplished at each 100 hr. inspection) for freedom of
operation and proper seating.
of the element.
The
inspection may
be
accomplished
a.
Drain all fuel from the
b.
Remove the
as
follows:
airplane.
rectangular access plate located just
outboard of the fuselage on the upper skin of each wing
leading edge.
Cut the safety wire and remove the attaching bolts
c.
from the fuel cell access plate.
NOTE
area
around the
shop towel saturated with light oil may be

placed directly below the flapper valve to absorb
the phenolic dust during rework.
4. After determining that the flapper valve is

functioning properly, thoroughly wipe the area in the vicinity
of the flapper valve with an oil saturated shop towel.
NOTE
Cleanthe
access
plate before
h.
removing the plate.
fuel cell
i.
Remove the fuel cell
d.
access
plate
in the baffle.
zipper
Locate the
e.
access
flapper
k.
valve in the lower outboard
section of the baffle and determine if the

metal
i.
and open the
flapper
phenolic.
If the flapper valve is metal, it should
and repaired, if necessary, as follows:
to
valve is
1.
Move the
no
binding
in
plate
place.
Tighten
the fuel cell
access plate attaching bolts

inch-pounds and safety wire.
rectangular access plate on the wing
to 50
Reinstall the
skin.
FUEL CELL LEAKAGE TEET
(Figure 2)
and the
element should seat securely against the valve plate.

2. If the flapper element binds and/or does not
seat properly, the flapper element arm could be bent. The
the fuel cell and
Close the zipper in the baffle.

Install a new gasket and secure the fuel cell
leading edge
inspected
element of the valve
flapper
its full travel. Them should be
through
be
area on
plate.
torque of 45
i.
or
f.
Clean the gasket contact

access
Rubber bladder type fuel cells may be bench tested for
the closed position.

3. If after straightening the am~, the flapper
element still binds and/or does not seat properly, the flapper
i
f
leakage by sealing off all openings and inflating the empty

cell to 1/4 psi with a mixture of shop air and ammonia gas,
then checking for visible indications of leakage on a cloth
saturated with phenolphthalein solution. To set up and
conduct the leakage test, proceed as follows:
replaced with a new

flapper element assembly
assembly.
flapper
may be replaced by removing the two attaching bolts from
the upper part of the flapper valve. The same attaching
parts should be used to install the new flapper element
assembly. The new flapper element assembly should be
inspected after installation to determine that the assembly
did not receive damage during installation that could cause
it to bind and/or not seat properly.
straightened by placing
arm can
be
the
and the element and
arm
element should be
If the
inspected
screwdriver between
removed and
The
element
g.
pressing the element toward
fapper
valve
is
phenolic,
it
should be
Move the
flapper
valve element
through
The
following equipment
as
its
is
required
indicated in the schematic in
and should
Figure
2.
1. Closure plates for the fuel cell openings.

Such plates may be fabricated of aluminum sheet cut to a
size sufficient to cover the cell openings. Drill holes in the
closure
plate
to match the hole
pattern around the opening
in the fuel cell.

2.
Rubber stoppers to
plug the fitting openings
in the fuel cell. One of the stoppers should have a hole for
insertion of the plastic tubing used to connect the fuel cell
into the test setup.
3. A manometer for
and reworked, if necessary,-as follows:

1.
a.
be hooked up
measuring
inches of
water differential. The manometer can be fabricated from
281000
page
Jan 20/82
A4
BEECHCRAFT
BONANZA SERIES
MAIMENANOE MANUAL
EMPTY FUEL CELL
(ALL OPENINGS PLUGGED)
OPTIONAL
OVERFLOW
COLLECTOR
AMMONIA GAS
PLASTIC
STD. RULER
I I
(NH3)
TU~ING
SHOP AIR
OR
YARDSTICK
LEAK PROOF
Irtm
STOPPERS
MOISTURE
COLLECTOR
REGULATOR
s
GLASS
SET TO 1/4 PSI
TUBES
AMMONIUM HYDROXIDE
GLASS FLASK
(NH4OH)
OR
SOLUTION
BOTTLE
MANOMETER
6" of WATER
(/4 PSI
33-281-30
glass
or
Test
Leakage
Figure 2
Setup
for
4.
regulator
that
can
be set to
provide
1/4
psi
The Pressure Test Baffle Restrainer
9.
clear plastic tubing; frame and scale similar to the
illustration shown.
(6 inches of water) from a supply of shop air,

5. Two flasks (or bottles) approximately one
liter (or quart) in capacity. A third container may be hooked
fuel cell.
into the test setup to provide an optional overflow collector if

desired, The two containers should be provided with rubber
work bench.
b.
Place the fuel cell and test
or
metal)
as
shown in the schematic in
Figure
over
Plastic
the tubes and of
on a
clean
2.
tubing of a size to provide a leak-free

a length sufficient to interconnect
the test components as shown in figure 2.
7. Make up a solution of phenolphthalein as
follows: Add 1/3 ounce phenolphthalein crystals to 112
gallon ethyl alcohol, mix, then add 1/2 gallon water.
6, Make up an ammonia solution by adding 100
cc (3 fluid ounces) of concentrated ammonium hydroxide
(NHqOH) per gallon of water,
6.
fit
equipment
CAUTION
stoppers that have holes for the insertion of 1/4-inch tubes
(glass
(Figure
3) is made of 314 inch thick plywood. Sand all edges to

remove sharp corners and/or splinters that may damage the
Make
sure
shavings
or
the work
area
is clean of metal
other debris that could
damage
the
fuel cell.
Install the closure plates over the fuel cell

c.
openings and torque the retaining screws as specified in
this chapter of this manual.for the openings, then insert the
rubber stoppers into the open fittings.
28-10-00
Page
A4
Jan 20/82
BEECHCRAFT
BOEIANZA SERIES
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
8.0"
20.0"
6.00(NP)
TYP-1----15.,.27.0"
6.0"
LOCATE BAFFLE
RESTRAINER OVER
VELCRO TAPE AREA
PRIOR TO INFLATING
TO MAXIMUM 1/4 PSI.
INBD
\N
IV~
Pressure Test Baffle Restrainer
Figure
AFT
36-281-34
28-10-88
Fags
Jan 20/82
A4
BEECHCAAFT
BONANZA SERIES
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
d.
hydroxide
NOTE
The flask (or bottle) containing the ammonium

solution should be 1/3 to 1/2 full as shown in the
Refer to BEECHCRAFT Service Instruction No.
illustration.
Connect
e.
supply
air
shop
to the
regulator
and
0632-280, Rev. I
or subsequent and Goodyear

Aerospace Corporation Fuel Tank Repair
interconnect the regulator, beakers, fuel cell, and

manometer as indicated in Figure 2.
Place the baffle restrainer
prior to inflation as indicated in
f.
area
over
Manual AP368 for further information
Figure
3.
FUEL CELL PRESERVA 7/ON
WARNING
GOOOYEAR
inflation of the fuel cell without the baffle

restrainer
result in
can
on
inspection of fuel cells for leakage.
the velcro tape
irrepairable damage
to
Goodyear fuel cells (Construction No. BTC-39, BTC-54A

ETC-67) installed in the airplane do not require
the baffle.
and
preservation when the cell is to be empty for an indefinite

period of time. The fuel cell should not be open to the
atmosphere except for the normal vent lines in the airplane.
The cell is assumed wet from a previous filling.
Inflate the fuel cell to 114 psi with a mixture of

g.
shop air and ammonium gas. A d-inch difference in the two
water levels of the manometer will indicate that the fuel cell
psi. It is not necessary to restrain the cell
is inflated to 1/4
other than to keep it from
rolling off
the bench. The
the ceil will be rather slow at the 1/4

rushed
psi,
filling
of
UNI#OYAL
but should not be
overpressure of the cell could result.

Saturat~i a large, clean cloth with phenolphthalein.
as
h.
(Immerse
it in
container and squeeze out excess
Uniroyal
fuel cells must be filled every 10 days or the wails

a thin coat of light engineoil if they are to be
coated with
liquid.)
preserved for periods of up to one year. Liniroyal fuel cells

are to be stored for periods of one year or longer should
be coated with a thin coat of light engine oil and then
removed from the airplane as outlined under FUEL CELL
REMOVAL in this chapter. After the fuel cell is removed
from the airplane, it should be wrapped in plaljtic, placed in
a box, and stored in a cool dry area.
that
CAUTION
gloves to protect against skin

handling the cloth. As a further
possible penetration of the
against
protection
phenolphthalein solution through the gloves,
wash your hands thoroughly after finishing the
Wear
rubber
irritation when
NOTE
test.
The fuel cell should not be removed
Lay
i.
the cloth
over
the various
portions of the fuel
or
until 24 hours after the oil has been
handled
applied.
cell until the entire exterior of the cell has been covered.
With each
application
reddish
leak. Encircle the
with
pink
stain
of the cloth, watch for the formation of

the cloth to indicate the presence of
area on
chalk mark to
the fuel cell beneath such stains
pinpoint
the locations of leaks.
use
of the testing cloth will require
repeated saturations
rapid evaporation of
progressively
with
phenolphthalein
since
UNIROYAL FUEL CELLS
the alcohol from the cloth
reduces the sensitivity of the test
unless the solution in the cloth is

renewed.
GOODYEAR FUEL CELLS

For repairs of Goodyear fuel cells, refer to Goodyear Fuel
Cell Repair Manual AP368, Vithane Fuel Cells.
NOTE
Continued
FUEL CELL ~EPAIR
on
frequently
For repairs of Uniroyal fuel cells, refer to Uniroyal Handbook

"Recommended Handling and Storage Procedures for
Bladder Type and Oil Cells" PIN FC 1473-73.
"END"
2&1 040
Page
A9
Jan 20/82
BEECHCRAFT
BONANZA SERIES
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
DISTRIBUTION- MAINTENANCE PRACTICES
Secure
c.
mounting
fuel
the
selector
valve
to
the
to the
fuel
bracket with the four attach bolts.
CAUTION
d.
AUXILIARY FUEL PUMP REMOVAL

CE-772 AND AFTER, CJ-149 AND
D-10097, D-10120 AND AFTER)
Drain and purge the fuel system.
b.
Remove the
lined
PILOT
in
pilot
and
copilot
COPILOT
AND
f.
royalite
as
unscrew
Remove
the
the
postlight
fuel
covers
the
g.
Replace the royalite
h.
Reinstall
cover over
the main
TION
the
pilot
and
copilot
seats
as
PILOT AND COPILOT SEAT INSTALLA-
(25-10-00).
out-
the main
Drain and purge the fuel system.
a.
lined
Remove the
PILOT
in
AND
pilot
and
copilot
COPILOT
seats
SEAT
as
out-
REMOVAL
(25-10-00).
spar.
d.
truss cover.
covers.
outlined in
REMOVAL
cover over
royalite
spar.
b.
Remove the
the
Replace the fuel selector handle and
post light
(25-10-00).
c.
plumbing
AUXILIARY FUEL PUMP REMOVAL (E-Illl,

seats
SEAT
Replace
e.
CnE-748,FT~R,
a.
Reconnect the fuel
selector valve.
Any time the fuel system plumbing is

opened, air may enter the system. This
condition may cause rough engine operation or loss of power. If the possibility that
air has entered the system does exist, start
and operate the engine for several minutes
on each tank until proper engine operation
is assured. Refer to the Pilots Operating
Handbook and Airplane Flight Manual
before starting and operating the engine.
selector
from the
handle
royalite
truss
Remove the
c.
and
royalite
cover over
the main
SPa.
cover, then remove the truss cover.
d.
e.
Disconnect the fuel
plumbing
from the fuel
auxiliary
the
Disconnect
fuel
plumbing from
the
fuel pump.
selector valve.
f.
Remove the bolts
tor valve to the
securing the fuel selecmounting bracket and remove the fuel
selector valve.
g.
auxiliary
Disconnect
the
fuel
plumbing from the
fuel pump.
Remove the four bolts securing the auxiliary fuel pump to the mounting bracket and remove
the auxiliary fuel pump.
Remove the four bolts securing the auxile.

iay fuel pump to the mounting bracket and remove
the auxiliary fuel pump. The pump is located in front
of the spar carry-through on the pilots side.
AUXILIARY
FUEL PUMP INS TA LLA TION

AND AFTER,
AND
AFTER)
h.
AUXILIARY FUEL PUMP INS TALLA TION

(CE-748, CE-772 AND AFTER, CJ-149 AND
AFTER, D-10097, 0-10120 AND AFTER)
Secure the auxiliary fuel pump and mounting bracket to the airplane with the attach bolts.
a.
b.
Reconnect the fuel plumbing to the auxil-
iary fuel pump.
a.
to the
b.
iary
auxiliary fuel pump and bracket

with the four attach bolts.
Secure the
airplane
Reconnect the fuel plumbing to the auxil-
fuel pump.
c.
Replace
d.
Install the
the
royalite
cover over
the main
spar.
pilot
and
copilot
seats
as
out-
lined in PILOT AND COPILOT SEAT INSTALLATION
(25-10-00).
28-20-00
Page 1
A16
Oct 16192
BEECHCRAFT
BONANZA SERIES
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
FUEL SELECTOR VALVE REIMOVAL

a.
b.
pilot and copilot
Remove the
in
lined
PILOT
system.
AND
COPILOT
seats
SEAT
as
out-
REMOVAL
(25-10-00).
Remove the
c.
royalite
the main
cover over
spar.
d.
post light
the
selector
handle
and
from the
royalite
truss
fuel
the
Remove
unscrew
covers
cover, then remove the truss cover.
the
Disconnect
e.
plumbing from
fuel
1.75
the
selector valve.
f.
bolts
Remove the
valve to the
mounting bracket
the
securing
and
remove
I\
selector
the selec-
tor valve.
\45"
L
I
31
FUEL SELECTOR VALVE INSTALLATION
100
L-
36-2802
Fuel Vent
Lub ricate
a.
VV-P-236
the
petroiatum (42,
fuel
line
Chart
threads
1, 91-00-00) before
installation.
Secure the selector valve to the
b.
mounting
bracket with the attach bolts.

Connect
c.
the
fuel
plumbing
to
the
fuel
selector valve.
d.
Replace
the
royalite
truss
cover
around the
fuel selector valve.
e.
valve and
royalite
Replace the handle on the fuel selector

screw the post light covers back on the
truss
f.
cover.
Replace
the
royalite
cover over
Figure
with
the main
FUEL
STRAINER
R~RIOVAL
VALVE)
(Figure 2)
Access to the fuel selector valve fuel strainer may be

made by opening the access door located under the
airplane below the front edge of the pilots side window.
Remove the safety wire around the two

mounted on the bottom of the fuel selector
valve, then remove the screws.
a.
screws
b.
and
pull
Remove the bottom of the selector valve

the fuel strainer screen from the fuel selector
valve.
FUEL STRAINER
TOR VALVE)
INSTALLATION
spar.
(Figure 2)
Install the seats as outlined in PILOT AND

g.
COPILOT SEAT INSTALLATION (25-10-00).
Install the screen in

a.
selector valve with the flange
Test the fuel selector valve to
h.
it
functions
detents
properly
correspond to
28-20-00
Page 2
Oct 16/92
in
the
ensure
that
positions and that

placard markings.
the
all
(SELECTOR
up.the
b.
valve and
c.
(SELEC-
bottom
of
the)
the bottom of the fuel selector

with the two attach screws.
Replace
secure
Safety wire
the
screws.
A16
BEECHCRAFT
BONANZA SERIES
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
FUEL STRAINER SPRING AND
ATTACHING HARDWARE FIT INTO

BOTTOM OF FUEL STRAINER HOUSING
FLANGE
FUEL STRAINER
s~
,p,,,,
UP~GASKET
LOCK PLATE
~IQD
o%
C9201514
Fuel Strainer
Figure
28-20-00
Page
A16
Oct16/92
BEECHCRAFT
BONANZA SERIES
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
LUBRICATE
LUBRICATE
LUBRICATE
TAPERED
PIPE THREADS
"i
DO NOT LUBRICATE
FEMALE THREADS
STRAIGHT THREADS
NEVER ALLOW LUBRICANT

60-604-5
TO CONTACT TH IS SU R FACE
Lubrication of Flared
Figure
FUEL
REMOVAL
STRAINER
FUEL
(WING
CELLS)
a.
Fittings
Remove the access plate for each wing

a.
fuel cell from the lower wing surface.
b.
system.
Disconnect the fuel cell vent line from the
fuel cell.
b.
Remove the
finger strainer
portion of
located between the lower
access
the
cover
wing and
fuselage,
Disconnect the fuel line from the connector
c.
assembly.
to the fuel cell end of
Alternately
d.
plug
each
vent
opening
to
that air is passing through all branches of the

vent system for the cell. Continue to blow air through
assure
d.
Loosen the fuel cell
the
finger strainer
nect
Apply air pressure
c.
the vent line.
and
nipple clamp; disconslide the fuel finger
each
branch
until
any
obstructions
have
been
removed.
strainer from the fuel cell.
STRAINER
INS TALLA nON
(WING
CELLS)
tighten
b.
the
assembly in
nipple clamp.
Connect
the
fuel
line
to
the
the fuel
through
the
f.
Reconnect the fuel cell vent line to the fuel
g.
Reinstall the
h.
Visually check
cell.
connector
access
plate below each fuel
cell.
assembly,
c.
blow air
valve end, then reinstall the valve.
Install the connector
a.
cell and
siphon break check valve and

siphon break line from the check
Remove the
e.
FUEL
FUEL
Install the
access cover on
the
airplane.
looseness
INSPECTION OF FUEL CELL

AND FUEL FILLER CAPS
VENT LINES
cause
or
each fuel cell filler cap for

deterioration of the seal which could
leakage. If seals
are
deteriorated
or
damaged
in any way, they should be replaced.
(Figure 1)
Check the extended vent to ascertain that
a minimum of 1.75 inches below the
lower wing skin surface. The vent tube should be
i.
following procedure is recommended

inspection of fuel tank vent lines and filler caps:
The
for
the vent extends
28-20-00
Page
Oct 16/92
A16
BEECHCRAFT
BONANZA SERIES
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
scarfed at
450
angle
on
the forward side and should
be canted forward 100 from
perpendicular
to the skin.
FLARED FITTINGS
(Figure 3)
fittings and hoses, make sure
properly (see Figure 2)
with VV-P-236 petrolatum (42, Chart 1, 91-00-00).
When previously installed fittings are removed, they
should be wiped clean and relubricated before they
are reinstalled. Torque all fittings in accordance with
the FLARE FITTING TORQUE CHART (Chart 2,
91-00-00).
When
NOTE
installing
the threads
Any configuration of the

noted
in
step "i"
vent other than as
may create
negative
pressure. A negative vent pressure

will pull the air, or air and fuel from the fuel
vent
tank.
are
hared
lubricated
"END"
28-20-00
Page
A16
Oct 16192
BEECHCRAFT
BONANZA SERIES
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
MA IN TENANCE
INDICATING
TICES
PRAC-
resistance will be 3 t3 ohms empty and 140

46 ohms full.
FUEL
QUANTITY
LON SYSTEM)
CAUTION
is
the
fuel
time
system
drained air may enter the system.
has
If the possibility that air
entered
the
system does exist,
start and operate the
engine on
all
is
air
the
ground until
removed from the system.
Operate
the engine for several minutes on
tank
until
each
engine
proper
operation is assured. Refer to the
Pilot s
Operating Handbook and
before
Manual
Flight
Airplane
and
the
starting
operating
(80
INDICATORS
GAL-
Any
eng~ne.
FUEL
QUANTITY
SENSORS
(80
GALLON
the airplane in a level

flight
with the tanks filled as indicated in Chart 1. Measure the input voltEach
terminals.
the
indicator
at
age
reading should be within +2 millivolts of
the
value shown in Chart 1, except that
+1
the empty reading should be within
millivolt of the chart value.
Position
attitude
CHART 1
Fuel
Quantity
1/4
1/2
3/4
Millivolts
36
60
86
103
SYSTEM)
Fuel
is measured by float type

units located in each wing tank
system. Electrical signals are transmitted
from the sensors to the individual
indicators, which indicate fuel remaining
in the tank. Resistance between the stud
and case of each fuel sensor must be O to
0.5 ohms in the empty position and 43 +2
ohms in the full position for the outboard
fuel sensor and 0 to 0.5 ohms in the empty
position and 76 +2 ohms in the full position for the inboard fuel sensor.
quantity
sensor
FUEL QUANTITY
SENSORS
(108
GALLON
FUEL QUANTITY SENSOR REMOVAL

a.
Turn off electrical
b.
c.
Remove the access panel

which is to be removed.
sensor
d.
Disconnect
e.
Cut
transmitter
sensor
wire
safety
support
power.
system.
at
the
remove
the
wiring.
and
screws.
SYSTEM)
NOTE
Fuel
measured by float type

units located in each wing tank
sensor
system. Electrical signals are transmitted
from the sensors to the individual
indicators, which indicate fuel remaining
in the tank. Resistance between the stud
and case of each fuel sensor must be O to
0.5 ohms in the empty position and 43 +2
quantity
is
ohms in the full position for the outboard

fuel sensor and O to 0.5 ohms in the empty
position and 76 +2 ohms in the full posithe
tion for the inboard fuel sensor of
resistance
cell.
The
40
fuel
gallon
fuel
between the stud and case of the
cell is O to
sensor in the 14 gallon fuel
5
ohms in the empty position and 19 +2
in
the
ohms
full
position. The total
Clean the area around the

before removing the sensor.
f.
Remove the
the fuel cell.
FUEL
sensor
and
sensor
gasket
from
QUANTITY SENSOR INSTALLATION
a.
Inspect the fuel cell for wrinkles
other obstructions that might
impede
sensor float travel.
or
Set the new gasket and sensor in

is
float
and ensure that the
unrestricted through its full travel from
The float arm may be bent,
stop to stop.
if necessary, to provide clearance.
b.
position
28-40-00
Page 1
A12
Aug 28/87
BEECHCRAFT
BONANZA SERIES
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
Install
c.
torque
screws,
to
the
25
sensor
support
inch-pounds,
safety.
QUANTITY INDICATOR CALIBRATION
Remove the
a.
instrument panel.
d.
power
FUEL
and
on
Connect sensor
and check fuel
wiring.
gage
Turn the
for empty
reading.
b.
boards
over
the
the
two
printed ci rcui t
the back of the instrujust to the left of center.
Locate
located
panel
ment
glareshield
on
NOTE
If
Locate the calibration

screw in
c.
the back of each printed circuit board.
the
gage does not read empty,

reinspect the sensors to ensure
the float arm is on the down stop
and the float clears the bottom
of the fuel cell. Check all

for faulty connections.
d.
cater
as
Calibrate the fuel

follows:
quantity indi-
wiring
Ensure that the fuel tank that
fuel
the
to
quantity being
calibrated is full.
1.
corresponds
e.
gages
Fill the tanks and check the fuel

for full readings.
NOTE
See
Instructions
No.
Service
I or subsequent for
Rev.
information on
more
replacement
of fuel quantity sensors.
0925,
Turn the calibration screw in

2.
back of the corresponding printed circuit
board until the needle on the fuel quantity indicator points to the "F" (full)
mark.
e.
Reinstall
the
glareshield.
"END"
28-40-00
Page 2
Aug 28/87
A12
CHAPTER
ICE AND RAIN
PROTECTION
BEECHCRAFT
BONANZA SERIES
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
CHAPTER 30
ICE
RAIN PROTECTION
TABLE OF CONTENTS
CHAPTER
SECTION
SUBJECT
SUBJECT
PAGE
30-00-00
GENERAL
Description
and
..................1
Operation
30-60-00
PROPELLERS
..................1
and
Operation
Electric Propeller Deicing
Troubleshooting
Description
.................1
........1
........5
.................5
Propeller Deicer Boot Removal

Propeller Deicer Boot installation
Brush Module Replacement (B.F. Goodrich)
.................5
........9
Deicer Timer Check
........9
Heat Test
.......10
Brush Module Resistance Check (B.F. Goodrich)

Slip Ring Alignment (B.F. Goodrich)
Slip Ring Machining (B.F. Goodrich).
.......10
Brush Wear
On the
........11
Airplane
..............11
........11
Replacement (McCauley)
........13
Brush Block Removal

Brush Block Installation
Slip
Slip
Slip
Slip
......11
................11
Limits(McCauley)
Removed from the Airplane

Brush
.......10
........13
~McCauley)
........13
Ring (McCauley)
Ring Alignment (McCauley)
Ring or Brush Block Cleaning fMcCauley).
Ring Machining (McCauley)
13
13
13
LEND"
30-CONTENTS
A6
Page 1
Oct 7/83
BEECHCRAFT
BONANZA SERIES
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
CHAPTER 30
LIST O~ PAGE EFFECTIVITY
CHAPTER
SECTION
SUBJECT
PAGE
DATE
30-EFFECTIVITY
Oct 7/83
90-CONTENTS
Oct 7/83
30-00-00
Oct 10/80
30-60-00
Oct 7/83
May 9/80
May 9/80
3
4
Oct 7/83
Oct 7/83
Oct 7/83
Oct7/83
Oct 7183
Oct 7/83
10
11
Oct 7/83
Oct 7/83
12
Oct 7/83
13
Oct 7/83
14
Oct 7/83
"END"
30-EFFECTIVITV
Page
A6
Oct 7/83
BEECHCRAFT
BONANZA SERIES
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
GENERAL
DESCRIPT1ON AND OPERATION
The airplane is equipped with
protection systems
that
can
the airplane electrical system for protecting the

opening from becoming clogged with ice.
variety of ice and rain

during operation
be utilized
under inclement weather conditions.
Air from the cabin
heating system prevents the windshield from fagging. The

propellers are protected against icing by optional
electrothermal boots
automatically cycle
an
each blade that, when activated,

dispersing the formation of ice.
to aid in
The pitot mast contains
heating
element connected to
pitot
optional weather radar system is available for the

Bonanza series airplanes starting at serials CD-878 and
after, D-10264 and after, E-1534, E-1537 and after, and
EA-11 and after. The indicator is located in the radio
An
section of the instrument

in the outboard
panel and the antenna is located

leading edge of the right wing. (See 34-40-
00.)
"END"
30-00-00
Page
Oct 10/80
BEECHCRAFT
BONANZA SERIES
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
PROPELLERS
the timer is in.
phase
PROPELLER
SYSTEM
TROUBLESHOOTING
DEICER
ELEC7C~C PROPELLER DEICING

propeller deicer system includes an on-off
the LH instrument subpanel), an ammeter, a
The electric
switch
timer,
ton
a
brush
heated boot
assembly, slip rings, and an electrically

for each propeller blade. When the on-off
switch is turned ON, the ammeter (near the center of the

instrument panel) registers the amount of current (2-bladed,
8-12 amps; 8bladed, 14-18
system. If the current rises
amps) passing through
beyond
the switch limit,
the
an
circuit breaker will cut off the power to the timer.

The current flows from the timer (forward of instrument
integral
panel) to the brush assembly (mounted in front of the

engine case) and is conducted by the brush assembly to the
slip rings installed on the spinner backing plate. At serials Dafter, and
slip rings became part of an assembly
attached between the engine hub and the propeller. The slip
rings distribute current to the deicer boots on the propeller
blades. Heat from the boots reduces the grip of the ice,
which is then removed by the centrifugal effect of propeller
rotation and by the blast of the airstream. The timer cycles
10404 and after, CE-1024 and after, E-2069 and
EA-378 and after, the
power to the heating element on each blade. It takes 3

minutes for the timer to complete a cycle of 90 seconds on,
90 seconds off. Whenever the
ammeter in the instrument
the proper amerage,
panel
or zero
system is turned on, the

or subpanel and registers
amperage,
depending
on
the
The ammeter of the deicer system can be used to indicate

the general nature of most electrical problems.
it is recommended that, to determine which
involved, troubleshooting be preceded by the
ammeter test outlined in step "a." of the 60-hour inspection
(Chapter 5), and the HEAT TEST described in this chapter.
Consequently,
circuits
are
reading of two-thirds
one-half
on
two-bladed
(or
the normal amount of current
props)
is
an
indication that
the circuits is open between the slip

deicer heater. If the ammeter registers
one
ring assembly
excess
of
and
current, the
power lead is shorted to ground. It is possible that the

excess current has welded the timer contacts in one phase.
Under these circumstances, the timer will either feed current
continuously, or not cycle. If the
to the welded contacts
former is true, the heat test will show heating throughout the
two phases. Unless the grounded power lead is located and
corrected, any new timer that is installed may suffer the
same
internal damage during the first use of the system. In

most effective use of the troubleshooting chart,
general, for
all of the "indication" entries should be read to locate that

which matches conditions of the particular system being
checked. The numbered "probable cause" and "remarks"
then indicate the proper sequence of checks. It should be
noted, however, that such numbers are assigned with
respect
to the
approximate usefulness of the check rather

likely sequence of occurance.
than to the most
30-60-00
Page
A6
Oct 7/83
BEECHCRAFT
BONANZA SERIES
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
TROUBLESHOOLlNG PROPELLER DEICER SYSTEM

INDICA TION
i.
Ammeter shows
(Both phases
cycle.)
PROBABLE CAUSE
zero current,
a.
Switch circuit breaker
REMARKS
tripped,
a.
of the 3 minute
Locate and correct short before
resetting
by turning switch OFF,
circuit breaker
then ON.
b.
c.
Switch
faulty.
No power from
b.
airplane.
~c.
If
voltage
at switch output with voltage

input, replace the switch. If
voltage is OK at switch output, go to step
no
at
switch
If
no
voltage into switch, locate
and
correct open circuit.
d.
Ammeter
faulty. (If
some or
all
d.
Deicers heat with ammeter at
If low
replace ammeter.)
zero,
Test for
voltage
or
replace
zero
up to and out of ammeter.

output but proper input,
ammeter.
If
voltage
no
to
ammeter, locate and fix open between

switch and ammeter.
e.
Open circuit between
e.
ammeter and timer,
Disconnect harness at timer and check
voltage pin
(of harness)
ground.
to
If
none, locate and correct open circuit.
Open
in
wiring between limer
i.
and firewall connector.
Re(erto Ihepatagraphon heattesttolind

Deicers not heating and test for voltage
on that pin of firewall connector. If zero
over
3 minutes,
wiring from
g.
Open
between firewall and
g.
Deicer lead straps,
2.
Ammeter
shows
normal
h.
No
a.
Open in Deicer
assembly.
part of cycle, low

current rest of cycle.
current
ground
If
voltage OK to firewall plug, try voltage

junction of Deicer lead and slip ring
lead. If no voltage, find and correct open
in wiring to brush block, open within brush
block, or no contact brush to slip ring.
at
h.
circuit.
or
locate and fix open in
timer to firewall.
slip ring
a.
if voltage at Deicer bads, locate and fix

open from Deicer to ground.
Disconnect Deicer straps to check heater

resistance. If resistance is within
specified
limits, locate and fix open in slip ring

leads.
It not,
replace Deicer
with open
circuit.
b.
High
resistance in circuit with
low current.
b.
If not in contact of brush to
(including ground brush),

Deicer and to timer to fix
wire, loose
3060-00
Page 2
May 9/80
or
slip ring
wiring to
partially broken
trace
corroded connection.
BEECHCRA~
BONANZA SERIES
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
TROUBLESHOOTING PROPELLER DEICER SYSTEM (Continued)

INDICA TION
3.
PROBABLE CAUSE
Ammeter shows low current.
a.
Airplane voltage
b.
Ammeter
c.
High
REMARKS
low,
faulty.
resistance up to timer,
a.
Check bus
b.
Refer to step "l-d."
c.
Check for
partially
corroded
connection
voltage.
airplane supply
4.
Ammeter
shows
excess
a.
Ammeter
faulty.
Ground
between
broken wire, loose or

in
to timer
wiring
input.
from
a.
Refer to step "l-d."
b.
Disconnect harness at timer and, with

ohmmeter, check from pin B (of harness)
to ground. If ground is indicated, locate
current.
b.
ammeter
and timer.
and correct.
c.
Ground between brush block
c.
and timer.
Disconnect leads at brush block and

check from power leads to ground with
ohmmeter. If ground is indicated, locate
and correct.
d.
Ground between brush block

and
d.
Deicers.
If
no
short
exists
at
brush-slip ring
contact, check for ground from slip ring

lead to prop while flexing slip ring and
Deicer leads. If a ground is indicated,
(Excluding
ground brush circuit.)
locate and correct.
a.
Timer
faulty.
a.
Test timer
as
indicated in
paragraph
on
timer check.
5.
Ammeter
does
not
"flick"
a.
Timer
ground open,
a.
each 90 seconds.
Disconnect harness at timer and check

with ohmmeter from
pin G (of harness) to

ground. If no circuit, refer to Bonanza
Wiring Diagram Manual PIN 35-590012-9.
b.
Timer contacts
are
welded
(caused by short circuit
b.
in
Test timer
as
in
paragraph on timer
cycle with voltage
check. If timer does not

at pin B, replace timer
causing original failure
system.)
but be
sure
short
has been located
and corrected.
5.
Ammeter flicks between 90
second phase
a.
periods.
Loose connection between
airplane power supply

timer input,
b.
a.
and
Loose or poor connection

timer to Deicers.
If trouble
occurs over
Timer cycles
erratically.
cycle,
trace
power source to timer input to

locate and tighten loose connection.
b.
Check for
brush to
rough or dirty slip rings causing

"skip." If not this, trace circuits to
locate and fix loose

c.
entire
wiring from
c.
Test timer
as
or
poor connection.
indicated in
paragraph
on
timer check.
d.
Electrical
wiring breakdown.
d.
Replace
the
faulty
deicer boot.
3060-00
Page 3
May 9/80
BEECHCRAFT
BONANZA SERIES
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
TROUBLESHOOTING PROPELLER DEICER SYSTEM (Continued)
7.
Radio noise
with Deicers
REMARKS
PROBABLE CAUSE
INDICA TION
or
interference
a.
Brushes
"arcing."
a.
Check brush alignment
as
in step "h" of
inspection (Chapter 5). Look for

rough or dirty slip rings. If this is the
cause, clean, machine or replace slip ring
assembly. Check for slip ring alignment.
100-hour
on.
b.
b.
Loose connection,
Refer to step
"g",
of 100-hour
inspection
(Chapter 5).
c.
Switch
d.
Wiring located
than
faulty.
within
inches
of
less
c.
Try jumper wire across switch. If radio

noise disappears, replace the switch.
d.
Replace
wiring to
radio
at
least 8 inches from
radio
input
equipment.
equipment wiring.
8.
Rapid brush
breakage.
wear or
frequent
a.
Brush block out of
alignment.
a.
alignment as in step
inspection (Chapter 5).
Check brush
100-hour
b.
Slip ring
wobbles.
b.
Check
slip ring alignment
"h." of
with
dial
indicator.
c.
Replace
Dirty slip rings.
d.
Clean the
Brushes
e.
See "8a".
c.
Rough slip ring
d.
a.
arcing,
surfaces.
or
machine.
slip rings,
3060-00
Page
Oct7183
A6
BEECHCRAFT
BONANZA SERIES
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
PROPELLERS
AIIAINTENANCE PRACTICES
h.
Remove the
propeller blade with

31, Chart i, 91-00-00).
and
PROPELLER DNCER BOOT REMOVAL
propeller spinner.
a.
Remove the
b.
Disconnect the deicer boot leads from the
bulkhead and
c.
remaining adhesive from the boot

toluol or methyl ethyl ketone (19 or
spinner
PROPELLER DEICER BOOT INSTALLATION
slip ring.
Remove the clip securing the lead strap to the

and the clamp securing it to the propeller
NOTE
spinner bulkhead
hub.
If
a new
CAUTION
Place the blade
so
drying time of
(52, Chart 1, 91-00-00)
is installed, the
must be extended per B. F. Goodrich Service

Bulletin No. E-75-51.
the solvent will
from the hub. The solvent may

propeller seals.
propeller
1300L adhesive
the
run
away
damage the
a.
boot
on
On 8.F. Goodrich installations position the deicer

propeller blade so that its center line at the
the
split in the propeller blade

clamp, and the center line
at the outboard end falls on the blade leading edge. Be sure
the lead strap is in the proper position to be clamped to the
inboard end is
clamp and
NOTE
If the lead strap is retained by a strap rather
by a clamp, remove the boot lead strap
adjacent
to the
1 inch outboard of the
blade retaining clamp.
than
retaining strap as follows:

1. Using methyl ethyl ketone of
toluol
(31
or
19, Chart 1, 91-00-00) to soften the adhesive of

the strap, loosen one corner of the strap
NOTE
sufficiently to grasp it with pliers or similar tool.

2. Apply a slowsteady pull to the strap while
using the solvent to soften the adhesive.
d.
If
applicable
remove
the boot lead strap
McCauley
place the center line

leading edge of the
propeller. For other McCauley installation
dimensions refer to Figure iA.
On
installations
of the deicer boot
on
the
retaining
strap. Using methyl ethyl ketone or toluol (31 or 19, Chart 1,

91-00-00) to soften the adhesive of the strap, loosen one
corner of the strap sufficiently to grasp it with pliers or
b.
Mask off
an area
approximately 1/2 inch from

(See Figure 1).
the
outer end and each side of the boot.
similar tool.
CAUTION
Unless the
boot
scrapped, cushion
prevent damaging
being removed is
jaws of any pulling
the
to
be
NOTE
tool to
the boot surface.
On installations
off
an area
using rubber lead straps mask

approximately 1/2 inch from the area
which will be
e.
Apply
slow, steady pull to the strap while using
the solvent to soften the adhesive.

f.
Using methyl ethyl ketone or toluol (31 or 19,
Chart 1, 91-00-00) to soften the adhesion line between the
boot and the blade, loosen one corner of the boot
sufficiently to grasp it with vise grip pliers or a similar tool.
the
Apply a slow, -steady pull on the boot to pull it off

g.
propeller surface while continuing to use the solvent to
soften the adhesive.
occupied by
the lead strap retainer
strap (around the blade shank).
c.
Remove the deicer boot and clean the blade in
the masked area from the
retaining clamp outboard. Clean

thoroughly with methyl ethyl ketone or toluol, (31 or
19, Chart 1, 91-00-00). For final cleaning, wipe the solvent
off quickly with a clean, dry, lint-free cloth to avoid leaving a
the
area
film.
3060-00
PageB
Ad
Oct7/a3
BONANZA SERIES
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
8\
DEICERBOOT
O
Xi-g
ililiiiiii~iiiiiiiiiiiiiiiiiillii:::,::::
:i
I. l: . 1: :if.l : . :. .
1/2"
ii
1/2"
MASKlNG TAPE
ssatl~
Deicer Boot Installation
Figure
CAUTION
NOTE
If the blade is painted with laquer remove all

paint within the masked off area. If the blade is
painted with polyurethane, lightly sand within
the masked off area, using 400 grit sand paper.
When solvent is used to soften cement, methyl

ethyl ketone (MEK) provides approximately 10
seconds time for de-icer application, while
Toluol will provide approximately 40 seconds
working time.
CA UT/ON
The metal and rubber parts must be
clean to
assure
Position the deicer boot on the propeller, starting

g.
f inch from the blade retaining clamp, making sure the lead
thoroughly
maximum adhesion,
strap is in position
Moisten the cement
(31
damp to the blade retaining clamp.

lightly with methyl ethyl ketone or tolud
to
19, Chart 1,91-00-00) and tack the boot
or
center line to
leading edge. If the center line of the boot

deviates from the blade leading edge, pull up with a quick
motion and replace properly. Poll firmly along the center line
with a rubber roller (see Figure 2).
the blade
d.
toluol
(31
Moisten
or
clean cloth with
methyl ethyl
ketone
or
19, Chart 1, 91-00-00) and clean the unglazed
surface of the deicer boot and both sides of the rubber

retainer strap if applicable, changing the cloth
avoid contamination of the clean area.
frequently
to
CAUNON
mix EC-1403 cement
(EC
apply one even brush coat
to the propeller blade and to the unglared back side of the
boot. Allow the cement to dry for at least one hour at 40PF or
e.
Thoroughly
cement may also be
hours if the
humidity
humidity
is less than 75%,
or
is between 75% and 90%. Do not
the cement if the relative
Never use a metal or wooden roller for this

purpose, for they would damage the heating
elements in the deicer boot.
and
used)
above when the relative
1300L
humidity is higher
than 90%
two
apply
or
the
temperature is below 50"F.

f.
After
allowing
sufficient
drying time, apply
second brush coat of cement to the propeller and to the

unglazed surface of the deicer boot. Apply cement to the
necessary to cement the strap to the
up to the hub. Allow the cement to dry,
lead strap
as
propeller,
h.
over
Gradually tilting
pockets
under the boot
carefully
trapping air
the roller, work the boot
each side of the blade contour. Avoid
(see Figure 3).
30-60-00
Page6
Oct1/63
As
BEECHCRAFT
BONANZA SERIES
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
START IN THIS AREA (APPROX.

90 FROM THE DE-ICE BOOT
LEAD STRAP) AND WRAP
AROUND PROP BLADE SO THAT
A DOUBLE THICKNESS WILL
COVER THE DE-ICE BOOT LEAD
STAP. TRIM RETAINER STRAP
SO THAT IT WIILEND APPROX.
:i
i:
:::::::~j::::.-
AS SHOWN.
"7~
A--A
j-.50" P(PICAL
I
OVERLAP EDGE OF BOOT AND
STRAP WITH SEALANT BY ~s"
llc--.12Y
AS SHOWN.
SEALER
II
DE-ICE BOOT
A
.375
RETAINERSTRAP~
.125
36-251-8
Boot Deicer Installation

Figure 1A
(McCauley)
~SI
30-6090
Page7
As
Oct 7/83
BEECHCRAFT
BONANZA SERIES
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
outwardly from the center line to the edges of

(see Figure 4). If excess material at the edges
tends to farm puckers, work them out smoothly and carefully
with the fingers.
Roll the tapered edges of the boot with a narrow
i.
Roll
i.
the boot
steel stitcher roller.
Clean the blade with
k.
clean cloth moistened with
ketone (19 or 31, Chart i, 91-00-00).

Be careful not to let solvent run into the edge of the boot.
i.
Apply one even brush coat of sealer around the
toluol
or
methyl ethyl
of the boot,
edges
boot but
and -2
1003
extending
on
allowing 1/16 to 1/8 inch overlap on the

masking tape. Use BFG 82-076-1
B.F. Goodrich installations and Sunbrite 78-U-
installations.
Side
McCauiey
Remove the masking tape after applying the
enamel
U-1001-C
and
catalyst
on
cement to obtain a neat border.
clamp securing the lead strap

propeller blade retaining clamps,
m.
60~251-4
to the
Install the
to the
Rolling
Figure
Connect the lead terminals and install the clip on

n.
spinner bulkhead. There must be no slack between the
terminal and the clip to assure enough slack between the
clip and the clamp on the blade to allow full propeller travel.
the
NOTE
CAUTION
The rubber retainer strap should wrap around

over the inboard 1/4 inch of
After deicer boot installation allow at least 12
the blade shank
the deice boot on B.F. Goodrich

McCauley installations,
or
1/2 inch on
hours for the 1300L
or EC-1403 cement to dry

before starting the engine, and 12 hours more
before
energizing
the deicers.
6~25110
60261-8
Rolling
Figure%
Center
Edge Rolling
Figure 4
3060-00
Page8
Oct 7/83
A6
BEECHCRAFT
BONANZA SERIES
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
RND
Disconnect the
a.
wire
harness
terminals at the
terminal screws of the modular units that make up the
k
colbhsurb
assembly.
Remove the screws, nuts, and washers securing
assembly to its mounting bracket.
b.
SLIP RINa ASSY
the modular brush
Remove the
c.
assembly retaining
and
screws
separate the modules and spacer.
t-
~I
Replace
d.
1132 MIN
3/32 MAx
II
each module with another of the
same
part number, The part number is etched into the surface of

the
plastic housing.
Restack the modules and spacers
e,
as
necessary.
If there is interference between
adjacent ring terminals,

reposition one module with the terminal on the opposite side
of the brush module assembly.
f.
Install the assembly screws so that the screwhead
in the recess in the spacer, place the flat washer
between the star washer and modular housing and install
fits
THRUST BEARING PLATE
assembly is square before

in place.
Place the modular brush assembly on the
g.
mounting bracket and insert the mounting screws through
the
eRusn MODULE ASSY
Propeller Deicer Brush Module (B.

Figure 5
F.
retaining
tightening
3e240e
of the
screw
REPLACEMENT(B.F. Goodrlchl
assembly is made up of two modules,

consisting of a plastic housing with an integral brush
and spring. These modular units are stacked with a spacer
held together by screws to produce the modular brush
assembly,
The modular brush
each
and
Before
one
brush
wears
only 3/8 inch of brush

containing the brush should
where
to
material remains, the module

be replaced. When 1/4 inch of brush remains, the brush
NOTE
During
measurement
being
only
1/16 inch of brush
from the brush module, this

the normal protrusion when the brush is
should
protrude
installed
on
the
retaining
nut.
retainer nuts, make
am
sure
that
the
between the brush module spacer and the mounting bracket

until the brushes are properly aligned with the approximate
center of the
i.
slip ring.
retaining washers and nuts, making
Install the
t
1/32 inch is maintained between the
slip ring surface. To prevent damage

brushes, the modular brush assembly should be
brush modules and the

to the
angled so that the brushes contact the slip rings at an angle

approximately two degrees from perpendicular, as
measured toward the direction of slip ring rotation as shown
in Figure 5.
Reconnect the "B", and "C" terminals of the
j.
airplane system wire harness to the same designated
terminals of the modular brush assembly. Ensure that the
adjacent ring terminals are not touching.
of
replaced,
module MUST be
under the
installing the
aligned with
certain that 1/16

When
screws
slip rings such that the

entire brush face contacts the copper ring. If the brushes do
not align with the slip rings throughout the entire 360
degrees of slip ring rotation, install shims (P/N 1E1157)
the brushes
BRUSH IIAODULE
assembly
both the block and bracket. One washer fits under the head
Goodrich)
h.
nut. Make sure the
the
airplane.
DEICEFI TIME~ CHECK
Brush wear is determined by inserting a pin into a hole in

the back of the brush module, On all modules having
brushes with rods, the brush module should be replaced
when the
replaced
pin
be inserted 15/64 inch and MUST be
can
when the
pin
can
brushes,
pin
can
proceed
be inserted 1 9/64 inches. To

as
in the field has indicated that often the timer is

source
of the trouble lies
elsewhere. For this reason, the following test should be

performed before the timer is removed as defective:
be inserted 19/64 inch. On the
rodless brushes, the module should be replaced when the

pin can be inserted 1-5/64 inches and MUST be replaced
when the
Experience
considered defective when the
follows:
replace
the
a.
With the
wiring
harness disconnected at the timer,
and the deicer switch in the ON

from
pin
B of the harness
plug
present, the timer is NOT
at
position, check the voltage

to ground. if no voltage is
fault; however, if system
3060-00
Page9
A6
Oct7/63
BEECHCRAFT
BONANZA SERIES
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
voltage is present at pin B, check the circuit from harness

plug pin G to ground with an ohmmeter. If no circuit is
indicated, the fault is in the ground lead rather than in the
timer. If ground connection is open, the timer step switch will
not change position,
After the ground and power circuits have been
b.
checked, connect a jumper wire from pin B of the timer
receptacle to terminal B of the connector plug and from pin
G of the timer receptacle to ground. With the deicing system
switch ON, check the voltage to ground from pin B of the
timer. The voltmeter should indicate bus voltage. Next,
check the DC voltage to ground from pin C or pin O on
serials 0-10404 and after, CE-1024and after, E-2069 and
after, and EA-378 and after; it should indicate bus voltage
for 90 seconds,
seconds,
zero
volts for 90 seconds, bus
voltage
90
Before this test
can
be
performed,
the
jumper
so
replaced in
perform this
ON while the
they
are
wire installed
test: one in the
outside feels the deicer boots to see if

properly. The man in the cabin observes
man
heating
needle should deflect every 90 seconds in

response to the switching action of the timer. Each time this
occurs, the man in the cockpit must notify the man
ammeter
the
propeller deicer boots
so
that the latter
can
check the proper heating sequence of the propeller deicer

boots (the entire boot will either heat or cool, depending on
sequence). If any irregularities are detected, a

continuity check should be performed on the wiring from the
timer to the brush module holder and the propeller deicer
the timer
terminal connections.
CAUTION
While
following
TEST" section,
forth to prevent
slip ring.
(B.F.
Goodrich)
To check for
module,
to
short circuit,
measure
or
high
resistance in the brush
the resistance from the face of the brush
its terminal studs
or
receptacle pin
If this resistance measures
the
locate and
repair
resistance
measures
cause
zero,
with
over
low range
0.013 ohm,
of excessive resistance. If the

locate
and correct the open
replace the module. Check the resistance between

the terminal studs or receptacle pins. This resistance should
not be less than 0.5 meg-ohm.
or
the timer
the ammeter for the proper readings (2-bladed: 8-12 amps,

3-bladed: 14-80 amps) throughout the timing sequence. The
inspecting
BF~USH MODULE I~ESISTANCE CHECK
that the connector
receptacle. Two men are

cockpit to monitor
the ammeter; the other outside by the prop to check the
deicer boots. The man in the cockpit turns the deicer system
be
moved.
circuit
for the timer test must be removed

to
moving the propeller, make certain that

ignition switch is off and that the engine has
cooled completely. There is always some
danger of a cylinder firing when the propeller is
Before
the
ohmmeter.
etc.
NEA T TEST
plug can
required
WARNING
the instructions of the "HEAT

move
arcing
the
propeller
back and
between the brushes and
SL/P R/NG ALIGNMENT
(BF. Goodr~h)
slip rings- are properly aligned when they run in a true

plane relative to the brush module. This condition may be
checked by attaching a dial indicator gage to the front of the
engine crankshaft housing in such a manner that a reading
of the slip ring wobble may be obtained. To avoid error in
readings, rotate the slip rings slowly while pushing in on the
propeller to take the play out of the thrust bearings. If the
total run-out over 360 degrees of rotation exceeds 0.005
inch, or 0.002 inch for any 4-inch are, the slip rings should
be aligned as follows:
The
Approximately a 0.012 inch adjustment may be

slip ring wobble by varying the torque
on the attachment bolts. Using the dial indicator to follow the
points of maximum deviation, adjust the slip ring assembly
to the prescribed run-out limits by varying the torque of the
mounting bolts as required within a range of 40 to 100 inchpounds.
If more than 0.012 inch of adjustment is required
b.
for alignment, the slip ring assembly may be shimmed to
within the prescribed limits for true running by the addition of
AN960C416L washers on the mounting bolts between the
slip ring assembly and the spinner bulkhead. If necessary,
fabricate thinner shims to the AN960 size. Again the torque
a.
made to correct the
may be varied
as
in step "a".
30-60-00
page
10
Oct 7/83
A6
BEECHCRAFT
BONANZA SERIES
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
TORQUE 12-14 IN-LB
NOTE
TORQUE TO 20 TO 30 IN-LB
AN960-PD10L WASHER
(USE AS REQUIRED FOR
If, in machining, the solder or braze connection

the underside of the slip ring is exposed,
replacement of the slip ring assembly will be
CORRECT SPACING)
TORQUE 8 TO 10 IN-LB
.01
on
necessary.
AIRCRAFT WIRING
BRUSH BLOCK BRACKET
sdUSH
BLOCK ASSY
,LENclNE
BRUSH WEAR LIMITS
(McCauleyl
(FigUre 7)
CFIANK CASE
The brushes may be checked for

methods.
wear
by
of the
one
following
PROPELLER MOUNTING BOLT
SLIP RING ASSY
PROPELLER HUB
ON THE AIRPLANE
36-251-5
insert
a.
thin stiff feeler gage into the slot
on
the
side of the brush block.
Propeller Deicer
Brush Module
Figure
(McCauley)
If it goes
~dS1
need
past the back of the brushes the brushes
replaced.
REMOVED FROM tHE AIRPLANE

NOTE
Insert
a.
thin stiff feeler gage into the slot on the

past the back of the brushes.
side of the brush block

The
adjustments may affect the

slip
rings; consequently, after slip ring alignment, a
above
clearance between the brush module and
check should
be
made to ascertain
that
Gently push
b.
c.
outside
the brushes into the brush block.
If any brush has .094 inch brush

the brush block, that brush
less remaining
assembly needs
or
replaced.
distance of from 1/32 to 3/32 inch is maintained

between the brush module and
slip ring surface

BRUSH REPL4CEMEN~
(see Figure 5).
(McCauleyl
(Figure 7)
SLIP FIING MACHINING ie.F Good~ch)
a.
Slip rings
which have
damaged surfaces, but
roughened
structurally sound, can be machined and restored
to serviceability. Remove the slip ring assembly from the
airplane and mount it in a lathe. Position it concentrically in
which
or
are
the lathe, with not bver 0.002 inch wobble

360
or run-out over
degrees rotation. Take light cuts for a smooth finish and

deeper than required to remove surface damage,
contact surfaces of the slip rings must be parallel within
cut no
The
0.005 inch, and flat within 0.005 inch overall. Deviation from
flat is not to exceed 0.002 inch over a 4 inch are. If
necessary, undercut the insulation between the slip rings to
a depth of 0.020 to 0.030 inch below the contact surface of
the
slip rings.
In this
NOT be reduced
operation, width of the slip ring MUST
more
than 0.005 inch. Contact surfaces of
slip rings must have a finish of 29-35 microinches.

slip nng edges and reinstall in the airplane and
align.
the
Deburr the
Remove the
brush
block from the
engine
as
indicated in BRUSH BLOCK REMOVAL.

b.
Remove the two
screws
in the back of the brush
block.
Pull the brush holder and brushes from the brush

c.
block. Discard the brush holder and brushes.
d.
sliding
sliding
e.
Replace
the brush holder into
Install the two
place. Torque
f.
ensure
g.
the brushes and brush holder
the brushes into the slots of the brush
by first
block,then
place.
screws
which hold the holders in
the screws to 20 to 24
inch-pounds.
Push the brushes back into the brush block to

that they spring back freely.
If
the
brushes bind, loosen the
screws
reposition the brush holders so the brushes ride freely

slots. Torque the screws to 20 to 24 inch-pounds.
h.
Install the brush block
BLOCK INSTALLATION.
as
and
in the
indicated in BRUSH
30-60-00
Page
A6
11
Oct7/83
BEECHCRAFT
BONANZA SERIES
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
.094 1 NCH
MINIMUM
\O
a
FEELER GAGE
BRUSH WEAR MEASUREMENT
~T43
BRUSH BLOCK
DISASSEMBLY
BRUSH AND HOLDER

ASSEMBLY
TORQUE 20 to 24 INCH
POUNDS
36-251-6
Brush Block
Assembly (NlcCauley)
Figure 7
30-60-00
Page
la
Oct7/83
As
BEECHCRAFT
BONANZA SERIES
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
(McCauleyl
BRUSH BLOCK REMOVAL
SLIP RING MACHINING
a.
Disconnect the lead wires from the terminal
b.
Disconnect the brush block
remove
the brush block from the
mounting
engine.
strip.
screws
and
sound
Structurally
(McCauley)
slip rings with damaged surfaces may

serviceability.
be
machined to restore
a.
ring assembly with methyl ethyl

machining.
Check the assembly mounting surface flatness. It
Clean the slip
ketone before
BRUSH BLOCK INSTALLATION
(McCauleyl
b.
must be flat within .005 inch overall.
(Figure B)
c.
a.
Install the brush block
screws, but do not
b.
Add
block
with
the
engine with
the two
(see Figure 6)
to the brush
until each entire brush is in contact
Position the brush block
of rotation.
on
the
mounting
bracket
that the distance between the brush block and the face of
.015 inch,
slip rings is .064
the
d.
Tighten
SLIP RING
the
assembly concentrically
Locate the
that there is
than .002 inch wobble
no more
in
lathe
so
or run-out over
360" of rotation. The assembly should be fixed in the lathe in
screws.
shims
mounting
its slip ring throughout 360~
screws
c.
so
the
tighten
or remove
on
the
This will
assembly.
the assembly
propeller.
d.
as
manner
same
it
ensure
was
attached to the
that run-out held while
propeller
machining
will be transferred when it is mounted
Take
light
cut for a smooth finish
(25
on
the
to 20 micro
inches).
screws.
(McCauley)
NOTE
retorqued
slip rings the mounting
shims added to correct wobble or nonconcentric rotation.
Wear or slight wobble may be removed by machining.
bolts
On these
can not
be
or
The
spindle speed
should
be
500
rpm
greater. If machine vibration is noticed, it
or
must
be corrected. Machine vibration which is not

corrected will result in a chattered finish. Feed
rate is to be .002 inch or less with a final pass of
NOTE
.005 inch to .010 inch.
Friction from the brushes will

wear
pattern
on
the
cause a concave
slip rings.
This does not

Ensure that the face surface of the slip rings are
and flat within .008 overall.
f.
The slip ring holder face and the insulation around
and between the slip rings must be undercut to .050 inch to
necessitate replacement or machining unless

rapid brush wear is encountered. When a new
brush assembly is installed on dip rings with
normal wear,
without
the brushes will
degradation
SLIP RING ALIGNMENT
of
operation
rapidly
or
a.
parallel
seat
.060 inch
service life.
(McCauley)
chattering or screeching noise is heard coming from the

block/slip ring area, the probable cause is improper
brush block-toslip ring alignment. A chattering or
screeching detected while turning the propeller tin the
normal direction of rotation) by hand should be corrected
immediately. If the chattering or screeching is heard above
idling engine noise;the problem is severe. Repositioning the
brush block as indicated in Figure 7 should correct the
problem.
If
(Figure 8).
CAUTION
brush
SLIP RING OR BRUSH BLOCK CLEANING
(McCauley)
undercutting the insulation between the

slip rings, do not cut the inside diameters or the
outside diameters of the slip rings more than
.003 inch past the original diameters.
When
g.
h.
clean
Polish the
slip ring edges.

ring faces with crocus
cloth to obtain
finish of 16 to 22 microinches.
i.
slip rings and brush block may be cleaned with

cloth dampened with methyl ethyl ketone.
The
Deburr the
Check the electrical resistance between each ring

ring. The resistance
and the holder .and between each

should be
minimum of 50K ohms.
30-60-00
Page
A6
13
Oct 7/83
BEECHCRAFT
BONANZA SERIES
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
MACHINE EPOXY AND SLIP RING

HOLDER IN AREAS SHOWN TO
OBTAIN A TOTAL UNDERCUT OF .050" TO .060".
rCI-:
050
.060
,-Z1
.435
f-
AFTER MACHINING OF SLIP RING FACES
CA IjTION
WHEN UNDERCUTTING INSULATION BETWEEN RINGS,
DO NOT CUT INSIDE AND OUTSIDE DIAMETERS OF
SLIP RINGS MORE THAN .003" PAST THE ORIGINAL
UNDERCUT DIAMETERS.
36-251-7
Slip Ring Machining (McCauley)

Figure 8
~SI
"END"
3060-00
Page
14
Oc17/83
A6
CHAPTER
LANDING GEAR
Raylheon Aircraft
CHAPTER 32
LANDING GEAR
TABLE OF CONTENTS
SUBJECT
PAGE
32-00-00
Description
General
Landing
Gear
and
Operation
System
Optional Landing Gear Safety System
Troubleshooting
Landing
Gear Electrical
System
32-1 0-00
Main Gear and Doors

Main
Gear
Landing
Servicing
Lubrication
Main
Landing
Main
Landing Gear
Main
Landing
Main
Gear Removal
Installation
Gear Overhaul
Landing
Main Gear
Gear
Disassembly
Cleaning, Replacement
Parts and
Repairs
Cleaning
Replacement
Parts
Repairs
Main
Landing Gear Assembly
32-20-00
Nose Gear and Doors
Nose Gear Shock Strut
Lubrication
Nose Gear Removal
Nose Gear Installation
Nose Gear Overhaul
Nose Gear
Disassembly
Nose Gear
Cleaning, Replacement
Parts and
Repairs
Cleaning
Replacement
A21
Parts
32-CONTENTS
Dec
23/99Page
Raytheon Aircraft
CHAPTER 32
LANDING GEAR

SUBJECT
PAGE
Repairs
Nose Gear
10
Shimmy Damper Servicing
Nose Gear
Nose Gear
Assembly
12
Shimmy Damper
Removal
12
Nose Gear
Shimmy Damper
Installation
12
Nose Gear
Shimmy Damper Overhaul
12
Nose Gear
Shimmy Damper Disassembly
Nose Gear
Shimmy Damper Cleaning, Replacement
12
Parts and
Repairs
Cleaning
13
13
Replacement
Parts
13
Repairs
15
Nose Gear
Shimmy Damper Assembly
Nose Gear Retract Mechanism

Nose Gear Retract Brace
16
Servicing
Assembly
Check
18
(E-1103
and After; E-l thru E-l 102 With Kit 35-4012-1
Installed)
18
32-30-00
Lubrication
Manual
1
1
Gear Extension
Landing
System
Landing
Gear Actuator
Landing
Gear Actuator
Landing
Gear Motor Removal
Landing
Gear Motor Installation
Dynamic
Brake
Landing
Gear
Landing
Gear
Relay
Assembly
Removal
Assembly
Installation
Check
Dynamic
Brake
Dynamic
Brake
Landing
Main
Landing Gear Retract
Rigging
Landing
Cleaning
Retract Actuator
Assembly
23/99
Relay
Installation
3
3
5
Retract Actuator
ceD2
Rod Installation
Disassembly
Page
Relay
Gear
Retract Actuator
Landing
Removal
Gear Retract Rod Removal
Main
the
.......................................................................................i........................
and Parts
10
Replacement
Gear Retract Actuator Functional Test
32 -CO NTE NTS
12
12
13
A21
RayiIhcoM Aircraft
CHAPTER 32
LANDING GEAR
TABLE OF CONTENTS (CONTI1JUED)

SUBJECT
Landing
PAGE
Gear
Check of
Safety System
Landing
Gear
Maintenance and
Safety System
With
Adjustment
Safety
Landing
Gear
Safety System
Microcircuit
Landing
Gear
Safety System
Pressure Switch
14
Switch in Test Position
14
Adjustment
14
Adjustment
14
32-40-00
Wheels and Brakes
Description
and
Operation
Main Wheel Assemblies
Nose Wheel
Assembly
Tires
Brake
Assembly
Shuttle Valve
Brake Wear and Wear Limits
Hydraulic
Brake
Troubleshooting
System
Brake
Wheels and Brakes
System
Wheel And Tire Maintenance
Main Wheel And Brake
Assembly
Main Wheel
And
Brake
Inspection
Assembly Inspection
Main Wheel And Brake
Removal
Cleaning
And
Cleaning
Assembly
Installation
Nose Wheel Removal

Nose Wheel
Inspection
And
Cleaning
Nose Wheel Installation
Relining
The Brakes
Cylinder
Removal
Brake Master
Cylinder
Installation
.Brake Master
Cylinder Linkage Adjustment
Brake Master
Cylinder Disassembly
Brake Master
Cylinder Cleaning
Brake Master
Cylinder Assembly
A21
Brake Master
And Parts
Replacement
6
7
Parking
Brake Valve Removal
Parking
Brake Valve Installation
32-CONTENTS
Dec
23/9 Page
Ray~heon Aircraft
CHAPTER 32
LANDING GEAR

PAGE
SUBJECT
Parking
Brake Valve
Adjustment
Parking
Brake Valve
Disassembly
Parking
Brake
Parking
Brake Valve
Bleeding
Cleaning
The Brake
And Parts
Replacement
Assembly
System
Gravity Bleeding
Pressure Pot
Electric
Bleeding
12
Bleeding
12
32-50-00
Steering
Nose Wheel Travel
Stop Adjustment
32-60-00
Position And
Landing
Warning
Gear Position
Light Adjustment
Main Gear
Nose Gear
Landing Gear Warning Switch Adjustment (CE-748,
Engine-Compartment-Located
CE-772 thru
CE-1300, CE-1302 thru CE-1306; CJ-149 thru CJ-179; D-10097, D-10120 and After; E-llll, E-l 241
thru E-2110, Except E-1946 and E-2104; EA-1 thru EA-388, Except EA-320)
Landing Gear Warning
Switch
Adjustment (CE-1301, CE-1307
and
After; CJ-180 and After)

Pedestal-Located
Landing
Gear
Warning
Switch
Adjustment (E-1946, E-2104,
E-2111 and After;
EA-320, EA-389 and After)
After)
Landing
Gear Retract-Prevent Switch
Adjustment (CE-1301,
Landing
Gear
Warning
Switch
Adjustment (E-2458,
EA-320, EA-389 and After)
Page
ceD4
23/99
CE-1307
6
and After; CJ-180 and

Pedestal-Located
32-CO NTE NTS
E-2468 and After;

7
A21
Raytheon Aircraft
CHAPTER 32
LANDING GEAR
32-Effectivity
32-Contents
32-00-00
32-10-00
32-20-00
A21
PAGE
DATE
Dec 23/99
Dec 23/99
Dec 23/99
Dec 23/99
Dec 23/99
Dec 23/99
Dec 23/99
Nov 16/94
Nov 16/94
Nov 16/94
Dec 23/99
Dec 23/99
Dec 23/99
Dec 23/99
Dec 23/99
Dec 23/99
Dec 23/99
Dec 23/99
Dec 23/99
10
Dec 23/99
11
Dec 23/99
12
Dec 23/99
Dec 23/99
Dec 23/99
Dec 23/99
Dec 23/99
Dec 23/99
Dec 23/99
Dec 23/99
Dec 23/99
32-EFFECTIVITY
Dec
23/9 Page
Ray~heon Aircraft
CHAPTER 32
LANDING GEAR
LIST OF PAGE EFFECTIVITY (CONTINUED)

PAGE
32-30-00
32-40-00
Dec
23/9Page
32-EFFECTIVITY
DATE
Dec 23/99
10
Dec 23/99
11
Dec 23/99
12
Dec 23/99
13
Dec 23/99
14
Dec 23/99
15
Dec 23/99
16
Dec 23/99
17
Dec 23/99
18
Dec 23/99
19
Dec 23/99
20
Dec 23/99
21
Dec 23/99
Dec 23/99
Dec 23/99
Dec 23/99
Dec 23/99
Dec 23/99
Dec 23/99
Dec 23/99
Dec 23/99
Dec 23/99
10
Dec 23/99
11
Dec 23/99
12
Dec 23/99
13
Dec 23/99
14
Dec 23/99
15
Dec 23/99
16
Dec 23/99
Nov 16/94
Nov 16/94
Nov16/94
Nov16/94
A21
Raylheon Aircraft
CHAPTER 32
LANDING GEAR
LIST OF PAGE EFFECTIVln/ (CONTINUED)

32-50-00
32-60-00
A21
PAGE
DATE
Nov16/94
Nov 16/94
Nov 16/94
Nov 16/94
Nov16/94
10
Nov16/94
11
Nov 16/94
12
Nov16/94
13
Nov16/94
Nov 16/94
Nov 16/94
Nov16/94
Nov 16/94
Nov 16/94
Nov 16/94
Nov 16/94
Nov 16/94
32-EFFECTIVITY
Dec
23/99Page
Qeec~craR
BONANZA SERIES
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
GENERAL-DESCRIPTION AND
OPERATION
LANDING GEAR SYSTEM
The
landing gears are operated through adjustable

linkage connected to an actuator assembly mounted
beneath the front seats. The actuator assembly is
driven by an electric motor controlled by the landing
gear position switch mounted on the right or left subpanel
and limit switches mounted
assembly.
uator
The
switches and actuator
removing
The
adjacent
landing
assembly
landing gear may be used to

drag. Should disorientation occur
under instrument conditions, the lowering of the landing gear will reduce the tendency for excessive speed
buildup. This procedure would also be appropriate for
a noninstrument-rated rated pilot who unavoidably
In
emergency, the
an
create additional
to the act-
gear motor, limit

are accessible by
encounters instrument conditions
cies such
as severe
tion of the gear doors is
essay.
CAUTION
Never tow
landing
brief
gear position switch, limit switches, safety

switches, and motor circuit breaker. The push button
for resetting the landing gear motor circuit breaker is
located in the
When the
position,
right subpanel.
gear switch is placed in the UP

the circuit is completed to two safety
located
one
on
the
right
up-winding
jacks,
if the
of the
the left main gear, the other

main gear. If the safety switches
on
complete
the circuit to the
landing
airplane
gear motor, as would be the

were airborne or supported on
the
landing gear motor will run until the landing

gear is fully retracted and the uplimit switch is actuated, breaking the circuit to the landing gear motor.
When the landing gear position switch is placed in the
DOWN position, the circuit is completed to the downwindings of the landing gear motor, and the motor will
operate until the landinggear has been fully extended
and the downlimit switch actuated, breaking the circuit
to the landing gear motor. To prevent overtravel of the
gear, the dynamic brake relay simultaneously breaks
the power to the motor and makes a complete circuit
through the armature and the opposite field winding.
The motor then acts as a generator and the resulting
electrical load
on
strut
or
towing
taxi with
or
flat strut. Even

a deflated
with
taxiing
damage.
can cause severe
OPTIONAL LANDING GEAR SAFETY
landing
have been actuated to

case
speeds higher
special inspecrequired, with repair as nec-
the front seats.
gear may be electrically retracted and

extended and may also be lowered manually in an
emergency. The landing gear circuit consists of the
located
in other emergen-
Should the landing gear be used at

than the maximum extension speed, a
landing
switches,
or
turbulence.
the armature stops the gear almost
instantly.
SYSTEM
optional landing gear safety system functions

through the action of a solenoid in the landing gear
position switch in conjunction with a three-position
safety system switch, a relay and diode, two pressure
The
switches mounted
wheel well, and
throttle position
on
the inboard side of the left main
adjacent to the existing

engine compart-
microswitch
warning
switch in the
me"t.
Each pressure switch is connected into the pitot and

static system. The pressure switch in the gear-up circult is actuated by the pressure differential that exists
pitot and static air system and will close

increasing pressure at approximately 90 mph
between the
with
IAS.
When
speed of 90 mph
landing gear position
an
with the
air
IAS has been attained

switch in the UP
posi-
tion, the pressure switch in the gear-up circuit closes

and actuates
relay
mounted
on
the
right-hand
instru-
panel support, thus completing the circuit and

retracting the landing gear. A diode locks the relay in
ment
position until the retraction cycle is compreceding to occur, the microswitch in

pleted.
the engine compartment must also be in the open
position. This microswitch is actuated by the throttle
control when the throttle is advanced sufficiently for
the manifold pressure gage to register approximately
18 inches Hg. Conversely, if the throttle is retarded
beyond the position corresponding to approximately
the closed
CAUTION
Do not
change
switch to
the
position
For the
of the control
the direction of the

landing gear while the gear is in transit
as this could cause damage to the
reverse
retract mechanism.
32-00-00
Page
A17
Nov 16/94
~echcraft
BONANZA SERIES
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
18 inches of
Hg
NOTE
in manifold pressure, the microswitch

speed has dropped below 120 mph
will close. If the air
IAS at the
The throttle switch is set at the
time the microswitch closes, the

resultant pressure differential between the pitot and
static system will actuate the pressure switch in the
gear-down circuit. When both the microswitch and the
same
thus
completing the
to
token, the landing gear will automatically
The
airspeed
following conditions:
must have
dropped below
120
mph
IAS.
landing gear position switch is placed in the UP

position while the landing gear safety system is in the
ON position, the landing gear will retract only when
the following conditions are mutually fulfilled:
The
airplane must have attained

least 90 mph IAS.
an
air
The throttle
enough
approximately
must have been
18 inches
retarded
dropped
below
Hg.
safety system switch is a three-position switch

normally ON or OFF positions. The switch also
contains a momentary or test position for checking
that the system is functioning properly. When released
from the test position, the switch returns to the ON
position.
The
of at
speed
setting
for manifold pressure to have
with
The throttle
ficiently
mately 18
same
extend under the
If the
to
the
By
pressure switch close, the current flow through the

solenoid will cause the landing gear position switch to
drop into the DOWN position,

gear-down circuit.
factory
close when an approximate manifold

pressure of 18 inches Hg is produced at
about 3000 feet of altitude.
setting must have been advanced sufproduce a manifold pressure of approxiinches Hg.
TROUBLESHOOTING
LANDING GEAR ELECTRICAL SYSTEM
INDICATION
1. Motor fails to shut off when gear
is retracted.
fails to retract.
2.
REMARKS
PROBABLE CAUSE
a.
Uplimit
a.
b. Defective switch.
b.
switch not
a.
a.
Saf
b. U
3. Motor fails to shut off when gear
switch is out of
Readjust
switch.
ustment
a.
switch.
switch.
limit switch.
b. R
it switch
Downlimit switch does not open.
a.
limit switch.
Readjust
extended.
b. Defective Downlimit switch,
4.
Landing
gear actuator is
hitting
a.
Limit switch out of
switch.
b.
adjustment.
a.
working.
c.
limit switch.
Readjust
internal
c.
Dynamic
switch.
b.
b. Limit switch is i
brake is not
Check for
brake
rela
5.
Warning
horn
inoperative
or
a.
Open
or
grounded
circuit.
a.
Tri
circuit breaker.
b.t)ownlimit switches open.
7.
Landing gear
extend.
will not retract
or
c.
Open circuit
d.
Landing gear
a.
Bad electrical connection.
motor
inoperative dynamic
high resistence in
or
circuit.
Check
continuity.
b. Check and
b. Throttle switches i
fails to extend,
6.
a.
relay
inoperative.
a.
ust as
Reset circuit breaker.
b. Check downlimit switch. The

downlimit switch should be closed
retracted.
with the
c. Run a continuity check on the
downlimit switch.
d. Check brushes, overhaul
motor.
or
a continuity check from

to switch.
breaker
circuit
a.
Run
32-00-00
Page
Nov 16/94
A17
Qeeclact~ft
BONANZA SERIES
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
TROUBLESHOOTING
LANDING GEAR ELECTRICAL SYSTEM
(Continued)
RENIARKS
PROBABLE CAUSE
INDICATION
b.
Landing
gear motor not
b. Check motor
ground.
rounded.
c.
Defective control circuit.
d.
Landing
gear motor
inoperative.
c.
Check items 1 thr
3.
d. Check brushes overhaul
or
replace.
32-00-00
Page
A17
Nov 16/94
Rayllheon Aircraft
MAIN GEAR AND DOORS
MAIN LANDING GEAR SERVICING

Service the main
gear. Refer to
landing
Chapter 12-20-00,
SHOCK STRUTS.
LUBRICATION
Lubricate the main wheel
bearings
and grease
fittings. Refer to Chapter 12-20-00,
LUBRICATION SCHEDULE.
MAIN LANDING GEAR REMOVAL

When
removing
reassembly.
the
landing
gear, take
a.
With the
b.
Disconnect the outboard
c.
Disconnect the inboard
d.
Unsnap
e.
Open
f.
Disconnect the
hydraulic
g.
Disconnect the
safety
h.
Remove the bolt
i.
Remove the
taining
airplane
the
jacks,
landing
cylinder
remove
Remove the brace
k.
Lower the main gear
landing
at the rod-end
original adjustments
gear until the inboard door is in the
door from the
gear door
actuating
landing
fittings
to facilitate
fully open position.
gear strut.
rod at the forward door
uplock assembly
hinge.
from the strut.
bleed ports and pump all fluid from the system.

lines where the flexible hose
couples
to the
tubing
on
the
landing
gear.
switch wire.
the lift
leg
to the strut.
door in the lower surface of the
the nut. The
j.
to preserve the
and disconnect the
attaching
access
retract the
landing gear
canvas cover
the brake
nut and
on
care
hinge
rear
strut brace
wing leading edge for access to the forward hinge

hinge bolt is accessible by lowering the flap.
bolts and associated hardware which attach the main gear to the front and
assembly from the airplane, being careful
not to bend the skin at the
rear
bolt
re-
spars.
edge of the wheel well.
MAIN LANDING GEAR INSTALLA TION

a.
Carefully position
the main
landing
gear
assembly
in
place against
b.
Align the hinge bolt holes and install the bushings, bolts,
pounds. Install new cotter pins.
the front and
washers and nuts.
rear
spars.
Torque each
nut to 250-690 inch-
NOTE
Install 100951-S-016-XF
the front and
or
100951-S-032-XF washers
as
required
between the
landing gear and

placement of
spars to maintain a maximum total clearance of 0.016 inch. The

these washers at the front or rear may help align the lift leg.
c.
Install the
d.
Install the bolt
nzl
access
rear
door in the lower
attaching
the lift
leg
wing leading edge.
to the strut.
32-10-00
Ral~heon Aircraft
NOTE
the nut
Overtightening
on
the bolt that connects the lift
attaching point. Torque
distort the strut
leg to the shock

inch-pounds.
strut
can
bind the strut
or
the nut to 25 to 75
landing gearsafetyswitchwire.
e.
Connectthe
f.
Connect the brake
g.
Connect the
line.
hydraulic
uplock assembly to the
strut and snap the
canvas cover
in
place.
CAUTION 1
IcnuTloN
The
bolt must be installed with the head of the bolt pointing aft. This is to avoid
uplock cable attach
interference between the bolt and the
stringer
in the main gear wheel well
as
the
landing
gear is
refracted.
h.
Connect the inboard

Install the outboard
j.
landing
landing
gear door
actuating rod
gear door to the
landing
to the forward door
hinge.
gear strut.
Bleed the brake.
CAUTION I
I cnuTlon
Excessive
landing
k.
operation of
the
gear motor. Allow
Operate the landing
landing
short
gear motor without proper cooling may cause damage to the

time after each extension and retraction cycle.
cooling
gear and check for proper
rigging
of the
uplock
and doors.
MAIN LANDING GEAR OVERHAUL
NOTE
Refer to the OVERHAUL AND REPLACEMENT SCHEDULE in
maintenance checks of the main
landing
Chapter 5-10-00 for time
limits and
gear.
Experience in the field indicates the points of greatest wear on the main landing gear are the upper and lower bearings in the cylinder assembly. The wear caused on the bearings during takeoff, landing and taxiing tend to result in
an oversized condition. The oversized condition of the upper bearing in the cylinder assembly will result in leakage
of hydraulic fluid through the upper bearing and O-ring. This will eventually cause fluid to seep down through the felt
pad and out the lower bearing.
replacement of the scraper ring and all O-rings in the cylinder assembly fails to stop leaks, the oversized condition of the bearings is probable. In such instances the landing gear should be overhauled. The following information will aid in determining the extent of landing gear wear and whether it is possible to overhaul or necessary to
replace critical landing gear components.
When
Page
32-10-00
Raytheon Aircraft
MAIN LANDING GEAR ~ISASSEMBLY
FIGURE 1
WARNING
JW~RNINO)
begin
Do not
any
disassembly
of the main
landing
gear until all air pressure has been
re-
leased.
gear in
vertical
a.
Place the
b.
Release the air pressure from the
c.
To prevent
d.
Remove the main wheel and brake
landing
damage,
remove
all
position
to
prevent hydraulic fluid from spilling.
cylinder assembly (9) by depressing
hydraulic plumbing, safety

assembly.
Refer to
the valve
core
switch components, and
Chapter 32-40-00,
(2).
clamps.
MAIN WHEEL AND BRAKE ASSEM-
BLY REMOVAL.
Remove the retaining ring (5)
e.
cylinder assembly (9).
f.
Invert the
g.
Remove the air valve
landing
and retract the lower shock
gear and drain the
push
the orifice tube
(6)
O-ring (7) from
the orifice tube
(6).
assembly (35)
to
out of the
hydraulic fluid.
assembly (3), O-ring (4), piston ring (8)
and
WARNING
IWARNINO)
Do not disconnect the torque knees (23 and 34) without first deflating the cylinder assembly
(9). The torque knees provide the extension stop for the lower shock assembly, and when
disconnected, the shock assembly is free to slide out of the cylinder assembly (9).
h.
Remove the nut, washers, and bolt
i.
and
Remove the upper and lower torque knees

31), retaining pins and cotter pins.
j.
Slide the lower shock
(32) connecting
assembly (35)
(23
out of the
and
the upper torque knee
34) by removing
(23)
to the lower
torque knee (34).
the upper and lower torque knee
pins (21
cylinder assembly (9).
CAUTION 1
I cnuTlon
The scraper seal (27) may become sharp during normal operation of the gear;
ercised to avoid possible injury when removing the scraper seal.
care
should be
ex-
Remove the scraper seal (27), felt pad (26), O-ring and retainer rings (17). The O-ring is located between two
retainers within the cylinder assembly (9). Removal of the O-ring may be simplified by using a hook, manufactured
k.
from music wire. Refer to

i.
(15)
(11).
Disconnect the columns
ings (12)
nn
Figure
from the brace
2.
and brace
(11) from the cylinder assembly (9)
and from each other. Remove bush-
32-10-00
Ray~heon Aircraft
I.
AIR
3.
AIR
4.
5.
6.
8.
9.
10.
i I
12.
13.
14.
VALVE
O-RINGVALVE COREASSEMBLY
VALVE
RETAINER RING
ORIFICE TUBE
0-RING
PISTON RING
CYLINDER ASSEMBLY
BOLT,
CONNECTOR,
BRACE
BUSHINGS
BUSHING
MAIN LANDING
BRACE
15.
16.
17.
CAP
3
4
NUT
GEAR
BOLT
COLUMN
UPPER BEARING
O-RING,
RETAINER
18.
UPPER
LOWER
UPPER
UPPER
RINGS
TOROUE KNEE BUSHING
RETAINER RING
TORQUE KNEE BORE
TORQUE KNEE PIN
2 .19. POTS,GNIRAEB
20.
21.
23.
---n o
24.
25.
26.
27.
UPPER TORQUE KNEE

CENTER TORQUE KNEE BUSHING
UPPER TORQUE KNEE BORE
FELT PAD
RETAINER RING/
SCRAPER SEAL
28.
PISTON
29.
(CHROME PORTION)
LOWER TORQUE
KNEE BUSHING
14
15
i
10
16
3~7
18
14
28
15
30.
31.
32.
33.
34.
35.
36.
37.
OWER TOR~UE KNEE SORE

LOWER TORQUE KNEE PIN
BOLT, WASHERS, NUT,
LOWER TORQUE KNEE BORE
LOWER TORQUE KNEE
LOWER SHOCK ASSEMBLY
BRAZED RETAINING BOLT
AXLE
19
1
24
21
32
34
23
22
11"9
30
DETAIL
3637
35
DETAIL
csarcossPosa c
Main
Dec
32-10-00
31
Landing Gear Assembly

Figure 1
A21
Raytheon Aircraft
.Oba
NuiIC
wlR~ i~3/32
BT
P-
14
----1
DOWEL
5/i6
ROD
BRAZED
BEARING
O-RING
CYLINDER
~DOWEL
ROD
C
C94TC0582194
O-Ring
Removal and Installation
Figure
MAIN GEAR CLEANING, REPLACEMENT PARTS AND REPAIRS

FIGURE 1
CLEANING
Remove all
(16, Chart 1, 91-00-00).
a.
Clean all parts with solvent
b.
Immerse all internal parts in clean
hydraulic fluid (9,
Chart 1,
excess
solvent and
91-00-00) prior
to
wipe dry
after
cleaning.
assembly.
REPLACEE/IENT PARTS
FIGURE 1
a.
Inspect all parts
and assemblies for damage
or
Wear which is greater than the allowable
Damage which
Screws that
Parts that
cannot be corrected
are
are
severely damaged
cracked, chipped
Parts that have corrosion

b.
Replace
the
Cotter
A21
following parts
or
or
or
or
excessive
wear
wear.
following conditions are cause for rejection:
tolerances. Refer to Chart 1.
repaired.
have
stripped, severely
worn or
scored threads.
broken.
other defects that cannot be
when main
The
landing
repaired.
gear is overhauled:
pins
32-1 0-00
Dec
23/9 Page
Raytheon Aircraft
DU
Bushings (12)
Felt Pad
Piston
(26)
Ring (8)
O-Rings (4, 7, 17)

Retainer
Safety
Wire
Scraper
c.
Replace
Rings (5, 17, 19)
the
Seal
(27)
following parts
on
condition when main
landing
gear is overhauled:
Bearings (16, 19)
Bushings (13, 18, 24, 29)

Grease
Fittings
Grommets
Huck Bolt and Collar
Hydraulic
if removed from the upper
(Replace
bearing (16).)
Hoses
Hydraulic Tubing
Safety
Switch
Valve Core
Components
(2)
Wiring
REPAIRS
FIGURE 1
a.
Visually inspect castings for cracks
and
wear.
sively
b.
and
pitting;
Refer to Chart 1 for tolerances to aid in
worn
pitting, nicks, cracks, distortion

Replace all defective and exces-
and finished surfaces for scoring,
determining
the extent of
wear.
parts.
If fluid leaks have been observed
on
top of the air valve assembly (3), check the small O-ring (4) of the valve;
then look for defects in the valve.

c.
If the leak is from the
ring (7)
d.
All
in the orifice tube
parts
or
junction of the orifice

(6).
assemblies may be
Slight scoring
repaired
tube
ii the
of shafts may be corrected
assembly (6)
following
with the
cylinder assembly (9) walls,
check the 0-
conditions exist:
by lapping carefully
with
flat oil stone.
NOTE
Do not exceed 10% of the
component material thickness when removing nicks, burrs
es.
Page
632-1 0-00
and scratch-
NaylINeMM Aircraft
Smooth minor nicks, burrs and scratches.
Those parts that
plating
as
that removed
Minor thread
scratched
are
be
or
replaced
damage,
or
have
with
new
chase to clean
or
may be
plating
worn
stripped
and
replated
with the
same
type of
parts.
smooth.
NOTE
damage requires inspection to determine the depth of penetration and the cross-sectionchange. The damaged area must be thoroughly cleaned and the corrosion must be re(Refer to Chapter 20 for CORROSION MAINTENANCE PRACTICES.) The deterioration
by corrosion or removal of corrosion must not reduce the material thickness of any compo-
Corrosion
al
area
moved.
caused
nent
by
than 10%. Refer to Chart 1 for MAIN LANDING GEAR WEAR TOLERANCES AND
more
INSPECTION PROCEDURES
on
components. For additional information contact the Technical

Company, P.O. Box 85, Wichita, KS 67201.
Support Department
of
Remove corrosion if
applicable, and apply corrosion prevention materials

Type II.
cadmium
plate
Raytheon
Aircraft
as
necessary per MIL-C-5541
or
per Fed QQ-P-416,
Bushings
that check within allowable
When evidence of
damage
wear
tolerances may be reused.
exists to steel parts,
magnetic particle inspect
per MIL-STD-1949.
NOTE
Do not remove paint or primer from the area to be fluorescent or dye penetrant inspected per MILSTD-68~6. If the finish absorbs the penetrant so that bleed out prevents satisfactory inspection or
if a new finish has not cured for at least 30 days, contact the Technical Support Department of Raytheon Aircraft
Company,
When evidence of
P.O. Box 85,
damage
Wichita, KS 67201.
exists to metal parts other than steel, fluorescent penetrant inspect per
MIL-STD-6866, Type I.
Replace damaged
or
unserviceable parts with
new or
serviceable parts.
MAIN LANDING GEAR ASSEMBLY

FIGURE 1
NOTE
Prior to
assembly,
immerse all internal parts
(except
felt
pad (26))
in
hydraulic
fluid
(9,
Chart 1,
91-00-00).
a.
Install the
O-ring
may be used to work
b.
Soak the felt
and
19).
and retainer
O-ring
pad (26)
rings (17)
bearing (16) of the cylinder assembly (9).

position. Refer to Figure 2.
in the upper
and retainers into
in SAE 10W30 oil and install in the
cylinder (9)
between the upper and lower
Slide the scraper seal (27) over the piston (28) and insert the lower shock assembly
Work the scraper seal (27) into the lower end of the cylinder assembly (9) until seated.
c.
pa~
Two dowel rods
(35)
into the
32-10-00
bearings (16
cylinder (9).
Ray~heon Aircraft
d.
Install upper torque knee (23) to the cylinder assembly (9) and lower torque knee (34) to the lower shock assembly. (35) using torque knee pins (21 and 31), retaining pins and cotter pins. Install stop (22) to the upper torque
knee
pin (21). Insert the center torque knee bushing (24)

(32).
and connect the torque knees
(23
and
34) using bolt,
wash-
ers, nut
e.
Lubricate
f.
Install
and nut
bearings
bushings (12)
new
(10).
bly
fluid).
h.
into brace
hydraulic
Install
ring (8)
with grease
(11).
(46, Chart 1, 91-00-00).
Install brace
(15)
(11)
to the brace
onto the
(11)
and
cylinder assembly (9) with bolt, connector

cylinder assembly (9) using main landing
(14).
Raise and block lower shock

with
fittings
Install forward and aft columns
gear brace bolts

g.
at grease
fluid
O-ring (4),
(9,
Chart 1,
valve
core
assembly (35) 1/4 inch from the fully compressed position and fill cylinder assem91-00-00) until the top of piston (28) is covered (approximately 2 pints of hydraulic
(2)
and valve
assembly (3) into orifice tube (6). Assemble the O-ring (7) and piston
cylinder assembly (9). Slowly extend lower shock assembly (35) allowing the
the cylinder assembly (9), then install retainer ring (5).
to orifice tube and install into
suction to
pull orifice
tube down into
WARNING
IWI\RNINO)
As with all
forming
i.
Inflate the
tube
j.
(6)
operations involving equipment under high pressure, exercise

areas directly above and below the strut.
caution when per-
the leak test; avoid the
cylinder assembly (9) to approximately 100 psi using dry air

assembly (3) with soap suds and check for air leaks.
or
nitrogen.
Coat the top of the orifice
and air valve
Release the air pressure; clean the
fresh water and
soapsuds off
the
top of the orifice tube (6) and air valve assembly (3) with
wipe dry.
k.
Install air valve cap
I.
Install all
m.
Install main wheel and brake
(1)
to air valve
assembly.
hydraulic plumbing, safety
switch components and
Refer to
assembly.
clamps.
Chapter 32-40-00,
MAIN WHEEL AND BRAKE ASSEMBLY
INSTALLATION.
n.
Install main
o.
Service the main
Page
landing
gear to the
landing
airplane.
gear. Refer to
32-1 0-00
Refer to MAIN LANDING GEAR INSTALLATION in this
Chapter.
Chapter 12-20-00, SHOCK STRUTS.
nn~
Ray~heon Aircraft
CHART1
MAIN LANDING GEAR WEAR TOLERANCES AND INSPECTION PROCEDURES
ITEM
I.D.
O.D.
WEAR TOLERANCES AND INSPECTION
PROCEDURES
NOTE: Listed below
the tolerances used to
are
determine the extent of
wear
in the main land-
ing gear components. Where pertinent, the

permissible wear limits are given for those
components. All inside-diameter (I.D.) and outside-diameter (O.D.) dimensions are given in
inches. Refer to Figure 1.
Lower Shock
Piston
Assembly (35)
(28)
Chrome Portion
Axle
Visually inspect piston (28), axle (37) and

brazed retaining bolt (36) wear, damage and
corrosion. Any sign of scratches and worn
areas which can not be repaired is cause for
rejection. Conduct a magnetic-particle inspection per MIL-STD-1949. Any sign of cracking is
cause for rejection.
1.602
1.8635
1.593
1.8600
(37)
1.498
1.497
Visually inspect for wear, damage and corrosion. Replace if wear tolerances are exceeded.
Visually inspect for wear, damage and corrosion. Strip and cadmium plate axle as necessary, per Fed QQ-P-416, Type II, Class 2, on
scratched
Upper
and Lower
Knees
(23
and
Torque
or worn areas.
Visually inspect
for wear,
damage and corromagnetic particle inspection

MIL-STD-1949. Any sign of cracks,
34)
sion. Conduct
per
scratches
or worn areas
which
can
not be
repaired is cause for rejection. Remove all

bushings and inspect bores for corrosion.
Replace bushings as needed and cadmium
plate per FED QQ-P-416, Type II, Class 2.
Torque
30)
Knee Bore
(20
and
Bushings (18
and
29)
0.6255
Visually inspect
0.6245
sion.
0.5015
Visually inspect for wear, damage and corrosion. if bushings exceed wear tolerances,
replace with new bushings. Alignment ream
new bushings to specified wear tolerances.
Drill out lubricator holes through bushings and
0.4995
Replace
if
for wear, damage and corrowear tolerances are exceeded.
install lubricators.
nnl
32-1 0-00
Dec
23/9 Page
Raylheon Aircraft
CHART1
ITEM
I.D.
O.D.

PROCEDURES
Knee Pins
(21
and
31)
0.4990
0.4980
Visually inspect for wear, damage and corrosion. Any sign of scratches or worn areas
which can not be repaired is cause for rejection. If
no
visible
wear
is evident, conduct mag-
particle inspection per MIL-STD-1949.

Any sign of cracks is cause for rejection.
Replace if wear tolerances are exceeded.
netic
Torque Knee Center Hinge

Joint
Bore
(Upper) (25)
0.4440
Inspect for wear, damage and corrosion.

Replace if wear tolerances are exceeded.
0.4370
Bushing (24)
Bore
(Lower) (33)
0.3150
0.4360
0.3120
0.4330
0.3195
0.3125
Orifice
Assembly (6)
1.560
1.557
which can not be repaired is cause for rejection. Check the orifice O.D. does not exceed
wear
tolerances. Check that orifice hole does
not exceed 0.187/0.177 inch. Cadmium
plate
necessary except for ring groove in orifice

head, per Fed QQ-P-416, Type I, Class 2.
as
Cylinder Assembly (9)
Visually inspect for wear, damage and corrosion. Any sign of cracks, scratches or worn
areas which can not be repaired is cause for
rejection.
If
fluorescent
no
visible
wear
is evident, conduct
dye penetrant inspection per

MIL-STD-6866. Corrosion proof per MIL-C5541 and paint touch up as required.
Internal
Bearings
Page
ceD01
23/99
32-1 0-00
or
Raylheon Aircraft
CHART1
ITEM
I.D.
O.D.
PROCEDURES
Upper (16)
1.8695
1.8650
Visually inspect for wear, damage and corrosion. Replace bearing if wear tolerances are
exceeded. If replacement is required, remove
the bearing from the cylinder assembly (9) and
measure
the O.D.. Select from the O.D. dimen-
sions below to determine the correct

ment
replace-
bearing.
2.3225/2.3215 inches,
Standard
(P/N 35-815246-13,
Bearing)
2.3345/2.3335 inches,
Oversize Bearing)
(P/N 35-815246-23,
2.3425/2.3415 inches,
Oversize Bearing)
(P/N 35-815246-25,
If the O.D. dimensions of the
bearing
is greater
than the
replace
replacement dimensions above,

the cylinder assembly (9). If additional
information is
required contact the Technical

Support Department of the Raytheon Aircraft
Company, P.O. Box 85, Wichita, KS 67201.
Lower
(19)
1.8695
1.8650
Visually inspect for wear, damage and corrosion. Replace bearing if wear tolerances are
exceeded. If replacement is required, remove
the bearing from the cylinder assembly (9) and
measure
the O.D.. Select from the O.D. dimen-
sions below to determine the correct

ment
replace-
bearing.
2.0035/2.0025 inches,
Standard Bearing)
(P/N 35-815246-9,
2.0185/2.0170 inches,
(P/N 35-815246-27,
Oversize
Bearing)
If the O.D. dimensions of the
bearing is greater
replacement dimensions above,
replace the cylinder assembly (9). If additional
information is required contact the Technical
Support Department of Raytheon Aircraft Com-
than the
pany, P.O. Box 85, Wichita, KS 67201.
32-10100
Raytheon Aircraft
CHART1
MAIN LANDING GEAR WEAR TOLERANCES AN13 INSPECTION PROCEDURES
I.D.
ITEM
O.D.
PROCEDURES
If
replacement of bearing is required, coat bore

primer (67, Chart 1,91-00-00) and install
with
new bearing using

91-00-00).
Upper Torque
Knee Attach-
Do not
Instruction Placards
for
Brace Assembly
adhesive
(66,
Chart 1,
0.5010
0.4995
ment Hole
an
remove
inspection
purposes
Visually inspect
(11)
sion. Conduct
cylinder assembly except
from
or
replacement.
for wear, damage and corrofluorescent or dye penetrant
inspection per MIL-STD-6866. Any sign

cracks, scratches
be
repaired
is
or worn areas
cause
for
which
of
can
not
rejection.
Hinge Bushings
Outer
Inner
Hinge (12)
Hinge (13)
0.7192
Replace bearings
0.7184
overhauled.
when main
landing
gear is
when main
landing
gear is
0.6240
Replace bearings
0.6230
overhauled.
0.4395
Brace Bores
(14)
Forward Bolt
Bore
0.4370
Center Bolt
(10)
Bore
0.2520
0.2495
Aft Bolt
(14)
Bore
0.4395
0.4370
Forward and Aft Columns
(1 5)
Upper and Lower Attachment

Forward bores
(14)
0.4395
0.4370
Aft bores
(14)
0.4395
0.4370
Safety
Switch
Components
nents on condition.
Page
ceDP1
23/99
32-10-00
continuity when
Replace wiring and compo-
Ensure there is electrical
switch is activated.
Ray~heon Aircraft
NOSE GEAR AND DOORS
NOSE GEAR SHOCK STRUT

Se~vice the
nose
gear. Refer to
Chapter 12-20-00,
SHOCK STRUTS.
LUBRICATION
Lubricate the
nose
wheel
bearings
and grease. Refer to
Chapter 12-20-00, LUBRICATION SCHEDULE.
NOSE GEAR REMOVAL

When
removing the
sembly.
gear, take
nose
care
to retain the
original adjustment
a.
Jack the
b.
Disconnect the
drag leg
at its
the
nose
gear brace
c.
Disconnect the
steering
mechanism at the
nose
gear.
d.
Disconnectthe
landing lightwiring.
e.
Remove the cotter
airplane
and
partially
retract the
fitting
on
landing
pins, nuts, washers, bolts,
gear to relieve the load
and
bushings
at the rod end
on
fittings
the retract rod
to facilitate reas-
compression springs.
assembly.
which connect the
nose
gear upper brace to the
wheel well structure.

f.
Lower the
nose
gear
assembly
from the
wheel well.
nose
NOSE GEAR INSTALLA TION

a.
Carefully position
b.
Align
new
the
nose
bolt holes and install
cotter
gear
assembly against
the
bushings, bolts, washers,
nose
wheel well structure.
and nuts.
Torque the
nuts to 150
200
inch-pounds.
Install
pins.
NOTE
Use 100951S016YP washers
between the
nose
gear
(maximum of two per side)

assembly and supports.
c.
Connect the
landing light wire.
d.
Connect the
drag leg
of the
e.
Connect the
steering
mechanism to the
nose
gear brace
nose
to obtain total end
play
of 0 to 0.015 inch
assembly.
gear.
CAUTION I
I CAUTION
Excessive operation of the landing gear motor without proper cooling may cause damage to the
landing gear motor. Allow a short cooling time after each extension and retraction cycle.
f.
Operate the landing gear and

complete cycles.)
check for proper
rigging
and
nose
gear
adjustment. (Cycle the landing
imum of six
32-20-00
gear
min-
Raytheon Aircraft
NOSE GEAR OVERHAUL
NOTE
maintenance checks of the nose gear.
Experience in the field indicates

assembly. The forces
the barrel
the
points
exerted
limits and
of greatest wear on the nose gear are the upper and lower bearings in
the bearings during takeoff and landing tend to result in an oversized
on
condition. The oversized condition of the upper

through the upper bearing and O-ring. This will
lower
bearing in the barrel assembly will result in leakage of hydraulic fluid

eventually cause fluid to seep down through the felt pad and out the
bearing.
When
replacement of the scraper ring and all O-rings in the landing gear fails to stop leaks, the oversized condition
bearings is probable. In such instances the landing gear should be overhauled. The following information will
aid in determining the extent of landing gear wear and whether it is possible to overhaul or necessary to replace
critical landing gear components.
of the
NOSE GEAR DISASSEMBLY
FIGURES 1 AND 2
WARNING
I WARhllNO)
Do not
begin
of the
disassembly
any
nose
landing
gear until all air pressure has been
re-
leased.
a.
(1)
Place the strut in
a near
vertical
position
to
prevent the hydraulic fluid from spilling when the air valve assembly
is removed.
b.
Depress the valve
core to
c.
Remove the
wheel. Refer to
d.
Remove the snap
e.
Retract the piston and fork assembly
f.
Remove the orifice tube
g.
Invert the
nose
nose
deflate the strut and
the air valve
Chapter 32-40-00, NOSE
ring (4) retaining
(6).
remove
the orifice tube
(48)
Remove the
gear and drain out the
to
push
WHEEL REMOVAL.
(6).
the orifice tube
O-ring (5)
hydraulic
assembly (1).
and
out of the barrel
(6)
(23).
piston ring (7).
fluid.
WARNING I
IWARNINO
Do not disconnect the torque knees (37 and 46) without first deflating the
torque knees provide the extension stop for the piston and fork assembly
connected, the piston and fork assembly (48) is free to slide

h.
Remove the cotter pin
(40),
nut
i.
Remove the cotter pin
(36),
and
j.
Remove the cotter
Page
2~"2f,
(41),
washers
pins (25
pin (50), pins (42
32-20-00
and
and
47),
(39
34)
and
gear. The
When dis-
(48).
assembly (23).
out of the barrel
44), bushing (45),
and bolt
to disconnect the upper
and washers
nose
(49 and 51)
(43).
torque knee (37).
to disconnect the lower torque knee
(46).
Raytheon Aircraft
and fork
k.
Slide the
i.
Remove the lower snap
piston
assembly (48)
ring (33),
out of the barrel
scraper
(31),
the collar
(23). Remove
Remove the
n.
Remove the nut
brace
o.
washers
(30),
washers
(17
and
(3).
19), bushing (18),
and bolt
Removal of the
O-ring
may be
(21) attaching the shimmy damper (20) to the
(15).
Remove the nut
from the barrel

p.
(16),
and shim
adapter (32).
and
O-ring (38) and remove the felt pad (24) from inside the barrel (23).
simplified by using a hook manufactured from music wire. Refer to Figure 1.
m.
(2)
(27
and
29), bushing (28), and
bolt
(26)
to disconnect the
shimmy damper (20)
(23).
Pull the barrel
(23)
out of the brace
(15).
.064 MLISII
WIR~ ~I3/32
-i~
DOWEL
E~/
ROD
BRAZED
BEARING
O-RING
CYLINDER
DOWEL
ROD
C94TC05B219d
O-Ring
Removal and Installation
Figure
NOSE GEAR CLEANING, REPLACEMENT PARTS AND REPAIRS

CLEANING
a.
Clean all parts with solvent
b.
Immerse all internal parts in clean
A21
(16,
Chart 1,
91-00-00).
hydraulic fluid (9,
Remove all
Chart 1,
excess
solvent and
wipe dry
after
cleaning.
32-20-00
Dec
23/99Page
Ray~heon Aircraft
REPLACEMENT PARTS
NGUREP
a.
Inspect all parts
or

which cannot be corrected
Damage
Screws that
Parts that
are
are
severely damaged
cracked, chipped
b.
Replace
the
following parts
or
or
or
or
excessive
wear
wear.
nose
repaired.
have
stripped, severely
worn or
scored threads.
broken.
when
The
repaired.
gear is overhauled:
Adapter (32)
Bushing(l2)
Cotter Pins
Felt Pad
Piston
(24)
Ring (7)
O-Rings (5, 38)

Safety
Wire
Scraper(31)
Snap Rings (4, 33)
c.
Replace
the
following parts
on
condition when
nose
gear is overhauled:
Bearings (8, 22)

Bushings (18, 28, 35, 45)
Grease
Fittings
Placards
Valve Core
(1)
REPAIRS
NGUREP
Visually inspect castings for cracks and pitting; and finished surfaces for scoring, pitting, nicks, cracks, distortion
wear. Chart 1 lists wear tolerances to aid in determining the extent of wear. Replace all defective and excessively worn parts.
a.
and
b.
If fluid leaks have been observed
on
look for defects in the valve.
Page
32-20-00
top of the air valve assembly (1), check the small O-ring of the valve; then
Raylheon Aircraft
c.
If the leak is from the
orifice tube
d.
of the orifice tube
junction
assembly (6)
and the barrel
(23),
check the
O-ring (5)
on
the
(6).
All parts
or
assemblies may be
repaired if
the
Slight scoring
following
conditions exist:
by lapping carefully with
flat oil stone.
NOTE
Do not exceed 10% of the component material thickness when
removing nicks,
burrs and scratch-
es.
Those parts that
plating
as
that removed
are
or
scratched
be
replaced
or
have
with
worn
new
plating
may be
stripped
and
replated
with the
same
type of
parts.
Smooth minor nicks, burrs, and scratches.

Minor thread
chase to clean
damage,
or
smooth.
NOTE
Corrosion
al
damage requires inspection to determine the depth of penetration and the cross-sectionchange. The damaged area must be thoroughly cleaned and the corrosion must be re(Refer to Chapter 20 for CORROSION MAINTENANCE PRACTICES.) The deterioration
by corrosion or removal of corrosion must not reduce the material thickness of any compo-
area
moved.
caused
nent
by
more
than 10%. Refer to Chart 1 for NOSE GEAR WEAR TOLERANCES AND INSPEC-
TION PROCEDURES
Department
of
Remove corrosion if
cadmium
plate
on
components. For additional information contact the Technical Support

P.O. Box 85, Wichita, KS 67201.
Raytheon Aircraft Company,
applicable and apply corrosion prevention

Type II.
materials
as
or
per Fed QQ-P-416,
Bushings
When evidence of
damage
wear
per MIL-STD-1949.
NOTE
Do not remove paint or primer from the area to be fluorescent or dye penetrant inspected per MILSTD-6866. If the finish absorbs the penetrant so that bleed out prevents satisfactory inspection or
Company,
When evidence of
damage
exists to metal parts other than steel, fluorescent penetrant
inspect
per MIL-
STD-6866, Type I.
Replace damaged
or
new or
serviceable parts.
32-20-00
dZ~
Raytheon Aircraft
e.
p,
I.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
8.
9.
10.
II.
12.
13.
31~9
4
--J
AIR VALVE
COLLAR
(AS
25
25.
27
~h--t--
36
28.
29.
30.
31.
32.
33.
34.
35.
36
37.
38.
39.
REQUIRED)*
40.
SHIMMY DAMPER
BOLT
LOWER BEARING
BARREL
FELT PAD
PIN
~4.
26
27.
BOLT
BRACE
NUT
WASHER
BUSHING
WASHER
15.
16.
17.
18.
19.
20.
21.
22.
23.
26.
SHIM *x
SNAP RING
O-RING
ORIFICE TUBE
PISTON RING
UPPER BEARING
COTTER PIN
NUT
WASHER
BUSHING
WASHER
23
24
ASSEMBLY
BOLT
WASHERS
BUSHING
WASHER
NUT
SCRAPER
ADAPTER
LOWER SNAP RING
PIN
BUSHINGS
COTTER PIN
UPPER TORQUE KNEE
a-RING
WASHERS
COTTER PIN
41.
42.
43.
44.
45.
46.
47.
48.
NUT
PIN
BOLT
WASHER
49.
WASHER
COTTER
50.
51.
52.
BUSHING
LOWER TOROUE KNEE
PIN
PISTON AND
FORK ASSEMBLY
PIN
WASHER
AXLE
29
30
37
38
]C~L "t-- 3 1
329
39
F--
42
33
40
01
41
12
4344
i~
15
47
45
t~
46
4950
\o
16
17
18
51
5;!
O
USE 100951S016YP WASHERS AS REOUIRED PER
SIDE TO OBTAIN MAXIMUM TOTAL END CLEARANCE
OF .015 INCH.
*r
PEEL LAMINATIONS AS NECESSARY FOR

OPERATION. MAXIMUM CLEARANCE IS .012
FREEINCH.
22
i,
C94EA3282228
Nose Gear
Assembly
Figure 2
Dec
32-20-00
A21
Raytheon Aircraft
CHART1
NOSE GEAR WEAR TOLERANCES AND INSPECTION PROCEDURES

ITEM
I.D.
O.D.
PROCEDURES
NOTE
Listed below
are
the tolerances used to determine the extent of
nent, the permissible
wear
limits
(O.D.)
Collar
(2)
wear in the nose gear components. Where pertifor those components. All inside-diameter (I.D.) and outside-diameter
dimensions are given in inches. (Refer to Figure 2.)
are
given
Visually inspect for wear, damage and corrosion. Any scratches or worn areas which can
not be repaired is cause for rejection. Conduct
magnetic particle inspection per MIL-STD1949. Any crack is cause for rejection. Replace
0.3150
0.3120
if
wear
plate
tolerances
as
are
exceeded. Cadmium
necessary per Fed QQ-P-416,
Type II,
Class 2.
Torque
and 46)
Knee
Assembly (37
not be
repaired is cause for rejection. Remove

bushing and inspect bores for corrosion.
Corrosion proof as necessary per MIL-C-5541.
Any crack is cause for rejection. Replace bushall
ing
Knee
Upper Torque
as
needed.
(37)
-Bore
0.4380
0.4370
Bushing (35)
Visually inspect for wear, damage and corrosion. If bushings exceed 0.3775 inches I.D.,
replace with new bushings. Alignment ream
new bushings to specified wear tolerances.
Drill out lubricator holes through bushings and
0.3775
0.3745
install lubricators.
Knee Pin
(34)
0.3735
Visually inspect for wear, damage
and
0.3725
sion.
which
scratches
not
Any
be repaired
are
exceeded.
corrocan
rejection. If no visible wear is evident, conduct a magnetic particle

inspection per MIL-STD-1949. Any crack is
cause for rejection. Replace if wear tolerances
Torque Knee
is
or worn areas
cause
for
Center Hinge
Joint
Bore
(Upper)
0.3150
0.3120
Bushing (45)
na
0.2505
0.311
0.2495
0.310
32-20-00
Dec
23/9 Page
Raylheon Aircraft
CHART1
ITEM
I.D.
O.D.

PROCEDURES
Bore
0.3150
(Lower)
0.3120
Lower
Torque Knee (46)

0.3775
-Bore
0.3745
Knee Pin
(42)
0.374
0.373
Visually inspect for wear, damage and corrosion. Any scratches or worn areas which ~can
not be repaired is cause for rejection. If no visible wear is evident, conduct a magnetic particle
inspection per MIL-STD-1949. Any crack is
are
Orifice
Assembly (6)
P/N 35-825195
1.449
1.436
CE-772 thru
(CE-748,
CE-979,
CJ-149 thru CJ-155,
D-10097, D-10120 thru

D-10396,
exceeded.
which can not be repaired is cause for rejection. Conduct a magnetic-particle inspection
per MIL-STD-1949. Any sign of cracking is
cause for rejection. Check the orifice O.D. does
not exceed wear tolerances. Check that orifice
E-l 111, E-1241 thru E-1969
hole does not exceed 0.185/0.180 inches. Cad-
EA-1 thru
mium plate as necessary per Fed QQ-P-416,

Type I, Class 2.
EA-272)
NOTE: If the orifice

exceeds
wear
tolerances,
P/N 36-820021
Orifice
Assembly (6)
P/N 36-820021
(CE-980
and after,
CJ-156 and after,

D-10397 and after,
E-l 970 and after,

EA-273 and after)
1.449
1.436
assembly
as a
use
P/N 35-825195
Orifice
replacement
Assembly
spare.
cause
for
rejection. Check the orifice O.D. does
not exceed
wear
tolerances. Check that orifice
hole does not exceed 0.142/0.140 inches. Cad-
mium
plate
as
necessary per Fed QQ-P-416,
Type I, Class 2.
Barrel
Assembly (23)
which can not be repaired is cause for rejection. Conduct
magnetic-particle inspection
Any sign of cracking is
per MIL-STD-1949.
cause for rejection.
Bearings
Page
ce23/99
D8
32-20-00
A21
Raylheon Aircraft
CHART1
ITEM
I.D.
O.D.

PROCEDURES
-Upper
Visually inspect for wear, damage and corrosion. Replace barrel assembly if wear toler-
1.755
1.751
ances are
-Lower
1.755
Visually inspect for wear, damage and corrosion. Replace barrel assembly if wear toler-
1.751
ances are
Upper Torque
Knee Attach-
ment Hole
0.3755
exceeded.
0.3745
Piston and Fork
exceeded.
Assembly
(48)
Chrome Portion
(topl
1.490
Visually inspect for wear, damage and corrosion. Any sign of scratches and worn areas
1.482
are
Axle
1.249
1.248
exceeded.
Visually inspect for wear, damage and corrosion. Any sign of scratches and worn areas
cause for rejection. Strip and cadmium plate
axle as necessary, per Fed QQ-P-416, Type II,
Class 2
Brace
scratched
or worn areas.
not be repaired is cause for rejection. Remove
all bearings and inspect for corrosion. Conduct
fluorescent or dye penetrant inspection per
MIL-STD-6866. Any crack is cause for rejection. Coat interior of brace and hinge bearing
holes with corrosion preventative compound
per MIL-C-16173, Grade 1 or 2. Replace all
bearings when nose gear is overhauled.
Assembly (15)
Hinge Bushings (12)
on
0.4692
0.4682
Replace bearings when

Alignment ream
hauled.
fied
wear
nose
new
gear is
over-
bearings to speci-
tolerances. Drill out lubricator holes
through bearings
and install lubricators.
Internal Bearings
A21
32-20-00
Dec
23/99Page
Ray~heon Aircraft
CHART1
ITEM
I.D.
O.D.
PROCEDURES
Upper
and Lower
(8
and
22)
2.252
Replace bearings when

Alignment ream
hauled.
2.250
fied
wear
Do not
gear is
new
bearings
over-
to
speci-
tolerances Drill out lubricator holes
through bearings
Instruction Placards
nose
remove
inspection
and install lubricators.
assembly except for

replacement.
from brace
purposes
or
NOSE GEAR ASSEMBLY
FIGURES 1 AND 2
NOTE
Prior to
assembly,
91-00-00).
immerse all internal parts
Install new O-ring (38) into the upper bearing

position. Refer to Figure 1.
a.
b.
Saturate felt
c.
Install
d.
Install barrel
(23)
e.
Install shims
(3)
new
pad (24)
scraper
of the barrel
pad (24))
(23).
in
(31), adapter (32)
and
with snap
secure
hydraulic
fluid
(9,
Chart 1,
Two dowel rods may be used to work
with SAE 10W30 oil before installation. Install felt
into the brace
as
felt
(except
pad (24)
in the barrel
O-ring
into
(23).
ring (33).
(15).
necessary.
NOTE
Add
or remove
lamination from shims
0.012 between collar

f.
Install collar
after
tightening
(2) to
bolts.
(2)
and brace
brace
(15)
Adjust
shims
g.
Install air valve
h.
Install upper torque knee
(3)
as
necessary for free
operation.
Maximum clearance is
(15).
tighten two bolts securing collar. Rotate collar to ensure freedom of movement
(3) as necessary to allow collar to rotate freely. Secure bolts with safety wire.
and
valve
assembly (1) excluding

(37)
with the
core.
pins (25
and
34),
and cotter
pin (36).
NOTE
(17 and 19) above or below the bushing (18)

damper (20) with the lug on the barrel (23)
Install the washers
my
shimmy damper (20)
i.
Position
j.
Install the
k.
Slide the
Dec
bushing (28),
piston
bolt
and fork
and install the
(26),
washer
assembly (48)
32-20-00
bushing (18),
(27
and
29)
into the barrel
bolt
and nut
(21),
(30)
on
the brace
washers
(15)
(17
to connect the
and
to
align the
19)
shim-
and nut
(16).
shimmy damper (20).
(23).
A21
Rtylheon Aircraft
I.
Connect the lower torque knee
m.
Install the
(46)
bushing (45), bolt (43),

(37 and 46).
with the
washers
pins (42
(39
and
and
44),
47),
nut
washers
(41)
(49
and cotter
and
51)
pin (40),
and cotter
pin (50).
to connect the upper and
lower torque knees

n.
Install
secure
new O-ring (5) and piston ring (7) to orifice tube (6).
by attaching snap ring (4) to the top of collar (2).
o.
Lubricate
p.
With the strut in the vertical
assembly (1)
bearings
with
at grease
fittings with
grease
(46,
Push orifice tube
Chart 1,
(6)
down into the barrel
With the
position and approximately 1/4 inch from fully compressed,

approximately 500/550 cc of hydraulic fluid (9, Chart 1, 91-00-00).
piston
and fork
assembly (48) compressed,
and
91-00-00).
q. Fully extend and recompress the piston and fork assembly (48) three times or until
added. Add additional fluid as required with the strut in the compressed position.
r.
(23)
install the valve
core
no
fill
through
the air valve
additional fluid
into air valve
can
be
assembly (1).
WARNING
IwnRNI~OI
As with all
forming
s.
To leak test, inflate the
and air valve

t.
operations involving equipment under high pressure, exercise

areas directly above and below the strut.
caution when per-
the leak test; avoid the
assembly (1)
approximately 90 psi using dry air or nitrogen.

soapsuds and test for air leaks.
nose
with
gear to
Release the air pressure by depressing the valve core in the air valve
(2) and air valve assembly (1) with fresh water.
Coat the top of the collar
assembly (1).
Clean the
soapsuds
(2)
from
the top of the collar

u.
Install the air valve cap to the air valve
v.
Install
nose
wheel onto the axle. Refer to
w.
Install
nose
gear onto the
x.
Service the
nose
airplane.
gear. Refer to
assembly (1).
Chapter 32-40-00,
Refer to
NOSE WHEEL INSTALLATION.
Chapter 32-20-00,
Chapter 12-20-00,
NOSE GEAR INSTALLATION.
SHOCK STRUTS.
32-20-00
O.Peaileu~
Raytheon Aircraft
NOSE GEAR SHIMMY DAMPER SERVICING

Service the
shimmy damper.
Chapter 12-20-00, SHIMMY DAMPER.
Refer to
NOSE GEAR SHIMMY DAMPER REMOVAL~
FIGURE 2
a.
Remove the nut
the brace
b.
(16),
washers
(17
(30),
washers
(27
and
19), bushing (18),
and bolt
(21) which
attach the
shimmy damper (20)
to
(15).
Remove the nut
and
29), bushing (28),
bolt
(26)
and
remove
the
shimmy damper (20)
from
(23).
the barrel
NOSE GEAR SHIMMY DAMPER INSTALLATION

FIGURE 2
a.
Install the
barrel
bushing (28),
washers
(27
and
29),
nut
(30)
and bolt
(26) attaching
the
shimmy damper (20)
to the
(23).
bushing (18), washers (17 and 19), nut (16) and bolt (21) attaching the shimmy damper (20) to the
nose gear brace (15). For alignment purposes, attach a 100951-X031-YN washer (19) between the damper and the
lug on the brace, and a 100951-X031-YM washer (17) under the nut.
b.
Install the
c.
Swivel the
nose
wheel to check the
turning
radius of the strut and for freedom of movement without
gear steering travel

inch from maximum travel in both directions.
rough spots. Adjust
the
nose
bolts to stop
adjustment
shimmy damper piston
binding
or
1/32 inch to 1/4
NOSE GEAR SHIMMY DAMPER OVERHAUL
NOTE
maintenance checks of the
nose
gear
shimmy bamper.
limits and
NOSE GEAR SHIMMY DAMPER DISASSEMBLY
Fli;URE
a.
Remove cotter
or screw
b.
the
c.
driver
so
pin (1),
washer
(8)
compression spring (9) by holding the washer (8)

spring out when the cotter pin (1) is removed.
and
that the parts will not
floating piston (10) by engaging

floating piston (10).
Remove the
it with
long
6-32
screw or
down with
threaded rod. Remove
Remove the snap ring (2) and piston scraper (3). Force the barrel end (5) out of the barrel
rod (12) back and forth. Remove O-rings (4) from the barrel end (5).
small rod
O-ring (1 1)
(6) by working
from
the
piston
remaining hydraulic fluid by inverting shimmy damper
d.
Remove all
e.
Remove the snap
f.
Insert
the forward
ring (23)
and slide the
piston
rod
(12)
with the
and
pumping
the
remaining parts
piston
rod
(12).
out of the barrel
(6).
long 6-32 screw or threaded rod into the hole at the clevis (24) end of the piston rod (12) and engage
floating piston (17). Pull floating piston (17) toward clevis (24) so that the piston retaining pin (15) can
be driven-out.
Dec
23/9 Pagel2
32-20-00
nzl
Ray~heon Aircraft
g. Remove the piston retaining
and remove O-ring (16).
h.
Remove the
O-rings (13)
pin (15)
and
the
push
remaining compression spring (18)

damper piston (14).
floating piston (17)
and slide the
out the open end of the
off the
damper piston (14)
piston
piston
rod
(12).
rod
(12)
Remove
from the
i.
Remove
(21)
from the barrel end
remaining
barrel end
(19)
and
piston
scraper
(22)
from the
piston
rod
(12).
Remove
O-rings (20
and
19).
NOSE GEAR SHIMMY DAMPER
CLEANING, REPLACEMENT PARTS AND REPAIRS
CLEANING
Clean all parts with
cleaning
solvent
(16,
Chart 1,
91-00-00).
Rinse and
dry thoroughly
after
cleaning.
CAUTION 1
I cnunon
For
replacement,
use
O-rings approved for use
Lubricate all internal parts with
hydraulic
fluid
with mineral base
Chart 1,
(9,
hydraulic
fluid.
REPLACEMENT PARTS
FIGURE3
a.
Inspect all parts
or
Damage
which cannot be corrected
Parts that
are
cracked, chipped

b.
Replace
the
following parts
Cotter Pin
(1)
Retaining
Pin
or
or
or
excessive
wear
wear.
nose
repaired.
broken.
when
The
gear
shimmy damper
repaired.
is overhauled:
(15)
O-Rings (4, 11, 13, 16, 20, 21)

Safety
Wire
Snap Ring (2)

Springs (9, 18)
Piston
Scrapers (3, 22)
Washer
(8)
32-20-00
Ral~heon Aircraft
12
9
14
10
16
17
13
I.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
10.
I I
12.
13.
14.
15.
16.
17.
18.
19.
20.
21
22.
23.
24.
COTTER PIN
SNAP RING
PISTON SCRAPER
O-RINGS
BARREL END
BARREL
ATTACHMENT HOLE
WASHER
COMPRESSION SPRING
PISTON
O-RING
PISTON ROD
O-RINGS
DAMPER PISTON
RETAINING PIN
O-RING
FLOATING PISTON
COMPRESSION SPRING
BARREL END
O-RING
O-RING
PISTON SCRAPER
SNAP RING
CLEVIS
j
15
FLOATING
19
5~
20
21
23
24
C94E03282874
Shimmy Damper
Figure 3
Page
ceD41
23/99
32-20-00
A21
Ral~heon Aircraft
REPAIRS
a.
Visually inspect casting for cracks
and
wear.
sively
b.
and
pitting;
Refer to Chart 2 for tolerances to aid in
worn
and finished surfaces for
determining
scoring, pitting, nicks, cracks, distortion

wear. Replace all defective and exces-
the extent of
parts.
All parts
or
assemblies may be
repaired
if any of the
Slight scoring
following problems
by lapping carefully
with
exist:
flat oil stone.
NOTE
Do not exceed 10% of the
component material thickness when removing nicks, burrs and scratches.
Smooth minor nicks, burrs, and scratches.
plating
Those parts that are scratched or have worn plating may be

that removed or be replaced with new parts.
stripped and replated
with the
same
type of
as
Minor thread
damage,
chase to clean
or
smooth.
NOTE
damage requires inspection to determine the depth of penetration and the cross-sectionchange. The damaged area must be thoroughly cleaned and the corrosion must be removed. The deterioration caused by corrosion or removal of corrosion must not reduce the material
thickness of any component by more than 10%. Refer to Chart 2 for NOSE GEAR SHIMMY DAMPCorrosion
al
area
ER WEAR TOLERANCES AND INSPECTION PROCEDURES

formation contact the Technical
Support Department
of
on
Raytheon
components. For additional in-
Aircraft
Company,
P.O. Box 85,
Wichita, KS 67201.
Remove corrosion if
cadmium
plate
applicable, and apply corrosion prevention

Type II.
materials
as
or
per Fed QQ-P-416,
Bushings
When evidence of
damage
wear
per MIL-STD-1949.
NOTE
Do not remove paint or primer from the area to be fluorescent or dye penetrant inspected per MILSTD-6866. If the finish absorbs the penetrant so that bleed out prevents satisfactory inspection or
Company,
When evidence of
damage
exists to metal parts other than steel, fluorescent
penetrant inspect per
MIL-STD-6866, Type I.
Replace damaged
nnl
or
new or
serviceable parts.
32-20-00
Raytheon Aircraft
SEECH BONANZA SERIES MAINTENANCE MANVUAL
NOSE GEAR SHIMMY DAMPER ASSEMBLY
FIGURE 3
a.
Replace the O-rings (20 and 21)
rod
(12).
on
the barrel end
(19).
Slide the
piston scraper (22)
and barrel end onto
piston
Replace the O-ring (16) on the floating piston (17) and insert the compression spring (18) and the floating piston
piston rod (12). With a long 6-32 screw or threaded rod, engage the floating piston (17) by pulling it toward
the clevis (24) so that the retaining pin (15) can be inserted. Install the damper piston (14) on the piston rod (12) and
insert the retaining pin (15). Replace the O-rings (13) on the damper piston (14).
b.
into the
Insert the
c.
piston
rod
(12)
and components into the barrel
(6)
and
place the
snap
ring (23)
into
position.
(6) in a vise with the open end up and fill the barrel (6) and piston rod (12) with hydraulic fluid
91-00-00). Work the piston rod (12) up and down until bubbles stop appearing in the fluid, then refill the
(9,
barrel (6) and the piston rqd (12). To eliminate the possibility of an air pocket under the barrel end (5), ensure that
the barrel (6) is completely full of hydraulic fluid. Any excess fluid will be forced into the piston rod (12) as the barrel
end (5) is inserted.
Place the barrel
d.
Chart 1,
e.
Replace
and
secure
f.
O-rings (4) on
ring (2).
the barrel end
(5).
Insert the barrel end
piston
scraper
(3)
into the barrel
(6)
piston rod (12) with hydraulic fluid (9, Chart 1, 91-00-00). Engage the floating piston (17) with a 6-32 long
pull towards the clevis (24). At the same time, insert and push the floating piston (10) down into the piston
(12). This will cause hydraulic fluid to be sucked into the piston rod (12) and preventing the entry of air.
Install compression spring (9), washer (8) and

(17) and remove from the assembly.
Check the fluid level in the
wire into the
(10)
i.
Install
in this
piston
(12).
shimmy damper on
Chapter.
Service the
Page
rod
secure
with cotter
pin (1).
Release the 6-32 rod from the
piston
pin (1) and inserting a 1/16-inch-diameter

top of the floating piston (10). If the distance to the piston
floating piston (10) and add more fluid to the piston rod (12).
shimmy damper by spreading
the cotter
Measure the distance to the
exceeds 2-3/16 inches,
rod
j.
and
and
g.
h.
(5)
Fill the
screw
rod
the
with snap
remove
nose
shimmy damper
as
the
gear of the
airplane, refer to NOSE GEAR SHIMMY
described under the
32120-00
heading SHIMMY
DAMPER in
DAMPER INSTALLATION
Chapter
12-20-00.
P~21
Raytheon Aircraft
CHART2
NOSE GEAR SHIMMY DAMPER WEAR TOLERANCES AND INSPECTION PROCEDURES
I.D.
ITEM
O.D.

PROCEDURES
NOTE
Listed below
nents. Where
Barrel
wear in the nose gear shimmy damper compopermissible wear limits are given for those components. All inside-diameter (I.D.) and
outside-diameter (O.D.) dimensions are given in inches. (Refer to Figure 3.)
the tolerances used to determine the extent of
are
pertinent,
the
which can not be repaired is cause for rejection. If localized damage exists, conduct a fluorescent or dye penetrant inspection per MILSTD-6866. Any sign of cracking is cause for
rejection. Replace if wear tolerances are
0.865
(6)
0.860
exceeded.
Attachment Hole
(7)
0.3765
0.3745
Damper Piston (14)
0.857
0.850
Visually inspect for wear, damage and corrosion. Replace if there is any noticeable ridges
or grooves at O-ring seats. Replace if wear tolerances are
Floating
Pistons
(10
and
17)
0.240
Visually inspect
0.232
sion.
or
(12)
0.253
0.3745
0.246
0.3725
for wear,
damage
and
corro-
Replace if there is any noticeable ridges

grooves at O-ring seat. Replace if wear tolerexceeded.
ances are
Piston Rod
exceeded.
Visually inspect for straightness, cracks,

scratches, corrosion or worn areas. Any signs
of wear which can not be repaired is cause for
rejection. Replace if wear tolerances are
exceeded.
Clevis
Visually inspect for wear, damage and

sion, cadmium plate as necessary per
P-416, Type II, Class 2.
(24)
-Bore
-Slot
Visually inspect for
0.190
wear
0.198
Visually inspect for any sign
0.193
Barrel Ends
(5
Hole Diameter
b~
and
any sign of wear.

exceeded.
0.196
wear
tolerances
tolerances
corro-
Fed QQ-
Replace
if
Replace
if
are
are
of
wear.
exceeded.
Visually inspect for wear, damage and corrosion. Corrosion proof with coating (53, Chart 1,
91-00-00) as required.
19)
0.379
Visually inspect for wear or damage. Replace
0.376
wear
tolerances
are
if
exceeded.
32-20-00
,%~Pagel7
Ray~heon Aircraft
NOSE GEAR RETRACT MECHANISM SERVICING

NOSE GEAR RETRACT BRACE ASSEMBLY CHECK
WITH KIT 35-4012-1
(E-1103
AND AFTER; E-l THRU E-1102
INSTALLED)
FIGURE 4
(20), inboard arm (21), attachment bolts (22), washers (23) and nuts (24) for security.
Check retract rod rod-ends (58) and (88) for indications of cracking and the mechanism assembly for shear stress,
wear and/or corrosion. Refer to Chapter 5-20-00 for scheduled service and maintenance checks.
a.
Check outboard
b.
Tighten
arm
any loose hardware and replace all hardware that show

area of any corrosion before installing hardware.
signs
of shear stress, wear, corrosion and/
or
cracking. Clean
Dec
32-20-00
A21
Ral~heon Aircraft
36
34Z35
31
30
33
32
40
39
38
41~
111
20
37
21
38
41
37
41
29
40
28
13
39
22, 23, 24
38
41
38
19
18
14
15
DETAILB
25
11
26
s~//M
10
4
DETAIL
25. BOLT
26. WASHER
5~
27.BUSHING
"~r
28. WASHER
29. NUT
J~DOORACTUATOR
SHAFT ASSEMBLY
i. RETRACT BRACE ASSEMBLY
13. AFT DRAG BRACE ASSEMBLY
31. SCREW
2. RETRACT DRAG LEG ASSEMBLY
14. DOOR ACTUATOR BRACKET AND PIN SUPPORT
32. NUT
3. BOLT
15.
33. SPRING
5. NUT
SCREW, WASHER, NUT

16. BOLT, WASHER, NUT
17. BOLT, WASHER, NUT
6. COTTER PIN
18. DOOR ACTUATOR PIN ASSEMBLY
36. ROD END
7. LUBE FITTING AND BUSHING
19. BUMPER
37. DOOR ACTUATOR
8. BOLT
20. OUTBOARD ARM
9. BUSHING
21. INBOARD ART
4. WASHER
34. SCREW
35. NUT
ROD ASSEMBLY
38. BALL JOINTS
10. BUSHING
22. DRAG BRACE ATTACHMENT BOLT
39. WASHER
ii. WASHER
23. WASHER
40. NUT
iZ.NUT
24.NUT
41. NUT
EA32B
993~L9AAAI
(E-1103
and
After;
E-1 thru E-1102 with Kit 35-4012-1
Figure
A21
4,
(Sheet
1 of
Installed)
3)
32-20-00
Dec
23/9 Page
19
Rayeheon Aircraft
42. RETRACT ROD BOOT ASSEMBLY

43. BOOT RETAINING RING
44.STUD
45. CABLE TIE
46. RETRACT ROD BOOT
47.STRIP
48. STUD
49.CABLETIE
50. COVER
51. SCREW AND WASHER
~A
52. RETRACT AFT ROD ASSEMBLY
52
53. BOLT
54. WASHER
55. NUT
56. COTTER PIN
57. TUBE
58.ROOEND
59. NUT
60. WASHER
61. NUT
62. RETRACT IDLER ARM ASSEMBLY
63. BOLT
64. WASHER
65. NUT
71
66. COTTER PIN

67
67. BRACI<ET
68. COLLAR
73
69.WASHER
74
70. FLATHEAD PIN

62
71. COTTER PIN
69
T1.IDLERARMa
73. BUSHING
74.8EARINGI
68
70
67
72
75.
9166
64
65
~i i""
64
49
45
46
4!
42
64
43
61
Qr~- 55
Q-C~54
57
60~ BL--53
50 48
DETAILA
(E-1103
and
After; E-l thru E-1102 with Kit 35-4012-1 Installed)
Figure
Page
ceD02
23/99
3220-00
4.
(Sheet
2 of
3)
A21
Raylheon Aircraft
76. RETRACT FORWARD LINK ROD ASSEMBLY

77. BOLT
78. NUT
79. COTTER PIN
80. ROD
81. PLUNGER ASSEMBLY
82. SPRING
83. SMEAR PIN
84. WASHER
85.COTTERPIN
86. NUT
/LiE~-n ~5*11
87. WASHER
76
88. ROD END

89. WASHER
90. WASHER
91. RETRACT ROD LINK DECAL
79
78
i",
88
77
ys,g
fi
se
87
90
89
so
as
76
DETAIL
82//I
A
a;
o-
P
DETAIL
Q
EA32B
as34nAA.n,
(E1103
A21
and
After; E-l thru E-1102 with Kit 35-4012-1 Installed)

Figure 4. (Sheet 3 of 3)
32-2000
Dec
23/9 Page
21
Raylheon Aircraft
EXTENSION AND RETRACTION
LUBRICATION
landing gear and retract system as detailed in the Lubrication Chart in

CATION OF LANDING GEAR UPLOCK ROLLERS in Chapter 12-20-00.
Lubricate the
Chapter 12-20-00.
Note LUBRI-
MANUAL LANDING GEAR EXTENSION SYSTEM

In the event of landing gear malfunction in flight, the gear may be
the front spar between the pilots and copilots seats.
manually extended by a
hand crank located behind
WARNING i
IWdRNING
If the
gearhas been
jacks
and
inspected
extended
manually for emergency
before the gear controls
are
airplane must be put

normal position.
reasons, the
returned to their
on
CAUTION I
I cnvnou
Do not attempt to retract the landing gear using the hand crank. The manual extension system is
designed to lower the landing gear only. Refer to the appropriate Pilots Operating Handbook for
emergency
operating instructions.
landing gear should not be operated electrically with the hand crank engaged. In the event
such operation, a teardown and magnetic inspection should be performed to check for damage
the engagement slot in the worm shaft of the landing gear actuator.
The
of
to
LANDING GEAR A CTUA TOR ASSEMBL Y REMO VAL

a.
Remove the cabin front seats.
b.
Remove the
c.
Disconnect the main
d.
Remove the
e.
Remove the four
and
move
f.
access cover on
flap
the switch
landing
motor
top and directly behind the front carry-through
structure.
gear retract rods at the actuator.
attaching
bolts and disconnect the
landing
gear door
screws securing the landing gear limit switch assembly

assembly aside to permit removal of the actuator.
wiring
to the
landing
gear motor.
Identify the
on
attaching
rods at the actuator.
the left-hand side of the actuator
wires for
ease
of reinstallation.
CAUTION 1
rCAUTION
remove the shaft from the sector gear of the actuator. If the shaft is removed, teardown of
the actuator is necessary for reinstallation of the shaft.
Do not
32-30-00
Raytheon Aircraft
NOTE
For
g.
of reinstallation, note the index marks
ease
Remove the
and
landing gear actuator access

linkage from the actuator.
ator
arm
h.
Remove the four actuator
attaching
door
nuts and
on
on
the
the bottom of the
remove
arm
and actuator.
fuselage,
and
remove
the
nose
gear actu-
the actuator.
LANDING GEAR A CTUA TOR A SSEMBL Y INSTALLA TION

a.
Position the actuator and install the four
b.
Connect the
coincides with the index mark
landing
bolts.
gear rod and linkage to the actuator. Make certain that the index mark
the actuator shaft.
landing
nose
attaching
door
the bottom of the
c.
Install the
d.
Connect the
e.
Attach the
f.
Connect the
g.
Connect the main gear retract rods at the actuator.
h.
Install cotter
gear actuator
landing
landing
access
gear motor electrical
gear limit switch

door
landing gear
pins
and
on
the
arm
on
safety
fuselage.
wiring.
assembly
attaching
on
to its bracket.
rods at the actuator. Attach the
flap
motor
attaching
bolts.
wire.
CAUTION I
I cnlmou
operation
Excessive
landing
of the
gear motor. Allow

of
gear system. When

minimum of six times.
Check
Cycle
j.
Install the
k.
Install the cabin front seats.
rigging
landing gear motor without proper cooling may cause damage

P-minute-cooling time after each extension and retraction cycle.
landing
i.
tor.
the gear
access covers on
cycling
to the
the gear, listen for unusual noises at the motor and actua-
top and directly behind the front carry-through
structure.
LANDING GEAR MOTOR REMOVAL

a.
Removethe
rightfrontseat.
b.
Remove the
access
plate
over
wiring. Identify
the motor and disconnect the electrical
the wires for
ease
of
re-
installation.
c.
Remove the three
landing gear
motor
attaching
bolts and
remove
the
landing
gear motor.
LANDING GEAR MOTOR INSTALLA TION

the actuator and install the
a.
Position the
landing
gear motor
b.
Connect the
landing
gear motor electrical
Dec
23/9Page
on
32-30-00
wiring
and install the
attaching
access
bolts.
plate
Safety
over
wire the
attaching
bolts.
the motor.
a?l
Raylheon Aircraft
c.
Install the
right
hand seat.
DYNAMIC BRAKE RELA Y CHECK

is operated by a split-field, series-wound motor located on the forward side of the main spar carOne
field
is used to drive the motor in each direction. To prevent overtravel of the gear, a dynamic brake
ry-through.
into
the landing gear circuit and acts as a brake on the motor. When either the up or downlimit
is
relay incorporated
The
landing gear
switches activate, the relay simultaneously breaks the power circuit to the motor and makes a complete circuit
through the armature and the unused field windings, turning the motor onto a generator. The resulting electrical load
applied
to the armature
To check the
dynamic
stops the gear almost instantly.
brake
relay for
proper
it is necessary to
operation,
remove
the spar
cover
to
gain
access
to
the actuator and limit switches.
landing gear with the landing gear handle (either up or down). When the actuator reaches midtravel poappropriate limit switch in the direction the actuator is traveling. The landing gear motor should
without
stop immediately
any noticeable coast.
Actuate the
sition,
actuate the
LANDING GEAR DYNAMIC BRAKE RELA Y REMOVAL

a.
Removethe
rightfrontseat.
b.
Remove the
access
plate
which
covers
both the
landing
dynamic brake relay is located slightly outboard

to the dynamic brake relay.
c.
The
the
wiring
d.
Remove the two
e.
Remove the
screws
dynamic
which
brake
secure
the
dynamic
gear motor and the
and below the
brake
landing
brake
dynamic
gear motor.
relay assembly to
its
relay.
Identify
attaching
and disconnect
bracket.
relay.
LANDING GEAR DYNAMIC BRAKE RELA Y INSTALLA TION

brake
a.
Position the
dynamic
b.
Connect the
wiring
c.
Install the
access cover
d.
Installthe
rightfrontseat.
which
relay
was
which
on
its
attaching
disconnected
covers
the
bracket and install the two
during
attaching
screws.
removal.
landing gear
motor and the
dynamic
brake
relay.
MAIN LANDING GEAR RETRACT ROD REMOVAL

FIGURE 1
and the
right
front seat.
a.
Remove the
pilots
b.
Remove the
access covers
c.
With the
d.
Remove the
attaching
bolts and disconnect the retract rod from the
e.
Remove the
attaching
bolt and disconnect the retract rod from the main
f.
Remove the retract rod
A21
airplane
on
directly
jacks, partially
through
aft of the front

retract the
carry-through
landing
spar.
gear until the inboard door is
landing gear
landing
fully
open.
actuator retract
arm.
gear V-brace.
the wheel well.
32-30-00
Ral~heon Aircraft
F~Y
GEAR INBOARD
ADJUSTMENT
WHEEL TRAV~L
V1"~
GEAR
MAIN GEAR
RETRACT RODS
NOSE WHEEL SHIMMY
o~,
(2
O
GEAR DOOR
L
1C
O
MAIN GEAR
DOWNLOCK TENSION
.010-.020
E
GEAR UP
i. UPLOCK
UPLOCK BLOCK
SAFETY ~ITCH
36-211--1
Landing Gear System

Figure 1
Page
ceD4
23/99
32-30-00
A21
Raytheon Aircraft
MAIN LANDING GEAR RETRACT ROD INSTALLA TION
FIGURE 1
a.
Position the
b.
Install the
c.
Position the main
landing
attaching
gear retract rod in the main
bolt in the main
landing
landing
landing
gear V-brace located in the wheel well.
gear V-brace and the main
gear retract rod in the main
landing
landing
gear retract rod.
gear actuator retract
arm
and install the
attaching
bolts.
d.
Install the
access covers
e.
Install the
pilots
and the
immediately
right
aft of the front
carry-through
spar.
front seat.
RIGGING THE LANDING GEAR

Read the entire
landing gear rigging procedure before any attempt to rig the landing gear system. Physically locate
reading through the rigging instructions. When any part of the landing gear system requires rigging,
recommended that ALL of the rigging steps be accomplished in the order shown.
each item while

it is
CAUTION I
I cnlmoN
Do not
the
After the
change the position of the control switch to reverse the direction of the landing gear while
landing gear is in transit, as this could cause damage to the landing gear retract mechanism.
airplane
jacks, but before beginning to rig the landing gear, start the retraction cycle enough
Apply a sharp load by hand against the nose landing gear strut. Approximately a half
to one inch of movement under this load by the main landing gear wheels is a good indication that the landing gear
actuator needs to be overhauled and/or adjusted.
is
placed
on
to break the downlock tension.
CAUTION I
Icnlmou
is not sufficient to properly cycle the landing gear during the rigging procedure. A
0.25 volt power supply should be utilized for the landing gear during rigging. If an external
power supply is not available on the airplane, jumper cables may be used between the batte~y and
Battery voltage
28.25
the power supply. Be
Excessive
landing
Whenever the
the
rigging.
ing
gear is out
operation
sure
of the
polarity before connecting
the power supply to the
battery.
of the
gear motor. Allow
landing gear motor without proper cooling may cause damage

a 2-minute-cooling time after each extension and retraction cycle.
to the
landing gear mechanism or doors are removed or disconnected, retract the landing gear and check
following procedure for rigging the landing gear was written on the assumption that the entire landof rig.
The
WARNING
IWI\RNINO
To prevent
possible injury, the emergency landing gear actuator

disengaged when operating the landing gear electrically.
nnl
hand crank must
always
32-30-00
be
Ray~heon Aiucraft
I CAUTION I
Overtightening
distort the strut
a.
Place the
b.
Lengthen the
airplane
the nut
on
the bolt
jacks
as
instructed in
connecting the drag leg to the shock strut

attaching points. Torque the nut to 25 to 75 inch-pounds.
on
main and
Chapter
can
bind the strut
or
7-00-00.
landing gear retract rods sufficiently to prevent excessive tension on the nose gear
danger of the V-brace on the main landing gears damaging the skin when the landing gear is retracted. Damage to vital parts may result if abnormal loads are applied to the landing gear retract system. By lengthening the main and nose gear retract rods, such danger is removed.
nose
retract rods and to eliminate the
c.
Insert the
d.
Disconnect the
uplock
may
Lengthen
e.
f.
the
arm
landing
the
landing
pointing
aft.
uplock cables at the brackets, leaving the springs attached. If the springs are disconnected, the
damage the wing skin upon retraction of the gear. Place the uplock block in the lower position.
nose
Disconnect the
nose
gear retract arm/retract rod attach bolt
landing
nose
gear retract rod.
landing
gear door
linkage
at the
gear door links from the upper ball
attaching point
on
the
nose
landing
gear door. Unscrew
joint.
Remove the bolts attaching the main landing gear outboard door links at the main strut. Remove the actuator
g.
rod to the inboard main landing gear door by unscrewing from the inboard rod ends and removing the bolt in the
door bracket.
h.
Screw the stop bolts into the main gear V-brace
assembly
until
approximately
four
or
five threads
are
showing.
CAUTION I
ICAUTlON
When
running the landing gear electrically before the switches are reset, or for the first time after
resetting the switches, run the landing gear with extreme care to make sure the switches open the
electrical circuits before the sector gear hits the internal stops in the gearbox. The sector gear
should not be touching the stop when the motor stops. Serious damage may result if the internal
stops are hit by the sector gear. When checking the dynamic brake system, actuate one of the limit
switches and the motor should stop immediately.
On
airplanes with a 5-amp push-pull landing gear control circuit breaker, use this circuit breaker to
"bump the landing gear. On earlier airplanes without the damp push-pull circuit breaker, manually
operate the limit switches and use the 30-amp landing gear motor circuit breaker to Ibump" the
landing gear. When using the 30-amp circuit breaker, use extreme care because the dynamic brake
is inoperative.
i.
Run the gear about two thirds up, then stop and "bump" the landing gear the remaining distance to either the
setting or to the internal stop by intermittent operation of the LDG GEAR circuit breaker. With the actuator
limit switch
in the retracted
ators)
Dec
23/9Page
before
position, check that the
reaching
hand crank will rotate 1/8 to 1/4 turn
the internal stop of the actuator.
32-30-00
(5/8 to
3/4 turn
on
new, or white actu-
Ray~heon Aircraft
NOTE
A
new
by
airplanes as a spare. The new actuator may be identified

the upper actuator arm, and the upper and lower actuator housing. When
actuator is installed as a spare on earlier airplanes, the actuator should be adjusted by us-
actuator may be installed on earlier
white epoxy
paint
on
the
new
ing
the 5/8 to 3/4 hand crank turns
after the motor has
remaining
stopped.
If this clearance is not
obtained, adjust the uplimit switch. To adjust the uplimit switch, lower the landing gear 5/8 to 3/4
turns of the emergency hand crank, and adjust the switch by turning the screw in the actuator in or
out to increase or decrease travel so that it
just breaks the circuit.
Extend the landing gear and check the hand crank. There should be 1/8 to 1/4 turn (or 5/8 to 3/4 turn on the new
j.
(or white) actuators) between the extended position and the internal stop. The downlimit switch adjustment is accomplished by bending the switch actuator arm tab so that it just breaks the circuit. On newer actuators, there is an
adjustment screw for use when adjusting the downlimit switch.
NOTE
On
airplane
serials CE-959 and after, CJ-156 and after, D-10380 and after, E-1879 and after, and
slightly slower than on previous serials because the
EA-247 and after, the landing gear will retract

motor used runs slower in the retract cycle.
Allow 2 minutes of
k.
cooling
time between each extend and retract
Extend and retract the
namic brake is
landing
operating correctly.
cycle
gear two or three times to assure that the switches are correctly set and the
Check the hand crank each time to ensure proper adjustment.
dy-
NOTE
It may be necessary to make a closer setting of the limit switches, but there should never be less
than 118 of a turn (5/8 of a turn with the new (or white) actuators) on the hand crank in either the
extended
or
retracted
position.
Adjust the main landing gear retract rod (either right or left) to maintain a minimum of 1/16-inch clearance between the joint (knee) of the V-brace and the lift leg and the top wing skin with the landing gear fully retracted. The
main landing gear should retract only far enough to clear the inboard door while maintaining the minimum clearance
of 1/16-inch. To decrease the clearance between the knee and the top wing skin, shorten the retract rod; to increase
clearance, lengthen the retract rod.
i.
m.
When the proper setling is obtained, leave the landing gear in the retracted position and screw the upper stop
against the main strut. To assure a firm seating, insert a O.OOSinch feeler gage under the bolt head and
bolt down
adjust
the bolt until
gage removed,
firm, steady effort is required
screw
the bolt down
an
to
pull
the feeler gage from under the bolt head. With the feeler
Tighten the locknut securely.
additional 3/4 turn.
NOTE
Refer to service instructions No. 0448-211, Rev, 1, entitled Landing Gear
Mechanism installation of Uplock Roller Lubricating Bolt Assembly.
n.
Check the
uplock roller for free
movement and
Main Gear Retract
maximum clearance of 0.010 to 0.020 inch between the roller
uplock block. If this clearance is not correct, the uplock block must be adjusted. To adjust, loosen the block
retaining bolts and adjust the clearance between the roller and the uplock block. The uplock bracket and the block
and the
are
bar
serrated and the serrations must be interlocked.
32-30-00
Raylheon Aircraft
o.
Extend the
landing
gear and attach the
uplock
cable to the bracket.
CAUTION i
IcnuTloN
The attach bolt
uplock cable must be installed with the head of the bolt pointing aft. The bolt
position to avoid interference between the bolt and the stringer in the wheel
landing gear is fully retracted.
on
the
must be installed in this
well when the

Retract the
landing gear intermittently as in step i and observe the locking action of the uplock bracket. Starting
is an indication that the uplock cable is too tight. The cable should be adjusted for a tension of 52.5
10 0 pounds in the up position. The tension is adjusted at the outboard end of the cable. If sufficient adjustment
is not obtainable at the cable eye, additional adjustment may also be made at No. 3 wing rib by moving the cable
housing inboard or outboard.
p.
to lock too
soon
Extend the landing gear and check the force required to deflect the main landing gear knee joint. With the landgear in the down position, it should take 45 to 60 pounds of force to deflect the knee joint. To increase tension,
add 100951S063XP washers under the inboard end of the spring as required. Maintain a total minimum gap of 0.06
q.
ing
inch between the
spring coils. (The
total gap is the
of all the gaps between the
sum
coils.)
NOTE
If unable to obtain
adequate spring tension, check for worn spherical bearing in the retract linkage.
spherical bearing has the effect of shortening the entire linkage, causing the rod end
spring to compress and stack, leaving nothing for spring adjustments. New bushings will shorten
the linkage, again permitting adjustment of the spring.
Wear in the
A minimum of 55
on
the
1.
wheels
2.
nose
pounds of deflection force is required at the union of the V-brace and the drag leg assembly
landing gear in the fully down position. To obtain the required force, adjust as follows:
gear with the
Lower the
clearing
landing
gear to
just
short of the
fully
down
position
with
no
tension
on
the V-brace and with the
the floor.
A maximum of three 100951DD064XM washers may be added to the end of the
spring
on
the forward
re-
tract rod.
3.
If the additional washers did not
retract rod may be

4.
After the
adjusted (shortened
adjustment,
provide the required minimum deflection force, the rod

lengthened) to obtain the required deflection force.
end
on
the forward
or
check that the retract
spring
does not stack at any
point during
full travel of the
nose
gear.
CAUTION I
~cnuTloru
Do not adjust the rod end bearing out more than
nut and the end of the threads on the rod end
maximum of 0.25 inch
as
measured between the
landing gear in the fully retracted position and the landing gear doors disconnected, a force of 30
pounds applied downward at the center line of the tow pin shall be required to move the strut off the bumper.
If this force is not obtained, adjust the rod ends on the aft nose gear retract rod. With the nose wheel in the fully
s.
With the
bearing.
nose
to 35
Page
32-30-00
Raytheon Aircraft
retracted
.quired
to
position
move
and both doors
the strut 0.12 inch
fully rigged, a minimum force of 20 pounds, applied as noted above,

(at the tow pin) measured along the line of force application.
shall be
re-
landing gear on the outboard door to ensure that the door is not damaged
when retracted. Connect outboard door linkage and retract landing gear slowly, checking to ensure that clearance
is maintained between the door and the landing gear. After checking to see that the door is not too tight, run the
landing gear down and adjust the linkage as required; continue this procedure until a snug, firm fit is obtained when
the door is completely closed.
t.
Unscrew the
attaching
link of the main
landing gear inboard door linkage, retract the landing gear slowly and check for clearance
linkage and the root rib. Run the landing gear to the 3/4 extended position and adjust to maintain
114 inch of maximum clearance between the tire and the inboard door with slack removed from the door linkage.
Continue this procedure until the door closes tightly in both the up and down positions. Adjust doors by varying the
length of the push-pull linkage rods. Disconnect the rods at the clevis fittings to make this adjustment.
u.
Connect the main
between the door
CAUTION
I cnlmolll
Install the pushrod attaching bolt for the main landing gear door in the door linkage bracket with the
head to the aft. If installed wrong, the bolt may catch on the fuselage skin and root rib of the wing,
causing damage to the landing gear retract mechanism or preventing the landing gear from retract-
ing.
landing gear door linkage and rig the nose door. Check closely to see that the right hand aft
Adjust the nose landing gear doors by varying the length of the push-pull linkage rods in the
hinge
nose wheel well. With the landing gear retracted, the doors should have a slight tension on them from the actuator
rods to keep the doors from vibrating.
v.
Connect the
nose
clears the tire.
landing gear safety switch for the proper adjustment on the right and left main landing gear. Measure
the piston from the bottom of the shock strut cylinder and mark the piston with a piece of tape
Detail
D). Raise the wheel with a small jack, compressing the shock strut, until the tape is even with the
(Figure 1,
lower edge of the cylinder. Adjust the switch actuating arm at the clevis so the switch is actuated as the tape touches
the end of the cylinder. Remove the small jack from the wheel. Pull Landing Gear Motor circuit breaker. Disconnect
the left safety switch operating arm at the torque link and position to simulate an "on ground" position. Select "Gear
Up", check for audible warning. Select "Gear Down". Connect the safety switch operating arm. Repeat the process
with the right landing gear safety switch. On airplane serials CJ-180 and after, CE-1301, CE-1307 and after, E-2458,
E-2468 and after and EA-488 and after, check the landing gear retract-prevent switch for proper operation per Chapw.
Check the
314 inch down
on
ter 32-60-00.
Check the landing gear position lights. The lights are mounted on the sub panel. Three green lights, one for each
gear, are illuminated whenever the landing gears are down and locked. The red light illuminates any time one or all
of the landing gears are in transit or in any intermediate position. All of the lights will be out when the gears are up
and locked.
x.
y.
Recheck the
light
switch
adjustment.
CE-1307 and after, CJ-180 and after, E-2458, E-2468 and after, EA-488 and after,
check the throttle retract-prevent switch for proper operation as instructed in Chapter 32-60-00.
airplane serials CE-1301,
z.
On
aa.
Safety
p~l
all bolts,
tighten
all lock nuts and
remove
the
airplane
from the
jacks.
32-30-00
Dec
23/9 Page
Ray~heon Aircraft
RETRACT ACTUA TOR DISASSEMBL Y

FIGURE 2
safety wire and remove the bolts (34) and washers attaching the retract
housing (35). Remove the spur and pinion gear (2) from the landing gear motor.
a.
Cut the
b.
Remove the snap
c.
Remove the cotter
actuator drive shaft
ring (3),
(7).
Remove the snap
e.
Remove the cotter
f.
the lower
and the woodruff
h.
Cut the
upper
(25)
and the
actuator retract arm
from the
(28)
to the upper actuator
worm
from the actuator drive shaft
spanner wrench,
the
remove
screws
remove
remove
(15)
and washers
the retainer nut
(17)
and
attaching
remove
the
the
the actuator
from the upper and lower actuator
bearings (26)
safety wire and remove

actuator housing (35).
Using
key (39)
(1)
gear shaft
pin, nut, washers, support plate (37), snap ring (5) and the actuator retract arm (6)
Push the shaft out of the actuator assembly in the direction of the arrows.
housings. Caref ully separate both housings and

stop assembly (32) and the spacer (33).
Remove the seal
j.
(4)
pin, nut, washers and bolt (9). Cut the safety wire and
actuator housing (36) to the upper actuator housing (35).
g.
i.
drive gear
Index mark both
tor gear
the
worm
ring (27) and the
d.
attaching
the
motor
(8)
screws
and washers
sector
worm
and
housings (35
gear shaft
from the
(7).
the hand crankshaft
worm
(19).
(1 0),
the
36).
housing (16)
(19)
sec-
to the
in the direction of
arrows.
Remove the cotter
gear shaft
(19)
and
pin
and loosen the locknut
remove
the
bearing (20)
k.
Remove the
I.
Remove the seal
m.
Remove the
(22)
and the locknut
and the
bearing (29)
(21) enough
to enable the
bearing (20)
to slide down the
worm
split bushing (18).

(21)
bearings (23
and the grease fill
from the
and
24)
worm
gear shaft
from the upper
plug (30), with
(19).
housing (35).
the ball check
(31),
from the upper actuator
housing
(35).
n.
Remove the
screw
(11),
washer and the nut
attaching
the actuator hand crank
(12)
to the
engaging
shaft
(38)
for the hand crank.

Remove the spacer (13) and the O-ring seal
from the hand crank shaft housing (16).
o.
Page
32-30-00
(14)
from the hand crank
engaging shaft (38)
and
remove
the shaft
Raytheon Aircraft
14. O-RING SEAL

15. SCREW
16. HAND CRANKSHAFT HOUSING

17. RETAINER NUT
5\
18. SPLIT BUSHING
r\
19. WORM GEAR SHAFT
10d~6;
20. BEARING
ri"
21. LOCKNUT
SEAL
.2GNIRAEB
23.
24. BEARING
~Zh
25. SEAL
,19
26. BEARING
27. SNAP RING
39
28. ACTUATOR RETRACT ARM
30
11\
29. BEARING
30. GREASE FITTING PLUG
35
3~
31. BALL CHECK
N~q
SECTC)R GEAR STOP ASSEMBLY

26
34
33. SPACER
34. BOLT
~h
35. UPPER ACTUATOR HOUSING
36. LOWER ACTUATOR HOUSING
a~
32
aI
1. MOTOR
37. UPPER LANDING GEAR
SUPPORT PLATE
~o
33
25
2. SPUR AND PINION GEAR

26
23
38. HAND CRANK ENGAGING
SHAFT AND SPRING
22
9\
39. WOODRUF KEY
3. SNAP RING
4. WORM DRIVE GEAR

5. SNAP RING
6. ACTUATOR RETRACT ARM
7. ACTUATOR DRIVE SHAFT
8.SCREW
9. BOLT
10. ACTUATOR WORM SECTOR
11. SCREW
12. ACTUATOR HAND CRANK
27
13. SPACER
Landing
Gear Actuator
Figure
A21
Assembly
32-30-00
Dec
23/9 Page
11
Ray~heon Aircraft
RETRACT ACTUA TOR CLEANING AND

PARTS REPLACEMENT
with PD680 solvent
(16,
Clean all
parts
sive
Check all gears for cracks, chips, missing teeth, nicks and wear. Check the
Replace all worn or damaged parts and seals during assembly.
Chart 1,
91-00-00).
Check all
bearings
and
wear.
damage.
bushings for cracks and exceshousing for cracks, wear and
RETRACTACTUATOR ASSEMBLY
FIG URE 2
a.
thread the locknut
(21) on the worm gear shaft (19) and slip the bearing (20) on the shaft with the shield
toward
the
slotted end of the worm gear shaft. Install the split bushing (18) on the shaft and tightbearing
the locknut ~21) against the bearing (20) and install a new coffer pin.
Fully
side of the
en
NOTE
Cut the ends of the coffer
the cotter
pin ends tightly
pin
so
across
Install the
bearings (23
and
c.
Install the
bearing (29)
in the upper actuator
d.
Slide the
gear shaft
(19)
protrude beyond the locknut (21). Bend
the nut.
b.
worm
24)
that 0.12 to 0.19 inch will
and the seal
(22)
into the upper actuator
housing (35).
housing (35).
into the upper actuator
housing (35)
in the
opposite
direction of the
arrows.
CAUTION
I cnlmohll
Do not
e.
ring
the seal
Lubricate the threads of the retainer nut
f.
damage
housing (35)
with
(22)
(17)
while
with
installing
light coating
the
worm
gear shaft
of thread lube
spanner wrench. Stake the nut in three
Place the hand crank engagement shaft and

seal (14).
spring (38)
(19).
(43, Chart 1, 91-00-00)

places.
in the hand crank shaft
housing(l6)
and install
and install the O-
housing (16) in the mounted position. Maintain a clearance of 0.001 to 0.015 inch beengaging shaft (38) and the worm gear shaft (19) with the worm gear fully seated in its thrust
bearing in the direction of the arrows. Coat the mating surfaces of the hand crank housing (16) and the upper actuator housing (35) with sealer (44, Chart 1, 91-00-00) and secure with screws (15) and safety wire.
g.
Position the hand crank
tween the hand crank
NOTE
To maintain the
spacer
h.
Dec
specified clearance, the actuator hand crank (12)
may be added
or
Position the actuator hand crank
with the
i.
(1 3)
screw
Install the
23/9Page
12
(11),
may be faced off and/or additional
removed.
(12)
and the spacer
(13)
on
the hand crank
engaging
shaft
(38)
and
secure
washer and nut.
bearings (26)
and the seals
32-30-00
(25)
in the upper and lower actuator
housings (35
and
36).
nal
Raytheon Aircraft
NOTE
Coat the outside diameters of the seals
j.
the double tooth of the
Align
drive shaft
(7).
Install the
spline
(25)
sealing compound (45, Chart 1, 91-00-00).
of the actuator retract
the shaft with the snap
arm on
with
arm
(28)
with the space
on
the
spline
on
the actuator
ring (27).
NOTE
If the
landing gear retract actuator is to be installed in the airplane, the retract actuator arm (28) and
the snap ring (27) should be sacked and tied until after the installation of the landing gear actuator
in the airplane.
Slide the actuator drive shaft
k.
stall the spacer
I.
Align
tuator
(7)
into the lower actuator
housing (36)
actuator
to the arrows. In-
the space of the spline on the actuator drive shaft (7) with the double center tooth of the
sector (10). Install the actuator worm sector (10) on the shaft.
mating surfaces, and the machined surfaces where the

housings (35 and 36) with sealer (44, Chart 1, 91-00-00).
Insert bolt
n.
opposite
spline
of the
ac-
worm
Coat the
m.
in the direction
(33).
(9) through
the lower actuator
housing (36)
and
bolt
position
(9)
is installed,
on
the sector gear stop
the upper and lower
assembly (32)
over
the
bolt.
Align the index marks made during the disassembly, and position the upperactuator housing (35)
housing (36). Install washers and screws (8) and safety wire.
o.
over
the lower
actuator
Install the washer and nut
p.
on
the bolt
(9)
and
tighten. Secure
the nut with
a new
cotter
pin.
the space of the spline of the actuator drive shaft (7) with the double tooth of the spline on the actuator
retract arm (6). Install the arm on the shaft with the snap ring (5). Install washers, upper landing gear support plate
Align
q.
(37),
nut and a new cotter
Install the woodruff

Install the
s.
(2)
worm
pin.
key (39)
in the
(4) on the worm

housing (35), making
drive gear
keyway
of the
worm
gear shaft
(19).
snap
ring (3). Install the spur and

gear shaft (19) with the
sure the teeth engage those of the worm drive gear (4).
pinion
Lubricate that portion of the upper actuator housing (35) containing the spur and pinion gear (2) and the
drive gear (4) with approximately one ounce of MIL-G-81322 grease (46, Chart 1, 91-00-00). Fill to within
0
inch of the housing center line.
t.
u.
Install the retract motor
v.
Lubricate the actuator assembly,
When
properly filled,
the upper actuator
the oil level
Install the ball check
w.
on
(31)
housing (35)
with bolts
(34)
and washers, and
gear
worm
0.10
safety wire.
through the grease fill port, with one half pint of grease (47, Chart 1, 91-00-00).
dip stick inserted through the filler port will be approximately 1/4 inch.
on a
and the grease fill
plug (30)
housing (35).
LANDING GEAR RETRACTACTUATOR FUNCTIONAL TEST

To
proper operation and break-in of the actuator, the

to installation of a newly overhauled actuator in the
ensure
with
p~zl
prior
following
airplane.
functional test
procedure
must be
32-30-00
complied
Aircraft
Operate the landing gear retract actuator for five retract and extend cycles with the actuator mechanically loaded
an equivalent of 20 amps in both directions. The motor terminal voltage shall be maintained at 28
0.03 volts.
to
The stop distance of the dynamic brake, as measured in revolutions of the hand crank, must not vary from the total
maximum-to-minimum stop distance by more than 1/16 of a revolution.
The noise output shall not deviate
and frequency.
After the functional test
excessively from the
have been
procedures
average of other
performed, place
accepted
actuators in
functional test stamp
respect
to
approximately
amplitude
1.5 inches
inboard of center line of the lubrication fill hole.
LANDING GEAR SAFEN SYSTEM MAINTENANCE AND ADJUSTMENT

No maintenance is required for the landing gear safety system, other than replacing defective units or checking the
electrical wiring for condition, security of attachment, and tightness of electrical connections. The switches are preset and adjustment will not normally be required; however, should the system fail to function properly, the following
checks and
adjustments
may be
accomplished.
CHECK OF LANDING GEAR SAFETY SYSTEM WITH SAFETY SWITCH IN TEST POSITION
a.
Place the throttle in the closed
b.
Place the
battery
or
retarded
master switch ON. The
position.
landing
gear circuit breaker may be either IN
or
OUT.
Place the
landing gear safety system switch in the momentary fully up (test) position. Noise or movement of the
landing gear position switch indicates that the automatic landing gear extension part of the system
is functioning properly. The on-off switch returns normally to the ON position unless the pilot intentionally places the
switch in the OFF position.
c.
solenoid in the
LANDING GEAR SAFETY SYSTEM MICROSWITCH ADJUSTMENT
FIGURE 3
The microswitch cannot be
must
be
ascertained
accurately adjusted on the ground.

the throttle warning
horn
Before the
that
switch
is
safety system microswitch is adjusted, it

properly adjusted. See ENGINE-
COMPARTMENT-LOCATED LANDING GEAR WARNING SWITCH ADJUSTMENT

LANDING GEAR WARNING SWITCH ADJUSTMENT in this
chapter for
switch. The
as
safety system
microswitch may then be
ters
airplane in flight, mark the

approximately 18 inches of Hg.
b.
With the
a.
With the
it
airplane
just
as
c.
Adjust the
was
on
the
when the mark
ground,
was
move
the throttle until the mark
cam
airplane
was
setting
or
PEDESTAL-LOCATED
of the throttle
warning
horn
follows:
throttle control at the control
made while the
microswitch until the
adjusted
proper
in
panel when
on
the manifold pressure gage
the control is
aligned
with the control
regis-
panel
flight.
clicks the switch closed with the throttle in the
position indicated
in the pre-
ceding step.
LANDING GEAR SAFETY SYSTEM PRESSURE SWITCH ADJUSTMENT
The pressure switches are preset and will not normally require adjustment. Because of the built-in tolerance of these
switches, they should not be tampered with unless radically out of adjustment, that is unless the switch in question
fails to actuate at an airspeed within 2 mph above or below the setting recommended for it. Even then the system
plumbing and electrical wiring should be checked

improper adjustment of the pressure switches.
Dec
32-30-00
to ascertain that the source of trouble is not
something
other than
an
Ral~heon Aircraft
a.
Placetheairplane onjacks.
b.
With the master switch ON, the
landing
OFF, advance the throttle to its maximum

c.
Place the
landing
d.
Place the
landing gear position
e.
Clamp
gear
safety position
gear circuit breaker ON, and the
warning
gear
circuit breaker
position.
switch in the ON
switch in the UP
section of soft rubber hose
landing
over
the
position.
position.
pitot head inlet, making certain
f.
Crimp the end of the tubing and roll it up until the airspeed indicator registers
retracting immediately if the pressure switch is properly adjusted.
that the connection is
90
mph.
The
landing
airtight.
gear will start
CAUTION
ICAVTIONI
To avoid
rupturing the diaphragm of the airspeed indicator,
tubing must be
the rubber
g. If the landing gear failed to retract in the preceding step, turn the master switch OFF and
switch (upper switch of the two installed in the left main wheel well) as follows:
1.
Secure the rolled up
2.
Connect
tubing
so
that it will hold the
airspeed
indicator
reading
continuity tester across the contacts of the pressure switch,

mphreading on the airspeed indicator.
at 90
rolled slowly.
adjust
the pressure
mph.
then turn the
adjustment
screw
until
the switch closes at the 90

h.
Turn the master switch
cure
i.
the
tubing
so
that the
and roll up the rubber tubing until the

airspeed indicator will hold that reading.
on
airspeed
indicator
registers
130
mph,
then
se-
Retard the throttle.
Slowly bleed off pressure until the airspeed indicator registers

j.
ately if the pressure switch is properly adjusted.
120
mph.
k.
Should the landing gear fail to extend, turn the master switch OFF and
of the two in the left main wheel well) as follows:
1.
Secure the rolled up
2.
Connect
tubing
so
airspeed
The
landing
adjust the
indicator
reading
continuity tester across the contacts of the pressure switch,

mph reading on the airspeed indicator.
gear will extend immedi-
pressure switch
at 120
then turn the
(lower switch
mph.
adjustment
screw
until
the pressure switch closes at the 120

I.
n21
Turn the master switch ON and check the
landing gear safety system through
the
complete cycle
of
operation.
32-30-00Pagel5
Raylheon Aircraft
THROTTLE CONTROL SHAFT

THROTTLE WARNING HORN SWITCH
THROTTLE WARNING HORN SWITCH
THROTTLE CONTROL SHAFT
OQ
Ig P
LANDING GEAR SAFFPI SWITCH

THAN EA-1 AND AFTER)
(SERIALS OTHER
LOPTIONAL LANDING GEAR SAFETY SWITCH
(EA-1 AND AFTER)
35-223-5
Landing
Gear
Safety System
and Throttle
Figure
Dec
23/9Page
16
32-30-00
Warning
Horn Microswitch
A21
QeechcraR
BONANZA SERIES
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
WHEELS AND BRAKES

AND OPERATION
DESCRIPTION
piston housing forces the two brake linings

against the rotating brake assemblies. The pistons are
sealed against leakage with O-rings.
tons in the
MAIN WHEEL ASSEMBLIES

The
airplanes
are
equipped
SHUTTLE VALVE
with two Cleveland 6:00 X
Each wheel consists of

wheel half held
inner and outer
an
together
magnesium
with bolts, washers, and nuts.
The cup bearings for the inner halves and cone bearings for the outer wheel halves, as well as seals, are
installed in the hub
assemblies
are
area
of the wheels. The brake disc
bolted to the inner wheel half. A snap

wheel
ring is used on each side of the complete

assembly to retain the bearings and seals.
NOSE WHEEL ASSEMBLY
The
airplane is equipped with

nose wheel assembly.
The
nose
wheel consist of
slum wheel half held
an
cone
lining MUST be replaced before the metal

exposed through the abrasive surface.
backplate
This can be checked visually without disassembling
The brake
is
inner and outer magneand
assembly has an inner

bearing assembly, outside of
wheel
and outer cup

a felt grease seal with
which is
a ring grease seal on

each side of the felt seal. A snap ring is used on each
side of the complete wheel assembly to retain the
bearings and seals,
th, brake. The minimum allowable thickness for the

abrasive surface is 3/32 inch above the rivet. The
brake disc should be

measures.450 inch.
I,,,,i,,l the brakes disc will

color
as
assume a
the result of heat. These
normal and need not be
a cause
appearance of the brake
changes
for
light
straw
incolor
concern.
are
glazed
also is normal; the

the effectiveness of the
linings
brakes.
The main wheel tires
on
the
airplane
7:00 X 6
are
tires. An inflation pressure of 33 to 40

should be maintained on these tires.
tube-type
wheel tire
nose
tube-type
the
on
airplane
is
5:00 X 5
tire. An inflation pressure of 40

on the tire.
psi
psi
should
be maintained
HYDRAULIC BRAKE SYSTEM

Fill the fluid reservoir, located
BRAKE ASSEMBL Y
(Figure
The
A Cleveland brake
assembly
is installed
on
each main
wheel. The brake assemblies

with MIL-H-5606
are designed for use

hydraulic fluid (9, Chart 1, 91-00-00).
Each Cleveland brake
assembly contains
piston
pistons. The brake assembly contains a pressure plate, a lining, and a backing plate
with a brake lining. The brake assembly torque plate
is attached to the flange of the wheel axle. Braking
action occurs when hydraulic pressure to the two piswith two
on
the forward side of
the firewall, to within 1-1/2 inches of the tap and maintain a visible fluid level on the dip stick at all times by
adding MIL-H-5606 hydraulic

00) as necessary.
housing
when its thickness
replaced
glaze actually improves
TIRES
The
dual brakes are plumbed in series without a shuttle

valve. The parking brakes may be set with either the
pilots or copilots brake pedals on the new system.
together with bolts, washers,
nose
serials CE-839 and after, CJ-150 and after, D-10209

and after, E-1432 and after, and EA-3 and after, the
BRAKE WEAR AND WEAR LIMITS

Cleveland 5:00
nuts.
Each side of the
airplanes with dual brake systems, the earlier airplanes (prior to CE-839, CJ-150, D-10209, E-1432
and EA-3) use a shuttle valve in the hydraulic plumbing of each brake. The shuttle valve prevents the presSUe from flowing from one master cylinder through
the opposite master cylinder of the same brake. At
On
6 main wheel assemblies.
hydraulic
brake system is
fluid
(9,
Chart 1, 91-00-
operated by depressing
the pilots rudder pedals to compress the piston rods

of the attached master cylinders. The hydraulic pressure resulting from the movement of the master cylinder pistons is transmitted through flexible hoses and
fixed aluminum
tubing
to the brake disc assemblies
landing gear. This pressure

forces the brake pistons to press against the linings
and the disc of the brake assembly. Upon release of
mounted
each main
against the piston, the brakes disc will

tendency to drag against the stationary liners.
pressure
a
on
have
32-40-00
Page 1
A17
Nov 16/94
BONANZA SERIES
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
f~hff,
INLET
A--LINING
RIVETSTORQUE
PLATE
INSULATOR
OUTLET
BRAKE MASTER CYLINDER
DISC
DETAIL A
i(/
PRESSURE PLATE
PISTON
CY\-\Nt3ERS
BRAKE ASSEMBLY
DErAI1 C
PARKING BRAKE VALVES
DETA1L B
BRAKE RESERVOIR
PARKING BRAKE
VALVES
jj
PRESSURE LINE
BLEEDER HOSE
i (I
SOURCE OF COMPRESSED AIR
FOR PRESSURE BLEEDING
PRESSURE
POT
C94CE32B1990
Brake
System
Figure 1
32-40-00
Page
Nov 16/94
A~7
Beecbcraft
BONANZA SERIES
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
TROUBLESHOOTING
BRAKE SYSTEM
1. Solid
pedal
no
REMARKS
PROBABLE CAUSE
INDICATION
Brake \inings
allowable limits
brakes
a.
worn
beyond
a.
Replace linings.
brake.
a.
Air in
a.
Bleed brake
3. Unable to hold pressure.
a.
Leak in brake system.
a.
Visually
2.
b. Defective master
4. Parki
brake will not hold.
a.
a.
Stones or
brake disc.
grab
a.
b.
A
parking
b. Check master
cylinder.
Air in
Warped
foreign
or
matter
locking
bent disc.
hydraulic lines, the parking brake is

parking brake handle. This
closed
Clean brake disc and
b.
Replace
linings.
disc.
NOTE
While Beech Aircraft Corporation cannot
recommend the use of recapped tires,
tires retreaded by an FAA approved
by pulling
closes the valve
repair
station with
specialized
service-
limited rating per TSO-C62e may be
and retains the pressure in the brake lines. The parking brake is released when the parking brake handle
pushed in. The optional dual brake system provides

the hydraulic breaking action from the copilots position as well as the pilots position.
seals
valve.
a.
brake valve is installed under the floor-
boards, forward of the pilots seat. After the pilots

pedals have been depressed to build pressure in the
out the
cylinder
Bleed brake
b. R
brake valve.
b. Defective
5. Brakes
check entire brake

for leaks.
used.
is

REMOVAL
a.
WHEELS AND BRAKES
MAINTENANCE
PRACTICES
Place the
Smooth wheel abrasions, nicks and burrs with a fine

file and retouch with zinc chromate primer and a\umi-
ters
or
backplate assembly.
hydraulic line, and remove

the cylinder assembly by sliding the two guide pins out
,f the torque plate.
c.
Disconnect the brake
NOTE
slightly due to shock loads during landings. Normally, this growth is balanced by
wear so
Removal of the wheel only does not

necessitate disconnection of the line.
wear,
Tires in service grow
tread
the
to
excessive
there is
no
increase in tire diameter.
Remove the cotter pin, wheel retaining nut,

washer and spacer. Slide the wheel and inner spacer
d.
off the axle.

e.
Corporation cannot recommend the

use of recapped tires. The tires may pass the retraction test when first installed; however, recapped tires
have a tendency to swell after use and may cause
malfunctions of the retract system or damage the
landing gear doors.
Beech Aircraft
jacks.
Remove the four bolts which attach the brake

backplate and inner linings to the cylinders, then
prevent corrosion. Replace any damwheel

aged
parts. Replace tires showing breaks, blis-
lacquer
num
on
b.
remove
WHEEL AND TIRE MAINTENANCE
airplane
The brake disc
removing
assembly can
join the
the six bolts which
be removed
by
wheel halves.
NOTE
linings and cylinder assembly

removing the
wheel by utilizing steps a, b, and c.
The brake
can
be removed without
32-40-00
Page
A17
Nov 16/94
aeechcraft
BONANZA SERIES
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
MAIN WHEEL INSPECTION AND
Inspect the brake disc assembly for cracks,

g.
excessive wear, or scoring, rust and corrosion.
Remove rust and blend out small nicks with a fine
CLEANING
-I
WARNING
emery cloth. The brake disc should be

its thickness measures .450 inch.
Inspect the wheel bolts for cracks, corrosion

damage. Replace any cracked bolts.
h.
dry cleaning solutions are

toxic and volatile, use in a wellventilated area, avoid contact with
skin or clothing and do not inhale the
BRAKE ASSEMBL Y INSPECTION AND
CLEANING
vapors,
Clean
a.
Degrease
parts and dry
bristled brush may be used to
all
thoroughly.
remove
or
other
Because
a.
replaced when
A soft
hardened
O-rings
in clean
91-00-00)
aged or excessively
or
hydraulic fluid (9, Chart 1,

O-rings are damshould
be replaced.
they
denatured alcohol. If
worn
grease, dust, and dirt.

CAUTION
Do not
spin
the
pressed
air
this will
as
bearings
cause
with
Gasoline and dry cleaning fluids are

unsuitable as cleaning agents because
they will damage O-rings.
com-
damage.
b. Visually inspect bearing cups and cones for nicks,

scratches, water stains, galling, heat discoloration,
roller wear, cage damage, and cracks
Replace if damaged or worn.
Inspect
or
distortion.
inspection,
Inspect wheel halves for cracks, corrosion and

other damage. Cracked and badly corroded castings
should be replaced. Small nicks, scratches or pits can
be blended out using fine (400-grit) sandpaper.
e.
Inspect snap rings and grease seals for deterioration and wear; replace if damaged or deformed.
Lightly saturate the felt seals with 10W30 oil (remove
by pressing lightly). Coat
diameter with
same
the sides and outer
type of grease
as
that used
on
and greasy surfaces with denatured
Inspect entire brake assembly for cracking, nicks,

corrosion, damaged threads, etc. Check cylinder walls
for scoring or excessive wear.
Carefully inspect pistons for nicks or burrs which
might damage the O-rings. Remove nicks and burrs
with fine crocus cloth, then thoroughly clean.
e.
be
ets.
INSTALLA 710N
a.
f.
Inspect bearing cups for looseness, scratches, pitting, corrosion, or evidence of overheating. Coat the
bearing cups with bearing grease. Repack with either
Aero Shell No. 5
Chart 1,
or
other greases per MIL-G-81322
91-00-00).
Inspect all brake iinings for cracks. Linings should

replaced if they are worn 3/32 inch above the riv-
the
bearing,
(46,
dirty
d.
d.
excess
Clean
c.
the wheel
bearing grease for contamination and solidification at each periodic maintenance

c.
b.
alcohol.
Clean and
repack wheel bearings
as
indicated in
MAIN WHEEL INSPECTION AND CLEANING in this
chapter. Replace
any damaged grease seals, and be

the grease seal retaining rings and snap rings
in place before reinstalling the wheel.
sure
are
b.
Install inner spacer, wheel, outer spacer, washer,

retaining nut and cotter pin.
NOTE
least one 100951X100VY or
100951X050VY washer shall be
installed between the outer spacer and
wheel retaining nut to permit free rotation of the wheel
At
Aero Shell No. 5 grease is not compatible with other greases covered by MILG-81322. Use
one
only Aero Shell No. 5

of the other greases; do not mix.
or
32-40-00
Page
Nov 16/94
A17
aeechcraft
BONANZA SERIES
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
c.
Install the brake
the two guide
cylinder assembly by inserting

pins into the torque plate.
roller wear, cage damage, and cracks

Replace if damaged or worn.
NOTE
If the torque plate has been removed, it
should be reinstalled so that the guide
pin holes are positioned aft and centered
above and below the horizontal centerline of the axle. The torque plate nuts
are
to be
c.
Torque the axle

1.
d.
and
retaining
nut.
rough threads
Apply bearing grease
or
on
the axle
to the axle
threads and the

2.
While
retaining nut
the bearings
3.
4.
bearing surface of the nut.

rotating the wheel, tighten
to 180 to 240
are
properly
seated.
Back off the axle
retaining nut to
nut with fingers to
Retighten the
bearings.
the axle
to ensure that
zero
torque,
remove
end
5.
Torque
the axle
ing position and install
retaining
the cotter
Inspect
wheel halves for cracks, corrosion, and
Inspect the snap rings and grease seals for deterioration and wear; replace if damaged or deformed.
Lightly saturate felt seals with 10W30 oil (remove
excess by pressing lightly). Coat the sides and outer
e.
diameter with the
same
bearings.
Inspect the bearing cups
scratches, pitting, corrosion,
b.
Remove the cotter
nose
nut to the next
key-
pin.
c.
Remove the
nose
on
and cones for looseness,

or evidence of overheat-
CAUTION
pin, nut, and bushing

assembly on the axle.
wheel
that used
UIUTlOhl(
Aero Shell IVo. 5 grease is not compatible with other greases covered with
MIL-G-81322. Use only Aero Shell No. 5
or one of the other greases; do not mix.
wheel.
retain the nose wheel
as
cups and cones with bearing grease.

Aero Shell No. 5 grease or other
with
either
Repack
MIL-G-81322
(46, Chart 1, 91-00-00),
greases per
NOSE WHEEL REMOVAL

Jack the
type grease
the
Bleedthebrake systemif necessary.
a.
grease for contaminaperiodic maintenance
ing. Coat the
in the
play
e.
inch-pounds
distortion.
other damage. Cracked or badly corroded castings

should be replaced. Small nicks, scratches, or pits can
be blended out using fine (400-grit) sandpaper.
nut as follows:
Check for burrs
bearing
the wheel
or
inspection.
pounds.
d.
Inspect
tion and solidification at each
to 100 to 140 inch-
torqued
Visually inspect bearing cups and cones for nicks,

scratches, water staining, galling, heat discoloration,
b.
which
assembly by sliding
it off
the axle.
Inspect the wheel bolts for cracks, corrosion

g.
other damage. Replace any cracked bolts.
NOSE WHEEL INSPECTION AND
CLEANING
or
NOSE WHEEL INSTALLATION

WARNING
Clean and repack wheel bearings as indicated in

NOSE WHEEL INSPECTION AND CLEANING in this
chapter. Replace any damaged grease seals, and be
a.
Dry cleaning
solutions are toxic and

volatile. Use In a well ventilated area,
Avoid contact with skin or clothing.
Do not inhale the vapors.
a.
Degrease all parts and dry thoroughly,
bristle brush may be used to

grease, dust, and di~.
remove
sure
are
snap
rings
NOTE
a
soft
A bushing is permanently installed on
the inboard end of the axle. No other
hardware is required between the wheel
and the inboard end of the axle.
hardened
CAUTION
b.
Do not spin the bearings with compressed air. This will cause damage.
retaining rings and

place before reinstalling the wheel.
the grease seal
in
Install the wheel, outer spacer,
cotter
c.
retaining
nut and
pin.
Torque the axle
nut as follows:
32-40-00
Page
A17
Nov 16/94
BONANZA SERIES
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
1.
Check for burrs or rough threads on the axle
and retaining nut. Apply bearing grease to the axle
threads and bearing surface of the nut,
While
2.
retaining
bearings
rotating
nut to 150
the
properly
are
3.
Back off the axle
4.
While
retaining
locking
If not at
5.
retaining
cylinder
master
hydraulic
and mark the lines to
lines at each
assure
correct
reinstallation.
d.
Remove the master
nuts and
remove
cylinder attaching
cylinder.
bolts and
the master

nut to
zero
torque.
INSTALLA TION
wheel, retorque the axle
inch-pounds
nut to 30
ment of the
inch-pounds
to insure that
Disconnect the two brake
seated.
the
rotating
wheel, tighten the axle
the
200
c.
and check for
align-
Place the
pedal
holes.
locking position, continue tightening

locking locking position and
the axle nut to the first

install the cotter pin.
cylinder in position beneath the

attaching bolts and nuts.
brake
and install the
Connect the two
hydraulic
lines to the
cylinder.
The inlet port is the upper port.

c.
Replenish
the
hydraulic fluid
and bleed the brake
system.
RELINING THE BRAKES
d.
Install the floorboard and floor mat.
BRAKE MASTER CYLINDER LINKAGE

ADJUSTMENT
Do not have the
while
parking brake engaged
removing the
pedals
Remove the four bolts that attach the

to the cylinder assembly.
a.
backplate
assembly
NOTE
The
hydraulic
brake line does not have

remove the brake
to be disconnected to
linings.
b.
backplate
assemblies from the
inboard side of the brake disc and seperate the pressure plate assembly from the cylinder assembly.
Place the
backplate assembly
on a
lining facing down and punch or-drill

attach the linings to the backp\ate.
d.
The
linings
by using
plate.
the
Place the
e.
on
the pressure
same
new
procedure
linings
on
firmly against
f.
The rivets
using
the
the
table with the
out the rivets that
as
the
used
be removed
on
the back-
backplate and install

punch until the lining
backplate.
the pressure plate may be set by

procedure as used on the backplate.
on
same
BRAKE MASTER CYLINDER REMOVAL

a.
Close the
ing
brake handle.
b.
Unsnapthe
parking
brake valve
floor mat and
section below the brake
by pulling
remove
pedals,
DISASSEMBL Y
(Figure 2)
a.
the
park-
thefloorboard
Remove the snap ring (1) and pull the assembled

out of the brake cylinder (2).
piston
b.
plate may
the rivets. Set the rivets with the

is
to
Remove the
c.
linkage adjustment will adjust the brake

straight upright position. This is considered
the best adjustment since it will prevent the pedals
from hitting the firewall in their extreme forward position. Linkage adjustment is obtained by removing the
clevis from the rudder pedal and turning the clevis on
or off the piston rod as required. After both pistons are
adjusted to the same length, tighten the jam nuts.
The proper
brakes,
Remove the clevis
(3)
from the
piston (14) and the

(5), piston
this will free the washer
(4);
guide bushing (6), retainer O-ring (7)
washer (8) from the piston (14).
check nut
c.
Remove the cotter
pull
the collar from the
d.
Remove the cotter
of
pin (9) from

piston.
and the
the collar
rear
seat
(10)
and
pin (11) from the plunger end

piston (12). The return
of the cylinder with the piston
to free the flow lock
piston
spring (13)
will fall free
removed.
BRAKE MASTER CYLINDER CLEANING
AND PARTS REPLACEMENT

Clean all parts with PD680 Solvent (16, Chart 1,
91-00-00). Check all parts for cracks, corrosion, distortion and wear. Replace all washers and seals at
32-40-00
Page 6
Nov 16/94
A17
Qeechcraft
BONANZA SERIES
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
reassembly. Lubricate all parts with MIC-H-5606

hydraulic fluid (9, Chart 1, 91-00-00) prior to assembly. Reassemble the cylinder.
BRAKE MASTER CYLINDER ASSEMBLY
(Figure 2)
a.
Place the return
b.
Slide the flow lock
spring (13)
piston (14)
through the piston and
end of the
c.
in the brake
piston (12),
cylinder.
into the
plunger
pin (11)
and install the cotter

the flow lock
piston.
Place the collar
cotter
(10) on the piston and place

pin (9) through the collar and piston,
the
(8), retainer O-ring (7),

piston guide bushing (6), and washer (5), on the piston (14). Install the check nut (4) and clevis (3) on the
piston.
d.
Install the
rear
seat washer
e.
Slide the assembled
piston into
snap ring (1).
(2).
Install the
the brake
cylinder
b.
Remove the f\oorboards forward of the
pilots
seats.
screw in the cable attach fitting
cable
and adjust the
housing through the mounting
of travel between the cable
inch
1-1/2
block to obtain
the
attach
fitting. The 1-1/2 inch clearhousing and
the parking brake valve
with
made
be
ance should
c.
Loosen the set
lever in the OPEN
position.
mounting block, insert the cable in

cable attach fitting, tighten and safety wire the
screw in the attach fitting.
e.
Tighten
the
Test the
parking
brake
parking
the
set
adjustment by pulling the

operating the brake ped-
brake handle out and
als.
If the brake pedals are not solid, place the parking
brake control in the OFF position and recheck the rig-
f.
ging.
Inspect the
g.
loss.
parking
brake valve for
hydraulic fluid
PARKING BRAKE VALVE REMOVAL

a.
Bleed the brake system of all
b.
Remove the floorboards forward of the
copilots
PARKING BRAKE VALVE DISASSEMBLY
hydraulic fluid.
pilots and
seats.
Disconnect he parking brake cable from the parking brake valve by loosening the set screw and pulling
the cable free of the cable attach fitting.
Disconnect and cap the hydraulic lines from the
parking brake valve. Identify hydraulic lines for ease of
d.
installation.
Remove the attach bolts, and
remove
the valve.
Place the
parking
brake valve in
the floorboards, forward of the

seats. Install the attach bolts.
b.
Connect the
which
c.
they
were
Connect the
ing brake
as
MENT in this
hydraulic
position under
pilots
lines to the
and
ports from
brake cable.
Adjust
the
park-
covered in PARKING BRAKE ADJUST-
chapter.
Bleed the brake system.
e.
Install the floorboards forward of the
pilots-and
seats.
Place the
parking
OPEN) position.
each of the two
Disconnect and remove the retaining

b.
from the end of the cam lever assembly (4).
ring (10)
assembly (4) by grasping

lever assembly counterrotating
clockwise while pulling outward to prevent scoring of
the cam lever assembly surface.
c.
Remove the
cam
lever
the
cam
PARKING BRAKE CLEANING AND PARTS
brake control in the OFF
Clean all parts with PD680 Solvent (16, Chart 1,

91-00-00). Check all parts foy cracks, corrosion, distortion and wear. Replace all washers and seals at
reassembly. Lubricate all parts with hydraulic fluid (9,
Chart 1, 91-00-00) prior to assembly. Reassemble the
parking brake valve.
PARKING BRAKE VAL VE ASSEMBL Y

a.
PARKING BRAKE ADJUSTMENT

a.
remove
from the valve
REPLACEMENT
same
d.
copilots
copilots
removed.
parking
Disconnect and
side
the lever and
PARKING BRAKE VALVE INSTALLATION

a.
side-bythe
Remove
body.
fittings (13)
seal
ball
steel
(2),
O-ring
(8),
(6),
O-ring (7), spring (1),
and pin (3) from each of the two orifices from which
the fittings were removed.
a.
e.
e.
(Figure 3)
Install the
cam
lever
(4)
(valve
with the
new
O-rings (9)
clockwise while
rotating
by grasping
pushing inward to prevent scoring of
assembly surface
the lever and
the cam lever
32-40-00
Page 7
A17
Nov 16/94
~;)eechcraR
BONANZA SERIES
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
b.
Connect the
cam
lever
retaining ring (10),

assembly (4).
to the end of the
Install the pin
(3), seal (2), O-ring (8), steel ball

spring (1) in each of the two side-by-side fit(6),
orifices
on the valve body. Install an O-ring (7), on
ting
each fitting (13), and install the fittings.
c.
and
BLEEDING THE BRAKE SYSTEM
WARNING
Whenever the brakes
are
to
be
released, make sure the airplane is on

level ground and the wheels are
checked.
Use only MIL-H-5606 hydraulic fluid (9, Chart 1,

91-00-00) in the brake system, and ensure that no dirt
or foreign matter is allowed to get into the brake system. Dirt under seals results in leaks or clogging of the
c0mpensating ports in the master cylinders resulting

in brake locking. Beech Aircraft recommends the use
of a pressure pot for bleeding the brakes. If the pressure pot bleeding method is not available, electric
bleeding is recommended. Use the gravity method
only if the other two methods are not available. If the
gravity method is used, pressure bleed the brakes at
the earliest possible time. Using any method, the parking brake control and toe brake pedals must both be
fully released to open the compensating ports in the
master cylinders.
instance, the system must be further checked for leak-
"spongy" after the bleeding

operation,
trapped in the brake cylinders.
Remove the brake assembly and lay it on its side. Add
brake fluid as needed through the bleed port and tap
the brake lightly with a rubber hammer to dislodge any
air bubbies. When air bubbles no longer appear at the
port, install the brake and repeat the bleeding proce-
age.
dure.
If the brakes feel soft
Brake system bleeding will be required whenever the

system is opened at any point between the master
cylinder
and the wheel brake
assembly,
whenever the
brakes become spongy in service, or whenever the

parking brakes will no longer hold. In the latter
16
or
air is
14
12
10
456
i11
3
15
7. RETAINER O-RING
8. REAR SEAT WASHER
9. COTTER PIN
10. COLLAR
1. SNAP RING
11. COTTER PIN
2. CYLINDER
12. FLOW LOCK PISTON
3. CLEVIS
13. RETURN SPRING
4. CHECK NUT
14. PISTON
WASHER
15. O-RING
5.
6. PISTON GUIDE BUSHING
16. VALVE SPRING
Brake Master
Figure
Cylinder
2
32-40-00
Page
Nov 16/94
A17
aeechcraft
BONANZA SERIES
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
GRAVITY BLEEDING
Depress the pilots corresponding brake pedal

slowly and smoothly to eliminate air trapped in the
b.
WARNING
.mpedal
etsy
sdna
depressed position
in the
Hold the
.c.ylbmessa
close the bleeder port at the brake

Whenever the brakes are to be
level ground and the wheels are
checked.
d.
Release the brake
e.
Repeat steps
bleeding
is done from the master
pedal.
through
d until
no more
bubbles
appear in the drained fluid.

f.
This method of
cyl-
Open the bleeder port of the brake assembly on

landing gear and repeat steps b through e.
the other
inder down to the brake
assembly. The brake fluid

kept full during the bleeding operation. Since the pilots and copilots master cylinders
are plumbed in series (except on EA-1 and EA-2), the
entire system is bled by operating the pilots brake
pedals in the following manner:
NOTE
reservoir must be
On serials prior to CE-839, CJ-150,

D-10209, E-1432 and EA-3, the copilots
master cylinder will have to be bled
separately. Repeat steps a through f for
the
NOTE
Make
provision
hydraulic fluid.
Open
a.
one
the bleeder
landing
for
catching
port
copilots
brakes.
the bleeder ports of the brake assemblies.
g.
Tighten
h.
Check the brake reservoir fluid level and add
the drained
of the brake
assembly
on
gear.
hydraulic fluid MIL-H-5606 (9, Chart 1, 91-00-00)

required to obtain a full reading.
i.
as
Spring
2. Seal
3. Pin
4. Cam Lever
/i
7.
,d,s
8.
9.
,2
C!
10.
11
-i11.
Assembly
O-Ring
O-Ring
O-Ring
Retaining Ring
Roll Pin
60222lA
Parking Brake
Figure 3
Valve
32-40-00
Page
A17
Nov 16/94
~eechcraft
BONANZA SERIES
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
TO BRAKE
TO BRAKE
i. RESERVOIR
2. SHUTTLE VALVE
3..PARKING BRAKE VALVE
4. MASTER CYLINDER
Brake
C93EA3280011
System Plumbing
Figure
with Shuttle Valves

4
32-40-00
Page
10
Nov 16/94
A17
~eechcraR
BONANZA SERIES
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
~Ba
.1BRAKE
REDNILYFLUID
C RESERVOIR
2. MASTER
3. PARKING BRAKE VALVE
SINGLE BRAKE SYSTEM
Ifi-I
i
iX
~wi \-h,))
1.1
DUAL BRAKE SYSTEM
35-21924
Brake System Plumbing without Shuttle Valves
Figure
32-40-00
Page 11
A17
Nov 16/94
aeec~craft
BONANZA SERIES
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
i.
Check the brakes for proper operation. When the

brake pedals are depressed, there must be no spongy
feeling and the pedal pressure equal on both brakes.
PRESSURE P0T BLEED(NG
(Figure 1)
k.
Remove the bleeder hose from each
i.
Close the bleeder port of each brake
Connect the fluid reservoir

m.
ervoir.
supply
landing
gear.
assembly.
line to the
res-
hydraulic fluid reservoir and add MILhydraulic fluid (9, Chart 1 91-00-00) as
required to obtain a full reading.
Check the
n.
H-5606
I -II
WARNING
Install the cap
o.
operation of the brakes. There must be

feeling at the brake pedals and the
pedal pressure must be equal on both brakes.
Check the
p.
level ground and the wheels

checked.
the reservoir.
on
no
soft
or
spongy
are
ELECTRIC BLEEDING
hookup for electric bleeding is nearly the same as

pressure pot bleeding except the pressure pot bleeder
is,,placed with an electric bleeder (refer to Figure 1).
The
Pressure
bleeding
is the most efficient method of
bleeding the brakes. This procedure involves attaching a pressure pot to the brake assembly bleeder port
and back bleeding the system to the fluid reservoir.
a.
Remove the cap from the brake fluid reservoir.
b.
Remove the brake fluid from the reservoir.
c.
Disconnect the fluid
and attach
d.
hose to
supply line from

the supply line.
Place the end of the hose in
WARNING

the reservoir,
level ground and the wheels

checked.
clean container to
collect the brake fluid overflow.

e.
f.
Open the bleeder port of

install
bleeder hose
each brake
(shown
in
assembly.
Figure 1)
onto
each brake bleeder port.
g.
Connect the bleeder hose assemblies (shown in

the pressure lines of the pressure pot,
Figure l)to
NOTE
On serials
prior to Cf-839, CJ-150,

D-10209, E-1432 and EA-3 (airplanes
with shuttle valves in the brake
system)
pilots
to actu-
depress
the
brake
pedals
ate the shuttle valve to bleed the
are
a.
Remove the cap from the brake fluid reservoir.
b.
Remove the brake fluid from the reservoir.
Disconnect the fluid supply line from the reservoir,

and attach the electric bleeder fluid return line to the
c.
supply
line.
the bleeder
port of each brake assembly.
d~
Open
e.
Connect the infusion line
each brake bleeder port
on
the electric bleeder to
(Figure 1).
NOTE
prior to CE-839, CJ-150,

D-10209, E-1432 and EA-3 (airplanes
On serials
pilots
with shuttle valves in the brake system)

depress the pilots brake pedals to actuate the shuttle valve to bleed the pilots
brakes, then proceed through step h.
brakes, then proceed through step j.

After the pilots brakes are bled, depress
the copilots brake pedals to actuate the
shuttle valve to bleed the copilots
brakes and follow steps g through j.
pilots brakes are bled, depress

copilots brake pedals to actuate the
shuttle valve to bleed the copilots
brakes and follow steps f through i.
After the
the
h.
Apply a constant pressure of not more than 30

pounds to the pressure pot. Open the pressure pot
control valve.
f.
Bleed the system until the

bubbles.
i.
j.
draining fluid
Close the pressure pot valve.
is free of
Activate the bleeder and set the relief valve to
approximately 15 pounds; this may be ascertained by

observing the pressure gage prior to opening the electric bleeder control valve.
32-40-00
Page
12
Nov 16/94
A17
BONANZA SERIES
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
g. Open the electric bleeder control valve and
observe the returning fluid through the in-line sight
glass.
returning
fluid shows
no
further evi-
dence of air bubbles, close the electric bleeder control

valve.
i.
line.
Connect the fluid reservoir
supply
line to the
res-
i.
Check the brake fluid level and add MIL-H-5606
hydraulic
obtain
m.
(9. Chart 1, 91-00-00)

reading
fluid
full
installthe
caponthe
as
required
to
reservoir.
operation of the brakes. When the

pedals are depressed there should be no
spongy feeling and the pedal pressure should be
equal on both brakes.
n.
Check the
brake
Disconnect the fluid infusion line from the bleeder
port. Close
supply
ervoir.
Pumping the pilots and copilots pedals

during the bleeding process may help to
dislodge any air bubbles trapped in the
master cylinders.
When the
Disconnect the fluid return line from the brake fluid
reservoir
k.
NOTE
h.
j.
the bleeder
port valves,
32-40-00
Page
A17
13
Nov 16/94
aeechcraft
BONANZA SERIES
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
STEERING
The
nose
wheel should be
centerline of the
parallel
to the fore and aft
pedals in the
neutral position. Loosen the nose gear steering actuator arm at the aft end and screw the end fitting
either in or out to make the adjustment,
airplane
with the rudder
b.
Turn the
tion: the
with the
c,
nose
wheel to the extreme left turn
adjustment
nose
wheel in this
Place tape around the aft end of the shimmy

at a point 1/32 to 1/4 inch from the
d.
Turn the locknuts
ADJUSTI1IIENT
the
nose
1/32 to 1/4 inch from its maximum travel.

If
adjustment
is
required,
the
following procedure is
recommended:
a.
that
Loosen the locknuts
on
the
adjustment bolts
clear the stops
on
the
nose
they
wheel
on
the
adjustment bolts
so
that
wheel is turned and the tape on the piston

contacts the scraper ring. Tighten the locknuts
rod
stop must be adjusted so that the nose

wheel travel is stopped when the shimmy damper is
position.
damper piston rod

scraper ring.
NOSE WHEEL TRAVEL STOP
The travel
posi-
bolts must be clear of the stops
just
securely.
e.
Repeat preceding steps b,
the
nose
tape
on
the forward end of the
and d, except turn

right, and place the
wheel to the extreme
piston
rod.
so
straight-
ener.
32-50-00
Page
A17
Nov 16/94
~eechcraR
BONANZA SERIES
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
POSITION AND WARNING

TED
ENGINE-COMPARTMENT-LOCA
LANDING GEAR WARNING SWITCH
AoJusTnnENr(CE-748, CE-772 THRU

CE-1300, CE-1302 THRU CE-1306; CJ-149
LANDING GEAR POSITION LIGHT

ADJUSTMENT
The
landing gear position lights are mounted on the

right subpanel on early serial number airplanes. On
airplane serials E-1946, E-2104, E-2111 and after and
EA-320, EA-389 and after, the landing gear position
lights were moved to the
panel. Three green lights,
left side of the
pilots
landing gear position lights on

are operated by the up-indicator switches
the instrument
panel
down-indicator switches
on
EXCEPT E-1946 AND E-2104; EA-1 THRU

NOTE
sub-
one for each gear, are illuminated whenever the landing gear is down and
locked. The red light illuminates any time
any portion
of the landing gear is in transit or at
any intermediate
position. All of the lights will be extinguished when the
landing gear is up and locked.
The
THRU CJ-179; D-10097, 0-10120 AND

AFT;ER; E- IIII, E- 1241 THRU E-2110,
The following steps must be made by

pulling the throttle control back. Incorrect
settings may occur if the throttle control
is pushed forward to check the switch
adjustment.
If the altitude referenced in the
be obtained,
and
each gear.
a.
use
With the
following step cannot

settings.
Table 1 for alternate altitude
airplane
in
flight
at 100 to 110 knots with
100 feet of pressure altitude (5,000

100 feet
with
the
altitude
at
2,400
propeller
pressure
rpm on
EA serials) and the landing gear retracted, retard the
3,000
Before
making the following adjustments, place the

airplane on jacks as instructed in Chapter 7-00-00
throttle to obtain 12
MAIN GEAR
sure
(15
gear-up
With the
landing gear down and locked, adjust the

downswitch, located on the forward side of the main
gear V-brace, so that the overtravel of the switch plunger is .050 inch after the switch is actuated to the
"ON" position. With the landing gear in fully
up position, adjust the up-switch, located inboard of the forward side of the main landing gear V-brace, so that
the overtravel of the switch plunger is .050 inch after
1 inches of
1 inches of
warning
Hg
on
EA
Hg in manifold presserials). The landing-
horn should sound at this manifold
pressure, but not before.

b.
If the horn did not sound under the conditions
established in step a, measure and note the distance

from the throttle to the subpanel.
c.
Land the
d.
Set the throttle at the
airplane
and shut down the
position
engine.
noted in step b.
the switch is actuated td the "ON" position,
Open the engine cowling and locate the gear

warning (throttle) switch as shown in Figure 3 of
NOSE GEAR
Chapter
e.
32-30-00.
f.
With the
Loosen the upper switch bracket and slide the

bracket until the gear warning switch closes as indicated by a clicking sound.
is .050 inch after the switch is actuated to the "ON"

position. With the landing gear in the fully up position,
g.
landing gear down and locked, adjust the

down-switch, located on the right hand side of the
wheel well, so that the overtravel of the switch plunger
adjust
the
upswitch, located
on
the
right-hand
lights correspond
to the
landing gear
position.
Recheck the switch
plane from the jacks.
adjustment
and
remove
the air-
position.
NOTE
side of
the wheel well, so that the overtravel of the switch

plunger is .050 inch after the switch is actuated to the
"ON" position. Check the instrument panel to be sure
the indicator
Anchor the switch bracket at this
warning horn
adjustment is incorrect, repeat steps a through g.
Repeat step
adjustment.
h.
Working
to check the
If the
with the throttle control, check that the
switch actuator roller rides up smoothly on the throttle

control actuator and operates without catching or
hanging
on
the
tapered end. Readjust if the switch

32-60-00
Page
A17
Nov 16/94
Beechcraft
BONANZA SERIES
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
roller
up or does not operate smoothly during

the throttle control movement from idle to full power
travel. Ensure full throttle travel and ease of move-
hangs
actuator
uator
Close the
engine cowling.
ENGINE-COMPARTMENT-LOCA
not
touching
(CE-1301, CE- 1307 AND

AFTER)
NOTE
following checks must be made by

adjustment.
The
landing gear retract-prevent switch

may be checked and/or adjusted at the
same time the landing gear warning
The
being adjusted because of the

similarity of the adjustment. Accomplish
switch is
the instructions under the ENGINEC O M P A R T M E N T LOCATED

SWITCH
RETRACT-PREVENT
Gain
access
be obtained,
f.
heading.
to the throttle
Inspect
installation
landing
linkage
in the
retard the throttle to obtain
engine
is NOT to be under the
warning switch for proper

Figure 1. The switch plunger
dimple in the switch actuator
Push the throttle to the
d.
Inspect
the switch
The switch
plunger
fully
plunger
forward
g.
touching
manifold pressure of 12
If the switch
adjustment
is wrong, retard the

Hg manifold pres-
1 inches of
sure.
position,
h.
and switch actuator
should be
The
and below this manifold pressure, but not above it.
arm.
arm.
Hg.
throttle to obtain 12
c.
landing-gear-up warning horn

should sound and the annunciator light should flash at
gear
shown in
following step cannot

settings.
Table 1 for alternate altitude
airplane flying
1 inches of
the
as
With the
use
3,000 feet altitude and the landing gear retracted,
compartment.
b.
plunger.
If removed, return the upper switch bracket to the

position noted in step d.
NOTE
a.
the switch
e.
AFTER; CJ-1BO AND
ADJUSTMENT
and the switch act-
the position of the

the throttle control housing
actuator arm will be
TED

ADJUSTMENT
arm are
plunger
touching, mark
upper switch bracket on

(shown in Figure 1).Remove the switch actuator
assembly from the upper switch bracket and bend the
switch actuator arm so that, when installed, the switch
ment.
i.
If the switch
arm.
Measure and note the distance from the
subpanel
to the throttle control.
the switch
TABLE i
ALTITUDE COMPENSATION
PRESSURE ALTITUBE
1,000 A
2,000 A
3,000 ft
4,000 ft
5,000 ft
6,000 ft
7,000 A
8,000 ft
9,000 ft
10,000 ft
GEAR WARNING FOR EA

SERIALS
GEAR WARNING FOR E, CE,

CJ SERIALS
19 in.
14 in.
18 in.
13 in.
17 in.
12 in.
16 in.
11 in.
15 in.
10 in.
14 in. H
9 in.
13 in.
8 in.
12.5 in.
7.5 in.
11.5 in.
6.5 in.
11 in.
Hg
6 in.
Hg
32-60-00
Page
Nov 16/94
A17
aeechc~nft
BONANZA SERIES
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
NOTE
The
landing-gear-up warning
sound
and the GEAR
NOTE
horn will
UP
warning
annunciator light will flash at full flaps
with the landinggear in the up position.
i.
Land the
airplane
and shut down the

The
engine,
Position the throttle control at the measurement

noted in step h.
adjustment.
j.
k.
Open
switch
as
the
engine cowling
shown in Figure 1.
and locate the
warning
Loosen the upper switch bracket and slide the

bracket until the switch closes as indicated by a clicking sound.
i.
Tighten
m.
the upper switch bracket at this
position.
n.
Working with the throttle control, check that the
switch actuator roller rides up smoothly on the throttle
control actuator and operates without catching or
the
hanging up on
tapered end as shown in Figure 1.
Readjust if the switch roller hangs up or does not
operate smoothly during the throttle control movement
from idle to full power. Ensure full throttle travel and
ease of movement.
o.
Close the
p.
Repeat
engine cowling.
the
flight
be obtained,
following steps cannot

settings.
Table 1 for alternate
use
airplane flying at 100 to 110 knots with

(propeller at 2,400 rpm on serials
and
EA-389
EA-320,
after) and the landing gear
With the
a.
3,000 feet altitude
to obtain 12
retracted, retard the throttle
1 inches of
Hg manifold pressure (15 1 inches of Hg on serials

EA-320, EA-389 and after). The landing gear up warning horn should sound (the gear warning annunciator
light
should flash also
after and EA-488 and
serials E-2458, E-2468 and

after) at and below this manifold
on
pressure. Mark this throttle

b.
position
on
the
pedestal.
On serials E-2761 and after, advance the throttle

Hg (above 16 in. Hg on serials
to above 13 in.
EA-320, EA-389 and after). Lower the flaps
to fully
warning horn should sound and GEAR
UP annunciator light should flash.
down and the
check of the switch
setting
at the
airspeed and altitude of the first check. The landing

gear warning horn should sound and the gear warning
annunciator light on the instrument panel should flash
settings below the manifold pressure being used to

adjust the switch. If necessary, readjust the switch as
previously instructed.
at
After landing the airplane and shutting down

engine, set the throttle at the position marked on
pedestal in step a.
c.
Remove the
e.
Loosen the
warning switch
(E-1946, E-2104,
f.
NOTE
retaining
side
Adjust
the
as
shown in
cam so
covers.
arm
for the
Figure
the
landing
gear
2.
that the switch closes, indicated
click, with the throttle control

noted in step a.
by
the
nuts on the cam located on
the end of the actuator rod
PEDESTAL-LOCA TED LANDING GEAR

E-2111 AND AFTER;
EA-320, EA-389 AND AFTER)
pedestal
the
top position
g.
Retighten
h.
Ensure full throttle control travel and
cam
retaining
at the
nuts.
The
landing gear warning switch may be

checked and/or adjusted at the same
time as the landing gear retract-prevent
switch because of the
adjustment. Accomplish
under
the
similarity
of the
the instructions
PEDESTAL-LOCATED
LANDING GEAR RETRACT-PREVENT
SWITCH ADJUSTMENT heading.
ease
of
movement.
i.
Reinstall the
pedestal
side
covers.
j. Repeat the check of the switch setting at the airspeed and altitude stated in step a. If necessary, readjust the switch as previously instructed.
32-60-00
Page
A17
Nov 16/94
~eechclTlft
BONANZA SERIES
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
SWITCH ACTUATOR ARM
INCORRECT
CONFIGURATION
DIMPLE
IN ARM
ROLLER
SWITCH
ARM
ACTUATOP
SWITCH PLUNGER
CORRECT
CONFIGURATION
SWITCH
DIMPLE
IN ARM
ROLLER
UPPER
SWITCH BRACKET
SWITCH PLUNGER
SWITCH
DETAIL
THROTTLE
CONTROL HOUSING
TYPICAL FOR BOTH SWITCHES
UPPER SWITCH
(GEAR WARNING)
bD
LOWER
SWITCH BRACKET
e
ACTUATOR
O
T
LOWER SWITCH
SWITCH PLUNGER
35-IW-001
(RETRACT -PREVENT)
Englne-Compartment-located
Landing Gear Warning Switches

Figure 1
32-60-00
Page
Nov 16/94
A17
BONANZA SERIES
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
LANDING GEAR
RETRACT-PREVENT
SWITCH CAM ROD
AFT%B
LANDING GEAR WARNING

HORN AND ANNUNCIATOR
LIGHT SWITCH CAM ROD
LANDING GEAR
RETRACT-PREVENT
SWITCH
LANDING GEAR WARNING

HORN AND ANNUNCIATOR
LIGHT SWITCH
OPTIONAL AIR
CONDITIONING
SWITCH
LANDING
RETRACTPREVENT
SWITCH CAM
GEAR
LANDING GEAR
WARNING HORN
AND L~GHT
SWITCH
CAM
LOOKING
DOWN
33-158-002
Pedestal-located
Landing Gear Warning

Figure 2
Switches
32-60-00
Page
A17
Nov 16/94
BONANZA SERIES
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
NOTE
TED
ENGINE-COMPAR7MENT-LOCA
LANDING GEAR RETRACT-PREVENT
SWITCH ADJUSTMENT

The
(CE- 1301,
CE-1307 AND AFTER; CJ-180 AND
is pushed forward
adjustment.
AFTER)
NOTE
If the altitude referenced in the following step cannot

use Table 2 for alternate altitude settings.
be obtained,
The
warning switch may be

adjusted at the same
time the landing gear retract-prevent
switch is being adjusted because of the
similarity of the adjustment. Accomplish
landing gear
checked and/or
f.
Gain
Hg
gear
to the throttle
linkage
in the
Inspect the switch for proper installation

in Figure 1. The switch plunger is NOT to be
dimple in the switch actuator arm,
b.
c.
Push the throttle to the full forward
d.
Inspect
the switch
The switch
plunger
shown
manifold pressure.
under the
and the switch act-
the
plunger
touching, mark
the throttle
arm so
There is
the switch
plunger.
If removed, return the upper switch bracket to the

position noted in step d.
e.
latching relay in the circuit

landing gear to fully
which allows the
retract once retraction starts. Retarding

the throttle should not stop the landing
gear in midtravel.
actuator
bend the
that, when installed, the switch
touching
subpanel
NOTE
position of the
control housing
(shown in Figure 1). Remove the switch

assembly from the lower switch bracket and
actuator arm will be
Measure and note the distance from the
the switch
uator arm are not
switch actuator
h.
to the throttle control.
position.
touching
position.
switch in the up
g. If the retract-prevent switch adjustment is wrong,

1 inches of Hg
retard the throttle control to obtain 17
and switch actuator
should be
on
position
initially
engine
actuator arm. If the switch
lower switch bracket
plunger
as
to
throttle from
compartment.
arm.
check this by advancing the

manifold pressure below 17 inches of
with the landing gear down and the cockpit landing
acceptable
heading.
access
100. feet of pressure altitude and the landing

the landing gear must not retract at
extended,
gear
manifold
pressure below 17 f 1 inches of Hg It is
any
COMPARTMENT-LOCATED LANDING
GEAR WARNING SWITCH ADJUST-
a.
airplane flying
With the
3,000
the instructions under the ENGINE-
MENT
to check the switch
i.
j.
Land the
Open
shown in
k.
airplane and
shut down the
engine cowling
Figure 1.
the
engine.
and locate the switch
as
Place the throttle at the distance from the sub-
panel
measured in step h.
TABLE 2
ALTITUDE COMPENSATION
PRESSURE ALTITUDE
1,000 ft
2,000 ft
3,000 ft
4,000 ft
5,000 ft
6,000 ft
7,000 ft
8,000 ft
9,000 ft
10,000 ft
GEAR RETRACT FOR
CJ. EA SERIALS
19 in.
18 in.
17 in.
16 in. H
15 in.
14 in.
13 in.
12.5 in.
11.5 in. H
11 in.
Hg
32-60-00
Page
Nov 16/94
A17
Qeechc~ft
BONANZA SERIES
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
Loosen the lower switch bracket and slide the
I.
bracket until the switch closes
ing
m.
as
indicated
by
click-
sound.
Tighten
the lower switch bracket at this
position.
with the throttle control, check that the

actuator relier for the retract-prevents switch rides up
n.
Working
smoothly on the throttle control actuator and operates

catching or hanging up on the tapered end as
shown in Figure 1. Readjust if the switch roller hangs
up or does not operate smoothly during the throttle
without
control travel from idle to full power. Ensure full throttle

travel and ease of movement.
o.
Closetheengine cowling.
a.
airplane flying
With the
100 feet of pressure altitude (5,000 f 100 feet

pressure altitude with propeller at 2,400 rpm on seri-
3,000
als EA-320, EA-369 and
and the
after)
extended, the landing gear
landing
gear
must not retract at
or
manifold pressure of 16 inches Hg. It is

acceptable to initially check this by advancing the
below
throttle from
manifold pressure below 16 fl inches
Hg with the landing gear down and the landing gear

position switch in the cockpit in the gear-down position.
b.
of the throttle control
position
Mark the
pedestal
with the throttle retarded to the
on
the
appropriate
manifold pressure.
Repeat the flight check of the retract-prevent

switch setting at the airspeed and altitude stated in
step f. If necessary, readjust the switch as previously
p.
NOTE
There is a latching relay in the circuit
which allows the landing gear to fully
retract once retraction starts. Retarding
the throttle should not stop the landing
instructed.
PEDESTAL-LOCA TED LANDING GEAR
RETRACT-PREVENT SWITCH
(E-2458, E-2468, AND

AFTER; EA-320, EA-389 AND AFTER)
gear in midtravel.
AD3USTMENT
NOTE
d.
Place the throttle control at the mark made
pedestal
f.
the PEDESTAL-LOCATED
ADJUSTMENT heading,
g.
NOTE

adjustment.
The
following steps cannot

alternate altitude settings.

be obtained,
use
Table 2 for
engine.
Land the
The landing gear warning switch may be

checked and/or adjusted at the same
time as the landing gear retract-prevent
switch because of the similarity of the
adjustment. Accomplish the instructions
under
and shut down the
c.
e.
airplane
on
the
in step b.
Remove the
Loosen the
pedestal
retaining
side
nuts
covers.
on
the
cam
located
on
the end of the actuator rod for the gear retract-prevent

switch shown in Figure 2.
Adjust the
cam so
that the switch closes, indicated

at the position noted
click, with the throttle control

in step b.
by
h.
Retighten the
i.
Ensure full throttle travel and
i.
Reinstall the
cam
retaining
pedestal
side
nuts.
ease
of movement.
covers.
Repeat the flight check of the switch setting at the

airspeed and altitude stated in step a. If necessary,
readjust the switch as previously instructed.
k.
32-60-00
Page
A17
Nov 16/94
CHAPTER
LIGHTS
BEECHCRAFT
BONANZA SERIES
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
TABLE OF CONTENTS
CHAPTER
SECTION
SUBJECT
SUBJECT
INTERIOR
33-20-00
PAGE
Light Bulb Removal

Post Light Bulb Installation
Wedge Light Tray Removal
Wedge Light Tray Installation
Instrument Post
instrument
Instrument
Instrument
........1
............1
............1
............1
Electroluminescent Panel Removal
............1
Electroluminescent Panel Installation
..............1
......1
Individual Warning and Position Light Bulb Removal

Warning and Position Light Bulb Removal (Landing Gear,
Alternator, and Baggage Door)
Warning and Position Light Bulb Installation (Landing Gear,
Alternator, and Baggage Door)
Glareshield
Glareshield
Floodlight
Floodlight
............1
8ulb Installation
Light
CJ-156 and after,

EA-171 and
.....1
Bulb Removal
Passenger Reading Light Bulb Removal

Passenger Reading Light Bulb Installation
Compass Light Bulb Removal
Compass Light Bulb Installation
Trim Tab Light Bulb Removal
Trim Tab Light Bulb installation
L"ourtesy Light Bulb Removal
Courtesy Light Bulb Installation
Map Light Bulb Removal
Map Light Bulblnstallation
Cabin Overhead Light Bulb Removal
(Prior to C-993, CJ-156, C-10347, 8-1783, EA-171)
Cabin Overhead Light Bulb Installation
(Prior to CE-933, CJ-146, D-10347, 8-1783, EA-171)
Cabin Overhead
...........1
Bulb Removal
............1
............1
_
............2
.........2
............2
...2
............2
.....2
...........2
......2
.2
................2
(CE-933and after,
D-10357 and after, E-1783 and after,
after)
Light Bulb Installation (CE-933
Cabin Overhead
........2
and
after,
CJ-156 and after, D-10347 and after, E-1783 and after,

EA-171 and after)
............2
Cabin Overhead
Bulb Removal
............2
Cabin
Bulb Installation
..........,2
Light
Overhead Light
EXTERIOR.....
Description
Strobe
..................................................33-40-00
and
Operation
..........1
............1
Lights
Step Light Optional.

Troubleshooting Exterior Lights
............1.
............3
............3
Lights
Power
Power
Supply
Supply
Unit Removal
Unit Installation
...........3
............3
33-CONTENTS
Page
Sep
27/84
BEEC~CRAFT
BONANZA SERIES
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
CHAPTER 33
LIGHTS
TABLE OF CONTENTS
(Contd)
CHAPTER
SECTION
SUBJECT
SUBJECT
EXTERIOR
(Contd)
,,,,,,,..33-40-00
(Contd)
Lights (Contd)
Wing Strobe Light Removal
Wing Strobe Light Installation
Wing Navigation Light Removal
Wing Navigation Light Installation
Tail Strobe/Nav Light Removal
Tail Strobe/Nav Light Iristallation
Tail Naviation Light Removal
Tail Navigation Light Installation
Taxi Light Removal
Taxi Light Installation
Landing Light Removal
Landing Light Installation
Upper Rotating Beacon Removal
...,,,,.,,,,3
,,.,,,.,,,.,,4
.,,,,,,4
,,,,.,,,,,,,.4
,,,,4
.............4
,,.,,,,,,,.,.5
,,,,,,,,,,.,.5
,,,,,,,,.,5
,,,,,,,,,,5
,,,,,.,,,,.,.5
.............5
.............5
.............5
Upper Rotating Beacon installation

Lower Rotating Beacon Removal
Lower Rotating Beacon Installation
Lower Rotating Beacon Bulb Removal
Lower Rotating Beacon Bulb Installation,
Step Light Bulb Replacement
Step Light 8ulb Installation
Light Bulb Replacement Chart 1
.............5
,,,,,,5
,,.,,,,,,,,,.5
,.,,,,,,5
...,,.,,,..,6
.............6
.............6
IEND"
33-C ONTENTS
Page
Sec, 2784
PAGE
BEECHCRAFT
BONANZA SERIES
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
CHAPTER 33
LIST OF PAGE EFFECTIVIN
CHAPTER
SECTION
SU&IECf
PACE
33-EFFECTIVITY
33-CONTENTS
33-20-00
33-40-00
DATE
Sep
27184
Sep
27/84
Sep
27/84
9/80
May
Jan 28/81
Sep
Sep
Sep
Sep
Sep
Sep
3
4
5
6
27/84
27/84
27/84
27/80
27/8(:
27/8r,
"END"
33-EffECTIVITY
Ag
Page 1
Sep 213/84
BEECHCRAFT
BONANZA SERIES
MAINtENANCE MANUAL
INTERIOR
acrylic face panel or the printed circuit

damaged, the whole unit must be replaced.
If the
separately.
board becomes
INSTRUMENT POST LIGHT BULB REMOVAL

Remove the
a.
Individual post lights, located adjacent to the instruments on

the instrument panel may have bulbs removed as follows:
side of the face
attaching
screws
located
on
each
panel.
wiring running from the printed
splice.
assembly from the subpanel.
Disconnect the
circuit board at the

from the post light assembly,
Remove the bulb from the post light assembly.
Pull the
a.
b.
light shield
Pull the
c.
ELECTROLUMINESCENT PANEL INSTALLA TION

INSTRUMENT POST LIGHT BULB INSTALLA TION
and
Install the bulb in the post light assembly.

Insert the shield to the instrument post
a.
b.
wiring at the splice.

panel assembly in place in
the attaching screws.
a.
Reconnect the
b.
Place the
secure
it with
subpanel
the
light
WARNING AND POSITION LIGHT BULB REMOVAL
assembly.
(LANDING GEAR, ALTERNATOR, BAGGAGE

DOOR)
INSTRUMENT WEDGE LIGHT TRA Y REMOVAL

Internal
lighting
of the
instruments
illumination across each instrument. A
provides additional
light tray mounted on
the top side of the bezei of each instrument holds two bulbs
wired in parallel. If the light bulbs are damaged or burn out
the
light tray
Remove the
a.
in
panel
with bulbs must be
place and
screws
that
secure
Remove the
b.
Remove the bulb.
light
shield.
WARNING AND POSITION LIGHT BULB INSTALL9TION (LANDING GEAR ALTERNATOR, BAGGAGE
DOOR)
replaced.
tilt the instrument
a.
the instrument
panel aft
to
gain
the bulb in the
a.
Replace
b.
Install the
light
shield
on
light assembly.
the light assembly.
the instruments.
access to
GLARESHIELD FLOODLIGHT BULB REMOVAL

NOTE
Locate the defective bulb.
a.
Instruments located at the lower
edge
of the
panel may be removed if necessary, to

access to the light tray at the top of
gain
up on
the
glareshield attach
gain access to
glareshield
Remove the
b.
the
to
and
screws
push
the bulb.
Remove the bulb.
c.
instruments.
GLARESHIELD FLOODLIGHT BULB INSTALL4 TION

b.
Remove the
screws
that attach the
light tray
to the
instrument bezel.
light assembly.
the bulb in the
a.
Replace
b.
Install the
glareshield
and secure with the attach
screws.
INSTRUMENT
INSTALLA TION
a.
Install the
the attach
new
WEDGE
light tray
and
LIGHT
secure
in
TRA Y
place
with
PASSENGER READING LIGHT BULB REMOVAL

a.
Remove the aluminum
b.
Remove the bulb.
light
cover.
screws.
ELECTROLUMINESCENT PANEL REMOVAL
PASSENGER
INSTALLA TION
Three electroluminescent
a.
Replace
instrument
b.
Install
panels provide lighting for the

subpanel. The electroluminescent lamp is an
integral part of the finished panel and cannot be replaced
READING
the bulb in the

the
aluminum
LIGHT BULB
light assembly.
light cover on
the
light
assembly.
33-20-00
Page 1
May 9/80
BEECHCRAFT
BONANtA SERIES
MAINtENANCE MANUAL
COMPASS LIGHT BULB REMOVAL
the control wheel.

Pull out center
b.
the bulb shield
a.
Flip
b.
Bulb will pop out.
over
the
to one side,
plate and
remove
the bulb from
light assembly.
MAP LIGHT BULB INSTALLA TION
COMPASS LIGHT BULB INSTALLA TION
Replace the bulb in the light assembly.

Flip the bulb shield back over the bulb.
a.
b.
Replace the bulb
b.
Reinstall the center
and securewith the
(Prior
a.
instrument
light assembly
screws.
to
CE-933 C~-156, 0-10357 E-1783, EA-171)
away from the back of the
panel.
a.
access to
Remove the bulb,
b.
attaching
TRIM TAB LIGHTBULB REMOVAL

Pull the
light assembly.
plate in the control wheel
in the
a.
panel assembly
Remove the overhead

the bulb.
(Fresh air
to
gain
vents and vent knob must be
removed also.)
b.
Remove the bulb from the
light assembly.
TRIM TAB LIGHT BULB INSTALLATION

a.
Replace
b.
Install
light assembly.
light assembly into the instrument
the bulb in the
the
(Plio~toCE-933,
CJ-156, D-10951, E-17B3, EAI/1J
panel.
COURTESY LIGHT BULB REMOVAL

a.
moulding
b.
Remove the
screws
light assembly.
panel assembly.
in the
a.
Replace the bulb
b.
Reinstall the overhead
c.
Reinstall the fresh air vents and vent knob.
attaching the upper door
to the door.
Bend door
moulding
over
to
gain
access to

and after, CJ-156 and after, 0-10357 and
the
(CE-933
bulb.
c.
Remove the bulb from the
after, E-1783 and after, EA-171 and after!
light asseri~bly.
a.
COURTESY LIGHT BULB INSTALLATION
b.
a.
b.
Squeeze the lens sufficiently to release the

pull the lens away from the light assembly.
Remove the inoperative light bulb.
catches and
Replace the bulb in the light assembly.

Secure the moulding to the door with the
attach

(CE-933 and after, CJ-156 and after, 0-10357 and
after, E-1783 and after, EA-171 and after)
screws.
MAP LIGHT BULB REMOVAL

a.
Remove the
screws
securing
the center
plate
to
"END"
33-20-00
Page2
Jan 28/81
light
bulb.
a.
Install
b.
Install the lens into the
a new
light assembly.
BEECHCRAFT
BONAN;LA SERIES
MAIMENANCE MANUAL
EXTERIOR
sufficiently, the lamp will go out

recharging for the next cycle.
while the
capacitor begins
STROBE LIGHTS
Flashing
strobe
lights
are
mounted
on
each
wing tip
and
are
The system is activated by a

circuit breaker switch mounted on the instrument subpanel.
The strobe lights are powered by a power supply unit
available
on
the tail
baggage compartment. A transistorized circuit

in the power supply unit steps up the voltage of the airplane
electrical system to the level (approximately 400 volts)
required to operate the strobe lights. The stepped-upvoltage is stored in a capacitor until released to the strobe
lights. The current from the power supply unit is conducted
to the flashtube of the strobe light by a specially shielded
power cable. A charge of high voltage electricity is
momentarily released to a coil in the flashtube assembly.
The coil further steps up the charge to a point where it
ionizes the xenon gas in the flashtube. The high voltage
stored in the capacit3r then surges through the gas to
produce the brilliant burst of light energy that characterizes
the strobe light. When the capacitor voltage drops
located in the
STEP LIGHT
OPTIONAL
cone.
On serials E-2104, E-2111, and after; and EA-320, EA-389

a step light may be mounted in the fuselage just
forward of the step and aft of the right wing trailing edge.
The switch is mounted in the top of the forward ~door frame.
and after,
ajar switch will activate

perform its annunciator function.
In some installations, the aft door
the
step light
as
well
The timer is located
on
as
the forward side of the forward spar

on the right
carry through, and the five amp fuse is located

side forward of the firewall.
This system is wired directly to the battery through a five

amp fuse and will operate any time the doors are opened.
lights are a part of the same system and

operate simultaneously with the step light. Once the step
light has been activated the timer will turn the light off in
The courtesy
approximately
15 minutes.
33-40-00
A9
Pegs 1
Sep 27/04
BEECHCRAFT
BONAN;LA SERIES
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
TROUBLESMOOTIMO
EXTERIOR LIGHTS
REMARKS
PROBABLE CAUSE
TROUBLE
STROBE LIGHTS
i.
Lights inoperative.
a.
Circuit breaker
tripped.
a.
Check for short circuit.
Reset circuit
breaker.
2.
One bulb does not
light,
electrical connections.
b.
Loo:se connection.
b.
Check and
c.
Battery defective.
c.
Replace battery
d.
Power
d.
Replace.
a.
Bulb burned out,
a.
Replace bulb.
b,
fixture not
b.
Check for good bonding between fixture
supply inoperative,
grounded,
tighten
and structure.
c.
Loose connection.
d.
Defective fixture
or
switch,
or use
external power.
Tighten mounting
c.
Check all connections in circuit.
d.
Replace
fixture
or
screws.
switch.
TAIL LIGHT, TAIL NAV/STROBE LIGHT, LANDING LIGHT, AND TAXI LIGHT
1.
Lamp fails
to
light.
a.
Circuit breaker switch
tripped.
a.
Check for short circuit.
Reset circuit
breaker.
b.
Circuit
breaker
switch
b.
c.
Larrp burned
d.
Loose connection
wiring.
Check
continuity through
switch.
Replace
if necessary.
defective.
out,
or
defective
c.
Replace lamp.
d.
Tighten connections and check wire

circuit continuity. Replace or repair wire if
necessary.
3343-00
PageP
Sep 27/84
A9
BEECHCRATT
BONANZA SERIES
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
POWER SUPPLY UNIT INSTALLATION
EXTERIOR
CE-748, CE-772 and after; CJ-149 and after, 0-10097, D10120 and after; E- 1111, E- l~i?41 to E- 1370
LIGHfS
CA UTION
POWER SUPPLY UNIT REMOVAL
hook-up of
An incorrect
the wires in either the
power input or between the strobe light

assemblies and the power supply will cause a
reversal of polarity that results in serious
CE-748, CE-772 and after; CJ-149 and after: 0-10097, D10120 and a~ter; E-llll, E-1241 to E-1370
component damage and failure. Care must be

taken to ensure that the red wire is connected to
WARNING
power and the black wire is

connected to ground. Make sure that the
positive
connectors
High voltage is involved in the circuit between

supply and strobe light assemblies.
Although a bleed-off resistor is incorporated in
the power supply circuit, turn the control switch
for the strobe lights OFF and allow at least 10
minutes to elapse prior to disconnecting the
cables at the power supply or strobe light
assemblies and before
units
in
handling
assembled and that
properly. The shields for the wing

light cables should be grounded to the
airplane structure at the power supply. Refer to
are
connected
and tail
WIRING
the
DIAGRAM
components in
either of these
way. Failure to observe these

may result in physical injury from
MANUAL P/N
35-
hook-up of
the strobe light system.
59()102-9 to ensure
correct
the
any
precautions
Position the power supply unit in the airplane and

with the screws, washers, and nuts.
Connect the electrical wiring to the power supply.
b.
a.
electrical shock.
secure
Install
c.
a.
properly
are
whiteired, whiteiblack, and whiteiyellow wires
the power
Remove the floorboard on the RH side of the
floorboard
the
the
on
RH
side
of the
baggage compartment.
b.
Disconnect
the
wiring
electrical
to
the
power
E- 1371 and afler. EA-I and after
supply.
c.
Remove the screws,
washers, and
nuts
the module to the support structure.

d.
Remove the power supply from the
anchoring
Place the power supply in its proper location and

screws which hold it in place.
a.
install
airplane.
b.
adhering
the
to
caution
to the power supply

for the above earlier
wiring
indicated
serializations.
8-1371 and after; EA-1 and after
c.
screws
d.
Place the
access
cover
in
place
and install the
and washers.
Reinstall the carpet.
WARNING
WING STROBE LIGHT REMOVAL
Observe the
removal
warning precautions given
instructions
for
the
in the
WARNING
earlier
serializations.

the power
a.
Locate the access
station 170,
fuselage
b.
and
Remove the 4
remove
c.
on
the
the
cover
screws
in the
floorboard, aft of
airplane,
in the
and washers from the
cover
right
side of the
in
place and
remove
bleed-off resistor is
minutes to elapse
wiring
from the power
screws
which hold the power
the power
supply,
supply
incorporated
in
prior to disconnecting the

supply or strobe light
handling either of these
power
assemblies and before
units
Remove the

cables at the
cover.
supply,
d.
Although
in
any
way.
precautions may
Failure
result in
to
these
observe
physical injury
from
electrical shock.
33-40-00
A9
Page 3
Sep 21/84
BEECHCRAFF
BONANZA SERIES
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
Remove the transparent shield
a.
covering the wing
retainer and
tip lights.
b.
Detach the strobe
light assembly
the retainer.
remove
Rotate the bulb counterclockwise to remove.
c.
from the
wing by
securing
the mounting bracket to the strobe light assembly.
Disconnect the electrical wiring.
c.
d.
Remove the screws securing the end plate
assemblies to the light assembly. Remove the end plate
the alien head screws. Remove the nuts
removing
assemblies.
Remove the clear filter
e.
cover
from the strobe
WING NAVIGATION LIGHT INSTALLATION
Replace
b.
Install the retainer
secure
with the
c.
install
light
housing assembly.
the bulb.
a.
Place
the
and
navigation light bulb
the
transparent shield and
with
secure
screws.
NOTE
fingers
on
screw.
NOTE
clean cloth around the flashtube to
Before
from
wing, apply
keep
coming in,contact with the glass.
installing
shield to
the
transparent shield
Presstite
ensure
on
the
176 sealer around the
moisture cannot enter the
light
compartment.
Carefully
f.
remove
the flashtube from the contact
assemblies.
TAIL STROBE/NAV LIGHT REMOVAL
WING STROBE LIGHT INSTALLATION
WARNING
CA U~ION
Observe the
procedure stated
caution

Although a bleed-off resistor is incorporated in
minutes to elapse prior to disconnecting the
cables at the power supply or strobe light
assemblies and before handling either of these
units in any way. F.3ilure to observe these
precautions may resu t in physical inlury from
in
the power
POWER SUPPLY UNIT INSTALLATION in this
chapter.
Replace
a.
the flashtube if necessary.
NOTE
electrical shock.
Place
fingers
clean cloth around the flashtube to

from
coming in
contact
keep
with the glass.
Remove the tail
:one and light shield to gain

light assembly.
b.
Disconnect the strobeinav light assembly from the
airplane electrical system.
a.
access
Reinstall the clear filter
b.
cover
in the strobe
light
housing.
Install the end
c.
bracket
screws
on
the strobe
plate assemblies
light housing and
and
secure
mounting
with the
c.
d.
Reconnect the
assembly
e.
to the
airplane
wiring
and
secure
the strobe
with the alien head
light
If
the
remove
remove
replaced.
flashtube
assembly needs replacement,

light assembly
the light assembly from the tail cone.
remove the screws on
and
screws,
Reattach the transparent shield to the
Rotate the nav bulb counterclockwise and
the bulb if it needs to be
and nuts,
d.
to the strobe
the backside of the
wing tip.
TAIL STROBEINAV LIGHT INSTALLATION
WING NAVIGATION LIGHT REMOVAL

a.
a.
Remove
the
transparent shield and

b.
Remove the
attaching
remove
screw
screws
from
the
tip,
navigation light
cone
Replace the flashtube assembly and

with
the
screws
in
the
backside
secure to
of the
the
light
assembly.
from the wing
from the
tail
bulb
b.
Replace
the bulb if necessary.
33-40-00
Page4
Sep 27/84
A9
BEECHCRAFT
BONANZA SERIES
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
Reconnect the strobe/nav lignt assemoly
c.
airplane
d.
electrical system.
Reinstall the light shield
over
to tne
the strobe/nav
light
assembly.
e.
LANDING LIGHT INSTALLATION
Reinstall the tail
cone an
TAIL NAVIGATION LIGHT REMOVAL
Remove the outer
with
light shield
gain
to
with
d.
access to
Remove the inner bulb shield from the bulb.
c.
Rotate the bulb counterclockwise to
around the
light
and
wiring
to the back of the
light
and
screws.
Install the
the nose
b.
retaining ring
screws.
Reconnect the
c.
secure
a.
install the
b.
secure
the bulb.
and install the seal back around
light
the
light.
airplane.
the
Replace
a.
the
bug and
light assembly
secure
with
the lower
on
portion
of
screws.
UPPER ROTATING BEACON REMOVAL
remove.
TAIL NAVIGATION LIGHT INSTALLATION
Remove the
a.
from the lens
screw
retaining clamp.
Remove the lens.

the bulb in the holder.
a.
Replace
b.
Place the inner bulb shield
c.
Reinstall the outer
over
light shield
on
the tail
cone.
Remove the
b.
Remove the
from the
screws
screws on
by rotating
counterclockwise.
UPPER ROTATING BEACON INSTALLATION
TAXI LIGHT REMOVAL

a.
Remove the bulb
b.
the bulb.
light retaining ring.
the back of the
light
Replace
b.
Install the lens
black "mask" is
to
a.
facing
Secure the lens
c.
the
on
plane making
sure
that the
forward.
clamp
with the
screw.
wiring.
disconnect the
LOWER ROTATING BEACON REMOVAL

TAXI LIGHT INSTALLATION
(Prior to E-2050, CE-1014, P10404,

EA-320)
Replace the light and place the retaining ring

light. Secure the retaining ring with screws.
Properly index the light bulb.
and EA-324 except
a.
around the
b.
Reconnect the
wiring
to
light and
secure
Remove the
a.
screw
from the lens
retaining clamp.
Remove the lens.
with
Remove the bulb
b.
by rotating counterclockwise.
screws.
LOWER ROTATING BEACON INSTALLATION
(Prior
LANDING LIGHT REMOVAL
to
E-a050, CE-1014, D-10404, EA-324
except EA-
320)
a.
Remove the outer retaining screws to detach the

lower portion of the nose bug.
light from the

b.
assembly
c.
removing
d.
a.
Replace
light
b.
Install the lens
retaining ring.
Disconnect the wiring from the light assembly by
c.
Secure the lens
Remove the
and
the
pull
screws
from the back of the
off the
the plane.
clamp with the
on
screw.
LOWER ROTATING BEACON BULB REMOVAL
screws.
Remove the seal from between the
light
and the
retaining ring.
(E-2050 and after; EA-320, EA-324

and after; P10404 and after)
a.
Remove the
b.
Remove the lens.
c.
Remove the bulb.
screw
end after; CE-1014
from the lens.
NOTE
LOWER ROTATING BEACON BULB INSTALLATION
The beam
adjustment
screws
should not be
during removal or
installation of the landing light. This will ensure
that no further adjustment of the light will be
moved
needed.
in
either direction
(E-2050
and after; EA-320, EA-324 and after; CE-1014
and after; Di0404 and after)

a.
Install the bulb.
b.
Install the lens and
secure
with the screw.
33-40-00
PageS
A8
Sep
27/84
BEECHCRAFT
BONANZA SERIES
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
STEP LIGHT BULB REPLACEMENT
d.
Remove the
light
bulb.
STEP LIGHT BULB INSTALLATION

Locate the small
a.
upholstery
side
panel
the
over
step light.
b.
panel
in
c.
Remove the screws

upholstery
place and remove the panel.
Pull the light assembly from its mounting bracket.
which hold the
a.
install
b.
Install the
c.
Place the
bulb (1495 G E) in the light socket.

light assembly in its mounting bracket.
upholstery panel in place and install the
a new
screws.
CHART 1
LIGHT BULB REPLACEMENT
(0-10097, 0-10120 and after; CE-748,

CE-TIP and after; CJ-149 and after;
E-lill, E-1241 through E-2110 except
E-1946 end E-2104; EA-1 through EA-388 except
EA-320)
BULB REPLACEMENT
LOCATION
Alternator Out
E-2111 and after;

EA-320, EA-389 end after)
(E-1946, E-2104,
Alternator Out
327
Light
BULB REPLACEMENT
LOCATION
327
Light
303
327
Light
Compass Light
267
Cabin Overhead Light

Cabin Reading
327
Clock Light
Condenser Door
327
Compass Light
327
Condenser Door
327
Cabin Overhead
1864
Light
Clock
Open Light
Courtesy Light
Door Ajar Light
1864
Light
Flight Compartment Floodlights
Fuel Select Light
1819
Lights
Instrument Wedge Lights
Landing Gear Intransit Lights
Landing Gear Uplock Light
Landing Light
Light Tray Assembly
Map Light
Navigation Light (Tail)
Instrument Post
Light
Reading Light
Rotating Beacon (Lower) (Prior
313
Elevator Trim Tab
327
Indicator
267
327
Glareshield
327
Lights
Instrument Wedge Lights
Landing Gear Transit Light
Landing Gear Downlock Lights
Landing Light
Map Light
Navigation Light (Tail)
Navigation (Wing)
OAT Light
Oxygen Post Light
Pedestal Post Lights
Reading Light
Rotating Beacon (Lower)
Rotating Beacon (Upper)
Rotating Beacon (Tail)
Step Light
Strobe Light (Tail)
Strobe Light (Wing)
fail Light
Taxi Light
327
313
327
Light
313AM
327
Instrument Post
267
A7512-24
327
303
to
thru EA-388; CE-1014 and after)
1819
Light
Fuel Select
E-2050, CE-1014, 0-1404 and
Rotating Beacon (Upper)

Subpanel Post Lights
Strobe Light (Tail)
Strobe Light (Wing)
Tail Light
1864
Flap
Flight Compartment Floodlights
1495
EA-324 except EA-320)

Rotating Beacon (Lower) (E-2050 thru
E-210 except E-1946 and E-2104; EA-324
1864
327
4596
OAT
Open Light
Courtesy Light
Door Ajar Light
327
Elevator Trim Tab
303
D7080A5-24
WRM1939
D7080A1 -24
327
30-0815-1
30-1467-1
1683
58-380022-13
Light Tray
327
327
4596
1495
A508
A7512-24
327
334
334
303
A707-98-24
WRM1939
WRM1939
1495
A506
30-1467-1
1683
4313
"END"
33-40-00
PageG
Sep 27/84
69
Bsl
C H A PT E R
NAVIGATION
BEECHCRAFT
BONANZA SERIES
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
CHAPTER 34

CHAPTER
SECTION
DATE
PAGE
SUBJECT
Jan 20/82
34-10-00
.....Jan 20/82
May
9/80
................Jan 20/82
1 Oct 10/80
34-40-00
............Oct 10/80
CHAPTER 34
NAVIGATION
TABLE OF CONTENTS
CHAPTER
SECTION
SUBJECT
SUBJECT
.34-10-00
FLIGHT ENVIRONMENTAL DATA/PITOT STATIC.
~..........1
Operation
Description
Pitot System
Normal Static Air System
Emergency Static Air System
Troubleshooting
Pitot and Static Pressure System
and
............1
.........,f
............1
............1
............1
............1
......1
Pressure Test
System
Inspecting Pitot System Hoses
Static System Checks
Cleaning the Static Air System
Testing the Static System for Leaks
Outside Air Temperature Gage
Removal of the Outside Air Temperature Gage
Inspection of the Outside Air Temperature Gage
Installation of the Outside Air Temperature Gage...............
Pitot
PAGE
............2
............2
............2
............2
............2
............3
.........3
.........,.3
........34-40-00
INDEPENDENT POSITION DETERMINING
..........1
............1
Weather Radar
............1
............1
Weather Radar
Radar Antenna Removal
............1
Radar Antenna Installation
............1
"END"
Page
Jn 20%~
BEECNCRAFT
BONANZA SERIES
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
FLIGHT ENVIRONMENTAL DATA/PITOT STATIC

PITOT SYSTEM
side of the
airplane
aft
fuselage.
Ah of the
closure
rear
bulkhead (rear seat panel) is a drain plug, located at the low

point of the normal static system. It is provided to drain
moisture accumulations from the system. The drain plug
should be removed and the moisture drained from the
The
of
air for
pitot system provides a source

impact
operation of the airspeed indicator. The pitot mast is located
under the leading edge of the left wing outboard of wing
station 122.75 except EA-242, EA-PM and after. At serials

EA-242, EA-273 and after the pitot mast is moved to
outboard of
with
an
with
on
on
the instrument panel. The switch should be

in visible moisture. It is not advisable to
operate the pitot heating element

or
on
for short intervals of time to
the
ground except for
remove
ice and
snow.
NORMAL STATIC AIR SYSTEM

The normal static system provides a source of static air to
the flight instruments through a flush static fitting on each
sand and dust, either in the air
or on
to visible
the
ground.
An
flying
or
EMERGENCY STATIC AIR SYSTEM
wing station 191.0. The pitot head is provided

heating element which is turned on and off i
switch
testing
moisture
electric
when
plastic line every 100 hours and/or after exposure
optional emergency static air source may be installed to

provide air for instrument operation, should the static ports
become clogged. The emergency static air control switch is
located on the lan side pend below the Instrument subpanel
at approximately FS 65. The static air control switch is a
two-position switch with both an OFF NORMAL and an ON
EMERGENCV position. The switch handle is red in color
~and operation instructions are on a placard near the switch.
For further information regarding the emergency static air
source system, refer to the respective Pilots Operating
Handbook,
TROUBLESHOOTING
PrTOT AND STATIC PRESSURE SVSTEM
PROBABLE CAUSE
INDICA TION
1.
Heating element inoperative.
REMARKS
a.
Defective switch.
a.
Replace switch.
b.
Grounded
b.
Check
or
open circuit,
continuity. Repair
and
replace
as
necessary.
c.
Defective
pitot
2.
3.
Circuit breaker keeps
Inoperative
operation.
Instruments
erratic in
tripping.
or
heating element
in
c.
Replace heating element.
head.
a.
Grounded wire,
a.
Remove
a.
Lines
a.
Open
clogged.
ground from positive lead.
drain valve, allow lines to drain.
Disconnect the lines at the instrument
panel and blow
out
lines with
low air
pressure.
b.
b.
Lines leak,
Check lines for loose connection

and
c.
Leak in instruments.
FLIGHT ENVIRONMENTAL DATA/PTTOT STATIC

PITOT SYSTEM PRESSURE TEST

A functional test of the
an
pitot system
can
observer in the cabin to watch the
be made by using
airspeed indicator
c.
points
tighten.
Check instrument
case.
while air pressure is built up artificially

soft rubber tubing as follows:
by using
section of
a.
Clamp the rubber tubing over the pitot head inlet,
making certain that the connection is airtight.
b.
Crimp the end of the tubing and slowly roll it up
until the airspeed indicator registers approximately 100
miles per hour.
341090
Page
A4
Jan 20/82
BEECHCRAn
BONANZA SERIES
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
CAUTION
Instrument
error or
possible damage could result if

or foreign matter.
even one
port is clogged with dirt

To avoid
rupturing the diaphragm of the airspeed
indicator, roll up the rubber tubing slowly.
CAUTION
c.
Secure the rolled up tubing
so
d.
If there is
minutes, there is
a.
If
no
decline in the
reading after
several
leak in the
no
pitot system.
reading of the airspeed indicator
pitot system plumbing for leaky hoses
decline in the
is observed, check the
Never blow air
the line toward the
through
to do so will
seriously damage
blowing back through the
line from the instrument panel, make sure that no
instrument
airspeed indicator reading.
panel;
the instruments. When
air is blown into the instruments.
and loose connections.

NOTE
CAUTION
Wax
buttons should be cleaned periodically with a

solvent to insure that no film exists on
Release the air pressure slowly by unrolling the

tubing; a sudden release of the air
rubber
pressure may
damage
the
polish applied to the static air buttons can

wrong instrument readings. The static air
or
cause
cleaning
the static air buttons.
airspeed indicator.
Drain the static air system
by opening the static drain

panel in the tail section.
INSPECTING PITOT SYSTEM HOSES
located ah of the
pitot system is checked for leaks, the hosi~

visually inspected for signs of
deterioration. There are two sections of hose in the pitot
system: one hose at the pitot mast, accessible by removing
the inspection door adjacent to the mast, and the other hose
behind the floating instrument panel which connects the pitot
line to the airspeed indicator, accessible through the access
TESTING THE STATIC SYSTEM FOR LEAKS
Before the
rear seat
valve
sections should be
cracked
or
replaced with hose conforming

Military Specification MIL-H-5593. Anytime a hose
replaced, repeat the preceding pressure check.
to
door in the left side of the firewall. Hoses that

hardened should be
are
The static system, altimeter instrument, and all ATC

transponders must be tested and inspected at twenty four
month intervals in
specified
compliance
the Code of Federal
CAUTION
To avoid
Proper functioning of the static air system is vital to safety of

flight, particularly on instrument flight. Correct maintenance
of the system should be performed as required.
The amount of attention required by the static system will
depend largely on operating conditions. Extremes of humidity
or precipitation, or of dry, dusty conditions, should be signals
for increased emphasis on static systems check, since both
are favorable to accumulations of foreign matter in the ports
requirements
Regulations.
is
STATIC SYSTEM CHECKS
with the
in FAR Parts 91.170 and 91.177 under Title 14 of
damaging
the
airspeed indicator,
the
indicator should be removed from the system

and the lines capped or an equal pressure
should be
while leak
applied to the pitot side of the indicator

testing the system.
Check the hoses connecting the static air line to the

plumbing and the tygon tubing which forms the
instrument
static air line drain. Hoses which
the bends
or
should be
connection
are
cracked, particularly
at
which have become hard,

with rubber hose conforming to
points,
or
replaced
(14, Chart 1, 91-00-00).
and lines.
MILH-5593
CLEANING THE STA TIC AIR SYSTEM
OUTSIDE AIR TEMPERATURE GAGE
81ow LOW air pressure air through the lines from the
disconnected lines at the airspeed indicator, altimeter, and
The outside air temperature gage is mounted in the left side

panel beneath the storm window. The pointer registers on a
speed indicator to the static ports. Cover each static

port separately when blowing to insure that each line is clear.
dial calibrated in
vertical
34-1090
Page 2
May 9/80
degrees
-50"C to +60"C.
over a
range of
70"8 to
50"8,
BEECHCRAFT
BONANZA SERIES
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
Inspect
Inspect
REMOVAL OF THE OUTSIDE AIR TEMPERATURE GAGE
rubber washers for
the pointer for
CAUTION
parts.
INSTALLATION QF THE OUTSIDE AIR TEMPERATURE
the gage to the molding or have an

assistant hold the gage to prevent it from falling.
Tape
GAGE
a.
Remove the sunshield, boss and washers from the
a.
peeling, cracking, and resiliency.

markings on the gage for legibility. Inspect
chipped or peeling paint. Replace defective
the index
Install the
the left side
mounting washer, boss, and gage

panel molding.
into
stem.
When
b.
damaging
removing the gage,
use
care to
avoid
CAUTION
the stem.
INSPECTION OF THE OUTSIDE AIR TEMPERATURE
Tape the gage
GAGE
assistant hold the gage to
Inspect
the sunshield for dents,
misalignment
plugged openings
stripped
or
damaged
molding
or
have
an
prevent it from falling.
and any
Inspect
b.
Install the outer washers and boss.
threads.
c.
Install the sunshield.
that would allow contact with the stem.
the nut and stem base for
to the
STATIC LINE
AIRSPEED INDICATOR
OPTIONAL EMERGENCY
Al~ SOURCE
STATIC
ALTIMETER
STATIC LINE DRAIN
VERTICAL SPEED INDICATOR

PITOT LINE
PITOT MAST AND HEAD
NOTE
On serials EA-242, EA-273 and after the pitot
mast is moved to outboard of wing station 191.
36-341-9
Pitct and Static
Figure
System
"END"
34-10-00
Page 3
A4
Jan 20/82
BEECHCRAFT
BONANZA SERIES
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
INDEPENDENT POSITION DETERMINING

WEATHER RADAR
The weather scout 1 consists
primarily of
two items: the
panel, and
right wing.
There is also supporting equipment, such as a larger
capacity engine driven air pump, electrical wiring,
plumbing, etc. When the radar unit is turned on, there is a
30 to 40 second warm-up period with the word WAIT
displayed on the screen. After WAIT disappears from the
screen, there is a delay of approximately four minutes
before the radar will function. ~lt is required that ventilation
air be pumped through the antenna bay for approximately
4.5 minutes before the antenna will energize.)
indicator in the radio section of the instrument
the antenna in the outboard section of the
bay of all fuel fumes before the antenna comes

special fiberglass covering of the radar antenna is
manufactured of three layers of 181 Volan, Epon 828 resin,
Furane 951 hardener, Flex-T flexolizer. Any area of the
fiberglass through which the radar will either transmit or
receive should NOT be repaired.
antenna
on.
The
DETERMINING
INDEPENDENT POSITION
WEA THER RADAR
RADAR ANTENNA REMOVAL
Locate the antenna in the outboard leading
a.
of the
edge
right wing.
b.
Remove the
fiberglass
antenna cover from the
wing leading edge.

c.
WARNING
Remove the four bolts (2
d.
the outboard end
When the radar is on, personnel should not be

within three feet of the radar antenna. This
complete 180" are in front of the

reproductive and other vital
organs of the body are particularly vunerable to
radiation damage.
disconnect the air line connector.
includes the
e.
f.
end) from the
on
Disconnect
the
are
accessible.
electrical connector, then
Remove the antenna.
RADAR ANTENNA INSTALLATION

a.
delay of 4.5 minutes starts upon completion of

two actions: (1) the radar is turned on, 12) there is air
pressure equal to approximately two inches of water in the
air supply line to the antenna. (The sense switch is located
in the air line near the antenna.) This air flow purges the
The time
each
Pull the inboard end of the antenna forward untir
the connectors
antenna. The eyes,
on
antenna.
b.
Place the antenna in the wing.

Connect the airline connector, then connect the
electrical connector.
c.
mounting location
place.
Install the fiberglass cover on the wing.
Place the antenna in its
install the four bolts which
d.
secure
and
it in
34-40-00
Pagel
Oct 1 0/8a
BEECHCRAFT
BONANtA SERIES
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
RADAR
_I
INDICATOR
I_
INSTRUMENT
AIR PUMP
STA. 66.00
POLYETHYLENE
TUBING AROUND
RADAR WIRE BUNDLE
L---+tt~-- STA.122.750
8 VENT TUBE
RADAR ANTENNA
STA. 148.875
3883-34
Radar Schematic
Figure 1
"EPID"
34-40-00
Page2
Oct 10/80
CHAPTER
OXYGEN
BEECHCRAFT
BONANZA SERIES
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
CHAPTER 35
OXVGEN
TABLE OF CONTENTS
CHAPTER
SECTION
SUBJECT
SUBJECT
35-00-00
GENERAL
Description
and
........1
Operation
............2
(0-10097, D-10120 and after;

CE-748, CE-772 and after, E-llll, E-1241 through E-2110
except E-1945 and E-2104; EA-1 through EA-388 except EA-320
Oyxgen High Pressure Test Procedure (D-10097, D-10129 and
after; CE-748, CE-772 and after, E-1111,E-1241 through
E-2110 Except E-1945 and E-2104; EA-1 through EA-388
except EA-320)
Oxygen Low Pressure Test Procedure (E-1946, E-2104, E-2111
and after; EA-320, EA-389 and after)
Oxygen High Pressure Test Procedure (E-1946, E-2104, E-2111
and after; EA-320, EA-389 and after)
Oxygen System Purging
Oxygen Cylinder Removal (D-10097, D-10129 and after;
CE-748, CE-772 and after; E-llll, E-1241 through
E-2110 except E-1946 and E-2104; EA-1 through
Oxygen
PAGE
Low Pressure Test Procedure

Oxygen Cylinder Installation (D-10097,
.........2
.............2
............2
............3
..........6
D-10120 and after;
CE-748, CE-772 and after, E-llll, E-1241 through

E-2110 except E-1946 and E-2104; EA-1 through
Oxygen Cylinder Removal (E-1946, E-2104, E-2111 and after;
EA-320, EA-389 through EA-439)
Oxygen Cylinder Installation (E-1946, E-2104, E-2111 and after;
EA-320, EA-389 through EA-439)
after).............
(EA-320,
Oxygen Cylinder
Oxygen Cylinder Installation (EA-320, EA-440 and after)
Oxygen Control Cable Adjustment (E-1946, E-2104, E-2111
and after; EA-389 through EA-439)
Oxygen Control Cable Adjustment (EA-320, EA-440 and after)
Oxygen Cylinder Retesting
Removal
........2
EA-440 and
........6
.........6
................6
.........7
............7
:............7
............8
.......8
"END"
35-CONTENTS
Page 1
Sp 27184
BEECHCRAFT
BONANZA SERIES
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
CHAPTER 35
CHAPTER
SECTION
PAGE
SUBJECT
DATE
35-EFFECTIVIN
Sep
27184
35-CONIENTS
Sep
27184
Sep
Sep
Sep
Sep
Sep
Sep
Sep
Sep
35-00-00
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
27184
27/84
27/84
27/84
27/84
27/84
27184
27/84
"END"
35-EFFECTIVITY
Page
A9
Sep
27184
BEECHCRRR~
BONANZA SERIES
MAIMENANCE MANAUL
GENERAL
optional oxygen system in the Bonanza series airplanes

(except EA-320, EA-440 and after) has an oxygen cylinder
attached to the floor in front of the spar carry through. The
filler valve is attached to the spar cover below the copilots
seat. The oxygen console to the left of the pilot contains the
pilots outlet and the pressure gage. On some airplanes
(prior to E-2111, except E-1946, E-2104; and prior to EA389 except EA-320), the oxygen console also contains a
shutoff valve and the pressure regulator mounted on the
The
back of the console. This system also has a shutoff valve

mounted on the oxygen cylinder. On serials E-1946: E-
2104, E-2111 and after; and EA-320, EA-389 and after,

cable operated shutoff valve mounted on the
oxygen cylinder. The push-pull knob for this shutoff valve is
in the subpanel below the pilots control column. On serials
there is
one
EA-320,
the
and after the oxygen filler valve,

shutoff valve(s), and reSlulator(s) are mounted in
outboard of wing station 66.
EA-440
cylinder(s),
wing(s)
automatically dump the oxygen any time the cylinder

pressure reaches between 2500 and 2775 psi. There is an
indicator (placarded OXY, H.P. Relief) under each wing
which will rupture any time the
is activated.
dump system
The shut-off valves(valve) are(is) controlled by a push-pull

knob (Figure 4) in the pilots subpanel. The oxygen pressure
gage and pilots outlet are located in the pilots left side panel
while the
copilots
outlet is located in the
right
side
stowed in
box under their seats. At serials EA-320, EA-
pilot may be stowed

place he considers convenient. The third and fourth
389 and after, the mask for the
arrangement. The oxygen masks for the fifth and sixth

are
stowed in
Access to the filler valve and pressure gage is gained by

removing the access panel located on top of the left wing aft
passengers and the pilot. On earlier airplanes the oxygen

outlets are all in the sidewalls of the airplane. On serials CE919, CE-923, CE-925, CE-927, CE-929 and after; CJ-156
system
and after; D-10348, D-10353 and after; E-1422, E-1551, E1569, E-1581, E-1594 and after; EA-21, EA-28, EA-33 and
76.5-cubic foot
airplane. The oxygen
of the
masks for the
pilot
on E-1946, E-2104, E-2111, and after; EA-320, EA389, and after) and the copilot are stowed in a box under
their seats. At serials E-1946, E-2104, E-2111, and after;
(except
EA-320, EA-289, and after, the mask for the pilot may be
stowed in
place
he considers convenient. The third and
fourth seat oxygen masks are stowed in a box attached

either to the front or rear of the rear spar, depending upon
the seating arrangement. The oxygen masks for the fifth
and sixth seats
are
stowed in
box attached to the bottom
of their seats,
Starting
with
serials
EA-320 and
A 49.8-cubic foot oxygen cylinder is the normal optional

on all Bonanzas except EA-320, EA-440 and after.
At serial E-1241
and after, and EA-2
optional cylinder
320, EA-440 and after, either

foot system is offered. The
50 psi at
pressure of 1850
its
49-cubic foot
cylinder
or
98-cubic
should be filled to
element
sensing
meets
increases
in
altitude with
increased oxygen flow. When the system is not in use, shut

off the control valve to prevent oxygen loss. For system
servicing refer to Chapter 12.
mounted in the left
WARNING
sparks away when

and close all oxygen
Make sure the oxygen shut-off
Keep fires, cigarettes

are
Mounted on the end of each cylinder is the altitude

compensating regulator, overboard dump, and the shut-off
valve. The cylinders are mounted in the wing aft of the main
spar outboard of wing station 66. The filler valve and a
pressure gage are mounted in the top of the wing outboard
of wing station 66 and aft of the main spar. There is an
overboard dump system on each cylinder which will
valves
slowly,
cylinder
of oxygen available. The altitude compensated pressure

regulator limits system operation to above 8,000 feet, where
outlets
49-cubic foot
through EA-388,
is offered. At serials EA-
temperature of 70 degrees F.
This pressure may be increased 3.5 psi, for each degree of
temperature increase, or lowered 3.5 psi, for each degree of
temperature decrease. The pressure gage is connected
directly to the oxygen cylinder and indicates the supply (psi.)
wing only.
one
access
EA-440 and after, the
B36TC oxygen system (Figure 3) has wing mounted oxygen

cylinders. The 98-cubic foot system has one 49-cubic foot
cylinder mounted in each wing. The 49-cubic foot system
has
seats
box attached to the bottom of their seats.
of the main spar outboard of Wing Station 66. The

panel is held in place by six Dzus fasteners.
center
in a
seat
oxygen masks are stowed in a box attached either to the

front or rear of the rear spar, depending on the seating
The oxygen system in the Bonanza Series airplanes may be

equipped with oxygen outlets for either 3, 4, or 5
after, the oxygen outlets for the pilot and copilot are in the
sidewall, while the other outlets are in the headliner near the
panel.
The five passenger outlets are located in the headliner near

the center of the airplane. The oxygen masks for the pilot
(except on EA-320, EA-389, and after) and copilot are
in use.
and
Open
position. Inspect the filler

attaching it to
the filler valve. Keep tools, hands and
components clean, as fire or explosion may
valve is in the closed
connection for cleanliness before
occur
when pure oxygen comes in contact with

material such as grease or oil.
organic
35-00-00
A9
Pagal
Sep 27/84
BEECHCRAFT
BONANZA SERIES
MAINTENANCE MANAUL
GENERAL
Observe the pressure gage on the oxygen

d.
console; there should be a pressure drop of no more than
400
CAUTION
Ail
persons
handling
and
Circular
43.13-1A
If the test was satisfactory, turn on the oxygen

supply at the oxygen cylinder. If a leak was detected, check
the suspected areas with leak test compound, (13, Chart 1,
91-00-00) and repeat steps "c" through "e".
f.
After the test, wipe the area clean and dry.
servicing oxygen
during servicing.
contains
in 5 minutes.
a.
systems should review proper precautions

observed
psi.
to be
FAA
Advisory
the
necessary
iniormation.
OXYGEN LOW PRESSURE TEST PROCEDURE (E-
OXYGEN LOW PRESSURE TEST PROCEDURE (D10097 0-10120 and after; CE-748, CE-772 and afte~
E-llll, E-1241 through E-2110 except E-1946an~j
E-2104; EA-1 through EA-388 except EA-320)
WARNINO
Keep fire, cigarettes and sparks away from the

vicinity of the oxygen cylinder. Hands, clothing
WARNING
and tools should be clean. Oil and grease will

ignite upon contact with pure oxygen under
sparks away from the

oxygen cylinder. Oil and grease
Keep fire, cigarettes

vicinity of the
will ignite upon
EA-320, EA-389,
1948 E-2104, E-2111, and

after)
and
and
contact with oxygen
pressure.
under
pressure.
a.
Turn the oxygen to the full off position (use the
push-pull knob).
Turn the valve
a.
off
on
the oxygen
cylinder
to the full
position.
Disconnect the oxygen cylinder from the regulator

regulator and cap the open lines.
c.
Plug a 0 to 100 psi. pressure gage into any outlet
except the pilots outlet.
d.
Pressurize the system 50 to 55 psi. and allow the
b.
at the
system
to stabilize for 2 minutes.
should not
the
following
exceed 5.0 psi.
During
e.
drop
if the pressure test is satisfactory, reconnect the

pressure lines disconnected in step "b".
Pressure test the connections made in step "f"
g.
using cylinder pressure (1500 psi. or higher),

compound, (13, Chart 1, 91-00-00).
h.
After the test, wipe the area clean
Disconnect the oxygen low pressure lines from

cap the open lines.
regulator(s) and
c.
Plug a O to
100 psi. pressure gage into any outlet.

Pressurize the system to 50 to 55 psi and allow
the system to stabilize for 2 minutes.
d.
e.
During the
ncmt 15 minutes the pressure
should not exceed 5.0
drop
psi.
If the pressure test is
f.
15 minutes the pressure
f.
high
b.
the
satisfactory,
reconnect the
lines disconnected in sl:ep "b".

Pressure test the connections made in step "f"
g.
using cylinder pressure (1500 psi, or higher in the cylinder),
and leak test

h.
compound, (13, Chart 1, 91-00-00).

wipe the area clean and dry.
After the test,
and leak test

and
OXYGEN HIGH PRESSURE TEST PROCEDURE (E1946, E-2104, E-2111, and after; EA-320, EA-389,
dry.
OXYGEN HIGH PRESSURE TEST PROCEDURE (D10097 0-10120 and after; CE-748, CE772 and after
E-llll, E-1241 through E-2110 except E-1946
E-2104; EA-1 through EA-388 except EA-320)
and after)
ancj
Check to make certain the system is charged to
a.
1500
psi.
or
higher.
Make
b.
sure
the shut-off valve
on
the oxygen
Turn off the oxygen

upon contact with pure oxygen under
ignite
console is turned oft.

c.
WARNING
supply
at the oxygen
cylinder.
pressure.
3540-00
Pagea
Sep 27/54
Ag
BEECHCRAFI
BONANZA SERIES
MAINTENANCE NIANAUL
CENTER SEAT
OUTLET
AFT SEAT
PRESSUREOXYGEN
OUTLETS
GAGE
PILOTS
OUTLET
PRESSURE REGULATOR
(BACK SIDE)
?i
OXYGEN
~i SHUT-OFF
VALVE
GEN CYLINDER
COVER ASSEMBLY
CENTER SEAT
OUTLET
ii
RH FRONT SEAT
_i~X-
RECHARGE NOZZLE
OUTLET
38-452-1
Oxygen System (Prlor to 02-929 except 02-919, CE9S3, 06-925, 06-927;

to 01-156; prior to 0-16353 except 0-10348; prior to 2-1594 except 2-1422,
2-1551, 2-1569 and 2-1581; prior to EA9S except EA-21 and EA-28)
Figure 1
prior
a.
1500
psi.
b.
the
Check to make certain the system is

or
charged
to
OXYGEN SYSTEM PURGING
higher.
Make
sure
the shut-off
valve(s) is(are) off (check

WARNING
push-pull knob).
c.
one of the pressure gages, there should
be no pressure drop in 30 minutes.
d.
If the leak test is not satisfactory, use leak test
Observe
compound (13, Chart 1, 91-00-00)
on
the
system
connections until the leak is located.

e.
Make the necessary repairs and repeat step "c".
f.
Wipe
the tested areas clean and
dry.
not use oxygen intended for medical

purposes, or such industrial uses as welding.
Such oxygen may contain excessive moisture
that could freeze up the valves and lines of the
Do
oxygen system. When filling the oxygen system,

use only MIL-0-27210 Aviators Breathing
Oxygen (10, Chart 1, 91-00-00).
35-00-00
A9
Page3
Sep 27/84
BEECHCRAFT
BONANZA SERIES
MAINTENANCE MANAUL
OXYGEN
PRESSUREPILOTS OUTLET
GAGE
E-1946. E-2104, E-2111, and

after; EA-389 thru EA-439
VALVE
~ETAIL E
OXYGEN CYL)NDER
COVER ASSEMBLY
C~
B
RECHARGE NOZZLE
MANIFOLD OUTLET
DETAIL
DETAIL
b
D
OUTLET
DETAIL
TO PUSH-PULL
KNOB
E-1946, E-2104, E-2111, and

after; EA-389 thru EA-439
DETAIL
D
836TCa41-35
Oxygen System (00-919, CE-923, CE925, CE-927, CE-929
and after; CJ-155 and after;
0-10348, 0-10353 and after; 0-1422, 0-1551, 0-1589, 0-1581,

0-1594 and after; EA-21, EA-28, EA-33 through EA-439 except EA-320)
Figure
351)0-00
Page4
Sep 27/84
A9
BEECHCRATT
BONANZA SERIES
MAINTENANCE MANAOL
CONTROL KNOB,
PILOTS
OUTLET--\
/iSUBPANEL
\rCOPILOTS
OUTLET
PRESSURE
94.094
66
66
94.094
49 CU. FT.
OXYGEN
FILLER
49 CU. FT:
]VALVE
OXYGEN
CYLINDER
I.GAGE
CYLINDER
GAGE
OVERBOARD
DUMP
OVERBOARD
DUMP
3rd,4th
51h,6th
SEAT OUTLETS
B36TC340-~
Oxygen System
(EA-320, EA940 and after)
Rgure 3
Offensive odors may be removed from the oxygen system
by purging. The system should also be purged any time the

lines are left open and subject to contamination. Purging is
accomplished by connecting a recharging cart into the
system and permitting oxygen to flow through the lines and
outlets until any offensive odors have been carried away,
The following steps outline the procedures recommended
for
purging the oxygen system.
grease and oil stains, for these contaminants

will ignite upon contact with oxygen.
Connect
a.
line
from
recharging
cart
to the
oxygen filler valve.

b.
Slowly open the oxygen supply.
c.
Slowly open the valve which allows oxygen to flow
through the mask outlets
d.
e.
Plug in an oxygen
cockpit.
Open all doors and
f.
Set the cart pressure
mask at each outlet in the
cabin and
WARNING
making sparks and keep all burning

cigarettes or fire away from the vicinity of the
airplane when the outlets are in use. Inspect the
Avoid
filler connection for cleanliness before
tools, and clothing
are
attaching
that your hands,

clean, particularly from
it to the filler valve, Make
sure
windows.
regulator
to deliver 50
psi
to
the system.
Allow system to purge for one hour and check for

g.
the presence of odor. If the odor is still present, continue
purging
after
for
the
one
additional hour. If the odor is still present

hour of purging, replace the supply
second
cylinder.
35-0040
Ag
Page5
Sep 27184
BEECHCRAFT
BONANLA SERIES
MAINTENANCE MANAUL
OXYGEN CYLINDER REMOVAL (0-10097, 0-10120

and after; CE-748, CE-772 and after; E-l I 11, E-1241
through E-2110 except E-1946 and E-2104; EA-I
tlA-388 except
through
OXYGEN CYLINDER REMOVAL
EA-330)
Remove the
AND COPILOT SEAT REMOVAL in
Chapter 25-00-00.)
Remove the spar cover.

Disconnect the control cable from the oxygen
c.
d.

vicinity of the oxygen cylinder. Mands, clothing
E-
Make certain the system is turned off.

pilots and copilots seat. (See PILOT
a.
b.
WARNING
(E-1946, E-2104,
and after; EA-389 through EA-439)
2111
valve.

WARNING
pressure.

close the oxygen supply cylinder valve.

Remove the pilots and copilots seat. (See PILOT
Slowly
a.
b.
AND COPILOT SEAT REMOVAL in

Chapter 25-00-00.)
Remove the spar cover.

Disconnect the line from the supply cylinder.
Cap the open line immediately with a clean metal
c.
d.
e.
pressure.
fitting.
clamp wing nuts.
cylinder clamps and remove
f.
Loosen the bracket
g.
Unhook the
cylinder
CAUTION
the
Care must be exercised to prevent accidentally

turning the oxygen on. Some oxygen will be lost
from the brackets.
OXYGEN CYLINDER INSTALLATION (0-10097, D10120 and after; CE-748, CE-772 and after; E- 1111,
through E-2110 except E-1946 and E-2104;
when the lines
high
are
disconnected, especially the
pressure line.
1421-E)023-AE
through EA-388 except
EA-1
a.
cap
or
f.
WARNING
Disconnect the lines from the oxygen cylinder and

the openings.
plug
Loosen the wing nuts
disconnect the

the oxygen cylinder. Hands, clothing
g.
on
the
cylinder clamps
and
clamps.
Remove the oxygen
cylinder.
vicinity of

OXYGEN CYLINDER INSTALLATION
pressure.
2104, E-2111 and after; EA-389 through EA-439)

a.
Place the
a.
the
new
cylinder
in the brackets and close
c.
and the
Tighten the bracket clamp wing nuts.

Carefully inspect the fittings on both the cylinder
line for cleanliness and the presence of foreign
cylinder
in the proper
position
in the
airplane.
b.
Connect the
cylinder clamps
c.
Remove the
plugs
cylinder clamps.
b.
Place the
(E-1946,
and tighten the
wing
nuts.
or
caps and install the oxygen
lines.
matter, which may contaminate the oxygen until it is unfit for
breathing.
d.
e.
f.
Connect the line fitting to the cylinder fitting.

Slowly open the supply cylinder valve.
Test the connections for leaks with Oxygen
System Leak-Test Compound, (13, Chart i, 91-00-00).

g.
h.
Install the spar cover,

Install the seats. (See PILOT AND COPILOT
SEAT INSTALLATION in Chapter 25-00-00.)
WARNING

pressure.
35-00-00
PageG
Sep 27/84
A9
BEECHCRAFt
BONANZA SERIES
MAINTENANCE MANAUL
OXYGEN CYLINDER INSTALLATION (EA-320, EA-
CAUTION
alter)
440 and
when the lines are connected,
high
especially
the
a.
wing
cylinder
Position the oxygen
in
in the
position
clamps.
and connect the
Check to be certain the cylinder is in the proper

position and tighten the clamp wing nuts. Safety wire the
b.
pressure line,
nuts.
Connect the control cable to the oxygen valve,

Check for leaks as indicated in OXYGEN LOW
d.
e.
c.
Remove the caps or plugs from the connection

install the oxygen lines.
points and
PRESSURE TEST PROCEDURE (E-1946, E-2104, E-2111

and after; EA-320, EA-389, and after) and in OXYGEN
HIGH PRESSURE TEST PROCEDURE (E-1946, E-2104,

E-2111, and after; EA-320, EA-389 and after).
f.
Install the spar cover.
CAUTION
(See PILOT
g.
AND COPILOT SEAT INSTALLATION in Chapter 25-0000.)
If there is oxygen in the cylinder, there will be

some oxygen lost when the high pressure lines
Install the
pilots and copilots
seats.
are
connected, particularly the pressure gage
line.
OXYGEN CYLINDER REMOVAL (EA-320, EA-440

and
after)
Turn the oxygen off.
Locate the oyxgen cylinder
a.
b.
under the
wing
ah of the main
Station 66.
Remove the
c.
remove
d.
cylinder
the
screws
WARNING
panel located
spar and outboard of Wing
access
from the access

upon contact with pure oxygen under
panel and
ignite
panel.
Disconnect the control cable from the oxygen

valve.
pressure.
d.
WARNING
Connect the control cable to the oxygen
cylinder
valve.
a.
Check for leaks
as
indicated in OXYGEN LOW

PRESSURE TEST PROCEDURE (EA-320, EA-440 and

after) and OXYGEN HIGH PRESSURE TEST
and tools should be dean. Oil and grease will

PROCEDURE
pressure.
(EA-320,
If the pressure tests

access cover under the wing.
OXYGEN CONTROL
CAUTION
EA-440 and
f.
are
after).
satisfactory,
install the
CABLE ADJUSTMENT
(E-
1946, E-2104, E-2111, and after; EA-389 through EA-
439)
when the lines are disconnected, especially the
high
a.
b.
Disconnect the lines from the oxygen regulator

and cap or plug the openings.
Loosen the wing nuts on the cylinder clamps.
f.
Position a suitable cradle under the oxygen
g.
e.
and disconnect the
pilots and copilots seats. (See

Chapter 25-00-
00.)
pressure line.
clamps.
Remove the spar carry through cover.

control cable by repositioning
Adjust the
cable, cable housing
c.
cylinder
Remove the
PILOT AND COPILOT SEAT REMOVAL in
d.
e.
or
the
both.
Install the spar carry

Install the pilots and
through
copilots
cover.
(See
Chapter
seats.
AND COPILOT SEAT INSTALLATION in
PILOT
25-00-
00.)
35-00-00
A9
Page7
Sep 27/84
BEECHCRAFt
BONANZA SERIES
YAINTENANCE MANAUL
OXYGEN CONTROL CABLE ADJUSTMENT
(EA-
320, EA-440 and after)
4,380 pressurizations, whichever

service life of the
cylinder
is
occurs
complete,
the
first. When the
cylinder
must be
discarded.
The control cablets) may be adjusted either in the wing(s) at
the valvets) or at the push-pull knob (Figure 4) just fomard
SUB PANEL
subpanel. Coarse adjustments may be

made at the velvets) by repositioning the cable, cable
housing, or both. The velvets) is located on the cylinder
of the instrument
above
an access
panel
outboard of
Wing Station
66 and ah
of the main spar. Finer adjustment of the system cables

may be made at the push-pull knob tFigure 4) just forward
of the instrument
subpanel. On the two cylinder system

or on simultaneously.
both
valves should turn off
CONTROL
CABLES
OXYGEN CYLINDER RETESTING
airplanes are the light weight

plate on the side of each
cylinder. Each oxygen cylinder must be hydrostatically
tested every three years and the test date stamped on the
cylinder. The cylinder has a service life of 24 years and/or
Oxygen cylinders
used in the
type, stamped "3 HT"
on
836TC-340-3
Oxygen Shut-Otf Cs~ntrol
Figure
"END"
35-00-00
Page8
Sep 27/84
A9
CHAPTER
PNEUMATIC
BEECHCRAFT
BONANZA SERIES
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
CHAPTER 36
PNEUMATIC
T~ABLE OF COWTENTS
CHAPTER
SECTION
SUBJECT
SUBJECT
36-00-00
PNEUMATIC
Description
and
EA-443 and after, CJ
airplanes
Troubleshooting
.......1
System
Instrument Air
and earlier
..................1
Operation
Instrument Air
Standby
PAGE
System (E-2217
and after,
-156 and after, CE-1056 and after,

with Kit No. 35-5009
Instrument Air
installed)
.......1
System
..3
Servicing
.......3
Low Instrument Air Pressure
.......3
Air Filter Removal
Standby
Standby
.......4
(Intake)
Air Filter Removal
........5
(Intake)
(Intake)
.......5
Air Filter Installation
Air Filter Removal
(Inline)
(Inline)
.......5
Standby
Standby
Pressure
Air Filter Removal
(]nline)
(Inline)
........5
...............6
Removal
Regulator
Regulator Installation
Pressure
Standby
Regulator Removal
Pressure
Standby
Regulator Installation
Pressure
Standby
Regulator Adjustment
(E-2164 and after, EA-422 and after)
Pressure RegulatorAdjustment
........6
Pressure
........6
........6
..........6
...........7
LEND"
36-CONTENTS
Page
A12
Aug 28/87
BEECHCRAFT
BONANZA SERIES
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
CHAPTER 36
LIST OF
PAGE EFFECTIVITY
CHAPTER
SECTION
SUBJECT
PAGE
DATE
36-EFFECTIVITY
Aug 28/87
36-CONTENTS
Aug 28-87
1
2
2A
3
4
Aug 28/87
Sep 27/84
36-00-00
5
6
7
Aug 28/87
Sep 27/84
Sep 27/84
Sep 27/84
Aug 28/87
Aug 28/87
"END"
36-EFFECTIVITY
Page
A12
Aug 28/87
BEECHCRAFT
BONANZA SERIES
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
PNEUMATIC
ATION
INSTRUMENT
gage is in
instrument panel.)
DESCRIPTION AND OPER-
pressure
the
left side of the
SYSTEM
AIR
SYSTEM
AIR
INSTKUMENT
AND
EA- 443
AND
AFTER,
CE-1056
AND AFTER,
AFTER, CJ-156
AND
AFTER, AND EARLIER AIRPLANES
WITH KIT NO. 35-5009 INSTALLED)
STANDDY
(E-2217
instrument air pressure system

provides air for operation of the directional
and the horizon gyro. Air is drawn
gyro
through an inlet air filter mounted on the
baffle by the dry air pump.
rear eng~ne
The air is then routed through the air
filter
to
pressure regulator and inline
the gyros. The regulator, which is located
nearthe inline filter on the rear engine
baffle, should be adjusted to a pressure
5.0 Hg. The 5.0 Hg pressure setting is
taken between the regulator and the inline
filter (see Figure i).
The
CAUTION
Never
been
lof
use
an
dropped
air pump which

mishandled.
has
or
standby instrument air pressure system

provided to supply instrument air in
the
the
event
primary instrument air
is
The system incorpump which is driven

by an electric motor, a pump intake filter
which is mounted on the underside of the
engine, an inline filter and a pressure
Instrument air pressure is monitored by

located in the
instrument air gage
the
of
the
instrument
side
panel.
upper right
(At serials E-1946, E-2104, E-2111 and
after; EA-320, EA-389 and after, the
system
pressure
porates
fails.
pressure
------r
1/
I/
OVERBOARD
GYRO PRESSURE
INDICATOR
CTION GYRO
CHECK VALVE
HORIZON GYRO
CHECK VALVE
VENT LINE
PRESSURE LINE
MANIFOLD
INLINE(
FILTER
)INLINE
TEST
GAGE
PRESSURE
REGULATOR
PRESSURE
TEST
GAGE
~PRESSURE
PUMP(
(ENGINE DRIVEN)
FILTER
t----(
INTAKE
INTAKE
FILTER
FILTER
REGULATOR
)STANDBY
PRESSURE PUMP
(ELECTRIC)
36-603-50
Pressure
System Schematic
Figure 1
36-00-00
Page 1
Aug 28/87
BEECHCRAFT
BONANZA SERIES
MA i NTENANCE MAN UAL
:Oo
n
FILTER
;C
NOSE LANDING GEAR KEEL
;f
FILTER
REGULATOR
CHECK VALVE ASSBWBLY
PUMP
MOTOR
36-194-10
Standby
Instrument Air
Figure 2
System
36-00-00
Page 2
Sep 27/84
A9
BEECHCRAFT
BONANZA SERIES
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
regulator. The standby system is controlled by an ON/OFF toggle switch, placLH

arded STANDBY GYRO P, located on the
subpanel. When the system is activated, a
solenoid valve, mounted in the pressure
supply line just aft of the firewall fit-
all
air
isolates
automatically
ting,
driven instruments except the directional
gyro and the horizon gyro. The standby air
pressure system is plumbed into the pri-
system ducting by use of a manifold

with check valves to prevent backflow.
mary
36-00-00
Page 2A
A12
Aug 28/87
BEECHGRAFT
BONANZA SERIES
MAINTENANCE MAN UAL
CHART 1
TROUBLESHOOTING INSTRUMENT AIR SYSTEM
PROBABLE CAUSE
INDICATION
Zero
i.
indication
on
a.
instrument gage,
b.
REMARKS
Hole in gyro plumbing, line plugged,

filter
plugged or
disconplumbing
nected.
Defective
Inspect plumbing, replace or

lines
connect
or
replace
a.
filter
b.
instrument
Replace
as
necessary.
gage.
pressure gage.
c.
Defective gyro horidirection

ton
or
Inspect
replace as
c.
instrument
and
necessary.
gyro.
d. Defective pump.
e.
Defective
regulator.
d.
Replace
e.
Replace regulator.
pump.
NOTE
Troubleshooting
pressure systems
GENERAL
procedures
are
the
for
the
primary
and
standby
air
same.
structure.
RH
the
SERVICING
,ressure
The inline filter is mounted in
engine compartment between the

regulator and the instruments, at
The
stations 28.25 and 30.75.
filter should be replaced every 500
ours or on condition and the inline filter should be replaced every 300 hours or
~n condition.
~uselage
Impurities and foreign matter are removed

from the air by two pressure system filintake filter is located on the
ahead of the pressure
pump. This filter;hould be replaced annually or every 300 to 500 hours of service
time depending upon operating conditions.
The filter element must not be
subjected
to solvents and must be replaced if this
occurs.
Always reinstall the filter cover
with the opening facing down. The inline
filter is located between the pressure
regulator and the instruments. The frequency of replacing this air filter will
ters.
The
top of the engine
se rv i ce
conditions;
depend
upon
however,they should be checked approximately every 100 hours of operation and
replaced every 300 hours of operation, or
sooner
if conditions warrant.
intake filter for the standby instruair system is located on the underof the engine attached to the keel
side
The
ment
intake
localities where there

dust or sand in the
air, the filters should be replaced at
more
frequent intervals. Under extremely
dusty conditions, it may be necessary to
inspect the filters daily. A clogged filreduces air
flow and slows up the
ter
rotor, causing improper gyro indication
due to a loss of gyroscopic inertia.
When
is
operating
great
in
amount
of
LOW INSTRUMENT AIR PRESSURE

If the pressure pump has failed or operation of the instruments indicates a flucof
the
tuation
or
a
system
pressure
36-00-00
Page 3
A9
Sep
BEECHCRAFT
BONANZA SERIES
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
decrease in system
excessive pressure,
the
in
lines,
pressure,
a
partial
filter
check for
restriction
from
or
may be checked
by:
the
and
Removing
a.
the
system
obstructions
to flow with
inline
checking
by comparing the
a
new
for
bends,
kinks
partially
loss resulting
pressure
loose connections. These conditions
obstructed,
Check the lines

c.
and excessive carbon.
filter
it
from
for
resistance
the
or whendiscrepancy repaired
in the
are
replaced
any components
system, adjust the pressure as
pressure
indicated under the heading PRESSURE REGULATOR ADJUSTMENT in this Chapter.
With
ever
AIR FILTER REMOVAL
(INTAKE)
(Figure 3)
filter.
NOTE
a.
Gain
access
to the filter
by open-
ing the left engine cowling.

Use
dry, low
pressure air source

for this test. If
(10 psi maximum)
Remove the nut,

b.
from the filter.
flow resistance in the filter

removed from the airplane exceeds
that of the new filter by more
than 1.0 psi, replace the filter,
air
Check
b.
all
connections
for
c.
secures
tight-
d.
the
Remove
the filter.
washers, and
cover
and
which
spacer
nut
Remove the filter.
ness.
FILTER CARTRIDGE
(FOR REPLACEMENT ORDER P/N 09-14-1)
NAS43003-24 SPACER
AN315-3R NUT
NUT
1j/I
I;
.1.....
AN936AIO
LOCK WASHER
970-3 WASHER
AN960PD1716 WASHER
FILTER RETAINER
NUT AND WASHER
570-190-19
Intake Air Filter

Figure 3
3S-00-00
Page 4
Sep 27/84
A9
BEECHCRAFT
BONANZA SERIES
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
(INTAKE)
d.
Close the engine
cowling.
(Figure 3)
a.
Install
the filter and
with
secure
the nut.
AIR FILTER REMOVAL
Install the spacer and

cover should be installed with
opening facing down.
b.
c.
Secure the
cover
cover.
the
cover
a.
the
the
Open
filter
engine
the engine
attached to
baffle.
b.
Remove the
from the filter.
Close the
cowling and locate

bracket below
the
with the washers
and nut,
d.
(INLINE)
the
inlet and outlet hoses
Remove the nut and washer which

c.
hold the filter in place.
engine cowling.
(INTAKE)
STANDBY AIR FILTER REMOVAL
d.
(Figure 3)
Remove the filter.
Gain access to the filter by opene.

RH
the
engine cowling.
ing
(INLINE)

a.
NOTE
secure
b.
hoses.
standby system intake filter
The
the underside of the

engine attached to the keel strucis mounted
on
ture.
c.
Place the filter in

with washer and nut.
position and
and
Install
the
Close the
engine cowling
inlet
STANDBY AIR FILTER REMOVAL
f.
Remove the nut,
from the filter.
g.
secures
h.
Remove the
the filter.
washers, and
spacer
and
nut
AIR
FILTER
(INLINE)
cover
which
a.
Open the RH engine covling and
locate the filter attached to the bracket
below the engine baffle.
b.
Remove the inlet and outlet hoses
from the filter.
Remove the filter.
STANDBY
outlet
INSTALLATION
the nut and

Remove
c.
hold the filter in place.
d.
was7er
which
Remove the filter.
STANDBY
AIR
FILTER
INSTALLATION
(INLINE)
a.
Install
the filter and
with
secure
the nut.
a.
secure
Install the spacer and

should be installed with
opening facing down.
b.
cover
c.
Secure the
cover
cover.
position and
The
cover
b.
hoses.
with the washers
c.
the
Place the filter in

with washer and nut.
In stall
the
Close the
engine cowling
inlet
and
outlet
and nut.
36-00-00
A9
Page 5
Sep 27/84
BEECHCRAFT
BONANZA SERIES
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
REGULATOR
PRESSURE
REMOVAL
Gain
a.
the
to
access
regulator by
opening the engine cowling.
Open the engine cowling and

regulator.
a.
locate
the pressure
Install a test gage (0-10 psi) in

side of the pressure regulator.
b.
the
"out"
Remove the inlet and outlet hoses.
b.
NOTE
c.
secure
Remove the nut and washer

the regulator in position.
d.
Remove the
which
During this
voltage must
+0.3 volts.
regulator.
auxiliary
an
REGULATOR
PRESSURE
Place the
a.
position.
in
Install
the nut and washer,
With
c.
the
b.
power
primary
ON
turn
the engine
instrument
the
standby
breaker in the LH
Install
c.
the
inlet
and
d.
provide
Close the
REGULATOR
air
and
running,
system
OFF,
circuit
pump
subpanel.
Adjust the pressure regulator

5.0 +.1 -.2 psi as indicated
the instrument air pressure

in the instrument panel.
engine cowling.
PRESSURE
STANDBY
NOT
air
regube used.
outlet
hoses.
d.
battery
supply,
lated to 28.5 ~.25 vdc,
INSTALLATION
regulator
procedure,
be maintained at 28.5
It is recommended that
gage
to
on
mounted
REMOVAL
NOTE
Open
a.
the
RH
locate the pressure
engine cowling
regulator.
and
Remove the inlet and outlet hoses.
b.
Rotate the adjusting screw clockwise to increase the pressure and

counterclockwise to decrease the
pressure.
c.
secure
Remove
the nut and washer which
the regulator in position.
Remove the regulator.
d.
STANDBY PRESSURE
REGULATOR
INSTAL-
LATION
a.
Place the
b.
Install
c.
Install
regulator
in
position.
the nut and washer.
NOTE
At
should
the
time
no
gage
installed in the "out" side of the
pressure regulator indicate more
than 5.0.
If this is not enough
for
air
satisfactory
pressure
instrument operation, the system
has
or
a
leak,
blockage
be
restriction
which
must
repaired immediately.
the
inlet
and
outlet
hoses.
e.
breaker
Close the engine
d.
cowling.
f.
STANDBY PRESSURE
REGULATOR
AFTERMENT jE-2164
AFTER,
AND
Turn the standby air pump circuit

to OFF.
on the LH subpanel
ADJUSTEA-422 AND
Remove
g.
Close
pri
procedure is performed with

engine NOT running and the
ma
ry
instrument
turned off.
test
gage
from
the
the
engine cowling.
NOTE
NOTE
This
the
the
airplane.
air
system
When this procedure is completed,

adjust the primary instrument air
system as detailed under PRESSURE
REGULATOR
ADJUSTMENT
in
this
chapter.
36-00-00
Page 6
Aug 28/87
A12
BEECHCRAFT
BONANZA SERIES
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
NOTE
clockwi se
the
to
regulator
pressure
increase the pressure and counterclockwise to decrease the pressure.
performing this procedure on

airplane serials E-2164 and after
and EA-422 and after, ensure that
the standby air pressure system
Check the instrument air pressure

With the
the instrument panel
engine operating at 800 rpm, the pressure
should remain in the green are.
PRESSURE
REGULATOR ADJUSTMENT
d.
When
in
gage
is turned OFF.
NOTE
Gain
a.
lator
access
to
the pressure regushould

the
ti me
At
no
gage
installed in the "out" side of the
pressure regulator indicate more
than 5.0 psi.
by opening the engine cowling.
Install a test gage (0-10 psi) at

b.
the "out" side of the pressure regulator.
c.
4.5 psi
Adjust the pressure regulator

on
regulator
2300 rpm.
to
the test gage at the pressure

with the engine operating at
Rotate the adjusting screw on
e.
Remove
the
test
gage
from
the
airplane.
f.
Close the engine
cowling.
"END"
36-00-00
Page 7
A12
Aug 28/87
CHAPTER
BEECHCRAFT
BONANZA SERIES
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
CHAPTER 39
ELECTRIC PANELS PARTS
INSTRUMENTS
TABLE OF CONTENTS
CHAPTER
SECTION
SUBJECT
SUBJECT
GENERAL
39-00-00
Description
and
PAGE
.......1
Operation
.........39-10-00
INSTRUMENT AND CONTROL PANELS

.......1
Glareshield Removal
.......1
Glareshield Installation
.......1
Engine and Flight Instruments

Installation of Engine and Flight Instruments
Removal of Engine Instrument Cluster Panel......
installation of Engine Instrument Cluster
Removal of Radio/Avionics Equipment
Installation of Radio/Avionics Equipment
Right and Left Subpanel
.......1
Removal of
.......1
.......1
I..............
ELECTRICAL AND ELECTRONIC EQUIPMENT RACKS
.......1
.......1
.......2
.......2
39-20-00
.......1
COMPONENT LOCATION ZONES
.......1
Area Between the Firewall and Instrument Panel
Airplane Zones
.......3
231 and 232
Side of
Forward, Right
Firewall, the Engine compartment, and the
Area Which Includes the
Nose Landing Gear Well

Airplane Zones 222/410/710
.......6
Area Beneath the Floor From the Firewall to the
Spar and From the Main Spat to the Rear Spar

Airplane Zones 140 and 150
Area Which Includes the Wings and Main Landing
Gears
Airplane Zones 531 thru 650 and
Main
.......9
;.....11
Zones 730 and 740
"END"
39-CONTENTS
Page
My 9180
BEECHCRAFT
BONANZA SERIES
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
CHAPTER 39
CHAPTER
SECTION
SUBJECT
PAGE
DATE
39-EFFECTIVITY
Oct 7/83
39-CONTENTS
May 9180
39-00-00
39-10-00
39-20-00
May
9i80
May
9180
Oct 7/83
Oct 7183
2
3
4
May
May
May
May
9180
9180
9/80
9180
Jan 20/82
11
May 9180
May 9180
May 9180
May 9180
May 9180
May 9/80
12
Jan 20/82
7
8
9
10
"END"
~QEFFECTIVITY
Page
A6
Oct 7/83
BEECHCRAFF
BONANZA SERIES
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
GENERAL
receiving equipment. (4) The stationary right panel which

switching, and the glove box. (5) The
upper left subpanel, located below the left floating panel and
above the left subpanel contains autopilot control switching,
OMNI indicators, and the flap position indicator. (6) The
lower left subpanel contains the heater and air controls for
cabin temperature, ignition switch, circuit breaker switches,
light controls, flap control, and fuel pump controls. (7) The
lower right subpanel contains the landing gear control and
indicating lights, and the standard and optional circuit
contains indicators,
The instrument
panel
general groupings: (1)
on
the
airplane
is divided into seven
floating panel, located on the upper

left corner of the instrument panel, which contains those
instruments necessary to sustain flight. (2) The center
stationary panel which contains instruments that indicate the
monitoring systems of the engine. (3) The avionics
and radio rack, located to the right of the engine instrument
panel, which contains various optional avionics and radio
various
breakers.
"END"
340000
page t
May 9/80
BEECHCRAFT
BONANZA SERIES
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
INSTRUMENT AND CONTROL

CAUTION
PANELS
if any screws are replaced upon reinstallation of

any instrument, be sure they are the same
length as the original screws.
WARNING
To avoid personal injury, shut off all electrical
power,
both
removing
components,
battery
or
and
before
c.
electrical
d.
external,
installing
any
Connect the post lights as necessary.

Connect the plumbing and/or electrical
connections to the
a.
Install the
flight instruments.
glareshield.
GLARESHIELD REMOVAL
a.
Remove the attach screws at each end of the
REMOVAL OF THE ENGINE INSTRUMENT

CLUSTER PANEL
glareshield.
b.
Lift the
velcro hook and

c.
glareshield gently
pile which secures
to detach it from the
a.
Remove the
it at its
b.
Disconnect the harness connector
top side,
quick disconnects
glareshield lights,
for
both the compass and the

d.
Disconnect the defroster heat duct,
e.
Remove the
the
glareshield.
on
the back of
engine instrument cluster.

Remove the
securing the instrument

panel. Support the cluster
assembly while removing the screws to prevent dropping it.
Remove the cluster from the panel.
d.
c.
screws
cluster to the instrument
glareshield.
GLARESHIELD INSTALLA TION

a.
Place the
glareshield
in
position
and connect the
INSTALLATION OF THE ENGINE INSTRUMENT

CLUSTER PANEL
defroster heat duct.

b.
quick
disconnects for both
the compass and the glareshield lights.

Install the attach screws at each end
c.
a.
proper
of the
b.
Place the engine instrument cluster

in the instrument panel.
Press downward on the top side of the

to secure the velcro hook and pile.
in the
Secure the instrument cluster to the instrument
panel with the
glareshield.
panel
position
screws.
glareshield
d.
CAUTION
REMOVAL OF
INSTRUMENTS
ENGINE AND
glareshield.
b.
Disconnect the plumbing
connections from the flight instruments.
a.
Disconnect and
d.
Remove
instrument to the
the
remove
mounting
If
replacement of
screws
of the
screws
to
the screws is
same
avoid
length
internal
required,
as
the
damage
use
original
to
the
instrument cluster.
Remove the
c.
e.
FLIGHT
and/or
any post
screws
electrical
lights.
securing
c.
the
d.
panel section.
Connect the engine harness connector to the
back of the instrument cluster.
Install the
glareshield.
Remove the instrument.
REMOVAL OF RADIO/A VIONICS EQUIPMENT
INSTALLATION OF ENGINE AND FLIGHT

INSTRUMENTS
a.
Locate the component you wish to
remove
from
the radio/avionics rack.

a.
Place the instrument in the proper
position
in the
panel.
b.
attaching
Secure the instrument to the

screws.
panel
with
the
b.
Loosen the Alien
screw
which
secures
the
piece
of gear in the rack.

Slide the required piece of gear from the shelf
c.
the radio/avionics rack.
on
39-1090
Pagel
May 9/80
BEECHCFIAFT
BONANZA SERIES
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
FLIGHT INSTRUMENT
PANEL
ENGINE
INSTRUMENT
PANEL
RADIO
AND
AVIONICS
RACK
RIGHT
PANEL
AND
GLOVEBOX
LEFT UPPER SUBPANEL
RIGHT SUBPANEL
LEFT SUBPANEL
35-392-256
Instrument and Control Panel (except serials

E-1946, E-2104, E-2111 and after and EA-320,
EA-389 and after)
Figure
INSTALLA TION OF RADIO/A VIONICS EQUIPMENT
RIGHT AND LEFT SUBPANEL

Access to
a.
install
on
b.
Slide the radio/avionics component you wish to

its proper shelf,
Make sure the component is seated all the way
back in the shelf to make its electrical connection.

c.
Tighten the Alien screw which retains the
component in the shelf.
the
individually
mounted
circuit
breakers
is
panel. Before
starting any removal or installation procedures, ensure that
the battery switch is in the OFF position, the battery is
obtained from the underside of the instrument
disconnected, and that the external ground power unit is

disconnected. When removing any of the components for
maintenance purposes, tag and identify any wires removed
to facilitate reinstallation of the components.
39-1 0-00
Page
Oct71S3
A6
BEECHCRAFT
BONANZA SERIES
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
~uHmR
eRspslo
eQOO,
~x
larrruar
:O
O
~mps
1~31
umR
i;-loo
OURR
OUTIEI
r~
00
0000
00000000000Q0000000
Cm
cm
PEDESTPIL
A36-390-22
TYPICIL INSTRUaENT PINEL
Instrument and Control Panel

2111 and after
and EA-320, EA-389 and after)
Figure 2
(Serlals E-1946, E-2104,
"688"
39-1 090
90993
A6
Oct 7/83
BEECHCRAFT
BONA1~IZA SERIES
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
ELECTRICAL AND ELECTRONIC EQUIPMENT

RACKS
diagrams and the accompanying equipment lists

Wiring Diagram Manual identify each electrical
component with a reference designator. Further, the
equipment list identifies the area in which the component is
The circuit
in
the
by a zone number. The airplane zoning diagram,

repeated in Figure 1, shows the various zones of
the airplane. The lists of components, and the illustrations
showing their installation on the following pages, identify
these components by the reference designator, shown in
parenthesis
assigned each component in the Wiring
Manual,
(P/N 35-590102-9).
Diagram
installed
which is
COMPONENT LOCATION ZONES
Indicates
100
Right
Side
BELOW FLOOR
140
Firewall to Main
150
Main
160
Aft of Rear
Spar
Spar
Spar
300
340
Rudder
351
Conventional Tail)
Horizontal Stabilizer
(352)
with
AFT FUSELAGE AND EMPENNAGE
(Contd)
to Rear
Spar
361
(362)
370
200
(Aircraft
Elevator
Tail Cone
FORWARD FUSELAGE
221
(222)
231
(232)
Firewall
(Attached
Accessible from fon~vard
240
251
(252)
410
ENGINE COMPARTMENT
500
(600) WING AND CONTROL SURFACES
to or
Side)
Firewall to Instrument
Panel
531
Instrument Panel and
532
Subpanel
Cabin (Floor
Headliner)
Line to
253
Cabin Headliner Area
270
Main
533(633)
541 (641)
542 (642)
Spar Carry-Through
StruCture
280
Rear
(631)
(632)
Wing, Inboard Leading Edge

Wing, Inboard-Aft of Main
Spar
Flap
Wing, Outboard-Leading Edge
Wing, Outboard-Aft
Spar
of Main
543(643) Aileron
550 (650) Wing Tip
Spar Carry-Through
Structure
700
300
AFT FUSELAGE AND EMPENNAGE
GEAR DOORS AND WHEEL WELLS

710
730
310
Aft
320
Dorsal Fin
330
Fuselage
(Aircraft with
Conventional Tail)
Vertical Stabilizer (Air-
800
craft with Conventional Tail)
Nose
(740)
Main
Landing
Landing
Gear
Gear
DOORS
820
Cabin
830
Baggage
Entry Door
or
Cargo
Door
Airplane Zoning Diagram

Figure 1 (Sheet 1 of 2)
3420-00
Pager
May 0/60
BEECHCRAFT
BONANZA SERIES
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
710
531
532
631
541
632
641
550
650
542
543
642
643
533
730
740
351
240
361
362
253
820
633
352
330
251
830
(252)
310
320
340
221
410
(222)
(232)
370
I-
-I
()lndicates Right
Side
140
270
150
280
160
35-607-22
Airplane Zoning Dlegrem

342MW)
PaeaS
May 9/80
BEECHCRAFT
BONAEUA SERIES
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
AREA BETWEEN
INSTRUMENT PANEL
AND 232
FIREWALL AND
AIRPLANE ZONES 231
THE
For maintenance coverage of the voltage regulator, refer to

Chapter 24 of the Maintenance Manual. The electrical
equipment junction
(Figure 2)
components located between the firewall and
instrument panel (zones 231 and 232) are individually
The electrical
contains the
flap position PC
and an externally mounted flasher. The following

components are located in airplane zones 231 and 232:
Equipment Junction Box (231) (A19)

Landing Gear Warning Horn (231) (LS11)
Stall Warning Horn (231) (LS12)
Voltage Regulator (232) (VR11)
Manifold Pressure Switch (231) (S54)
LH Fuel Quantity PCB (231) (A13)
RH Fuel Quantity PCB (231) (A14)
Electrical
or bolts. Prior to performing any

these components, ensure that the battery
switch is OFF, the battery is disconnected, and that the
external power source (if installed) is disconnected. When
removing these components for maintenance purposes, tag
and identify any wires removed to facilitate the
mounted with
maintenance
box
board, the annunciator dimming PC board, relays, diodes,
screws
on
reinstallation of the components.
r-l
II
1\
~--VOLTAGE
R"ULATOR
CONNECTOR
DETAIL
Right
Area Between Firewall and Instrument Panel

figure 2 (Sheet 1 ot 3)
35-351-6
Zone 232
39-20-00
Paged
May 9/80
BEECHCRAFT
BONANZA SERIES
YAIWTENANCE MANUAL
CONNECTORS AND
SOCKETS
STALL WARNING
HORN
WIRE
HOUSING
ELECTRICAL EQUIPMENT
JUNCTION BOX
LANDING GEAR
WARNING HORN
35-3513
DETAIL A
Left Area f~etween Firewall and Instrument Panel

392090
Page4
May 990
Zone 231
BEECHCRAFT
BONANZA SERIES
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
FUEL
QUANTITY PCBS
MANIFOLD PRESSURE
SWITCH (EA-1 THRU EA-272
excepi EA-242)
i/
MANIFOLD
PRESSURE
I/
i//
(INSTRUMENT)
DETAIL B
35351 -j
Left Center Area Between Firewall and Instrument Panel

Figure 2 (Shset 3 of 3)
Zone 231
39-2000
Page S
A4
Jan 20182
BEECHCRAFT
BONANZA SERIES
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
AREA WHICH INCLUDES THE FORWARD, RIGHT

SIDE OF THE FIREWALL, THE ENGINE
these switches is found in
OOMPARTMENT, AND THE NOSE LANDING GEAR
Manual. Al
WELL
alternator, starter, etc., will be shown in the 10-520 or

TSIO-520 Series Aircraft Engines Overhaul Manual, FORM
AIRFLANE ZONES 222/410/710
(Figure 3)
located in
X-30039A
The electrical components located in the above areas and
zones are mounted with nuts, bolts, screws, or clamps.
Prior to performing any maintenance on these components,
that
ensure
the
battery
switch is OFF, the
battery
is
disconnected, and that the external power source (if

installed) is disconnected. When removing these
components for maintenance purposes, tag and identify
any wires removed to facilitate the reinstallation of the
components.
The
landing gear uplock and downlock switches
nose
located in the
are
wheel well, and are mounted on the

right, outboard side of the wheel well keel. These switches
work in conjunction with the indicator lights on the right
subpanel
nose
to indicate
nose
landing
gear
position.
For maintenance coverage of the battery, refer to Chapter

12 of the Maintenance Manual. The throttle warning horn
switch
(S34)
(S41) and
are
38-20-00
Pagee
May 9/80
located
the
on
optional landing gear safety switch

the throttle control shaft and
are
located in
Adjustment and pictorial coverage of

Chapter 32 of the Maintenance
maior engine electrical components i.e.,
zone
or
410.
X-30042.
airplane
tones
The
following components
222 and 410:
Fuse blocks, both Standard and
optional (222) (F15, F16, XF15)

Battery (222) (BT10)
Shunt (222 (R34)
Current Limiters (222) (Ft, F2, XF1, XF2)
Capacitor Filter (222) (C11)
Optional External Power Relay (222) (K12)
Optional External Power Receptacle (410) (J32)
Starter Relay (222) (K14)
Battery Master Relay (222) (K15)
Alternator Out Sensor (222) (A16)
Throttle Warning Horn Switch (410)
(S41) Chapter 32
Optional Landing Gear Safety Switch
(410) (S34) Chapter 32
Avionics Master Relay (222)
Switch, Nose Landing Gear Uplock (710) (S82)
Switch, Nose Landing Gear Downlock (710) (S63)
are
BEECHCRAFT
BONANZA SERIES
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
FUSE
BLOCK
SPARE
FUSE
BLOCK
STANDARD
FUSE
BLOCK
STACKED
CURRENT
LIMITERS
STARTER RELAY
SMUNT
EXTERNAL
POWER
RELAY
BATTERY~
/-BATTERY
MASTER RELAY
~ALTERNATOR OUT SENSOR
AVIONICS
MASTER
RELAY
CAPACITOR
CURRENT
LIMITERS
DETAIL
EXTERNAL
POWER
RECEPTACLE
35-351-2
Fomard, Right Side of Rrewall and Engine Compettment

Zones 222/410
392900
Pege7
May 9/80
BEECHCRAFT
BONANZA SERIES
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
MAGNETOS
1
LANDING LIGHT
THROTTLE WARNING
HORN SWITCH
EXTERNAL
POWER
RECEPTACLE
TO CYLINDER HEAD
TEMP BULB
TO TAXI LIGHT
__
LANDING GEAR
DOWNLOCK SWITCH
LANDING GEAR
UPLOCK SWITCH
35-351-5
Engine Compartment
3920-00
PagaB
May 9180
and Nose Landing Osar Well

Figure 3 (Sheet 2 ot 2)
Zones 410/710
BEECHCRAFT
BONANZA SERIES
UAINTENANCE MANUAL
AREA BENEATH THE FLOOR FROM THE

FIREWALL TO THE MAIN SPAR AND FROM THE
MAIN SPAR TO THE REAR SPAR
AIRPLANE
ZONES 140 AND 150
(Figure 4)
The electrical components located from the firewall to the
main spar, and from the main spar to the rear spar are
mounted with nuts, bolts, screws, and clamps. Prior to
performing any
that the battery
and
that the
maintenance on these components, ensure

switch is Off, the battery is disconnected,
external
disconnected. When
power
removing
maintenance purposes, tag and
source
(if installed)
is
these
components for
identify
any wires removed
to facilitate the reinstallation of the
components.
CAUTION
Make
sure
the grommets are installed in the
of the main spar through which the wire

harness passes, so chafing of the harness will
area
not occur.
The
auxiliary fuel pumps are located forward of the main

spar; all other components in this figure are located aft of
the main spar. There are three different auxiliary fuel
pumps used in the Bonanza Series airplanes: On serials
CE-743, CE-n2 and after; D-10097, D-10120 and after; E1111, E-1241 and after, a reference designator (811) is
used for
high boost pump. On serials 01-149 and after,

auxiliary boost pumps are used: Reference designator
(B11) for high boost and reference designator (812) for low
boost. On serials EA-1 and after, a single pump with both
high and low speeds is used. The pump used on EA-1 and
after is reference designator (813).
two
The
four
flight dimming transistor

dimming transistors and
side). For adjustment of
bracket
the
landing
Chapter 32
downlimit switches, refer to

Manual. The following components
zones
assembly
is located in
are
zone
contains
150
(left
gear uplimit and

of the Maintenance
located in
airplane
140 and 150:
Auxiliary Fuel Boost Pump (140) (811,

812, or 813) See above.
Light Dimming Transistor Bracket Assembly
(150) (A21)
Glareshield Light Dimming Transistor
(150) (Q1)
Subpanel Light Dimming Transistor
(150) (02)
Eng Inst and Avionics Console Light
Dimming Transistor (150) (03)
Flight Instrument Light Dimming
Transistor (150) (04)
Inverter (150) (MG1)
Flap Motor (150) (822)
Landing Gear Motor (150) (821)
Dynamic Brake Landing Gear Relay (150) (K17)
Landing Gear Uplimit Switch (150) (839)
Landing Gear Downlimit Switch (150) (840)
3420-00
PageS
May 8/80
BEECHCRAFT
BONANZA SERIES
FAAINTENANCE MANUAL
AUXILIARY FUEL
BOOST PUMP [B1~ OR 813)
LANDING GEAR UPLIMIT

AND DOWNLIMIT SWITCHES
LANDING GEAR MOTOR

AUXILIARY FUEL
BOOST PUMP (812)
FLAP MOTOR
rFRONT
INVERTER
SPAR
jY
-t -r~
rt
II
II
------I\
~"*I
LIGHT DIMMING TRANSISTOR

BRACKET ASSEMBLY
II
L-
DYNAMIC BRAKE LANDING

GEAR RELAY
35--352--~
Area Bencbath the Floor From the Arewall to the Rear

Figure 4
392000
PagelO
Mey 9/80
Soar
Zones 140/150
BEECHCRAFT
BONANZA SERIES
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
AREA WHICH INCLUDES THE WINGS AND MAIN

AIRPLANE ZONES 531 THRU
LANDING GEARS
650, AND ZONES 730 AND 740
(Figure 5)
components located within the~wings and
landing gear wheel wells are mounted with nuts,
bolts, screws, clamps, and rivets. Prior to performing any
maintenance on the components, ensure that the battery
switch is OFF, the battery is disconnected, and that the
external power source (if installed) is disconnected. When
removing the components for maintenance purposes, tag
and identify any wires removed to facilitate the
reinstallation of the components.
approximately WS
landing gear wheel
flap limit switches
40.00.
It is
accessible
through
the
spar. The
are accessible forward of the left flap
and may be serviced with the flaps lowered. The flap
switches are located at approximately WS 33.00. For flap
switch
The electrical
limit
main
Maintenance
well forward of the
wing
rear
adjustment refer to Chapter 27 of the

At airplane serials D-10179 and
Manual.
after, CJ-I50 and after, CE-816 and after, E-1371 and

after, and EA-1 and after the airplanes are equipped with
14
degree and
addition to the
degree approach flap

uplimit and downlimit flap
16
limit switches in
switches of
prior
airplane serials.
(squat switch) is located on
landing gear. The safety switches
are provided to prevent inadvertent retraction of the landing
gear on the ground. The switches open the control circuit
when the struts are compressed. The landing gear safety
switches also serve to control the position of the
A
landing gear safety
switch
the strut of each main
Each wing contains two fuel level transmitters which

provide fuel quantity information to their respective fuel
quantity indicator on the engine instrument panel. The
inboard fuel quantity transmitter for each wing is located at
approximately WS 43.00, and the outboard transmitter is
located at approximately WS 97.00.
retractable air conditioner condenser. When the airplane is

the ground and the air conditioner is turned on, the
on
condenser extends to the
pitot tube is mounted on

approximately WS 125.00.
The heated
rib
at
the left outboard
wing
tube
heat
The
pitot
element wires are routed with the tube air line. When the
pitot tube is removed for maintenance purposes, be sure to
cap the end of the air line to prevent entry of foreign
material. Remove the cap upon reinstallation of the tube.
warning switch is located on the left outboard

wing leading edge at approximately WS 140.00.
Adjustment coverage of the stall warning system is located
in Chapter 27 of the Maintenance Manual. The stall
warning switch is removable by screws located around the
perimeter of the mounting bracket.
The stall
The
landing gear uplock and downlock switches, a pair for

landing gear, are located in the wheel well on
aft side of the front wing spat at WS 45.00 for the gear
each main
the
up switch, and at WS 52.00 for the gear down switch.

These switches work in conjunction with the indicator lights
on the right subpanel to indicate landing gear position.
The electrical
switches
indicator
flap position
transmitter and the
flap
limit
located within the left wing. The flap position

is mounted at the left flap actuator at
are
ground
extension
position.
The following electrical components are located in the area

which includes the wings and main landing gear. This area
includes airplane zones 531 thru 650, and zones 730 and
740:
Warning Switch (531) (543)

(531) (HR23)
Transmitter, LH Inboard Fuel (531) (R20)
Transmitter, LH OutboardFuel (531) (R21)
Transmitter, RH Inboard Fuel (631) (R22)
Transmitter, RH Outboard Fuel (631) (R23)
Switch, LH Landing Gear Uplock (730) (560)
Switch, LH Landing Gear Downlock (730) (S61)
Switch, RH Landing Gear Uplock (740) (564)
Switch, RH Landing Gear Downlock (740) (S65)
Flap Position Transmitter (730) (MT2)
Switch, Flap Uplimit (533) (S50)
Switch, Flap Downlimit (533) (551)
Switch, 14 Degree Flap Limit (533) (S76)
Switch, 16 Degree Flap Limit (533) (S47)
Switch, RH Landing Gear Safety (740) (S36)
Switch, LH Landing Gear Safety (730) (S37)
Stall
Heated Pitot Tube
342090
Pagelf
May 9/80
BEECHCRAFT
BONANZA SERIES
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
UPLIMIT
FLAP
SWITCH
LH ONLY
STALL
WARNING
SWITCH
LH ONLY
HEATED
PITOT TUBE
LH ONLY
APPROACH
FLAP
SWITCHES
CHONLY
FUEL TRANSMITTERS
FUEL TRANSMITTER
EA-242. EA-273 AND AFTER
LANDING GEAR
DOWNLOCK SWITCH
NOTE
LANDING GEAR
UPLOCK SWITCH
DOTTED LINES INDICATE

EA-242, EA-273 AND AFTER.
AT THE SAME EFFECTIVITY
THE PITOT MAST IS MOVED
TO THE WING TIP.
FLAP POSITION
TRANSMITTER
LH ONLY
LDOWNL1MIT
FLAP
SWITCH
LH ONLY
35-35511
Area Which Includes the Wings and Main Landing Gear (Lett
Shown) Zones 531 thru 650 and Zones 730 and 740
Figure 5
Wing
"END"
392090
Page 1Z
Jin 3900
A4
CHAPTER
STANDARD
PRACTICESSTRU C~U RES
BEECHCRAFT
BONANZA SERIES
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
CHAPTER 51
STRUCTURES
TABLE OF CONTENTS
CHAPTER
SECTION
SUBJECT
GENERAL
SUBJECT
........._,,,
PAGE
.........,.,._51 -00-00

Primary Structural Components
..................1
...........1
Secondary Structural Components
........1
........1
Structural Repair
Repair of Fiberglass Components
........1
........2
IEND"
51-CONTENTS
A12
Page 1
Aug 28/87
BEECHCRAFT
BONANZA SERIES
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
CHAPTER 51
LIS T OF PAGE EFFECTIVITY
CHAPTER
SECTION
SUBJECT
PAGE
DATE
51-EFFECTIVITY
Oct 16/92
51-CONTENTS
Aug 28/87
Oct 16/92
Oct 16/92
51-00-00
"END"
51-EFFECTIVITY
Page
A16
Oct16/92
BEECHCRAFT
BONANZA SERIES
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
GENERAL
airplane is all metal with a semimonocoque type

construction. Stresses are carried by both the skin
and stiffener members of the fuselage, wings, and
empennage. The airplane has primarily a riveted
The
structure. Field
repairs
to skins and stiffener mem-
bers may be accomplished with standard materials

and hand tools. The basic structure of the airplane is
fuselage, which is constructed of bulkheads

strengthened with longerons, stringers, and skin
panels,
Seats and seat structure.
h.
Integrity of V35B and V35B-TC airplanes is

improved by installation of Kit No. 35-4016-7 S. The
kit will provide additional support to the leading edge
Structural
of
the
and
stabilizers,
be
can
installed
without
removal of the stabilizer.
SECONDARY STRUCTURAL COMPONENTS
the
In
the
event
structural
of
damage,
attention, but would
wing sections are attached to the fuselage

carry-through structure by front main and rear spars.
The leading edge and rear panel (box section) of
each wing are attached to the -main spar by continThe
safety
piano-type hinges. The wing tip is attached to

wing rib. The horizontal and vertical
uous
the
following secondary
require immediate
necessarily endanger the
would
components
not
airplane and/or
of the
the passengers.
a.
Wing tips
b.
Fairings
c.
Nonstructural doors and
d.
Furnishings
the last outboard

stabilizers
con stru cted
each
are
around
two
channel-section spars and are covered with a skin

stiffened by internal beads. Each is attached to the
fuselage
at the front and rear spars. The elevators
and rudder both have
main spar and ribs.
The
following
structural
primary
components
of the
airplane and/or
Control systems
b.
Engine
c.
Fittings
the
general, structural repair methods

airplane may be in accordance with
In
thinner th~n the

the
next
ations
thicker
Wing,
tail
surface,
and
tail surfaces
control
the
recommended in addition to AC 43.13-1
are
a.
and control surfaces
e.
on
43.13-1A
original skin. Patches should be of

material. The following consider-
and AC 43.13-2 for
fuselage, wings,
AC
AC 43.13-2 AIRCRAFT ALTERATIONS MAN UAL. Never

make a skin replacement or patch from a material
mounts
Skins of the
used
AIRCRAFT INSPECTION AND REPAIR MANUAL and
surface
of the
airplane.
joints, including patches,

staggered rows of rivets.
b.
All
defects
such
cause
repair
All lap
at least two
d.
are
passengers.
a.
(excluding
STRUCTURAL REPAIR
essential to the proper function of the airplane. Damage, occurring to any of the components, would seri-
ously endanger the safety
upholstery
seating)
STRUCTURES
PRIMARY STRUCTURAL COMPONENTS
and
covers
repair
as
material
must
be
must have
free
of any
nicks, scratches, etc., which
can
stress rises.
spars
f.
g.
support
Landing
Auxiliary
gears and
support
members used to
other members
carrying
Never dimple a structural member by

c.
ing the rivet head into the part.
structure
strengthen
direct loads
or
d.
Do not countersink
deeper
driv-
than 75% of the
material thickness.
51-00-00
Page
A16
Oct 16/92
BEECHCRAFT
BONANZA SERIES
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
REPAIR OF FIBERGLASS COMPONENTS
Apply an even coat of resin to the sanded

Impregnate all three laminated glass cloth
patches by laying the patches on clean waxed paper
and working the resin through the fabric with a 2-inch
d.
area.
Large holes and cracks require that the

be cut out and trimmed just beyond
the area of damage. If the parts are painted, remove
the paint and sand that portion of the part extending
at least 2 inches beyond the cutout,
a.
damaged
b.
such
as
area
Prepare 3 patches of laminated glass cloth,

Trevano, Uniglas, or their equivalent. Cut the
patch to the dimensions of the sanded area, the

patch 1/2-inch smaller than the first, and the
third patch 1/2-inch smaller than the second,
first
second
brush.
Place the large patch over the cutout area,

bubbles and wrinkles. If the patch
starts to sag, place a support behind the repair area.
Coat the support with automobile wax or waxed
paper to prevent the resin from adhering to the support. Work out all air bubbles and wrinkles while
installing the second patch over the first. Install the
third patch over the second in the same manner.
e.
working
f.
Prepare the MIL-R-7575 resin (24, Chart 1,

91-00-00) for the patch in accordance with the manc.
ufacturers instructions.
Make
sure
that your hands

handling the
free of oil, grease, and dirt when

resin.
are
out all
repaired area with an even coat

patches have cured for 24 hours at
temperatures between 230C (750F) and 660C (1500F),
blend the patch into the contour of the part with fine
sandpaper. Paint the repair to match the rest of the
Brush the
of resin. After the
part.
"END"
51-00-00
Page
Oct 16/92
A16
C H A PT E R
DOORS
Ray~heon Aircraft
CHAPTER 52
DOORS
TABLE OF CONTENTS
SUBJECT
PAGE
52-00-00
General
Description
and
Operation
Cabin Door
Cabin Door Quick Release Mechanism
Utility
Doors
Baggage
(E-llll,
Doors
(CJ-149
and After
(CE-748,
Only)
After)
CE-772 and After; CJ-149 and After; D-10097, D-10120 and
After)
52-10-00
Cabin
Passenger/Crew
Cabin Door Removal
Door
Maintenance Practices..........
E-1241 and After; EA-1 and After; CE-748, CE-772 and After;
(E-llll,
D-10097, D-10120 and After)

Cabin Door Installation
(E-llll,
E-1241 and
After; EA-1 and After; CE-748, CE-772 and After;
D-10097, D-10120 and After)

Cabin Door Removal
(CJ-149
Cabin Door Installation

Cabin Door
Installing
and
(CJ-149
After)
3
3
Adjustment
Cabin Door Lock and
Removing
After)
and
and
Installing
Fitting
Tumbler to
Key
the Cabin Door Teleflex Cable
10
Interior Cabin Door Handle
Interior Cabin Door Handle Removal and Installation
10
52-30-00
Cargo
Doors
Maintenance Practices.. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Utility
Door Removal
Utility
Door Installation
Utility
Door
A21
(E-llll,
After)
E-1241 and After; EA-I and
of the Aft Half of the
Adjustment of
After)
1
1
Utility
Utility
the Fomard Half of the
Door Latch Pin
Interior
Adjustment
Adjustment
Utility
(E-llll,
Door
Utility
1
1
Door
Adjustment
Door Handle Removal and Installation
52-CONTENTS
Dec
23/99Pagel
Raylheon Aircraft
CHAPTER 52
TABLE OF
000RS
CONTENTS(CONTINUED)
SUBIECT
PAGE
(CE-748,
Large Baggage
After)
Door Removal
Large Baggage
After)
Door installation
Small
Door Removal
CE-772 and After; CJ-149 and After; D-10097, D-l 0120 and
2
(CE-748, CE-772 and After; CJ-149
and After; D-)0097, D-10120
and
Baggage
(CE-748,
CE-772 and After; CJ-149 and After; D-) 0097, D-)0120 and
After)
Small
and
Baggage
After)
Baggage
Aner)
Page
ce23199
D2
Door
Door Installation
(CE-748,
Adjustment (CE-748,
CE-772 and After; CJ-149 and After; D-10097, D-10120

2
CE-772 and After; CJ-149 and After; D-10097, D-10120 and

2
52-CONTENTS
A21
Raytheon Aircraft
CHAPTER 52
DOORS
LIST OF PAGE EFFECTIVln/
52-Effectivity
SP-Contents
52-00-00
52-10-00
52-30-00
A21
PAGE
DATE
Dec 23/99
Dec 23/99
Dec 23/99
May
9/80
Dec 23/99
Dec 23/99
Dec 23/99
Dec 23/99
Dec 23/99
Dec 23/99
Dec 23/99
Dec 23/99
Dec 23/99
10
Dec 23/99
11
Dec 23/99
Dec 23/99
Dec 23/99
Dec 23/99
52-EFFECTIVITY
Dec
23/99Page
BEECHCRAFI
BONANZA SERIES
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
GENERAL
on
the
right
The doors
located
access to
the cabin
area.
side of the
fuselage
between FS 124.55 and FS
which furnish
are
utility door contains a window, with the forward

being hinged on the forward side and the aft door being
hinged on the aft side. Each utility door has a folding door
stop located at the bottom edge of each door.
CABIN DOOR
170.00. Each
door
The
airplane
is
provided with
cabin door which furnishes
flight compartment. The door is located on the

right side of the fuselage between FS 58.00 and FS 100.00
on the Model A36 series airplanes, and between FS 68.00
The forward
utility
and FS 104.90
handle with
lock and tumbler
access to
the
Each door is
points, and
on
the Model 33 and 35 series
hinged
on
airplanes,
the forward side of the door at two
door stop is located
on
the bottom
door contains
an
outside
assembly
and
inside latch
handle. The forward door contains three latches: two
edge of
latch
D-ring
an
pin-type
latches, one on the top and one on the bottom edges of the
door, and a bayonet latch which makes contact with the
each door.
striker
plate
on
the sit door. The movement of the three
by a bell crank assembly. The ah utility

type handle on the front edge, inside of
latches is controlled
The cabin door is provided with an aft outside and forward

inside door handle. The outside handle contains the cabin
door contains
door lock and tumbler assembly. The door contains three

latches: a hook latch on the upper edge of the door, a sliding
the door. The door contains two hook type latches which
each engage a striker plate lip at the top and bottom of the
bolt latch
door sill. The movement of the two latches is controlled
the lower
the aft side of the door, and a pin type latch on

edge of the door. A cable assembly connects the
on
bell crank
lever
by
assembly.
movement of the upper latch, and a bell crank assembly

controls the movement of both the aft and lower pin latches.
An
optional courtesy light is installed in the door above the

wiring for the courtesy light exits the door above
the upper door hinge.
BAGGAGE DOORS
(CE-748, CE-772 and aHer; CJ-149 and after; D-
window. The
19997 0-10120 and after)

CABIN DOOR QUICK RELEASE MECHANISM
(CJ-149 and after onlyl
airplanes other than the A36 series are provided

optional (small or large) baggage door for cargo
storage. The doors ate located on the right side of the
fuselage. The small door is located between FS 131.00 and
FS 151.00, and the large door is located between FS
Bonanza
with
The cabin door
can
be
instantaneously jettisoned by
quick
release mechanism in the event Of an emergency. The quick

release mechanism actuates the door latches through a lever
and
cam
131.00 and FS 170.00. tither door is
arrangement. To prevent accidental activation of
the mechanism the red handle that actuates the release is
secured to the escutcheon

and
on
the door
by an
side. The small
baggage
single strand of safety wire. The wire breaks and the

straightens out to release the handle when
latter is pulled. The cam on the lever to which the handle
door has
door sill to
door has
hinged
stop rod
on
the forward
on
the forward
hinge, and the large

scissors type door stop connecting the top of the
the top of the baggage door.
inboard side of the door
aluminum catch
aluminum catch
the
an
near
the door
is attached then rotates to actuate the link that unlatches the

upper and lower door latches. Simultaneously, an actuator
each end of the quick release lever rotates and, through
The small
baggage
door contains
on
lock mechanism located
interconnecting links, withdraws the retainers that lock the

upper and lower hinges in place around the hinge pins. This
completely releases the door from the fuselage,
only latching device
makes contact with
baggage
on
striker
on
door contains
plate
the small
an
combination latch and
the aft side of the door. The latch

on
the door sill. This is the
baggage
door. The
large
D-ring
latch
outside and inside
handle. A lock assembly is provided and is located beside the
UTILIjY DOORS
(E-llll,
handle. The
E-1241 and after; EA-I and
affer)
large baggage door contains three pin type

on the aft edge and the top and bottom edges
latches located
of the door. The movement of the three latches is controlled
The A36 series airplanes
are
provided
with two
utility
doors
by
bell crank
assembly.
"END"
52-00-00
Pagel
May 9180
Raylheon Aircraft
CABIN PASSENGEWCREW DOOR

CABIN DOOR REMOVAL
(E- 1111,
E- 1241 AND
AND AFTER; D- 10097, D- 10120 AND

a.
Remove the inboard door handle.
b.
Removethewindow
c.
Remove the armrest,
d.
If the
AFTER; EA-I AND AFTER; CE-748, CE-772
AFTER)
uppermoldingtrim.
upholstery panel
optional courtesy light

panel.
and the ash tray.
is installed, disconnect the wire
splice
which is located behind the
right
side of the
instrument
e.
With the door open, insert
door while
applying
f.
Remove the two
g.
Remove the
screwdriver between the door stop and the bottom of the door. Slowly close the
on the door stop until the stop is released from the door.
downward pressure
phillips
remaining
screws
screws
from each
which
hinge
secure
cover.
the door frame to the
hinges.
NOTE
At the upper hinge, four screws
are aft of the hinge cover.
h.
Carefully
remove
the door
are
by pulling
located aft of the
the door
directly
hinge
cover;
away from the
on
the lower
hinge,
three
screws
hinges.
NOTE
Shims have been installed between the
be retained and the
same
hinges and the door to obtain a proper fit. The shims should
number of shims installed, where removed, under each hinge when the
door is reinstalled.
nnl
52-10-00
Raytheon Aircraft
55-101-9
Cabin Door
Figure
CABIN DOOR INSTALLA TION
CE-772 AND AFTER;
Stop
(E- 1 I I I,
E- 124 1 AND AFTER; EA- 1 AND AFTER; CE-748,

D- 10007 D- 10120 AND AFTER)
If the door is new, place the door in position and mark the door hinge tab and perimeter of the door frame where
any excess material needs to be removed. Remove the excess material to obtain the best fit prior to installing the
seal
a.
b.
On
to
a new
c.
a new
door, install
Place the door in
door flush to the

d.
door seals around the inside
Check the old door for reference
phillips
on
sure the upper and lower door hinge shims are in place. The same number
installation of the door as when the door was removed. The shims serve to keep the
fuselage.
Attach the four
phillips
screws
screws
aft of the upper door
aft of the lower door
f.
Install the door stop in the channel located
cover
52-10-00
secure
plates; each is attached with
Attach the upper and lower
hinge
hinge which
the door frame to the
hinge.
e.
Dec
edge of the door frame.
position, making
of shims should be used
three
new
door seal location.
on
the bottom
edge of
two
phillips
the door.
screws.
hinge.
Attach the
Raytheon Aircraft
NOTE
The upper door hook latch bracket, located in the door sill above the door, should be preset flush
with the door sill.
If the door contains the optional courtesy light installation, feed the wire from the courtesy light to the location
g.
behind the right side of the instrument panel by routing the wire above the door hinge to behind the panel. Splice
the courtesy
light
wire to its
connecting wire.
upholstery panel, ashtray,
h.
Install the
i.
Install the window upper
j.
Install the inboard door handle.
k.
If
molding
CABIN DOOR REMOVAL

To
remove
trim.
to the installed door
adjustments
the door, cut
and armrest.
are
required,
refer to CABIN DOOR ADJUSTMENT in this
chapter.
(CJ- 149 AND AFTER ONL Y)
safety wire securing the quick release handle (red) in place and straighten out the
disengages the hinge pin retainers and remove the door.
aluminum
catch. Pull the handle that
CAUTION
Icnvnoirl
Support the door carefully to avoid damaging

CABIN DOOR INSTALLA TION
To install the door,
position
the door
the
wing when
(CJ- 149 AND AFTER
so
that the
hinge pins
the
quick release frees
the door.
ONL Y)
slide into the
hinge slots,
then
push
in the
quick
release
handle (red) until the retainers engage the holes in the hinge to lock the hinges in place around the hinge pins. Bend
the aluminum catch back in place over the handle and secure the handle to the catch with one wrap of 0.020 inch
diameter copper wire per QQ-W-343
Type
S.
CABIN DOOR ADJUSTMENT

If any of the
following
conditions exist, check and
adjust the cabin
door
latching
mechanism:
The door is difficult to close.

There is excessive wind noise around the door.
The door is not
The door is
opening
The door has

a.
airtight
in
recently
or
watertight.
flight.
been removed
or
repaired.
Ensure that the doors internal latch mechanism is not
With the door in the open position, operate the

mechanism is operating smoothly and properly.
1.
2.
binding
and/or
preventing
latching mechanism
proper door
several times to
closing
ensure
as
follows:
that the internal
position, rotate the inside door handle counterclockwise as far as possible.

plate at the edge of the blade protruding from the inner forward end of the handle.
With the door still in the open
Mark the inside handle escutcheon
1\21Page
Raytheon Aircraft
3.
to the
Place the latch in the open position and then close and latch the door. Check to see that the handle rotates
that was marked in the previous step. If the handle does not line up with the mark, open the door and
the door upholstery. Inspect the latching mechanism to determine the reason for the interference and make
position
remove
the necessary
adjustments.
NOTE
The
areas
of
possible interference
are
where the lower
pin,
the upper latch hook, and the aft latch
bolt engage in the door frame.

b.
The latches may

1.
require adjustment
UPPER LATCH
There
are
to ensure
three
points
positive door locking
that should be
as
inspected
follows:
and/or
adjusted
on
the upper latch.
Referring to Figure 2 (Sheet 1 of 3), checkto ensure that the upper latch mechanism is over center when
can be accomplished by using a small inspection mirror to see that the upper operating link
is against the adjustment screw and the forward edge of the upper operating link is forward of the forward edge of
the lower operating link. If the latch mechanism is not over center when the door is latched, adjust the over center
a)
the door is latched. This
stop
screw.
b)
Referring
to
Figure
1 of
(Sheet
3),
check to
ensure
that the upper latch hook
it is almost touching the aft

the
pin,
move
the
pin
portion of the hook without riding on the hook. If the upper hook does
pin forward or aft tit has four positions) to obtain proper adjustment.
is
positioned so that
properly engage
not
Check for proper adjustment of the door upper latch bracket in the door sill above the door. If the door
properly in the frame (inboard/outboard) when closed and latched, leaving a noticeable gap between the
door and the frame, the upper latch bracket needs to be adjusted "in" to create more tension on the door. This can
be accomplished by adjusting the forward tension screw. Refer to Figure 2 (Sheet 1 of 3).
c)
does not fit
2.
LOWER LATCH
The lower aft latch
pin should
be adjusted in the latched (closed) position so that the

through both the striker plate and the door opening frame
to a minimum of 0.05 inch below the lower surface of the door opening frame, as shown in Figure 2 (Sheet 2 of 3).
Adjust the pin as follows, so that it just clears the striker plate when the latch is in the unlatched (open) position, and
does not interfere with door opening.
shoulder
(straight sided) portion
of the
pin
has extended
NOTE
The amount of the
pin protruding
from the door with the latch open will
the bottom of the door and the door frame in the
a)
Remove the
safety wire
b)
Turn the barrel to extend
depend
on
the gap between
fuselage.
in the turnbuckle.
or
retract the
pin
as
necessary.
NOTE
It may be necessary to shorten the pin guide by grinding a maximum of 0.2 inch off the top of the
as shown in Figure 2 (Sheet 2 of 3), in order to obtain enough travel to make this adjust-
pin guide
ment.
c)
Page
Safety
the turnbuckle.
52-10-00
nzl
Raytheon Aircraft
3.
et
on
AFT LATCH
BOLi Check to ensure that the aft latch bolt provides a pre-catch and protrudes into the sockas far as possible without bottoming out. If adjustment is required, proceed as follows, re-
the aft door frame
ferring
to
Figure
a)
3 of
(Sheet
Disconnect the
3).
operating tube
at the inside door handle.
mechanism from the
b)
Disconnect the lower aft latch
c)
Rotate the tube to allow the bolt to
pin
protrude the
operating
tube.
proper distance.
NOTE
When this is done the outside handle may
protrude
up to 0.25 inch into the air stream, which is
ac-
ceptable.
d)
Connect the lower aft latch
pin
mechanism to the
operating
tube. Connect the
operating
tube to the in-
side door handle.
NOTE
The aft latch bolt
can
be
aft side of the door and

four
c.
moving
inboard
or
outboard
the bolt inboard
or
by loosening the four retaining screws on the

as necessary, and then tightening the
outboard
screws.
Install any
A21
adjusted
upholstery
and/or
equipment
that
was
removed.
52-10-00
Raytheon Aircraft
WARNING
VERIFY DOOR IS PROPERLY
LATCHED BEFORE TAKEOFF
VIEW LOOKING OUT

AT RH SIDE OF CAB
C
R--,
DOOR
UPPER
HOOK
LATCH
_1,
FORWARD
r/
DOOR UPPER
LATCH BRACKET
TENSION SCREW
UPPER LATCH HOOK PIN SHOULD

TOUCHING THE AFT PORTION OF
WITHOUT RIDING ON IT.
BE ALMOST
THE HOOK
FWD c~
OVERCENTER
UPPER
OPERATING
O
LOWER
OPERATING
ADJUSTABLE
STOP
SCREW
LINK
WHEN DOOR IS LATCHED. THE FORWARD EDGE

OF THE UPPER OPERATING LINK SHOULD BE
AGAINST THE OVERCENTER ADJUSTABLE STOP
SCREW AND FORWARD OF THE FORWARD EDGE
OF THE LOWER OPERATING LINK.
LINK
VIEW
LOOKING
VIEW
A-A
FROM
ROTATED
C9101555
ABOVE
180"
Cabin Door Latch Points
Figure 2 (Sheet
Dec
52-10-00
1 of
3)
A21
Raylheon Aircraft
TURNBUCKLE
SAFETY
WIRE
CUTOUT
IN DOOR
PIN
STRIKER
LOWER
AFT
PAN
GUIDE
PLATE
LATCH
PIN
AFT
VIEW
CLEVIS
LOOKING
GRIND OFF TOP

REOUIRED TO A
\I
~CUTOUT
TRIKER
PIN
PLATE
IN
OUTBOARD
OF PIN GUIDE, IF
MAXIMUM OF 0.2 INCH
DOOR
PAN
DOOR OPENING
FRAME
PIN/
GUIDE
.05 INCH MINIMUM ENGAGEMENT

ABOVE TAPERED AREA OF THE PIN
IS RECJUIRED
VIEW
csioais56
Figure
A21
(Sheet
2 of
3)
52-1 0-00
Dec
23/9 Page
Raylheon Aircraft
ADJUST LATCH BOLi

BY LOOSENING
THESE SCREWS (d)
ROTATE THE OPERATING TUBE

TO ADJUST BOLT PROTRUSION
BOLT
-I
r7
OPERATING
TUBE
VIEW
INSIDE
DOOR
LOOKING
C9101557
OUTBOARD
Figure 2 (Sheet 3
of
3)
INSTALLING CABIN DOOR LOCKAND FITTING TUMBLER TO KEY

When
a
lock
full set of
To fit
key.
baggage compartment door, cabin door or ignition is broken or worn, it is not necessary to install
locks with a new key. A new tumbler can be readily converted tone time), for use with a old
new tumbler to a key proceed as follows:
on
a.
Insert the
b.
With
c.
Note that
d.
With
key
To install
e.
the
replacement
key
to be used into the new lock.
in the unlocked
one or more
fine file,
a new
Loosen the
position,
tumblers
remove
examine the top of the lock barrel where the slots for the tumbler
are
lock in the cabin door,
of each of these tumblers. The
proceed
upholstery panel on the

assembly.
as
located.
the slot.
protruding through
portion
the raised
are
key
will
now
operate the
new
lock.
follows:
cabin door to
gain
access to
the handle mechanism
through
the cutout in
the channel under the latch
f.
Remove the lower aft
move
the
screw
from the external door handle
pin from the handle through
fairing directly
under the lock mechanism, and
re-
the cutout in the door channel.
NOTE
Both the extreme aft
The extreme aft
the
Dec
screw
and the lower aft
screw secures
sliding bolt latch pin
in
screw
the door handle
of the outside latch
spring
in
position,
housing
serve as
and the lower aft
retainers.
screw
retains
position.
52-10-00
A21
Ray~heon
Aircraft

g.
Remove the aft
disengaged
to be
h.
After
i.
Bevel the
fitting
screw
from the external door handle
from the
the
new
lock to the
key,
install the lock
of the square hole in the

end of the lock barrel. The locking lug on the
Cover a
i.
locking cam
k.
fairing.
This will free the handle
spring
and allow the handle
actuating assembly.
edges
steel
cloth to
is
in
plate with
firmly riveted
locking
cam
barrel, in the unlocked position, into
cam
(beveled edge
must face
the handle.
out), and place
the
cam on
the
must be in line with the handle.
prevent marring
the latch handle and peen the end of the lock barrel until the
place.
Install the handle in the door.
REMOVING AND INSTALLING THE CABIN DOOR TELEFLEX CABLE

Remove the inside door handle and the machine
b.
Remove the door
c.
Remove the bolt
securing
the teleflex cable to the upper door latch.
d.
Remove the bolt
securing
the lower end of the cable to the lower
screws on
facing.
the upper door
a.
upholstery panels.
actuating
arm.
NOTE
Attach
length of safety
wire to the lower end of the cable before
leave the wire in the cable track

e.
the
Grasp the upper end of the

safety wire from the cable.
as a means
cable with vise
of positioning the
grip pliers
and
pull
new
it out
removing
it from the door and
cable.
through
the upper latch
opening.
Remove
NOTE
Braze
f.
or
silver solder two AN340-832 nuts to two
new
AN742-4
clamps.
installing the upper clevis, place one of the newly prepa;ed clamps between the shoulders on the lower
housing and attach the safety wire remaining in the door to the upper end of the cable housing.
Prior to
end of the cable

g.
Pull the
safety
housing
into
position by gripping it with vise grip pliers below the shoulder at the lower end. Pull on the
tapping on the vise grip pliers to drive the housing through the door chan-
wire attached to the upper end while
nel.
Align the lower clamp with

clamp in place on the housing
h.
the hole in the door

and
secure
it in the
facing
and
secure
it with
machine screw, then install the upper
same manner.
i.
Install the upper clevis and attach the cables to the upper and lower latch connections.
j.
Adjust
nai
cable tension
by varying
the cable
length
at either latch connection.
52-1 0-00
Dec
23/9 Page
Ray~heon Aircraft
BEECH BONANZA SERIES MAINIENANCE MANUAL
INTERIOR CABIN DOOR HANDLE

INTERIOR CABIN DOOR HANDLE REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION
NOTE
It may be necessary to place the interior cabin door handle in the unlatched
that secure the door handle.
position
to access both
screws
that
the interior door handle base
a.
Remove the two
b.
Slide the interior door handle from the shaft,
to the shaft. Refer to
c.
screws
Figure
secure
maintaining
the
plate.
same
orientation of the door handle with respect
3.
Rotate the door handle 90" clockwise,
maintaining
the base
plate
in the
same
position
as
shown in
Figure
3.
NOTE
Interior door handle
configuration
d.
Slide the interior door handle
e.
Latch the door
by rotating
over
of
some
the shaft and secure,
f.
to
ceD01
23/99
screws
removed in step
3.
a.
depressing the
handle lock release button should not
depressing
the handle lock release button. If the door remains
step g. If the door becomes unlatched, repeat steps
With the door latched,

g.
should unlatch.
Page
the
Figure
of the door.
Rotate the interior door handle clockwise without
latched, proceed
using
CAUIION
cnvnoN
Rotation of the interior door handle without
unlatching
may differ from that shown in
the interior door handle counterclockwise.
I
result in
airplanes
depress the handle lock
52-1 0-00
release button while
through
rotating
e.
the door handle clockwise. The door
nll
Raylheon Aircraft
STEP
CORRECT
INSTALLATION
INCORRECT
INSTALLATION
BASE
FLAT
UP
FREE-PLAY*
up
STEP
DETAIL
FWD
FWD
FREE-PLAY+
A
FORWARD
DOOR
EDGE
NOTE:
FREE-PLAY TRAVEL OF THE COPILOTS
DOOR HANDLE WHEN IN LATCHED POSITION
FORWARD
DOOR
EDGE
COPILOTS
CORRECT
INSTALLATION
II
DOOR
HANDLE
INCORRECT
INSTALLATION
AFT
DOOR
EDGE
II
II
AFT
DOOR
EDGE
UP
II
UP
BASE
STEPPLATE
STEP
FWD
DETAIL
FREE-PLAY*
II
AFI
NOTE:
FREE-PLAY TRAVEL OF THE

UTILITY DOOR HANDLE WHEN
IN LATCHED POSITION
UTILITY
Interior Crew Door Handle and Interior
A21
DOOR
FREE-PLAYr
HANDLE
Utility Door
Figure 3
TH528
9925721\1\
Handle Installation and Orientation
52I10-00
Dec
23/99Pagell
Raytheon Aircraft
CARGO DOORS
UTILITY DOOR REMOVAL

a.
With the doors open,
b.
Support
remove
the doors and
(E- I II 1,
E- 1241 AND
the
that attach the scissors door stop to the door sill.
remove
screws
the
hinge pins by pulling straight
UTILITY DOOR INSTALLA TION

a.
Support
b.
Install the
the doors and install the
AFTER; EA-1 AND AFTER)
(E- I I 1 I,
up.
E- 124 1 AND AFTER; EA- I AND
AFTER)
hinge pins.
that attach the scissors door stop to the door sill.
screws
UTILITY DOOR ADJUSTMENT

If the
utility
made to
door does not close
properly or permits air leaks while completely closed, several adjustments may be
of
the door. After determining the origin of the air leakage as to whether it is from
sealing
proper
forward half of the utility door or the aft half of the door, make the following adjustments as necessary:
assure
around the
ADJUSTMENT OF THE AFT HALF OF THE UTILITY DOOR
Adjustments of the aft door may be performed by removing

ening the door latch connecting tube assembly.
a.
the
upholstery paneling
and
shortening
or
length-
NOTE
By shortening
b.
To
the
connecting
tube
assemblies, the door will be pulled tighter against the door seal.
adjust the length of the connecting tube assembly, remove the cotter key, washers and pin.
assembly and turn the pin eye "out" to lengthen the tube assembly.
Turn the
pin
eye
"in" to shorten the tube

c.
After the desired
d.
Replacethe upholstery paneling.
length
has been set, install the
pin,
washers and cotter
key.
ADJUSTMENT OF THE FORWARD HALF OF THE UTILITY DOOR

a.
If air
leakage
door latch striker

For
is found around the forward half of the door, the necessary adjustments may be made at the aft
located slightly above and below the upper and lower door sill of the aft door.
plates,
tighter fit, loosen the screws on the upper and lower striker plates on the aft door and move them inboard.
By moving the plates inboard, the aft door will adjust inboard thus pulling inward the forward door when it is latched.
b.
UTILITY DOOR LA TCH PIN ADJUSTMENT

If the forward door does not open
by the following adjustments:
a.
Removethe
b.
Remove the cotter
c.
Loosen the
lengthen
n21
freely,
the door latch
pins
may not be
retracting enough. This
may be corrected
upholsterypaneling.
keys, pins
and washers.
pin eye jam nut and turn the

the tube assemblies.
pin
eye "in" to shorten the tube assemblies; turn the
pin
52-30-00
eye "out" to
Ray~heon Aircraft
d.
After the desired
e.
length
has been set,
tighten
the
pin
eye
jam
nut. Install the
pins,
washers and cotter
keys.
INTERIOR UTILITY DOOR HANDLE REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION

Refer to Section 52-10-00, INTERIOR CABIN DOOR HANDLE for the removal, installation and checkout instrucutility door handle.
tions for the interior
LARGE BAGGAGE DOOR REMOVAL
0-10097, 0-10120 AND
(CE-746,
CE-772 AND AFTER; CJ- 149 AND AFTER;
AFTER)
a.
On the
b.
Removethedoorhinge pin.
large type door, unlatch the door and
remove
the scissors
type door stop
at the
top of the door.
LARGE BAGGAGE DOOR INSTALLA TION (CE-748 CE-772 AND AFTER;

CJ- 149 AND AFTER; D- 10097 0-10120 AND AFTER)
a.
Installthedoorhinge pin.
b.
Install the scissors type door stop at the top of the door.
SMALL BAGGAGE DOOR REMOVAL

D- 10097 D- 10120 AND AFTER)
(CE-746, CE-772 AND AFTER; CJ- 149 AND AFTER;
a.
On the small door, unlatch the door and
b.
Disconnect the door stop rod from the door at the door.
remove
the door
hinge pin
while
carefully holding
the door in
position.
SMALL BAGGAGE DOOR INSTALLA TION
(CE-748 CE-772 AND AFTER;

CJ- 149 AND AFTER; 0-10097, 0-10120 AND AFTER)
a.
Connectthestop
b.
While
rodtothedoor.
carefully holding
the door in
position,
install the
hinge pin.
BAGGAGE DOOR ADJUSTMENT(CE-748 CE-772 AND AFTER; CJ- 149 AND AFTER;
D- 10097 0-10120 AND AFTER)
If the
large baggage door does not open freely,

by the following adjustments:
the door latch
pins
may not be
retracting enough.
This may be
cor-
rected
a.
Removethe
b.
Remove the cotter
c.
Loosen the
lengthen
upholsterypaneling.
keys, pins,
and washers.
pin eye jam nut and turn the

the tube assemblies.
d.
After the desired
e.
Dec
23/99~e2jSgg
length
has been set,
52-30-00
pin eye
tighten
"in" to shorten the tube assemblies; turn the
the
pin
eye
jam
nut. Install the
pins,
pin
eye "out" to
washers and cotter
keys.
Raytheon Aircraft
If additional inward tension for
sill
(large door),
A21
or
inward
on
the
tighter fit of the door is required, adjust inward the three striker plates
single latch mechanism contact plate on the door sill (small door).
52-30-00
on
the door
Dec
23/99Page
CHAPTER
FUSELAGE
BEECHCRAFT
BONANZA SERIES
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
CHAPTER 53
CHAPTER
SECTION
SUBJECT
PAGE
DATE
.,.,....._,,May 9/80
53-30-00
May
...............May
...............May
...............May
...............May
...............May
....,..........May
9/80
...............May
............_May
9/80
2
3
4
5
CHAPTER 53
9/80
9/80
9/80
9/80
9/80
9/80
9/80
FUSELAGE
TABLE OF CONTENTS
CHAPTER
SECTION
SUBJECT
SUBJECT
PAGE
PLATES/SKIN
Fuselage
Access
......1
........._.,.,.,
Openings (CE-728, CE-772
and after;
CJ-149 and after).

Access Openings
......t
Fuselage
Fuselage
(D-10097, D-10120 and after)..........

Access Openings (E-llll, E-1241 and after,
EA-1 and after)
Fuselage Skin Thickness (CE-748, CE-772 and after;
CJ-149 and after)
......3
:......4
Fuselage Skin Thickness (D-10097, D-10129 and after)............

Fuselage Skin Thickness ~E-llll, E-1241 and after,
EA-1 and
......2
after)
....,..6
.......8
IEND"
53-EFf ECTIVTTYICQNTENTS
paaa 1
May 9/1)0
BEECHCRAFT
BONANZA SERIES
MAINtENANCE MANUAL
PLATES/SKIN
FUSELAGE ACCESS OPENINGS
81
456
i.
Engine
Cowl
5.
Empennage Utility Access
Engine
6.
Empennage Control Linkage
Receptacle
7.
Fuel Strainer
8.
Landing Gear
2. Access Plates for

3.
External Power
4.
Actuator
33-13-15
Fuselage
Access
Openings (CE-748, CE-772
Figure
and after; CJ-149 and
after)
53-30-00
Page 1
May 9/80
BEECNCRAFT
BONANZA SERIES
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
r5
77
O
s
i.
5. External Power
Engine Cowl
2. Access Plates for
Engine
3. Differential Mechanism
4.
Empennage
Page 2
May 9/80
(LH)
Control Linkage
Fuselage
53-30-00
Access
Receptacle
6. Differential Mechanism
7.
(Lower)
Landing Gear Actuator

ssts~e
a. Fue~ Strainer
Openings (0-10097, 0-10120 and after)

Figure 2
BEECHCRAFT
BONANZA SERIES
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
~O 0~5
CI
456
5.
Engine
g.
Empennage Control Linkage
Receptacle
7.
Fuel Strainer
5.
Landing Gear Actuator
i.
Engine Cowl
2.
Access Plates for
3.
Extemal Power
4.
36-13-17
Fuselage Access Openings (E-llll, E-1241

Figure 3
and after; EA-1 and
after)
53-30-00
Page 3
May 9/80
BEECHCRAFT
BONANZA SERIES
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
FUSELAGE SKIN THICKNESS
THICNESS
MA TERIAL
ININCHES
1.
2024-73
.020
2.
2024-73
.025
3.
2024-73
.032
4.
2024-742
.020
5.
2024-742
.032
6.
6061-76
.020
7.
6061-76
.025
8.
6061-76
.040
9.
COMP 301 CRES
.016
NUMBLFR
Fuselage Skin Thickness (CE-748, CE-TI2 and after; CJ-149 and after)
5330-00
Page 4
May 9/80
BEECHCRAFT
BONANZA SERIES
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
~86
3
1~
iT7
32
2
93
i
1
i
33-1 3-18
Fuselage
Skin Thickness
(CE-748, CE-7M and after; CJ-149

and
after)
53-30-00
Page 5
May 9/80
BEECHCRAFT
BONANZA SERIES
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
THICKNESS
MA TERIAL
ININCHES
1.
2024-73
.020
2.
2024-73
.025
3.
2024-73
.032
4.
2024-742
.020
5.
6061-76
.020
6.
6061-76
.025
7.
6061-T6
.040
6.
COMP 301 CRES
.016
NUMBER
Fuselage Skin Thickness (D-10097, 0-10120

53-30-00
Page 6
May 9/80
and
after)
BEECHCRAFI
BONANZA SERIES
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
2
4
3
3
ii
3
32
223
36-13-19
Fuselage
Skin Thickness (0-10097, 0-10120 and after)

53-3090
Page
May 9/80
BEECHCRAFT
BONAEIZA SERIES
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
THICKNESS
MA TERIAL
ININCHES
1.
2024-T3
.020
2.
2024-T3
.025
3.
2024-T3
.032
4.
2024-T3
.040
5.
2024-T3
.063
6.
2024-T4
.032
7.
2024-T42
.020
8.
2024-f42
.032
9.
6061-T4
.025
10.
6061-T4
.040
11.
6061-T6
.020
12.
6061-f6
.025
13.
COMP 301 CRES
.016
NUMBER
Fuselage Skin
Thickness
(E-llll, E-1241 and after; EA-1 and after)

6 (Sheet i of 2)
Figure
53-30-00
Page 8
May 9/80
BEECHCRAFT
BONA~ZA SERIES
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
1.2
i5)0
11
Fuselage
o 1~
13
lp
13
Skin Thickness (E-llll, E-1241 and after; EA-1 and

10
12
after)
"END"
53-3090
Page 9
May 9/80
CHAPTER
STABILIZERS
BEECHCRAFT
BONANZA SERIES
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
CHAPTER 55
STABILIZERS
TABLE OF CONTENTS
CHAPTER
SUBJECT
PACE
55-00-00
General
Empennage Skin Thickness

55-10-00
Horizontal Stabilizers
Horizontal Stabilizer Removal
(CE-748, CE-772
and after; CJ-149 and after; E-llll, E-1241 and
after, EA-1 and

1
after)
Horizontal Stabilizer Installation
and
(CE-748,
CE-772 and after; CJ-149 and after; E-llll, E-1241 and after; EA-1
after)
Stabilizer Removal
(D-10097, D-10120 and after)

(D-10097, D-10120 and after)
Stabilizer Installation
55-20-00
Elevator and Ruddervator
and after; E-llll, E-1241 and after: EA-1 and
Balancing The Elevator (CE-748, CE-772 and after; CJ-149

Checking Balance
CheckBalance By Force Measurement
Balancing Procedure Force Measurement Method
Check Balance By Counterbalancing
Balancing Procedure Counterbalancing Method
Balancing the Ruddervator ~D-10097, D-10120 and after)
Checking Balance
Checking Balance By Force Measurement
Balancing Procedure Force MeasurementMethod
Check Balance By Counterbalancing
after) 1
1
1
1
3
3
4
4
4
4
5
5
55-30-00.
Vertical Stabilizer- Maintenance Practices

Vertical Stabilizer Removal
(CE-748, CE-772
and
after; CJ-149 and after; E-llll, E-1241 and after; EA-1 and
1
after)
Vertical Stabilizer installation
(CE-748,
CE-772 and after; CJ-149 and after; E-???l, E-1241 and after; EA-1 and
1
after)
55-40-00
Rudder- Maintenance Practices
Balancing The Rudder (CE-748, CE-772 and after, CJ-149

Checking Balance
Checking Balance By Force Measurement
and after, E-llll, E-1241 and after; EA-1 and
after)
1
1
55-CONTENTS
Page 1
A16
Oct 16/92
BEECHCRAFT
BONANZA SERIES
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
TABLE OF
CHAPTER
SUBJECT
Balancing
CONTENTS (Contd)
Procedure Force MeasurementMethod
By Counterbalancing
Equipment Required To Perform Check Balancing By Counterbalancing
Check Balance
PAGE
1
1
1
3
"END"
55-CONTENTS
Page 2
Oct 16/92
A16
BEECHCRAFT
BONANZA SERIES
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
CHAPTER 55
CHAPTER
SECTION
SUBJECT
55-EFFECTIVITY
55-CONTENTS
55-00-00
PAGE
Oct 16/92
Oct 16/92
Oct 16/92
May
May
May
May
May
Oct 16/92
Oct 16/92
Oct 16/92
2
3
4
55-10-00
55-20-00
DATE
9/80
9/80
9/80
9/80
9/80
May 9/80
Oct 16/92
Oct 16/92
Oct 16/92
Oct 16/92
55-30-00
May 9/80
55-40-00
May 9/80
May 9/80
May 9/80
3
"END"
55-EFFECTIVITV
Page
A16
Oct 16/92
BEECHCRAFT
BONANZA SERIES
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
GENERAL
:I
II_
12d
1.
VERTICAL STABILIZER
HORIZONTAL STABILIZER
ELEVATOR
BONDING JUMPER
RUDDERTAB
RUDDER
3.
4.
5.
6.
ELEVATOR CENTER HINGE

ELEVATORTAB
9.
ELEVATOR TORQUE FITTING
10.
ROTATING BEACON
11.
DORSAL FIN FAIRING
12. DORSAL FIN SADDLE
7.
8.
THIS ROTATING BEACON IS OPTIONAL ON E-llll. E1241 AND

AFTER; EA-1 AND AFTER.
36-131-8
Empennage (CE-748, CE-n2 and after; CJ-149 and after;

E-llll, E-1241 and after; EA-1 and after)
Figure
55-09-00
Page 1
May 9480
BEECHCRAFT
BONANtA SERIES
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
io
(BOTH SIDES)
6
(UPPER AND LOWER)
(COVER)
(UPPER AND LOWER)
36-131-7
Empennage Skin
and
Thickness (CE-748, CE-T~S and after; CJ-149

after; E-llll, E-1241 and after; EA-1 and after)
Frgure
554090
Page 2
May 9/80
(Sheet
1 of
2)
BEECHCRAFF
BONANZA SERIES
MAINTENANCE MANUAL

THICKNESS
MA TERIAL
IN INCHES
1.
Royalite
3/32 inch
2.
181 Glass Cloth and
3.
Acrylic P.V.C. Alloy Sheet
4.
Magnesium Alloy
5.
2024-T
.020
6.
2024-73
.020
7.
6061-74
.020
8.
2024-7
.032
9.
2024-73
.032
10.
2024-T
.040
11.
6061 -T6
.040
12.
6061-T6
.050
NUMBE~
Polyester
Resin
.090
Condition H
.020
NOTE
Skin thickness for the left side of the empennage
are
the
same as
the
right
side.
This skin used

"This skin used
only
only
on
CJ-149 and after.
on
CE-748, CE-772 and after; E-llll,
E-1241 and after; EA-1 and after.
Empennage Skin Thickness (CE-748, CE-n2 and after; CJ-149

and after; E-llll, E-1241 and after; EA-1 and after)
5590-00
Page-3
May 9/80
BEECHCRAFT
BONANZA SERIES
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
;II~--
.,J
1. Stabilizer
2. Stabilizer
Tip
3. Ruddervator Worn
4. Ruddervator
5. Stabilizer
Hinge
6. Ruddervator Tab
7. Stabilizer Rear Soar
8. Stabilizer Front
Spar
38-1316
Empennage (0-10097, 0-10120 and after)

Figure 3
55-0040
page 4
May 9/80
BEECHCRAFT
BONAkUA SERIES
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
F~oY
o
(BOTH SIDES)
1
4
(COVER)
3g131-5

THICKNESS
IN INCHES
NUMBER
MATERIAL
1.
MAONESIUM ALLOY
2.
2024-T3
.020
3.
2024-T4
.020
4.
2024-T3
.025
5.
2024-T3
.040
6.
6061-T6
.040
7.
6061-T6
.050
COND H
.020
Empennage Skin Thickness (D-10097, 0-10120 and after)

Figure 4
"END"
55-00-00
Page 5
May 9/80
BEECHCRAFT
BONANZA SERIES
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
STABILIZERS
HORIZONTAL
NANCE PRACTICES
MAINTE-
STABILIZER
REMOVAL
HORIZONTAL
(CE-748, CE-772 AND AFTER; CJ-149 AND

;4FTER, ~-1111, E-1241 AND AFTER; EA-1
AND
Install the inboard elevator hinge bracket

d.
the aft side of the ah spar with four bolts with
heads on the aft side of the hinge bracket. Place one
MS20002C4 washer under the head of each bolt and
on
two AN960-416 washers under each nut.

nuts to 85-100
e.
applicable elevator.
ELEVATOR REMOVAL in Chapter 27-30-00.
Remove the
Refer to
the
on
Connect the trim tab
ble
Connect the elevator tab cables, accessithe left side fuselage access openings.
through
Install the
g.
Disconnect the elevator tab cables,
c.
through
the left side
fuselage
access
openings.
raereht
spar.
Disconnect the trim tab
HORIZONTAL
STABILIZER
E-1241
remove
already installed, kits are available

provide additional support to the stabilizer leading edge on V-tail Bonanzas.
Refer to Chapter 51-00-00.
Remove the applicable elevator. Refer to
a.
ELEVATOR REMOVAL in Chapter 27-21-00.
AFTER; EA-I
b.
position
Remove the
rear
panels
fuselage.
access
of the
located
on
the
and install
c.
attaching bolts.
spar
D-10120)
io-loos7.
to
left side, at the
Place the stabilizer in
a.
to
If not
the
INSTALLATION
AND
Refer
elevator.
Chapter 27-30-00.
NOTE
(CE-748, CE-772 AND AFTER; CJ-149 AND
;4FTER;
AND AFTER)
REnnovaL
STABILIZ~RAND AFT~R)
Remove the stabilizer.
g.
rear
Install the applicable

h.
INSTALLATION OF ELEVATOR in
pushrods.
While supporting the stabilizer,

f.
attach bolts at the front spar.
panels.
access
acces-
Remove the elevator rear spar attaching

d.
bolts and the elevator center hinge bracket on
e.
to the sta-
pushrods
bilizer.
f.
Removethe access panels located

b.
left side at the rear of the fuselage.
the
the
AFTER)
a.
sible
Torque
inch-pounds.
Disconnect the elevator tab cables,
through the left side fuselage
sible
access
acces-
openings.
NOTE
When
installing the horizontal stabilizer,

rear spar attaching bolts
the placed on the forward side of the
the nuts for the

must
avoid
to
spar
center
contact
with
the
nuts
on
the
bolts to
85-100
a.
the
stabilizer spar attaching

bolts through the inboard holes in each spar with the
bolt heads on the aft side of the spar. Place one
Install
four
MS20002C4 washer under the head of each bolt and

AN960-416 washer under each nut. Torque the
nuts to 85-100
rear
b.
aft
one
inch-pounds,
supporting
the stabilizer,
rear
remove
the
spar.
Remove the stabilizer.
STABILIZER
0-10120 AND
inch-
pounds,
c.
While
f.
hinge assembly.
the
e.
elevator
Install the forward stabilizer spar attaching

bolts. Place one MS20002C4 washer under the head
of each bolt and two AN960-416 washers under each
Torque
Remove the attach bolts at the front spar.
stabilizer attach bolts at the
b.
nut.
d.
INSTALLATION
/D-10097,
AFTER)
Place the stabilizer in position and install

attaching bolts.
stabilizer
Install the forward stabilizer spar
attaching
bolts.
Torque the front spar attaching nuts to

pounds and the rear spar attaching bolts
85-100 inch pounds.
c.
200-225 inch
to
55-10-00
Page
A16
Oct 16/92
BEECHCRAFT
BONANZA SERIES
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
d.
ble
e.
f.
Connect the elevator tab cables, accessi-
through the left side fuselage

Install the
access
access
openings.
Install
the
applicable elevator.
Refer
to
ELEVATOR INSTALLATION in Chapter 27-21-00.
panels.
"END"
5110-00
Page 2
Oct 16/92
A16
BEECHCRAFT
BONANZA SERIES
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
ELEVATOR AND RUDDERVATOR

NANCE PRACTICES
MAINTE-
A stand with knife-edge supports as illusFigure 1. The knife edges should be in the
horizontal plane.
a.
trated in
same
TH~
BALANCING
ELEVATOR~-748,
CE-772 AND AFTER; CJ-149 AND
FTER;
~-1111, E-1241 AND AFTER; EA-1 AND
AFTER)
(Figure 1)
it
the
by
being repainted,
trailing edge so that excess paint
the leading edge. AFTER ANY
WITHIN THE
MANUFACTURERS PRESCRIBED LIMelevator assembly, includ-
the control
arm
and the tab control rod should not
maximum moment of 7.8 inchtail-heavy

pounds. The static moment is the total unbalanced
weight of the elevator control surface multiplied by
the perpendicular distance from its hinge centerline
to the center of gravity, when the chord line is horizontally level. The weight is measured in pounds and
over a
the distance in
inches. The static moment of
100
percent balanced elevator control surface is 0.0 Ib. A

tail-heavy surface exhibits static underbalance. A
nose-heavy surface exhibits static overbalance.
CHECKING BALANCE
with the elevator
completely
draft-free
assembled in
flying
condidtion. ALL PAINTING, INCLUDING STRIPES AND

TOUCH-UP, MUST BE COMPLETED. The tab, tab
static wicks, and hinge bolts must be
attached. The chord line must be horizontally level
and the hinge line must be properly supported when
pushrod,
the static moment is measured.
Although many different methods of check balancing exist, they can be

categorized under the following two headings:
Actual Force Measurement- Measurement

a.
of the force applied by the elevator surface on a single support at a known distance from the centerline
hinge.
d.
its
capacity should equal
in
flat
tare
straightedge,
ruler and
spirit level.
Balancing Procedure Force Measurement Method

Locate the chord line by placing a straightedge at the
inboard end of the elevator so that one end is aligned
with the center of the torque tube and the other end
is centered on the trailing edge. Mark the chord line
by grease pencil or other means on the rib. Remove
the straightedge. Fit correct size bolts in the outboard
and center hinge brackets and mount the elevator on
the knife edges. Ensure that it is free to rotate about
the hinge line. Support the trailing edge behind the
hinge point with a spindle resting on a leveled

balance platform as illustrated. The spindle
must be vertical throughout the balancing procedure.
Hold a spirit level against the marked chord line and
center
beam
b.
The application of a
Counterbalancing
or weight at a measured distance from
hinge
line to counter the unbalance moment of
it
by extending
or
contracting
spindle.
the
Measure the perpendicular distance from the hinge

centerline to the point supported by the spindle.
Ensure that the spirit level and rule are removed from
th,,urface and read the reaction on the beam balance.
Calculate the static underbalance moment "M" from

the formula:
D(R-T) inch-pounds where,
Perpendicular distance from the hinge centerline to the spindle point (inches).
D
known force
the
calibrated
A support spindle similar to the illustration

c.
leveling blocks, as required (blocks
spindle
tare).
level
The elevator balance must be checked in
of the
balance
complete painted
be
area
beam
less. The balance should have
and
drain toward
REPAINTING OR REPAIR, THE FINISHED SURFACE
SHOULD BE CHECK BALANCED TO ENSURE THAT
ITS STATIC MOMENT ABOUT THE HINGE LINE IS
ing
or
plus 2.0 Ibs. minimum.
will
ITS. The
certified
weighing platform and
When the elevator control surface is
suspend
b.
units of.Ol Ib.
Reaction
Tare, i.e. spindle plus leveling blocks
T
0"
from the beam balance.
(pounds)read
the scale
or
shims
platform (pounds).
the elevator assembly.

The
following
is
an
example:
CHECK BALANCE BY FORCE MEASUREMENT
D is 13.5 inches, R is 1.49 Ib. and T

The
by
equipment required
to
force measurement is
perform the
as
follows:
1.00 Ib.
check balance
13.5
(1.49 -1.00);
6.6
inch-pounds.
55-20-00
Page
Ale
Oct 16/92
BEECHCRAFT
BONANZA SERIES
klAINTENANCE MANUAL
COUNTERBALANCING
MASKING TAPE
(PLACE NEAR ELEVATOR

HINGE LINE)
CONTAINER
VIEW,A-A
TOP FORWARD SCREW
JIG MUST BE HORIZONTALLY
LEVEL FOR UNDERBALANCE CHECK
B
MASKING TAPE
DETAIL
CONTAINER
MASKING TAPE
(TO SECURE TAB

IN NEUTRAL)
ELEVATOR
HINGE
CLEVIS
7
8
KNIFE EDGE
55-1528
JIG MUST BE HORIZONTALLY1LEVEL
ACTUAL
Balancing
55-20-00
Page 2
May 9/80
FORCE MEASUREMENT
the Elevator, Ruddervator

Figure 1
BEECHCRAFT
BONANZA SERIES
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
M is within the range which is
CAUTION
satisfactory.
Be certain the forward top screw on the

leading edge tip is secured after
the elevator has been balanced.
If M is not within the
prescribed range, refer to step i

under BALANCING PROCEDURE COUNTERBALANC-
elevator
ING METHOD.
Add small
e.
CHECK BALANCE BY COUNTERBALANCING

until
The
equipment required to perform check balancing

by counterbalancing is as follows:
the
Check this
knife-edge supports as illustrated in Figure 1. The knife edges must be in the

same horizontal plane.
A paper cup
c.
Approximately
d.
A certified beam balance
or
similar
lightweight contain-
by holding
the
with
shot to the cup

chord level.
the
spirit level aligned with
The distance "D" must be
the
hinge line. Measure

suspension point of the
"D" from the
the
perpendicular to
hinge line to the
cup.
Remove the cup, contents, and
g.
b.
quantities of lead
balances
marked chord line.

f.
A stand with
a.
elevator
string, then
weigh them.
er.
NOTE
calibrated in units of.Ol
pounds of
pound
lead shot.
Since any weighing error is magnified by

the distance "D", weighing is most impor-
weighing device
tant and must be done
lesS.
or
that
A
e.
Balancing
a.
straightedge, ruler,
Procedure
Locate
straightedge
assembly so
that
the
one
chord
line
inboard
end is
end
Mark the chord line with

grease
pencil,
then
spirit
on
h.
the
Calculate the static balance
by
1.
placing
of the
elevator
hinge centerline
the trailing edge.
The
designated by
with
2.
as
position
weight of the
ises and mount the elevator
on
the
hinge
knife-edge
ports. Ascertain that the elevator is free

about the hinge line.
d.
The
3.
over or
The
balancing
to
clev-
suprotate
weight should be added or

length of small diameter string
secured to the surface with a small piece of masking
tape and a paper cup hanging vertically as illustrated
in Figure 1. Slightly loosen the forward top screw on
the elevator leading edge tip. Suspend the paper cup
on the inboard side of the tip and wrap the string
with
060
small
D.
following
is
typical example of
calculation:
screw.
Secure the
string
to the surface
pound" and
underbalanced
(tail-heavy)
0.60
"D
12.6 inches", then:
12.6
M
7.6 inch-pounds. In this instance, "M" is
within the required static balance range and is
therefore acceptable.
short
piece of masking tape aft of the top forward screw and near the hinge centerline as shown
in Figure 1. The cup must be free to hange vertically.
a
underbalance moment is
and the paper cup was suspended from the horn. If

the elevator balances with the chord line level at "W
To determine if
use a
around the
cup and contents is
"W".
Assume the elevator is
removed,
follows:
piece of masking tape.
Fit the correct size bolts in the
c.
as
straightedge.
Secure the trim tab in its neutral

small
scales
designated by "M".
4.
b.
on
Method
suitable marker, such
remove
carefully
certified for accuracy.
level.
the
on
and the other end is centered
Counterbalancing
the
at
and
are
i.
The complete
including
the control
must not be
7.8
ply,
tail-heavy
inch-pounds. If the
remove
elevator
assembly,
and the tab control rod,

over a maximum moment of
static balance does not comelevator horn cover and add or

solder to bring the elevator balance within
remove
required
painted
arm
the
limits.
55-20-00
Page 3
A16
Oct 16/92
BEECHCRAFT
BONANZA SERIES
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
NOTE
Coat the
weight
with
tive material such
(20,
Chart 1,
as
CHECKING BALANCE BY FORCE MEASUREMENT
a corrosion prevenzinc chromate primer
equipment required to perform the

by force measurement is as follows:
The
91-00-00) to insulate the disReplace the elevator horn
similar metals.
trated in
same
BALANCING THE RUDDERVATOR

0-10120 AND AFTER)
ruddervator
the
control
is
surface
being
ENSURE THAT ITS STATIC MOMENT ABOUT THE

HINGE LINE IS WITHIN THE MANUFACTURERS PREThe
SCRIBED
LIMITS.
painted
complete
rudddervator assembly, including the control arm and
the tab control cable attach bolt, nut and washer for
both sides of the tab, must not be tail-heavy over a
maximum moment of 14.4 to 17.4 inch-pounds. The

static moment is the total underbalance weight ot the
ruddervator control surface multiplied by the perpendicular distance from its hinge centerline to the center of gravity when the chord line is horizontally level.
weight is measured in pounds and the distance

in inches. The static moment of a 100 percent balanced ruddervator control surface is 0.0 Ib. A tailThe
heavy surface exhibits static underbalance.

nose-heavy surface exhibits static overbalance.
CHECKING BALANCE
The balance must be checked in
the
draft free
in
area
with
flying
condition. ALL PAINTING, INCLUDING STRIPES AND

The tab, tab
TOUCH-UP, MUST BE COMPLETED.
control cable attach bolt, nut and washer for both
sides of the tab, static wicks and hinge bolts must be
The chord line must be horizontally level
hinge line must be properly supported when
the static moment is measured. Although many different methods of check balancing exist, they can be
categorized under the following two headings:
attached.
and the
a.
c.
d.
Actual Force Measurement
Measurement
The application of a
Counterbalancing
or weight at a measured distance from
spirit level.
Measurement Method
by placing
straightedge
at the
other end is centered on the trailing edge. Mark the

chord line by grease pencil or other means on the rib.
Remove the straightedge. Fit correct size bolts in the
outboard and center hinge brackets and mount the

ruddervator on the knife edges. Ensure that it is free
to rotate about the hinge line. Support the trailing
edge behind the center hinge point with a spindle
resting on a leveled beam balance platform as illustrated. The spindle must be vertical throughout the
spirit level against the

by extending or contracting the spindle. Measure the perpendicular distance from the hinge centerline to the point supported
by the spindle. Ensure that the spirit level and rule
Hold
marked chord line and level it
are
on
removed from the surface and read the reaction
the beam balance.
Calculate the static underbalance moment "M" from

the formula:
M
Perpendicular distance from

spindle point (inches).
known force
ruler and
spindle
inboard end of the ruddervator so that one end is

aligned with the center of the torque tube and the
line of the
hinge.
to the illustration
required (blqcks
straightedge,
Locate the chord line
applied by the ruddervator surface on a

single support at a known distance from the center-
hinge line
as
Balancing Procedure Force
of the force
the
support spindle similar
leveling blocks,
tare).
line to the
b.
and
balancing procedure.
completely assembled
ruddervator
plane.
b.
A certified beam balance calibrated in
units of.Ol Ib. or less. The balance should have a flat
weighing platform and its capacity should equal tare
plus 2.0 Ibs. minimum.
repainted, suspend it by the trailing edge so that

excess paint will drain toward the
leading edge.
AFTER ANY REPAINTING OR REPAIR, THE FINISHED
BALANCED TO
SURFACE SHOULD BE CHECK
knife-edge supports as illusedges should be in the
The knife
Figure
horizontal
(0-10097,
(Figure 1)
When
A stand with
a.
and recheck the balance,
cover
check balance
Reaction
from the beam balance.
Tare, i.e. spindle plus leveling blocks
T
on
(pounds)read
the hinge center-
the scale
or
shims
platform (pounds).
to counter the unbalance moment of
the ruddervator
assembly.
The
following is
an
example:
5120-00
Page
Oct 16/92
A16
BEECHCRAFT
BONANZA SERIES
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
D is 13.5 inches, R is 2.26 Ib. and T
13.5 (2.26
-1.00);
inch-pounds.
17.0
M is within the range which is
CAUTION
1.00 Ib.
Be certain the forward top screw on the

ruddervator leading edge tip is secured
satisfactory.
after the ruddervator has been balanced.
If M is not within the prescribed range, refer to step i

under BALANCING PROCEDURE COUNTERBALANCING METHOD.
Add small
e.
until the
quantities
of lead shot to the cup

line
ruddervator balances with the chord
level. Check this
by holding
spirit
level
aligned with
the marked chord line.
equipment required to perform

by counterbalancing is as follows:
The
A stand with
a.
trated in
Figure 1. The
horizontal plane.
same
check
balancing
knife-edge supports as illusknife edges must be in the
The distance "D" must be perpendicular to

f.
hinge line. Measure "D" from the hinge line to the
suspension point of the cup.
the

g.
them.
string, then
weigh
NOTE
b.
A paper cup
similar
or
lightweight
contain-
er.
3.5
Approximately
c.
pounds
Since any weighing error is magnified by

the distance "D", weighing is most impor-
of lead shot,
tant and must be done
that
A certified beam balance
d.
calibrated in units of.Ol
straightedge, ruler,
e.
Balancing
Procedure
Locate
a.
straightedge
ruddervator
pound
so
the
that
weighing device
less,
and
spirit level.
line
chord
lower
one
end is
aligned
1.
placing
by
rib
of
the
remove
marker,
the
with the
cen-
as
small
c.
ises and
grease
position
piece of masking tape,

mount the
ruddervator
To determine if
on
the
clev-
hinge
knife-edge
weight
weight
should be added
or
leading edge tip, slightly
screw.
underbalance moment is
D.
4.
The following
balancing calculation:
the
Assume
ruddervator
is
was
typical example
underbalance
to
(tail-
from the
heavy) and the paper cup was suspended

leading edge. if the ruddervator balances
2.83 pounds" and
chord line level as "W
with the
"D
6.0
inches", then:
6.0
2.83
17.0
inch-pounds. The product
of "W
D". In this
instance, "M" is within the required static balance
acceptable.
loosen
Suspend a paper cup on the

tip and wrap the string around the
screw. Secure the string to the surface with a small
piece of masking tape aft of the forward top screw
and near the hinge centerline as shown in Figure 1.
The cup must be free to hang vertically,
top
inboard side of the
follows:
of the cup and contents is
over or
range and is therefore

the forward
as
ruddervator is free to
removed, if the balance is tail-down:

On the ruddervator
scales
"M".
3.
pencil, then
straightedge.
The
2.
supports. Ascertain that the

rotate about the hinge line.
d.
Secure the trim tab in its neutral
b.
with
such
The
designated by
terline of the torque tube and the other end is centered on the trailing edge. Mark the chord line with a
suitable
on
designated by "W".
Method
closure
carefully
certified for accuracy.
h.
Counterbalancing
the
at
or
are
i.
The
bly, including
complete painted
the control
arm
ruddervator
assem-
and the tab
control
cable attach bolt, nut and washer for both sides of the
tab, should not be tail-heavy over a maximum of 14.4
to 17.4
comply,
inch-pounds. If the static balance does

remove
the ruddervator horn
cover
not
and add
55-20-00
Page
A16
Oct 16/92
BEECHCRAFT
BONANZA SERIES
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
or
remove
within the
solder to bring the ruddervator balance

required limits.
(20, Chart 1, 91-00-00) to insulate the dissimilar metals. Replace the ruddervator
horn
NOTE
cover
and recheck the balance.
Coat the weight with a corrosion preventive material such as zinc chromate primer
"END"
5120-00
Page
Oct 16/92
A16
BEECHCRAFT
BONANZA SERIES
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
VERTICAL STABILIZER
PRACTICES
MAINTENANCE
Pull the stabilizer
e.
straight
up to
remove
VERTICAL STABILIZER REMOVAL
(CE-748 CE-772 and af2er; CJ- 149 and after; E-l 111,
E-1241 and after; EA-1 and after)
VERTICAL STABILIZEF~ INSTALLATION

CJ- 149 and aiter; E- 1 II I,
E-1241 and after; EA-I and after)
(CE-748, CE-772 and after;
Carefully place
a.
the vertical stabilizer in
Remove the elevators, horizontal stabilizers, and

the rudder. Refer to the applicable chapters for removal
and install the bolts in the front and
instructions.
50-70
a.
b.
Torque all
inch-pounds.
rear
AN4 vertical stabilizer
b.
Remove the stabilizer saddle and
c.
Connect the
c.
Disconnect the
d.
Install the stabilizer saddle and
applicable).
d.
Support
front and
rear
fairings.
rotating beacon wires (if
e.
the stabilizer and
it from the
fuselage.
remove
the bolts at the
rudder.
rotating beacon
position
spars.
attaching
bolts to
(if applicable).
fairings.
wires
Install the elevators, horizontal stabilizers, and
Refer to the
applicable chapters for installation
procedures.
spars.
"END"
55-30-00
Page 1
May 9/80
BEECHCRAFT
BONANZA SERIES
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
RUDDER
tare).
spindle
levelling blocks as required. (8locks
d.
A straight edge, rule and spirit level.
BALANCING THE RUDDER

(CE-748, CE-712 and after; CJ- 149 and after; E- I II 1,
E-1241 and after; EA-1 and after)
BALANCING PROCEDURE FORCE MEASUREMENT

METHOD
(Figure I)
being repainted, suspend it by

that excess paint will drain toward the
any repainting or repair, the finished
by placing
When the rudder surface is
inboard end of the rudder
trailing edge so
leading edge. After
center of the
the
surface must be check balanced to ensure that its static

moment about the hinge line is within the manufacturers
prescribed
including
limits. The
the control
complete painted
arm
should not be
assembly,
tail-heavy over a
rudder
inch-pounds. The static moment of the

by multiplying the unbalanced weight
of the rudder assembly times the perpendicular distance
from the hinge center line to the center of gravity when the
chord line is horizontally level. The weight is measured in
maximum of 8.4
rudder is deternined
pounds and the distance in inches. The static moment of a

100 percent balanced rudder assembly is 0.0 inch-pounds,
Tail heaviness indicates static underbalance while
nose
heaviness indicates static overbalance,
so
that
straight edge at
aligned with
one
end is
torque tube and the other end is centered
the
the
on
Mark the chord line
by grease pencil or
other means on the rib. Remove the straight edge. Fit
correct size bolts in the outboard and center hinge brackets
and mount the rudder on the knife edges. Ensure that it is
free to rotate about the hinge line. Support the trailing edge
behind the center hinge point with a spindle resting on a
levelled beam balance platform as illustrated. The spindle
must be vertical throughout the balancing procedure. Hold a
spirit level against the marked chord line and level it by
extending or contracting the spindle, or by using blocks and
shims under the spindle. Measure the perpendicular
distance from the hinge center line to the point supported by
the spindle. Ensure that the spirit level and rule are removed
the
trailing edge.
from
the
and
surface
read
the
reaction
on
the beam
balance. Calculate the static underbalance moment "M"
from the formula:

CHECKING BALANCE
M
The rudder balance must be checked in
draft free
area
completely assembled in flying condition. All

painting, including stripes and touch-up, must be completed.
The tab, static wicks, and hinge bolts must be attached. The
chord line must be horizontally level and the hinge line must
be properly supported when the static moment is measured.
Although many different methods of check balancing exist,
they can be categorized under the following two headings:
with the rudder
D
the

Perpendicular distance from
spindle point (inches).
(Pounds) read from
Reaction
scale
a.
force
applied by
force
or
the rudder surface
Measurement of the
single support at a
known distance from the center line of the hinge.
The application of a known
b.
Counterbalancing
weight
on a
at a measured distance from the
to counter the unbalance moment of the rudder
hinge line
assembly.
center line to
the beam balance.

or
shims
on
the
platform (Pounds).
following
is
an
example:
1.49 Ib. and T is 1.00 fb.
D is 13.8 inches, R
hinge
Tare, i.e. spindle plus levelling blocks
The
the
13.8
(1.49
1.00);
6.8
inch-pounds.
M is within the range which is satisfactory.

If M is not within the prescribed range, refer to step h, under
BALANCING PROCEDURE COUNTERBALANCING
METHOD.

CHECK BALANCE BY FORCE MEASUREMENT
EQUIPMENT
The
equipment required
force measurement is
as
to
perform
the check balance
by
BALANCING BY
Figure
plane.
b.
Ib.
or
A stand with knife

1. The knife
edge supports
edges should
be in the
c.
as
illustrated in
same
horizontal
A certified beam balance calibrated in units of.Ol

a flat weighing platform
capacity should equal tare plus 2.0 Ibs. minimum,
A support spindle similar to the illustration and
less. The balance should have
and its
PERFORM
CHECK
COUNTERBALANCING
follows:
a.
a.
REQUIRED TO
Figure
plane.
A stand with knife

1. The knife
edges
b.
A paper cup
c.
Approximately
a.
edge supports
as
illustrated in
must be in the same horizontal
light weight container.

pounds of lead shot.
A certified beam balance weighing device
d.
calibrated in units of .01 pound or less.
or
similar
straight edge, ruler,
and
spirit
level.
5540-00
Page 1
May 9/80
BEECHCRAFT
BONANZA SERIES
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
MASKING TAPE
A,C
A~
IPLdEI
NIAR RUDDEP HINGI
LINT)
I-,
TAIL
CCoNrAINER
CONTAI
CI\
KNIFE EDGE
~i
ONTAINER
\II
JIO MUST BE HORIZONTALLY LEVEL
ACTUAL FORCE MEASUREMENT
II
-uL~
JIO MUST BE HORIZONTALLY LEVEL

STATIC OVERBALANCE (NOSE HEAVY)
VIEW
B-B
CONTAINER
VIEW
A-A
JIG MUST BE HORIZONTALLY LEVEL

STATIC UNDERBALANCE
(TAIL HEAVY)
36-1536Pl
Balancing the Rudder

Figure 1
5540-00
Page 2
Mey 9/80
BEECHCRAFT
BONANZA SERIES
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
COUNTERBALANCING
BALANCING PROCEDURE
g.
as
follows:
METHOD
The
1.
straight edge at
that one end is aligned
designated by
with the center of the torque tube while the other end is
centered on the trailing edge. Mark the chord line with a
designated by
a.
by placing
the lower closure rib of the rudder so
suitable marker, such
as a
grease
pencil,
then
remove
The
2.
the
4.
The
hinge brackets and

edge supports. Ascertain that
the rudder is free to rotate about the hinge line,
To determine if weight should be added or
c.
removed, suspend a paper cup from a point near the center
of the rudder trailing edge if the balance is nose-down or
near the center of the hom leading edge if the balance is
tail-down. Use a short length of small diameter string
secured to the surface with a small piece of masking tape
as illustrated in Figure i. The cup must be free to hang
vertically.
Add small quantities of lead shot to the cup until
d.
the rudder balances with the chord line level. Check this by
holding a spirit level aligned with the marked chord line.
The distance "D" must be perpendicular to the
a.
hinge line. Measure "D" from the hinge line to the
suspension point of the cup.
f.
Remove the cup, contents, and string, then weigh
underbalance
cup and contents is
over
or
underbalance
suspended
is
following
is
typical example of a
was slightly
(tail-heavy)
from the horn
and
the
paper cup was

If the rudder
leading edge.
balances with the chord line level at "W
"D
moment
calculation: Assume the rudder
balancing
b.
the
"M".
3.
straight edge.
mount the rudder on the knife
of
weight
"W".
.65
pound"
and
12.5 inches", then

M
.65
8.1
12.5
inch-pounds. In this instance,

required static balance range
therefore acceptable.
"M" is
within the
and is
The
complete painted rudder assembly, including

must not be tail-heavy over a maximum of
8.4 inch-pounds. If the static balance does not comply,
remove the weight in the rudder horn and add or remove
solder to bring the rudder balance within required limits.
h.
the control
arm
them.
NOTE
NOTE
Coat the weight with
weighing error
distance "D", weighing is
must be done carefully
Since any
is
magnified by
important
and
scales that
are
most
on
material such
the
as
corrosion
insulate the dissimilar metals.
weight
in
the
preventative
primer to
Replace the
zinc chromate
rudder horn and
recheck the
rudder balance.
certified for accuracy,
"END"
55-40-00
Page 3
May 9/80
C H A PT E R
VVIN DOVVS
BEECHCRAFT
BONANZA SERIES
MAINfENANCE MANUAL
CHAPTER 56
WINDOWS
TABLE OF CONTENTS
CHAPTER
SECTION
SUBJECT
SUBJECT
56-00-00
GENERAL
Description
and
......1
Operation
......1
Cleaning
PAGE
...,..1
Plastic Windows
....56-10-00
FLIGHT COMPARTMENT
......1
Windshield Removal
......1
Windshield Installation
,.....1
Forward Left Window Removal
,.....1
Forward Left Window Installation
......1
Storm Window Removal
......2
Storm Window Installation
...,..2
Cabin Door Window Removal
......2
Cabin Door Window Installation
......2
.56-20-00
CABIN
,.,...1
Window Removal
Openable
Openable Window Installation
Utility Doors Window Removal (E-llll, E-1241
and after; EA-1 and after)
Utility Doors Window Installation (E-llll, E-1241
Windows Aft of Openable Windows Removal
Windows Aft of Openable Windows Installation
......1
.......1
,......1
.......1
,......1
..........1
"END"
5&CONTtNTS
PaPe 1
May 9/80
BEECHCRAFT
BONANZA SERIES
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
CHAPTER 56
CHAPTER
SECTION
SUBJECT
PAGE
DATE
56-EFFECTIVITY
Oct 16/92
56-CONTENTS
May
56-00-00
Oct 16/92
1
2
May 9/80
May 9/80
May 9/80
56-10-00
56-20-00
9/80
"END"
SE-EFFECTIVITY
Page 1
A1E
Oct 16/92
BEECHCRAFT
BONANZA SERIES
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
GENERAL
moist chamois.
The windshield and windows for the Bonanza Series
airplanes
are
made of cast
openable window
an
are
windows
of the Model A36
the left side. The cabin
on
area
33 and 35 series
each side of
airplanes contains an
the airplane, just behind
Never
tone,
of the Model
ah window
the
GENERAL
openable
flammable
If it is desirable to
scratches to the window surface. To
avoid
scratches, any cleaning of the wincare.
clean and waxed at
water.
of these
extreme
care
be
must
using these chemicals.
use a
commercial cleaner to clean
washing plastic windows with soap and water,

apply a good grade of commercial wax (61, Chart 1,
91-00-00). The wax will fill in minor scratches and help
prevent further scratches. Apply a thin, even coat of
wax and bring it to a high polish by rubbing lightly
with a clean, dry, soft flannel cloth. Never use a
power buffer, as the heat generated by the buffing
pad may soften the plastic.
When
washing the windows, do not use

a bucket or pail.
Sand, dirt
particles or other debris may collect in the
standing water and cause scratches in the
plastic.
water from
to feel and
However, it has been discovered that some of these

cleaners cause acrylic plastic to craze. Therefore,
only the following products are approved as cleaners
for acrylic plastic windows: Federal Specification
PP-560, Part No. 403D; Parko Anti-Static Plastic Polish; and McGuiars MGH-10 (60, Chart 1, 91-00-00).
Follow the directions on the container.
After
CAUTION
dislodge dirt
and
mud. A soft cloth, chamois or sponge may be used

only for the purpose of carrying water to the surface
with
base
plastic windows, use only cleaners that are

approved by Beech Aircraft Corporation. There are
several cleaners available commercially that state
that they are approved for use on acrylic surfaces.
all times. To prevent scratches and crazing, wash the

windows carefully with plenty of soap and running
oughly
the
cause
of the window. After
and
exercised when
Do not use an ice scraper to remove ice

from windows because this practice may
palm of the hand
with
plastic and may cause crazing. Aliphatic

naphtha and similar solvents are highly
CAUTION
kept
ace-
tetrachloride, fire extinanti-ice fluid, lacquer thinner,
materials, for such materials will soften the
Plastic windows should be
gasoline, benzine, alcohol,
carbon
or
dows should be done with
use
guisher or
glass cleaner
on
windows.
Use the
1,
CAUTION
airplanes contains two

windows on each side, behind the openable windows;
a window in each of two utility doors, and matching
cabin
Chart
water.
on
side, just aft of the flight compartment. The
each
electrostatic
(26, Chart 1, 91-00-00) or hexane (59,

91-00-00), then rinse the window with clear
enclosed storm window. The cabin
airplane contains
of the
area
an
Remove oil and grease with a cloth moistened with

kerosene (58, Chart 1, 91-00-00), aliphatic naphtha
flight compartment of each airplane is equipped

with a windshield, cabin door window, and a left cabin
an
plastic window with
cause
acrylic plexiglass.
The
window with
Do not rub the
dry cloth because this will

charge which attracts dust.
washing, rinse the window thorrunning water and dry it with a clean,
If the windows
were
cleaned with
commercial cleaners mentioned
one
of the three
previously, it will
not
be necessary to apply wax. Each of these cleaners

contains wax, as well as cleaning agents.
"END"
56-00-00
Page
Ale
Oct 16/92
BEECHCRAFT
BONANZA SERIES
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
FLIGHT COMPARTMENT
PRACTICES
MAINTENANCE
DEFROSTER DUCT
ATTACHING SCREW
WINDSHIELD REMOVAL
(Figure I)
DEFROSTER
Remove the
a.
glareshield. Refer
to GLARESHIELD
REMOVAL, Chapter 39-10-00.

Remove the
b.
duct and
move
attaching
screws
the duct to clear the lower
from the defroster

row
of rivets
on
the
windshield.
Mark the
c.
position of
the three
glareshield supports
attached to the inside of the windshield frame.

d.
Mark the location and
and lower the headliner to
strips
remove the
permit
headliner trim
the windshield to be
removed.
WINDSHIELD
FRAME
55-110-25
Remove any necessary molding that

e.
window frame to facilitate windshield removal.
covers
the
f.
Remove the rivets from around the windshield.
g.
Remove the windshield.
Figure
to
the
windshield
Install the headliner trim
k.
NOTE
Due
Windshield
strips
and secure the
headliner in position.
Install any windshield molding
i.
windshield removal.
being sealed,
considerable effort may be required to release

the windshield from the canopy section.
Install the
m.
glareshield.
removed
for
Refer to GLARESHIELD
INSTALLATION, 39-10-00.
WINDSHIELD INSTALLA TION
FORWARD LEFT WINDOW REMOVAL
a.
Touchup
primer.
Remove any sealer around the canopy with toluol.

any scratches or bare metal with zinc chromate
Place the windshield in
b.
position
and mark the
area
where material must be removed from the windshield to

a proper fit. The windshield frame edge should not
bind in the radius of the fuselage framework.
obtain
Remove the windshield
c.
material
as
d.
using
the
e.
and
trim
off
Remove the trim
b.
as
required
to
gain
strip
from around the inside of the
window.
c.
Remove the rivets from around the window.
d.
Remove the window.
determined in step "b".
Place the windshield in
pilot
holes
position
and cleco in
place
using
the
existing
(17, Chart 1, 91-00-00)
apply
to the windshield
Using rivets, secure the windshield to the canopy

making sure the glareshield supports are installed in
the same position as they were removed.
h.
section
Clean off the
excess
Presstite 576 sealer from the
outside of the window frame,

a narrow
bead of EC1814 sealer (18, Chart
1, 91-00-00) to the outside window frame where the frame

meets the canopy section. Remove excess sealer.
Clean the sealer from the canopy section where

was removed using toluol (19, Chart 1,
a.
the old window
frame where it makes contact with the canopy section,

Place the windshield in position and cleco in place.
g.
Place
FORWARD LEFT WINDOW INS7ALLATION
provided.
Back drill the windshield frame
Presstite 576 sealer
j.
upholstery panels
window frame.
excess
holes in the canopy section as a guide,

f.
Remove the windshield, bun all holes and
i.
Remove the
a.
access to the
91-00-00). Touch up any scratches or bare metal

primer (20, Chart 1, 91-00-00).
Place the window in position and mark
b.
with the
chromate
the area
where material must be removed from the window frame to

obtain a proper fit.
c.
material
Remove the window
and trim off the
excess
determined in step "b".

Place the window in position and cleco in place
d.
using the pilot holes provided.
e.
as
Back drill the window frame
using
the
existing
holes in the canopy section as a guide.

f.
Remove the window, burr all holes, and
apply
56-10-00
Page 1
May 9/80
BEECHCRAFT
BONANZA SERIES
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
Presstite 576 sealer (17, Chart 1, 91-00-00) to an area

approximately 1/2 inch wide on the canopy section where the
old sealer
g.
was
position
and cleco in
place.
Using rivets, secure the window to the canopy

making sure the trim strip clips are reinstalled in the
same position as removed.
Install the upholstery panels.
i.
Install the tirm strip.
i.
h.
Clean off the
excess
a narrow
strip clips.
e.
Remove the rivets around the window retainer.
f.
Remove the window.
CABIN DOOR WINDOW INSTALLATION

Clean the sealer from the door where the old
a.
(18, Chart
1, 91-00-00) to the outside window frame where the frame
meets the canopy section. Remove excess sealer.
Place
trim
Presstite 576 sealer from the
outside of the window frame,

i.
To facilitate reinstallation, mark the location of the
d.
removed.
Place the window in
section
k.
Remove the trim strip around the inside of the
c.
window.
bead of EC1814 sealer
window was removed,
b.
an area
STORM WINDOW REMOVAL
Apply Proseal 890 sealer (21, Chart 1, 91-00-00) to

approximately 1/2 inch wide on the door where the
old sealer
c.
a.
Open
the latch mechanism at the top of the storm
window,
b.
Remove the two
internally threaded hinge pins
at
using toluol (19, Chart 1, 91-00-00).
Touch up any scratches or bare metal with zinc chromate

primer (20, Chart 1, 91-00-00).
was
removed.
Place the
new
e.
internally
b.
the window, and
threaded
NOTE
hinge pins
When
at the
riveting the window in place, install the

strip clips in the same locations as marked in
step "d" of the window removal procedure.
trim
bottom of the storm window,

i
over
Secure the window retainer to the door skin with
STORM WINDOW INSTALLATION

Install the two
position.
Place the retainer in position,

cleco the retainer to the cabin door.
rivets.
the bottom of the storm window,
a.
window in
d.
Close the latch mechanism at the top of the storm
window.
CABIN DOOR WINDOW REMOVAL

a.
Remove the inboard door handle, ash tray and
arm
rest.
b.
Remove the center
upholstery panel.
PageZ
May
9/80
Install the trim
g.
h.
Clean and paint as necessary.

Reinstall the center, upholstery
i.
Reinstall the inboard door handle, ash tray and
arm rest.
"END"
56-1 0-00
f.
strip.
panel.
BEECHCRAFT
BONANZA SERIES
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
CABIN
PR1221 81/2 sealer
OPENABLE WINDOW REMOVAL
in
strips
a.
b.
(22, Chart 1, 91-00-00) to the area of the
window located in step "d".

f.
Place the window in
Remove the emergency release

Remove the hinge pin.
position and
rivet the
retaining
place.
pin.
NOTE
OPENABLE WINDOW INSTALLATION
Connect the latch link rod if the forward window

is
a.
Install the
b.
install the emergency release
being replaced.
hinge pin.
pin.
g.
window
Clean
edge
excess
sealer from
the outside of the
and install the interior window
molding.
UTILIN DOORS WINDOW REMOVAL

(E-llll, E-1241 and after; EA-I and alter)
a.
Remove the window
b.
Remove the rivets from the window
molding
WINDOWS AFT OF OPENABLE WINDOWS

REMOVAL
trim.
retaining
strips,
a.
access to
b.
NOTE
Remove the upholstery panels

the window frame.
Remove the rivets
on
or screws
the fomard window, remove the latch link rod
so
d.
that all the rivets
c.
are
Remove the window.
Clean the sealer from the cabin section where the

was removed using toluol (19, Chart 1, 91-00Touch up any scratches or bare metal with zinc
a.
00).
chromate
retaining strips are required, dimple the rivet

holes in the retaining strips with a 5/16 inch dimpler.
c.
Place the window in position and cleco the
retaining strips in place.
d.
Tape the entire outside surface of the window, then
trim the excess tape away from the area that overlaps the
door frame. This procedure locates the area that the new
sealer is to be applied.
Remove the retaining strips and window. Apply
e.
If new
primer (20, Chart 1, 91-00-00).

Apply Presstite 576 sealer (17, Chart 1,91-00-00)
area approximately 1/2 inch wide on the cabin section
b.
removed, using toluol, (19, Chart 1, 91-00-00).
Touch up any scratches or bare metal with zinc chromate

primer (20, Chart 1, 91-00-00).
b.
(Model A36 series airplanes),

retaining strips.
old window
Clean the old sealer from the door where the

was
from the window
WINDOWS AFT OF OPENABLE WINDOWS

INSTALLA 7/ON
Remove the window.
UTILIN DOORS WINDOW INSTALLATION

window
gain
accessible.
(E-llll, E-1241
a.
to
Remove the trim strip from around the inside of the
c.
removing the
required
window.
rivets from the retainers
When
as
to an
where the old sealer
was removed.
Place the window in position and install the
window retaining strips to the cabin section with screws. On
c.
the Model A36 series
airplanes only,
the
retaining strips
the top retainer and rivets

side and bottom retainers.
secured with
d.
window
screws on
Clean
excess
are
on
the
sealer from the outside of the
edge and install the trim strips
to the inside of the
window.
a.
Install the
upholstery panels.
"END"
56;-20-00
Page
May
9/80
CHAPTER
VVINGS
Raylheon Aircraft
CHAPTER 57
WINGS
TABLE OF CONTENTS
PAGE
SUBJECT
57-00-00
Wings Description
and
Operation
Wings
Wing Tip
Removal
Wing Tip Installation
Removal
Wing
Removal of
Leading Edge
Installation of
Wing
and Main
Leading Edge
Spar
and Main
Spar
Installation
the
Adjusting
Wings
Wing Bolt, Nut, and Fitting Inspection
10
Magnetic-Particle Inspection
14
Outboard
Wing
Main
16
Spar Cap Inspection

57-30-00
Plates/Skin
Wing
Wing
Access
Openings
Skin Thickness
57-40-00
Attach
Fittings
57-50-00
Flight Surfaces
Balancing
the Aileron
Checking Balance
Equipment Required
Balancing
to Perform Check
Balancing
Procedure
Counterbalancing Method
A22
57-CONTENTS
Nov
10/0 Page
Ral~heon Aircraft
CHAPTER 57
WINGS
PAGE
DATE
57-Effectivity
Nov 10/00
Sir-Contents
Nov 10/00
57-00-00
Nov 10/00
Nov 10/00
Nov 10/00
Nov 10/00
Nov 10/00
Nov 10/00
Nov 10/00
Nov 10/00
Nov 10/00
10
Nov 10/00
11
Nov 10/00
12
Nov 10/00
13
Nov 10/00
14
Nov 10/00
15
Nov 10/00
16
Nov 10/00
Jan 20/82
Jan 20/82
57-30-00
9/80
57-40-00
May
57-50-00
May 9/80
May 9/80
May9/80
A22
57-EFFECTIVITY
Nov
10/0 Page
Raytheon Aircraft
WINGS
The all metal
wing group consists of the front and rear spars, leading edge, wing tips, flaps, ailerons, and fuel tanks.
wing tips, flaps, and ailerons are readily removable. The forward wing attaching point is located at FS 83.00
while the rear wing attaching point is located at FS 118.00 on all Model 33 and 35 series airplanes. On Model A36
series airplanes, the forward wing attaching point is located at FS 73.00 while the rear wing attaching point is located
at FS 108.00. An optional remote compass is located in the left wing tip on all serials except CJ-149 and after.
The
1~22
57-00-00
Raytheon Aircraft
WINGS
WING TIP REMOVAL
attaching
the
to the
a.
Remove the
b.
Disconnect the electrical leads to the
c.
Disconnect the remote compass at the left
screws
wing tip
wing.
navigation light.
wing tip (if installed).
WING TIP INSTALLATION

a.
Connect the remote compass at the left
b.
Connect the electrical leads to the
c.
Place the
wing tip
in
position
and
wing tip (if installed).
navigation light.
secure
it to the
wing with
screws.
WING REMOVAL
purgethefuelcells.
a.
Drainand
b.
Removethefront seats.
G.
Remove the
rear seat
d.
Remove the
wing mounting
panel.
bolt
access
plates
from the top and bottom of the
wing.
airplane on jacks and raise the airplane until the wheels are clear of the ground. Refer to Chapter
jacking instructions. A three point jack should be used because of the unbalanced condition of the airthe
after
plane
wing is removed.
e.
Place the
7-00-00 for
hydraulic
lines at the
f.
Disconnect and cap
g.
Operate
h.
Disconnect the inboard door actuator rod from the control horn.
i.
Disconnect the
landing
gear
j.
Disconnect the
landing
gear actuator rod from the V-brace in the wheel well.
k.
Disconnect and cap the fuel lines between the
i.
Disconnect and cap the
m.
Disconnect and label electrical
n.
Disconnect and
the
landing
wing
root.
gear switch until the inboard
identify
uplock cable
pitot
gear doors
are
fully
open.
at the inboard connection in the wheel well.
line at the left
wiring
landing
wing
wing
root rib and the
fuselage.
root in the wheel well.
in the wheel well.
the aileron cables at the turnbuckles located inside the cabin, forward of the
rear
spar
below the floorboards.

o.
Disconnect the
p.
Cradiethe
q.
Place
Page
flap
drive shaft from the motor.
wing.
wing
stand under the
wing
57-00-00
not
being
removed and
place
stand under the tail.
nal
Raytheon Aircraft
r.
Outline the
position
of the
wing
on
the
fuselage
guide for reinstallation.
as a
CAUTION t
ICAUTION
There should be
the bolt
s.
no bolt binding during removal. Should binding occur, adjust the wing position until
disengages freely. Do not screw or drive a bolt in or out of the fittings.
Remove the
mounting nuts,
bolts and washers from the
wing.
WARNING)
I WARNING
A
bushing
is installed in the lower front spar attach fitting. This bushing should not be
wing is removed, and must be in place when the wing is reinstalled.
re-
moved when the
NOTE
Discard the
mounting
Discard the
special soft aluminum washer

installing the wing.
nuts. Install
new
nuts when
mounting
used
on
the
wing
installing
upper
the
wing.
mounting
bolts. Install
new
alu-
minum washers when

t.
Disconnect the cold air flex duct at the
u.
Remove the
wing by pulling
it
straight
wing leading edge.
away from the
fuselage.
REMOVAL OF LEADING EDGE AND MAIN SPAR

The
wing must be removed from the airplane before the leading edge or main spar can be removed. Remove the
attaching screws at the wing tip and wing butts. Access to the screws at the main spar root is through the wheel well.
Pull the hinge pins which attach the leading edge, disconnect the landing gear and remove the main spar.
NOTE
Support the landing gear to avoid damaging the aft spargear connection
or remove
the gear at both
connections.
INSTALLA TION OF LEADING EDGE AND MAIN SPAR

are to be driven with a rivet gun by supporting the hinge pin in telescoping tube, repair kit 35-588 S.
hinge halves are free of metal burrs and mated before attempting to drive the hinge pin. Grind the
end of the pin to a point before starting it in the hinge. A second rivet gun or mallet may be used to tap along the
upper or lower edge of the main spar to help the pin through the hinge. Use a wooden block as a pad to prevent
damage to the spar.
The
hinge pins
Make
sure
the
I CAUTION I
Do not attempt to
to seize or break.
nnn
spin
the
hinge pin
in with
drill motor. Heat and
expansion may
cause
the wire
57-00-00Page
RaytheMI Aircraft
~95-110025-1 WASHER
[POSITION WITH RADIUS
TOWARDS THE WING FITTING)
EB-126
95-110021 WASHER
WITH COUNTERSINK
BOLT HEAD)
MS20012-20
OR
NAS152-37
OR
131790-1 BOLT
NUT
(EXTERNAL WRENCHING)
WING
(POSITION
TOWARDS
FITTING
++M520002-12
WASHER
DRAIN
HO~E
FUSELAGE FITTING
105090A032-12K
WASHER
BOLT TOROUE: 2480 TO 2600 INCH-POUNDS. COAT THE COMPLETE BOLT, NUT,
WING FITTING BOLT BORES, AND EXPOSED BOLT THREADS WITH MIL-C-16173,
GRADE 2 CORROSION PREVENTIVE COMPOUND.
WET
WASHER,
CHECK WASHER FOR A SMOOTH CONTINUOUS OUTER RADIUS.

MS20002- 12 WASHERS MAY BE USED AS REOUIRED BETWEEN
WASHER TO PROVIDE A PROPER BOLT GRIP ADJUSTMENT.
USED
PRIOR TO CE-928,
CJ-156,
D-10353,
CHART
BOLT
AND
95- 1 10025- 1
D-10353
AND
AFTER,
NOTE
NOTE
WING
NUT
E-1758 AND EA-150
USED CD-928 AND AFTER, CJ-156 AND AFTER,

E-1758 AND AFTER AND EA-150 AND AFTER.
SEE
THE
CONCURRENT WITH THE SCHEDULED

TORQUE CHECK, INSPECT THE UPPER
WING ATTACH FITTINGS TO ASSURE THAT
THE DRAIN HOLES ARE CLEAR.
2 FOR
TOOLS
f~k12NB126 NUT
[INTERNAL
WRENCHING)
EA57B
003141A~
Upper Fonnrard Wing Bolt Installation

Figure 1
Nov
57-00I00
A22
Raylheon Aircraft
105090AO32-1OJ
++95-1 10025-7 WASHER

CHECK FOR A SMOOTH CDMPLETE RADIUS)
POSITION RADIUS TOWARD THE FITTING)
12NB108
35-105111-3 WASHER
[POSITION WITH COUNTERSINK
TOWARDS BOLT HEAD)
WAS\HER
NUT
NAS150-33/M/
BOLT
WING FITTING
WET
BOLT
WASHERS,
C-16173.
USED
FUSELAGE FITTING
TORQUE:
1180 TO 1300 INCH-POUNDS.
COAT THE COMPLETE BOLT, NUT,
WING FITTING BOLT BORES. AND EXPOSED BOLT THREADS WITH MILGRADE 2 CORROSION PREVENTIVE COMPOUND.
PRIOR
TO
CE-935;
CJ-156;
D-10359:
E-1791;
USED CE-935 AND AFTER; CJ-156 AND AFTER:

E-1791 AND AFTER; EA-177 AND AFTER.
EA-177.
D-10359
.MS20002- IO WASHER
(ONE OR TWO MS20002-IO WASHERS
MAY BE USED BETWEEN THE NUT
AND THE FITTING TO PROVIDE
PROPER BOLT GRIP ADJUSTMENT.
AND
AFTER;
NOTE
SEE CHART 2 FOR
WING BOLT TOOLS
O
NOTE
CONCURRENT WITH THE SCHEDULED TOROUE
CHECK. INSPECT THE UPPER WING ATTACH
FITTINGS TO ENSURE THAT THE DRAIN
HOLES ARE UNOBSTRUCTED,
mAinA
Upper Aft Wing Bolt

Figure 2
A22
Installation
57-0000
Nov
10/0 Page
Raytheon Aircraft
NOTE
CHART 2 FOR
WING BOLT TOOLS
SEE
12NB 126 xac**

NUT
INTERNAL
WRENCHING
#TAIL
50-105011 WASHER
(REPLACES THE MS20002- 12
WASHER ON AIRPLANE SERIALS
EA-242, EA-273 AND AFTER)
NOTE:
BUSHING NOT USED

EA-273 AND AFTER
MS200 12-31/M/ OR
131790-2 BOLT
EA-242,
rc **~e *a
10094
BUSHING
we 000- 1
WING FITT
MS200 1 4-28 OR
131790-3 BOLT
MS20002-12 WASHER
1050 1 1-3
FUSELAGE
WASHER
FITTING
WET BOLT TOROUE: 2480 TO 2600 INCH-POUNDS (ALL SERIALS EXCEPT EA-242.
EA-273 AND AFTER), 2800 TO 3000 INCH-POUNDS (EA-242, EA-273 AND AFTER).
COAT THE COMPLETE BOLT, NUT, WASHER, WING FITTING BOLT BORES, AND
EXPOSED THREADS WITH MIL-C-16173, GRADE 2 CORROSION PREVENTIVE COMPOUND.
CHECK
TOWARD
WASHER FOR A
BOLT HEAD.
SMOOTH
CONTINUOUS OUTER RADIUS
AND
POSITION
WITH
CE-748, CE-772 AND AFTER: CJ-149 AND AFTER: E-) I I I

E-1~41
0-10097, D-10120 AND AFTER; EA-I THRU EA-272 EXCEPT EA-242.
USED
arcre WASHER
YJ*C* USED
NOT
PRIOR
USED
UNDER BOLT HEAD EA-242,
TO D-10353;
CE-928;
CJ-156;
EA-273
E-1758;
USED 0-10353 AND AFTER: CE-928 AND AFTER:

AFTER; EA-150 THRU EA-272, EXCEPT EA-242.
USED
EA-242,
EA-273
AND
RADIUS
AND AFTER:
AFTER.
EA-150.
CJ-156 AND AFTER;
E-1758
AND
AND AFTER.
EA57B
oOJ142AA
Lower Forward
Wing
Figure
Page
Nov10/00
57 00 00
I
Bolt Installation
3
A22
Raytheon Aircraft
MS20002- IO WASHER (ONE OR TWO MS20002- IO

WASHERS MAY BE USED BETWEEN THE
NUT AND
THE FITTING TO PROVIDE BOLT GRIP
ADJUSTMENT)
#TAIL
lc~cgg-110025-7
WASHERS MAY
THE FITTING
WASHER (ONE OR TWD 95-110025-7

BE USED BETWEEN THE NUT AND
TO PROVIDE BOLT GRIP ADJUSTMENT)
35-105111-3 WASHER (POSITION
WITH COUNTERSINK TOWARDS BOLT
HEAD)
Al)
NAS150-35/M/BOLT
12NB108
NOTE
SEE CHART
WING BOLT
WET
BOLT
WASHERS,
C-16173,
Ic
NUT
(CHECK FOR
2 FOR
TOOLS
SMOOTH
COMPLETE
RADIUS)(POSITION RADIUS TOWARD

FITTING AS SHOWN)
COAT THE COMPLETE BOLT, NUT,

TORQUE:
1180 TO 1300 INCH-POUNDS.
WING FITTING BOLT BORES, AND EXPOSED BOLT THREADS WITH MILGRADE 2 CORROSION PREVENTIVE COMPOUND.
TO CE-935:
D-10359;
E-1791;
USED
PRIOR
USED
CE-935 AND AFTER: CJ-156 AND AFTER;

EA-177 AND AFTER.
CJ-156;
EA-177.
D-10359
AND AFTER;
E-1791
AND
AFTER;
EA578
00J143AA
Lower Aft
A22
Wing Bolt Installation

Figure 4
57-00-00
Nov
10/0 Page
Ray~heon Aircraft
WING INSTALLATION
NOTE
replacing wing bolts make sure that the replacement bolts have been properly inspected
using the magnetic particle process. Bolts must be magnetically inspected before installation as
wing bolts. Bolts may be acquired through Raytheon Aircraft Parts Inventory and Distribution
(RAPID). The individual placing the order must stipulate the need to have the bolts inspected before
shipment.
When
Using a nonmetallic brush and solvent (26 or 31, Chart 1, 91-00-00), clean all wing attach fittings and hardware
(bolts, washers, and nuts). Inspect the wing attach fittings, bolts, washers, and nuts as instructed under WING
BOLT, NUT, AND FITTING INSPECTION.
a.
WARNING
IWARNINQ)
Wing
bolts that have reached their life limit
reused. The
b.
(5,
mounting
Coat the
Chart 1,
fitting bolt
91-00-00).
nuts must be
bores and
~10 years after the initial inspection)

replaced at each inspection interval.
bearing faces, bolts, washers,
and nuts with corrosion
must not be
preventive compound
WARIIIING I
I WARNING
The
bushing
lation of the
c.
Move the
wing
installed in the lower forward spar attach

attach bolts.
fitting
must be in
place prior to
instal-
wing
into
position, align
the
wing fittings
with the
carry-through fittings,
and insert the bolts.
CAUTION I
I cnuTloa
Each bolt must be inserted
by hand without binding. If a bolt cannot be easily inserted, reposition

freely through fittings. Do not drive or screw bolt into the fittings. Bolts
and nuts must be oriented as shown in applicable illustration for each location (Figure i, 2, 3, and 4).
the
d.
until the bolt
on
the
bore. If bolt
Tighten
moves
the upper forward and aft bolts. Rotate the wing trailing edge until the wing is aligned with the
fuselage. After alignment is established, verify that the lower forward bolt is not binding in the bolt
Start the nuts
outline
e.
wing
on
binding
is encountered,
adjust the wing position
until the bolt
moves
freely.
the upper forward and aft nuts.
CAUTION
I cnuTloNI
When
torquing wing nuts,
assure
could
that the wrenches do not bottom out
on
wing
attach
fittings.
Such
cause false torque readings and damage to fittings. After torquing the upper
an occurrence
forward wing attach nut, remove the holding force from the wing cradle and torque the remaining
three nuts.
Page
857-00-00
Raytheon Aircraft
f.
Torque the nuts in the following order: upper fonnrard,

adapter is used, the length of the adapter must be
torque value computed as detailed in Chapter 20-00-00.
wrench
upper aft, lower forward, and lower aft. When a torque

added to the length of the torque wrench and the proper
CAUIION I
I CAUTION
Before the lower aft nut is
torqued,
slight gap may be evident between the fittings. This gap should
torqued. Torque the wing attach
not exceed 0.060 in width. No gap should remain after the nut is
bolts at the nut end, do not rotate the bolt in the bolt bore.
Coat the bolt threads that
g.
protrude through the
h.
Connect the cold air duct at the
i.
Connect the
j.
Connect the aileron cables at the turnbuckles.
k.
i.
Connect the
m.
Connect the fuel lines.
n.
Connectthe
landing gearactuator
o.
Connect the
landing
p.
Connect the inboard door actuator rod.
q.
Connect the
pitot
wiring
flap
hydraulic
At the first scheduled
Check the drain ports to
Chart 1,
91-00-00).
motor.
in the wheel well.
line in the wheel well
gear
preventive compound (5,
wing leading edge.
shaft to the
flap drive
nut with corrosion
uplock
(LH only).
rod.
cable.
brake lines and bleed the brakes.
inspection
assure
that
after the
wing
they
unobstructed.
are
has been
installed, check the attaching bolts for proper torque.
ADJUSTING THE WINGS

After the
wing has been installed or repaired, flight tests may show the wing to be chronically heavy or light. This
condition may be corrected by rotating the wing to lower the trailing edge of a heavy wing or raise the trailing edge
of a light wing or by a combination of adjusting both wings. The aluminum washers between the upper wing fittings
replaced each time the position of the wing is changed. If both wings have been removed, install the right
wing
trailing edge at the highest point of the adjustment travel and the left wing 1/16 inch down from the
of
travel. The total adjustment on each wing is approximately 1/8 inch. The following steps should be
highest point
when
implemented
adjusting the wings:
must be
with the
a.
Using
b.
Place the
grease
airplane
instructions. Place
stand will also be
nan
pencil,
on a
outline the
three
position
point jack
to
assure
wing
on
the
fuselage.
and raise until the wheels
suitable cradle under the
required
of the
wing being adjusted
are
and
clear. Refer to
wing
Chapter 7-00-00 for jacking

opposite wing. A tail
stand under the
stability.
57-00-00Page
Ral~heon Aircraft
on the lower wing attach bolts and remove the bolts and nuts from the upper wing attach fittings.
bearing faces and bolt bores of the fittings, the complete bolt, washers, and nut with corrosion preventive
compound (5, Chart 1, 91-00-00). Install new soft aluminum washers between the upper wing attach fittings. Install
the bolts, washers, and nuts into the fittings. Raise or lower the trailing edge as required and torque the wing attach
nuts in the following order: upper forward, upper aft, lower forward, and lower aft. There should be no gap between
the fittings after the last nut is torqued. Torque each nut to the wet torque value shown in the appropriate illustration
(Figure 1, 2, 3, and 4). Coat the exposed threads that protrude through the nuts with corrosion preventive compound
(5, Chart 1, 91-00-00).
c.
Loosen the nuts
Coat the
NOTE
After torquing the upper forward wing attach nut,
to torquing the remaining three nuts.
d.
Remove the
e.
wing
and tail stands,
drain ports in the upper
remove
the
remove
airplane
the
from the
holding
jack,
force from the
and test
wing cradle prior
fly the airplane.
inspection after the wing has been adjusted, check for correct wing
wing attach fittings to assure that they are unobstructed.
bolt torque. Check the
WING BOLT, NUT, AND FITTING INSPECTION
NOTE
Read the entire section before
removing
any
wing bolts.
WARNING I
I wnANINa
The
wing
bolts installed in the Bonanza series
airplanes five years old or older must be reIf the bolts prove to be free of all damage, they may be reinstalled for
an additional five year period. At the end of this period the bolts must again be removed and
inspected. Ten years after the initial inspection, all wing bolts must be replaced with new
moved and
inspected.
hardware. The
mounting
nuts must be
replaced
at each
inspection interval. Render

warning. See Chart 1 for
viceable all components removed in compliance with this

spection and replacement cycle of the wing bolts.
a.
Before
bolt
binding
position.
unser-
the in-
any wing bolt, draw an outline of the wing position on the fuselage with a grease pencil. If wing
is encountered and the wing must be shifted, the outline will be helpful in returning the wing to its original
removing
CAUTION I
i cnuTlou
There should be
wing bolt binding during removal or installation of bolts. Do not screw or drive
fittings. If wing bolt binding is encountered, place the airplane on a three point
raise
until
and
the
wheels are clear (see Chapter 7-00-00 forjacking instructions). Place a wing
jack
stand under each wing and a tail stand under the aft fuselage. Defuel the wing, loosen the remaining
three bolts and rotate the wing until the binding bolt moves freely through the fittings. Replace the
soft aluminum washers between the upper wing attach fittings and torque the bolts as instructed
under WING INSTALLATION. If bolt binding is not encountered and the wing has not shifted, replacement of soft aluminum washers between the upper wing attach fittings is not required.
a
page
bolt in
or
no
out of the
1057-00-00
Ral~heon Aircraft
NOTE
Raytheon Aircraft Company supplies wing attach hardware that

netic particle inspection since manufacture. These components
on the head of the bolt and on some portion of the nut.
has been
given
additional magby the green dye
an
may be identified
WARNING
Iwnrt~lrsl
Use
only
the components
specified
in the
applicable
illustrations. DO NOT INSTALL THE
BLACK P/N H-20 NUTS, these nuts have been dry film lubricated with molybdenum disulfide.
When MlL-C-16173 Grade II corrosion preventive compound is added to these nuts, the additional lubrication may
cause
improper preload
in the bolt when it is
b. Starting at the lower wing attach point on each side, remove, inspect,
complete set of eight bolts and nuts have been inspected.
c.
Using
nonmetallic brush,
thoroughly clean the bolt,
torqued.
and torque
one
washers and nut with solvent
(26
bolt at
or
time until the
31, Chart 1, 91-00-00).
CAUTION I
I cnvnon
(Figure 1), the 50- 105011 (Figure 3), and the 95- 110025-7 (Figure 2
complete radius with no sharp edges that could damage the wing fittings.
Assure that the 95- 110025-1

and
d.
4)
washers have
If the bolts and nuts do not exceed the life limit shown in Chart
1,visually inspect
each bolt and nut with
10-
stronger magnifying glass; inspect for corrosion, cracks, and mechanical damage. The cadmium plating
power
may display areas that appear rubbed, discolored, or polished. These areas are usually the result of prevailing inor
stallation
procedures and
are
of
no
significance.
A bolt should not be
ration; however, any component that is cracked, corroded

e.
or
rejected
has mechanical
plating deterioreplaced.
because of cadmium
damage
must be
Using the magnetic particle inspection process described in this chapter, check each
nut for
longitudinal
indications and each bolt for circumferential crack indications. If the bolts and nuts prove to be free of all
(corrosion, cracks, and mechanical damage), they may be reused after demagnetization and cleaning.
crack
damage
Clean the spar fitting bolt bores with naphtha or methyl ethyl ketone (26 or 31, Chart 1, 91-00-00). Do not strip
the epoxy paint from this area. Inspect the surface condition of each fitting; focus special attention on the washer
seat and bolt bore area. If scoring, corrosion pitting or washer impressions are discovered in this area, contact the
f.
Department of Beech Aircraft Corporation. If the fitting is satisfactory, coat the bolt bore and
fitting with Alodine 1200, 1200S or 1201 (53, Chart 1, 91-00-00). Allow the coating to remain
on the surface for approximately five minutes. When the time has elapsed, wash the coated areas with water and
blow dry (do not wipe dry). Paint the treated areas with zinc chromate primer (20. Chart 1, 91-00-00) and allow to dry.
Commercial Service
bearing
g.
faces of the
Coat the
bearing
faces and bolt bores of the
preventive compound (5,
nz2
Chart 1,
fittings,
the
complete bolt, washers,
and nut with corrosion
91-00-00).
57-00-00
Raytheon Aircraft
h.
Install the bolt washers, and nut into the
fitting.
CAUTION I
I cnlmoa
wing bolt wrenches do not bottom out on the fittings when torquing
damage to the wing fittings and erroneous torque readings.
Ensure that the

could result in
the nut This
Torque the nut to the wet torque value shown in the appropriate illustration (Figure 1, 2, 3, and 4). When a torque
adapter is used, the length of the adapter must be added to the length of the torque wrench and the proper
value
computed as detailed in Chapter 20-00-00.
torque
i.
wrench
Coat the exposed threads

j.
(5, Chart 1, 91-00-00).
that
Check that the decal shown in
k.
sion
preventive compound
protrude through the
nut with corrosion
preventive compound
Figure 5 is affixed to the appropriate locations on the airplane. When

applied to the wing bolts, affix the decal to the following locations:
the
corro-
has been
above the RH forward and aft
1.
On the side of the
2.
On the
wing immediately forward
3.
On the
wing immediately
forward of the lower forward
4.
On the
wing immediately
aft of the lower aft
fuselage immediately
i.
Check the drain ports in the upper
m.
inspection
of the ~H forward and aft wing bolt
wing
attach
after the
wing
wing
bolt
fittings
to
wing
bolt
bolts have been
that
covers.
covers.
covers on
covers on
ensure
wing bolt
both sides.
both sides.
they
inspected
unobstructed and free to drain.
are
or
replaced,
check for proper bolt
torque.
CHART1
WING BOLT AND NUT INSPECTION AND REPLACEMENT CYCLE
NEW
5 years
AIRPLANE
initial
5 years
second
inspection
inspection
5 years
initial
(airplanes
NOTE: At each
At each
Page
second
inspection
5 years old
or
older)
inspection
5 years
5 years
firstreplacement
repeat inspectionand
interval
replacement cycle
5 years
5 years
first replacement
repeat inspection and
interval
replacement cycle
inspection interval, the nuts must be replaced.

replacement interval, all wing attach hardware (bolts, washers,
1257-00-00
and
nuts)
must be
replaced.
Raytheon Aircraft
CHART2
WING BOLT WRENCHES AND TORQUE ADAPTERS
POSITION
BOLT PART
WRENCH
NUMBER
PARTNUMBER
UPPER
NA1 52-37
TS1 222-3
FORWARD
or
NUT PART NUMBER
12NB-126
(PriortoCE-928,
CJ-156, D-10353,
MS20012-20
or
131790-1
LOWER
MS20012-31
FORWAR D
or
(CE-748,
CE-722 and after;

CJ-149 and after;
iS1171-2,
TS1176-2
TS1222-5,
50-590012,
TS1222-4,
E-1758 and
and after,
TS1176-10,
TS1222-8
CJ-156 and after, D-10353

and after, E-1758 and after,
TS1171-10
EB-126
TS1222-5,
50-59001 2,
TS1222-4,
EA-150)
(CE-928
EA-150 and
131790-2
NUT TORQUE
ADAPTER
12NB-126
after)
(Priorto CE-928,
CJ-1 56, D-l 0353,

E-1758 and
TS1171-2,
TS1 1 76-2
EA-150)
TS1222-8
EB-126
(CE-928
and after,
TS1176-10,
E-llll, E-1241 and

after; D-10097,
D-10120 and after;
CJ-156 and after, D-10353

and after, E-1758 and after,
TS1171-10
EA-1 thru EA-272
EA-242)
EA-150 thru EA-272 except
except EA-242)
MS20014-28
131790-3
EA273 and
UPPER AFT
or
TS1222-3
EB-144
or
(EA-242,
(EA-242,
ZEB1845-144
EA-273 and
50-590014
after)
after)
NAS 150-33/M/
50-590012,
12NB-108
50-590013,
TS1 222-5,
TS1171-1,
TS1 222-4,
TS1176-1
TS1222-8
LOWER AFT
NAS150-35/M1
50-590012,
12NB-108
50-590013,
TS1 222-5,
TS1171-1,
TS1 222-4,
TS1176-1
TS1 222-8
A22
57-00-00
Nov
10/ 0Page
13
Raynheon Aircraft
NOfICE
WING BOLTS ARE LUBRICATED
SEE MAINTENANCE MANUAL
FOR CORRECT TORQUE VALUES
WHEN THE CORROSION PREVENTIVE COMPOUND

AFFIX THE ABOVE DECAL TO THE FOLLOWING
I.
ON
THE
OF
SIDE
THE
FUSELAGE
HAS BEEN APPLIED

LOCATIONS:
IMMEDIATELY ABOVE
2.
ON
THE
WING
IMMEDIATELY
FORWARD
OF
THE
LH
3.
ON
THE
WING
IMMEDIATELY
FORWARD
OF
THE
LOWER
4.
ON
THE
WING
IMMEDIATELY
AFT
DF
THE
LOWER
THE
THE
RH FORWARD
FORWARD
AFT
TO
WING
AND
BOLTS.
AFI
WING
AFT
WING
BOLT
BOLT
COVERS
BOLT
COVERS
ON
BOLT
COVEF
COVERS.
WING
AND
FORWARD
WING
BOTH
ON
BOTH
SIDE
SIDES.
THI IB
992996)
Lubrication Bolt Identification Placard
Figure
MAGNETIC-PARTICLE INSPECTION
locating surface and subsurface discontinuities in ferromagnetic mate(i.e.
capable
being magnetized); consequently, nonferromagnetic materials (such as aluminum alloys, magnesium alloys, copper alloys, lead, titanium alloys, pickle base alloys and many stainless steel alloys)
cannot be inspected by this method. Magnetic-Particle Inspection is based upon the principle that any discontinuities
lying in a direction generally transverse to the direction of the magnetic field of the part magnetized for the test will
cause a leakage field to be formed at and above the surface of the part. The presence of the leakage field denoting
the discontinuity is detected by the use of finely divided ferromagnetic particles over the surface of the part. Some
of the particles are magnetically gathered and held by the leakage field to form an outline indicating the location,
size, shape and extent of the discontinuity. In general, magnetic particle inspection utilizes a variety of types of
equipment for magnetization as well as several methods for application of ferromagnetic particles to the test part.
Additionally, the ferromagnetic particles are available in a selection of colors (including fluorescent) and particle
shapes. Magnetic particle inspections required by this manual can best be accomplished utilizing the "wet continuous method" on the standard wet horizontal type equipment with either visible or fluorescent magnetic particles
suspended in a petroleum base vehicle (normally kerosene). Since magnetic particle indications are best obtained
when the discontinuity lies in a direction transverse to the magnetic field, the following procedures are recommended
for optimum detection of discontinuities in both bolts and nuts.
Magnetic-Particle Inspection
materials
rials
is
method for
of
WARNING
Improper operation of the particle inspection, because of faulty equipment or untrained operators, can jeopardize the ainnrorthiness of parts being tested. Minute electrical are burns
caused during inspection by improper operation of the test equipment can result in eventual
failure of the part.
Page
voN41
10100
57-00-00
A22
Ray~heon Aircraft
accomplished by longitudinal magnetization in a multiturn low-fill factor coil (i.e. the inner
diameter). For proper magnetization the bolt is positioned close to the
coil inside wall with the bolt length perpendicular to the winding direction. The magnetic particle suspension is flowed
on the bolt and the appropriate current is applied to achieve adequate field strength. Using the described procedure,
laboratory testing has indicated that the ampere turn values listed in Chart 3 provide for optimum detection of discontinuities perpendicular to the bolt axis.
Bolts:
Inspection
of
diameter of the coil
bolt is
greatly
exceeds the bolt
Inspection of a nut is accomplished by circular magnetization on a central conductor (usually a copper rod)
approximate size of the nut inside diameter. For proper magnetization, the central conductor bar is inserted
through the nut and the bar is positioned between the heads of the wet horizontal equipment. The magnetic particle
suspension is flowed on the nut and the appropriate current is applied through the central conductor to achieve adequate field strength. Using the described procedure, laboratory testing has indicated that the amperage values
listed in Chart 4 provide for optimum detection of discontinuities parallel to the nut axis.
Nuts:
the
magnetic particle inspection, the parts must be carefully demagnetized and cleaned of the ferromagnetic particles. Examine parts for any possible evidence of electric are burn that may have occurred during the inspection.
After
CHART 3
(STEEL BOLTS)
TOTAL BOLT LENGTH INCLUDING
AMPERE
HEAD TO NEAREST 1/4 INCH
TURNS"
5/8 INCH
21/2 INCH
7900
5/8 INCH
23/4 INCH
7100
5/8 INCH
INCH
6600
3/4 INCH
INCH
7900
3/4 INCH
31/41NCH
7400
3/4 INCH
31/2 INCH
6700
3/4 INCH
33/4 INCH
6300
7/8 INCH
31/2 INCH
7900
7/8 INCH
33/4 INCH
7400
718 INCH
INCH
6900
7/8 INCH
INCH
5500
1 INCH
INCH
6300
BOLT DIAMETER
Amperage requirement is the ampere turns value divided by the number of turns
example: A i-inch diameter x &inch long bolt tested on a 5-turn coil
6300
5, or 1260 amps.
require
the coil. For
A22
on
would
57-00-00
Nov
10/00Pagel5
Raytheon Aircraft
CHART4
(STEEL NUTS)
NUT SIZE
AMPERAGE
CENTRAL
CONDUCTOR SIZE
5/8 INCH
112 INCH
500 AMPS
314 INCH
5/8 INCH
600 AMPS
7/8 INCH
314 INCH
700 AMPS
1 INCH
7/8 INCH
800 AMPS
OUTBOARD WING R/IAIN SPAR CAP INSPECTION

The outboard
wing main
spar cap must be
inspected annually
for corrosion.
WARNIIJG
JWARNIIGL
of the spar cap from the wing attach
All
areas
be
inspected.
fitting to the outboard end of the spar cap
must
NOTE
Special emphasis should be placed on airplanes that have been operated or stored for extended
periods (5 years or longer) where geographical locations or atmospheric conditions are highly conducive to corrosion.
Inspection
of the upper and lower spar cap should be
accomplished in the following
manner:
Examine the forward and aft sides of the spar cap where it meets the skin. If a whitish, salt-like, nonmetallic
substance is noted in these areas, a thorough inspection should be performed to determine if corrosion has occurred. Wax or paint trapped between the edge of the skin and the exposed section of the spar cap should not be
a.
misinterpreted
as
corrosion.
b.
Wash all
c.
Visually inspect
exposed
all
areas
of the upper and lower spar cap.
exposed
areas
an
of the upper and lower spar caps for irregularities, such as paint blisters,
exposed areas of the spar cap are extruded flat and irregularities could be
or uneven areas, and cracks. The

indication of corrosion. Investigate all
raised
irregularities
to determine if any
damage
has occurred.
NOTE
Uneven
or
by moving
raised
a
If unusual conditions
straight edge
are
the spar caps may be detected by sliding the fingers over the surface,
over the surface or by sighting down the length of the par cap surface.
areas on
encountered that cannot be resolved
locally, contact Raytheon

required.
for evaluation and determination of corrective action that may be
Nov
57-00-00
Aircraft Technical
Support
BEECHCRAFT
BONANZA SERIES
MAINTENANCE I~ANUAL
LEFT WING
ua~t3-
WINGS
TOP VIEW
RIGHT WING
WING TIP (EA-242, EA-273 AND AFTER.)
10
~I
11
PLATE SKIN
WINGS
~IY
WING TIP (EA-242. EA-273 AND AFTER.)

LEFT WING
1.
Upper fuel cell and transmiiter
2.
Upper forward wing attach bolt
3.
Upper
4.
Optional
5.
Lower fuel cell
wing
BOTTOM VIEW
atom WING
WING ACCESS OPENINGS
aft
-----1-
access
attach bolt
remote compass
(Except CJ-149 and after)
6.
Flap
7.
Lower forward
8,
Lower aft
9.
Aileron bell crank
11
381514
actuator access
wing
wing
attach bolt
attach bolt
access
10,
Fuel drain
11.
Fuel vent float valve, flame arrestor, vent and

vacuum
refill valve
access
Wing Access Openings

Figure 1
51-3000
Page
A4
Jan 20/82
BEECHORAFT
BONANZA SERIES
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
5 ~9
"9--r~ 5
-I-
LH UPPER
RH UPPER
RH LOWER
*FILLET USED ONLY ON SERIALS D10097.
f j
LH LOWER
0-10120 AND AFTER
13
NUMBER
MATERIAL
THICKNESS
IN INCHES
2024-T
.016
2024-T3
.016
2024-T3
.020
2024T3
.025
2024-T3
.032
6061-T6
.016
6061-T6
.020
10
11.12
6061-T6
6061-0
i ~511
WING TIP EA-242, EA-273 AND AFTER
NUMBER
THICKNESS
IN INCHES
6061-0
.032
11
UPPER
12 LOWER
2024-T3
2024-T3
.025
13
2024-T3
.020
10 t
.032
MATERIAL
020
.032
t HEAT TREAT TO T6 CONDITION
3C12-10
*Fil/ets used only on~serialsD-10097,
0-10120 and after.
Wing Skin Thickness

Figure 2
"END"
57-30-00
Rage
Jan 20/82
A4
BEECHCRAFf
BONANZA SERIES
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
ATTACH FITTINGS
major fittings in each wing are the supporting structures

adjacent to the attachment points for the flap actuator, flap
tracks and flap, aileron hinge brackets and hinges, main
The
landing gear support brace and landing gear doors. Minor

fittings include brackets to support cable pulleys, bell cranks,
and similar components. If the landing gear hinge bolt fittings
are cracked or ii the spar is warped or buckled, replacement
is necessary.
"END"
57-40-00
Page 1
May 9/80
BEECHCRAFT
BONANZA SERIES
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
CONTROL
BALANCING
SURFACES
BALANCING PROCEDURE
COUNTERBALANCING METHOD
BALANCING THE AILERON
(Figure I)
tocate the chord line
by placing a straight edge at

assembly so that one end is on
other end is centered on the leading
a.
the inboard end of the aileron

When the aileron control surface is
it
the
by
trailing edge
leading edge. After
so
being repainted, suspend

paint will drain toward
repainting or repair, the finished
that excess
the
any
surface must be check balanced to
ensure
that its static
hinge line is within the prescribed limits,

The painted and primed aileron assembly must be noseheavy by 0.2 to 1.5 inch-pounds. The static moment of the
aileron is determined by multiplying the unbalanced weight of
the aileron assembly times the perpendicular distance from
the hinge center line to the center of gravity when the chord
line is horizontally level. The weight is measured in pounds
moment about the
and the distance in inches. The static moment of
percent balanced control surface is
0.0
100
inch-pounds.
A
tail-heavy surface exhibits static underbalance.

heavy surface exhibits static overbalance,
nose-
the
trailing edge and the

edge. Mark the chord line with a suitable marker, such as a
grease pencil, then remove the straight edge.
Fit the correct size bolts in the hinge brackets and
b.
mount the aileron on the knife edge supports. Ascertain that
the aileron is free to rotate about the hinge line.
To determine if weight should be added or
c.
removed, suspend a paper cup from a point near the center
of the aileron trailing edge. Use a short length of small
diameter string secured to the surface with a small piece of
masking tape: as illustrated in Figure 1.The cup must be free
to hang vertically.
d.
Add small quantities of lead shot to the cup until
the aileron balances with the chord line level. Check this by
holding
spirit
the
e.
level
hinge line. Measure

point of the cup.
CHECKING BAL9NCE
f.
The aileron balance must be checked in
draft free
area
with
completely assembled in flying condition. All

painting, including stripes and touch-up, must be completed.
The tab, static wicks, and hinge bolts must be attached. The
chord line must be horizontally level and the hinge line must
be properly supported when the static moment is measured.
Although many different methods of check balancing exist,
they can be categorized under the following two headings:
aligned
with the marked chord line.
The distance "D" must be

"D" from the
perpendicular to the
hinge line to the suspension
string,
then
weigh
them.
the aileron
a.
force
or
Counterbalancing
weight at a measured
b.
must be done
the aileron surface
single support
line of the hinge.
known distance from the center
g.
on a
at
Caculate the static balance

1.
designated by
2.
designated by
3.
EQUIPMENT REQUIRED TO PERFORM CHECK

BALANCING
a.
Figure
plane.
A stand with knife

1. The knife
edges
edge supports
must be in the
illustrated in
as
same
horizontal
The
as
follows:
of the cup and contents is
weight
"W".
The
over
or
underbalance
moment
is
"M".
M=WxD
following is a typical example of a

balancing calculation: Assume the aileron is overbalance
(nose-heavy) and the paper cup was suspended from the
trailing edge. Assume that the aileron balances with the
chord line level at "W
.150 pound" and "D
10.0 inches",
4.
The
then...
b.
A paper cup
c.
Approximately
d.
certified
or
light weight
similar
pound
beam
calibrated in units of .01

a.
carefully on scales that are certifed
for accuracy.
Measurement of the
applied by
Since any weighing error is magnified by the

distance "D", weighing is most important and
The
distance from the
counter the unbalance moment
force
application of a known
hinge line to
of the aileron assembly.
NOTE
of lead shot.
balance
pound
straight edge, ruler,
container.
or
weighing
less.
and
spirit
level.
M
device
.150
10.0
inch-pounds. The product of "W x D". In

this instance, "M" is within the required static
balance range and is therefore acceptable.
M
1.50
57-50-00
Pager
May 9/80
BEECHCRAFT
BONANZA SERIES
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
c";
~c-
KNIFE EDGE
STEEL TUBE WITH PIG LEAD

D
-I
MASKING TAPE
(PLACE NEAR AILERON HINGE LINE)
~10 MUST BE HORIZONTALLY LEVEL
VIEW
A-A
CONTAINER
DETAIL
.B
38151-1A
Balancing the Aileron

Figure 1
57-50-00
Page2
May 9/80
BEECHCRAFT
BONANZA SERIES
MAINtENANCE,MANUAL
h.
the
hinge
gravity of the aileron is forward on

causing the surface to be nose-heavy.
balance is obtained by adding or removing
leading edge of the aiieron. The rod is 15/32
The center of
would be installed at the center brackets.
center line
Proper aileron
lead rod at the
CAUTION
inch diameter and is installed in brackets attached to the
When
leading edge of the aiieron. When adding additional lead rod

the maximum total of the length of the rod to be added is not
to exceed 5 inches over the entire length of the aiieron and
balance, it must be installed securely with rivets.

A
lead rod is added to obtain correct
loosely installed rod will vibrate and
an
may cause
undersirable vibration of the surface.
"END"
57-50-00
Page 3
May 9/80
CHAPTER
PROPELLERS/
PROPU LSORS
BEECHCRAFT
BONANZA SERIES
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
CHAPTER 61
LIST OF PAGE EFF=ECTIWN
CHAPTER
SECTION
DATE
PAGE
SUBJECT
Oct 7/83
61-EFFECTIVIT//CONTENTS
61-10-00
61-20-00
CHAPTER 61
Jan 20/82
................Oct 7/83
May 9/80
PROPELLERS
TABLE OF CONTENTS
CHAPTER
SECTION
SUBJECT
SUBJECT
PAGE
.61-10-00
PROPELLER
Description and Operation.....~

Propellers
........f
........1
........1
........f
Propeller Removal
Propeller Installation
Propeller Adjustment.
Minor Propeller Repair
........1
........1
........2
.61-20-00
CONTRO\-UNG
....,...1
........1
Propeller Governor Removal

Propeller Governor Installation
Propeller Governor Adjustment
High RPM Adjustment
........1
........1
........1
"END"
61 -EFFECTIVTTY/CO NTENTS
Pagl
Oct 7/83
BEECHCRAR
BONANZA SERIES
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
PROPELLER
NOTE
PROPELLERS
When
to
The Bonanza airplanes are

blade Hartzell or McCauley
following
equipped
propeller
with
as
two or three
propeller deice is installed, it is necessary

tape the brushes in place before the propeller
is removed.
indicated in the
chart.
Place a drain trough under the attaching point of
b.
propeller to the crankshaft, to prevent oil draining into
the engine cowl.
Remove the propeller from the engine crankshaft
c.
flange.
d.
Vse clean shop rags to plug the center of the
engine crankshaft and the propeller hub.
the
McCauley
Hartzell
CE-748, CE-772 through

CE-912, CE-917, CE-919,
CE-913
CE-978 and after.
CE-9T7.
through CE-916,
CE-918, CE-920 through
D-10097, D-10120
D110350
through D-10349,
0-10382.
through
PROPELLER INSTALLA 7/ON
0-10383 and after.
E-iil, E-1241 through

E-1715, E-1932 and
E-1716, through
NOTE
E-1931.
Before installation of the
after.
"O"
EA-1
EA-105
through
EA-107, EA-108, EA-110,

EA-118, EA-242, EA-273
and after,
EA-106, EA-109, EA-11I
the
through EA-117, EA-119

through EA-241, EA-243
through EA-272.
oo-oo).
a.
T/C mark
single-acting propellers in which the

centrifugal twisting moment of the rotating blades is
opposed by hydraulic pressure in the cylinder land spring
force in the McCauley propellers) to obtain the correct pitch
for the engine load. Govemor (engine driven) controls the
amount and pressure of oil passing through the propeller
shaft to the power piston in the propeller hub. An increase in
engine power output causes oil to enter the piston, thus
increasing propeller pitch. A decrease in engine power
output results in oil leaving the piston, thus decreasing pitch.
These
units
ring that
propeller
propeller, lubricate the
is installed in the circular groove of

hub with engine oil (2, Chart i, 91-
Place the No. 1 propeller blade

on the crankshaft flange.
directly
over
the
are
NOTE
Due to the close tolerance fit of the prop hub
pilot on the crankshaft, the hub must
bore to the
be
placed square on the engine shaft

evenly to the crankshaft flange.
and
seated
b.
Snug the six propeller attach nuts down evenly in
diagonal pattern. Torque the attach bolts in a diagonal
5 foot-pounds for McCauley propellers, and
pattem to 60
70 to 80 fed-pounds on Hartzell propellers;safety wire
a
-e
PROPELLER
PROPELLER REMOVAL
.tlobeht
It may be necessary to check the alignment of the

c.
deicer brushes to the slip ring as noted in Chapter 30-60-00.
d.
Check the prop blade track after installation.
WARNING
possible injury, ansure thatthe ignition

position before working on
propeller.
To avoid

the
a.
studs
flange.
propeller attach nuts from the

propeller to the engine cranks~haft
Remove the six
attaching
the
PROPELLER AD~USTiWENT
For adjustments, service, overhaul and maintenance
procedures, refer to the applicable FAA Approved Propeller
Manual and or Approved Propeller Overhaul Shop Manual.
All pitch measurements are made at the 30 inch station and
are as
follows:
61-1000
Page
A4
3an
20/82
BEECHCRAFT
BONANZA SERIES
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
ri::~
SECTION A-A
Minor
McCauley
High
Low Pitch
STD249-3
Propeller Blade Repair

Figure 1
shown in
Pitch
Figure 1. Reanodize
only.
reworked
area
by the chromic
acid process
F33C, V35B
2 Blade
The diameter
2A36C23 Hub
29.7"r.5
13.30+.20
848-0 Blades
propellers
specifications
are as
following
chart:
McCauley
F33A, V35B, A36
3 Blade
for the two and three blade
indicated in the
3A32C406 X Hub
29.0"t.50
13.3"-.2"
X 82NDB-2 Blades
f33C,
3 Blade
29.00~.50
13.30-c.20
82NB-2 Blades
A36TC
3A32C76-U Hub
34.50-.10"
15.0~.2
82NB-2 Blades
Min
80
78/2
80
78/2
3A32C76U/82NB-2
80
781/2
3A32C406 X/ 82NDB-4
78
77
D3A32C409 X 182NnB-2
80
79
Max
Min
84
82
Max
Min
80
78
B36TC
3A32C406 X Hub
34.9-.5
15.8r.2
X 82NDB-4 Blades
2 Blade
A36
3A32C409-X Hub
82NDB-2 Blades
Max
3A32C406 X /82NDB-2
3A32C76/82NB-2
V35B
3A32C76 Hub
13.70
.20
28.8
.5
2A36C23/848-0
HARTZELL
F33A, V35B, A36
Harttell
PHC9YF1RF Hub
F8468A-6R Blades
12.00
.20
.1"
3 Blade
A36TC
PHC-3YF-1RF Hub
F8468A-6R Blades
33.00
13.00,.29
36.0"-1.0~
PHC-3YF-1 RF/F8468A-6R
MINOR PROPELLER REPAIR
If shortening of the propeller is necessary for repair, care

should be taken that the blades are not shortened to a
(Figure I)
Minor nicks, dents, and gouges may be dressed out by
qualified personnel only. Blend any nicks or gouges into the
leading edge
with smooth
curves
and generous radii
as
length less than the

shortening a propeller
must be shortened
identical
specified. When
repair the tip(s) all of the blades
equal amount and the tips have
minimum amount
to
an
shapes.
"END"
61-10-00
Page2
Oct7/83
A6
BEECHCRAFT
BONANZA SERIES
MAINIENANCE MANUAL
CONTROLLING
facing
into the
PROPELLER GOVERNOR REMOVAL
the
pad
d.
the
engine cowling.
Open
b.
Disconnect the control rod end at the governor
body of
Remove the
c.
engine pad
and
wipe
engine pad
and
clean.
Reinstall the govemor
secure
with the four
to 220
inch-pounds.
control lever.
the governor.
from the
cover
mounting
on
nuts.
the
Torque the
nuts to 180
a.
Reconnect the control rod to the governor lever.
i.
Close the
engine cowling.
NOTE
PROPELLER GOVERNOR ADJUSTMEM

Care should be taken not to loosen the
on
jam
nut
the control rod end which could alter the
Remove the four mounting nuts and

the engine.
from
governor
d.
Cover the governor base and engine
c.
propeller governor can be adjusted for a high rpm

setting. The high rpm adjustment must be checked while the
airplane is in flight. For instructions on adjustment of the low
rpm setting, refer to IDLE SPEED AND MIXTURE
ADJUSTMENT, Chapter 71-00-00.
The
setting of the control rod,
the
pull
pad
HIGH RPM ADJUSTMENT
to
protect them.
high rpm adjustment must be checked while the

airplane is in flight. Observe the take-off rpm to see ii it
exceeds the redline figure. If excessive rpm is observed,
adjust the high rpm screw inward to reduce the rpm. The
propeller govemor adjustment screw is located on the
governor, facing outward from the engine. One complete
revolution of the screw reduces the propeller rpm by
approximately 25-30 revolutions.
The
PROPELLER GOVERNOR INSTALLATION

a
wipe
Remove the
cover
from
the governor base
and
the base clean,
b.
governor,
Install
ensunng
new
gasket on the
protruding gasket screen is
governor mounting
that the
"END"
61-20-00
Page 1
May 9/80
C H A PT E R
POVVERP LANT
BEECHCRAFT
BONANZA SERIES
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
CHAPTER 71
POWER PLANT
TABLE OF CONTENTS
SUBJECT
CHAPTER
PAGE
71-00-00
General
.1
IO-520-8A, 10-520-88 Engine (CE-748, CE-772 and after; 0-10097, 010120 and after;
E-llll, E-1241 Thru E-2110 except E-2104 and E-1946)
IO-550-B Engine (E-1946, E-2104,
EA-1 and after
Engine Air Induction System
E-2111,
and
after)
Troubleshooting the Engine
.4
Engine Removal (CE-748, CE-772 and after; 03-149 and after; 0-10097, 0-10129 and
after; E-llll, E-1241 and after)
Engine Installation (CE-748, CE-772 and after; CJ-149 and after; 0-10097. 0-10129
and after; E-llll, E-1241 and after)
Engine Removal (EA-1 and after)
Engine Installation (EA-I and after)
Engine Build-Up
Air Pressure Pump Removal
6
Installation
Engine Driven Fuel Pump Removal
Engine Driven Fuel Pump Installation
Ground Running and Warm-up
.6
Idle Speed and Mixture Adjustment (CE-748, CE-772 and after;CJ-149 and after;
7
0-10097, 0-10120 and after; E-llll, E-1241 thru E-2110 except E-1946 and E-2104)
Full Throttle Adjustment (CE-748, CE-772 and after; CJ-149 and after; 0-10097,
010120 and after; E-1111,E-124lthru E-2110 except E-1946 and E-2104)$C20.
7
Idle Speed and Mixture Adjustment (E-1946, E-2104, E-2111 and after)
Full Throttle Adjustment (E-1946, E-2104, E-2111 and afteri
8
Fuel Flow System Calibration and Correction (E-1946, E-2104, E-2111 and after)3K5 II
Fuel System Adjustment (EA-1 and after)
12
Manifold Pressure Adjustment
14
Oil Pressure Adjustment
18
Air Pressure
Pump
71-10-00
Cowling
Cowling Removal
Cowling Installat7on
Cowling Latch Rigging
Cowling Flap Rigging
1END"
A14
71-CONTENTS
Page 1
Jun 20/91
BEECHCRAFT
BONANZA SERIES
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
CHAPTER 71
CHAPTER
SECTION
SUBJECT
DATE
PAGE
71-EFFECTIVITY
Jun 20/91
71-CONTENTS
Jun 20/91
71-00-00
71-10-00
1
2
3
4
5
6
6A
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
16A
168
160
17
18
1
Oct 7/83
Oct 7/83
May 9/80
May 9/80
May 9/80
Aug 28/87
Aug 28/87
Sep 27/84
Sep 27/84
Sep 27/84
Sep 27/84
Sep 27/84
Sep 27/84
20/91
20/91
20/91
20/91
20/91
20/91
20/91
Sep 27/84
Sep 27/84
Jun
Jun
Jun
Jun
Jun
Jun
Jun
May 9/80
"END"
71-EFFECTIVITY
Page 1
A14
Jun
20/91
n710005b426j98
BEECHORAFI
BONANZA SEAIES
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
GENERAL
The
turbocharger is located beneath and to the left rear of

engine and is driven by exhaust gases. The
turbocharger is lubricated by engine oil and is dependent
the
/0-520-BA, /0-520-88 ENGINE (CE-748, CE-772

and aHer; 0-10097, 0-10120 and after; E-llll, E1241 through E-2110 except E-2104 and E-1946)
upon the engine oil pump for its lubrication. For this reason
the engine should be allowed to run at idle for a short penod
of time
The above Bonanza senal
equipped with 1O520-8A Continental engines until the following serials, at

which time they are equipped with 10-520-88 engines: CEairplanes
are
816 and after: CJ-149 and after; 0-10179 and after; and E1371 and after. The 10-520-88 engine differs from the
previous engines in that it has an improved crankshaft and
other changes related to the improved crankshaft. The
engine is a fuel injected, direct-drive, air-cooled, honzontally
opposed, 8-cylinder, 520 cubic-inch displacement, 285horsepower engine. The engine crankshaft rotates in the
clockwise direction. Recommended fuel for the engine is
Aviation Gasoline 100LL (blue), or 1001130 (green)
minimum grade. The oil capacity for the engine is 12.0
quarts of oil conforming to Continental Motors Bulletin MHS248. For overhaul of the engine, refer to Continental 10-520
Series Aircraft Engines Overhaul Manual, FORM X-30039A.
to 5
minutes) before it is shut down. This idle time

turbocharger to slow down and cool before its
oil supply is shut off. The turbocharger can obtain maximum
continuous speeds of 96.000 rpm tin an overspeed
condition it must not exceed 115,000 rpm) and run for 1 to 2
minutes after the engine has been shut down. This 1 to 2
minutes of turbocharger operation occurs without oil
pressure because the engine oil pump is not running.
Therefore it is important that the turbocharger be allowed to
slow down before the engine is shut down.
(4
will allow the
The
engine
is
designed
to
operate with
maximum manifold
pressure of 36 in. Hg., and is protected from overboost by

an automatic pressure relief valve. This valve is located
downstream from the
turbocharger
if the system reaches
an
For
and will relieve pressure

overboost condition of 39.5 in. Hg.
specific information regarding

Chapter 81-00-00.
the
turbocharger system,
refer to
lo-sso-s ENGINE (E-1946, E-2104, E-~lll and
after)
At
the above noted
airplane senals. the A36 Bonanza

equipped with 10-550-8 Continental engines.
These are fuel injected, direct-drive, air-cooled, horizontally
opposed, 6 cylinder, 550 cubic-inch displacement 300
horsepower engines.
airplanes
were
ENi;INE AIR INDUCTION SYSTEM

Engine
induction air is available from two sources, pnmary

primary air source is supplied through
intake duct, located on the forward cowling below the
and altemate air. The

The
engine
crankshaft rotates in the clockwise direction.
Recommended fuel for the
engine is Aviation Gasoline

100LL (blue), or 1001130 (green) minimum grade. The oil
capacity for the engine is 12.0 quarts of oil conforming to
an
propeller. The pnmary
air passes
then into the induction system.
through
an
air filter and
Continental Motors Bulletin MHS-248. For overhaul of the
engine,
refer to Continental 10-550 Senes Aircraft
Engines
NOTE
Overhaul Manual, FORM X-30563.
If, after cleaning, the surfaces of the air filter

show metallic wires
through the remaining

flocking matenal, the filter is no longer effective
and should be replaced.
EA-I and after

The
Turbocharged
with
turbocharged Continental engines. Airplane serial
Bonanza A36TC
airplanes
are
equipped
EA-1
equipped with TSIO-520-U and 8A-2 and after are

equipped with TSIO-520-UB engines. Thbse engines are
rated at 300 horsepower at 2700 rpm. The turbocharger
provides a means by which the engine can maintain takeoff
power from sea level through a critical altitude of 20,500
feet with a maximum operating altitude of 25,000 feet.
is
If the
primary
source
of
ram
system low pressure opens

and
air is obstructed, the induction

an
"Altemate Air Source" door
permits the required volume of

engine performance. The alternate air
aft of the air filter and
on
air flow for normal

door is located
just
primary
induction.
71-00-00
Pagel
A6
Oct7/83
BEECHCRAFT
BONANZA SERIES
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
TROUBLESHOOT1NG THE ENGINE
i.
Engine
REMARKS
PROBABLE CAUSE
INDICA TION
will not start.
a.
b.
No
No fuel gage pressure
fuel to
a.
Check fuel control for proper position,
auxiliary pump ON and operating, feed

valves open. Fuel filteropen, and tank fuel
level.
engine.
Have gage pressure

flooded.
engine
b.
off
Turn
and
auxiliary pump
ignition
set throttle to FULL OPEN and
switch,
fuel control to IDLE CUT-OFF, and crank
engine to clear cylinders of

Repeat starting procedures.
c.
Have gage
to
No fuel
piessure
c.
engine.
Check for bent

one
or
fuel.
excess
loose fuel lines. Loosen
line at fuel noule. If
fuel shows
no
replace fuel manifold valve.

2.
Engine
starts but
fails to
keep
a.
Inadequate fuel
to
fuel
a.
manifold valve.
running.
Set fuel control in FULL RICH position,

tum auxiliary pump ON check to be sure
feed lines and filters
Clean
b.
Defective
b.
ignition system,
or
Check
accessible
defective
3.
Engine
runs
rough
at idle,
a.
Improper
idle
mixture
a.
adjustment.
Readjust
nut
to
idle
4.
Engine
has poor acceleration.
b.
Fouled spark
a.
idle mixture too lean.
b.
Incorrect
worn
plugs.
fuel-air mixture,
control
linkage,
loose connections.
spark plugs.
setting. Tighten adjustment
richen
adjustment
mixture and
off
back
nut to lean mixture.
b.
Remove and clean plugs,

Replace defective plugs.
a.
Readjust idle
b.
Tighten
mixture
as
adjust
gaps.
described in 3a.
loose connections,
elements of
or
and
ignition cables
Tighten
connections.
Replace
not restncted.
are
replace defective components.
replace worn
linkage. Service air cleaner.
restricted air cleaner.
c.
Defective
ignition system.
c.
Check
accessible
connections.
5.
Engine
runs
rough
at
speeds
a.
Improper fuel-air
mixture,
a.
and
Check manifold connections for leaks.
Tighten
above idle.
cables
Replace defective plugs.
control
loose connections.
and
linkage
adjustment. Check
for
Check fuel
setting and
fuel filters and
screens
for dirt. Check for proper pump pressure,

and replace pump if defective.
b.
Restricted fuel noule.
c.
Ignition system
plugs defective.
and
spark
b.
Remove and clean all nonies.
c.
Clean and
ignition
regap spark plugs. Check

for defects. Replace
cables
defective components.
6.
lacks power, reduction

maximum manifold
Engine
in
pressure
or
critical altitude.
a.
Incorrectly adjusted throttle

control, "sticky" linkage
dirty
air cleaner,
or
a.
Check movement of linkage by moving

control from idle to full throttle. Make
proper
adjustments
and
replace
worn
components. Service air cleaner.

71-0090
Page2
Oct7/83
A6
BEECHCRAFT
BONANtA SERIES
MAIMENANCE MANUAL
TROUBLESHOOT1NG THE ENGINE

IND/CA 7/ON
6.
maximum
pressure
or
RENARKS
PROgABLE CAUSE
Engine lacks power, reduction

in
(Continued)
b.
Defective
b.
ignition system.
manifold
cntical altitude,
(Continued)
Inspect spark plugs for fouled electrodes,

heavy carbon deposits, erosion of electrodes, improperly adjusted electrode
gaps, and cracked porcelains. Test plugs
for regular finng under pressure. Replace
damaged or misfinng plugs. Spark plug
gap to be 0.015 to 0.019 inch.
c.
Loose
or
intake
damaged
c.
manifolding.
Inspect entire manifold system for possible
leakage at connections. Replace damaged

components, tighten all connections and
clamps.
7.
Low fuel pressure,
d.
Fuel nonles defective.
d.
Check for restncted nonles and lines and

dean or replace as necessary.
a.
Restncted flow to fuel meter-
Check mixture control for full travel. Check
ing
for restrictions in fuel filters and lines, ad-
valve.
just control and clean filters. Replace damaged parts.

b.
Fuel control lever.
b.
Check operation of throttle control and for
possible contact with cooling shroud. Adjust as required to obtain conect operation.
c.
d.
incorrect fuel
Check and
injector pump
adjustment and operation.
c.
Defective fuel
pump
d.
Replace pump.
fuel
Check for restricted fuel nonles
injector
ment.
adjust using appropnate equip

Replace defective pumps.
relief valve.
8.
High fuel
pressure.
ResMcted flow
control
beyond
assembly.
manifold valve. Clean
or
Replace defective fuel manifold
9.
Fluctuating
fuel pressure,
b.
Defective relief valve operation in fuel injector.
b.
Replace fuel injector pump.
c.
Restncted tearculation passage in fuel injector pump.
c.
Replace pump.
a.
Vapor
in fuel system,
excess
fuel temperature.
or
fuel
replace nonles.
valve.
Normally operating
clear system.
the auxiliary pump will

Operate auxiliary pump pnd
purge system.
b.
Fuel gage line leak

gage line.
air in
b.
Drain gage line and
c.
Restnction in vapor separator
c.
Check for restnction in
vent.
or
separator
cover.
tighten connections.
Clean
ejector jet of vapor

jet with solvent
(only). Do Not Use Wire

place defective parts.
As Probe. Re-
71-00-00
Page 3
May 9/80
BEECHCRAFT
BONANZA SERIES
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
(Continued)
TROUBLESHOOTlNG THE ENGINE

PROBABLE CAUSE
INDICA TIOIV
10.
Low oil pressure on engine

gage or high oil temperature.
Insufficient oil in oil sump, oil

dilution or using improper
grade
ent
b.
REMARKS
oil for
change oil
Add oil,
b.
Check for defective
or
temperature.
Defective vematherm valve.
c.
Oil cooler restriction,
d.
Leaking, damaged,
or
loose
screen or
Clean oil cooler.
d.
Check for restn~cted lines and loose

nections and for
partially plugged
Clean parts, tighten connections
filter.
place
engine idle cut-off.
vernathern valve. Re-
if defective.
c.
oil line connection. Restncted
Poor
viscosity.
prevailing ambi-
place valve
11.
to proper
con-
oil filter.
and
re-
defective parts.
oil pressure if necessary.
Low oil pressure,
e.
Readjust
f.
Relief valve stuck open.
f.
Remove, clean, and reinstall.
a.
Engine getting
a.
Check fuel control for being in full IDLE

CUT-OFF position. Check auxiliary pump
for being OFF. Check for leaking fuel man-
fuel.
valve.
ifold
Replace
defective compo-
nents.
GENERAL
Remove the
b.
engine cowling. (Refer to Chapter 71-
10-00.)
ENGINE REMOI/AL
(CE-748, CE-772 and after; CJ-149 and after; D10097 0-10120 and after; E-llll, E-1241 and after)
c.
Drain the
d.
Remove the
removing and
installing the engine that no dirt or foreign
objects, be allowed to enter the induction
system. Be careful not to damage duct work
when removing and installing the engine.
a.
Check that the
ignition
Chapter
61-10-
Disconnect and
identify the ducts, engine controls,

Cap all open lines and fittings.
f.
Place a support under the tail of the airplane.
Place the engine hoist in position and attach to the
g.
lifting eyes on the engine.
h.
Hoist the engine suffidently to remove the tension
plumbing and wiring
Care should be taken when
to
oo.)
e.
CAUTION
engine oil sump.

propeller. (Refer
harness.
from the shock mount bolts.
i.
Remove the shock mount bolts.
NOTE
position.
It is recommended that the shock mounts be
WARNING
replaced
at each
engine change. Replace the
complete set All the shock mounts

particular engine should be of the same
mounts as a
To be safe, treat all magnetos as hot To ground

the magneto, disconnect the ignition switch lead
wire at the
pole.
plug
on
leads.
manufacturer.
and ground the capacitor

impractical, remove the ignition
capacitor
If this is
harness
on
the
magneto
or
disconnect the spark
Position the engine slightly nose down and hoist

j.
slowly, making certain that the engine crankshaft flange
clears the
71-00100
Page
May
9/80
nose
cowl.
BEECHCRAFT
BONANZA SERIES
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
CAUTION
engine
As the
check to make
is hoisted away from the cowl,

sure that all wires, hoses and
lines have been disconnected,
Remove the propeller. (See PROPELLER

a
REMOVAL procedure in Chapter 61-10-00).
Remove the cowling as described in COWLING
b.
REMOVAL in this chapter.

Remove the upper
c.
removing
NOTES
Remove the air induction
e.
box and the
Position the
to the
sling
attach
hoisting
in front of the
airplane.
Position the
engine slightly nose down and lower slowly,

engine crankshaft flange clears the nose
certain the
h.
i.
the
cowl.
d.
Align
the shock mount bolt holes and install the
bonding strap. Torque the four engine

inch-pounds.
Disconnect the hoisting sling and move the hoist
e.
clear of the airplane.
f.
Uncap all lines and fittings and connect the ducts,
engine controls, plumbing and winng harness.
Adjust all engine controls.
g.
Install the engine cowling.
h.
Install the propeller. (Refer to Chapter 61-10-00.)
i.
Perform an engine run-up as described in this
j.
shock mounts and
mount bolts 300 to 350
Complete
the final
tubing
between the air
Disconnect the
engine controls, plumbing,
and
and label all items for reinstall~ttion. Be
cap all open tubing.

Place a support under the tail of the airplane.
Place the engine hoist in position and attach to
lifting eyes on the engine.

Hoist the engine sufficiently to
j.
remove
the tension
from the shock mount bolts.

k.
Remove the 2 front and the nght rear shock
mount bolts. Remove the 6 bolts attaching the left rear
engine mount to the wheel well.
I.
Carefully hoist the engine from the airplane.
CAUTION
engine is hoisted away from the airplane,

check to make certain that all wires, hoses and
lines have been disconnected.
As the
chapter.
k.
at the
turbocharger inlet.
winng hamess. Tag

sure to
position
tubing
Disconnect the exhaust stack from the
g.
the
hoist and
engine.
Move the hoist into
c.
making
engine
bug by
turbocharger.
noted in ENGINE REMOVAL.
as
b.
nose
the
mixer valve.
f.
Observe the WARNINGS, CAUTIONS, and
portion of
hinge pins.
Disconnect the heater induction
d.
ENGINE INS7ALLATION
(CE-748, CE-n2 and after; 0/-149 and after; D10097 0-10120 and after; E-IIl I, EI241 and after)
the screws and
adjustments.
ENGINE INS7ALLATION
~4-1 and after)
NOTE
Install the left
if
newly overhauled engine has been

installed, the engine must be depreserved and
a new or
serviced.
torque
to 300 to 350
secunng the
(EA-I
mount to the
engine
engine
left
inch-pounds.
rear mount
Install the 6 bolts
to the wheel well.
Torque these
bolts to 100 to 105 inch-pounds.

Remove the hoist from the
d.
ENGINE REMOVAL
and
rear
and torque to 300 to 350 inch-pounds.

b.
Carefully lower the engine into the airplane.
Install the remaining 3 shock mount bolts and
c.
after)
e.
Install the winng hamess,
engine.
plumbing,
and
engine
controls.
CAUTION
and
The
the
magnetos should be considered hot when
ground
lead is disconnected. To avoid
starting of the engine, ground the

magneto by connecting a wire to the magneto
switch lead and then to the engine case, or
disconnect the spark plug leads.
accidental
turbocharger.
tubing between the air box
f.
Connect the exhaust to the
g.
Install the induction
tu~ocharger.
tubing
at the mixer valve.
h.
Conned the heater
i.
Install the upper portion of the nose bug.

Install the cowling as described in COWLING
j.
INSTALLATlON in this chapter.

k.
Install the
propeller
as
described in PROPELLER
INSTALLATION in Chapter 61-10-00.
71-00-00
Page 5
May 9/90
BEECHCRAFT
BONANZA SERIES
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
ENGINE
BUILD-UP
Reinstall
c.
the
plumbing.
Engine build-up consists of the removal

of accessories and equipment from the old
engine and installing them on the new
engine. Refer to the Continental Aircraft
Engine Manuals for the proper torque val-
for
ues.
ENGINE DRIVEN FUEL PUMP REMOVAL
Start the engine and check for

at the mounting flange, and check
and
operation
pressure
proper
d.
leakage
readings.
NOTE
Access to
a.
is
pump
gained
the engine-driven
through the left
fuel
upper
identify all hoses, washelectrical connectors,

nuts,
ers,
locations
and note harness clamp
reinstallation
for
the
on
new
Cap all open hoses and
engine.
cowling.
engine ports
Disconnect the fuel plumbing

c.
drain the fuel from the pump.
Tag
or
to
prevent
b.
rear,
contam-
ination.
AIR PRESSURE PUMP REMOVAL
in
The
fuel
Pump is located
the center of the engine.
d.
Remove
fuel
the
shroud from the pump.
at
the
and
cooling
pump
NOTE
Remove the pump
the pump.
e.
All
from the intake filter to the pump and on the outlet

side of the pressure pump must be
thoroughly cleaned, and all the
filters replaced when the presinstalled
is
or
plumbing
remove
retaining
nuts and
CAUTION
Make sure the fuel pump

removed with the pump.
drive
is
ENGINE DRIVEN FUEL PUMP INSTALLATION

a.
is
Access
to
gained through
the air pressure pump

the left hand cowl door,
a.
gasket
b.
Disconnect the necessary
from the pump.
Install the fuel pump with a new

and tighten the two retaining nuts.
plumbing
b.
shroud.
Remove the four attaching nuts and

c.
washers and pull the pump straight out.
Install
c: Connect
plumbing.
fuel
the
and
pump
cooling
tighten the fuel
pump
AIR PRESSURE PUMP INSTALLATION

CAUTION
CAUTION
Never
been
use
an
dropped
air pump which

or mishandled.
Make sure the fuel pump drive is

installed with the pump.
has
GROUND RUNNING AND

a.
Install
new
gasket
on
mounting pad flange.
NOTE
CAUTION
Never jam
the engine
or
force the
WARM-UP
the
engine should be pre-oqled

prior to starting, with spark
the
plugs removed to relieve
To pre-oil, connect
starter load.
the auxiliary power unit and crank
with the starter, (not to exceed
45
oil
seconds) unti 1
slight
The
pump onto
mounting pad.
b.
Position the pump on the mounting
and install
the attaching nuts
and
washers.
71-00-00
Page 6
Aug 28/87
A12
BEECHCRAFT
BONANZA SERIES
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
pressure
Reinstall
is detected on the gage,

the spark plugs.
NOTE
The
open
cowl flaps should be

during all ground operation.
engine
should be noted within 30 seconds

in warm weather and 60 seconds in
cold weather.
If no pressure is
noted within the specified time,
stop the engine and investigate
the cause. Normal oil pressure at
maximum rpm should be 30-60 psi
and 10 psi at idle.
CAUTION
After starting the engine,

pressure
indication
of
an
10
oil
psi
71-00-00
Page 6A
A12
Aug 28/87
BEECHCRAFF
80NANZA SERIES
~HAINnNANCE ;HAHAUL
a.
Head ule
b.
Start the
approximately
warm
airplane
engine
inte ule wind.
and maintain the
MRoma
engine speed
900 to 1000 rpm for at least one minute in

as required during cold weather to
weather, and
prevent cavitation in the pressure oil pump, andto

adequate lubn~cation.
slightly
above and
ensure
lubrication
assu~e
ADJUSTMENT SCREN
;AIR
THROTTLE LEVER
~200 rpm for Vie rest of Me
propeller governor. Usa

up procedure.
~STOP PIN
warm-
d.
Operate the engine on the ground with the
propeller blade set at the minimum angle thigh rpm) setting.
Maintain the cylinder head:emperature between
e.
20008 and 46008. Never allow the cylinder head
temperature to exceed 46008.
f.
Extended periods of idling at low rpm may result
in fouled spark plugs.
g.
RICH
t,,
setting of 1200 rpm or

cycle the propeller two or three times to
of the oil transfer collar bearing and
Advance the throttle to
c.
soov7
UPSPEED
at
~-METERINGUNIT
IDLEMIXTURE
ADJUSTMENT NUT
COOLING SHROUD
METERING UNIT
VINV OF RIGHT SIDE OF THROTTLE 80DY AND
METERING UNIT.(THROTTLE LEVER. PLUMBING.

INDUCTION AIR SYSTEM. ETC. OMIT~D FOR CLARITY.)
36-?82-14
The mixture control should remain in the FULL
position
unless
leaning
is
required dunng
the
chedtout
Body and Metering Unit

Figure 1
RH Side of Throttle
IDLE SPEED AND MIXTURE ADJUSTMENT (CE748, CE-772 and alter; CJ-149 and after; D-la097, D10120 and after; E-11I1, E-1241 thru E-2110 except
E-1946 and E-2104)
metering
(Figure I)
shorten the
valve and air throttle levers.
mixture is
Start and run the
up procedures in this
rich.
b.
engine according
chapter. Place nixture
Chapter 74-0000).
(see MAGNETO
Maximum drop-
off differential should not exceed 50 rpm. If the differential is

within limitations, proceed with the idle adjustment.
Slowly retard the throttle levrsr to the idle position.

engine tachometer should irdicate 625650 rpm
(normal idle setting). To adjust, tum the idle speed adjusting
c.
f.
After each idle mixture
engine by running
adjustment change, clear

making a
it up to 2000 rpm before
mixture check.
If the idle setting does not remain stable, check
linkage; any looseness in this linkage will cause
erratic idling. In all cases, allowance should be made for this
effect of weather conditions upon idling adjustments.
g.
the idle
The
screw
at the throttle lever
stop until the desired rpm is
reached.
d.
1), using
Set the pump pressure at idle RPM (refer to Chart

the relief valve adjustment screw (Rgure 1A) on
the aft centerline of the
engine ~uel pump. Tum the screw

clockwise to increase pressure and counterc!ockwise to
decrease pressure.
e.
the
When the idle
cockpit
setting
has been stabilized,
mixture control lever with
into the IDLE CUT-OFF
smooth
move
steady pull
rpm during
position. Observe the

Adjust the idle mixture to obtain
approximately 25/50 rpm gain in the idle speed as the
mixture control is slowly moved toward the IDLE CUT-OFF.
(If the mixture is set too lean, the idle speed will drop under
the same conditions.) The idle mixture adjustment is the
locknut at the metering valve end of the linkage between the
the
the nut to
linkage.
control in full
the
Proceed to check the magnttos
DROP-OFF CHECK in
to the warm-
Tightening
linkage provides a richer mixture. A leaner

obtained by backing off the nut to lengthen the
leaning
FULL THROTTLE ADJUSTMENT (CE-748, CE-772

and after; CJ-149 and after; D-30097, 0-10120 and
after; E-llll, E-1241 thru E-2110 except E-1946 and
E-2104)
Complete
before
a.
the IDLE SPEED AND MIXTURE ADJUSTMENT
proceeding with this procedure.

With the mixture control at full rich, advance the
engine RFM to check the fuel flow.
throttle to full rated
out process.
NOTE
Fuel flow values may be monitored by the fuel
flow gage in the airplane or a pressure gage
attached to the manifold valve.
71-00-00
A9
Page7
Sep 27/84
BEECHCRAFT
BONANtA SERIES
MAIMENANCE MANAUI;
Chart 1
Fuel Flow Chart
Al top end values
are
shown for rated RPM and manifold pressure
RPM
Propeller
Engine
10-520-88
(10-520-88)
b.
To obtain the
specified
Unmetered
Metered
or
or
Pump PressurelNonle Pressure

(psi)
(psi)
600
0-11
2.0-2.5
2700
28-31
15.5-1 6.5
values
(Chart
1) of nonle pressure or fuel flow at full throttle and rated

RPM, tum the vanable orifice adjusting screw (Figure 1A)
(located on the side of the pump) clockwise to increase
pressure and counterclockwise to decrease pressure.
proper idle
adjustment
Fuel Flow
Fuel now
Lbs.lHr.
Gal./Ht.
136-146
22.7-24.3
speed (see Figure I).

screw
Turn the idle
clockwise to increase
speed
rpm
and
counterclockwise to decrease rpm.

The engine-driven fuel pump pressure should
c.
read 8.00 to 10.00 psig. If adjustment is required to achieve
]I
proper fuel pump pressure, turn the relief valve adjustment

screw (Figure 18) clockwise to increase pressure and
counterclockwise to decrease pressure.
d.
Maintain the specified idle rpm and the fuel pump
pressure. Adjust the idle mixture to attain a momentary gain
NOTE
of 25 to 50 rpm when the mixture control is moved toward

the idle cut-off position. If the mixture is too lean, the ~pm
If the rated RPM cannot be achieved at full

throttle
during static run-up, adjust nozzie

pressure or fuel flow slightly below limits,
certain
making
specified
values
when rated RPM is achieved
are
If
achieved
dunng take-off
roll.
an
idle mixture
is
tum the idle
adjustment
required,
(see Figure 1) as necessary (tighten the nut
mixture or loosen the nut to lean the mixture)
mixture nut
to
enricfi the
to
obtain the correct idle mixture.
(E-
1946, E-2104, E-2111 and after)
(10-550
Engine)
NOTE
a pressure gage in the fuel line between

driven fuel pump and the metenng unit. The
gage will be used to monitor fuel pump idle pressure (also
called unmetered pressure).
Install
the
engine
After each idle mixture
engine by running
rpm before making
adjustment,
cleat the
up to approximately 2000
the next mixture check.
NOTE
The pressure gage should be vented to the
atmosphere.
FULL THROTTLE ADJUSTMENT
E-2111 and after)
b.
Start and
temperatures
are
run
the
attained
engine until normal operating

(see POH). Move the mixture
control to full rich. The idle soeed should be 625 to 650 rpm.
If the engine is not idling within the specified range, change
the idle
speed adjustment
screw as
required
to obtain the
(E-1946, E-2104,
(IO-5~i0-8 engine)
a.
Install
engine fuel
a pressure gage in the line between the

flow transducer and the manifold valve to read
metered fuel pressure.
71-00-00
Page8
Sep n184
A9
ii
BEECHCRAFT
BONANZA SERIES
MAINTENANCE MANAUL
INE DRIVEN FUEL PUMP
VALVE ADJUSTMENT
(USED TO SET IDLE

PRESSURE)
SCREW
PUMP
UP
FWD~f III
VARIABLE ORIFICE ADJUSTING SCREW
(USED TO SFT FULL THROTTLE PUMP
PRESSURE)
VIEW OF LEFT SIDE OF ENGINE DRIVEN FUEL PUMP
TYPICAL FOR THE 10-52088 ENGINES
(FITTINGS, COOLING SHROUD, ETC. OMITTED FOR CLARIN)
36-283-2
Engine
Figure 1A
LH Side of 10-520-88
Driven Fuel
Pump
ENGINE DRIVEN FUEL PUMP

RELIEF VALVE
ADJUSTMENT SCRE~Y
(USED TO SET PUMF]

IDLE PRESSURE)
ANEROID STEM
(DO NOT TURN)
UP
FWD
BYPASS ADJUSTMEN~ SCREW (USED TO SET

FULL THROTTLE PUMP PRESSURE)
VIEW OF LEFT SIDE OF ENGINE DRIVEN
FUEL PUMP ON 10-550-8 ENGINE (FITTINGS,
COOLING SHROUD, ETC. OMITTED FOR CLARITY)
36-283-3
10-550-8
Engine Driven
Figure 1B
Fuel
Pump
71-00-00
A9
Page9
S~p 27/84
BEECHCRAFT
BONANZA SEAIES
MAIHTENANCE MANAUL
20.0
H
H
19.0
"C"
OPERATING CONDITIONS
FULL THROTTLE
STATIC RPM
FULL RICH
18.0
v,
17.0aiL!
cr
16.0
k
~ti
Hr
riti
t;
Z0.51
SET METERED PRES

F TO VALUE SHOWN
c.3 PSIG
it-t~t
14.0
LL
iiir:
rr:
23.0
24.0
-LLi
25.0
26.0
27.0
28.0
MANIFOLD PRESSURE (IN. HG.)
"A"
29.0
30.0
LOCATE MANIFOLD PRESSURE ATTAINED DURING FULL THROTTLE STATIC RPM RUN-UP
(POINT "A").
AT THE POINT WHERE THE MANIFOLD PRESSURE LINE INTERSECTS THE NOMINAL METERED
PRESSURE LINE (POINT "B"), READ METERED FUEL PRESSURE IN PSIG (POINT "C").
THE POINTS "A", "B", AND "C" WHICH ARE SHOWN ARE AN U(AMPLE. THE ACTUAL
POINTS "A", "B", AND "C" WILL VARY WITH ALTITUDE AND FROM AIRPLANE TO
AIRPLANE.
Full Throttle fuel Pressure Chart For The 10-550-8

Chart 2
Engine
71-00-00
Page 10
Sep 27/84
A9
BEECHCRAFT
BONANZA SEAIES
MAIIJ~NANCE MANAUL
NOTE
Adjust the flow rater (using the adjustable valve)

readings in Chart 3 and record the airplane fuel
c.
to the test
The pressure gage should be vented to the

atmosphere and mounted at approximately the
same
level
flow
(gph) from
the fuel flow indicator
on a
copy of Chart 3.
the manifold valve.
as
NOTE
b.
Run the
temperatures
c.
are
until normal
engine
With the mixture control in the full rich
advance the throttle control to full
static engine rpm. Check the

engine manifold pressure.
d.
engine operating
attained.
position,
throttle and maximum
metered fuel pressure
The throttle and mixture levers must be in the

full forward
Use the
shown in
to
position.
Figure 1C
adjustable
valve
adjust the fuel flow
as
necessary.
versus
Refer to Chart 2 for determination of conect
engine fuel pressure. If a fuel pressure adjustment

required, tum the engine-driven fuel pump bypass
metered
is
adjustment
necessary (clockwise to increase

rounterclaclcwise to decrease pressure) to
screw
as
pressure or
obtain a conect pressure
reading. See Figure
Once
d.
an error
in the
airplane
fuel flow hardware
has been determined, determine the system correction

the following example:
as
in
1B.
EXAMPLE:
pph flow rate with the fuel temperature at 40"F, an

airplane fuel flow indicator reads 13.0 gph. Using a fuel
density of 5.9 Chart 3 shows the indicator should be reading
13.5 gph. Therefore, the instrument error is 0.5 gph low.
When the airplane indicator is reading 13.0 gph, add 0.5
gph for system correction.
At the 80
NOTE
adjustment procedure is NOT a

complete procedure, but a starting point. For the
complete procedure "FUEL FLOW
CALIBRATION AND CORRECTION (E-lo46,
E-2104, E-2111 and after)" MUST also be
completed.
This fuel pump
FUEL FLOW SYSTEM CALIBRATION AND

CORRECTION (E-1946, E-2104, E-2111 and afterl
NOTE
This fuel flow indicator check, should be made
at all six flow rates as the system error may
vary
as
the flow rate
changes.
A fuel flow system calibration and correction should be

obtained from the following procedure.
NOTE
a.
Install
flow meter at
Fisher Porter Row Rater
point
or
equivalent
between the fuel flow transducer and
(The Fisher Porter now

Rater must be installed in a straight vertical position in order
to provide the most accurate reading.) Return the fuel from
the flow rater back to the airplane fuel system through the
wing filler port.
the
engine
fuel distributor valve.
The FULL THROTTLE ADJUSTMENT (E-1946,

E-2104, E-2111 and after) procedure MUST be
completed before proceeding.
check for proper engine fuel schedule.

climb at 110 kias (knots indicated air speed)
Right
e.
Establish
Throttle............................................................
NOTE
Prop
Full Forward
rpm
Full Rich
.....................................................................2700
Mixture
Use
an
providing
external power supply capable of

.25 volts for the source of
28.25
Boost
Pump.. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .Of
electncal power.
NOTE
b.
Turn the
airplane
AUX FUEL PUMP to HI.
Step "g."
should also be worked while in
flight.
71-00-00
A9
Page 11
Sep 27/84
BEECHCRAFT
BONANZA SEillES
MAIMENANCE MANAUL
ENGINE FUEL FLOW

TRANSDUCER
ENGINE DISTR18UTOR
VALVE AND NOZZLES
AIRPLANE FUEL
FILLER PORT
FLOW RATOR
BE IN A STRAIGHT
(MUST
VERTICAL
POSITION)
ADJUSTABLE VALVE
AIRPLANE WING
AJ6-281-41
fuel Flow Calibration

Figure 1C
f.
(altimeter
Record the
fuel flow at all pressure altitudes

Hg.) shown in Chart 4 is possible.
set at 29.32 in.
While in flight at 8000 feet, set power to 20.5 in.

g.
manifold pressure, prop to 2300 rpm, and mixture control to
full rich. The EGT margin should be 20"C rich of peak or
greater. Next lean mixture from peak

The
margin should
h.
be
20C
lean of
to engine roughness.
peak or greater.
if the corrected fuel flow does not fall within the
required fuel flow limits (see Chart 4) or if the nch of peak

margin is not obtained, readjust the metered engine fuel
pressure (Feference step "d." of FULL THROTTLE
ADJUSTMENT (E-2104, E-2111 and after). Tum the
engine-driven fuel pump bypass adjustment screw as
necessary (Figure 18) clockwise to increase pressure (fuel
flow) or counterclockwise to decrease pressure (fuel flow).
One psi. is approximately equal to one gph.
FUEL SYSTEM ADJUSTMENT
(EA-I
and
after)
(Figure 2)
The engine fuel system senses turbocharger deck pressure
and any change in deck pressure or manifold pressure will
be accompanied by a change in fuel flow. During an
overboost condition with cold oil where manifold pressure
2 in. Hg over redline, a corresponding
may increase 1
ennchn?ent in fuel flow will be observed. This is
normal
charactenstic of the fuel system and is desirable to maintain

mixture strength. The correct procedure is to retard the
throttle to 36.0 in.
Hg which will provide
corresponding
decrease in fuel flow.
The fuel system on the Continental TS10-520-U

520-U8 engines may be adjusted as follows:
or
fSIO-
71-00-00
Page 12
Sep 27/84
A9
BEECHCRAFT
BONANZA SERIES
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
DEGREES F.
TEMPERATURE WHEN FUEL FLOW IS CHECKED (FUE~ TEMPERATURE)

Flow Rater
Setting
in Pounds
per Hour
(pph)
Flow Of Fuel In Gallons

Per Hour (gph) Based On
Record
Density (Temperature) Ibs/gal
Indicator
Density
Flow 60
pph
Flow 80
pph
Flow 90
pph
6.0
5.9
5.8
5.7
gph
gph
gph
gph
10.0
10.2
10.3
10.5
gph
gph
gph
gph
13.3
13.5
13.8
14.0
gph
gph
gph
gph
15.0
15.3
15.5
15.8
gph
gph
gph
gph
18.3
18.6
19.0
19.3
Flow 110
pph
gph
gph
gph
gph
Flow 120
pph
20.0
20.3
20.7
21.0
gph
gph
gph
gph
Flow 140
pph
23.3
23.7 1 24.1
24.5
Temperature
Airplane Fuel
Flow System
(gph)
(+0.5 gph
(13.0 gph in
example)
in
example)
70"F......,,...5.8 Ibs/gal
1000F.............5.7 Ibs/gal
200F.....:.......6.0 Ibs/gal
400F.............5.9 Ibs/gal
Density Of Fuel Based

On
Correction To
Airplane
Fuel Flow From
CHART 3
Install a calibrated fuel pressure gage in

a.
the fuel line between the fuel pump and metering unit
to monitor pump outlet pressures. This gage must
be vented to atmosphere.
b.
Start and
temperatures up
c.
at
to
the metering unit to obtain

which will result in a 25
50 rpm rise when the engine is leaned to best power
setting with the mixture control. Turn the adjustment
screw CW to lean the mixture and CCW to richen.
screw
run engine to bring cylinder head

approximately 1210C (2500F).
Using throttle lever,
approximately
idle mixture
set
engine
idle
speed
650 rpm.
(4)
on
the desirable fuel-air ratio
WARNING
preclude the possibility of an engine
compartment fire, airplanes EA-1 thru
To
EA-146 must have
fuel drain hose
con-
Set pump pressure at idle rpm to 6 7 PSI,

using the relief adjustment screw (1) on the centerline
of the fuel pump. Turn screw CW to increase pres-
mixture control screw

housing boss. Route the fuel drain hose to
the right hand cowling flap opening with
sure, and CCW to decrease pressure,
sufficient clearance to prevent rubbing or

clearance
Insure
maximum
chafing.
the
and
the
between
hose
d.
NOTE
nected
over
the
turbocharger/exhaust system.
adjustment change,
clear the engine by running it up to 2000
rpm before making a mixture check.
After
e.
sure
A14
each
mixture
Maintain the idle rpm and idle pump pres-
specified
above
(reset
as
required); adjust
the
Airplanes EA-147 and after (Figures 2B and

2C) have a small tray or shield assembly
beneath the throttle body and fuel metering
assembly. Check that the hose (approximately 2 inches long) is attached over the
71-00-00
Page 13
Jun 20/91
BEECHCRAFT
BONANZA SERIES
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
mixture control
screw
boss and
housing
Insure
drains into the shield assembly.
that a fuel drain hose(s) is attached to the
shield assembly and routed to the right
hand cowl flap opening with sufficient
prevent rubbing
clearance to
Insure
maximum
hose(s)
clearance
or
chafing.
Fly the airplane
j.
10 to 15 minutes
or
at high power settings for

more, then land and check the
fuel flow at maximum power settings before shutting

down the engine. Readjust the fuel flow to (195 to 205
pounds per hour) 32.5 to 34.2 gallons per hour with

the variable orifice adjusting screw (2) as required.
between the
NOTE
turbocharger/exhaust sys-
and the
tem.
It has been observed that fuel flow may
increase up to 2 gallons per hour above
the redline as the airplane approaches
NOTE
Cylinder
1210C
otherwise
inconsistent.
checked,
time rpm rise is
the
results
will
be
Advance throttle to full (rated) power setf,

ting to check pump pressure and fuel flow. With
approximately 2700 rpm, full throttle, and 36.0 in. Hg
manifold pressure, set fuel flow at 32.5 34.2 gallons
205 Ibs/hr). The full power fuel flow
per hour (195
is
made
setting
by using the variable orifice adjusting
(2)
screw
aneroid
located
housing.
the ah end of the fuel pump

Turn screw CW to decrease fuel
(jam nut must be loosened

before turning screw and retightened carefully.after
each adjustment). Pump pressure should be 33 to 37
PSI. Pump pressure values at full power are given for
reference only to evaluate the functioning of other
components in the fuel system.
After
gallons
If the fuel flow does

per hour.
exceed 36.5 gallons per hour, the enginedriven fuel pump pressure should be
readjusted.
MANIFOLD PRFSSURF ADJUSTMENT
on
flow and CCW to increase
g.
critical altitude. This is a normalcharacteristic of the Continental engine fuel system as long as the fuel flow does not
exceed 36.5 gallons per hour. The correct
procedure is to adjust the mixture to 34.0
temperature must be 930
head
(200-2500F) each
completion
"c", "d" and "e". Readjust
of item "f", recheck items

as
required.
When fuel system is accurately adjusted,

h.
engine idle speed to approximately 650 rpm with
the idle speed adjustment screw (Figure 2A), CW to
increase, CWW to decrease.
The wastegate is controlled by engine oil pressure,

which is regulated by the variable absolute pressure
controller. For this reason manifold pressure is quite

sensitive to oil pressure and temperature as well as
ambient temperatures. It has been determined that
the manifold pressure will vary: (1) 0.2 in. Hg per 100F
change in oil temperature, (2) 0.3 in. Hg per 10 psig

in oil pressure and (3) 0.05 in. Hg per 100F change in
ambient temperature. The best time to make adjustments is shortly after the airplane has been flown.
Under the conditions described in step "c", the manifold pressure should be 36 in. of Hg.
set
i.
When setting up full throttle fuel flow on a
day (above 600F) the system should be set toward
the lower flow limit. On a cold day ~below 600F) the
system should be set toward the higher flow limit.
Locate the absolute variable pressure

a.
controller mounted on the top of the throttle body in
the left side of the engine accessory compartment.
b.
hot
proper
Check the controller-to-throttle
adjustment
important that manifold pressure and fuel flow

be within the prescribed limitations simultaneously
during a maximum power run-up. Incorrect manifold
pressure settings will cause erroneous fuel flow
readings. It is also important to note the propeller
speed when setling the fuel flow. if the fuel system
is adjusted to the prescribed limits with 2650 rpm
during ground static run-up, an enrichment will occur
when
2700 rpm
speed.
is
obtained
with
forward
aircraft
full travel.
linkage
for
follows:
Position the controller lever to allow
i.
It is
as
Ensure that the throttle
push-pull cable
will allow full travel.

2.
With the controller lever in the posiFigure 2A and the throttle plate arm
stop pin, adjust the connecting linkage
a position allowing 0.01 to 0.02 inch gap
tion shown in
against
stop
the
nuts to
between the
cam
arm
and the controller maximum
stop (see Figure 2A). On a new engine this adjustment should already be made by Continental Motors.
71-00-00
Page 14
Jun 20/91
A14
BEECHCRAFT
BONANZA SERIES
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
Start and run the engine to bring the

c.
engine oil temperature up to (1600 to 1800F) 710 to 820
C. Adjust the oil pressure to 40 to 50 psig (45 psig
preferred) at 2600 to 2700 rpm.
d.
After engine warm-up, advance the throttle

the vernier control cable knob) to its
(without turning
Pressure
Altitude (Set
Altimeter At
29.92 In.
Observed
Fuel Flow
In Flight
maximum position of 2600

2700 propeller rpm and
full rich mixture. Check and (if required) adjust the
manifold pressure adjustment screw on the absolute
variable pressure controller. Loosen the jam nut and

rotate the adjustment screw counterclockwise to
increase, or clockwise to decrease manifold pressure, then
System
Correction
retighten
Corrected
Fuel Flow
the
jam
nut.
Required
Fuel Flow
(gph)
From Chart 3
Hg.)
Sea Level
23.8 to 27.4
2000
22.1 to 25.2
4000
20.5 to 23.8
6000
18.8 to 22.3
8000
17.2 to 21.0
10000
15.5 to 19.7
12000
13.8 to 18.2
14000
12.3 to 17.0
16000
10.8 to 15.8
CHART 4
71-00-00
Page 15
A14
Jun 20/91
BEECHCRAFI
BONANZA SERIES
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
(j
-9
_$
~II
I!
c
ii
I~
A36TC-282-ll
Fuel
Adjustment (EA-1
Figure 2
and
After)
71-00-00
Page
16
Jun 20/91
A14
BEECHCRAFT
BONANZA SERIES
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
VARIABLE ABSOLUTE
PRESSURE CONTROLLER
CONTROLLER LEVER
MANIFOLD PRESSURE
ADJUSTMENT SCREW
(IN MAX. THROTTLE POSITION)
(0.5" HS~TURN)
.01
GAP
/O
O
JAM NUT
CAM ARM
CONNECTING LINKAGE
STOP NUTS
STOP PIN
I I
00 NOT CHANGE THIS

ADJUSTMENT SETTING
\V
LIDLE MIXTURE ADJUSTMENT
THROTTLE BODY----/
SCREW
IDLE SPEED ADJUSTMENT
THROTTLE PLATE
ARM
LOOKING AFT
Throttle
Body
A36~C-282-12
and Variable Absolute Pressure Controller
Figure 2A
71-00-00
Page 16A
A14
Jun 20191
BEECHCRAFT
BONANZA SERIES
WIAINTENANCE WIANUAL
SHIELD BRACKET AND

MOUNTING BOLT
THROTTLE BODY
THROTTLE BODY
SIJPPORT BRACE
SCREW
NUT
WASHER
DETAIL
SHIELD ASSEMBLY
DETAIL
B
dcstoolso
Body Shield Assembly

(EA-147 thN EA-241)
Figure 2B
Throttle
71-00-00
Page 16B
Jun 20/91
A14
BEECHCRAFT
BONANZA SERIES
MAINTENAN(3E MANUAL
SHIELD BRACKFT AND

MOUNTING BOLT
~Od
THROTTLE BODY
SCREW
NUT
WASHER
THROTTLE BODY
SUPPORT BRACE
DETAIL A
SHIELD ASSEMBLY
DETAIL
B
C9100179
Body Shield Assembly

(EA-242 and After)
Figure 2C
Throttle
71-OQ00
Page 16C
A?4
Jun 20191
BEECHCRAFT
BONANZA SEAIES
MAINTENANCE MANUAt
0)
AP
(O
o.
OIL FILTER ELEMENT
a
t
OIL PRESSURE ADJUSTMENT SCREW

35-257-2
Adjustment
figure 3
Oil Pressure
7100-00
p~17
AO
sepnla4
BEECHCAAFT
BONANZA SERIES
MAINTENANCE MANAUL
simultaneously dunng
NOTE
a maximum power runIncorrect manifold pressure settings will

cause erroneous fuel flow readings.
up.
If the manifold pressure is

with engine
oil temperature at (100oF) 38 C rather than the
ad~usted
71"
to
82"C (160"
to
180F)
recommended,
CAUTION
decrease in manifold pressure will occur when

the oil temperature increases to the normal
operating range. Under
these conditions,
Do not exceed 36 in.
decrease in manifold pressure of 1 to 2 in. of

Hg below the rated 36 in, of Hg will occur
along
flow.
with
If,
on
corresponding
is
temperature
at
Fly the airplane 10-15 minutes or more at high

settings, land and check the manifold pressure at
maximum power setting before shutting off the engine.
Readjust to 36.0" Hg as required.
e.
decrease in fuel
the other hand,
pressure
Hg manifold pressure.
power
the manifold
adjusted with engine oil

(2300F) 1100C, a corresponding
increase in manifold pressure above 36.0 in.

Hg will occur on the next flight if the oil
O1L PRESSURE ADJUSTMENT
temperature is then much lower. A
(f~gure 3)
corresponding
enrichment in full rich fuel flow
above the value obtained at 36.0 in.
also
Hg
will
since the full rich schedule is a

function of both deck pressure and rpm. These
occur
The oil pressure adjustment screw is located approximately

3 inches below the oil filter housing. To adjust, tum the
adjusting
screw
clockwise to increase
or
counterclockwise
characteristics must be taken into consideration

when manifold pressure adjustments are made.
It is important that manifold pressure and fuel
to decrease the oil pressure. The oil pressure should be

between 30 and 60 psi at maximum operating rpm and
flow
idle rpm.
be
within the
temperature,
prescribed limitations
50
psi
at cruise rpm, and 10
psi
minimum at
"END"
71-00-00
Pagel8
Sep n184
AO
BEECHCRAFF
BONANZA SERIES
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
COWUNG
Secure the hook
d.
pins
in this
position
with the
jam
nuts.
COWUNG REMOVAL
wiring from the
cowling.
There should be
it is moved from the
slight
pre-latched to the
link rods.
f.
engine cowling.
Remove the bolts, spacers, and nuts at each end
cowling angle, and carefully remove the
c.
as
The
position.
Disconnect the necessary electncal
b.
latch the
the latch
on
fully latched position, thus snugging down the upper cowl.

pull down tension should not be enough to bow the two
Check to be sure that the engine magneto switch is
in the OFF
Fully
a.
tension
of the center
cowling.
the latch mechanism is
on
accomplished by raising
or
lowering
the hook
pinsas
tension.
cowling
Secure the hook pins in the proper position with the
g.
jam nuts, and safety wire the jam nuts together.
required
with the above
to secure the
COWLING INSTALLATION
Check to be sure thatthe
a.
CAUTION
engine magneto switch is
in the Off position.

b.
Carefully place the
Secure the
c.
cowling in position.
cowling at each end of
latching the cowling, always be sure Be

jaws fully engage the shoulder of the hook
pins. After latching the
handlecs to
on the forward and aft
When
latch
the center
with bolts, spacers, and nuts,

Connect any necessary electnml winng to the
cowling angle
d.
check
cowling.
e.
securely
forsecuritj~
the upper cowling will latch

to the lower cowling when fully latched; if not,
Check to be
sure
proceed with COWUNG LATCH RIGGING.

COWL FLAP RIGGING
COWLING LATCH RIGGING
Attach the
flap control
rod end to the
flap.
Position the control arm, attached to the wheel well

cover, up and forward so that the flap control rod parallels the
control arm. Connect the rod to the control arm.
b.
assembly on eact~ side of the cowling consists of

outside master latch; two link rods, and two auxiliary
two
latches located on the inside
on tft&~iriside of the
brackets; each containing a hook
The latch
an
pin\
c.
in snug
Adjust the control rod linkage so that the door pulls

against the opening.
upper cowling. Actuating the outside 18tci~ moves each link

rod to operateits respective latch. The fore and aft inside
latches each incorporate a set of jaws which are open only
when the outside latch is
placed
in the
fully
NOTE
unlatched
position. The jaws remain dosed in both the latched and the
pre-latched positions. To ng the latches, proceed as follows:
a
When
adjusting
the rod end
linkage,
insure
proper rod end engagement by observing

threads in the sight hole of the control end.
Loosen the fore and aft inside Hartwell latches on

position the latches so that when the upper
their brackets and
cowl door is lowered, the hook pin falls directly over the
center of the latch. Secure the latch making sure the latch is
vertically straight.
b.
Open the outside latch and HOLD the latch in the
fully unlatched position. The link r~ds should hold both sets of
auxiliary latch jaws fully open in this position; if not, loosen
the connecting points of the two link rods and position the
rods to fully open each jaw with the outside latch held fully
open. Tighten the connecting points of the two link rods,
Hold the latch fully open and lower the top cowl
c.
until the latch jaws are-between th~shoulder: of the hook pins
and the lip directly above the point. Raleasetftetatch to the
pre-latched position.
pushlpull control in the pilols compartment

position.
a.
Rig the push-pull control arm assembly, at the
wheel well cover (nght hand side), in the forward position so
d.
Set the
to the closed
that the control rod will center over the
arm
hinge..00
to .06
inch overcenter is needed to prevent the cowl flaps from

creeping open in flight. An amount greater than this
maximum may cause the control to ovemde canter and lock.

~ttach the control rod ball joint link to the arm
f.
assembly and pull the control to the full open position. The
flap should open approximately 4 inches measured at the aft
inboard end of the flap to the face of the exhaust stack flame
shield.
"END"
71-10-00
Pagel
May 9/80
CHAPTER
ENGINES
8EECHC~AFT
BONANtA SERIES
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
CHAPTER 72

CHAPTER
SECTTON
SUBJECT
72
PAGE
EFFECTnVTTY/CONTEMS
DATE
Oct 7/83
CHAPTER 72
ENGINE
TABLE OF CONTENTS
CHAPTER
SECT1ON
SUBJECT
SUBJECT
PAGE
INTRODUCTION
GENERAL DESCRIPTION
SPECIAL TOOLS AND EQUIPMEM
DISASSEMBLY
CLEANING, REPAIR 8 REPLACEMENT

INSPECTION
ASSEMBLY OF SUBASSEMBLIES
FINAL ASSEMBLY AND TEST

LIST OF TABLES
NOTE
For detailed information
Aircraft
Engines
on
the above
subjects,
refer to the Continental 10-520 Senes
Overhaul Manual, FORM X-30039A
Overhaul Manual, FORM X-30042

FORM X-30568.
or
or
TSIO-520 Series Aircraft
10-550-8 Series Aircraft
Engines
Engine Overhaul Manual.
CAUTION
It is imperative that when replacement of
engine components
and accessories becomes
necessaty, all part numbers be verified to ensure that the proper part has been obtained
for replacement. Inconect part replacement may result in extensive damage to the engine,
END"
72-EFFECTNTTY/CONTE~JTS
Page
A6
Octf/83
CHAPTER
ENGINE FUEL
ANI~ CONTROL
BEECHCRAFT
BONANZA SERIES
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
CHAPTER 73

CHAPTER
SECTION
SUBJECT
PAGE
73-EFFECTIVIT//CONTENTS
73-30-00
CHAPTER 73
DATE
Oct 10/80
ENGINE FUEL AND CONTROL
TABLE OF CONTENTS
CHAPTER
SECTION
SUBJECT
SUBJECT
FUEL DLOW INDICATING
PAGE
...73-30-00
.......1
Fuel Flow Indicator
.......1
.............1
Transducer
or
Transmitter Removal
.............1
Transducer
or
Transmitter installation
.............1
"END"
73-EFFECflVTr(lCONTENTS
paC~1
Oct 10/80
BEECHCRAFT
BONAHZA SERIES
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
FUEL FtOW INDICATING

OPERATION
FUEL jLOW INDICATING

PRACTICES
DESCRIPTION AND
MAINTENANCE
FUEL FLOWINDICATOR
On the fuel Row systems pnor to CE-929, 01-156, O10354, E-1766, and EA-159, the indicator in the instrument
panel
is teed into the fuel
throttle
servo.
In this
supply line down
stream from the
system the indicator
converts fuel
pressure to gallons per hour readout in fuel flow.
TRANSDUCER QR TRANSMITTER REMOVAL

a
Open
b.
Disconnect the electncal connection.
c.
opening
On senals CE-929 and after, CJ-156 and after, D-10354
and after, E-1766 and after, and EA-159 and after, thefuei
the
engine
cowi.
Disconnect the two fuel lines, and cover the

prevent contamination.
Remove the bolts holding the transducer or
to
d.
transmitter in place, and
remove
the unit.
flow system does not rely on fuel pressure to indicate fuel

flow. In this system fuel Rowing through a transducer
signal which is directed to the fuel Row

indicator in the instrument panel. The fuel flaw indicator
creates an electric
a readout in gallons per hour. The major components

of the system are the transducer or transmitter and the
indicator. Engine fuel Rows through the transducer then to
gives
the
engine
fuel distributer valve. The transducer is attached
top of the engine crankcase, near the forward center

line of the engine. The indicator has dual pointers, one for
to the
fuel Row and
one
is located in the
for manifold pressure. The circuit breaker
subpanel
in front of the
TRANSDUCER OR TRANSMTT~R INSTALLATION
attaching
b.
c.
d.
copilot.
Install the transducer

bolts.
Torque
or
transmitter with the
to 180 to 220
inch-pounds.
Connect the two fuel lines.

Connect the electncal connection.
Close the engine cowl.
"END"
73-30-00
Page 1
Oct 10/80
CHAPTER
IGNITION
BEECHCRAFT
BONANZA SERIES
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
CHAPTER 74
(GNITION
TABLE OF CONTENTS
CHAPTER
SECTION
SUBJECT
SUBJECT
GENERAL
PAGE
74-00-00
Description
and
Operation
......1
CE-748, CE-772 and after, CJ-149 and after;

D-10097, D-10120 and after, E-llll, E-1241 and after)
......1
EA-1 thru EA-439.............................................
......1
EA-440 and after
......I
Ignition and Starter Switch

Troubleshooting Ignition System
......1
......2
Magneto Drop-Off Check

Magneto Point Gap and Timing
Preparing the Magneto for Installation
Magneto Pressurization Air Filter
Removal of the
......1
......2
.......3
on
the
Engine
.......3
.......3
Magnetos
.......3
Installation and
Timing
the
Installation
Timing
Timing of Magnetos
Magnetos to the Engine
and Timing of Magnetos (With
.......4
.......4
a
Disc and Pointer
......4A
DISTRIBUTION
74-20-00
.......1
"END"
74-CONTENTS
A12
Page 1
Aug 28/87
Qeechcr~ft
BONANZA SERIES
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
CHAPTER 74
IGNITION
LIST OF PAGE EFFEC7IVITY

74-Effectivity
46Contents
74-00-00
PAGE
1
Nov 16/94
Aug 28/87
Sep 27/84
Sep 27/84
Sep 27/84
2
3
Aug 28/87
Aug 28/87
Sep 27/84
Sep 27/84
May 9/80
4A
5
74-20-00
DATE
74-Effectivity
Page
A17
Nov 16/94
BEECHCRAFT
BONANZA SERIES
MAIMWANCE MANAUL
GENERAL
coupled, pressurized magnetos. Pressurizing the magnetos

prevent internal arcing which may occur in
unpressurized magnetos while flying at high altitudes. The
air to pressurize the magnetos is taken from the throttle
body, and should be at or near sea level pressure at all
will
CE-748, CE-772 and after; 01-149 and afte~ D10097 0-10120 and after; E-llll, E-1241 and after
The
engine
is
equipped with
two Bendix S6RN-1225
times. After the
impulse coupler,
At starter cranking speeds the impulse coupler automatically
retards the spark for starting purposes. Centrifugal force
disengages the impulse coupling pnor to reaching engine
idle speed. The impulse coupler then acts as a straight dnve
and the magnetos fire at the normal finng position of the
engine.
magnetos. Each magneto incorporates
air leaves the throttle
pressurizing
it
body,
passes through a filter on the way to the magnetos. This

filter should be checked every 50 hours and replaced as
an
required.
If the filter is white it may be continued in service,

or contaminated the filter should be replaced.
but if it is red
IGNITION AND STARTER SWITCH

EA-I
tfiroogh
EA-439
The combination
engine is equipped with a Bendix SGRN-1201 magneto

(left side), and a Bendix S6RN-1205 magneto on the right
side. This system incorporates a starter vibrator. The left
magneto has two sets of points: the retard sat of wints is
used for starting and the main set of points is used when the
engine is running.
When the starter is
engaged the right magneto
is
ignition
and starter switch has five
positions:
The
OFF
The magnetos are inoperative.

The nght magneto is finng its plugs; the left
magneto is
L
grounded
and the left magneto (using the retarded set of points) is

supplied with pulsating current from the starter vibrator,
not
firing plugs.
The left magneto is firing its

magneto is not firing plugs.
plugs;
the
nght
BOTH
Both the magnetos
START
On S6RN-1225 and Slick magnetos, the

starter circuit is completed and the starter is
which received its current from the starter solenoid. The
operating.
starter vibrator is located on the left aft side of the firewall.
to retard the
are
finng
their
plugs.
The
impulse coupling is engaged

spark for starting. On SGRN-
1201 and S6RN-1205 magnetos, the starter

is operating and the vibrator is
solenoid
EA-440 and after

The
engine
is
equipped
energized causing
with two Slick 6220,
impulse
retard breaker
on
right magneto
is
current to flow thru the
the left magneto while the
grounded.
TROUBLESHOOTING
IGNITION SYSTEM
PROBABLE CAUSE
INDICATION
1.
Engine
fails to start.
wet,
Clean
Magneto primary ground wire
b.
Check
Spark plugs loose,

fouled,
b.
REMARKS
or
short circuited.
c.
Dirty,
burned
Moisture
replace
defective
spark plugs.
or
primary ground
wire between
magneto and switch.

or
pitted
c.
magneto breaker points.

d.
or
defective.
oil in magneto
Clean
paints
or
replace if badly burned
or
pitted.
d.
Clean magneto distributor.
e.
Turn
distributor.
e.
Internal
magnetos.
trouble
with
engine over
Replace magneto
spark is weak.
and check
if there is
spark jump.
spark or ii
no
74-0090
A9
Pagel
Sep27/64
BEECHCRAFT
BONANZA SEAIES
MAIMENNrJCE MANAUL
TROUBLESHOOTING
(Contd)
IGNITION SYSTEM
PROBABLE CAUSE
INDICATION
2.
Hard
starting.
to
a.
Time magneto to
are
b.
Set
Impulse coupling inoperative
c.
Magneto improperly timed

engine.
b.
Magneto
c.
or
Rough running engine,
b.
breaker
points
engine.
points.
properly.
not set
3.
REMARKS
late.
loose
Spark plugs
or
fouled.
Spark plugs, leads,

oily, dirty
connectors
or
Remove
access cover
coupling
action.
and check
Clean and regap
b.
Clean leads and connectors and
damaged
or
impulse
spark plugs.
replace
connectors.
cradled.
c.
Defective
ignition hamess.
c.
Make
continuity and high voltage tests on

Replace harness or leads ii
harness.
necessary.
4.
Low power.
d.
Magnetos incorrectly
a.
Dirty
points.
burned breaker
or
Bumed
timed.
or
defective
ignition
d.
Time magnetos to
e.
Clean
or
Check
continuity
hamess.
b.
c.
ii
badly
bumed.
of harness and
replace
if
necessary.
Magnetos incorrectly timed.

Internal
trouble
with
b.
Time magnetos to
c.
Turn
engine
engine.
over
Replace magneto if
spark.
magnetos.
GENERAL
replace
engine.
MAIMENANCE PRACTICES
b.
and check
spark.
there is weak
or no
Set the throttle to
produce 1700 rpm.

Note the amount of rpm differential between the
LEFT and FtlGHT magnetos as the magneto switch is
c.
MAGNETO DROP-OFF CHECK
tumed from BOTH to LEFT, back to BOTH, and then turned

to the RIGHT
The
drop-off
check is
accomplished by switching
magneto switch from BOTH to either the RIGHT
position
and
a.
propeller
noting any
loss
or
or
the
LEFT
variance in rpm.
Thoroughly warm-up the engine and set the

control in low pitch. Place the mixture control in
FULL RICH.
position.
The difference between the two
magnetos operated individually should not exceed 50 rpm.

Normal magneto drop-off on either magneto should be
within 50 rpm of each other. If the magneto drop-off is
excessive on either magneto (150 rpm), an inspection to
determine the cause should be accomplished. Common
causes are incorrectly timed magnetos, or incorrect fuei/air
ratio.
7eCO-00
Page2
Sep 27/84
A9
BEECHCRAFT
SONAHZA SERIES
MAINIENANCE MANAUL
PREPARING THE MAGNETO FOR INSTALLATION

ON THE ENGINE
NOTE
Due to the design changes in todays higher
performance engines, the companson of single
magneto operation versus both magnetos is no
longer a sound criteria for evaluation of
magneto performance. Therefore, all magneto
checks should be performed on a comparative
basis between right and left magneto
performance. In addition, absence of magneto
dropsff should be caused for suspicion that the
timing has been bumped up in advance of the
specified setting.
On Bendix magnetos turn the magneto drive in the direction

opposite to normal rotation (this keeps the impulse ~uplers
from
engaging) (nonimpulse coupled magnetos may also be

opposite to normal rotation) until the respective
timing mark (viewed through the inspection hole) on the
distributor gear is aligned with the divided casting line of the
magneto housing. Now the magneto is ready to install on
the engine and to fire number 1 cylinder.
rotated
Slick magnetos may be

engine as follows:
CAUTION
a.
prepared
for installation
timing pin for
Insert the T-118
on
the
naii)
6 penny
in
the R hole in the distributor block.
fouling the spark plugs, operation on

magneto should not exceed 5 seconds,
b.
To avoid
one
Turn the magneto drive in the direction opposite

pin inserts through the hole in the
to normal rotation until the
gear
(approximately
/4
inch).
MAGNETO POINT GAP AND TIMING

NOTE
It is assumed that the magnetos have been properly

internally timed and points adjusted per the applicable
Bendix or Slide vendor publication. To adjust the magneto
If the
points other than that specified in the applicable vendor

publication manual will alter the magneto "E gap" and
cause a weak spark. This internal timing and point
adjustment should not be made on the airplane. For
inspection purposes the point gap may be checked when
the cam follower is resting on the high point of the cam lobe.
The magneto point gap should be as follows:
and
PO\NT GAP 1N INCHES
the
is
binding, but
passed,
reinstall the
until the
pin
will not insert into the
c.
The
As
magneto is
soon as
timing pin
pin
and continue rotation
inserts in the hole in the gear.
supply ignition spark

d.
MAGNETO
pin
hole in the gear, it has hit the pointer on the

gear. Pull the pin out until the pointer has
the
now
ready to
install
to number one
on
the
engine
cylinder.
magneto is installed
on
the
engine
MUST be removed.
Bendix S6RN-1201 and S6AN-1205

t
0.003
only) 0.016
0.006
Bendix SGRN-1225
0.016
0.003
Slick 6220
0.009
0.001
0.016
main breaker
201
retard breaker..................(SGRN-1
On the magnetos the intemal timing and point adjustment

should be made at the time of assembly or overhaul (Bendix
Timing Kit No. 11-8150-1 is available for intemal timing of
NOTE
If the magneto dnve is rotated with the timing
installed the magneto will be damaged.
pin
MAGNETO PRESSURa4TION AIR FILTER
the magneto. Slick 1100 Assembly and Timing Kit is

available for Slick
magnetos.)
NOTE
For adjustment of contact opening and intemal
timing of Bendix magnetos, refer to Bendix, for
applicable manuals. Magneto contact
assemblies should be checked after the first 25
and 50 hours operation and each 50 hours
thereafter.
The magneto pressuritation air filter is located on the top of

the engine between the magnetos. This filter may be
continued in service as long as it appears white and is not

contaminated. The filter should be checked every 50 hours
and replaced as necessary.
REMOVAL OF THE MAGNETOS

a.
Remove the four
outlet and
remove
screws
retaining the high
tension
the outlet from the magneto.
74-00-00
A9
Page3
Sep 27/84
BEECHCRAFT
BONANZA SERlES
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
CAUTION
Current
not have
production
the
grounding
earlier
devices
featured
on
Scintilla magnetos. To be safe,
treat all magnetos as hot whenever
the ground lead (switch terminal)
is
di sconnected.
To ground the
magneto,
switch
ground
connect
Remove the
a.
wire
to
lead of the magneto

the wire to the case.
grounding
drive
the
the
and
wire from the
Turn the crankshaft a few degrees

g.
counterclockwise and bring it back again
unti 1
the
this point,
b.
Remove the two magneto retaining
nuts and washers and pull the magneto away
from the accessory
case.
INSTALLATION
MAGNETOS
AND
marks are aligned. At

timing lights should go
out at the same instant that the position
halfway between the timing marks on the
Remove
Cover
the
timing lights do not go out

time, loosen the magneto that
spark plug
from
is late or early and

outlined in steps "e"
lower
spark plug
hole
TIMING
of No. 1 cylinder with thethumband turn

the crankshaft until pressure is felt on
the thumb.
Remove the plug in front of No. 6

observe the timing marks on
an
alternator
the
drive
the
as
gear
crankshaft is rotated. There are 2 marks;
1 at the 200 ETC position, and 1 at the
240 ETC position. When a position halfway
between these marks is centered in the
viewing hole, No. 1 cylinder is at the 220
ETC position of the compression stroke.
c.
cylinder
NOTE
Prepare the magneto for installation

the engine as described
on
PREPARING
MAGNETO
THE
INSTALLATION ON THE ENGINE.
in
If the
same
lower
cylinder.
b.
both
OF
TIMING
h.
the
timing
alternator drive gear appears in the center of the crankcase inspection hole.
at the
a.
mate with the slots
f.
Connect the timing light lead to
the switch terminal (ground terminal) of
each magneto. Both timing lights
should
be
on.
Tap the right magneto down until
the light goes out. Secure the magnetos.
magneto.
each
coupling lugs
drive coupling.
Install
holding
washers. lockwashcrs and nuts, but tighten
only enough to permit turning the magneto
for final timing, without looseness.
do
magnetos
automatic
so
of
FOR
repeat the process

and Nf" above.
THE MclGNETOS
Remove
a.
each cylinder.
the
top
TO
THE
spark
ENGINE
plug
from
b.
Remove the plug in front of No. 6
cylinder and observe the timing marks on
alternator
the
drive
the
as
gear
crankshaft is rotated. There are 2 marks;
1 at the 200 BTC position, and 1 at the
240 ETC position.
When a position halfway
between these marks is centered in the
viewing hole, No.l cylinder is at the 220
ETC position of the compression stroke.
Rotate
the
crankshaft
in
the
c.
direction of normal rotation to bring No.
1 cylinder up on its compression stroke.
If the engine is equipped with
impulse
coupled magnetos, continue slowly rotating the engine until the impulse couplings
snap.
d.
it will
Hold the magneto in the position

occupy when installed, and check
alignment of the gear coupling slat and
impulse coupling lugs. If not aligned,
pull the gear out of mesh, but not out of
the oil seal, and turn to correct alignment. Push the gear back into mesh.
d.
switch
Connect
a
timing light to the
terminal (ground terminal) of the
right magneto and rotate the crankshaft
in the direction opposite to normal rotation to a position past the timing marks
the alternator drive gear (approxion
mately 260).
e.
flange
Place a new gasket on the magneto

and install the magneto carefully
74-00-00
Page 4
Aug 28/87
A12
BEECHCRAFT
BONANZA SERIES
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
Turn the crankshaft in the normal

e.
direction of rotation until the light goes
out. If 220 ETC is indicated by the timing
marks on the alternator drive gear, the
magneto is correctly timed.
f.
Repeat steps
left magneto.
g.
timed,
"d"
"e"
for the
2.
Set No. 1
indicated in steps
Rotate the
just goes
5.
magneto until
the
out.
Tighten
the
magneto
mounting
nuts.
TIMING
AND
A TIMING DISC
INSTALLATION
MAGNETOS
(WITH
OF
AND
POINTER)
If the magnetos are not correctly

proceed as follows:
Install the
i.
the magneto which is not
as
and
4.
light
timing
properly
~ylinder
c"
light
on
timed,
at 220 ETC
through "e"
though the Continental engines have

factory installed timing marks, a positive
top dead center (TDC) locator and timing
Even
similar to that provided with the

"Universal Engine Timing Indicator" may
be used to time the magneto to the engine
disc
or
to
check
the
accuracy
of
the engine
be timed
timing marks. The engine should

3.
nuts.
Loosen
the
magneto
mounting
to
fire
at
220 +00
-20 before top center
(BTC).
74-00-00
A12
Page 4A
Aug 28/87
BEECHCFIAFI
BONANZA SERIES
MHUlTENAINCE ~ANUAL
rotation
WARNING
f.
The magneto is
the
grounded through
ignition
(pnmary)
switch, therefore, any time the switch

wire is disconnected from the magneto, the
magneto is in a switch ON or HOT condition.
Before turning the propeller by hand, disconnect
all
of
spark plug leads

the engine.
to
until the
piston lightly touches the locator.
Install the
rotate the
timing
timing
disc
on
disc until O"
the
(TC)
propeller spinner and

is located under the
pointer.
Rotate the engine in the opposite direction to
g.
normal rotation until number 1 piston lightly touches the
locator.
prevent accidental finng
h.
Note the
the disc toward 00
reading
timing disc. Now rotate

reading noted is shown.
TDC locator from the spark plug
CTC) until
i.
Remove the
j.
Rotate the
on
the
112 the
hole.
CAUTION
Cunent production magnetos do not have
internal, automatic grounding devices. To be
safe, treat all magnetos as hot whenever the
lead is disconnected. To
ground
magneto,
the filter
engine
ground
the
connect a wire to the switch lead at
the wire to the
capacitor and ground
in the normal direction of
compression stroke of number 1 cylinder and

until the pointer arrives at the number of degrees noted last
in step "h" (112 the first noted reading in step "h").
k.
Rotate the timing disc until the pointer is
positioned at 00 (TC).
i.
Rotate the engine opposite the normal direction of
rotation to approximately 5" beyond the specified timing for
the engine being timed.
Rotate the engine in the normal direction to the
m.
specified before top center (BTC) finng position (this is to
remove gear backlash). further movement of the engine
case.
To locate the compression stroke of number one

a
cylinder, remove the lower spark plugs from each cylinder
except number one cylinder. Remove the top plug from
number one cylinder.
b.
engine
rotation to the
Place thumb of
cylinder spark plug hole
one
hand
over
should not be necessary until the magnetos
are
installed.
NOTE
the number one
and rotate the crankshaft in the
Without
turning the magneto coupling, hold the

magneto in the position it will occupy when
direction of normal rotation until the
compression stroke is
indicated by positive pressure inside the cylinder lifting the
thumb off the spark plug hole.
After locating the compression stroke of number 1
c.
the advanced firing position of number 1
locate
cylinder,
cylinder by the use of a timing disc and pointer or the factory
installed timing marks on the engine.
installed
on the engine and check alignment of

engine drive coupling slot and magneto
impulse coupling lulls. If not aligned, pull engine
gear out of mesh (but not out of the oil seal) and
turn to alignment. Push gear back into mesh.
NOTE
NOTE
On
10-520, TSIO-520 and 10-550 series
engines
the
timing
marks
are
located
on
the
alternator dnve gear. Remove the plug in front

of number 6 cylinder to observe the TDC and
advance
timing
The magnetos
fire number 1
prepared for installation, to

cylinder, in PREPARING THE
were
MAGNETO fOR
ENGINE in this
INSTALLATION ON THE
chapter.
marks.
Place
new gaskets on magneto flanges and install

carefully so drive coupling lugs mate with
slots of engine dnve coupling. Install holding washers,
lockwashers and nuts, but tighten only enough to permit
turning the magnetos for final timing, without looseness.
Install timing lights on the magnetos.
o.
With the engine still positioned to fire number 1
p.
cylinder at the specified ETC rotate the right magneto in the
direction necessary to cause the points to just break open
as indicated by the timing light.
Secure the nght magneto.
q.
n.
the magnetos
In all cases, it must be definitely detenined that the number

cylinder is at the correct firing position on the
one
compression stroke, after
the crankshaft is turned in its
normal direction of rotation.

d.
If
universal
timing
disc and
install the TDC locator in the top

1
cylinder,
e.
Slowly
rotate the
pointer is to be used,
spark plug hole of number
engine
in the normal direction of
74-00-00
A9
Page5
Sep 27/84
SEECHCRAFT
BONAHZA SERIES
MAI)T~ENANCE MANUAL
r.
s.
Repeat steps "p" and "o" on the left magneto.

Recheck the magneto setting to confirm the a 00
2" has not been exceeded.

Tum the engine crankshaft
t.
degrees in the
opposite direction to normal rotation and bnng it back again
until the advance timing mark is under the pointer on timing
disc. At this point both timing lights should indicate, at the
a
few
same
time, that the magneto points opened.
u.
If the
timing lights
do not
respond
at the same
time, loosen the magneto that is either early

repeat the process outlined in step "p".
v.
Remove the
timing lights
and
or
late and
reinstall the
electncal leads to the magnetos.
"END"
74-00-00
Page6
Sep 27/84
A9
BEECHCRAFT
BONANZA SERIES
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
DISTRIBUTION
In the event that
an ignition harness or an individual lead is to

replaced, consult the Magneto Wire Routing Diagram,
Figure 1, to be sure that the harness is correctly installed.
Mark the locations of damps and clips to be certain that
replacement is accomplished properly. For the engine firing
order and magneto finng order, refer to Figure 1.
be
(Figure 1)
Conventional dual
ignition is provided by two magnetos. In

ignition system the left magneto fires the 1-3-5 lower and
2-4-6 top spark plugs, while the nght magneto fires the 1-3-5
top and 2-4-6 lower spark plugs.
this
60----7
UPPER SPARK PLUGS
1GNITION SWITCH
LEFT MAG.(
IRIGHT MAG.
LOWER SPARK PLUGS

ENGINE FIRING ORDER:
MAGNETO FIRING ORDER:
1-6-3-2-5-4
1-2-3-4-5-6
Engine Magneto Wire Routing Diagram

Figure 1
"END"
74-20-00
Pager
May 9/80
CHAPTER
ENGINE
INDICATING
BEECHCRAFT
BONANZA SERIES
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
CHAPTER Ti~

CHAPTER
SECTION
DATE
PAGE
SUBJECT
..............Jan 28/81
77-00-00 CONTENTS
..............Jan 28/81
77-00-00
..............Jan 28/81
CHAPTER n
ENGINE INDICATING
TABLE OF CONTENTS
CHAPTER
SECTION
SUBJECT
SUBJECT
GENERAL............
PAGE
....77-00-00
.......1
TIT Indicator Calibration
......1
AICal Calibration Unit
......1
"END"
n-EFFECTIVITY/CONTEKTS
Page
Jan 28/81
8EECHCRA~
BONAMA SERIES
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
GENERAL
T/T INDICATOR CAL/BRATION

(EA-I AND AFTER)
TIT calibration is manditory because the engine or turbo

charger may be damaged by operating at excessive
temperatures (operation
limited to 60 seconds).
at
above
TIT of
1650"F.
is
CAUTION
turbocharger turbine blades,

coking and excessive oil
consumption may be caused by turbine inlet
temperatures above 16500F.
Damage
1;
25"1LOV
the
to
excessive turbine
APPLY TORQUE
SEAL HERE
CAUBRATION
SCRNV
~36TC3W14
To prevent a turbine inlet over-temperature condition due

to an inaccurate TIT indicator reading, the indicator should
be checked every 100 hours and calibrated if required.
The
following procedure
TIT Indicator
Figure 1
may be used to check and
calibrate the ni indicator:
a.
Remove the TIT
intake manifold.
probe from the turbocharger
not disconnect the wires from the
(Do
probe.)
to
b.
Using
16500F.
the AICal test
equipment,
heat the
probe
If the TIT indicator reads 1650oF the indicator is

if the reading is not 16500F the
calibrated.
properly
calibration screw on the face of the instrument should be
airplanes piston engine EGT systems, if the red line

temperature is exceeded by the TlT indicators, the
calibration unit will quickly determine if the fault lies with
the indication system or the engine. The following method
will accomplish the TIT calibration test:
c.
adjusted
d.
to obtain this
If the seal
by applying
Figure i.
reseal
in
e.
reading.
was
broken
on
the calibration
small amount of torque seal
as
screw.
shown
a.
Light the AICal unit and support it from the
engine cowling.
Place the TIT thermocouple into the comparator
b.
port of the AICal unit until it is touching the reference
thermocouple.
Raise
c.
Reinstall the probe in the turbocharger intake
the
(9000C)
AICal
unit until the
is indicated
on
the units
reference meter.
manifold.
Because both
d.
same
ALGAL GALIBRATION UNIT

(EA-I AND AFTER)
Distributors and Dealers,
provides
checking and,
ii
simple and
necessary,
accurate
recalibrating
are
measuring
the
temperature. If the
register 1650F (900~C).
being
refer to,the adjustment procedure outlined under TIT
INDICATOR CALIBRATION in this chapter.
e.
Replace the TIT thermocouple in the
turbocharger intake manifold. Lubricate the threads on the
probe with Mll-A-907D anti-seize compound (41. Chart 1.
indicator
The AICal Calibration unit, available locally through the

Beechcraft Aero or Aviation Center and International
thermocouples
temperature, the aircraft-installed TIT indicator
should indicate the
method for
heat of the
temperature of 1650"F
same
red line
tested does not
91-00-00).
"END"
77-00-00
Page
Jan 28/81
CHAPTER
OIL
BEECHCRAFT
BONANZA SERIES
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
CHAPTER 79
L1ST OF PAGE EFFECTIVIN
CHAPTER
SECTION
DATE
PAGE
SUBJECT
,Oct 7183
79-EFFECTIV~P(/CONTENTS
1...............
77-00-00
CHAPTER 79
Oct 7/83
,.....,..,..,.,Oct 7/83
2.
OIL
TABLE OF CONTENTS
CHAPTER
SECTION
SUBJECT
SUBJECT
79-00-00
GENERAL
Description
PAGE
and
....,...1
Operation
........I
System
High Oil Temperature
..............1
Oil Cooler Removal
..~...........1
Oil Cooler Installation
....,,..,,....1
Oil
Break-in
Engine
.....,..,.....1
..............1
Oil
Recommended Oil Grades for
...,.....2
Engines
"END"
74EFFECTIVTTY/CONTENTS
Pagl
Oct 7183
BEECHCRAFT
BONANfA SERIES
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
GENERAL
The
has
engine oil system is a full-pressure, wet sump type and

a 12-quart capacity. The oil system consists of an oil
HIGH O1L TEMPERATURE

Oil temperature is controlled by a spring loaded\lematherm
oil cooler control valve. Refer to the Engine Overhaul
Manual
for Vernatherm
thermostat tjypass control, oil

oil
indicator,
temperature
pressure indicator, oil pressure
specifications. This valve
relief valve, oil drain in the
not become contaminated with dirt or other
radiator and automatic
engine sump and an oil pump

engine. The oil system
operating temperatures are controlled by the automatic
thermostat bypass control. The bypass control will limit oil
flow through the cooler when operating temperatures are
which is
an
integral part
of the
below normal and will
should it become
permit the
clogged.
oil to
bypass
the cooler,
will
cooler
control
valve
foreign particles.
operating properly
remove the valve and clean it in solvent (16, Chart 1, 91-0000). Also inspect the valve seat for damage. No repairs can
be made to this valve and readjustments are not
recommended since special testing equipment is required.
The travel of the valve can be checked by immersing the
valve assembly in heated water. The minimum amount of
If indications
that the valve is not
are
travel should be 0.090 inch
GENERAL
oil
operate property if the oil has
from
120"F
to
as
1700F. Replace
the temperature is raised
defective valves.
OIL SYSTEM
OIL COOLER REMOVAL
Servicing the engine oil system primarily involves

maintaining the oil at the proper level and changing the oil
and filter at the recommended intervals. Under normal
operating conditions, the recommended number of

operating hours between oil changes is 100 hours. When
operating under adverse weather conditions, the oil should
be changed more frequently. The engines should be
warmed up to operating temperature to assure complete
draining of the oil. The engine oil drain plug is secured with
lock wire. To remove and install the engine oil filter, refer to
a.
Access
to the
oil cooler may be
gained through
the left cowl door.
Disconnect the oil temperature wire and the oil
b.
pressure line.
Remove the nine bolts and washers
c.
baffling to the oil cooler.
d.
at the
Remove the five
attaching
nuts and
top of the oil cooler, and three
secunng
the
washers, (two
at the oil cooler
inlet).
Remove the oil cooler.
OIL FILTER REMOVAL and OIL FILTER INSTALLAT(ON in
Chapter
12-10-00. When
the oil and filter,
changing
always
check for metal contamination in the used oil.
OIL COOLER INSTALLATION
CAUTION
If metal
of the
system is
detected and the cause is corrected, the oil
cooler should be replaced. In addition, flush out
the system through the interconnected oil
contamination
system plumbing
and
replace
or
oil
a.
install
b.
Install the
c.
Install the oil temperature wire and the oil
a new
pressure line.
d.
Start the
gasket
attaching
engine
at the oil cooler inlet.

nuts and washers.
and check for
engine.
BREAK-IN ENGINE OIL

The
new
airplane
is delivered with Rustband oil
6529, Type II) in the engine. This is
NOTE
oil and should be removed at 20 hours
Metal contamination that warrants oil cooler

would
also
and proper
clean any other
accessones that will remain with the
replacement
investigation.
leakage
operation and temperatures.
warrant
engine
later than 25 hours of
(MIL-Cpreventive
of operation, but no
corrosion
operation. If the Rustband oil is
not
removed at the proper time, varnish may form in the engine.

Oil conforming to MIL-L-6082 may be added to the Rustband
79-00-00
Pagel
A6
Oct7/83
BEECHCRAFT
BONANZA SERIES
MAIMENANCE MANUAL
as necessary. After removing the Rustband oil, refill with

Mll-L-6082 mineral oil which should be used until oil
oil
has stabilized. After oil
consumption has
dispersant oil, complying with
Continental Motors Specification Ml-lS-24Band
Mll-L-22851, must be used. For several suitable engine oils,
consumption
stabilized
both
RECOMMENDED OIL GRADES FOR ENGINES
an
break-in
ashless
and
after break-in,
Materials Chart, Item 2, in
Chapter
see
the Consumable
AMBIENT AIR
TEMPERATURE
RECOMMENDED
VISCOSITY
91-00-00.
NOTE
Above
40F
SAEdO
Below
40oF
SAE-30
or
10W30
It is recommended to
use a
75% power
setting
penod. Avoid over cooling

caused by long power-off andlor rapid descents.
dunng
the break-in
Al temperatures
15W50
"END"
79-08-00
Page2
Oct 7/83
A6
CHAPTER
STARTING
BEECHCRAFT
BONANZA SER1ES
MAINfENANCE MANUAL
CHAPTER 80
CHAPTER
SECTION
DATE
PAGE
SUBJECT
May 9/80
80-EFFECTIVIN/CONTENTS
80-10-00
9/80
CHAPTER 80
STARTING
TABLE OF CONTENTS
CHAPTER
SECTION
SUBJECT
SUBJECT
PAGE
80-10-00
CRANKING......~

Troubleshooting Starter System
.......f
.......1
.......1
.......1
Starter Removal
........1
Starter Installation
........1
Starter Overhaul
........1
Starter Lubrication
.,......2
Starter Brushes
LEND"
Page 1
May glSO
BEECHCRAFT
BONANZA SERIES
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
CPANKING _DESCRIPTIPN
AND OPERATION
drive gear. The starter is located
on
the
nght ah side of the
engine.
When the
The Bonanza Senes
airplanes
are
each
equipped
with
current is
24-volt starter which engages with the
ignition switch is placed in the START position,

supplied by the battery bus to energize the starter
relay, providing high
current
to!he starter through the relay,
TROUBLESHOOLlNG STARTER SYSTEM

TROUBLE
1.
Starter
PROBABLE CAUSE
inoperative.
Circuit breaker
b.
Starter switch
REMARKS
tnpped.
inoperative.
a.
Reset circuit breaker.
b.
Check
cockpit lights; if not operative,

battery solenoid.
check switches and

c.
Defective starter relay,
c.
Check continuity of starter system.
d.
Low
d.
Test
battery,
if low,
battery;
replace
or
start with
external power.
e.
Open circuit,
f.
Defective
starting
motor,
e.
Check
f.
Check brushes, spnngs, condition, and
continuity
commutator.
CRANKING
f.
Start the
mounting flange
engine
of circuit.
Replace
if necessary.
to check for oil seepage at the
and check for proper
operation.
STARTER REMOVAL
a.
ngM
Access to the starter may be
gained through
the
STARTER OVERHAUL
hand cowl door.

b.
c.
Disconnect the electrical wiring from the starter.

Remove the two "palnuts", hex nuts and
washers from the mounting studs, and
remove
a.
c.
150-180
d.
e.
~lnstall
procedures.
the starter.
STARTER INSTALLA T7ON
b.
Refer to applicable Vendor Publications for complete tests

and maintenance
STARTER LUBRICAT1ON
O-nng on the flange of the starter.

the starter on the mounting pad.
Install the attaching nuts and torque the nuts to
inch-pounds.
Secure the attaching nuts with "palnuts".
Connect the electrical winng to the starter.
a new
Position
No lubrication is required on the starting motor except at the

time of overhaul. Soak new bearings in SAE 20 oil (2, Chart
1, 91-00-00) before installation. Saturate the felt oiling pad in
the commutator end head with SAE 20 oil,Allow excess oil to
drain out before
installing
of
end head
on
motor. Put
light film
1,
shaft before
assembling
the motor.
NOTE
Pnor to
attaching
the starter to the
any rust, corrosion

surface~s.of
Also check all
sure
they
are
or
CAUTION
engine, clean
mounting
dirt from the
motor and ~e engio~

ground strap connections to make
clean and tight.
Do not clean the starter in any degreasing tank

grease dissolving solvents. Avoid excessive
or
lubncation.
80-1040
Pagel
May 9/80
BEECHCRA~T
BONANZA SERIES
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
replaced when they have worn to 1/4 inch or less. Proper

brush spnng tension with new brushes installed is 32-40
STARTER BRUSHES
ounces,
The starter brushes should slide

make full contact
on
freely
in the holder and
the commutator. The brushes should be
the
"END"
80-10-00
Pagea
May 9180
This tension is measured with
the brush
spnng
near
the brush and the
spnng leaves the brush.
scale hooked under
reading taken just as
CHAPTER
TURBINES
BEECHCRATT
BONANZA SERIES
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
CHAPTER 81
TURBINES
TABLE OF CONTENTS
CHAPTER
SECTION
SUBJECT
SUBJECT
GENERAL
PAGE
.81-00-00
........1
Operation
Description
Turbocharger System (EA-1 and after)
Troubleshooting Turbocharger System
.......,1
........5
Manifold Pressure
........5
and
........2
Adjustment
........7
Turbocharger Leak Test Procedure

Freeing Turbocharger Shaft
Turbocharger Removal
Turbocharger Installation
Turbocharger Controller Removal
Turbocharger Controller installation
........8
........8
........8
........8
........8
"END"
81-CONTEHTS
Pag
Jan 28/81
BEECHCRAFT
BONANZA SERIES
MAIHIDIANCE MANUAL
CHAPTER Sl
L/S~ OF PAGE ErrECfIVrrY
CHAPTER
SECTION
SU&IECT
PAGE
DATE
81-EFFECflVTTY
1.
Jan 20/82
81-CONIENTS
Jan 28/81
May
May
May
May
81-00-00
2
3
4
9/80
9/80
9/80
9180
Jan 28/81
Jan 28181
Jan 28181
Jan 20/82
"END"
B1-E~ECTIVIT(
Page 1
A4
Jan 20182
BEECHCRAFT
BONANZA SERIES
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
GENERAL
TURBOCHARGER SYSTEM
(E4-I
and after)
controller, the wastegate actuator and engine oil pressure.

Engine oil is supplied to the inlet port of the actuator which
is
permanently restricted by a capillary tube. The actuator is

hydraulic cylinder with oil pressure acting against spring
tension. The piston inside the cylinder with an actuating rod
attached, is heavily spring loaded in the up, or retracted
position. As the oil pressure increases within the chamber
an expander-type seal on the piston seals the upper oil
chamber from the lower chamber, forcing the piston down,
against spring tension, extending the actuator rod which
moves the attached wastegate butterfly toward the closed
position. A decrease in oil pressure allows spnng tension to
return the piston, retracting the actuating rod, and retuming
the wastegate butterfly to the open position. Oil from the
a
turbocharger is fully automatic, requinng no additional

cockpit, and is designed to increase the
power output and efficiency of the engine by supplying
compressed ait to the engine intake manifold. The power to
drive the turbocharger is drawn from the exhaust gases
passing through the turbine housing and over the turbine
wheel to spin the shaft which is connected to the
compressor. Ambient, filtered. air is then drawn in through
the air inlet duct to the compressor where it is compressed
and delivered to the throttle. As the engine power output
increases, the flow of exhaust gases increases resulting in a
proportionate increase in speed of the rotating assembly
and turbocharger output. The turbochargef system (see
Figure 1) consists of an exhaust driven turbine and
centrifugal compressor mounted on a common shaft. The
center section of the unit contains the bearings and
The
controls in the
outlet oil
port of the
actuator is not restricted at the actuator
but is pressure controlled

controller which contains
by
the vanable absolute pressure

aneroid bellows sensitive to
an
pressure changes in the induction manifold. As the pressure

it senses decreases, it expands, extending a metenng pin
which reduces the flow of oil
through
the
body of
the unit
lubrication passages and supports the turbine and

compressor housing. Lubrication to the center section is
and increases the pressure across the actuator diaphragm

forcing the piston down and moving the wastegate toward
supplied by regulated engine oil pressure at the oil cooler

providing a constant oil flow over the beanngs. The oil then
drains by gravity into the sump tank located at the lowest
point in the system and is returned by scavenge pump to
the engine sump. Exhaust headers, crossover pipe, turbine
inlet plenum, wastegate, exhaust by-pass duct, and tail pipe
the closed
make up the exhaust system.
Automatic control of the system is supplied by three

principal components; the variable absolute pressure
equipped
position. The lower chamber of the controller

an adjustable cam is linked to the throttle
with
designed so that the controller setting is varied

proportionally to the amount of power the pilot selects with
the throttle by moving the metering pin seat. The
compressor output is automatically controlled at a constant
pressure by the variable absolute pressure controller
providing the engine fuel pump and injector nonles with the
required flow and pressure at altitudes they are referenced
to. The fuel flow gage diaphragm is also referenced to this
pressure to prevent an erroneous reading.
valve and is
81-00-00
Page 1
May 9~80
BEECHCRAFT
BONANZA SERIES
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
CYL
INDUCTION
"r
ENGINE
OIL
COOLER
THROrrLE
CONNECTED
VARIABLE
CONTROLLER
IKIECTOR NO~LE SHROUDS

CYL
TO FUEL PRESSURE
VENT PORT
I:
INTAKE
III
11
FUEL
PUMP
MGINEINTAKE
ALTERNArEAIR
SOURCE
i \(MROT~LE COMROL
AMBIENT
AIRuRI
CHECK
VALVE
ENGINE;
DRIVEN
SCAVENGE
PUMP
INTAKE
Al~ FiLTER
ASS
II
II
I f~lrr F~ n~x
1~
it
~h
I
L~IM
U~"Y
ii
ENGINE EXHAUST
111
1 I leeuows
II bl III
II
II
II
RENRNfO
CRANKCASE
iii
TANK~ i if ~LWASrrGP;jE
VENT
ONE WAY
CHECK VALVE
EXHAUST
TAILPIPE
i:
II ACTUATOR
V~L OVERBOOST
VALVE
VENT
OVERBOARD
CONTROL SYSTEM
SUMPTANK
A76603-~
Schematic
1
Figure
TROU8LESHOOTiNG TURBOCHARGER SYSTEM

INDICA TION
i.
PROBABLE CAUSE
Turbocharger inoperative.
a.
Turbocharger
b.
Controller malfunctioning.
c.
Wastegate linkage
REMARKS
jammed.
a.
Replace.
b.
Replace.
not
c.
Adjust
in actuator inlet
d.
BacMlush with PD680 solvent
rotor
or
replace.
functioning.
d.
Metenng jet
blocked.
2.
Engine
altitude.
81-00-00
Page
May 9/80
has
low
critical
i, 91-00-00), 50 psi.
inlet blocked.
e.
Turbocharger
f.
Controller pressure
line blocked.
a.
Controller out of calibration.
sensing
e.
Remove obstruction.
f.
Remove obstruction.
a.
Replace.
(16, Chart
BEECHCRAFT
BONANtA SERIES
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
TROUBLESHOOT1NG TURBOCHARGER SYSTEM
INDICA TION
2.
Engine
altitude.
PROBABLE CAUSE
has
low
critical
REMARKS
b.
Controller malfunctioning.
c.
Wastegate
d.
Leak in exhaust system.
b.
Replace.
c.
Adjust.
d.
Eliminate any leaks.
e.
BacMlush with PD680 solvent, 50
f.
Remove obstruction.
g.
a.
Replace.
b.
Backffush with PD680 solvent. 50
c.
Remove obstruction.
d.
(Continued)
e.
out of
Metenng jet
ng.
in actuator inlet
psi.
blocked.
3.
Manifold pressure surges at

altitude.
f.
Controller pressure
line blocked.
g.
Compressor discharge
loose oi leaking.
Controller
b.
sensing
duct
malfunctioning.
Metering jet
in actuator inlet
psi.
blocked.
4.
5.
Engine
Oil
smokes at idle.
leaking
from actuator
c.
Controller pressure
line blocked.
d.
loose or leaking.
e.
Leak in exhaust system.
e.
a.
Turbocharger jammed.
a.
Replace.
b.
Seal
b.
Replace.
c.
Turbocharger beanng
leaking.
seals
c.
Replace.
a.
Actuator
ruptured.
a.
Replace.
a.
Controller out of calibration.
a.
Replace.
b.
Controller
b.
Replace.
c.
Controller pressure sensing

line broken.
c.
Replace.
d.
Wastegate linkage
functioning.
d.
Adjust
ruptured in
piston
sensing
duct
controller.
seal
drain.
6.
High
manifold
pressure at
take-off.
malfunctioning.
not
or
replace.
81-0090
Page
May
9/80
BEECHCFIAFT
BONANZA SERIES
MAINfENANCE MANUAL
TROUBLESHOOTING TURBOCHARGER SYSTEFA
INDICA TION
6.
PROBABLE CAUSE
High manifold pressure

(Continued)
at
e.
Controller pressure
line blocked.
pressure at
a.
b.
take-off.
7.
Low manifold
REMARKS
sensing
e.
Remove obstruction.
Controller out of calibration,
a.
Replace.
Controller
b.
Replace.
c.
Remove obstruction.
duct
d.
in actuator inlet
e.
BacMlush with PD680 solvent, 50
f.
take-off.
malfunctioning,
Controller pressure
sensing
line blocked.
d.
loose or leaking.
e.
Metenng jet
psi.
blocked.
8.
High fuel
pressure at altitude.
f.
Leak in exhaust
a.
Leak in pressure reference

line at fuel pressure line.
Pressure
line
b.
Remove obstruction.
Leak in pressure reference
a.
b.
system.
reference
blocked.
9.
Low fuel pressure at altitude.
a.
line at fuel pump.
b.
Pressure
reference
line
b.
Remove obstruction.
pumps not
on or
c.
Repair
Replace.
b.
Adjust.
c.
blocked.
10.
11.
Turbocharger overspeeding.
Fcessive
noise
or
vibration.
c.
Auxiliary fuel
inoperative.
a.
Controller
b.
Wastegate
c.
loose or leaking.
a.
Improper bean~ng
malfunctioning.
out of
ng.
duct
lubncation.
a.
or
replace.
Clean
or replace oil line; clean oil strainer,

supply oil pressure. If trouble still
persists, overhaul turbocharger.
and
b.
Leaking engine
intake
or
b.
exhaust manifold.
12.
Engine
power.
81 40-00
Page 4
May 9/80
will not deliver rated
Clogged
manifold system.
a.
Tighten
gaskets
Clear all
connections or
as
necessary.
ducting.
replace manifold
BEECHCFIAFT
BONANZA SERIES
MAIMENANCE MANUAL
TROUBLESNOOTING TURBOCHARGER SYSTEM
INDICA TION
12.
PROBABLE CAUSE
Engine
will not deliver rated
power.
(Continued)
b.
Foreign
material
compressor
REMARKS
lodged
in
turbine
b.
Disassemble and clean.
c.
Throughly clean
d.
Tighten
gaskets
or
impeller.
Excessive dirt build-up in
c.
compressor. Service air

cleaner and check for leakage.
compressor.
d.
Leak
in
engine intake
or
exhaust manifold,
Rotating assembly beanng
e.
connections
as
Overhaul
e.
or
replace manifold
necessary.
turbocharger.
seiture.
GENERAL
d.
maximum
After
engine warm-up,
position
of 2600
nch mixture. Check and
pressure
adjustment
pressure controller.
The wastegate is controlled by engine oil pressure, which

is regulated by the vanable absolute pressure controller.
For this reason manifold pressure is quite sensitive to ail
and temperature as~well as ambient.
temperatures. It has been determined that the manifold
pressure will vary: (1) 0.2 in. Hg. per 10"F change in oil
temperature, (2) 0.3 in. Hg per 10 psig in oil pressure and
(3) 0.05 in. Hg per 10"F change in ambient temperature.
advance the throttle to its
2700
propeller rpm and full

(if required) adjust the manifold
screw
on
the absolute variable
Loosen the
jam nut and rotate the

counterclockwise to increase, or
clockwise to decrease manifold pressure, then retighten
the jam nut.
adjustment
screw
pressure
The best time to make
airplane
adjustments
is
shortly after
the
has been flown. Under the conditions described in
step "c", the manifold pressure should be 36 in. of Hg.
NOTE
If the manifold pressure is adjusted with
oil~emperature at(la00F1
71
to
82aC (160
to
38~C
1800F)
engine
rather than the
recommended,
decrease in manifold pressure will occur when

the ail temperature increases to the normal
operating
Locate the absolute variable pressure controller
mounted on the top of the throttle body in the left side of
the engine accessory compamnent.
a.
b.
Check the controller-to-throttle
adjustment
as
linkage for
proper
follows:
range. Under these conditions, a

decrease in manifold pressure of 1 to 2 in. of
Hg below the rated 36 in, of Hg will occur

along with a corresponding decrease in fuel
flow,
if,
pressure
on
the other hand,
is
temperature at
1.
the
manifold
adjusted with engine oil

(2300F) 110"C, a corresponding
Position the controller lever to allow full

travel. Ensure that the throttle push-pull cable will allow full
increase in manifold pressure above 36.0 in.

Hg will occur on the next flight if the oil
travel.
temperature is then
2.
shown in
With the controller lever in the
Figure
2 and the throttle
plate
arm
stop pin, adjust the connecting linkage stop
position allowing
arm
new
position
against the
nuts to
0.01 to 0.02 inch gap between the
cam
and the controller maximum
stop (see Figure 2). On a

engine this adjustment should already be made by
Continental Motors.
Start and
2700 rpm.
run
the
engine
to
much
lower.
enn~chment in full rich fuel flow
above the value obtained at 36.0 in. Hg will

also occur since the full rich schedule is a
function of both deck pressure and RPM.
These characteristics must be taken into
consideration when
adjustments
bnng the engine oil

temperature up to (1601 to 180"F) 71" to 82~C. Adjust the
oil pressure to 40 to 50 psig (45 psig preferred) at 2600 to
c.
corresponding
are
manifold
made.
It is
pressure
that
important
manifold pressure and fuel flow be within the

prescribed limitations simultaneously dunng a
maximum power run-up. Incorrect manifold
pressure settings will cause erroneous fuel flow
readings.
81-00-00
Page
Jan 28/81
BEECHCFIAFT
BONANZA SERIES
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
VARIABLE ABSOLUTE
PRESSURE CONTROLLER
MANIFOLD PRESSURE
ADJUSTMENT SCREW
CONTROLLER LEVER
(IN MAX. THROTTLE POSITION)
(0.5" HS~TURN)
.01
GAP
/O
O
JAM NUT
CAM ARM
CONNECTING LINKAGE
STOP NUTS
STOP PIN
DO NOT CHANGE THIS

ADJUSTMENT SETTING
\V
"IDLE MIXTURE ADJUSTMENT

SCREW
THROTTLE 80DY
IDLE SPEED ADJUSTMENT
THROTTLE PLATE
ARM
VIEW LOOKING AFT
Throttle
Body
and Variable Absolute Pressure Controller
Figure
81-00-00
Page
Jan 28/81
A36TC-282-12
BEECHCRAFf
BONANZA SERIES
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
CAUTION
7.
The wastegate flanges. (With the exhaust

position.)
valve in the open

Do not exceed 36 In.
longer
Hg
manifold pressure
dunng ground
than 10 seconds
run
checks.
NOTE
The
wastegate flanges must be aligned

correctly and care taken on assembly to
prevent damage to the thin metal gaskets.
Fly the airplane 10 15 minutes or more at high

power settings, then land and check the manifold pressure
at maximum power setting before shutting off the engine.
Readjust to 36.0 in. Hg as required.
e.
8.
9.
TURBOCHARGER LE4K TEST PROCEDURE
the turbo outlet.

10.
The
turbocharger system may
The turbo inlet gasket and flange bolts.

The clamp holding the exhaust tail.pipe to
be checked for leaks in the
The
slip joint
between the exhaust elbow
and the turbo inlet.
induction, exhaust and air reference sections of the system

as
outlined in the
following procedure.
NOTE
Plug the exhaust stack
with
large rubber
The
stopper.
b.
Remove the tube between the induction filter and
the compressor inlet.
Plug
the inlet with
must be
slip joint
will not be
leak
good
tight joint.
a
fit. However, it
large tubber
stopper.
c.
Plug the manifold drain hose extending out the
right side of the cowl opening.
d.
Remove one spark plug from any cylinder and
rotate the propeller until the intake valve for the cylinder is
in the open position. Proceed with the test as described
below. When the intake valve test is complete, rotate the
propeller until the exhaust valve for the cylinder is in the
open position and again test the system as described
11.
Rigging of
the
wastegate
in the
completely
closed position.
NOTE
Rigging of the wastegate is checked by

removing the wastegate assembly from the
exhaust bypass, plugging the oil outlet line and
applying an air pressure of 40 to 50 psi to the
oil inlet line of the wastegate actuator. Observe
the valve movement. Adjust the linkage
below.
Install a regulator valve to a shop air supply line.

e.
Apply approximately 5 psi air pressure to the turbocharger
system through the spark plug port of the cylinder
described in step "d".
between the actuator and the valve to obtain
following areas of the system should

tested for leaks by applying a soap solution.
i.
The
1.
The hose
clamps
on
he
tolerance of
.005 to .025 inch between the
wastegate butterfly and bore.
the induction manifold
of the engine.
2.
The
clamp
at the compressor
discharge
After
completing
the
preceding steps,
remove
all
plugs
and
reassemble the induction system.
outlet.
3.
The
clamps
on
the compressor
discharge
elbow at the throttle inlet.

4.
The clamps at the throttle outlet to the riser
FREEING -TURBOCHARGER SHAFT
manifold.
All fittings in the compressor discharge
lines to the fuel nozzles and fuel
reference
pressure
5.
pressure gage.
6. The exhaust ilanges at the
ports. (With the
cylinder
exhaust valve in the open
exhaust
position.)
deposits may form in the area of the turbocharger

piston ring seal as a result of water vapor
accumulation ii the airplane is subjected to short intervals of
engine operation. This condition occurs only when the unit
is new and combustion deposits have not formed a
Rust
turbine shaft
81-00-00
Page 7
Jan 28/81
BEECHCRAFT
BONANtA SERIES
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
protective barnei on the seal surfaces. Although these

deposits do restnct, and even stops shaft rotation, they are
not harmful to subsequent turbocharger operation once they
are removed sufficiently to give free shaft movement,
access
the
the
When this condition is noted, remove the exhaust discharge

stack and apply WD-40 penetrating oil or Mouse Milk (40,
Chart 1, 91-00-00), iiberallyto the

around the turbine shaft seal. After
to tum the shaft, A
confirm
can
behind the wheel
few minutes, attempt,

the shaft end with a soft
light tap on
freeing the
mallet will often assist in
free, the engine
area
a
be started and
shaft, Once the shaft is
power check made to

the ground or in flight,
turbocharger output either on
opening
b.
on
Install the bolts which
mounting bradtet.
install the gaskets
c.
turbocharger.
secure
airplane.
turbocharger
the
and the turbo inlet
assembly
to
on
d.
Install the inlet to the heater exhaust system.

covers from the oil lines and oil
ports. Install the oil lines.
f.
Install the tail pipe. Tighten the V-band coupling to
e.
40
Remove the dust
inch-pounds, Tap
tension, then torque
the
penphe~y
to 40
Install the turbocharger air inlet duct and

g.
the flex duct damps.
h.
i.
TURBOCHARGER REMOVAL
j.
tighten
Install the heat shield over the turbocharger.

Connect the red and yellow TIT wires.
Install the induction tube which contains the relief

tighten the damps.
valve. Install and
Open
the
engine cowl
on
airplane.
b.
Remove the two louvered
left side of the
access
openings on the
d.
Remove the induction tube with the relief valve,
Remove the
heat shield
from
over
the
turbocharger.
Loosen the flex ducts on the
g.
duct, and remove the air inlet duct,
h.
Remove the tail
turbocharger air inlet
i.
air inlet duct.
access openings on the

engine compartment.
Close the cowling on the engine compartment.
TURBOCHARGER CONTROLLER REMOVAL

a
Remove the
b.
Remove the
c.
Reinove the manifold pressure reference line.
d.
Remove the oil lines. Install dust
e.
Remove
linkage
linkage
to the throttle.
to the
ihe safety
wire
butterfly.
on
covers.
the two
larger
mounting bolts.
pipe by removing
the
clamp
and
Dolt.
dust
ram
air inlet duct.
by removing the clamps and lifting the tube away from the
engine.
Disconnect the red and yellow TIT wires.
e,
f.
Install the heater
Install the two louvered
m.
Remove the heater
ram
k.
I.
left side of the
engine compartment
c.
Remove the oil lines from the
f.
Remove the three mounting bolts.
g.
Remove the turbocharger controller.
turbocharger. Install
covers.
Remove the inlet to heater exhaust system.

Remove the turbo inlet assembly above the
i.
k.
TURBOCHARGER CONTROLLER INSTAUATION
turbocharger.
i.
the
Remove the bolts that
mounting
the
turbocharger
to
opening.
Install the
Place the
turbocharger
controller in its
mounting
b,
Install the mounting bolts.

wire the two appropriate bolts.
d.
Remove the dust covers from the oil lines and
install the oil lines.
c.
TURBOCHARGER INSTALLATION
a.
location.
Remove the turbocharger through the forward
m.
access
secure
bracket.
turgocharger
through
e.
the forward
Safety
install the manifold pressure reference line.

linkage to the throttle butterfly.
f.
Install the
g.
install the
linkage
to the throttle.
"END"
814090
Page8
Jan 20/82
of the band to distnbute
inch-pounds.
A4
CHAPTER
CHARTS
Qeechcr~ft
BONANZA SERIES
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
CHAPTER 91
CHARTS
TABLE OF CONTENTS
SUBJECT
PAGE
91-00-00
Chart 1 Consumable Materials
Charts 2, 4 and 5
(Effecthrity: All)
(Effectlvity: All)
installation of Flared
Fittlngs (Effectivlty: All)
Chart 3 Thread Lubricants
(Effectivity: All)
1
10
10
10
91-Contents
Page 1
A18
Aug 18/95
aeechcraft
BONANZA SERIES
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
CHAPTER 91
CHARTS

91-Effectivity
91-Contents
91-00-00
PAGE
1
Aug 18/95
Aug 18~95
Aug
Aug
Aug
Aug
Aug
Aug
Aug
Aug
Aug
Aug
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
A18
DATE
18/95
18/95
18/95
18/95
18/95
18/95
18/95
18/95
18/95
18/95
91-Effectivity
Page 1
Aug 18/95
Cj;~eechcraft
BONANZA SERIES
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
NOTE
the basic number of each Military Specification is included in the Consumable Materials
Chart. No attempt has been made to update the basic number with the letter suffix that
designates the current issues of the various specifications,
Only
Suppliers listed as meeting Federal and Military Specifications are provided as reference only
and are not specifically recommended by Beech Aircraft Corporation. Any product conforming
to the specification may be used.
CHART1
MATERIAL
PRODUCT
SPECIFICATION
1 OOLL
Fuel, Engine
1.
(biue),
or
(Effectivity: All)
SUPPLIER
100
(sreen)
MlL-L-6082
Engine Oils
(BREAK-IN)
2.
(First 20
to 30 hours of
Atlantic Richfield Co.,

Los Angeles, California 90071
Castrolaero 113
Castrol Oil Canada Ltd.,

P.O. Box 3,
New Toronto Postal Station,
Toronto, Ontario
(Grade 1065)
a new or
remanufactured
Formula LB-1123
engine)
CAUTION
Do not mix oils of different brands
or
oils of different
Any approved aircraft

engine oil graded at
1100 (SAE 50) or 1065
types produced by the
same
manufacturer.
Grade 1100
Champlin
Mobil Aero Red Band
Mobii Oil Corporation,

Shoreham Building,
Washington, D.C. 20005
Aeroshell Oil 100
Shell Oil Company,

50 West 50th St.,
New York, New York 10020
Phillips
Phillips Petroleum Co.,

Bartlesviile, Oklahoma 74003
Oil
Refining Co.,
P.O. Box 552,
Enid, Oklahoma 73701
(SAE 30)
(AFTER
BREAK-IN)
TCM MHS-24B
MlL-L-22851
66 Aviation
Oil, Type A;
XIC Aviation
Multiviscosity
Oil
SAE 20W50:
XIC Aviation
MultiviscosS Oil
SAE 25W60
91-00-00
A18
Page 1
Aug 18/95
aeechcraft
BONANZA SERIES
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
CHART
MATERlAL
SPEC1FICATION
TCM MHS-24B
(Effectivity: AII) (Confinued)

SUPPLIER
PRODUCT
Aeroshell OilW
Aeroshell Oil W SAE
15W50
Shell Oil Company,

50 West 50th St.,
Conoco Aero S
Continental Oil Company,

Ponca City, Oklahoma
Texaco Aircraft
Engine Oil-Premium
AD
Texaco, Inc.,
Mobil Aero Oil
Corporation,
Building,
135 E. 42nd Street,

Mobil Oil
Shoreham
Castrolaero AD Oil
Castro Oil Canada Ltd.,

P.O. Box 3,
New Toronto Postal Station,
Toronto, Ontario
Penntoil Aircraft
Engine Oil
Pennzoil Company,
Drake Building,
Oil City, PA 16301
Sinclair Avoii
Sinclair Refining Co.,

500 Fiffh Ave.,
Esso Aviation Oil

Enco Aviation Oil
Exxon
BP Aero Oil
BP Oil Corporation,
BP (North American) Ltd.,
620 Fifth Avenue,
Quaker State AD
Aviation Engine Oil
Quaker State Oil
Company, U.S.A.
Box 2180,
Houston, Texas 77001
Refining Corporation,
City, PA 16301
Oil
Delta Petroleum Co., Inc.,

P.O. Box 10397,
Jefferson, Louisiana 70181
Delta-Avoil Oil
Engine
Union Oil Company

of California
Aviation AD
Gulf Oil Corp.,

439 7th Ave.,
P.O. Box 1166,
Pittsburg, PA 15230
Union Aircraft
Oil HD
Gulfpride
3.
Corrosion Preventive
MIL-C-6529
Type
II
Anti-Corrode No.205
CitiesServiceOilCo.,
60 Wall Tower,
New York, New York
Rust Foil No. 652-2
Franklin Oii Corp.,

Bedford, Ohio 44146
Compound (Engine Oil)
91-OQ00
Page 2
Aug 18/95
A18
4;3eechcr~ft
BONANZA SERIES
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
CHART1
CONSUMABLE MATERIALS (Effectivity:
MATERIAL
SPECIFICATION
AIl) (Confinued)
PRODUCT
SUPPLIER
Kendex No. 7038
Kendall Refining Co.,

1177 Kendall Ave.,
Nude Oil 105
Daubert Chemical Co.,

4700 S. Central Ave.,
Chicago, Illinois 60638
Protect VA
Penreco
106 S. Main St.
Butler, PA 16001
Ferro-Gard 1009-G
Ranco Laboratories Inc.,

3617 Brownsville Road,
Bradford, Pennsylvania 16701

4.
Preservative Oii
MlL-L-46002, Grade 1
Pittsburgh, Pennsylvania
5.
Corrosion Preventive
Compound, Solvent
MIL-C-16173, Grade II
Braycote
137
Bray Oil Co.,

1925 Marianna St.,
Cutback,
Cold-Application
Petrotech 1-4
Penreco
P.O. Box 671,
Butler, PA 16001
Valvaline
TECP/L 890
Ashland Oil Co.,

1409 Winchester Ave.
Ashland,
Turco 5351
6.
Grease, Automotive
MIL-G-10924
Kentucky41101
Turco Products, Inc.,

Division of Purer Corp., Inc.,
26400 South Main,
Wilmington, California 90746
Shell A and A Grease Shell Oil Co.,

One Shell Plaza
P.O. Box 2463
Houston, TX 77001
Cato Code 5210
Grease Go., Inc.,

Cato Oil
P.O. Box 26868,
Oklahoma
73126
7.
Refrigerant,
Air
Conditioner
(Charging)
City, Oklahoma
SA8263242
Southwest Petro Chem Inc.,

1400 S. Harrison,
Olathe, Kansas 66061
Sunoco C-352-EP
Sun Oil Company,

P.O. Box 426,
Marcus Hook, Pennsylvania
19061
Racon 12
Racon Inc.,
6040 S. Ridge Road,
91-00-00
A18
Page 3
Aug 18/95
aeechcraft
BONANZA SERIES
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
CHART~
MATERIAL
SPECIFICATION
AIl) (Confinued)
PRODUCT
SUPPLIER
Genetron 12
8.
500
Viscosity Oil, (Air
Allied Chemicals
P.O. Box 4000R,
Morristown, New
DuPont E I De Nemours
and Company, Inc.,
Organic Chemicals Dept.,
1007 Market Street,
Wilmington, Delaware 19898
Suniso 5GS
Virginia Chemicals inc.,

3340 W. Norfolk Road
Portsmouth, VA 27303
Compressor)
Texaco WF100
Hydraulic
Fluid
Jersey 07960
Freon 12
Conditioner
9.
Corp.,
MlL-H-5606
Texaco Inc.,
135 East 42nd Street,
756[3
Brayco
Bray Oil Co.,

3344 Medford Street,
FED 3565
Standard Oil of California,

225 Bush Street,
San Francisco, California
94104
Breathing
MIL-0-27210
Lubricating Grease
(Aircraft and
MlL-G-23827
10. Aviators
Oxygen
11.
Supermil Grease
No.
A72832
instruments, Low
American Oil Co.,

910 S. Michigan Ave.,
Chicago, Illinois 60605
High Temperature)
Royco
12.
Lubricating Grease
13.
Oxygen System Leak

Testing Compound
14. Rubber Hose
SolventorWhiteSpirits
Royal Lubricants Co.,

River Road, P.O. Box 95,
Hanover, New Jersey 07936
Aeroshell Grease 7
Shell Oil Company,

One Shell Plaza
P.O. Box 2463
Houston, TX 77001
Andok-B
Exxon Co. U.S.A.,

P.O. Box 2180,
Houston, Texas 77001
MIL-L-25567
MIl-H-5593
Lubripiate
15. Grease
16
27A
PD680orBritish
245
Specification
777
Fiske Brothers Refining Co.,

129 Lockwood,
Newark, New Jersey 07105
Stoddard Solvents
(Mineral Spirits)
91-00-00
Page 4
Aug 18/95
A18
BONANZA SERIES
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
CHART 1
SPECIFICATION
MATERIAL
SUPPLIER
PRODUCT
Presstite 576
17. Sealer
All) (Confinued)
Presstite-Keystone
Engineering Co.,
3900 Choteau Ave.,
St. Louis, Missouri 63110
EC 1814
18. Sealer
Minnesota
Mining
Manufacturing Co.,
3M Center
St. Paul, Minnesota 55101
19. Toluol
TT-T-548
(Toluene)
20. Zinc Chromate Primer
Mll-P-8585
21. Sealer
PR-1440
Courtaulds Aerospace Inc.,

5454 San Fernando Rd.,
Glendale, CA 91209
22. Sealer
PR1221B1/2
PRC Products Research

Chemical Corp.,
Burbank, California
CRC-2-26
23. Solvent
Corrosion Reaction
Consultants Inc.,
Philadelphia, Pennsylvania
MIL-R-7575
24. Resin
25. Wash Primer
Laminac 4116
American Cyanamid Co.,

S. Cherry St.,
Wallingford, CT 06492
D(2016G
Ameron Industrial
Coatings Division,
P.O. Box 2153

26.
TT-N-95
Naphtha
27. Paint
Stripper
Turco 4260
Turco Products Inc.,

26400 S. Main
No. 27
Minnesota
28. Deleted
29.
Tape
Tape
Mining
Manufacturing Co.,
3M Center
30.
Tape, Anti-Seize,
Tetrafluoroethylene
dispenser (I-inch)
Johnson
Johnson Inc.,
Permacel Division,
U.S. Highway 1,
New Brunswick, New Jersey
MIL-T-27730
with
08901
31.
Methyl ethyl
ketone
32. Black Rubber Cement
TT-M-261
EC678
Mining
Manufacturing Co.,
Minnesota
3M Center,
91-00-00
Ai8
Page 5
Aug 18/95
CS3eechcraft
BONANZA SERIES
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
CHART1
MIL-C-8514
etching primer
34. Wash Primer
(See
SUPPLIER
PRODUCT
SPECIFICATION
MATERIAL
33. Acid
(Effectivity: Al)) (Continued)
Item
25.)
35.
T6070
Thinning Catalyst
Ameron Industrial
Catalyst
Coatings Division,
P.O. Box 2153

U.S. Paint
6165 Base
36. Primer Base
Lacquer
Chemical Co.,
1501 No. Belmont,
37.
AA-92-C-4A
Catalyst
Catalyst
U.S. Paint Lacquer

Chemical Co.,
1501 N. Belmont,
Wichita, Kansas
U.S. Paint Lacquer
Chemical Co.,
38. Urethane Primer
1501 N. Belmont,
Wichita, Kansas
Presstite-Keystone
Engineering Co.,
Presstite 176
39. Sealer
3900 Choteau Ave.,

St Louis, Missouri 63110
40.
Penetrating Oil
41. Anti-seize
Compound
MIL-A-907D
Mouse Milk
Worldwide Aircraft
Filters Corp.,
1685 Abram Ct.,
San Leandro, California 94577
Anti-seizeCompound
Fel-Pro Inc.,
7450 McCormick,
Skokie, Illinois 60076
C5A
42. Anti-seize
Graphite
Compound,
Armite Laboratories,
W-P-236
1845-49 Randolph St.,

Petrolatum
43. Thread Lubricant
Parker
Threadlube
Appliance Co.,
Cleveland, Ohio
44. Sealer
Dow Coming,
S. Saginaw Road,
Silastic 1 40
Midland, Michigan 48641

45.
Sealing Compound
R-134-B Perfect Seal
Ford Motor Co.,
Dearborn, Michigan
46.
Grease, Aircraft General MIL-G-81322
Mobilgrease
Mobil Oil Corp.

Shoreham Building,
28
Purpose Wide
Temperature Range
47.
Lubricating Grease
(Gear)
Mobil
Compound
636
Mobil Oii Corporation,

Shoreham Building,
91-00-00
Page 6
Aug 18/95
A18
aeechcraft
BONANZA SERIES
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
CHART1
CONSUMAELE MATERIALS fEffectivity:
MATERIAL
48.
SPECIFICATION
PRODUCT
Aeroshell Grease No.
Lubricating grease
Onlheel Bearing)
49. Lubricant Moiybdenum

Disulfide Powder
Ail) (Confinued)
MIL-M-7866
Molyikote
SUPPLIER
Shell Oil Company,

One Shell Plaza
P.O. Box 2463
Houston, TX 77001
Wilco Co.,
4425 Bandini Blvd.
Los Angeles, CA 90023
Moly-Paul Products Ltd.,

Noble Road,
London, England
50. Silicone
Compound
MIL-S-8660
DC-4
Dow Coming Corp.,

S. Saginaw Road
Midland, Michigan 48640

Union Carbide
333 Woodward Ave.
P.O. Box 44,
Y-2136
Tonawanda, N.Y. 14150

XS 4005
51.
Lubricating
Oil
(Gear)
General Electric
Silicon Products Dept.
Mechanicville Rd.
Waterford, N.Y. 12188
101-380016 or
MIL-L-2105C Grade
75W
BEECHCRAFT Aero or
Aviation Centers and
International Distributors
and Dealers
Gulf Gearlube HT
SAE 75W-90
Gulf Oil Canada, Limited

Research
Development
Dept.
2489 North Sheridan Way
Sheridan Park, Ontario L5K
1A8
Oriofiat W75/M
Fiat Lubricant S.P.A.

Via Santena, 1
10029 Villasteilone
(Tornio) italy
52. Adhesive
1300L
EC1403
Commercial
or
(Normal
Designation)
63.
Coating
54. Translucent Adhesive
Minnesota Mining
Manufacturing Co.
3M Center
St. Paul Minnesota 55101
Produ~s,
Alodine 1200, 1200S,

1201
Amchem
Inc.,
Spring Garden St.,
Ambler, PA 19002
R7V-108
General Electric Co.,

Silicone Products Dept.,
Waterford, NY 12188
91-00-00
A18
Page 7
Aug 18/95
aeechcraft
BONANZA SERIES
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
CHART~
MATERIAL
55.
AII) (Confinued)
No. 474
Tape
SUPPLIER
PRODUCT
SPECIFICATION
Minnesota
Mining
Manufacturing Co.,
3M Center, St. Paul, MN.
55101
Chemical Co.,
St. Louis, MO.
MIL-P-23377
56. Primer,
Epoxy-Polyamide
Matterhorn White No.
61 60
57. Urethane Paint
Obtain
VV-K-211
58. Kerosene
Plexiglass Polish
and
P-P-560
P/N 403D
Cleaner
61. Paste Wax
Parko Anti-Static
Park Chemical Co.,

8094
Meguiars MGH-10
Mirror Bright Polish

Co. Inc.,
P.O. Box 17177
In/ine, GA 92714
Johnsons J-Wax
S.C. Johnson
Son, Inc.,
1521 Howe St.,
Racine, WI 53403
Simonize
545
Sealing/Locking,
Hydraulic
Conditioning
Refrigerant
65. Oil
(Air Condition)
Military Ave.,
Detroit, MI 48204
Simonize Co.,
P.O. Box 368
Greenville, S.C. 29602
Loctite
Corp.,
705 No. Mountain Rd.,

Newington, CT 06111
PST 592
63. Sealant, Thread
64. Air
Permotex Inc.,
Kansas City, KS 66115
Polish
Paste
62.
Locally
J.T. Baker Chemical Co.,

222 Red School Lane,
Phillipsburg, N. J. 08865
59. Hexane
60.

Chemical Co.
St. Louis, MO
Obtain
R-134a
RL-100S
Loctite Corp.,
Newington, Ct 06111
Ester Oil
Locally
ICI Americas Inc.,

3411 Silverside Road
Wilmington, DE 19850
66. Adhesive/Sealant
Loctite 209
Loctite Corp.
705 N Mountain Rd
Newington, CT 06111-1411
91-00-00
Page 8
Aug 18/95
A18
Qeechcraft
BONANZA SERIES
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
CHART 1
MATERIAL
67
Locquic Primer
SPECIFICATION
AII) (Continued)
PRODUCT
Primer N
SUPPLIER
Loctite Corp.
705 N Mountain Rd
Newington, CT 06111-1411
91-00-00
Page
A18
Aug 18/95
aeechcraft
BONANZA SERIES
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
CHARTS 2, 4 AND 5
INSTALLATION OF FLARED FITTINGS
(Effectivity: All)
Charts 2, 4 and 5 were removed from Chapter 91 and

added to Chapter 20. Chart 2 of 91-00-00 became
Chart 1 of Chapter 20-06-00. Chart 4 of 91-00-00
became Chart 2 of Chapter 20-01-00. Chart S of
91-00-00 became Chart 1 of20-01-00.
(Effectivity: All)
When installing flare fittings, make sure they are properly lubricated in accordance with Chart 3. Tighten the
fittings in accordance with Chart

00. Do not overtighten.
CHART 3
THREAD LUBRICANTS (Effectivity:
Type
of Line
Type
of Thread
1 in
Chapter
20-06-
All)
Type
of
Lubricant, Item, Chart 1
MIL-H-5606
Hydraulic
Loctite 545
Fuel
Alum, Brass, Steel
W-P-236
Oil
Alum, Brass, Steel
W-P-236
Oxygen
Tappered
MlL-T-27730 Size 1
Straight
None
Tappered
Loctite 592
Straight
None
Pitot and Static
Refrigerant Freon
Sunisco 5 GS
or
WF-100
NOTE
Lubricate engine fittings

lubricated.
only with the fluid that will flow through the lines. Air lines
are
not to be
91-00-00
page 10
Aug 18/95
A18

Manual de Mantenimiento de Beechcraft - Bonanza 609

Uploaded by

Document Information

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

Manual de Mantenimiento de Beechcraft - Bonanza 609

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

ATP

COPYRIGHT IS NOT CLAIMED AS TO ANY PART OF AN ORIGINAL WORK

Aircraft Technical Publishers

101 South Hill Drive

6AM-5PM PST M-F

ATP Grid Index to Manufacturers Publications:

Raytheon Aircraft Co.

F33C; A36; A36TC; B36TC

Time Limits/Maintenance Checks

Scheduled Maintenance Checks

Dimensions and Areas

Lifting and Shoring

Leveling and Weighing

Towing and Taxiing

Aircraft Technical Publishers

Parking, Mooring, Storage, and Return

Placards and Markings

List of Effective Pages

Exterior Placards and

List of Effective Pages

List of Effective Pages

Electrostatic Discharge Sensitivity

Control Cables and Pulleys

Tube and Hose Assemblies and Fittings

List of Effective Pages

Heating and Ventilating System

List of Effective Pages

Ground Communication System

Aircraft Technical Publishers

List of Effective Pages

AC Electrical Load Distribution

List of Effective Pages

List of Effective Pages

Aileron and Tab

CE-748,CE-772 and After;CJ149 and After;D-10097,D-10120

and After;E-I111,E-1241 Thru E-21111 Except E-1946 and

E-2104;EA-1 Thru EA-388 Except EA-320

Rudder and Tab

F33A, F33C, A36, A36TC AMD B36TC

Elevator and Tab

Stall Warning/Safe Flight System

Gust Lock and

List of Effective Pages

Ice and Rain Protection

List of Effective Pages

Aircraft Technical Publishers

Main Gear and Doors

Nose Gear and Doors

Extension and Retraction

Wheels and Brakes

Position and Warning

List of Effective Pages

Electric Panels Parts and Instruments

Instrument and Control Panels

Electrical and Electronic Equipment Racks

Aircraft Technical Publishers

List of Effective Pages

List of Effective Pages

List of Effective Pages

Elevator and Rudder

List of Effective Pages

List of Effective Pages

Aircraft Technical Publishers

List of Effective Pages